Ume Ingepac Ef LD Eng

LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
INGEPAC EF-LD
User Manual
UME_INGEPAC_LD_eng Rev. G (10/22)
© All rights reserved. No part of this publication

may be reproduced, by whatever means, without
the prior written permission of Ingeteam
Technology.
Ingeteam Power Technology reserves the right to

make changes without prior notice.
INDEX 
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................... 13

1.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 13
1.2 MODEL ENCODING ................................................................................................................................................ 15
1.3 USER INTERFACE .................................................................................................................................................... 17
1.4 INTERCONNECTIONS .............................................................................................................................................. 17
1.4.1 CPU ...................................................................................................................................................................... 17
1.4.2 Power supply ....................................................................................................................................................... 18
1.4.3 Input/output cards .............................................................................................................................................. 18
1.4.4 Analogue inputs .................................................................................................................................................. 22
1.4.5 Wiring diagrams .................................................................................................................................................. 23
1.4.6 Topology .............................................................................................................................................................. 26
2. HARDWARE...................................................................................................................................... 27
2.1 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES .................................................................................................................................... 27
2.1.1 Half chassis (½ 19”) ............................................................................................................................................. 27
2.1.2 19” chassis ........................................................................................................................................................... 28
2.2 REAR TERMINALS................................................................................................................................................... 28
2.2.1 Configuration options ......................................................................................................................................... 28
2.2.2 Half chassis (½ 19”) ............................................................................................................................................. 28
2.2.3 19” chassis ........................................................................................................................................................... 29
2.2.4 Closed Terminals ................................................................................................................................................. 30
2.2.5 Wire section ........................................................................................................................................................ 30
2.3 FRONT INTERFACE ................................................................................................................................................. 31
2.3.1 Half chassis (½ 19”) ............................................................................................................................................. 31
2.3.2 19” chassis ........................................................................................................................................................... 31
2.4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................................................................................... 32
2.4.1 Power supply voltage .......................................................................................................................................... 32
2.4.2 Digital outputs ..................................................................................................................................................... 33
2.4.3 Digital inputs ....................................................................................................................................................... 34
2.4.4 IRIG-B input and PPS ........................................................................................................................................... 34
2.4.5 Analogue ouputs ................................................................................................................................................. 35
2.4.6 RTD Inputs ........................................................................................................................................................... 35
2.4.1 DC Analogue inputs ........................................................................................................................................ 35
2.4.2 Terminals .......................................................................................................................................................... 36
2.4.3 Current and voltage circuits ................................................................................................................................ 36
2.4.4 Front communication .......................................................................................................................................... 37
2.4.5 Rear communications ......................................................................................................................................... 37
2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................................. 40
2.5.1 Tropicalized ......................................................................................................................................................... 40
2.6 TESTS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 40
2.6.1 Climatic test ........................................................................................................................................................ 40
2.6.2 Protection Level .................................................................................................................................................. 40
2.6.3 Insulation and electrical safety tests ................................................................................................................... 40
2.6.4 Mechanical tests ................................................................................................................................................. 40
2.6.5 Electromagnetic tests.......................................................................................................................................... 41
3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................. 42
3.1 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION ................................................................................................................................... 42
3.1.1 Differential protection communications ............................................................................................................. 44
3.1.2 Differential current calculation ........................................................................................................................... 50
3.1.3 Instantaneous differential protection ................................................................................................................. 57
3.1.4 Percentage differential protection ...................................................................................................................... 58
3.1.5 Directional supervision........................................................................................................................................ 60
3.1.6 Ground differential (87LG) .................................................................................................................................. 64
Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

User Manual III
INDEX 
3.1.7 Saturation detector ............................................................................................................................................. 68

3.1.8 2nd Harmonic Restraint ...................................................................................................................................... 69
3.1.9 2nd Harmonic blocking ....................................................................................................................................... 70
3.1.10 Ground 2nd Harmonic blocking 87LG ............................................................................................................... 71
3.1.11 Charging current compensation........................................................................................................................ 72
3.1.12 87N Restricted earth differential ...................................................................................................................... 75
3.1.13 Over-excitation by 5th harmonic ...................................................................................................................... 77
3.1.14 Over-excitation v/f. ........................................................................................................................................... 78
3.1.15 Function 86 ....................................................................................................................................................... 80
3.2 DISTANCE UNITS (21) ............................................................................................................................................. 81
3.2.1 Mho ..................................................................................................................................................................... 89
3.2.2 Quadrilateral ....................................................................................................................................................... 92
3.2.3 Timing Type for Tripping ..................................................................................................................................... 96
3.2.4 Zone 1 Extension ................................................................................................................................................. 99
3.2.5 High Speed zone ................................................................................................................................................ 100
3.2.6 Phase selector ................................................................................................................................................... 104
3.2.7 Fault detection .................................................................................................................................................. 107
3.2.8 Mho and Quadrilateral Unit Supervision .......................................................................................................... 108
3.2.9 Capacitive Voltage Transformer (CVT) Lines ..................................................................................................... 119
3.3 SIGNALS AND COMMANDS .................................................................................................................................. 121
3.3.1 Signals ............................................................................................................................................................... 121
3.3.2 Commands ........................................................................................................................................................ 122
3.4 CURRENT UNITS ................................................................................................................................................... 123
3.4.1 General overcurrent description ....................................................................................................................... 123
3.4.2 Directional characteristics ................................................................................................................................. 128
3.4.3 Polarization memory monitoring ...................................................................................................................... 145
3.4.4 Series compensation ......................................................................................................................................... 148
3.4.5 Phase overcurrent ............................................................................................................................................. 148
3.4.6 Neutral overcurrent .......................................................................................................................................... 149
3.4.7 Grounding overcurrent ..................................................................................................................................... 151
3.4.8 Unbalanced overcurrent ................................................................................................................................... 152
3.4.9 Voltage control (51V/50V) ................................................................................................................................ 153
3.4.10 2nd harmonic restraint ................................................................................................................................... 155
3.4.11 2nd and 5th harmonic blocking ...................................................................................................................... 158
3.4.12 Broken conductor............................................................................................................................................ 159
3.4.13 Thermal image ................................................................................................................................................ 162
3.4.14 Undercurrent .................................................................................................................................................. 166
3.4.15 Stub bus .......................................................................................................................................................... 168
3.5 VOLTAGE UNITS ................................................................................................................................................... 171
3.5.1 General description ........................................................................................................................................... 171
3.5.2 Phase overvoltage ............................................................................................................................................. 174
3.5.3 Zero sequence overvoltage ............................................................................................................................... 176
3.5.4 Negative sequence overvoltage ........................................................................................................................ 177
3.5.5 Phase undervoltage........................................................................................................................................... 178
3.5.6 Minimum voltage .............................................................................................................................................. 180
3.6 FREQUENCY UNITS............................................................................................................................................... 182
3.6.1 Frequency.......................................................................................................................................................... 183
3.6.2 Frequency rate of change ................................................................................................................................. 185
3.7 POWER UNITS ...................................................................................................................................................... 189
3.7.1 General .............................................................................................................................................................. 189
3.7.2 Minimum real power ........................................................................................................................................ 191
3.7.3 Maximum real power ........................................................................................................................................ 191
3.7.4 Real power inversion......................................................................................................................................... 191
3.7.5 Reactive power inversion .................................................................................................................................. 192

User Manual IV
INDEX 
3.7.6 Minimum apparent power ................................................................................................................................ 192

3.7.7 Maximum apparent power ............................................................................................................................... 192
3.8 LOAD ENCROACHMENT ....................................................................................................................................... 193
3.9 FUSE FAILURE ...................................................................................................................................................... 194
3.10 POWER SWING .................................................................................................................................................. 197
3.11 SWITCH ONTO FAULT......................................................................................................................................... 202
3.12 BREAKER FAILURE .............................................................................................................................................. 206
3.12.1 Single pole breaker Failure .............................................................................................................................. 206
3.12.2 Breaker failure with low load .......................................................................................................................... 210
3.13 TRIP LOGICS ....................................................................................................................................................... 214
3.13.1 67NQ Teleprotection Schemes ....................................................................................................................... 214
3.13.2 Z Teleprotection Schemes ............................................................................................................................... 230
3.13.3 Direct trip ........................................................................................................................................................ 254
3.13.4 External trip ..................................................................................................................................................... 256
3.13.5 Teleprotection serial communication ............................................................................................................. 257
3.13.6 Trip logic .......................................................................................................................................................... 257
3.14 CT SUPERVISION ................................................................................................................................................ 260
3.15 VT SUPERVISION ................................................................................................................................................ 261
4. BREAKER ........................................................................................................................................ 262
4.1 BREAKER LOGICS ................................................................................................................................................. 262
4.1.1 Breaker status ................................................................................................................................................... 262
4.1.2 Breaker failure and operating logic ................................................................................................................... 266
4.1.3 Locking logic ...................................................................................................................................................... 267
4.1.4 Open pole detector ........................................................................................................................................... 269
4.1.5 Pole discordance ............................................................................................................................................... 273
4.2 BREAKER OPERATION SUPERVISION .................................................................................................................... 275
4.3 TRIP AND CLOSE CIRCUITS SUPERVISION ............................................................................................................. 285
5. AUTOMATISMS .............................................................................................................................. 288
5.1 SYNCHRONISM .................................................................................................................................................... 288
5.1.1 Undervoltage permission .................................................................................................................................. 295
5.1.2 Synchronism permission ................................................................................................................................... 295
5.1.3 Two breakers application .................................................................................................................................. 296
5.1.4 Application auxiliary voltage ............................................................................................................................. 299
5.2 COUPLER.............................................................................................................................................................. 301
5.2.1 Two breakers application .................................................................................................................................. 304
5.3 RECLOSER ............................................................................................................................................................ 306
5.3.1 Settings, signals and commands ....................................................................................................................... 306
5.3.2 General operation ............................................................................................................................................. 314
5.3.3 Post-trip reclosure permission mask................................................................................................................. 317
5.3.4 Fault type selection ........................................................................................................................................... 321
5.3.5 Breaker open timeout ....................................................................................................................................... 321
5.3.6 Number of reclosures available ........................................................................................................................ 321
5.3.7 Reference voltage monitoring .......................................................................................................................... 322
5.3.8 Re-initiation of reclosure time .......................................................................................................................... 323
5.3.9 Pausing of reclosure time .................................................................................................................................. 323
5.3.10 Incomplete sequence block ............................................................................................................................ 324
5.3.11 Synchronism monitoring ................................................................................................................................. 324
5.3.12 Closure block by trip circuit monitoring .......................................................................................................... 324
5.3.13 52 closure timeout .......................................................................................................................................... 324
5.3.14 Recloser statuses............................................................................................................................................. 325
5.3.15 Application with two breakers ........................................................................................................................ 334
6. DISCONNECTOR.............................................................................................................................. 339

User Manual V
INDEX 
7. BREAKER AND A HALF CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................... 341

7.1 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................................... 341
7.1.1 Differential functions ........................................................................................................................................ 343
7.1.2 Distance functions ............................................................................................................................................. 343
7.1.3 General protection functions ............................................................................................................................ 344
7.1.4 Breaker .............................................................................................................................................................. 344
7.1.5 Breaker and a half supervision .......................................................................................................................... 345
8. FAULT LOCATOR ............................................................................................................................. 347
8.1 LOCATOR OPERATION ......................................................................................................................................... 349
8.1.1 Fault detection .................................................................................................................................................. 350
8.1.2 Pre-fault and post-fault filtering ....................................................................................................................... 350
8.1.3 Determination of the fault type ........................................................................................................................ 350
8.1.4 Distance calculation .......................................................................................................................................... 350
8.2 PRESENTATION OF THE RESULTS ......................................................................................................................... 351
8.3 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE ................................................................................................................................. 352
9. MONITORING ................................................................................................................................. 354
9.1 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY MONITORING ............................................................................................................ 354
9.2 TEMPERATURE MONITORING .............................................................................................................................. 355
9.3 DIS BLOCKING BY LACK OF VAUX ......................................................................................................................... 356
9.4 INTERNAL BATTERY FAILURE MONITORING ......................................................................................................... 356
9.5 UNIT CHECKS ....................................................................................................................................................... 357
10. CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................................ 360
10.1 FRECUENCY, MEASUREMENT AND TRANSFORMERS .......................................................................................... 360
10.1.1 Current ............................................................................................................................................................ 360
10.1.2 Frequency and voltage .................................................................................................................................... 360
10.1.3 Power and energy ........................................................................................................................................... 361
10.2 CID ..................................................................................................................................................................... 362
10.2.1 Data Storage.................................................................................................................................................... 362
10.2.2 Updating CID ................................................................................................................................................... 362
10.3 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................ 362
10.4 INPUTS/OUTPUTS .............................................................................................................................................. 365
10.4.1 Inputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 365
10.4.2 Outputs ........................................................................................................................................................... 366
10.4.3 Analogue inputs .............................................................................................................................................. 366
10.4.4 Treatment of digital input flicker .................................................................................................................... 367
10.5 LEDS ................................................................................................................................................................... 367
10.5.1 Via GEN/IHMI node ......................................................................................................................................... 367
10.5.2 Via CTRL/IHMI node ........................................................................................................................................ 368
10.6 CONFIGURATION WITH INREF............................................................................................................................ 368
10.7 GENERIC COMMAND ......................................................................................................................................... 369
10.8 NAMES............................................................................................................................................................... 369
10.9 IPRV NODES CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................................... 370
10.9.1 General IPRV settings ...................................................................................................................................... 370
10.9.2 IEC 61850 clients IPRV settings ....................................................................................................................... 371
10.10 MEASUREMENT’S RANGE AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION ................................................................................ 372
10.11 INCIDENT REPORT ............................................................................................................................................ 373
11. RTD AND ANALOGUE OUTPUTS MODULE ........................................................................................ 374
11.1 Overtemperature through RTDs ........................................................................................................................ 377
12. SYNCHRONIZATION ........................................................................................................................ 379

User Manual VI
INDEX 
12.1 GENERAL SETTINGS ............................................................................................................................................ 379

12.1.1 Signals ............................................................................................................................................................. 382
12.2 IEEE 1588v2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 383
12.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................................................ 383
12.3 IRIG-B ................................................................................................................................................................ 384
12.4 SNTP .................................................................................................................................................................. 384
12.4.1 Settings............................................................................................................................................................ 385
12.5 QUALITY FLAGS IEC 61850.................................................................................................................................. 388
13. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................... 389
13.1 STATUS REPORT ................................................................................................................................................. 389
13.2 PRIMARY MEASUREMENTS REPORT .................................................................................................................. 393
13.3 FAULT REPORT ................................................................................................................................................... 394
13.4 INCIDENT REPORT .............................................................................................................................................. 396
13.5 HISTORICAL MEASUREMENT REPORT ................................................................................................................ 397
13.6 STATISTICAL DATA REPORT ................................................................................................................................ 399
13.7 MAXIMETER/MINIMETER REPORT ..................................................................................................................... 400
13.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY ................................................................................................................................................ 401
13.9 INCIDENT AND FAULT REPORTS IN XML FORMAT .............................................................................................. 404
13.9.1 Structure of the protection events file............................................................................................................ 405
13.9.2 Structure of the faults file ............................................................................................................................... 406
14. USB ACCESS.................................................................................................................................... 408
14.1 DOWNLOADING REPORTS ................................................................................................................................. 408
14.2 LOADING CID ..................................................................................................................................................... 409
14.3 LOADING FIREWALL CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................... 409
14.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE ........................................................................................................................................... 410
15. FTP ACCESS .................................................................................................................................... 411
15.1 Pacfactory access ............................................................................................................................................... 412
15.2 ACCESS CONTROL .............................................................................................................................................. 412
16. MAPPING THE UNIT’S SIGNALS, MEASUREMENTS AND METERS ...................................................... 413
16.1 SIGNALS ............................................................................................................................................................. 413
16.1.1 Type A signals .................................................................................................................................................. 413
16.1.2 Type B signals .................................................................................................................................................. 414
16.1.3 Type C signals .................................................................................................................................................. 415
16.1.4 Type D signals .................................................................................................................................................. 416
16.1.5 SIGNALS SADDRESS ......................................................................................................................................... 417
16.2 MEASUREMENTS ............................................................................................................................................... 419
16.3 COUNTERS ......................................................................................................................................................... 420
17. LOGICS ........................................................................................................................................... 422
17.1 CONTROL LOGICS ............................................................................................................................................... 422
17.2 PROTECTION LOGICS .......................................................................................................................................... 423
17.3 DATABASE SIGNALS ........................................................................................................................................... 424
17.4 OUTPUT DATA UPON POWER-UP ...................................................................................................................... 424
18. IEC 61850 COMMANDS ................................................................................................................... 427
18.1 RUNNING IEC 61850 COMMANDS...................................................................................................................... 427
18.1.1 DIRECT_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (1) .......................................................................................................... 430
18.1.2 SBO_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (2) ............................................................................................................... 430
18.1.3 DIRECT_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (3) ....................................................................................................... 431
18.1.4 SBO_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (4) ............................................................................................................ 431
18.2 COMMAND BLOCKS ........................................................................................................................................... 432

User Manual VII
INDEX 
18.2.1 Command blocks by inconsistent parameters ................................................................................................ 432

18.2.2 Command blocks by switching hierarchy ........................................................................................................ 432
18.2.3 Command 1 of n blocks ................................................................................................................................... 438
18.2.4 Command blocks by mode (Mod/Beh) ........................................................................................................... 438
18.2.5 Command blocks by Heatlh ............................................................................................................................ 439
18.2.6 Command blocks by Interlocking .................................................................................................................... 439
18.2.7 Commands blocks due to invalid/reached position ........................................................................................ 440
18.3 COMMANDS FOR OTHER POSITIONS ................................................................................................................. 440
18.4 COMMAND SADDRESS ....................................................................................................................................... 440
19. RIO MODULES ................................................................................................................................ 443
19.1 CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................................................... 443
19.2 OPERATION ....................................................................................................................................................... 443
20. CHANGES REQUIRING THE REBOOTING OF THE DEVICE ................................................................... 445
21. DETAILS OF THE IEC61850 INTERFACE ............................................................................................. 446
21.1 GOOSE SUBSCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................................... 446
21.2 GOOSE SIMULATION .......................................................................................................................................... 447
21.3 TEST MODE ........................................................................................................................................................ 449
21.3.1 Logical devices management hierarchy .......................................................................................................... 451
21.4 SERVICE TRACKING ............................................................................................................................................ 452
21.5 SUBSTITUTION MODEL ...................................................................................................................................... 455
21.6 FILE TRANSFER ................................................................................................................................................... 456
21.7 EDITION1 SUBSCRIPTION. LGOS MODEL. ........................................................................................................... 457
21.7.1 Configuration values ....................................................................................................................................... 457
21.7.2 Supervision values ........................................................................................................................................... 458
21.7.3 Checked values ................................................................................................................................................ 458
22. TCP/IP NEWORK CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 460
22.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................................................... 460
22.2 COMMUNICATIONS REDUNDANCY .................................................................................................................... 461
22.2.1 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP) ..................................................................................................... 461
22.2.2 HIGH-AVAILABILITY SEAMLESS REDUNDANCY (HSR) ...................................................................................... 461
22.2.3 SWITCH MODE ................................................................................................................................................ 462
22.2.4 LINK FAILOVER REDUNDANCY ......................................................................................................................... 462
22.3 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT NETWORK CONFIGURATION ..................................................................... 462
22.4 GOOSES ............................................................................................................................................................. 463
22.5 FIREWALL ........................................................................................................................................................... 463
23. COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES ............................................................................................ 464
23.1 SYNCHRONISATION ........................................................................................................................................... 464
23.2 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 464
23.3 REDUNDANCY .................................................................................................................................................... 465
23.4 DIRECT CONNECTION (POINT-TO-POINT) ........................................................................................................... 465
23.4.1 Multimode Optical Fibre ................................................................................................................................. 466
23.4.2 Single-mode optical fibre ................................................................................................................................ 466
23.5 CONNECTION WITH COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES (MULTIPLEXER) .................................................................... 466
23.5.1 IEEE-C37.94 Interface ...................................................................................................................................... 466
23.6 EXAMPLE OF CONNECTING A C37.94 - G.703 CONVERTER ................................................................................ 467
23.6.1 C37.94 - G.703 E1 2Mb Converter. ................................................................................................................. 467
23.6.2 C37.94 - G.703 E0 Converter. .......................................................................................................................... 468
24. KEYBOARD AND GRAPHIC DISPLAY ................................................................................................. 469
24.1 GENERAL OPERATION ........................................................................................................................................ 469

User Manual VIII
INDEX 
24.1.1 Display structure ............................................................................................................................................. 469

24.1.2 Organization of the pages ............................................................................................................................... 469
24.1.3 Login Access .................................................................................................................................................... 470
24.1.4 Treatment of the functional keys .................................................................................................................... 471
24.1.5 Graphics pages ................................................................................................................................................ 473
24.1.6 I/O pages ......................................................................................................................................................... 475
24.1.7 Event pages ..................................................................................................................................................... 476
24.1.8 Protection event pages ................................................................................................................................... 477
24.1.9 Alarm pages .................................................................................................................................................... 478
24.1.10 Device status pages ....................................................................................................................................... 479
24.1.11 Fault pages .................................................................................................................................................... 483
24.1.12 Measurement pages ..................................................................................................................................... 487
24.1.13 Menu to other screens page ......................................................................................................................... 489
24.1.14 Shortcut menu page ...................................................................................................................................... 490
24.2 CONTROL AND PROTECTION MENUS PAGES ...................................................................................................... 491
24.2.1 Operation of the menus .................................................................................................................................. 491
24.2.2 Password management ................................................................................................................................... 496
24.3 NETWORK CONFIGURATION .............................................................................................................................. 499
24.3.1 Ethernet Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 500
24.3.2 Gateway Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 504
24.4 OTHER SCREENS ................................................................................................................................................. 506
24.4.1 Contrast setting ............................................................................................................................................... 506
24.4.2 USB treatment................................................................................................................................................. 506
24.4.3 System Information ......................................................................................................................................... 507
24.4.4 CID validation .................................................................................................................................................. 508
24.4.5 Security Logs ................................................................................................................................................... 508
24.4.6 Test Screens .................................................................................................................................................... 509
24.4.7 Other Communications Menu Screens ........................................................................................................... 509
25. WEB APPLICATION ......................................................................................................................... 510
25.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................. 510
25.2 WEB APPLICATION LOGIN .................................................................................................................................. 510
25.2.1 Login (Firmware prior versions to 8.0.22.0) .................................................................................................... 510
25.2.2 Login (available from firmware version 8.0.22.0) ........................................................................................... 511
25.3 TABS .................................................................................................................................................................. 511
25.3.1 Reports ............................................................................................................................................................ 512
25.3.2 Settings............................................................................................................................................................ 515
25.3.3 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................... 515
25.3.4 SW/Configuration ........................................................................................................................................... 518
25.3.5 Cybersecurity .................................................................................................................................................. 519
25.3.6 IEC61850 Data ................................................................................................................................................. 527
25.3.7 Logout ............................................................................................................................................................. 527
26. DNP PROTOCOL.............................................................................................................................. 528
26.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................................... 528
26.2 Configuration settings........................................................................................................................................ 528
26.3 Configuration tables .......................................................................................................................................... 533
26.3.1 Digital Points Configuration Table ................................................................................................................... 533
26.3.2 Analog Points Configuration Table .................................................................................................................. 535
26.3.3 Counter Points Configuration Table ................................................................................................................ 536
26.3.4 Commands Configuration Table ...................................................................................................................... 537
26.4 Device profile..................................................................................................................................................... 539
26.4.1 Object List ....................................................................................................................................................... 540
27. IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL ............................................................................................................ 542

User Manual IX
INDEX 
27.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................................... 542

27.3.1 Digital signals table ......................................................................................................................................... 545
27.3.2 Measurements table ....................................................................................................................................... 546
27.3.3 Commands table ............................................................................................................................................. 547
28. IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL .................................................................................................... 548
28.1 introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 548
28.2 IEC60870-5-104 configuration settings ..................................................................................................... 548
28.3 IEC60870-5-104 Server Configurator ......................................................................................................... 552
28.3.1 Digital Signals .............................................................................................................................................. 552
28.3.2 Measurements ............................................................................................................................................. 553
28.3.3 Commands ................................................................................................................................................... 553
28.4 Device profile ................................................................................................................................................. 554
28.4.1 System or device, (system-specific parameter) ...................................................................................... 554
28.4.2 Network configuration, (network-specific parameter) ............................................................................ 554
28.4.3 Physical layer, (network-specific parameter) .......................................................................................... 554
28.4.4 Link layer (network-specific parameter) ................................................................................................... 555
28.4.5 Application layer .......................................................................................................................................... 555
28.4.6 Basic application functions ........................................................................................................................ 559
29. SLAVE PROCOME PROTOCOL .......................................................................................................... 563
29.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................................... 563
29.3.1 Digital status configuration table .................................................................................................................... 565
29.3.2 Analog values configuration table................................................................................................................... 566
29.3.3 Counters configuration table .......................................................................................................................... 567
29.3.4 Commands configuration table ....................................................................................................................... 567
30. MODBUS MASTER PROTOCOL ........................................................................................................ 569
30.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................. 569
30.2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ............................................................................................................................... 569
30.3 DATA TYPES ....................................................................................................................................................... 571
30.3.1 Digital signals .................................................................................................................................................. 571
30.3.2 Measurements ................................................................................................................................................ 571
30.3.3 Counters .......................................................................................................................................................... 572
30.3.4 Commands ...................................................................................................................................................... 572
30.3.5 Request of events to Ingeteam Power Technology devices ........................................................................... 572
30.3.6 Synchronization ............................................................................................................................................... 572
30.4 IMPLEMENTED FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................................... 573
30.5 RTU TYPES ......................................................................................................................................................... 573
30.6 SW CONFIGURATION TOOL ................................................................................................................................ 574
30.6.1 Fields to be configured .................................................................................................................................... 574
30.6.2 Configuration example .................................................................................................................................... 582
30.7 SERIAL MESSAGES .............................................................................................................................................. 585
30.7.1 Format ............................................................................................................................................................. 585
30.7.2 Examples ......................................................................................................................................................... 585
31. MODBUS SLAVE PROTOCOL ............................................................................................................ 589
31.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................. 589
31.2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ............................................................................................................................... 589
31.3 PROTOCOL PROFILE ........................................................................................................................................... 592
31.3.1 Implemented functions in Modbus RTU ......................................................................................................... 592

User Manual X
INDEX 
31.3.2 Implemented functions in Modbus TCP/IP ..................................................................................................... 592

31.3.3 Exception codes .............................................................................................................................................. 593
31.4 CONTROL PROCESSES ........................................................................................................................................ 593
31.4.1 Request for equipment status ........................................................................................................................ 593
31.4.2 Request for digital signals ............................................................................................................................... 593
31.4.3 Request for measurements and counters....................................................................................................... 593
31.4.4 Request for digital signal changes ................................................................................................................... 594
31.4.5 Requesting data via memory map .................................................................................................................. 595
31.4.6 Synchronization ............................................................................................................................................... 596
31.4.7 Command execution ....................................................................................................................................... 596
31.5 EQUIPMENT ADDRESS MAP ............................................................................................................................... 597
31.6 DATA FORMAT ................................................................................................................................................... 598
31.7 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE TOOL ................................................................................................................... 599
31.7.1 Fields to be configured .................................................................................................................................... 599
31.7.2 Configuration example .................................................................................................................................... 602
31.8 SERIAL MESSAGES .............................................................................................................................................. 604
31.8.1 Format ............................................................................................................................................................. 604
31.8.2 Examples ......................................................................................................................................................... 605
31.9 TCP/IP MESSAGES .............................................................................................................................................. 609
31.9.1 Format ............................................................................................................................................................. 609
31.9.2 Examples ......................................................................................................................................................... 610
32. CYBERSECURITY FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................... 611
32.1 ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL .......................................................................................................................... 611
32.1.1 ACCOUNTS MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................................................. 611
32.1.2 DEFAULT LOCAL USERS AND PASSWORDS ...................................................................................................... 612
32.1.3 ROLE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL (RBAC)........................................................................................................... 613
32.1.4 INVALID ACCESS ATTEMPS .............................................................................................................................. 615
32.1.5 SESSION MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................................................. 615
32.1.6 ACCESS NOTIFICATION MESSAGE ................................................................................................................... 616
32.1.7 LDAP ................................................................................................................................................................ 616
32.2 AUDIT TRAIL and LOGGING ................................................................................................................................ 617
32.3 PORT ACCESS CONTROL ..................................................................................................................................... 625
32.4 HARDENING ....................................................................................................................................................... 626
32.5 CRYTOGRAPHIC FEATURES ................................................................................................................................. 626
32.5.1 WEB SECURITY ................................................................................................................................................ 627
32.6 MALWARE PROTECTION .................................................................................................................................... 628
32.7 SIGNED FIRMWARE............................................................................................................................................ 628
32.8 WEB CYBERSECURITY TAB .................................................................................................................................. 629
32.8.1 NTP SYMMETRIC KEYS TAB ............................................................................................................................. 629
32.8.2 FIREWALL CONFIGURATION TAB .................................................................................................................... 630
32.8.3 CERTIFICATES TAB ........................................................................................................................................... 630
32.8.4 LOGS TAB......................................................................................................................................................... 630
32.8.5 SETTINGS TAB .................................................................................................................................................. 631
32.8.6 RBAC TAB ........................................................................................................................................................ 634
32.8.7 PASSWORDS DICTIONARY TAB ........................................................................................................................ 634
33. CYBERSECURITY SIGNALS ................................................................................................................ 635
34. ACCURACY AND TRIP TIMES ........................................................................................................... 645
34.1 MEASUREMENT ACCURACY ............................................................................................................................... 645
34.2 PROTECTION UNITS ........................................................................................................................................... 646
34.2.1 Phase and neutral overcurrent ....................................................................................................................... 646
34.2.2 Overvoltage ..................................................................................................................................................... 647
34.2.3 Undervoltage .................................................................................................................................................. 648

User Manual XI
INDEX 
34.2.4 Frequency: Maximun/Minimun ...................................................................................................................... 648

34.2.5 Power .............................................................................................................................................................. 649
34.2.6 Broken conductor............................................................................................................................................ 649
34.2.7 50BF Breaker Failure ....................................................................................................................................... 650
34.2.8 Thermal Image ................................................................................................................................................ 650
34.2.9 Line Differential ............................................................................................................................................... 651
34.2.10 Restricted ground.......................................................................................................................................... 652
34.2.11 Restricted ground.......................................................................................................................................... 653
34.2.12 Distance......................................................................................................................................................... 654
35. CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS ........................................................................................... 659
35.1 CEI 255-4 / BS142 CURVES ................................................................................................................................. 659
35.2 ANSI CURVES ..................................................................................................................................................... 672
35.2.1 Battery voltage curves .................................................................................................................................... 681
35.3 IEC 60255-151 curves ................................................................................................................................... 682
35.4 USER CURVES ..................................................................................................................................................... 689
36. MEASUREMENT LIST....................................................................................................................... 691
37. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................... 704
37.1 ERROR DETECTION ............................................................................................................................................. 705
37.2 ERROR HANDLING PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................................... 706
38. PROTECTION DEVICES WITH SAMPLED VALUES ............................................................................... 707
38.1 DEVICE MODELS................................................................................................................................................. 708
38.2 PUBLISHERS DECLARATION ................................................................................................................................ 708
38.3 SAMPLED VALUES SUBSCRIPTION ...................................................................................................................... 708
38.3.1 Configuration .................................................................................................................................................. 708
38.3.2 ADD-IN of subscription .................................................................................................................................... 709
38.3.3 Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................... 711
38.4 CONFIGURABLE LOCAL MEASURES .................................................................................................................... 713
38.5 SAMPLED VALUES SIMULATION ......................................................................................................................... 713
38.6 TEST MODE FOR SAMPLED VALUES ................................................................................................................... 714
38.7 BEHAVIOUR WITH LOSS OF SYNCHRONIZATION ................................................................................................ 714

User Manual XII
GENERAL DESCRIPTION 
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Table 1 shows the features available in each of the different models.
Table 1 Functions depending on model
LD0 LD1 LD2 LD3

Differential functions
87: differential protection (Instantaneous and percentage)     (1)
Second harmonic restraint and blocking (Cross blocking)    
87LG: Ground differential protection1   
87N: Restricted earth   
Charging current compensation   
V/f Overexcitation   
5º harmonic level Overexcitation   
Directional supervision    
Saturation detector    
Load compensation    
86 function    
Distance functions
Quadrilateral Characteristic (5 zones)  
Mho Characteristic (5 zones)  
21 High Speed  
Zone 1 extension  
Double lines  
Lines with series compensation  
CVT: Lines with Capacitive Voltage Transformers  
Common protection functions
SOTF Switch onto fault   
27 Undervoltage  
59 Overvoltage  
59N Zero sequence overvoltage  
47 V2 overvoltage  
Minimum voltage  
Frequency (81 M/m)  
Frequency rate of change (81R)  
3x50/51 (67)     (2)
50N/51N (67N)    
50G/51G. Earthing overcurrent   
46TOC (67Q), 46IOC(67Q)     (2)
46BC Broken conductor    
50V/51V monitoring  
50CSC Second harmonic restraint    
50CSC Second and fifth harmonic restraint   
37 Undercurrent   
49 Thermal image    
32 Power units  
Stub bus  
Stub bus differential 
49T Overtemperature through RTD (Only with RTD module)    
Teleprotection
Teleprotection (21)  
Teleprotection (67/67Q)  
Monitoring units
68LE Load encroachment  
68FF Fuse failure   
1
Available since firmware version 6.2.19.0 and ICD 8.4.0.0

User Manual 13
78 Power swing  
Fault locator
Fault locator   
Breaker monitoring
kI2 breaker monitoring per pole    
Closing and trip circuit monitoring    
Excessive number of trips    
Open pole/Dead line detector   
Breaker status logic    
Pole discordance    
50BF Breaker failure
50BF breaker failure (Single-pole/Three-pole)    
Breaker failure with low load    
Automatism
Synchronism   
Recloser one/three poles    
Coupling   
Data Acquisition Functions
Phase and neutral current measurements    
Phase and synchronism voltage measurements   
Active and reactive power and energy   
Historical event, protection event and fault recording   
Breaker monitoring    
Oscillography    
Historical reports    
CT and VT supervision    
(1) In LD3 model, only available two terminals and connection YY0.
(2) In LD3 model, these units are not directional.
LD2 model is specific for breaker and a half. The analog input 7 can be selected between Polarization current and Parallel line Neutral
current 2
Available analog inputs in models

Model T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12
LD0 IA IB IC I neutral Ipol ---- ---- Vs1 V neutral VA VB VC
LD1 IA IB IC I neutral Ipol In2 Vs2 Vs1 V neutral VA VB VC
LD2 I A1 I B1 I C1 I A2 I B2 I C2 In2/Ipol Vs2 Vs1 VA VB VC
LD3 IA IB IC I neutral ---- ---- ---- ---- V neutral ---- ---- ----
The LD0 and LD3 models only operate on a breaker.
The LD1 and LD2 models operate on two breakers.

User Manual 14
1.2 MODEL ENCODING
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
COM5
COM6
ETH1
ETH2
I/O 1
I/O 2
I/O 3
I/O 4
I/O 5
I/O 6
I/O 7
I/O 8
INGEPAC EF LD MODEL INGEPAC EF- L D - A - - -
MODEL
87, 87N, 5th armonic and V/f overexcitation, SOTF, 68FF, 67, 67N, 50/51, 50N/51N,
50G/51G, 67Q, 46FA, 37, 49, 25, 79, 74TC/CC, 50BF, Fault locator
0
87, 87N, 5th armonic and V/f overexcitation, 21,POTT (21),POTT (67N/67Q),
SOTF, 68LE,68FF,78, 67, 67N, 50/51, 50N/51N, 50G/51G, 67Q, 46FA, 37, 49, 59,
27, 59N, 47, 81M/m, 81R, 32, 25, 79, 74TC/CC, 50BF, Stub bus, Fault locator 1
87, 87N, 52 ½, 5th armonic and V/f overexcitation, 21,POTT (21),POTT (67N/67Q),
SOTF, 68LE,68FF,78, 67, 67N, 50/51, 50N/51N, 50G/51G, 67Q, 46FA, 37, 49, 59,
27, 59N, 47, 81M/m, 81R, 32, 25, 79, 74TC/CC, 50BF, Stub bus, Fault locator 2
87, 67N, 50/51, 50N/51N, 50/51Q, 46FA, 49, 79, 74TC/CC, 50BF 3
EXTENDED CONTROL FUNCTIONS

No A
Yes B
HOUSING
1/2 chassis 19" 5U with configurable keyboard A
Chassis 19" 4U with configurable keyboard C
POWER SUPPLY MODULE

Single PS 85-300 Vdc+ 6DI 125 Vdc + 4DO A
Single PS 85-300 Vdc+ 6DI 220 Vdc + 4DO B
Single PS 18-60 Vdc+ 6DI 24 Vdc + 4DO C
Single PS 18-60 Vdc+ 6DI 48 Vdc + 4DO D
Redundant PS 48 Vcc / 48Vcc F
Redundant PS 125 Vcc / 125Vcc G
REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATION PORTS

A GFO COM-1
B PFO COM-2
C RS232C COM-3 (Note 6)
D RS485 COM-4 (Note 7)
E FO singlemode 60km (ST) Note 8 COM-5
F FO singlemode 60km (LC) Note 8 COM-6
I C37.94 FO multimode (ST-Laser) Note 8
M FO singlemode 20-120km (ST) Note 8
N FO singlemode 20-120km (LC) Note 8
O C37.94 FO multimode (ST-Led) Note 8
X No port
REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PORTS

E GFO ETH-1
F RJ45 ETH-2
I GFO (Link failover redundancy) Note 5
J RJ45 (Link failover redundancy) Note 5
K LC (Link failover redundancy) Note 5
L LC
O LC (ETH with PRP/HSR/Switch) Note 9
P RJ45 (ETH with PRP/HSR/Switch) Note 9
X No port
TERMINALS
Pin type standard terminals A
Closed terminals Note 1 B
Closed terminals for analog inputs and pin type standard terminals for the rest C
I/O BOARD CONFIGURATION

BOARD SELECTION (Note 2)
-A No board Board 2
-B 11 DI (24V dc) + 9 DO Board 3
-C 11 DI (48 Vdc) +9 DO Board 4 (Note 3)
-D 11 DI (125 Vdc) + 9 DO Board 5 (Note 3)
-E 11 DI (220 Vdc) + 9 DO Board 6 (Note 3)
-F 32 DI (24Vdc) Note 10 Board 7 (Note 3)
-G 32 DI (48Vdc) Note 10
-H 32 DI (125 Vdc) Note 10
-I 32 DI (220 Vdc) Note 10
-J 16 DI (24Vdc)-8 independent DO
-K 16 DI (48 Vdc)-8 independent DO
-L 16 DI (125 Vdc)-8 independent DO
-M 16 DI (220 Vdc)-8 independent DO
-N 16 DI (24 Vdc)- 16DO
-O 16 DI (48Vdc)- 16 DO
-P 16 DI (125 Vdc)- 16DO
-Q 16 DI (220 Vdc)- 16DO
-R 16 DI (24Vdc)-8 AI Note 4
-S 16 DI (48Vdc)-8 AI Note 4
-T 16 DI (125 Vdc)-8 AI Note 4
-U 16 DI (220 Vdc)-8 AI Note 4
-V 16 DI (24 Vdc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 4
-W 16 DI (48Vdc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 4
-X 16 DI (125 Vdc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 4
-Y 16 DI (220 Vdc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 4
-0 8DI (24Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
-1 8DI (48Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
-2 8DI (125Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
-3 8DI (220Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
-4 8DI (24Vcc) + 8DO
-5 8DI (48Vcc) + 8DO
-6 8DI (125Vcc) + 8DO
-7 8DI (220Vcc) + 8DO
-8 11 RTD + 4 AO Note 12
ZB 8DI (24Vcc) + 4DO (fast+h.b.c.o.) + 4DO Note 11
ZC 8DI (48Vcc) + 4DO (fast+h.b.c.o.) + 4DO Note 11
ZD 8DI (125Vcc) + 4DO (fast+h.b.c.o.) + 4DO Note 11
ZE 8DI (220Vcc) + 4DO (fast+h.b.c.o.) + 4DO Note 11
ZF 8ED (24Vcc) + 8SD (h.b.c.o.)
ZG 8ED (48Vcc) + 8SD (h.b.c.o.)
ZH 8ED (125Vcc) + 8SD (h.b.c.o.)
ZI 8ED (220Vcc) + 8SD (h.b.c.o.)
- Reservado
- Reservado
- Reservado
Note 1: The terminals for the power supply inputs are pyn type standard terminals.
Note 2:To know the order of the boards in the rack, consult the number of the terninals on the rear views of each chassis.
Note 3: Only available for 19" chassis.
Note 4: Standard analogue inputs configuration: +/-5mA, +/-5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-20mA, +/-20mA. Consult other configurations.
Note 5:This option requires selecting both ETH1 as ETH2 and supports any combination of options I , J and K.
Note 6: Channel 1 for line differential protection communications
Note 7: Channel 2 for line differential protection communications
Note 8: Only for line differential protection communications between devices. Only available on Com-3 and Com-4.
Note 9: If there is only one card with these options it should be placed in ETH-1. This options replace options G, H, M, N. To use replaced options consult Ingeteam.
Note 10: If REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PORT is "O" or "P", not available on board I/O 2 (4U housing) neither on board I/O 3 (5U housing).
Note 11: Not available on board I/O 7. If REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PORT is "O" or "P", not available on board I/O 2 (4U housing) neither on board I/O 3 (5U housing).
Note 12: The maximun number of RTD board in the device are 2 .
It´s available an external accessory (FC2910) to allow BNC connection with coaxial cable in Irig-B and PPS input.
It´s available an optional front IP for IP54 front external protection with IEC60529.

User Manual 15
Figure 1 Board position according to model encoding 19” chassis
Figure 2 Board position according to model encoding ½ 19” chassis”
Figure 3 Redundant power supply ½ 19” chassis Figure 4 Redundant power supply 19” chassis
Figure 5 PRP Redundancy (2LC) Figure 6 PRP Redundancy (2RJ45 + 2LC)

User Manual 16
1.3 USER INTERFACE
The front board is equipped with:
❑ 10-digit numerical keyboard with decimal point, plus R key

❑ 4 scroll keys:  (Up),  (Down),  (Left), → (Right)
❑ 3 general keys  (Enter), ESC (Escape), MENU
❑ Function keys depending on the model:
 5 function keys (I, O, DES, SEL, INF)
 7 function keys (I, O, F1...F5)
 12 function keys (I, O, DES, SEL, INF, F1…F7)
 16 function keys (I, O, F1…F14)
❑ 19 fully assignable LEDs
❑ 1 unit operation LED
❑ USB 2.0 front port for downloading reports and loading CID
❑ Front RJ45 port for communications
The rear communications could be:
❑ Ethernet. Up to two Ethernet port (IEC8802-3) with options of RJ45, GFO or LC. Redundant ports are optional.
❑ Serial. Up to 6 ports with options: RS232, RS485, GFO and PFO.
1.4 INTERCONNECTIONS
Interconnections depend on the modules selected. The connections associated with each of the modules are indicated, and thus the
diagram will depend on the modules installed.
1.4.1 CPU
It´s available an output NC/NO which is used as HW status. With an error in the device or a power failure, the NC contact of the
output will be activated.
Figure 7 3-contact relay and IRIG-B Figure 8 With BNC accessory

User Manual 17
1.4.2 Power supply

The two options are a redundant power supply and a simple power supply with inputs/outputs.
Figure 9 Simple power supply
Figure 10 Double power supply
1.4.3 Input/output cards

The I/O modules available are:
❑ Module 1 (Figure 11): Equipped with 11 digital inputs and 9 digital outputs grouped as follows:
 Inputs: 4 independent + 3 with a common point + 4 with a common point.
 Outputs: 5 independent + 3 with a common point + 1 switched (3 contacts). The output NC/NO (DO 9) can be
configured as HW status. In that configuration with an error in the device or a power failure, the NC contact of
the output will be activated.
Figure 11 Module 11 digital inputs and 9 digital outputs
 Inputs: 16 with a common point.
 Outputs: 16 with a common point.

User Manual 18
 Outputs: 8 independent.
❑ Module 4 (Figure 14): Equipped with 32 digital inputs grouped as follows:

 Inputs: 16 with a common point + 16 with a common point.
Figure 14 Module 32 inputs
❑ Module 5 (Figure 15): Equipped with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs grouped as follows:
 Analogue: 8 independent. The analogue inputs have standard configuration, that could be changed among the
options: ±1mA, ±2.5mA, ±5mA, ±20mA, ±5V, ±10V
Standard configuration of analogue inputs
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

+/- 5mA +/- 5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 20mA +/- 20mA
Figure 15 Module with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs
❑ Module 6 (Figure 16): Equipped with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs (4 isolated) grouped as follows:
 Analogue: 8 independent, 4 of them are isolated and 4 have a common point. The analogue inputs have
standard configuration, that could be changed among the options: ±1mA, ±2.5mA, ±5mA, ±20mA, ±5V, ±10V
Standard configuration of analogue inputs
Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4
(isolated) (isolated) (isolated) (isolated)
+/- 5mA +/- 5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 20mA +/- 20mA

User Manual 19
Figure 16 Module with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs (4 isolated)
❑ Module 7 (Figure 17): Equipped with 8 digital inputs, 4 high breaking capacity outputs (hbco) and 4 digital outputs
grouped as follows:
 Inputs: 8 independent.
 Outputs: 8 independent: the 4 hbco outputs are 1 to 4 (pins 1 to 8) and the 4 standard outputs are 5 to 8 (pins
10 a 17).
Figure 17 Módule 8 inputs, 4 outputs (hbco) and 4 digital outputs
❑ Module 8 (Figure 18): Equipped with 8 digital inputs, 8 digital outputs grouped as follows:
 Outputs: 8 independent.
Figure 18 Módule 8 inputs, 8 outputs
❑ Module 9 (Figure 19): Equipped with 8 digital inputs, 4 fast and high breaking capacity outputs (hbco) and 4 digital outputs
grouped as follows:
 Outputs: 8 independent: the 4 fast and hbco outputs are 1 to 4 (pins 1 to 8) and the 4 standard outputs are 5
to 8 (pins 10 a 17).
Figure 19 Module 8 inputs, 4 outputs (fast and hbco) and 4 digital outputs

User Manual 20
❑ Module 10 (Figure 18): Equipped with 8 digital inputs, 8 high breaking capacity outputs (hbco) grouped as follows:
 Outputs: 8 hbco independent outputs..
Figure 20 Module 8 inputs, 8 outputs (hbco)
❑ Module 11 (Figure 21): Equipped with 11 RTD inputs and 4 analogue outputs grouped as follows:
 RTD Inputs: 11 RTD.
 Analogue outputs: 4 independent. The analogue outputs can be configured with the options 0-1mA, 0-20mA,
4-20mA.
Figure 21 Module 11 RTD and 11 analog outputs

User Manual 21
1.4.4 Analogue inputs

The following diagram shows the configuration of the analogue inputs:
LD0 LD1 LD2 LD3

User Manual 22
1.4.5 Wiring diagrams

The following figures show different interconnection options for the analogue inputs, in accordance with the available inputs.
Figure 22 Wiring diagram Iphase, In, Ipol, Vphase, Vsyn

User Manual 23
Figure 23 Wiring diagram Iphase, In, Vphase, Vsyn

User Manual 24
Figure 24 Wiring diagram Iphase, In, Ipol, Vphase, V0 and Vsyn

User Manual 25
Figure 25 Wiring diagram 52 ½ Iphase, Vphase and Vsyn
1.4.6 Topology
The following figures show different topologies of the line differential protection.
In the communication between devices phase currents and digital signals are sent along with synchronization data.
Figure 26 single breaker
Figure 27 Breaker and a half

User Manual 26
HARDWARE 
2. HARDWARE
EF devices can be used as autonomous devices or as part of a protection and control system. The devices are implemented based on a
microprocessor and a DSP linked through shared RAM and communication lines.
The digital processing is done by a high accuracy 16 bit converter. Each signal reaches this converter after being conditioned, filtered and
amplified. A high frequency sampling is done at 144 samples per cycle (at 8640 Hz for 60 Hz systems or at 7200Hz for 50 Hz systems). This
sampling is transformed into 24 samples per cycle through a digital process before reaching the protection functions.
INGEPAC EF devices have non-volatile flash memory where the user settings, configurations and application are stored. This kind of
memory allows software updates and modifications without needing to manipulate the device hardware.
2.1 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
Two options can be selected:
❑ Half chassis ½ 19” and 5U

❑ Chassis 19” and 4U
2.1.1 Half chassis (½ 19”)

User Manual 27
HARDWARE 
2.1.2 19” chassis
2.2 REAR TERMINALS
The rear section will vary in accordance with the options selected for the unit. The following figures show various possible
configurations.
2.2.1 Configuration options

The rear section options may vary depending on the options selected:
❑ Power supply unit. There are two options available:

 Simple with inputs/outputs. Equipped with a 3-contact terminal with power supply with screw and a 17-
contact terminal with screw (Figure 28).
 Redundant. Equipped with two 3-contact terminals for each of the power supplies.
❑ Inputs/outputs cards. All the input/output modules have two 17-contact terminals with screw.
❑ CPU. Equipped with a 6-contact terminal with screw for the digital output of 3 contacts and the IRIG-B inputs. Equipped
with different Ethernet and standard communications module options (Figure 7).
❑ Analogue. Equipped with two 12-contact terminals with screw.
❑ Communications. To choose between:
 Ethernet: RJ45 and G.F.O.
 Standard: RS232, RS485, G.F.O. and P.F.O.
Pin type or closed type terminals may be chosen for the analogue and input/output terminals.

Different options which modify the view of the rear section may be selected (from top to bottom):
❑ Simple/redundant power supply

❑ 1 or 2 I/O modules

User Manual 28
HARDWARE 
❑ Communication ports in the CPU

❑ Analogue card with up to 12 transformers
Figure 28 shows rear section with the options:
❑ Simple power source with inputs/outputs

❑ 2 input/output cards
❑ CPU with communication ports:
 Ethernet GFO + RJ45
 Standard RS232+RS485+GFO+PFO
Figure 28 Rear section with analogue and simple source
Figure 29 Rear section without analogue and simple source
2.2.3 19” chassis

Different options which modify the view of the rear section may be selected (from top to bottom and left to right):
❑ Simple/redundant power supply

❑ 1 or no I/O modules
❑ Communication ports in the CPU
❑ Number of I/O modules

User Manual 29
HARDWARE 
In Figure 30 the next options can be seen:
❑ Simple power source with inputs/outputs

❑ 5 input/output cards
❑ CPU with communication ports:
 Ethernet GFO + RJ45
 Standard with 3 RS232 + 2 GFO + PFO
Figure 30 Rear section with analogue and simple source
2.2.4 Closed Terminals

The next figures show the closed terminals used in the digital I/O boards (Figure 31) and the transformer inputs (V/I) (Figure 32).
Figure 31 Closed Terminals I/O boards
Figure 32 Closed Terminals transformer inputs (V/I)
2.2.5 Wire section

The wires for the terminals should be copper with a section:
❑ Supply terminals:
Wire section AWG 16 to 12 (1.5 to 2.5 mm2)
❑ I/O terminals:
Wire section AWG 16 to 12 (1.5 to 2.5 mm2)
❑ Current and voltage terminals:

Wire section AWG 10 (4 mm2)

User Manual 30
HARDWARE 
2.3 FRONT INTERFACE

There are two half-chassis front options (½ 19” and 5U):
❑ Configurable functional keys (Figure 33)

❑ Fixed functional keys (Figure 34)2.
The front interfaces are equipped with:
❑ Graphic display
❑ 19 general use LEDs with interchangeable labels
❑ 1 2-colour unit status LED
❑ Numeric keypad
❑ 7 operational keys
❑ Ethernet communication
❑ Master USB communication
❑ Depending on the model, the following are available:
 5 functional keys for selecting with interchangeable labels + 2 operational keys
 3 fixed function keys + 2 operational keys.2
Figure 33 Configurable functional keys Figure 34 Fixed functional keys2
2.3.2 19” chassis

There are two 19” and 4U chassis front options:
❑ Configurable functional keys (Figure 35)

❑ Fixed functional keys (Figure 36) 2
The front interfaces are equipped with:
❑ Graphic display
❑ 19 general use LEDs with interchangeable labels
❑ 1 2-colour unit status LED
❑ Numeric keypad
2
Unavailable option. Consult Ingeteam

User Manual 31
HARDWARE 
❑ 7 operational keys
❑ Ethernet communication
❑ Master USB communication
❑ Depending on the model, the following are available:
 14 functional keys for selecting with interchangeable labels + 2 operational keys
 3 fixed function keys + 2 operational keys + 7 functional keys with interchangeable labels for selecting. 2
Figure 35 Configurable functional keys Figure 36 Fixed functional keys2
2.4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
2.4.1 Power supply voltage

Single power supply 125/220 Vdc models: 110Vdc-20% up to 250Vac + 10%:
❑ Operating range:
 Direct: 88Vdc up to 300Vdc
 Alternating: 85Vac up to 265Vac
Single power supply 24/48 Vdc models: 24Vdc-20% up to 48Vdc + 20%:
Redundant power supply 125Vdc models:
Redundant power supply 24/48 Vdc models:
Burden. Depends on the cards connected.
❑ 20W + 0,5W for each relay activated

Battery failure signal. Minimum voltage to activate the signal
Power supply 24Vcc 48Vcc 125Vcc 220Vcc

Activation level 16V 37V 86V 170V
The wires for the terminals should be copper with a section AWG 16 to 12 (1.5 to 2.5 mm2).

User Manual 32
HARDWARE 
2.4.2 Digital outputs

The wires for the I/O terminals should be copper with a section AWG 16 to 12 (1.5 to 2.5 mm2).
The output NC/NO can be configured as HW status. In that configuration with an error in the device or a power failure, the NC
contact of the output will be activated.
Independent standard and trip outputs:
The characteristics of the independent contact outputs are as follows:
❑ Permanent current: 8 A at 25ºC

❑ Make: 30 A 1sec
❑ Connection capacity 2500W at 250Vdc
❑ Open or break capacity:
200Vdc 125Vdc 48Vdc
With resistive load 1.0A 1.5A 2.0A
With inductive load L/R=40ms 0.7A 1.0A 1.5A
❑ Operating time: 5ms activation and 8ms deactivation

Signal outputs:
The characteristics of the 3-contact switched, common point signal outputs are:

❑ Make:
 30 A ½ sec.
 20 A 1 sec.
200Vdc 125Vdc 48Vdc
With resistive load 0.2A 0.4A 1.0A
With inductive load L/R=40ms 0.1A 0.2A 0.5A
❑ Operating time: 8ms activation and deactivation

The compliance of the common point outputs is the same as that of the independent outputs. However, due to sharing a common
point, only 2 relays can be activated simultaneously.
High break contact outputs (h.b.c.o) and Fast + high break contact outputs (fast + h.b.c.o):
The characteristics of the independent contact outputs are the same except the activation times:

❑ Make: 30 A 1sec
❑ Connection capacity 2500W at 250Vdc
200Vdc 125Vdc 48Vdc
With resistive load 10A 10A 10A
With inductive load 10A L/R=20ms 10A L/R=40ms 10A L/R=40ms
❑ Cyclic capacity: 4 cycles in 1 second, 2 minutes waiting for thermal dissipation

❑ Operating time:
 h.b.c.o outputs

User Manual 33
HARDWARE 
 5ms activation and 5ms deactivation with resistive load

 5ms activation and 14ms deactivation with L/R = 40ms
 Fast + h.b.c.o outputs
 3µs activation and 8ms deactivation with resistive load
2.4.3 Digital inputs

The input burden is lower than 3mA at nominal voltage.
The inputs do not have polarity.
The wires for the I/O terminals should be copper with a section AWG 16 to 12 (1.5 to 2.5 mm2).
They have a fixed range with 4 nominal voltage options:
Rated V Characteristics
Not activated below 9 Vdc.
24Vdc Activated above 12 Vdc.
Maximum voltage 72 Vdc
125Vdc They are activated above 87 Vdc.
2.4.4 IRIG-B input and PPS

Equipped with an input for synchronization by GPS, using IRIG-B time codes (Figure 37) and a pulse per second (PPS) input for
synchronization with:
❑ Demodulated input (TTL levels).

❑ Cable type: 2-wire, shielded
❑ Insulation: 2000 V
The input circuit is a 440 ohm serial resistance with an opto-isolator; for a 5 V signal, the approximate burden is 10 mA.
The number of units that can be connected in parallel to a generator depends on the output current supply capacity; a typical value
is 70 mA, which would enable the connection of 6 units (although the length and the type of cable can also influence). The cable
must be shielded and twisted.
According to configuration, it synchronizes with frames B002 , B003 , B006 , B007 type . It also synchronizes with IEE1344.
Optionally, with an external adapter inputs IRIG- B and PPS can be BNC type. The connection must use a 50 Ω coaxial cable with a
male BNC connector.

User Manual 34
HARDWARE 
Figure 37 Connection example
2.4.5 Analogue ouputs

There is an I/O board with 4 continuous analogue outputs.
❑ Range can be selected by settings: 0 at 1 mA, 4 at 20mA and 0 at 20mA

❑ Accuracy: ± 1 % of full scale
❑ Maximum load: 1200 Ohms
❑ Isolation: 1 kV
2.4.6 RTD Inputs

There is a I/O board with 11 isolated RTDs suitable by setting for the following probes:
❑ 100Ω Platinum
❑ 100Ω Nickel
❑ 120Ω Nickel
❑ 10Ω Copper
Measurement range: -50ºC to +250ºC
Accuracy: ±2ºC
The wire must be shielded and twisted.
2.4.1 DC Analogue inputs

There are available analogue inputs with the characteristics:
Isolation: 2000 Vrms
Accuracy (25⁰C): 0.2% of FE
The inputs can be isolated and no isolated.
Table 2 Non Isolated inputs characteristics
No isolated
Range +/- 20mA +/- 5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 1mA +/- 10V +/- 5V
Impedance (Ω) 100 Ω 400 Ω 800 Ω 2000 Ω 49200 Ω 59200 Ω
Continuous charge without destruction +/-35mA +/-12.5mA +/-8mA +/-6mA 40V/0.5mA 40V/0.5mA
Maximum load (VA/Ω) <0,0004 <0,000025 <0,000006 <0,000001 <0,0000002 <0,0000002

User Manual 35
HARDWARE 
Table 3 Isolated inputs characteristics
Isolated
Range +/- 20mA +/- 5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 1mA +/- 10V +/- 5V
Impedance (Ω) 100 Ω 400 Ω 800 Ω 2000 Ω 49200 Ω 59200 Ω
Continuous charge without destruction 4.7 Ω 20 Ω 40 Ω 100 Ω 51500 Ω 52000 Ω
Maximum load (VA/Ω) <0,0008 <0,00005 <0,0000012 <0,000002 <0,000004 <0,000004
2.4.2 Terminals
The wires for the terminals should be copper with with the characteristics indicated in the table.
The table shows the torque depending on the terminal type.
Torque
Terminals Wire section AWG
Pin Terminal Closed Terminal
Minimum: 0.5 Nm (4,4 in-lb)
Power supply AWG 16 to 12 (1.5 to 2.5 mm2)
Maximum: 0.6 Nm (5 in-lb)
Minimum: 0.4 Nm (3,5 in-lb) Minimum: 0.25 Nm (2,2 in-lb)
Input / Output AWG 16 to 12 (1.5 to 2.5 mm2)
Maximum: 0.5 Nm (4,4 in-lb) Maximum: 0.34 Nm (3 in-lb)
Minimum: 0.5 Nm (4,4 in-lb) Minimum: 0.3 Nm (2,6 in-lb)
Current / Voltage AWG 10 (4 mm2)
Maximum: 0.6 Nm (5 in-lb) Maximum: 0.75 Nm (6 in-lb)
2.4.3 Current and voltage circuits

The characteristics of the current and voltage inputs are shown in the following tables.
The accuracy is indicated in the appendix "Accuracy and time".
Table 4 Current circuits thermal capacity
I phase/neutral/polarization (Ir = 1/5A)

Measurement range 0,02 A to 200 A
Permanent 20 A
Short duration (10 seg) 150 A
Short duration (1 s) 500 A
Short duration (1/2 ciclos) 1250 A
Burden at Ir = 5 A Ir = 5 A <0,2 VA
Burden at Ir= 1A Ir = 1 A <0,02 VA
Tabla 5 Voltage circuits thermal capacity
V phase/neutral/synchronism
Measurement range 1 to 200 Vac
Rated voltage Configurable: 40Vac to 140Vac
Permanent 2 Un (max 300V)
Short duration (1 s) 5 Un (max 470V)
Short duration (1 min) 3,5 Un (max 470V)
Burden at a 63,5V < 0,015 VA
Burden at a 100V < 0,03 VA

User Manual 36
HARDWARE 
2.4.4 Front communication

Ethernet (IEC8802-3) via RJ45 cable
❑ RJ45 connector (female)

❑ Cable type: Shielded
❑ Cable length: 100 m maximum
❑ Baud rate: 10/100 Mb.
❑ Insulation 500V
USB
❑ USB 2.0 compatible version

❑ Master operating mode
❑ Speed: 480Mbps (high-speed), 12Mbps (full-speed) or 1.5Mbps (low-speed)
❑ Insulation 500V
2.4.5 Rear communications
2.4.5.1 Ethernet communication

The device has two Ethernet port (IEC8802-3) with options of RJ45 or optical fiber.
Ethernet via RJ45 cable
❑ RJ45 connector (female)

❑ Baud rate: 10/100 Mb.
❑ Insulation 500V
Ethernet via glass optical fiber (ST and LC)
❑ Connector
 ST
 LC
❑ Wavelength: 1310nm
❑ Multimode glass optical fiber: 62.5 /125 µm and 50/125 µm
❑ Permitted attenuation
 8 db with 50/125 µm
 11 db with 62.5/125 µm
❑ Typical transmitter optical power: -20dBm to -14dBm
❑ Receiver optical sensitivity: -31dBm
❑ Baud rate: 100 Mb.
❑ Maximum distance: 2 km

User Manual 37
HARDWARE 
2.4.5.2 Serial communications

Glass optical fiber
❑ ST connector
❑ Multimode glass optical fiber: 62.5 /125 µm and 50/125 µm
❑ Permitted attenuation
 9 db with 50/125 µm
 11 db with 62.5/125 µm
❑ Typical transmitter optical power: -17dBm to -11dBm
❑ Maximum distance: 2 km
Plastic optical fiber
❑ V-Pin connector (HP standard)

❑ Multimode optical fiber HCS (silica) with 200 µm and plastic with 1mm
❑ Permitted attenuation:
 24.7db with 1mm plastic cable
 22db with 200 µm silica cable
❑ Typical transmitter optical power
 -17dBm to -8dBm with 1mm plastic cable
 -13,5dBm to -4,5dBm with 200 µm silica cable
❑ Maximum distance: 115m with 1mm plastic cable and 1.9km with 200 µm silica cable
RS232
❑ DTE 9 pin female D type

❑ Insulation 500V
RS485
❑ DTE 9 pin female D type

❑ Cable type: Shielded crossed pair
❑ Cable length: 1.000 m maximum.
❑ Insulation 500V
The serial ports pinout is shown in the table:
Pin RS232 RS485

1 CD D+
2 Rx D+
3 Tx D-
4 9 Vcc D-
5 GND GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9

User Manual 38
HARDWARE 
For communications between devices, according to options available in each model, can be used:
FO single-mode (60km)
❑ Connector LC duplex or ST
❑ Wavelength: 1310nm, Laser
❑ Singlemode: 9/125 nm
❑ Permitted attenuation: 30db
❑ Typical transmitter optical power: -5dBm a 0dBm
❑ Receiver maximun optical power: 0dBm
❑ Maximum distance: 60km
❑ Minimum distance: 1km
FO single-mode (20-120km)
❑ Connector LC duplex or ST
❑ Wavelength: 1550nm, Laser
❑ Singlemode: 9/125 nm
❑ Permitted attenuation: 40db
❑ Typical transmitter optical power: 0dBm a 5dBm
❑ Receiver maximun optical power: 0dBm
❑ Minimum distance: 20km. It cannot be used below 20km.
C37.94 glass optical fiber (Laser or Led)
❑ ST connector
❑ Multimode glass optical fiber: 50/125µm and 62.5/125 µm
❑ Permitted attenuation:
 13db with 62,5/125 µm
 9dB with 50/125 µm
❑ Typical transmitter optical power:
 Laser: -16dBm a -11dBm
 Led: -18dBm a -11dBm
❑ Receiver sensitivity: -32dBm
❑ Laser class 1 with EN60825

User Manual 39
HARDWARE 
2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Operating temperature:
❑ Continuous: -25°C a +60 ºC

❑ <96h: -25°C a +70 °C
❑ <16h: -40°C a +85ºC
❑ HMI and MTBF may be affected outside the continuous operating temperature range
❑ The maximum operation temperature for LC communication ports is +70º
Storage temperature: -40 to 85 ºC
Relative humidity: Up to 95% without condensation
2.5.1 Tropicalized
Printed circuit boards are lacquered to be protected against corrosion and biological factors in humid environments. Depending on
the type of card different methods (dipping or selective varnishing) and different varnishes are used. It is a treatment that deposits
a layer of low surface energy that repels moisture and some types of dirt. This procedure is made by demand, in the order.
2.6 TESTS
2.6.1 Climatic test

Climatic test Standard
Cold IEC -60068-2-1 -40°C, 16 hours
Dry Heat IEC -60068-2-2 +85°C, 16 hours
Damp heat steady state IEC -60068-2-78 +40°C/93%RH, 96 hours
Damp heat cyclic IEC -60068-2-30 55ºC / 95% HR 6 cycles of 12+12 hours
Rapid change of temperature IEC -60068-2-14 -20ºC/+70ºC 5 cycles of 3+3 hours
2.6.2 Protection Level

Climatic test Standard
IP3X front and sides
External protection level IEC60529 Rear IP2X (Pin Terminal)/IP 1X (closed Terminal)
IP54 front (with Optional Front)
2.6.3 Insulation and electrical safety tests

Insulation and electrical safety test Standard
Dielectric test IEC 60255-27 2 kVac
Insulation resistance test IEC 60255-27 > 100 MΩ at 500Vdc.
±5kV CM
Impulse voltage test IEC 60255-27
±1kV DM
2.6.4 Mechanical tests

Mechanical test Standard
Vibration (sinusoidal): Response IEC 60255-21-1 Class 2
Vibration (sinusoidal): Endurance IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
Shocks and bumps IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2

User Manual 40
HARDWARE 
2.6.5 Electromagnetic tests

Electromagnetic test Standard
IEC 60255-26
Measurements of radiated disturbance field strength EN 55022 A Class
CISPR 11, 32
IEC 60255-26
A Class PS
Measurements of conducted radioelectric disturbances EN 55022
B class: Ethernet port
CISPR 11, 32
IEC 60255-26 ±2.8kV CM
Damped oscillatory waves immunity test
IEC 61000-4-18 ±1kV DM
IEC 60255-26
Electrostatic discharge immunity test ±8kV/±15kV
IEC 61000-4-2
IEC 60255-26
Electrical Fast transients immunity test ±4kV,5kHz
IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 60255-26 ±4kV CM
Surge immunity test IEC 61000-4-5 ±2kV DM
IEC 60255-26 100% 130 ms
DC power supply interruptions, dips and variations immunity test IEC 61000-4-29 60% 200 ms
IEC 61000-4-11 30% 5s
IEC 60255-26
Ripple immunity test 15% (50 and 100 Hz)
IEC 61000-4-17
IEC 60255-26
Power frequency immunity test IEC6100-4.16 300 V CM/ 150 V DM
IEC 60255-22-7
IEC 60255-26
Radiated radiofrequency electromagnetic field immunity test 10V/m
IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 60255-26
Conducted disturbances induced by radiofrequency fields immunity test 10Vrms
IEC 61000-4-6
IEC 60255-26
50 Hz magnetic fields immunity test 100 A/m 1000 A/m (2 s)
IEC 61000-4-8
IEC 60255-26
Pulse magnetic fields immunity test 1000 A/m
IEC 61000-4-9
Damped oscillatory magnetic fields immunity test IEC 61000-4-10 100 A/m
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers IEEE 37.90.2 35 V/m

User Manual 41
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 
3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3.1 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
The equipment has both percentage and instantaneous differential protection. The percentage differential protection allows 2nd
harmonic restraint and blocking. The instantaneous differential function does not allow neither harmonic restraint nor blocking.
The protection function is the same for 2 or 3 ends, differing only in the calculation of the differential current and the communication
between the ends.
The differential current is calculated in each phase. If there is an intermediate transformer, the phase - shift and transformation ratio
are taken into account and the zero sequence current can be removed with the zero sequence filter.
The settings that correspond to differential currents (indicated as xTap) are expressed in tap steps when there is an intermediate
transformer and in the local end rated current steps (Irated) when there is not any transformer.
The generic curve of the differential protection is shown in Figure 38. The Figure 39 shows the different characteristics that can be
obtained changing the restraint and slope settings.
Figure 38 Differential protection curve with 2 slopes
Figure 39 Different configurations of the differential protection
The PROT/LINPDIF node is used for the line differential settings (see Table 6). The "C end" is not used when the scheme type is a 2
end line.

User Manual 42
PDIF node settings:
❑ Scheme type: Selects the protected line type: 2 ends or 3 ends.

❑ Reference end: Indicates the reference end for the calculation of the differential current when there is an
intermediate transformer. If not, the reference end is the local one.
❑ End A Vrated (kV): Selects the phase-phase rated voltage of End A in primary kVs.
❑ End B Vrated (kV): Selects the phase-phase rated voltage of End B in primary kVs.
❑ End C Vrated (kV): Selects the phase-phase rated voltage of End C in primary kVs.
❑ End A CT ratio: Indicates the transformation ratio for End A phase currents.
❑ End B CT ratio: Indicates the transformation ratio for End B phase currents.
❑ End C CT ratio: Indicates the transformation ratio for End C phase currents.
❑ Intermediate transformer: Selects if there is an intermediate transformer. When there is not any transformer the
following settings are not taken into account:
 Reference end
 Connection type - End A, B and C
 Phase-shift code - End B and C
 Enable Zero-seq Filt End A, B and C
 Max power capacity (MVA)
 Tap - End A, B and C I (A)
❑ Connection type - End A: Selects the connection type of the End A.
❑ Connection type - End B: Selects the connection type of the End B.
❑ Connection type - End C: Selects the connection type of the End C.
❑ Phase-shift code - End B: Selects the phase shift of the End B with respect to the End A. Allows values among 0 to
11. Each step is 30 degrees.
❑ Phase-shift code - End C: Selects the phase shift of the End C with respect to the End A. Allows values among 0 to
11. Each step is 30 degrees.
❑ Enable Zero-seq Filt End A: Allows enabling or disabling the zero sequence filter of the End A.
❑ Enable Zero-seq Filt End B: Allows enabling or disabling the zero sequence filter of the End B.
❑ Enable Zero-seq Filt End C: Allows enabling or disabling the zero sequence filter of the End C.
❑ Max power capacity (MVA): Selects the maximum power in MVA.
❑ Tap - End A: Selects the Tap value of the End A.
❑ Tap - End B: Selects the Tap value of the End B.
❑ Tap - End C: Selects the Tap value of the End C.
❑ End A polarity: Selects the current polarity of the End A.
❑ End B polarity: Selects the current polarity of the End B.
❑ End C polarity: Selects the current polarity of the End C.
❑ I0 type: measured/calculated: Selects the measurement type of the neutral current (measured or calculated with
the phase currents).
❑ Neutral Irated (A). Selects the rated current of the neutral.
❑ Neutral CT ratio. Indicates the transformation ratio for the neutral current.
❑ Ground Irated (A). Selects the rated current of the ground.
❑ Ground CT ratio. Indicates the transformation ratio for the ground.
❑ Local end: Selects the reference of the local end (A, B or C).
❑ Local ID: Selects the identification of the local end in the communication messages.

User Manual 43
Table 6 General line differential protection settings
Data Setting Minimum Maximum Step Remarks Type

Scheme type 2 Ends /
enum
Scheme 0 1 3 Ends
RefEnd Reference end 1 3 A/B/C int32
VRtg End A Vrated (kV) 1 10000 0,1 Float
VRtg2 End B Vrated (kV) 1 10000 0,1 Float
VRtg3 End C Vrated (kV) 1 10000 0,1 Float
PhsRat End A CT ratio 1 10000 0,1 Float
PhsRat2 End B CT ratio 1 10000 0,1 Float
PhsRat3 End C CT ratio 1 10000 0,1 Float
PhsInom End A Irated (A) 1 2 1A / 5A int32
PhsInom2 End B Irated (A) 1 2 1A / 5A int32
PhsInom3 End C Irated (A) 1 2 1A / 5A int32
CTInt Intermediate transformer 0 1 NO / YES enum
ConTyp1 Connection type - End A 0 2 Y/D/Z enum
ConTyp2 Connection type - End B 0 2 Y/D/Z enum
ConTyp3 Connection type - End C 0 2 Y/D/Z int32
PhCod2 Phase-shift code - End B 0 11 1 int32
PhCod3 Phase-shift code - End C 0 11 1 enum
EnaZSeq1 Enable Zero-seq Filt End A 0 2 NO / YES enum
EnaZSeq2 Enable Zero-seq Filt End B 0 2 NO / YES enum
EnaZSeq3 Enable Zero-seq Filt End C 0 2 NO / YES Float
MaxPow Max power capacity (MVA) 0 5000 0,1 Float
TapPos1 Tap - End A I (A) 0,1 20 0,01 int32
TapPos2 Tap - End B I (A) 0,1 20 0,01 int32
TapPos3 Tap - End C I (A) 0,1 20 0,01 Float
End A polarity Incoming /
Float
WndP1 0 1 Outgoing
End B polarity Incoming /
Float
WndP2 0 1 Outgoing
End C polarity Incoming /
Float
WndP3 0 1 Outgoing
I0 type:measured/calculated Calculated /
Float
SelI0 0 1 Measured
NeuInom Neutral Irated (A) 1 2 1A / 5A Float
NeuRat Neutral CT ratio 1 10000 0,1 enum
GndInom Ground Irated (A) 1 2 1A / 5A enum
GndRat Ground CT ratio 1 10000 0,1 enum
LocEnd Local end 1 3 A/B/C enum
LocId Local ID 0 2 1
3.1.1 Differential protection communications

The scheme for differential line protection is based on signals and measures exchanged between devices located at the line ends.
Lines of two or three ends are allowed.
Also, lines with intermediate transformer are allowed.
The communication is done by serial channels in the protection device with two possible speeds: 64Kbps or 128kbps and with
interfaces: RS232, Optical Fiber multimode and Optical Fiber single-mode. The available options can be:
❑ FOC
❑ FOP
❑ RS232C
❑ RS485
❑ Optical Fiber single mode with the following options:
 Connector: ST or LC.
 Reach: from 20 to 120km.

User Manual 44
❑ C37.94 with OF multimode. The connector can be ST.

The communication between terminals can be:
❑ Simple. Only one channel is used. Therefore, in case of fault in the channel the communication is lost and differential
protection cannot act.
❑ Redundant. Two channels are used. In case of fault in one channel, the other one is used for the communication.
The operation mode is configurable:
❑ Master/Master. All protection devices communicate with each other's and all of them receive measures for performing
the differential protection function.
❑ Master/Slave. Only one of the protection devices, the master, performs the differential protection function. The master
sends trip order to the slaves to act:
Figure 40 Master/Master Figure 41 Master/Slave
Ia TRIP
Ib Ib
A B B
A
Ic Ic
Ic
Ia
TRIP
C Ib C
For a line end device to function as a master it must be configured as a "master" and communicate with the other devices.
The differential protection function requires for the measures of each end to be synchronized, so that all the measures used
correspond to the same instant of time. The synchronized measures of each end device are shown in the measure status message
of the equipment (Figure 42):
❑ Module and argument of the fundamental component for each phase and line end.
❑ Module and argument of the second harmonic component for each phase and line end.

User Manual 45
Figure 42 All device Measures Status
The synchronization can be done with GPS (PPS or Irig-B signals) and is recommended when the connection between devices is
done with a telecommunication network.
For synchronizing the ends without a GPS, a communication mechanism is used which permits calculate the propagation delay time
of the messages and synchronize the measures.
The backup realized by functions 21 and 67 can be configured for being always enabled or only when communications between
ends fails.
A proprietary communications protocol is used for connecting the devices and for managing error detection and identification of
message frames.
The settings for configuring the communications are attached to the node RTPC (see Table 7):
❑ Connection type. It indicates if the local end device works as:

 Master. It performs the differential protection function with the measures received form the other ends.
 Slave. It does not perform the differential protection function.
❑ Max. Clock jitter (us). If the variation of the propagation delay is greater than this value, the sensitivity of percentage
differential function is increased. The maximum possible value of the setting is 500us and a variation greater than this
value implies the blocking of this function. With C37.94 and G703, this setting must have values according with the
network (generally greater than 250useg).
❑ Allow 21 Backup. Valid for models with distance functions. It indicates the working mode of the distance functions (zones
1-5):
 Always: The distance function works as indicated in its enable setting regardless of the state of communication
between ends.
 On comms Fail. The distance function is operative only in case of communications failure with some of remote
devices. The function 21 must be enabled.
❑ Allow 67 Backup. It indicates the working mode of the overcurrent functions:
 Always: The overcurrent function works as indicated in its enable setting regardless of the state of
communication between ends.
 On comms Fail. The overcurrent function is operative only in case of communications failure with some of
remote devices. The function 67 must be enabled.

User Manual 46
❑ Force ping-pong sync3. If this setting is YES, the synchronization is forced to be ping-pong, a communication method that
allows calculating the propagation time of messages and synchronizing the measurements of the ends.
There are independent configuration settings for each of two possible communications port:
❑ Port x. As long as the port exists in the device, the following options can be selected:
 Disabled. Communication disabled through this channel.
 COM 3. Enables channel communication through port COM3 of the device.
 COM 4. Enables channel communication through port COM4 of the device.
❑ Baud rate x (bauds). Speed for communication through the configured port. Possible speeds to select: 64kbs, 128kbs.
❑ Remote end x. It indicates witch is the remote end connected in this channel (A, B or C) considered in differential current
calculation. The end 'A' corresponds to 1, the 'B' to 2 and the 'C' to 3, in the differential current calculation expression.
❑ Remote ID x. It indicates the number of remote end (0, 1, 2) and is used to identify the messages received from remote
device. Each device includes in its messages the ID configured in "Local ID" setting of PDIF node. For a 2 ends squeme, the
identifier used to check if the other end is the correct one is that setted in the primary port (port 1).
There are signals for indicating the state of communications:
❑ Node: PROT/ITPC1
❑ Settings. A settings table is available. For details, see Table 8.
❑ Logical inputs are not available.
❑ Attached orders are not available.
❑ Outputs: In the Table 10 the output data of communication function is shown:
 Propagation delay unstable. It indicates that the propagation delay of messages exceeds 80 ms or its variation
exceeds 500 us. In this case the percentage differential function is blocked.
 Delay fluctuation. It indicates that propagation delay variation exceed the value configured in "Max. Clock
jitter(us)" setting. In this case the sensitivity of percentage differential characteristic is increased.
 All terminals synchronized. It indicates that all connected devices are synchronized by PPs or Irig-B. If the
"Force ping-pong sync " setting is set to YES, this signal is not activated.
 Comms failure with remote A. It indicates that some communication failure with remote end A occurs.
 Comms failure with remote B. It indicates that some communication failure with remote end B occurs.
 Comms failure with remote C. It indicates that some communication failure with remote end C occurs.
 Remote A master mode. It indicates that the device at end A is working as master.
 Remote B master mode. It indicates that the device at end B is working as master.
 Remote C master mode. It indicates that the device at end C is working as master.
 Diff. Comms config. failure. It indicates that some incoherence is detected in the configuration of
communications node ITPC.
 Port 1 comms.OK. It indicates that the device is communicating through the channel configured in port 1. Once
activated, it is only deactivated if the error rate exceeds 1.5%
 Port 2 comms.OK. It indicates that the device is communicating through the channel configured in port 2. Once
activated, it is only deactivated if the error rate exceeds 1.5%
 Slave differential block. It indicates that local device is working as slave and the differential function does not
operate.
❑ Measures4: In the Table 330 the measurement of communication function are shown:
 Comms. fals Port1(%). Indicates the percentage of frames lost on port 1.
 Comms. fals Port2(%). Indicates the percentage of frames lost on port 2.
❑ Counters5: In the Table 330 the measurement of communication function are shown:
3 Aviable from version 6.11.19.17 of CPU, DSP 3.3 and ICD 8.7.2.2
4
Aviable from version 6.11.19.17 of CPU, DSP 3.3 and ICD 8.7.2.2

User Manual 47
 Comms. failures Port1. Port 1 communication failure counter. Port 1 will be increased from operational to non-
operational.
 Comms. failures Port2. Port 2 communication failure counter. Port 2 will be increased from operational to non-
operational.
❑ Orders5:
 “DOrdCFInP1”: reset of the port 1 communication failure counter.
 “DOrdCFInP2”: reset of the port 2 communication failure counter.
In addition to measures, 16 signals are exchanged. 10 of them are configurable and 6 are fixed. The same signals are sent to all
other devices.
❑ Signals 1 to 10. Can be configured in ISPC/MDIF node (see Table 8). Any signal of the equipment can be selected.
❑ Signal 11: Communication failure with remote end A.
❑ Signal 12: Communication failure with remote end B.
❑ Signal 13: Communication failure with remote end C.
❑ Signal 14: Local device working as master.
❑ Signal 15: Breaker status.
❑ Signal 16: Reserve.
The settings for configuring digital signals to send are in the node ISPC/MDIF (see Table 8):
❑ Signal 1: digital signal, selectable among all the signals of the equipment, for being sent by serial communication in the
first position. It is equivalent to "Teleprotection Signal 1" in the receiver device.
❑ Signal x: digital signal, selectable among all the signals of the equipment, for being sent by serial communication in the
position x. It is equivalent to "Teleprotection Signal x" in the receiver device. "x" from 1 to 10.
From each remote device, 16 digital signals are received. 10 of them are configured in the remote device and 6 are fixed
(common in all devices).
❑ Nodes:
 ISPC/MDIF1. Signals received from remote device 1 (which is connected on the port configured in the "Port 1"
setting)
 ISPC/MDIF2. Signals received from remote device 2 (which is connected on the port configured in the "Port 2"
setting)
❑ Signals received from each remote device (see Table 9). The signals of remote device 1 are shown:
 Channel 1 Rx signal 1. Signal 1 received from remote device 1.
 Channel 1 Rx signal 2. Signal 2 received from remote device 1.
 ….Idem until 10
 Ch1 Comm failure remote A. Communication failure with remote end A received from remote device 1.
 Ch1 Comm failure remote B. Communication failure with remote end B received from remote device 1.
 Ch1 Comm failure remote C. Communication failure with remote end C received from remote device 1.
 Ch1 Local device master. Remote device 1 working as master.
 Ch1 Breaker status. Breaker status in remote device 1.
 Channel 1 Rx signal 16. Reserved.
Remote device 2 signals are the same but replacing "channel 1" by "channel 2" and "remote device 1" by "remote device 2".
5
Aviable from version 6.11.19.29 of CPU and ICD 8.8.5.8

User Manual 48
Table 7. Differential communication settings

ConType Connection type 0 1 Master / Slave int32
Port1 Port 1 Disabled / COM 3 / COM 4 int32
ComsBau1 Baud rate 1 (bauds) 0 1 64Kb / 128Kb int32
RemEnd1 Remote end 1 0 2 A/B/C int32
RemId1 Remote ID 1 0 2 1 int32
Port2 Port 2 0 4 Disabled / COM 3 / COM 4 int32
ComsBau2 Baud rate 2 (bauds) 0 1 64Kb / 128Kb int32
RemEnd2 Remote end 2 0 2 A/B/C int32
RemId2 Remote ID 2 0 2 1 int32
MPrTmus Max. Clock jitter (us) 0 500 10 int32
Back21 Allow 21 Backup 0 1 Allways / On coms Fail int32
Back67 Allow 67 Backup 0 1 Allways / On coms Fail int32
FrSyncPP Force ping-pong sync N0 / YES Booleano
Table 8. Transmitted signal settings

LogInDig1 Signal 1 inref
Table 9 Received Signals
Channel 1 Signal (ISPC/MDIF1) Channel 2 Signal (ISPC/MDIF2) Data Attribute

Channel 1 Rx signal 1 Channel 2 Rx signal 1 DI1 stVal

User Manual 49
Table 10. Teleprotection communication signals
Signal Data Attribute

Propagation delay unstable DelayUns stVal
Delay fluctuation DelayFlu stVal
All terminals synchronized AllSync stVal
Comms failure with remote A CommsFailA stVal
Comms failure with remote B CommsFailB stVal
Comms failure with remote C CommsFailC stVal
Remote A master mode RemAMaster stVal
Remote B master mode RemBMaster stVal
Remote C master mode RemCMaster stVal
Diff. Comms config. failure ComsCnfF stVal
Port 1 comms.OK Port1Coms stVal
Port 2 comms.OK Port2Coms stVal
Slave differential block DifBlkSlv stVal
3.1.2 Differential current calculation

The differential current is calculated with the fundamental harmonic (based on DFT).
Important note: Both devices need to have the same “Z1 angle (º)” (angle of the positive sequence of the line) setting. This setting
is in the node of the locator PROT/RFLO.
Current measurements which are transmitted from an end to the other ends, have a value of zero when the disconnector open is
detected.
Configuration is selected with setting between 2 or 3 ends.
With setting, it is selected if there is an intermediate transformer or not. It affects to the differential current calculation as it is
showed in the following chapters.
3.1.2.1 Without intermediate transformer

The differential and restraint currents calculated depend on the scheme type (2 or 3 ends). For the calculation of the
differential and restraint currents, among the settings shown in Table 1 the following are used:
❑ Scheme type
❑ Intermediate transformer
❑ End A, B and C CT ratio
❑ End A, B and C Irated (A)
❑ End A, B and C polarity
The differential and restraint currents are calculated referenced to the local end.
The differential current of the End 1 (local) used in the protection functions for each phase corresponds to the following
formula:
𝐶𝑇𝑅2 𝐶𝑇𝑅3
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓_1 = 𝐼1 + · 𝐼2 + ·𝐼
𝐶𝑇𝑅1 𝐶𝑇𝑅1 3
𝐶𝑇𝑅 𝐶𝑇𝑅
𝐼1 + 𝐶𝑇𝑅2 · 𝐼2 + 𝐶𝑇𝑅3 · 𝐼3
1 1
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓1 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) =
𝐼𝑟1
Where:
❑ I1, I2 and I3 are the currents of each end.

User Manual 50
❑ CTR1, CTR2 and CTR3 are the current transformation ratio of each end.
❑ Ir1 is the rated currents of the local end (End 1).
3.1.2.1.1 2 ends
The differential and restraint currents are calculated as follows:
𝑅𝑇𝐼
|𝐼1 + 𝑅𝑇𝐼2 · 𝐼2 |
1
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓12𝑑 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) =
𝐼𝑟1
𝑅𝑇𝐼2
|𝐼1 | + |
𝑅𝑇𝐼1 · 𝐼2 |
𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡12𝑑 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) = 2
𝐼𝑟1
The reference of both currents is the end 1 (local).
3.1.2.1.2 3 ends
The differential and restraint currents are calculated as follows:
𝑅𝑇𝐼 𝑅𝑇𝐼
|𝐼1 + 𝑅𝑇𝐼2 · 𝐼2 + 𝑅𝑇𝐼3 · 𝐼3 |
1 1
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓1_3𝑑 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) =
𝐼𝑟1
𝑅𝑇𝐼2 𝑅𝑇𝐼3
|𝐼1 | + | · 𝐼2 | + | ·𝐼 |
𝑅𝑇𝐼1 𝑅𝑇𝐼1 3
𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡1_3𝑑 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) = 2
𝐼𝑟1
The reference of both currents is the end 1 (local).
3.1.2.2 With intermediate transformer

The differential and restraint currents calculated depend on the scheme type (2 or 3 ends). The settings used are shown in
Table 1.
The differential current used in the protection functions for each phase corresponds to the following formula:
𝐼1 𝐼2 𝐼3
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓 = · 𝐶1 + · 𝐶2 + ·𝐶
𝑇𝑎𝑝1 𝑇𝑎𝑝2 𝑇𝑎𝑝3 3
Where:
❑ I1, I2 and I3 are the currents of each end.

❑ Tap1, Tap2 and Tap3 are the restraint currents of each end.
❑ C1, C2 and C3 indicate the phase-shift compensation matrix applied to the current of each end. (Table 11).
Winding curren
Table 15, Table 14 and Table 16 indicate the calculation of the current according to the wiring and the phase shift code. These
calculations correspond to the ABC phase sequence; if ACB is used, C must be replaced with B and B with C in all the equations.
When the phase-shift code difference is negative, add 12 before entering in the table.
Tap:
The CTs are compensated using p.u. currents referred to a current defined as tap. This value can be entered by setting or
calculated from the data of the windings.
If the setting "Max power capacity (MVA)" is zero, TAPn is the setting "Tap - End n I (A)" setting.

User Manual 51
If the "Max power capacity (MVA)" is other than zero, TAPn is obtained by automatic calculation, assuming that the
transformers use a wye connection. Taps are calculated as follows:
𝑃𝑀𝐴𝑋 · 1000 𝑃𝑀𝐴𝑋 · 1000 𝑃𝑀𝐴𝑋 · 1000
𝑇𝐴𝑃1 = 𝑇𝐴𝑃2 = 𝑇𝐴𝑃3 =
√3 · 𝑈1 · 𝐶𝑇1 √3 · 𝑈2 · 𝐶𝑇2 √3 · 𝑈3 · 𝐶𝑇3
Where,
PMAX: is the maximum transmission power of the transformer in MVA.
Ui: is the voltage between phases in kV.
CTi: is the CT transformation ratio of the winding i.
The tap value obtained must be between the following limits:
❑ 0.5 to 20A for Irated=5A

❑ 0.1 to 4A for Irated=1A
Otherwise, it will be set to the maximum value if the result is higher or to the minimum if the result is lower.
Phase-shift compensation:
Differential current calculations are carried out by previously compensating the transformer phase-shift with matrices that
numerically compensate the errors caused by the phase-shift from the power transformer and the CTs of each end.

User Manual 52
Table 11 Calculations according to the zero sequence filter
This table applies to the ABC phase order. If the phase order is ACB, the matrices to apply are mirror images. In other words, code 1
uses code 11.
Zero sequence filter:
This is used to eliminate the zero sequence current in the desired winding. It is used when the transformer does not allow the
zero sequence current (I0) to go through it; an Ynd1, for example. If there is an external ground fault the zero sequence current
will appear in one of the windings, but not in the other one.
These filter is enabled by setting:
❑ NO. The zero sequence filter is not applied.

❑ YES. It is used when the zero sequence current can go through one end (wye) but not through the other end
(delta). In these cases ground faults can provoke the differential to operate incorrectly. It can be avoid subtracting
in the differential current the zero sequence in the necessary windings (it is not detrimental in any case). The
current in each phase is as follows:

User Manual 53
 Ia = Ia – (Ia + Ib + Ic)/3
 Ib = Ib – (Ia + Ib + Ic)/3
 Ic = Ic – (Ia + Ib + Ic)/3
To calculate the restraint current the zero sequence filter is not used. Only the phase shift is taken into account.
3.1.2.2.1 Two ends

The following table shows the connections and the difference between the time codes allowed for each connection. The time code
column (1-0) shows the difference between the time code of the modified winding and the reference winding.
Table 12 Connections of 2 windings
Winding 1 Winding 2 Phase shift code (1-0)

Y y 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Y d 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
Y z 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
D y 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
D d 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
D z 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Z y 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
Z d 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Z z 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Differential current and restraining current:

𝐼1 𝐼2
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓_2𝑑 = | ·𝐶 + ·𝐶 |
𝑇𝑎𝑝1 1 𝑇𝑎𝑝2 2
𝐼 𝐼
| 1 · 𝐶′1 | + | 2 · 𝐶′2 |
𝑇𝑎𝑝1 𝑇𝑎𝑝2
𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡_2𝑑 =
2
3.1.2.2.2 Three ends

The following table shows the connections and the difference in time codes between the reference winding and the windings for
each connection.
The time code column (1-0) shows the difference between the time code of the first modified winding and the reference winding.
The time code column (2-0) shows the difference between the time code of the second modified winding and the reference
winding.
Table 13 Connections of 3 windings
Reference winding Modified win.(1) Modified win. (2) Phase shift code (1 – 0) Phase shift code (2-0)
Y Y y 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Y y d 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
Y d y 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Y d d 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
D y y 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
D y d 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
D d y 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
D d d 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Differential current and restraining current:

𝐼1 𝐼2 𝐼3
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓_3𝑑 = | ·𝐶 + ·𝐶 + ·𝐶 |
𝑇𝑎𝑝1 1 𝑇𝑎𝑝2 2 𝑇𝑎𝑝3 3
𝐼 𝐼 𝐼
| 1 · 𝐶′1 | + | 2 · 𝐶′2 | + | 3 · 𝐶′3 |
𝑇𝑎𝑝1 𝑇𝑎𝑝2 𝑇𝑎𝑝3
𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡_3𝑑 =
2

User Manual 54
Table 14 Group Yy, Dd, Dz, Zd, Zz
Phase shift code difference Reference winding Modified winding Modified winding
A A
A’ = A
0 B’ = B
C’ = C
C B C B
C A
A’ = -B
2 B’ = -C
""
C’ = -A
B
C
A’ = C
4 B’ = A
""
C’ = B
B A
B C
A’ = -A
6 B’ = -B
""
C’ = -C
A
B
A’ = B
8 B’ = C
""
C’ = A
A C
A B
A’ = -C
10 B’ = -A
""
C’ = -B
C

User Manual 55
Table 15 Group Yd, Yz
A
A
C A’ = A-C
1 B’ = B-A
C’ = C-B
C B
A’ = B-C
3 B’ = C-A
""
A C’ = A-B
B A’ = B-A
5 B’ = C-B
""
C’ = A-C
A’ = C-A
7 B’ = A-B
""
C C’ = B-C
A A’ = C-B
9 B’ = A-C
""
C’ = B-A
A’ = A-B
11 B’ = B-C
""
B C’ = C-A

User Manual 56
Table 16 Group Dy, Zy
A
A
C A’ = A-B
1 B’ = B-C
C’ = C-A
C B
A’ = C-B
3 B’ = A-C
""
A C’ = B-A
B A’ = C-A
5 B’ = A-B
""
C’ = B-C
A’ = B-A
7 B’ = C-B
""
C C’ = A-C
A A’ = B-C
9 B’ = C-A
""
C’ = A-B
A’ = A-C
11 B’ = B-A
""
B C’ = C-B
3.1.3 Instantaneous differential protection

A non-restricted (instantaneous) unit per phase is included. It acts when the differential current exceeds the set threshold, not
taking into account the harmonics. Therefore, there is not neither 2nd harmonic restraint nor blocking.
❑ Enabled: Indicates whether the function is enabled or not.

❑ Pickup (xTap): Indicates the minimum value of the pickup of the differential characteristic.
❑ Delay time (ms): Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of the function must be met.
❑ Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function.
❑ General trip: General trip. Indicates if this unit produces general trip or not. For additional details, see the section
corresponding to the recloser (3.13.6).
❑ Reclose Permission: Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in accordance with the recloser's closing
cycle (see reclosure permission mask).

User Manual 57
❑ Enable Events record: Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the function’s
protection events are not generated. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.
Table 17 Instantaneous differential function settings (INSPTDF)

Ena Enabled NO / YES
StrVal Pickup (xTap) 1 20 0,01 Float
OpDlTmms Delay time (ms) 0 60000 1 Float
LogInBlk Blocking input inref
GenTrip General Trip NO / YES Boolean
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO / YES Boolean
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2
Reclose 1 (1P/3P) (3)
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 7 ING
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
There are independent settings, command and outputs.
❑ PROT/INSTPTDF node
❑ Logics settings and inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For further detail, see Table 17.
❑ Command
 “DOrdBlk”: Blocking and unblocking the function. This only takes place if the function is enabled.
❑ Outputs
 Inst. Differential Status: enabled and not blocked.
 Inst. Differential Start: indicates that the unit is started.
 Inst. Differential Ph A Start: start of Phase A function.
 Inst. Differential Ph B Start: start of Phase B function.
 Inst. Differential Ph C Start: start of Phase C function.
 Inst. Differential Trip: indicates that the unit is tripped.
 Inst. Differential Ph A Trip: trip of Phase A function.
 Inst. Differential Ph B Trip: trip of Phase B function.
 Inst. Differential Ph C Trip: trip of Phase C function.
Table 18 Instantaneous differential function outputs (INSPTDF)

Inst. Differential Status StEna stVal
Inst. Differential Start Str general
Inst. Differential Ph A Start Str phsA
Inst. Differential Ph B Start Str phsB
Inst. Differential PhC Start Str phsC
Inst. Differential Trip Op general
Inst. Differential Ph A Trip Op phsA
Inst. Differential Ph B Trip Op phsB
Inst. Differential Ph C Trip Op phsC
3.1.4 Percentage differential protection

The restriction unit (Idif vs Irestraint) is of the double slope type with second harmonic restraint. (See Figure 38, Figure 39 and
Figure 43).

User Manual 58
The settings used are the following ones (Table 19):

❑ Sensitivity (xTap): Indicates the minimum value of the pickup of the differential characteristic.
❑ Rest.current step 1 (xTap): Indicates the restraint current for which the slope 1 starts.
❑ Rest.current step 2 (xTap): Indicates the restraint current for which the slope 2 starts.
❑ Slope 1 (%): Indicates the value of the slope 1.
Table 19 Percentage differential function settings (PTDF)

LoSet Sensitivity (xTap) 0,15 2 0,01 Float
RstA1 Rest.current step 1 (xTap) 0 20 0,01 Float
RstA2 Rest.current step 2 (xTap) 0 80 0,01 Float
Slope1 Slope 1 (%) 5 100 1 Float
OpDlTmms Additional timing(ms) 0 60000 1 Float
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
Note: When there is an intermediate transformer, the sensitivity setting must fulfil the following condition:
𝑇𝑎𝑝𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 · 𝑆𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦 ≥ 0.05 · 𝐼𝑛
If each winding is of a different rated current, the following should be checked separately:
𝑇𝑎𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑑1 · 𝑆𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦 ≥ 0.05 · 𝐼𝑛𝑒𝑛𝑑1
Where In is the rated current (5A or 1A). Otherwise, the sensitivity setting is automatically modified to fulfil it.
The sensitivity and restraint currents are indicated in multiples of tap when there is an intermediate transformer and in rated
current when there is not.
❑ PROT/PTDF node
❑ Command:

User Manual 59
 “DOrdBlk”: Restricted differential unit blocking (87T).

❑ Outputs: The Table 20 shows the output data of the function.
 Percentage Differential Status: enabled and not blocked.
 Percentage Differential Phase A Start: start of Phase A function.
 Percentage Differential Phase B Start: start of Phase B function.
 Percentage Differential Phase C Start: start of Phase C function.
 Percentage Differential Start: indicates that the unit is started.
 Differential Start: indicates the start of the differential functions.
 Percentage Differential Phase A Trip: trip of Phase A function.
 Percentage Differential Phase B Trip: trip of Phase B function.
 Percentage Differential Phase C Trip: trip of Phase C function.
 Percentage Differential Trip: indicates that the unit is tripped.
 Differential Trip: indicates the trip of the differential functions.
Table 20 Percentage differential function outputs (PTDF)

Percent. Differential Status StEna stVal
Percent. Diff Ph A Start Str phsA
Percent. Diff Ph B Start Str phsB
Percent. Diff Ph C Start Str phsC
Percent. Differential Start Str general
Percent. Diff Ph A Trip Op phsA
Percent. Diff Ph B Trip Op phsB
Percent. Diff Ph C Trip Op phsC
Percent. Diff Trip Op general
3.1.5 Directional supervision

This function determines if the fault is internal or external. In the case of an external fault, the sensitivity of the characteristics is
reduced from I restraint = 3·Tap (or 3·Irated) on and the trip is delayed. On the contrary, internal faults are accelerated. A negative
sequence directional is used for ground and phase-phase faults and a positive sequence directional for three-phase faults.
If there is an internal fault, a fault without polarization, or if the directional supervision is disabled, the differential characteristic is
the one set (See Figure 38 and Figure 39).
In the case of external faults, the percentage differential characteristic is modified as in Figure 43: the slope of the percentage
differential characteristic is internally set to 100% from 3 times the tap (or Irated) value on, when there is no saturation and to
150% from 2 times6 the tap when there is saturation. Below this values the tap (or Irated) value the characteristic is not modified.
6
From firmware version 6.0.18.2. Up to this version it was 3 times.

User Manual 60
Figure 43 Differential protection with saturation and directional
Negative sequence directional:
It is used for ground and phase-phase faults.
The negative sequence of each end (module and angle) is calculated.
If there is an intermediate transformer and the phase shift is not zero, the "Angle directional unit" setting is internally taken into
account.
To consider that there is polarization the following conditions must be met:
❑ In the case of a 2 end line:

 There is polarization if the module of the negative sequence of at least one end is higher than the setting "Minimum
threshold (xTap)".
 It is an internal fault if:
 There is polarization on both ends, the absolute value of the angle difference between both ends is below the
setting "Angle directional unit".
 One end has polarization.
A comparison is done in each end. In this case, the negative sequence of the end is compared with the vector sum of the
negative sequence of the other 2 ends. Like the 2 end line case.
 To consider lack of polarization, the three ends must have lack of polarization.
 If at least two of three ends detect and internal fault, then an internal fault is considered.

User Manual 61
Figure 44 Negative sequence directional
Positive sequence directional:
The current of the three phases of at least one of the ends must be greater than 2 times 7 the rated current in order to use the
positive sequence directional. When this condition is not met, the negative sequence directional is used.
The positive sequence of each end (module and angle) is calculated.
If there is an intermediate transformer and the phase shift is not zero, the "Angle directional unit" setting is internally taken into
account:
To consider that there is polarization the following conditions must be met:

 There is polarization if the module of the negative sequence of at least one end is higher than the setting "Minimum
threshold (xTap)".
 There is polarization on both ends, the absolute value of the angle difference between both ends is below the
setting "Angle directional unit" plus 10º.
 One end has polarization.
A comparison is done in each end. In this case, the negative sequence of the end is compared with the vector sum of the
negative sequence of the other 2 ends. Like the 2 end line case.
Figure 45 Positive sequence directional
When the conditions to use the positive or negative sequence directionals are not met (for example three phases faults with
current below 3·In), the differential characteristic used is the one set.
7
From firmware version 6.0.18.2. Up to this version it was 3 times

User Manual 62
The settings used in this function (see Table 21) are:
❑ Enabled: Indicates whether the function is enabled or not. When it is disabled, it does not have effect in the percentage
characteristic.
❑ Minimum threshold (xTap): Indicates the minimum value of the negative or positive sequence, depending on the
directional used.
❑ Angle directional unit: Indicates half the amplitude of the directional unit to consider the fault as internal (See Figure 44
and Figure 45). An angle of 60 degrees is suggested.
❑ Blocking input: Selects the signal, which, when active, blocks the function.
Table 21 Directional supervision settings

Ena Enabled NO / YES Boolean
Vpol Minimum threshold (xTap) 0.02 3 0,01 Float
VhrAng Angle directional unit 45 90 1 Float
There settings, command and outputs are:
❑ PROT/DIFRDIR node
❑ Logics settings and inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For further detail, see Table 21 Directional supervision
settings.
❑ Command
❑ Outputs
 Dir. Supervision Status: enabled and not blocked.
 Internal fault 87: active if there is an internal fault.
 Lack of polarization 87: in the case of a 2 end line, it is active if there is lack of polarization.
Dir. Supervision Status StEna stVal
Internal fault 87 Fw67 general
Lack of polarization 87 FailPol general
3.1.5.1 With intermediate transformer

With an intermediate transformer, the directional supervision has the following differences:
❑ Positive sequence directional:

 It applies when the current of the three phases of at least one of the windings, is greater than 2 times the tap
current.
 If the positive sequence current of the other winding does not exceed 1.2 times the tap value, it is considered
external.
❑ Negative sequence directional: If there is polarization in one winding and the current in the other winding is below 2/3 of
the "Minimum Threshold (xTap)" setting, the fault is considered external. See 3.1.2.2.
❑ If the directional determines internal fault “Internal fault 87”, the 2nd harmonic restraint and blocking units do not affect
the differential protection.

User Manual 63
3.1.6 Ground differential (87LG)

The 87LG differential function8 detects resistive faults that are not detected by the phase differential. The restriction unit
(3𝐼0𝑑𝑖𝑓1 (𝑥𝐼𝑛1) vs 3𝐼0𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡 (𝑥𝐼𝑛1)) is of a single slope (see Figure 46).
It is only available without intermediate transformer.
It uses the calculated zero sequence (3·I0) with the phase currents of each end.
Figure 46 Different configurations of the 87LG differential protection
Applying in each end the corresponding transformation ratios and with the currents referenced to the end 1 (local), the 87LG
differential and restraint currents correspond to the following formulas
For 2 ends schemes:

𝐶𝑇𝑅2
3𝐼0𝑑𝑖𝑓1 = 𝐼1𝐴 + 𝐼1𝐵 + 𝐼1𝐶 + · (𝐼2𝐴 + 𝐼2𝐵 + 𝐼2𝐶 )
𝐶𝑇𝑅1
𝐶𝑇𝑅2
𝐼1𝐴 + 𝐼1𝐵 + 𝐼1𝐶 + · (𝐼2𝐴 + 𝐼2𝐵 + 𝐼2𝐶 )
𝐶𝑇𝑅1
3𝐼0𝑑𝑖𝑓1 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) =
𝐼𝑟1
𝐶𝑇𝑅2
|𝐼1𝐴 + 𝐼1𝐵 + 𝐼1𝐶 | + | · (𝐼2𝐴 + 𝐼2𝐵 + 𝐼2𝐶 )|
𝐶𝑇𝑅1
3𝐼0𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) = 2
𝐼𝑟1
If "Restraint measurement" (GPTDF1.RstMes) 9 setting is selected as "maximum", the 87LG restrint current is calculated as:
3𝐼0𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) = MAX(𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛12𝑑 , 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛12𝑑 , 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛12𝑑 )

𝐴 𝐵 𝐶
For 3 ends schemes:

3𝐼0𝑑𝑖𝑓1 = 𝐼1𝐴 + 𝐼1𝐵 + 𝐼1𝐶 + · (𝐼2𝐴 + 𝐼2𝐵 + 𝐼2𝐶 ) + · (𝐼3𝐴 + 𝐼3𝐵 + 𝐼3𝐶 )
𝐼1𝐴 + 𝐼1𝐵 + 𝐼1𝐶 + · (𝐼2𝐴 + 𝐼2𝐵 + 𝐼2𝐶 ) + · (𝐼3𝐴 + 𝐼3𝐵 + 𝐼3𝐶 )
𝐼𝑟1
|𝐼1𝐴 + 𝐼1𝐵 + 𝐼1𝐶 | + | · (𝐼2𝐴 + 𝐼2𝐵 + 𝐼2𝐶 )| + | · (𝐼3𝐴 + 𝐼3𝐵 + 𝐼3𝐶 )|
3𝐼0𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) = 2
𝐼𝑟1
If "Restraint measurement" (GPTDF1.RstMes) 10 setting is selected as "maximum", the 87LG restrint current is calculated as:
8
9

User Manual 64
3𝐼0𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) = MAX(𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛13𝑑 , 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛13𝑑 , 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛13𝑑 )

𝐴 𝐵 𝐶
Where:
❑ I1x, I2x and I3x are the phase currents of each line end.
❑ CTR1, CTR2 and CTR3 are the current transformation ratios of each end.
❑ Ir1 is the rated current of the local end (End 1).
❑ 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛12𝑑 , 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛12𝑑 , 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛12𝑑 , 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛13𝑑 , 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛13𝑑 , 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛13𝑑 are the restraint currents
𝐴 𝐵 𝐶 𝐴 𝐵 𝐶
calculated for each phase in percentage differential.
The differential and restraint currents used in the protection function correspond to the following formula:
|3𝐼0𝑑𝑖𝑓1 |
𝐼𝑟1
3𝐼0𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1)
The function is blocked if any of the following conditions are met:
❑ The Blocking input (setting) of the function is activated.

❑ It is configured with an intermediate transformer
❑ Any phase current is greater than 1.5 times the rated current.
❑ Any pole of the line breakers is open.
❑ The directional supervision is disabled (see chapter 3.1.5). If it is enabled, 87LG function is blocked when the directional of
I1 or I2 sequences determines external fault. If this directional determines internal fault 87LG is blocked during 60ms
❑ If there are start or trip in any phase of porcentual 87L.
❑ Any end detects block by external fault (52 ½ configuration).
❑ The “Propagation delay unstable” signal is activated (see chapter 3.1.1).
❑ 2nd Harmonic Block-87LG is enabled an no blocked and the 2nd harmonic present in the ground differential current
exceeds the corresponding setting 11 (see "Ground 2nd Harmoinc blocking 87LG").
If the unit is enabled and not blocked, it starts when the magnitude 3𝐼0𝑑𝑖𝑓 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) with the value 3𝐼0𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) is inside the
trip zone of the characteristic curve. If this condition is met during the delay time setting, a three pole trip is initiated.
The settings used are the following ones (Table 22):

❑ Sensitivity (xIr): Indicates the minimum value of the pickup of the differential characteristic.
❑ Rest.current step 1 (xIr): Indicates the restraint current for which the slope starts.
❑ Slope 1 (%): Indicates the value of the slope.
10
11

User Manual 65
Table 22 87LG differential function settings (GPTDF)

LoSet Sensitivity (xIr) 0,1 2 0,01 Float
RstA1 Rest.current step 1 (xIr) 0 7 0,01 Float
OpDlTmms Additional timing(ms) 0 60000 1 Float
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 7 NO / YES Boolean
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2)
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
❑ PROT/GTPTDF node
❑ Command
❑ Outputs. Table 23 shows the outputs of the function:
 87LG Status: enabled and not blocked.
 87LG Start: indicates that the unit is started.
 87LG Trip: indicates that the unit is tripped.
Table 23 87LG differential function outputs (GPTDF)

87LG Status StEna stVal
87LG Start Str general
87LG Trip Op general
3.1.6.1 87LG directional supervision

This function determines if the fault is internal or external.
If the 87LG unit is enabled and the directional asserts internal, the differential characteristic is evaluated; otherwise, it blocks the
87LG unit. If the directional is disabled, it does not disable the 87LG differential evaluation.
To determine that the fault is internal, the zero sequence (3·I0) of each end (module and phase) and the polarization are checked.
The following conditions must be met:

 There is polarization, if the zero sequence (3·I0) of at least one end is greater than the setting “Minimum threshold
(xIr)”.
 There is polarization on both ends and the absolute value of the angle difference between both ends is below the
setting "Angle directional unit".
 Only one end has polarization.
A comparison is done in each end. In this case, the zero sequence (3·I0) of the end is compared with the vector sum of the
zero sequence of the other 2 end. Like the 2 ends line case.

User Manual 66
Figure 47 87LG directional
The settings used in this function (see Table 24) are:
❑ Enabled: Indicates whether the function is enabled or not. When it is disabled, it does not have effect in the 87LG
function.
❑ Minimum threshold (xIr): Indicates the minimum value of the zero sequence.
❑ Angle directional unit: Indicates half the amplitude of the directional unit to consider the fault as internal (See Figure 47).
An angle of 60 degrees is suggested.
❑ Blocking input: Selects the signal, which, when active, blocks the function.
Table 24 87LG directional supervision settings

Vpol Minimum threshold (xIr) 0.1 4 0,01 Float
VhrAng Angle directional unit 45 90 1 Float
❑ PROT/DIFGRDIR node
❑ Command
❑ Outputs. Table 25 shows the outputs of the function
 Dir. supervison status 87LG: enabled and not blocked.
 Internal fault 87LG: active if there is an internal fault.
 Polarization 87LG: it is active if there is polarization.

User Manual 67
Table 25 87LG directional supervision output
Señal Dato Atributo

Dir. supervisIon 87LG status StEna stVal
Internal fault 87LG Fw87LG general
Polarization 87LG Pol87LG general
3.1.7 Saturation detector

This function detects saturation in any of the current transformers. It analyses each phase independently to detect the instant
when the saturation happens.
When a saturation happens, the current value changes suddenly to zero and after that a slower fall, moves closer to the original
signal. It can produce errors in the differential current; so, when the saturation is detected in external faults, the differential unit
sensitivity is reduced.
To detect saturation, the peak current (maximum value of the previous samples) is compared with the present sample and the
increase of the samples. Additionally, the peak current must be greater than 2 times12 the rated current.
Without intermediate transformer, the saturation of one phase only affects to that phase. However, with intermediate transformer
the saturation of one phase affects all the phases.
Figure 48 Transformer saturation
In the case of saturation in any end, the percentage differential characteristic is modified as in Figure 39 where:
❑ The slope of the percentage differential characteristic is internally set to 150% from 2 times12 the tap value or the rated
current (depend on configuration) on. Bellow this value, the characteristic is not modified.
❑ The saturation alarm keeps active while saturation is detected and is active 2 additional cycles after saturation has
finished in all the phases.
Table 26 shows the output of the function. The node is PROT/PTDF.
❑ End A saturation. Activated when saturation is detected in end A.

❑ End B saturation. Activated when saturation is detected in end B.
❑ End C saturation. Activated when saturation is detected in end C.
Table 26 Saturation detector outputs

End A saturation Asat stVal
End B saturation Bsat stVal
End C saturation Csat stVal
12
From firmware version 6.0.18.2. Up to this version it was 3 times.

User Manual 68
3.1.8 2nd Harmonic Restraint

During the energization of a transformer, a high differential current appears for a short time and there are high harmonics also.
To prevent the differential unit from operating, these harmonic currents are used to restrain the measurement so that the higher
the amount of harmonics, the higher the differential current needed to operate the unit.
Ex.: If the restraining setting of the 2nd harmonic is adjusted by 20% and there is a content X of 2nd harmonic in the Idif, X/0.2 is
added to the tripping limit of the differential unit.
Harmonic restraining results in adding the 2nd harmonic present in the differential current to the limit defined by the
characteristic, desensitizing the unit.
The settings of each harmonics restraining function are independent instances of the DFPHAR node.
The settings used in these functions (Table 72 Timed overcurrent unit settings) are:

❑ I2nd/fund. Threshold (%): Restraint slope.
❑ Differential threshold (xTap): Minimum threshold to activate operation.
❑ Enable events record: Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the
function’s protection events are not generated. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.
Table 27 Harmonic restraint settings

PHAREna Enabled 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean
StrVal I2nd/fund. Threshold (%) 10 100 1 Float
PhStr Diff. Threshold (xTap) 0,15 1 0,01 Float
Note: The differential threshold must fulfil the following:
Tap mínimum ·Threshold  0.01·In
❑ PROT/DFPHAR node
❑ Command:
 2nd Harmonic Rst Diff Status: indicates the function status. Active if enabled and not blocked.
 2nd Harm Restraint Diff A: indicates that Phase A of the unit is restraining.
 2nd Harm Restraint Diff B: indicates that Phase B of the unit is restraining.
 2nd Harm Restraint Diff C: indicates that Phase C of the unit is restraining.
 2nd Harm Restraint Diff: indicates that it is restraining at some phase.
Table 28. Outputs of the 2nd harmonic restraint functions

2nd Harm Restraint Diff Op general
2nd Harm Restraint Diff A Op pshA
2nd Harm Restraint Diff B Op pshB
2nd Harm Restraint Diff C Op pshC
2nd Harm Rst Diff Status StEna stVal

User Manual 69
3.1.9 2nd Harmonic blocking

The operation of the differential unit can be blocked by means of the 2nd harmonic blocking. The 2nd harmonic present in the
differential current blocks the restriction unit if the corresponding settings are exceeded.
Ex.: If the restrain setting of the 2nd harmonic is adjusted by 20% and there is a 2nd harmonic content greater than 20% in the Idif,
the tripping limit of the differential unit is blocked.
For a unit to activate its block, the differential current must be within the tripping range of the characteristic.
The blocking can be independent per phase or general depending on the cross blocking setting.
The settings used in these functions (See Table 29) are:

❑ I 2nd/fund threshold (%): Blocking slope.
❑ Differential threshold (xTap): Minimum setting to activate operation.
Table 29 Harmonic blocking settings

PhStr Diff. Threshold (xTap) 0,15 1 0,01 Float
There are independent settings, commands and outputs.
❑ PROT/DPHAR node
❑ Logics settings and inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For further detail, see Table 29 Harmonic blocking settings.
❑ Command:
❑ Outputs: The Table 30. Outputs of the harmonic blocking functions shows the output data of the function.
 2nd Harm Block Diff Status: indicates the function status. Active if enabled and not blocked.
 2nd Harm Block Diff A: indicates that Phase A of the unit is restraining.
 2nd Harm Block Diff B: indicates that Phase B of the unit is restraining.
 2nd Harm Block Diff C: indicates that Phase C of the unit is restraining.
 2nd Harm Block Diff: indicates that it is restraining at some phase.
Table 30. Outputs of the harmonic blocking functions

2nd Harm Block Diff Op general
2nd Harm Block Diff A Op pshA
2nd Harm Block Diff B Op pshB
2nd Harm Block Diff C Op pshC
2nd Harm Block Diff Status StEna stVal

User Manual 70
3.1.9.1 Cross blocking

Tripping of the three phases can be blocked when there is a high percentage of harmonics in any of the phases. This general block is
only permitted during a set time period.
Depending on the enabling of the function the function operates as follows:
❑ No: It is disabled. The blocking is independent per phase. Therefore, the 2nd harmonic of the phase A only blocks the
phase A differential.
❑ Any phase: If there is a 2nd harmonic block in any phase, the 3 phases are blocked in the percentage differential function.
❑ Two of three: If there is a 2nd harmonic block in two phases, the 3 phases are blocked in the percentage differential
function.
❑ Enabled: Indicates whether the function is enabled and the type of operation.
❑ Maximum time (ms): Maximum cross blocking activation time.
❑ Enable events record: Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the function’s
Table 31 Cross blocking settings

NO (0) /
Ena Enabled 0 2 1 Any phase (1) / enum
Two of three (2)
OpDlTmms Maximum time (ms) 0 5000 10 Float
There are independent settings, Command and outputs.
❑ PROT/CBPTRC node
❑ Logics settings and inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For further detail, see Table 31 Cross blocking settings.
❑ Command:
 Cross blocking status: indicates the function status. Active if enabled and not blocked.
 Cross blocking active: indicates that the differential unit is blocked by the cross blocking.
Table 32. Outputs of the harmonics blocking functions

Cross Blocking Status StEna stVal
Cross blocking active Op general
3.1.10 Ground 2nd Harmonic blocking 87LG13

The operation of the 87LG differential unit can be blocked by means of the 2nd harmonic of 3I0 sequence. The 2nd harmonic
present in the ground differential current blocks the 87LG unit if the corresponding setting is exceeded.
The 2nd harmonic of ground differential current is calculated as expressed in the following formulas:
For 2 ends schemes:
13

User Manual 71
𝑅𝑇𝐼2
𝐼2ℎ𝑟 1𝐴 + 𝐼2ℎ𝑟 1𝐵 + 𝐼2ℎ𝑟 1𝐶 + · (𝐼2ℎ𝑟 2𝐴 + 𝐼2ℎ𝑟 2𝐵 + 𝐼2ℎ𝑟 2𝐶 )
𝑅𝑇𝐼1
3𝐼02ℎ𝑟 𝑑𝑖𝑓1 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) =
𝐼𝑟1
For 3 ends schemes:

𝐼2ℎ𝑟 1𝐴 + 𝐼2ℎ𝑟 1𝐵 + 𝐼2ℎ𝑟 1𝐶 + · (𝐼2ℎ𝑟 2𝐴 + 𝐼2ℎ𝑟 2𝐵 + 𝐼2ℎ𝑟 2𝐶 ) + · (𝐼2ℎ𝑟 3𝐴 + 𝐼2ℎ𝑟 3𝐵 + 𝐼2ℎ𝑟 3𝐶 )
3𝐼02ℎ𝑟 𝑑𝑖𝑓1 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) =
𝐼𝑟1
Where:
❑ 𝐼2ℎ𝑟 1𝑋 , 𝐼2ℎ𝑟 2𝑋 , 𝐼2ℎ𝑟 3𝑋 are the 2nd harmonic component of phase currents of each line end.
❑ CTR1, CTR2 and CTR3 are the current transformation ratios of each end.
❑ Ir1 is the rated current of the local end (End 1).
Ex.: If the setting “I 2nd/fund. Treshold (%)” is adjusted by 20% and there is a 2nd harmonic content greater than 20% in the ground
differential current, the tripping of the 87LG unit is blocked.
For this unit to activate its block, the ground differential current must be within the tripping range of the 87LG characteristic.

❑ I 2nd/fund threshold (%): Blocking slope.
Table 33 Ground harmonic blocking settings

There are independent settings and outputs.
❑ PROT/DGPHAR node
❑ Logics settings and inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For further detail, see Table 33.Table 34 shows the output
data of the function.
 2nd Harm Block Diff Status: indicates the function status. Active if enabled and not blocked.
 2nd Harm Block Diff: indicates that 87LG is blocked by ground 2nd harmonic.
Table 34 Outputs of the ground harmonic blocking functions

2nd Harm Block 87LG Op general
2nd Harm Block-87LG Status StEna stVal
3.1.11 Charging current compensation

These functions allow to compensate the charging current of the line in two different ways:
• In transitory regime

User Manual 72
• In steady state14
Each of these functionalities can be enabled separately and have independent settings and signals.
If the steady state compensation function is enabled, it is advisable to also enable the transitory regime compensation function
3.1.11.1 Transitory Charging current compensation

It allows to reduce the sensitivity of the differential characteristic depending on the breaker status of the ends. The breaker status
must be configured in all ends. The sensitivity is reduced in the following ways:
❑ The trip security time is increased (1,5 cycle) when any end is open and the differential current is less than the rated
current.
❑ The sensitivity increases to the value "Minimum threshold(xTap)", when it fulfils any of the following conditions:
 An end is open.
 The time "Delay time (ms)" has not finished, since the breaker of all ends has been closed (to avoid trips during
the energization).
The settings used in this function are (See Table 35):

❑ Minimum threshold(xTap): Indicates the minimum value of the differential current during the charging current
compensation conditions.
❑ Delay time (ms): Indicates the time, after all the breakers were closed, when the charging current compensation
conditions are kept.
Table 35 Charging current compensation settings

Thres Minimum threshold(xTap) 0.08 20 0,01 Float
OpDlTmms Delay time (ms) 10 1000 10 Float
❑ Node PROT/LDPTDF
❑ Commands
❑ Outputs: Table 36 shows the outputs of this function.
 Charging I Status: enabled and not blocked.
 Running Charging I: Active while the differential characteristic sensitivity is reduced by the charging current
compensation.
Table 36 Charging current compensation Outputs

Charging I status StEna stVal
Running Charging I Str general
14
Available from 6.2.19.8 CPU firmware, 4.1.x.x DSP, and 8.7.2.0 ICD versions

User Manual 73
3.1.11.2 Steady State compensation

This feature allows to compensate the differential current with the capacitive current of the line. It is mandatory to have the three
phase to ground voltages to calculate the capacitive current, so it is only available if there are voltage measurements.
It will be blocked and none of the terminals will be compensated in each of following cases:
❑ Blocking input signal is set and activated.

❑ There is an intermediary transformer configured
❑ Fuse Failure is detected
❑ If the CB is opened and “VT Bus” is set to “Busbar”
❑ All three voltages input’s measurements are below 2,5V and thus there is no frequency measurement
❑ Frequency measurement is out of the range [42.5 Hz .. 64.5 Hz].
❑ Power Swing Blocking signal is activated
The settings used in this function are (See Table 37):

❑ VT line or bus side: Indicates where the VT is. If in “Busbar” the function will be blocked while CB opened
❑ Sensitivity increase. (xTap). If the function is enabled and blocked by any of the mentioned causes or any of the ends is set
to not compensate, this value will be added to the percentage differential sensitivity setting.
❑ C1 primary (uF): Total positive sequence capacitance of the line in primary value.
❑ C0 primary (uF): Total zero sequence capacitance of the line in primary value.
Table 37 Steady State compensation settings
Data Setting Min Max Step Remarks Type

VTBus VT line or bus side Line/Bus enum
LoSetIncr Sensitiv. increase(xTap) 0 30 0.01 float
C1PriuF C1 primary (uF) 0 200 0.01 float
C0PriuF C0 primary (uF) 0 200 0.01 float
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO / SI Boolean
❑ Node PROT/PSCC.
 Stationary charging I status. Enabled and not blocked.
 Running Stationary Charging. Active while phase currents are being compensated.
Table 38 Steady State compensation outputs

Stationary charging I status StEna stVal
Running Stationary Charging Str general

User Manual 74
IMPORTANT REMARKS:
Whenever Steady State compensation function is enabled, GEN/ISPCMDIF node digital signals 9 and 10 cannot be used (see Table 8
of chapter 3.1.1). If any of them is configured by the user then the setting is ignored (both signals are reserved for internal use). IT
IS NECESSARY TO AVOID TO CONFIGURE THESE SIGNALS WHENEVER THERE IS AT LEAST ONE TERMINAL WITH THE COMPENSATION
FUNCTION ENABLED.
If this function is enabled, it is also necessary to enable the fuse failure function or if there is an external signal that warns of this
fault, this signal must be assigned to blocking input setting of the compensation function.
Capacitive current calculation
In each end, capacitive current will be as follows:
(2𝐶1 + 𝐶0) (𝐶0 − 𝐶1) (𝐶0 − 𝐶1)

𝐼𝑐𝐴 = 2 · 𝜋 · 𝑓 · ( · 𝑉𝑎 + · 𝑉𝑏 + · 𝑉𝑐)
3 3 3
(𝐶0 − 𝐶1) (2𝐶1 + 𝐶0) (𝐶0 − 𝐶1)
𝐼𝑐𝐵 = 2 · 𝜋 · 𝑓 · ( · 𝑉𝑎 + · 𝑉𝑏 + · 𝑉𝑐)
3 3 3
(𝐶0 − 𝐶1) (𝐶0 − 𝐶1) (2𝐶1 + 𝐶0)
𝐼𝑐𝐶 = 2 · 𝜋 · 𝑓 · ( · 𝑉𝑎 + · 𝑉𝑏 + · 𝑉𝑐)
3 3 3
Where,
❑ C1: Positive sequence capacity in secondary Farads.

❑ C0: Zero sequence capacity in secondary Farads.
❑ Va, Vb, Vc: Local end voltages measured.
❑ f: frequency in Hz, calculated from voltages.
In each end this capacitive current will be compensated proportionally, thus differential current will use the following formula:
𝐼𝑐𝐴 · 𝑗 · 𝑃𝑜𝑙𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑡𝑦𝐹𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟
𝐼𝐴 = 𝐼𝐴𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒𝑑 −
𝑁𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟𝐸𝑛𝑑𝑠
Previous formula belong to phase A, being equivalent for phase B and C, where:
❑ IAmeasured is the measured current in phase A.

❑ PolarityFactor: it is equal to 1 if polarity setting of the terminal is “incoming” and equal to -1 if polarity setting of the
terminal is “outgoing” (see Table 6 of chapter 3.1).
❑ NumberEnds: 2 or 3 ends depends on “Scheme Type” setting (see Table 6 of chapter 3.1).
The Status Report shows the measurement of the capacitive current for each phase:
𝐼𝑠ℎ𝑜𝑤𝑛𝐴 = 𝐼𝑐𝐴 · 𝑗
3.1.12 87N Restricted earth differential

This is used to detect internal ground faults of an area (thus, it is called restricted). This is normally used in grounded Yn-D
transformers with an earthing resistance where the current level in the event of a fault is not enough to activate the differential
unit of the phase. It can also be used in all grounding connections.
The function is performed on the local end.
The function calculates the zero sequence differential current by using the neutral current and ground current of the transformer. If
the difference between both, applied corresponding ratios, exceeds the programmed threshold, a trip signal is given. Direction is
taken into account to allow the trip. Magnitude and angle are used to determine the direction.
The following conditions must be met to trip:
❑ The sensitivity (A) and slope (%) setting must be exceeded.

❑ The directional supervision indicates that the fault is internal.
❑ There is a minimum current through the ground.

User Manual 75
The unit functions as follows:
Sensitivity: The unit starts if the difference between the ground and neutral currents exceeds the programmed threshold after their
respective transformation ratios are applied. Neutral current is obtained from the sum of the phase currents or it is measured in
the neutral transformer (See node PROT/LINPDIF.SelI0)
❑ If IN is obtained from the sum of the phase currents:

𝐼𝑁 = 𝐼𝑎 + 𝐼𝑏 + 𝐼𝑐
𝑅𝑇𝐹
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑆0 = | · (𝐼𝑎 + 𝐼𝑏 + 𝐼𝑐 ) − 𝐼𝐺 |
𝑅𝑇𝐺
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑆0 ≥ 𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔
Where,
RTF: Transformation ratio of the phase CTs (PDIF.PhsRat, PDIF.PhsRat2 or PDIF.PhsRat3 Depending on the local end).
RTG: Transformation ratio of the ground CT (PDIF.GndRat).
❑ If IN is obtained from the transformer measurement:
𝑅𝑇𝑁
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑆0 = | · 𝐼 − 𝐼𝐺 |
𝑅𝑇𝐺 𝑁
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑆0 ≥ 𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔
Where,
RTN: Transformation ratio of the neutral CT (LINPDIF.NeuRat).

RTG: Transformation ratio of the ground CT (PDIF.GndRat).
Slope: In addition, the calculated zero sequence differential current must be greater than a percentage of the maximum phase
current (of the local end).
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑆0 · 𝑅𝑇𝐺
· 100 ≥ 𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒
𝐼𝑏𝑖𝑎𝑠 · 𝑅𝑇(𝐹, 𝐺, 𝑁)
Ibias takes into account the transformation ratio of the setting taken as Ibias when the maximum is selected.
The calculation of Ibias is:
𝐼𝑏𝑖𝑎𝑠𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥{𝐼𝑎 , 𝐼𝑏 , 𝐼𝑐 , 𝐼𝐺 , 𝐼𝑁 , 𝛼}
𝛼 = 𝐼𝑏𝑖𝑎𝑠𝑛−1 · 0.998
The Ibias is selected taking into account the settings of the primary values in order to select a maximum from all the currents.
Minimum current: The minimum grounding current level must always be exceeded (polarization IG or I). If this current does not
exceed 50% of the set sensitivity, the unit is blocked.
Directional: It must indicate that the fault is internal: The grounding and the neutral currents must be opposed. For the fault to be
considered internal, the currents being compared must be at more than 120º. In the event of the neutral current (IN) being below
5% of Irated, the directional is not taken into account, as it is assumed that the failure is internal and there is no current circulating
towards the fault.
Signalling: The trip signals are produced by restricted earth if the directional supervision indicates an internal fault and the
difference between both magnitudes is greater than the threshold and the slope.
The settings for this unit are:

❑ Sensitivity (A): This indicates the sensitivity threshold of the unit.
❑ Slope (%). Indicates the setting of the slope (%).

User Manual 76
❑ Trip Permission by recloser. Indicates the trip and block permission in accordance with the recloser status: standby,
blocked, safety time after reclosing, after closing. It is configured bit by bit; for additional details, see section
corresponding to the recloser (3.13.6.3).
Table 39. Restricted ground settings

PREAEna Enabled NO / YES enum
StrVal Sensitivity (A) 0,05 20 0,01 float
SlpVal Slope (%) 0% 100% 1% float
OpDlTmms Delay time (ms) 0 600000 10 int32
TripPerm Trip Permission by recloser 0 255 1 Bit meaning (1) ING
❑ PROT/PREA node
❑ Command:
 Restricted ground status: is active if enabled and not blocked.
 Restricted ground Start: indicates that the unit is started.
 Restricted ground Trip: indicates that the unit is tripped.
Table 40. Restricted ground function outputs

Restricted Ground Status StEna stVal
Restricted Ground Start Str general
Restricted Ground Trip Op general
3.1.13 Over-excitation by 5th harmonic

This measures the percentage of 5th harmonic current compared to the fundamental current. The trip occurs when the 5th
harmonic in any phase is higher than the setting during the time programmed.

❑ Minimum operating current: indicates the minimum current required to run the unit
❑ Starting threshold (%): indicates the value of the 5th harmonic compared to the fundamental current in order to activate
the unit.
❑ Fixed Time (ms). This indicates the time during which the conditions for function tripping must be met.
❑ Enable events record: Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the function’s

User Manual 77
Table 41. Over-excitation settings for 5th harmonic

Ena Enabled NO / YES enum
BlkValA Minimum operating current 0,1 10 0,01 Float
StrVal Starting threshold (%) 5 100 1 Float
OpDlTmms Fixed Time (ms) 0 600000 10 int32
❑ PROT/H5PFRC node
❑ Logics settings and inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For further detail, see Table 41. Over-excitation settings for
5th harmonic
❑ Command:
❑ Outputs: The Table 42. Over-excitation outputs for 5th harmonic shows the output data of the function.
 5th Harm. Overexcit. Status: is active if enabled and not blocked.
 5th Harm. Overexcit. Start: indicates that the unit is started.
 5th Harm. Overexcit. Trip: indicates that the unit is tripped.
Table 42. Over-excitation outputs for 5th harmonic

5th Harm. Overexcit. Status StEna stVal
5th Harm. Overexcit. Status Str general
5th Harm. Overexcit. Status Op general
3.1.14 Over-excitation v/f.

This function measures the ratio between the voltage measurement and the frequency; trips when this value is higher than the
setting, during the programmed time. It can work with set time or a timed curve.
There are two separate units; each one can trip at set times or with a reverse curve. These are two instances of the same node,
with their independent settings, outputs, etc.
It is active in the 40 to 60Hz frequency range for a 50Hz grid and 50 to 70Hz in a 60Hz grid.
The settings used in these functions are:

❑ Operation type: See in each unit.
❑ Start value (v/f): Set in v/f units. This indicates the value of v/f at which the function is activated.
❑ Drop Out (%): indicates the percentage of the start setting that v/f has to fall under to drop the unit.
❑ Minimum operating voltage: the minimum voltage for the function to run.
❑ Operating curve type: Indicates the type of curve selected from the following options:
 ANSI-EI Extreme. Inverse (1)
 ANSI-MI Very inverse (2)
 ANSI-I Normal inverse (3)
 ANSI-MODI Moderately inverse (4)
 IEC-I Normal inverse (9) or Inverse (11)
 IEC-MI Very inverse (10)
 IEC-EI Extreme. Inverse (12)

User Manual 78
 IEC-IC Short inverse (13)

 IEC-IL Long inverse (14)
 IEC-MIEs Very inverse special (50)
 User curves 1 (33)
 Set time (49)
❑ Time dial. Indicates the time curve in the selected characteristic.
❑ Delay\minimum time (ms). This functionality differs depending on the type of curve selected:
 When the set time curve is selected, this indicates the time during which the conditions for the function to trip
must be met.
 In the rest of the curve, it indicates the minimum response time; in other words, the time selected for tripping
will be the greater between this setting and that associated with the curve.
❑ Reset type. Used to emulate induction. The following can be selected:
 "Instantaneous". If the current falls below the return level, both trip and start relapse instantaneously.
 "Timed". If the v/f falls below the return level, trip relapses instantaneously and start relapse time will depend
on the curve selected (family and index) and on v/f. If the curve selected is set time, start will relapse when the
time programmed for start after falling below the start current elapses, regardless of the v/f setting.

User Manual 79
Table 43. Over-excitation v/f settings
Data Setting Min. Max. Step Remarks Type

Vfase-tierra FUND (6)
Vfase-fase FUND (7)
OpType Operation type Vfase-tierra RMS (8) enum
Vfase-fase RMS (9)
Standard (10)
StrVal Start value (V/Hz) 0,8 40 0,01 Float
Rep Drop Out (%) 50 99 1 Float
BlkValV Minimun operating voltage 50 150 1 Float
ANSI-EI Extreme. Inverse (1)
ANSI-MI Very inverse (2)
ANSI-I Normal inverse(3)
ANSI-MODI Moderately inverse (4)
IEC-I Normal inverse (9) / Inverse (11)
IEC-MI Very inverse (10)
IEC-EI Extreme. Inverse (12)
TmVCrv Operating Curve Type IEC-IC Short inverse (13) enum
IEC-IL Long inverse (14)
IEC-MIEs Very inverse special (50)
User curves 1 (33)
User curves 2 (34)
User curves 3 (35)
User curves 4 (36)
Definite time (49)
TmMult Time dial 0,05 30 0,01 Float
OpDlTmms Operate\minimum time (ms) 0 600000 10 int32
Instantaneous (0)
RstTyp Reset type enum
Timed (1)
❑ PROT/PVPH1 and PROT/PVPH2 node

❑ Inputs:
❑ Outputs:
 V/f Overexcitation status: active if enabled and not blocked.
 V/f Overexcitation Start: indicates that the unit is started.
 V/f Overexcitation Trip: indicates that the unit is tripped.
Table 44 Over-excitation v/f function outputs
Signal Node Data Attribute

V/f Overexcitation status U1 PVPH1 StEna stVal
V/f Overexcitation Start f U1 PVPH1 Str general
V/f Overexcitation Trip U1 PVPH1 Op general
V/f Overexcitation status U2 PVPH2 StEna stVal
V/f Overexcitation Start f U2 PVPH2 Str general
V/f Overexcitation Trip U2 PVPH2 Op general
3.1.15 Function 86
This consists in activating the programmed relays when a differential trip occurs (instantaneous or percentage) or in activating a
signal to be used to block the circuit breaker closing circuits. This function can be enabled or not by settings.

User Manual 80
The signal is deactivated by a programmed signal, such as "Deactivate block Trip 86", pressing the "R" key or by the "Unlock by Trip
(86)" command in PROT/F86PTRC.DO86Ult.
This signal is memorised so that, even if the relay switches off, it is activated again when the relay switches on.

❑ Deactivate Lock Trip (86): Selects the signal which, when active, resets the activation.
❑ Activate Trip 86: activates this signal.
Table 45. Function 86 settings

LogInDe Deactivate block Trip 86 inref
LogIn86 Activate Trip 86 inref
❑ PROT/F86PTRC node
❑ Logics settings and inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For further detail, see Table 45. Function 86 settings
❑ Commands
 “DO86Ult”: Deactivation of block signal by 86 trip
❑ Outputs
 Function 86 status: active if enabled and not blocked.
 Function 86: indicates function activation.
Table 46 Function 86 outputs

Fucntion 86 Status StEna stVal
Function 86 Op general
3.2 DISTANCE UNITS (21)
Protections have measurement units per phase combination (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC, and CA), per characteristic (quadrilateral and Mho)
and per zone of operation (5 zones).
A distance protection measurement unit compares the voltage and current to calculate the impedance and the distance from the relay
to the fault to determine whether the fault is inside or outside the protected zone.
The protection has 5 zones of operation that can be configured independently with different characteristics. The overreaching zones
are useful as backup protection of the adjacent lines. The typical configuration uses three forward zones and one backwards.
❑ The first zone typically covers up to 80% of the protected line, causing instantaneous trips for faults in this zone.
❑ The second zone covers the rest of the line and part of the following one, usually up to 120% of the line. It provides trips or
signalling, depending on how it is programmed. The trips are not instantaneous, there is an additional programmable time for
giving another protection time to clear the fault if it is outside of its line.
❑ The third zone covers the rest of the overreach line and part of the next one. It provides trips or signalling, depending on how it is
programmed. The trips are not instantaneous, there is an additional programmable time available.

User Manual 81
❑ The fourth zone covers the reverse line. It provides trips or signalling, depending on how it is programmed. The trips are not
instantaneous, there is an additional programmable time available.
❑ The fifth zone is used as backup and covers all the zones. It provides trips or signalling, depending on how it is programmed. The
trips are not instantaneous, there is an additional programmable time available.
The distance unit is supervised by the following functions:
❑ A directional function which provides the direction of the fault.

❑ A phase identifier which discriminates the phases involved in the fault, to prevent certain units from overreaching.
❑ Current supervision. This allows fixing the minimum value so that there are distance trips.
The Mho and/or quadrilateral characteristic can be used for both the single phase to ground faults and for phase - phase faults,
depending on which setting is selected.
The distance units for ground faults correct the current measured in each phase with the zero sequence using different compensation
factors for each zone.
In parallel lines, the distance units for ground faults correct the current measured in each phase with the neutral current using a mutual
compensation factor for each zone.
There are independent settings for each of the five zones (Table 47 and Table 48). Zone 1 has inductive tilting settings which do not
exist in the other zones (Table 47).
The reach of zone 1 can vary depending on the "Zone 1 extension" function.
❑ Nodes:
 Zone 1: PROT/PDIS1
 Zone 2: PROT/ZPDIS2
There are 6 settings tables.
The settings used in these functions (Table 47 for zone 1 and Table 48 for the other zones) are as follows:
❑ Directional Mode. Indicates the direction of the characteristics. The directional supervision indicates the direction.
 Non directional (0). The unit acts as non-directional, in other words, directional supervision is disabled. In the
quadrilateral characteristic it operates forward and backwards, and in the Mho characteristic it operates forward
without being limited by directional supervision.
 Forward trip (1). It only operates with forward faults.
 Reverse trip (2). It only operates with backwards faults.
 Reverse start (3). It only operates with backwards faults. It does not generate trips, only starts.
 Forward start (4). It only operates with forward faults. It does not generate trips, only starts. This option is not found in
settings for zone 1.
❑ Characteristic angle (º). Indicates the characteristic angle.
❑ General trip. Indicates if this unit produces general trip or not. For additional details, see the section corresponding to the
recloser (3.13.6).
❑ Reclose Permission. Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in accordance with the recloser's closing
cycle.
❑ Enable Events record. Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the function’s
❑ Phase Enabled (Ph). Indicates whether or not the phase-phase characteristic is enabled.
❑ Phase Characteristic (Ph). Selects the phase-phase characteristic:
 Mho (0). Only the mho characteristic is enabled.
 Quadrilateral (1). Only the quadrilateral characteristic is enabled.

User Manual 82
 Mho and Quad (2). Both characteristics are enabled.

❑ Phase Time (ms) (Ph). Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping must be met.
❑ Polarization Type (Ph)15. Indicates the quadrilateral unit polarization of the quadrilateral phase-phase characteristic:
 I2 (0). Negative sequence polarization.
 I ph-ph (1). Current phase-phase polarization. The X and R impedance calculation uses Vxy/Ixy.
❑ Mho Reach (Ph). Indicates the reach of the mho phase-phase characteristic.
❑ Resistive Reach (Ph). Indicates the resistive reach of the quadrilateral phase-phase characteristic.
❑ X Reach Forward (Ph). Indicates the inductive reach forward of the quadrilateral phase-phase characteristic. If the
"Directional Mode" is set to reverse, the setting “X Reach Reverse (Ph)”is used.
❑ X Reach Reverse (Ph). Indicates the inductive reach backwards of the quadrilateral phase-phase characteristic. If the
"Directional Mode" is set to forward, the setting “X Reach Forward (Ph)”is used.
❑ R Blinder Angle (Ph). Indicates the slope angle of the resistive reach of the quadrilateral phase-phase characteristic.
❑ Tilt Angle Ph (º)16. Indicates the tilting angle of the resistive reach of the quadrilateral phase-phase characteristic. This
setting is only available for zone 1.
❑ Tilt Type (Ph)16. Indicates the tilting type selected for the quadrilateral phase-phase characteristic. This setting is available
for zone 1.
 Disabled (0). Tilting is disabled.
 Time delayed (1). Enabled for the time selected, after fault detected.
 Continuous (2). Continuously enabled.
❑ Tilt Time Ph (ms)16. Indicates the time during which inductive tilting of the phase-phase quadrilateral characteristic is
applied. This setting is available for zone 1.
❑ Block phase units (Ph). Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the phase-phase units.
❑ Enabled (Gnd). Indicates whether the phase-ground characteristic is enabled or not.
❑ Gnd Characteristic (Gnd). Selects the phase-ground characteristic:
 Mho (0). Only the mho characteristic is enabled.
 Quadrilateral (1). Only the quadrilateral characteristic is enabled.
 Mho and Quad (2). Both characteristics are enabled.
❑ Phase-ground time (ms). Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping must be met.
❑ Kn Module. Indicates the zero sequence compensation factor module.
❑ Kn Angle (º). Indicates the zero sequence compensation factor angle.
❑ Km Module. Indicates the mutual compensation factor module of the parallel lines.
❑ Km Angle (º). Indicates the parallel lines mutual compensation factor angle.
❑ Mho Reach (Gnd). Indicates the reach of the mho phase-ground characteristic.
❑ Resistive Reach (Gnd). Indicates the resistive reach of the quadrilateral phase-ground characteristic.
❑ X Reach Forward (Gnd). Indicates the inductive forward reach of the quadrilateral phase-ground characteristic. If the
"Directional Mode" is set to reverse, the setting “X Reach Reverse (Gnd)”is used.
❑ X Reach Reverse (Gnd). Indicates the inductive backwards reach of the quadrilateral phase-ground characteristic. If the
"Directional Mode" is set to forward, the setting “X Reach Forward (Gnd)”is used.
❑ R Blinder Angle (Gnd). Indicates the slope angle of the resistive reach of the quadrilateral phase-ground characteristic.
❑ Tilt Angle Gnd (º). Indicates the tilting angle of the resistive reach of the quadrilateral phase-ground characteristic. This
setting is only available for zone 1.
❑ Tilt Type (Gnd). Indicates the tilting type selected for the quadrilateral phase-ground characteristic. This setting is available
for zone 1.
15
16
Available since firmware version 6.11.19.24 and ICD 8.8.5.6.

User Manual 83
 Disabled (0). Tilting is disabled.

 Time delayed (1). Enabled for the time selected, after fault detected.
 Continuous (2). Continuously enabled.
❑ Tilt Time Gnd (ms). Indicates the time during which inductive tilting of the phase-ground quadrilateral characteristic is
applied. This setting is available for zone 1.
❑ Polarization Type (Gnd). Indicates the quadrilateral unit polarization of the quadrilateral phase-ground characteristic.
 I0 (0). Zero sequence polarization.
 I2 (1). Negative sequence polarization.
 Max (I0, I2) (2). Polarization by the greater of the two (zero sequence and negative sequence).
❑ Block Gnd units. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the phase-ground units.
❑ Block zone. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the zone, in other words, the phase-ground and phase-phase
units.
❑ Timing type. Allows you to select how each zone's trip is delayed after the unit picks up (only zones 2, 3, 4 and 5). The
various modes are described in the section entitled "Timing Type".
❑ Ph-Ph Threshold (A)17. Each phase combination current must be above this value, to allow the corresponding phase-phase
distance unit of the zone. If it is set to zero, it is always allowed.
❑ Ph-Gnd Threshold (A)17. The phase current must be above this value, to allow the corresponding phase-gnd unit of the
distance zones selected as forward. If it is set to zero, it is always allowed.
❑ 3I0 Threshold (A) 17. The neutral current (3I0) must be above this value, to allow the phase-gnd distance unit of the zone. If
it is set to zero, it is always allowed.
17

User Manual 84
Table 47 Zone 1 Settings

Non Directional (0)
DirMod (OpType in Forward Trip (1)
Directional Mode enum
Ed2) Reverse Trip (2)
Reverse Start (3)
LinAng Characteristic Angle (º) 0 90 0.1 float
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2)
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 7 Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
ING
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
PhEna Phase Enabled (Ph) NO / YES Boolean
Mho (0)
PhType Phase Characteristic (Ph) Quadrilateral (1) enum
Mho and Quad (2)
PhDlTmms Phase Time (ms) (Ph) 0 600000 10 int32
PhPoRch Mho reach (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
I2
PhPolType18 Polarization Type (Ph) enum
Iph-Iph
RisPhRch Resistive Reach (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XPhRch X Reach Forward(Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XPhRchB X Reach Reverse (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
PhBlArg R Blinder Angle(Ph) 45 90 0.1 float
PhBaArg18 Tilt Angle Ph (º) -30 30 1 Float
Disabled (0)
PhTmType18 Tilt Type (Ph) Time delayed (1) Enum
Continuous (2)
PhBaArg18 Tilt Time Ph (ms) 0 500 10 Float
LogInPhBlk Block phase units (Ph) inref
GndEna Enabled (Gnd) NO / YES Boolean
Mho (0)
GndType Gnd Characteristic (Gnd) Quadrilateral (1) enum
Mho and Quad (2)
GndDlTmms Phase-ground time (ms) 0 600000 10 int32
K0Fact Kn Module 0 10 0,01 float
K0FactAng Kn Angle (º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
K0MFact Km Module 0 10 0,01 float
K0MFactAng Km Angle(º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
GndPoRch Mho reach (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
RisGndRch Resistive Reach (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XGndRch X Reach Forward(Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XGndRchB X Reach Reverse (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
GndBlArg R Blinder Angle(Gnd) 45 90 0.1 float
GndBaArg Tilt Angle Gnd (º) -10 10 1 float
Disabled (0)
GndTmType Tilt Type (Gnd) Time delayed (1) enum
Continuous (2)
GndBalTmms Tilt Time Gnd (ms) 0 500 10 int32
I0 (0)
GndPolType Polarization Type (Gnd) I2 (1) enum
Max(I0,I2) (2)
LogInGndBl Block Gnd units inref
LogInBlk Block zone inref
PhMinVal19 Ph-Ph Threshold (A) 0 150 0,01 float
GndMinVal19 Ph-Gnd Threshold (A) 0 150 0,01 float
I0MinVal19 3I0 Threshold (A) 0 150 0,01 float
18
Available since firmware version 6.11.19.26 and ICD 8.8.5.7.
19

User Manual 85
Table 48 Zones 2, 3, 4, and 5 Settings

Non Directional (0)
Forward Trip (1)
DirMod (OpType in
Directional Mode Reverse Trip (2) enum
Ed2)
Reverse Start (3)
Forward Start (4)
LinAng Characteristic Angle (º) 0 90 0.1 float
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2)
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
PhEna Phase Enabled (Ph) NO / YES Boolean
Mho (0)
PhType Phase Characteristic (Ph) Quadrilateral (1) enum
Mho and Quad (2)
PhDlTmms Phase Time (ms) (Ph) 0 600000 10 int32
PhPoRch Mho reach (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
I2
PhPolType20 Polarization Type (Ph) enum
Iph-Iph
RisPhRch Resistive Reach (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XPhRch X Reach Forward (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XPhRchB X Reach Reverse (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
PhBlArg R Blinder Angle(Ph) 45 90 0.1 float
LogInPhBlk Block phase units (Ph) inref
GndEna Enabled (Gnd) NO / YES Boolean
Mho (0)
GndType Gnd Characteristic (Gnd) Quadrilateral (1) enum
Mho and Quad (2)
GndDlTmms Phase-ground time (ms) 0 600000 10 int32
K0Fact Kn Module 0 10 0,01 float
K0FactAng Kn Angle(º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
K0MFact Km Module 0 10 0,01 float
K0MFactAng Km Angle(º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
GndPoRch Mho reach (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
RisGndRch Resistive Reach (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XGndRch X Reach Forward(Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XGndRchB X Reach Reverse (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
GndBlArg R Blinder Angle(Gnd) 45 90 0.1 float
I0 (0)
GndPolType Polarization Type (Gnd) I2 (1) enum
Max(I0,I2) (2)
LogInGndBl Block Gnd units inref
LogInBlk Block zone inref
Independent (0)
TimTyp Timing Type Not Delayed (1) enum
Phase not delayed (2)21
PhMinVal22 Ph-Ph Threshold (A) 0 150 0,01 float
GndMinVal22 Ph-Gnd Threshold (A) 0 150 0,01 float
I0MinVal22 3I0 Threshold (A) 0 150 0,01 float
❑ Commands There are 3 commands per zone:

 “DOrdBlk”: Block and unblock zone. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 “DOrdGBlk”: Block and unblock phase-ground units. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 “DOrdPhBlk”: Block and unblock phase-phase units. Only acts when the function is enabled.
20
21
22

User Manual 86
❑ Outputs: Table 49 shows the function's output data (x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5).
 Start Zx. Pickup by QUAD and/or MHO, where x is the zone. Indicates the distance unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or CA)
which has started up. It is independent for each zone.
 Trip Zx. Trip by QUAD and/or MHO, where x is the zone. Indicates the distance unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or CA) which
has tripped. It is independent for each zone.
 Start Mho Zx Y. Pickup by MHO, where x is the zone. Y indicates the distance unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or CA) which has
started up It is independent for each zone.
 Trip Mho Zx Y. Trip by MHO, where x is the zone. Y indicates the distance unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or CA) which has
tripped. It is independent for each zone.
 Start Quad Zx Y. Pickup by QUAD, where x is the zone. Y indicates the distance unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or CA) which
has started up It is independent for each zone.
 Trip Quad Zx Y. Trip by QUAD, where x is the zone. Y indicates the distance unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or CA) which has
tripped. It is independent for each zone.
 Start Zx single-phase. Single phase pickup by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the zone. It is independent for each zone.
 Start Zx Phase-phase. Two phase pickup by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the zone. It is independent for each zone.
 Trip Zx single-phase. Single phase trip by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the zone. It is independent for each zone.
 Trip Zx Phase-phase. Two phase trip by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the zone. It is independent for each zone.
 Zx start. Pickup by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the zone. It is independent for each zone.
 Zx trip. Trip by QUAD and/or Mho trip, where x is the zone. It is independent for each zone.
 Mho zone x ph-gnd Status. Indicates the Mho phase-ground function’s status, where x is the zone. It is active when
enabled and not blocked. It is independent for each zone.
 Mho zone x ph-ph Status. Indicates the Mho phase-phase function’s status, where x is the zone. It is active when
 Quad zone x ph-gnd Status. Indicates the Quad phase-ground function’s status, where x is the zone. It is active when
 Quad zone x ph-ph Status. Indicates the Quad phase-phase function’s status, where x is the zone. It is active when

User Manual 87
Table 49 Mho and Quad Function Outputs
Signal Data (Edition 1) Attribute (Edition 1) Data (Edition 2) Attribute (Edition 2)

Start Zx AN Str phsA Str phsA
Start Zx BN Str phsB Str phsB
Start Zx CN Str phsC Str phsC
Start Zx AB Str phsAB StrAB general
Start Zx BC Str phsBC StrBC general
Start Zx CA Str phsCA StrCA general
Trip Zx AN Op phsA Op phsA
Trip Zx BN Op phsB Op phsB
Trip Zx CN Op phsC Op phsC
Trip Zx AB Op phsAB OpAB general
Trip Zx BC Op phsBC OpBC general
Trip Zx CA Op phsCA OpCA general
Start Mho Zx AN MStr phsA MStr phsA
Start Mho Zx BN MStr phsB MStr phsB
Start Mho Zx CN MStr phsC MStr phsC
Start Mho Zx AB MStr phsAB MStrAB general
Start Mho Zx BC MStr phsBC MStrBC general
Start Mho Zx CA MStr phsCA MStrCA general
Trip Mho Zx AN MOp phsA MOp phsA
Trip Mho Zx BN MOp phsB MOp phsB
Trip Mho Zx CN MOp phsC MOp phsC
Trip Mho Zx AB MOp phsAB MOpAB general
Trip Mho Zx BC MOp phsBC MOpBC general
Trip Mho Zx CA MOp phsCA MOpCA general
Start Quad Zx AN QStr phsA QStr phsA
Start Quad Zx BN QStr phsB QStr phsB
Start Quad Zx CN QStr phsC QStr phsC
Start Quad Zx AB QStr phsAB QStrAB general
Start Quad Zx BC QStr phsBC QStrBC general
Start Quad Zx CA QStr phsCA QStrCA general
Trip Quad Zx AN QOp phsA QOp phsA
Trip Quad Zx BN QOp phsB QOp phsB
Trip Quad Zx CN QOp phsC QOp phsC
Trip Quad Zx AB QOp phsAB QOpAB general
Trip Quad Zx BC QOp phsBC QOpBC general
Trip Quad Zx CA QOp phsCA QOpCA general
Start Zx single-phase GndStr general StrGnd general
Start Zx Phase-phase PhStr general StrPh general
Trip Zx single-phase GndOp general OpGnd general
Trip Zx Phase-phase PhOp general PhOp general
Start Zx Str general Str general
Trip Zx Op general Op general
Mho zone x ph-gnd Status PgndEna general PgndEna general
Mho zone x ph-ph Status PPhEna general PPhEna general
Quad zone x ph-gnd Status PgndEna general PgndEna general
Quad zone x ph-ph Status PPhEna general PPhEna general

User Manual 88
3.2.1 Mho
The Mho characteristic is used with a cosine type phase comparator with Sop and Spol input phasors.
Hence, the signals used in each phase of the Mho characteristic are shown in Table 50. The operation zone must fulfil:
−90º ≤ angle (Sop/Spol) ≤ 90º

Table 50 Mho Characteristic Signals
Unit Sop (Operation signal) Spol (Polarization signal)

AN [ Ia + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Va Va1: current or memorized
BN [ Ib + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Vb Vb1: current or memorized
CN [ Ic + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Vc Vc1: current or memorized
AB Iab  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vab Vab1: current or memorized
BC Ibc  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vbc Vbc1: current or memorized
CA Ica  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vca Vca1: current or memorized
Where:
❑ ZxGF: Phase-ground reach impedance, where x is the zone (one setting per zone). Set in ohms.
❑ ZxF: Phase-phase reach impedance, where x is the zone (one setting per zone). Set in ohms.
❑ ZxAº: Line characteristic angle, where x is the zone (one setting per zone). Set in degrees.
❑ Knx: Zero compensation constant, where x is the zone (one setting per zone).
1 zl0
Kn = ( − 1)
3 zl1
❑ Kmx: Mutual compensation constant (double lines) where x is the zone (one setting per zone).
𝑍𝑚0
𝐾𝑚 =
3 · zl1
❑ Ia, Ib, Ic: Phase currents.

❑ Iab, Ibc, Ica: Phase - phase currents (Iab = Ia - Ib, Ibc = Ib - Ic, Ica = Ic - Ia).
❑ 3 I0: Calculated neutral current.
❑ IN2: Measured neutral current of the parallel line. Only for double lines.
❑ Va, Vb, Vc: Phase voltages.
❑ Vab, Vbc, Vca: Phase - phase voltages.
❑ Va1, Vb1, Vc1: Positive sequence voltages referred to each of the phases. The value will be determined by the supervision
of the memorization voltage (see section 3.4.3).
Equation 1
Va1 1
π
(Vb1) = (e1j·240180 ) · V1
π
Vc1 e1j·120180
❑ Vab1, Vbc1, Vca1: Positive sequence voltages referred to phase - phase voltages. The value will be determined by the
supervision of the memorization voltage (see section 3.4.3).

User Manual 89
Equation 2
𝜋
𝑉𝑎𝑏1 𝑒1𝑗·30180
𝜋
( 𝑉𝑏𝑐1 ) = √3 (𝑒1𝑗·270180 ) 𝑉1
𝑉𝑐𝑎1 𝜋
𝑒1𝑗·150180
The voltages and currents used correspond to the type of fault being analysed; for example, for an A phase to ground fault, the
corresponding phasors will be Ia and Va, for an A and B phase - phase fault, they will be Iab and Vab.
The phase current used for single phase faults correspond to the current measured in each phase compensated with the zero
sequence. Double lines are also compensated with neutral current (mutual compensation factor).
Important: To operate, the phase current analysed has to be greater than 10% of the rated current when the rated current is 1A
and greater than 5% of the rated current when the rated current is 5A.
All of the Mho units are supervised by a reactance unit (Inductive X limit). In this way, the tendency for the Mho units to overreach
is prevented due to the influence of the load beforehand. If the setting "X Reach" is higher than the Mho reach, it will not affect the
characteristic; while if it is set below the Mho reach, it will be reduced.
Zero compensation for double lines (km) is only applicable if the neutral current in the parallel line (IN2) is less than 1.35 times the
neutral current of the protected line (3I0).
If a pole is opened (from the trip), the positive sequence voltage will be calculated without taking into account the open pole's
phase voltage to avoid the distortion from discharging the line capacitors on this open phase. In other words, normally (with 3
poles closed) V1=1/3·(Va+a·Vb+a²·Vc)
If pole A is opened, V1 is calculated as V1=1/2·(0+a·Vb+a²·Vc) even if there is voltage in Va.
Memory is used according to polarization memory supervision. See section 3.4.3.
Figure 49 shows the forward, backwards and non-directional Mho characteristics.
Figure 50 shows the logic diagram of the Mho characteristic for units AN and AB forward.
❑ The other units function in a similar way.

❑ If the unit is configured backwards, the "Reverse" permissions are used.
❑ If the unit is configured as "Non directional", neither "Forward" nor "Backwards" permissions are used.
The input signals of this scheme are:
❑ Pole A open, Pole B open, Pole C open: Activated when the pole "x" is open. They are outputs of the function open pole
detector.
❑ Phase A open (I<), Phase B open (I<), Phase C open (I<): Indicates that the phase current is below the open pole detector
level. They are outputs of the function open pole detector.
❑ Perm. I>ZA Forward. It allows the protection unit AN for the zones configured as forward. It is output of the “MHO and
QUAD unit supervision”.
❑ Perm. I> ZAB Forward. The same as precious for phase AB.
❑ Selector AN. It is the signal “AN/BCN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
❑ Selector AB. It is the signal “CN/ABN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
❑ Fuse failure start. Blocked by the fuse failure start signal.
❑ Power swing blocking. Blocked by the Power swing detector.
❑ Open Pole. Indicates, there´s any pole open. It is output of the function open pole detector.
❑ Load Encroachment. Blocked by the Load Encroachment signal.

User Manual 90
Figure 49 Mho Characteristics

User Manual 91
Figure 50 Mho Logic Diagram
3.2.2 Quadrilateral
The Quadrilateral characteristic is used by making two comparisons for each zone and for each single phase component:
❑ The resistive component of each impedance with the corresponding "Resistive Reach" setting.
❑ The inductive component of each impedance with the corresponding "X Reach forward" or "X Reach reverse" (depending
on the sign and on the "Directional Mode" setting).
The resistive component of the impedance is calculated as follows:
Vpol
R = Re ( )
Ieq

User Manual 92
The inductive component of the impedance is calculated as follows:

̅̅̅̅̅]
Im[Vpol · Ipol
X = Im(ZL1) ·
Im[ZL1 · (Ieq · ̅̅̅̅̅
Ipol)]
For single phase units in zone 1, the inductive component is calculated as follows:
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
Im[Vpol · (Ipol · 1∠Z1BASCA˚)]
X = Im(ZL1) ·
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
Im [ZL1 · (Ieq · (Ipol · 1∠Z1BASCA˚))]
Where:
❑ Vpol: Unit's voltage.

❑ Ieq: Unit's current in the case of single phases corresponding to the compensated current.
❑ ZL1: Line impedance characterised by the "Characteristic angle (º)" (setting).
❑ Z1BASCAº : "Tilt Angle Gnd (º)" (setting). Only for zone 1 and single-phase units.
❑ Ipol: Polarization current.
The intervention of the tilt angle is regulated by two settings (only zone 1). There is a difference between ground units and
biphasic23:
❑ Tilt type: If defined as "Disabled", this angle's value is always 0. If defined as "Time delayed", this angle maintains its
setting value during the time indicated in the setting "Tilt time (ms)". If defined as "Continuous" it always keeps its setting
value.
❑ Tilt time (ms): Time, in ms, for applying the tilt angle after the fault detection, only if the setting "Tilt type " is set as "Time
delayed".
In biphasic faults, tilting does not apply if I2 polarization is adjusted, but the conditions for using it are not met. Using the
quadrilateral unit of phases with autopolarization (I ph-ph), the effect of the previous load must be taken into account on resistive
faults, therefore a tilt of at least -15º is recommended.
Important: To operate, the phase current analysed must be greater than 10% of the rated current.
Figure 51 shows the forward, backwards and non-directional quadrilateral characteristics.
The signals used in each phase of the Quadrilateral characteristic are shown in Table 51. The operation zone must be such that
these two components are less than the set reach.
Table 51 Quadrilateral Characteristic Signals
Unit Ieq Vpol Ipol

AN [ Ia + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx ] Va 3I0, 3I2 or Max(3I0, 3i2)
BN [ Ib + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx ] Vb 3I0, 3I2·a or Max(3I0, 3I2·a)
CN [ Ic + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx] Vc 3I0, 3I2·a2 or Max(3I0, 3I2·a2)
AB Iab Vab I2·a2·j or Iab
BC Ibc Vbc I2·j or Ibc
CA Ica Vca I2·a·j or Ica
Where:
❑ Knx: Zero compensation constant, where x is the zone (one setting per zone). Same setting as for Mho.
❑ Kmx: Mutual compensation constant (double lines), where x is the zone (one setting per zone). Same setting as for Mho.
23
In biphasic units, available since firmware version 6.11.19.26 and ICD 8.8.5.7

User Manual 93
❑ Va, Vb, Vc: Phase voltages.
❑ Vab, Vbc, Vca: Phase - phase Voltages.
❑ I2: Negative sequence of the current calculated using the phase currents.
In the case of single phases faults, the polarization current (Ipol) for each phase is chosen according to the "Quad. type (Gnd)"
setting. There are three possible options: zero sequence, negative sequence, and the maximum of both.
In the case of the phase - phase ones, the polarization current applied in zone 1 depends on the setting " Polarization Type (Ph)";
while the other zones use I2:
❑ I2: It uses inverse sequence, unless the value of the negative sequence is less than the 25% 24 of the positive sequence or
less than the 3% of the rated current or the current of the three phases is greater than three times the rated current. In
that case, the current between the two phases is used. If the conditions for not using I2 are met, tilt is not applied.
❑ I Ph-Ph (autopolarization): The current between the two phases is used. This polarization is recommended when the
protected area is near a transformer. The connection group of this transformer makes the reverse sequence polarization
(I2) not optimal for resistive faults. It should be noted that self-polarization (Iph-ph) does not eliminate the effect of
preload which should be avoided by a tilt setting.
The zero compensation and the memory are applied following the same conditions as for the Mho characteristic.
The Figure 52 shows the logic diagram of the quadrilateral characteristic for units AN and AB forward.
The other units function in a similar way.
❑ If the unit is configured backwards, the "Reverse" permissions are used.

❑ If the unit is configured as "Non directional", neither "Forward" nor "Backwards" permissions are used.
detector.
❑ Perm. I>ZA Forward. It allows the protection unit AN for the zones configured as forward. It is output of the “MHO and
QUAD unit supervision”.
❑ Perm. I> ZAB Forward. The same as precious for phase AB.
❑ Selector AN. It is the signal “AN/BCN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
❑ Selector AB. It is the signal “CN/ABN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
❑ Perm. dir IA Forward. Forward directional permission for phase A. Function "Directional supervision".
❑ Perm. dir IAB Forward. The same as precious for phase AB.
❑ Open Pole. Indicates, there´s any pole open. It is output of the function open pole detector.
❑ Load Encroachment. Blocked by the Load Encroachment signal.
24
Available from DSP firmware version 4.1. Upto this version the limit was 10%.

User Manual 94
Figure 51 Quad Characteristics
Forward Reverse
Non directional

User Manual 95
Figure 52 Logic Diagram for the Quad Characteristic
3.2.3 Timing Type for Tripping

The timing type for tripping indicates how the timing takes place from the start to the trip. This setting can only be selected in the
timed zones: 2, 3, 4 and 5.
There are three25 ways of tripping the distance units:
25
Third mode avalable from 6.11.19.24 FW version, 4.25 DSP FW version, 8.8.5.6 ICD version

User Manual 96
❑ Not delayed. This means that different starts in different phases do not delay the trip. For example, if a start takes place in
phase A and the start condition disappears in this phase, but phase B starts, timing continues. Hence, the trip is not
delayed.
❑ Independent. Each phase has an independent timer. For example, if a start takes place in phase A and the start condition
disappears in this phase, but phase B starts, timing for tripping starts again.
❑ Phase not delayed26. No delay in coindicent phases. Unique start counter for Mho and Quad in each zone. The counter is
maintained if the fault evolves to another with a coincident phase, whether it is quad or mho. If the fault evolves to
another in which no phase coincides, it is counted independently.
In zone 1 (not timed), the "Independent" mode is always applied.
The condition for activating a unit (prior to the trip) is activated if there is a startup in any of the units (this is the case in "Not
delayed" mode) or in the specific unit (this is the case in the "Independent" mode) and the corresponding timing is fulfilled.
In the case of the "Independent" mode, once the corresponding condition for activating the unit has been activated, a seal is
applied so that the condition is not deactivated while there is an overcurrent (only in zones 2, 3, 4 and 5).
In order for a unit to trip, besides the unit having to be activated, there must be a closed phase or V1>80%Vrated for 1/4 cycle.
Figure 53 shows the logic diagram for trip mode without a delay between phases.
detector.
❑ Selector AN/BCN. Enables AN and BC units and blocks the other units. It is the signal “AN/BCN Selector” of the "Phase
selector".
❑ Selector BN/CAN. Enables BN and CA units and blocks the other units. It is the signal “BN/CAN Selector” of the "Phase
selector".
❑ Selector CN/ABN. Enables CN and AB units and blocks the other units. It is the signal “CN/ABN Selector” of the "Phase
selector".
❑ Zone n start AN. Indicated that the AN unit of the zone has started.
❑ Zone n start BN. The same as precious for phase BN.
❑ Zone n start CN. The same as precious for phase CN.
❑ Zone n start AB. The same as precious for phase AB.
❑ Zone n start BC. The same as precious for phase BC.
❑ Zone n start CA. The same as precious for phase CA.
❑ IA>IA Forward. It is the signal "Perm. IA Forward" of the function Overcurrent supervision.
❑ IB>IB Forward. The same as precious for phase B.
❑ IC>IC Forward. The same as precious for phase C.
❑ IAB>IAB Forward. The same as precious for phase AB.
❑ IBC>IBC Forward. The same as precious for phase BC.
❑ ICA>ICA Forward. The same as precious for phases CA.
Figure 55 shows the logic diagram for the independent trip mode for zone 1 in single phase units.
Figure 54 shows the logic diagram for the independent trip mode for zone 1 in two phase units.
26
mode available from 6.11.19.24 FW version, 4.25 DSP FW version, 8.8.5.6 ICD version

User Manual 97
Figure 53 Logic Diagram for Tripping without a Delay between Phases.
Figure 54 Logic Diagram for Two Phase Independent Trip

User Manual 98
Figure 55 Logic Diagram for Single Phase Independent Trip
3.2.4 Zone 1 Extension

The zone 1 extension makes possible to vary the reach of the zone 1 in the first trip, returning to the set reach for the successive
trips. The zone 1 extension is applied when it is enabled and the recloser is in standby and it is not extended after the first reclose.
Zone 1 cannot be extended when the recloser is disabled or blocked.
It is applied to the mho and quadrilateral characteristics, there is an independent compensation factor for ground faults and for
phase - phase faults.
The settings are as follows:
❑ Enabled: Enables and disables the function.

❑ Gnd extension ratio: Factor by which the phase-ground reach setting of zone 1's Mho and Quad characteristics are
multiplied.
❑ Ph - ph extension ratio: Factor by which the phase-phase reach setting of zone 1's Mho and Quad characteristics are
multiplied.
❑ Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the zone extension.
There are settings, commands and outputs:

User Manual 99
❑ Node: PROT/RZEX1
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 52.
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Blocks and unblocks the function. Only acts when the function is enabled.
❑ Outputs: Table 53 shows the function's output data.
 Zone 1 Extension: Indicates that the zone extension is activated.
 Zone 1 Extension Status: Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 52 Zone 1 Extension Settings

Z1GVal Gnd extension ratio 0,1 3 0,001 float32
Z1Gval Ph-Ph extension ratio 0,1 3 0,001 float32
LoghBlk Blocking input uint32
Table 53 Zone 1 Extension Outputs

Zone 1 Extension Z1Ext general
Zone 1 Extension Status StEna general (stVal in Ed2)
Figure 56 shows the logic diagram corresponding to the zone 1 extension.
The recloser signals used in this function are:
❑ Recloser in standby. Indicates the recloser is in standby status.

❑ Reclosing 1 in progress. Indicates the recloser´s cycle 1 is ongoing.
❑ Safety time 1st reclosing. Indicates the recloser is in safety time after the first reclose.
❑ Recloser Blocked. Indicates the recloser is blocked.
Figure 56 Zone 1 Extension Logic Diagram
Setting
ENABLED = YES
DIGITAL INPUT
Blocking input
DIGITAL SIGNAL
Recloser in standby WORKING SETTING
Working Z1GF=Z1GF·Gnd extension ratio
DIGITAL SIGNAL Working Z1F =Z1F·Ph-Ph extension ratio
Reclosing 1 in progress
WORKING SETTING
DIGITAL SIGNAL Working Z1GF=Z1GF
Safety time 1st reclosing Working Z1F =Z1F
DIGITAL SIGNAL
Recloser Blocked
3.2.5 High Speed zone

There is a high speed operation unit for zone 1 (only forward) and another one for zone 4 (only backwards), based on the half cycle
DFT, for both characteristics (Mho and Quad).
The high speed zone 1 can only be active if zone 1 is programmed forward and enabled.

User Manual 100
The high speed zone 4 will only be active if zone 4 is programmed backwards and enabled.
The high speed zone is made by including an internal zone in zone 1 and zone 4 such as that |X|<80%ZxF, |R|<20%ZxF, where ZxF is
the reach of the corresponding zone.
❑ Zone 1 enabled: Indicates whether the high speed zone 1 is enabled or not.
❑ Zone 4 enabled: indicates whether the high speed zone 4 is enabled or not.
❑ Zone 1 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the high speed zone 1.
❑ Zone 4 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the high speed zone 4.
There are settings and outputs.
❑ Node: PROT/PHSZ1
 High speed zone 1: Indicates whether or not the high speed zone 1 is enabled and not blocked.
 High speed zone 4: Indicates whether or not the high speed zone 4 is enabled and not blocked.
Table 54 High Speed Operation Zone Settings

Z1QEna Zone 1 enabled NO / YES enum
Z4QEna Zone 4 enabled NO / YES enum
LogInZ1Bl Zone 1 Blocking input inref
LogInZ4Bl Zone 4 Blocking input inref
Table 55 High Speed Zone Outputs

High speed zone 1 StEna1 general StEna1 stVal
High speed zone 4 StEna4 general StEna4 stVal
Figure 57 shows the Mho and Quad characteristics of the high speed zone 1.

User Manual 101
Figure 57 High speed zone Mho and Quad Characteristics
Figure 58 shows the functional logic diagram of the high speed operation Mho characteristic.
The input signals of this function are the indicated in the mho and quadrilateral units.

User Manual 102
Figure 58 Logic Diagram for the High Speed Mho Characteristic

User Manual 103
3.2.6 Phase selector

The phase selector determines the fault type, allowing the trip as a result of this and blocking the others. The phases involved in the
fault are selected as follows:
Two conditions are defined:
Condition 1 (3 · I0 > 5% ∙ 𝐼𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑝ℎ𝑎𝑠𝑒)&(3 · 𝐼0 > 10% ∙ 𝐼1) (1)
Zero sequence current greater than 5% of Irated (0.25A for Irated=5A and 0.05A for Irated=1A) and the percentage must be greater
than the 10% of the maximum phase current.
Condition 2 (3 · I2 > 5% ∙ 𝐼𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑝ℎ𝑎𝑠𝑒)&(𝐼2 > 10% ∙ 𝐼1) (2)
Negative sequence current greater than 5% of Irated (0.25A for Irated=5A and 0.05A for Irated=1A) and the percentage must be
greater than the 10% of the positive sequence.
THREE PHASE FAULTS
It has to fulfil at least one of the following conditions:
❑ If neither (1) nor (2) are fulfilled.

To signal three-phase failure, there must be biphasic fault, Zxab, Zxbc, Zxca simultaneously in the same zone (even if the
three phase-phase units are enabled, it will not be signalled unless this condition is fulfilled).
❑ The values of the phase-phase currents minus their prefault values are analysed. The three of them must be greater than
the 70% of the maximum value. In that case, the fault is signaled as ABC and the biphasic units are enabled.
PHASE-PHASE FAULTS
If only (2) is fulfilled, the fault is phase-phase.
When the fault detector is disabled, all the phase-phase units are enabled.
When the fault detector is enabled, the angle is analysed to determinate the faulted phases:
𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼2 ) − a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(∆𝐼1 )
Where:
❑ I1 is the positive sequence current. Fault current minus prefault current.

❑ I2 in the negative sequence current.
The prefault value is captured from the fault detector. When the fault is detected, the previous 2 cycles of the current are captured.
This value is subtracted to the fault positive sequence.
Figure 59 Two phases fault identifier
SINGLE PHASE OR PHASE PHASE TO GROUND FAULTS
If (1) and (2) are fulfilled, the fault is to ground (single phase or phase - phase). In this case, the angular selector becomes involved.
If the angles are not involved, the detection is made by voltages.

User Manual 104
If a single phase / two phase fault to ground is detected, only the units involved will be enabled. If it is a CN/ABN, units CN and AB
are enabled and the others are blocked.
Figure 60 Phase Identifier
UNDETERMINED IDENTIFICATION
If (1) is fulfilled but (2) is not, all of the units will be enabled, since the relay cannot determine what type of fault is processed.
67NQ SINGLE PHASE FAULTS27
In the 67NQ teleprotection scheme, single pole trips are allowed. In case of single phase or two phase to ground faults, another
selector is used to determinate the fault type.
The angle is analysed to determinate the fault type:
𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼2 ) − a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(∆𝐼1 )
Where:
❑ I1 is the positive sequence current. Fault current minus prefault current.

❑ I2 in the negative sequence current.
Figure 61 AN and BCN fault identifier Figure 62 BN and CAN fault identifier Figure 63 CN and ABN fault identifier
All of the units will be enabled if there is an open pole, in other words, if a single-pole opening has occurred.
Outputs are available.
❑ Node: PROT/DISPTRC1
❑ Outputs: Table 56 shows the output data.
 AN/BCN Selector: Enables the AN and BC units and blocks the others.
 BN/CAN Selector: Enables the BN and CA units and blocks the others.
 CN/ABN Selector: Enables the CN and AB units and blocks the others.
 Unknown Fault: Enables all of the units.
27
Available from firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.4

User Manual 105
 ABC Fault: Enables units AB, BC and CA. This is only indicated if there has been a simultaneous fault in AB, BC and CA.
 Phase - Phase Fault: Enables the phase-phase units.
 Ground fault: It is activated when there is a ground fault.
 AN Selector27: Enables the AN unit and blocks the others.
 BN Selector27: Enables the BN unit and blocks the others.
 CN Selector27: Enables the CN unit and blocks the others.
 AB Selector27. Enables the AB unit and blocks the others.
 BC Selector27: Enables the BC unit and blocks the others.
 CA Selector27: Enables the CA unit and blocks the others.
Table 56 Phase Identifier Outputs

AN/BCN Selector PhId PhANBCN PhAnBCn stVal
BN/CAN Selector PhId PhBNCAN PhBnCAn stVal
CN/ABN Selector PhId PhCNABN PhCnABn stVal
Unknown Fault UnFa general UnFa general
ABC Fault ABCFaDet general ABCFltDet general
Phase - Phase Fault PhFaDet general PhFltDet general
Ground Fault GndFaDet general GndFltDet general
AB Selector PhAB stVal PhAB stVal
BC Selector PhBC stVal PhBC stVal
CA Selector PhCA stVal PhCA stVal
AN Selector PhAN stVal PhAN stVal
BN Selector PhBN stVal PhBN stVal
CN Selector PhCN stVal PhCN stVal
Figure 64 shows the phase identifier’s logic diagram.
detector.
If any of the poles is open, the phase selector is not taken into account. In this case, the loops containing the open pole are blocked.
E.g.: If the open pole is A, loops AB, CA and AN are blocked. The trip will be three-pole.
In the case of a three-phase opening, if only the breaker status generic input is programmed (not by pole); the phase selector
continues being used. In other words, only the phase selector is disabled in the case of a single-phase opening. In this case, the fault
type is defined by the active distance units. If any of the phase-phase distance units is activated, a phase-phase fault will be
indicated.

User Manual 106
Figure 64 Phase Identifier's Logic Diagram
3.2.7 Fault detection

This function detects the start of the fault by checking the differences in the actual zero sequence, positive sequence and negative
sequence currents, with those in two cycles before.
It is activated when:
❑ The difference between the actual measurement of the current's positive sequence (I1) and the measurement two cycles
beforehand exceeds the 10% of the rated current and one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
 The difference between the current measurement of the negative sequence of the current (I2) and the
measurement two cycles before exceeds 4% of the rated current.
 The difference between the current measurement of the zero sequence of the current (I0) and the
measurement two cycles before exceeds 4% of the rated current.
 The positive sequence of the current (I1) increases by more than 25% of the rated current compared to two
cycles before.
When one of these thresholds is exceeded or if the phase selector identifies a fault which is not three-phase, the fault detector is
activated. The fault detector stays active for 30ms after the previous situation disappears. If a distance unit or an overcurrent
startup occurs while the fault detector is active, the fault detector will stay active for 30 ms after the trip disappears.
Table 57 shows the output data.
❑ Outputs. Table 57 shows the output data.
 Fault detection: Indicates a fault has been detected.
Table 57 Fault Detector Outputs.

Fault detection FaDet general FltDet general

User Manual 107
The following figure shows the functional logic diagram of the fault detector.
❑ 2 Phase Fault. It is the signal "Phase - Phase Fault" of the Phase selector.
❑ Ground fault. It is the signal "Ground fault" of the Phase selector.
❑ Start signals. Indicates that any of the started units generate the general start signal.
Figure 65 Fault Detector's Logic Diagram
3.2.8 Mho and Quadrilateral Unit Supervision

The supervision unit disables the startup of the MHO and QUAD units, differentiating between single-phase and phase-phase units.
Figure 66 shows the supervision logic diagram for single-phase units.
Single-Phase Units. The blocking conditions for phase-ground units are as follows:

User Manual 108
❑ If the phase identifier does not detect the fault in the corresponding loop.
❑ If ((3·I0>5%·Irated phase) AND (3·I0>10%·I1)) is not fulfilled. Phase identifier condition 1.
❑ No current can be seen in the single-phase unit's phase ("detection logic of the open pole by current").
❑ Ia, Ib, Ic (as corresponds) must be 10% greater than Irated for In=1A and 5% for In=5A, even if the supervision by means
of overcurrent is not been used.
❑ If the power swing function is activated and if it is programmed for this.
❑ If the fuse failure function is activated.
❑ If the polarization voltage is less than 2V. Supervision is in directional supervision mode.
❑ If the overcurrent supervision (only single phase units) is enabled, when the phase current or the neutral current (3·I0),
are less than the phase threshold and neutral threshold of the selected direction for that zone.
❑ If there is no directional permission. The phase-ground units are supervised by the polarised directional units by phase
currents, by negative sequence and by zero sequence. In the case of an open pole, only phase current polarizations are
used.
The input signals of these schemes are:
detector.
❑ Load Encroachment. Blocked by the load Encroachment signal.
Figure 67 shows the supervision logic diagram for phase-phase units.
Phase-phase units. The blocking conditions for phase-phase units are as follows:
❑ If the phase selector does not detect the fault in the corresponding loop.
❑ No current is detected in one of the unit phases. If there is no current in A, neither unit AB nor CA unit are activated
("detection logic for open pole by current").
❑ Iab, Ibc, Ica must be 10% greater than Irated for In=1A and 5% for In=5A, even if the overcurrent supervision is not been
used.
❑ If the power swing function is activated and if it is programmed for this.
❑ If the fuse failure function is activated.
❑ If the polarization voltage is less than 2V. Supervision is in directional supervision mode.
❑ If phase-phase unit overcurrent supervision has been enabled. If the phase-phase overcurrent of the direction
corresponding to the zone is not exceeded. The threshold must be exceeded in each phase of the ones involved in the
unit (e.g. in unit AB, currents of phases A and B and AB.
❑ If the "load encroachment" unit is activated.
❑ If there is no directional permission.

User Manual 109
Figure 66 Logic Diagram from Single-Phase Unit Supervision

User Manual 110
Figure 67 Logic Diagram from Phase-Phase Unit Supervision
There are settings and outputs.

User Manual 111
❑ Outputs: Table 59 shows the output data.

 Permission I>ZA Forward. Indicates that it allows the AN distance unit to operate for zones programmed forward.
 I>ZB Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the BN distance unit to operate for zones programmed forward.
 I>ZC Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the CN distance unit to operate for zones programmed forward.
 I>ZAB Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the AB distance unit to operate for zones programmed forward.
 I>ZBC Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the BC distance unit to operate for zones programmed forward.
 I>ZCA Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the CA distance unit to operate for zones programmed forward.
 I>ZA Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the AN distance unit to operate for zones programmed backwards.
 I>ZB Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the BN distance unit to act. For zones programmed backwards.
 I>ZC Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the CN distance unit to operate for zones programmed backwards.
 I>ZAB Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the AB distance unit to operate for zones programmed backwards.
 I>ZBC Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the BC distance unit to operate for zones programmed backwards.
 I>ZCA Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the CA distance unit to operate for zones programmed backwards.
Table 58 MHO and QUAD Unit Supervision Settings

Table 59 MHO and QUAD Unit Supervision Outputs

Perm. I> ZA Forward ZFw phsA ZFw phsA
Perm. I> ZB Forward ZFw phsB ZFw phsB
Perm. I> ZC Forward ZFw phsC ZFw phsC
Perm. I> ZAB Forward ZFw phsAB ZFwAB general
Perm. I> ZBC Forward ZFw phsBC ZFwBC general
Perm. I> ZCA Forward ZFw phsCA ZFwCA general
Perm. I> ZA Reverse ZRv phsA ZRv phsA
Perm. I> ZB Reverse ZRv phsB ZRv phsB
Perm. I> ZC Reverse ZRv phsC ZRv phsC
Perm. I> ZAB Reverse ZRv phsAB ZRvAB general
Perm. I> ZBC Reverse ZRv phsBC ZRvBC general
Perm. I> ZCA Reverse ZRv phsCA ZRvCA general
3.2.8.1 Overcurrent Supervision

This unit supervises the startup of the MHO and QUAD units. If a series of conditions, which depend on the settings, are not
fulfilled, it disables the startup of the corresponding units. The settings are independent for phase-ground, phase-phase,
forward and backwards.
Single-Phase Units:
Supervises the phase-ground units of the distance characteristics (mho and quadrilateral).
It is used to measure each phase measurement and neutral measurement (In or 3I0 as selected).
It compares the current of each phase with the threshold established as the setting, activating when it is exceed and
deactivating when it is lower than 95%. The analysis is made for each phase independently, generating an output per phase,
which allows the distance units of each phase to operate if the current measured is greater than the threshold and disables it
otherwise.

User Manual 112
To have permission in a phase, both the measurements of the phase and of the neutral (3I0) must exceed their corresponding
thresholds.
❑ Enabled: Enables and disables the function:

❑ Phase Forward threshold (A): the phase current must be above this value, to allow the corresponding phase-gnd unit of
the distance zones selected as forward.
❑ Phase Reverse threshold (A): the phase current must be above this value, to allow the corresponding phase-gnd unit of
the distance zones selected as backwards.
❑ 3I0 Forward threshold (A): the neutral current (3I0) must be above this value, to allow the phase-gnd distance zones
selected as forward.
❑ 3I0 Reverse threshold (A): the neutral current (3I0) must be above this value, to allow the phase-gnd distance zones
selected as backwards.
❑ Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks single-phase overcurrent supervision.
❑ Node: PROT/GRZOS1
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Blocking and unblocking of single-phase overcurrent supervision. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 IA Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the AN distance unit to act (for zones
programmed forward).
 IB Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the BN distance unit to act (for zones
 IC Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the CN distance unit to act (for zones
 IA Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the AN distance unit to act (for zones
programmed backwards).
 IB Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the BN distance unit to act (for zones
 IC Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the CN distance unit to act (for zones
 Gnd supervision status. Indicates that phase-ground overcurrent supervision is activated and not blocked.
Table 60 Single-Phase Overcurrent Settings

FwPhVal Phase Forward threshold (A) 0,05 150 0,01 float32
RvPhVal Phase Reverse threshold (A) 0.05 150 0,01 float32
FwNVal 3I0 Forward threshold (A) 0.05 150 0.01 float32
RvNVal 3I0 Reverse threshold (A) 0.05 150 0.01 float32

User Manual 113
Table 61 Single-Phase Unit Overcurrent Outputs

Perm. IA Forward IFw phsA
Perm. IB Forward IFw phsB
Perm. IC Forward IFw phsC
Perm. IA Reverse IRv phsA
Perm. IB Reverse IRv phsB
Perm. IC Reverse IRv phsC
Gnd Supervision Status StEna general
Phase-Phase Units:
Supervises the phase-phase units of the distance characteristics (mho and quadrilateral).
It compares the phase - phase current of each two phases and the current of each phase with the threshold established as the
setting, activating when it exceeds it and deactivating when it is lower than 95%. The analysis is made for each phase
combination independently, generating an output per combination, which allows the distance units of each combination to act
if the current measured is greater than the threshold and disables it otherwise.
The threshold must be exceeded for the phase - phase current and for each phase involved in the phase - phase current.
❑ Enabled: Enables and disables the function:

❑ Forward threshold (A): each phase combination current must be above this value, to allow the corresponding phase-
phase distance unit of the zones selected as forward.
❑ Reverse threshold (A): each phase combination current must be above this value, to allow the corresponding phase-
phase distance unit of the zones selected as forward.
❑ Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks phase-phase overcurrent supervision.
❑ Node: PROT/PHRZOS1
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Blocking and unblocking of phase-phase overcurrent supervision. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 IAB Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the AB distance unit to act (for zones
 IBC Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the BC distance unit to act (for zones
 ICA Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the CA distance unit to act (for zones
 IAB Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the AB distance unit to act (for zones
 IBC Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the BC distance unit to act (for zones
 ICA Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the CA distance unit to act (for zones
 Ph-Ph supervision status. Indicates that phase-phase overcurrent supervision is activated and not blocked.

User Manual 114
Table 62 Phase-Phase Unit Overcurrent Settings

FwPhVal Forward threshold (A) 0,05 150 0,01 float32
RvPhVal Reverse threshold (A) 0.05 150 0,01 float32
Table 63 Phase-Phase Unit Overcurrent Outputs

Perm. IAB Forward IFw phsAB IFwAB general
Perm. IBC Forward IFw phsBC IFwBC general
Perm. ICA Forward IFw phsCA IFwCA general
Perm. IAB Reverse IRv phsAB IRvAB general
Perm. IBC Reverse IRv phsBC IRvBC general
Perm. ICA Reverse IRv phsCA IRvCA general
Ph-Ph Supervision Status StEna general StEna stVal
3.2.8.2 Directional supervision

It supervises the direction of the fault such that it only allows faults that occur in the direction programmed in each zone. This is
applicable to all distance units (Mho and Quad).
Functioning is conditioned by polarization memory supervision. Hence, if the logic indicates that the memorised voltage must
be used, this is used during the set time. See section 3.3.3.
Table 64 shows the comparisons for determining the direction of the different types of faults:
Table 64 Directional Supervision Comparisons.
Unit S1 S2 Calculus
Ia  ZGDIRA set
AN Va1 mem |Angle(S1)- Angle(S2)| < ZGAMPA/2
& I2_A  ZGDIRA set
Ib  ZGDIRA set
BN Vb1 mem |Angle(S1)- Angle(S2)| < ZGAMPA/2
& I2_B  ZGDIRA set
Ic  ZGDIRA set
CN Vc1 mem |Angle(S1)- Angle(S2)| < ZGAMPA/2
& I2_C  ZGDIRA set
AB Iab  ZDIRA set Vab1 mem |Angle(S1)- Angle(S2)| < ZAMPA/2
BC Ibc  ZDIRA set Vbc1 mem |Angle(S1)- Angle(S2)| < ZAMPA/2
CA Ica  ZDIRA set Vca1 mem |Angle(S1)- Angle(S2)| < ZAMPA/2
Where:
❑ ZGDIRA set: Phase-ground angle. Set in degrees.

❑ ZGAMPA: Phase-ground amplitude. Set in degrees.
❑ ZDIRA set: Phase-phase angle. Set in degrees.
❑ ZAMPA: Phase-phase amplitude. Set in degrees.
❑ Vx1 mem: Positive sequence of the phase or combination of corresponding phases. The value is conditioned by
polarization memory supervision (see section 3.4.3). Where x indicates the corresponding unit.
In order for the directional to function, the voltage must be greater than 2V and the currents must be greater than 5% of the
rated current, for Ir=5A. and 10% of the rated current, for Ir=1A.
The direction is determined by the comparison between the positive sequence voltage and current (see Figure 68).
It is indicated as forward if:
|angle(S1) − angle(S2)| < 𝐴𝑚𝑝𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒/2

User Manual 115
There is a 5º zone between the non-trip zone and the trip zone in which the current directional status is maintained.
The torque angle is the directional setting angle with the setting amplitude.
This directional is used in all zones and fault types.
Figure 68 Directional Supervision
In the case of an open pole, only phase current polarizations are used, not by I2.
The maximum torque angle will correspond to the directional angle set with an adjustable margin.
This directional is applied to all zones and types of phases.
❑ Ph-Ph angle (º). Indicates the directional angle for phase-phase supervision.
❑ Ph-Ph amplitude (º). Indicates the angle that covers the trip zone for phase-phase supervision.
❑ Gnd angle (º). Indicates the directional angle for single-phase supervision.
❑ Gnd amplitude (º). Indicates the angle that covers the trip zone for single-phase supervision.
There are settings and outputs:
❑ Node: PROT/RDIR1
 Permission dir IA Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows distance unit AN to act (for zones programmed
forward).
 Permission dir IB Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit BN to act (for zones
 Permission dir IC Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit CN to act (for zones
 Permission dir IAB Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit AB to act (for zones
 Permission dir IBC Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit BC to act (for zones
 Permission dir ICA Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit CA to act (for zones
 Permission dir IA Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit AN to act (for zones

User Manual 116
 Permission dir IB Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit BN to act (for zones
 Permission dir IC Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit CN to act (for zones
 Permission dir IAB Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit AB to act (for zones
 Permission dir IBC Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit BC to act (for zones
 Permission dir ICA Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit CA to act (for zones
Figure 69 shows the supervision logic diagrams for single-phase and phase-phase directional supervision.

User Manual 117
Figure 69 Single-Phase and Phase-Phase Zone Supervision
Table 65 Directional Supervision Settings

PhDirArg Ph-Ph angle (º) 0 359 1 float32
PhAmp Ph-Ph amplitude (º) 90 170 1 float32
GndDirArg Gnd angle (º) 0 359 1 float32
GndAmp Gnd amplitude (º) 90 170 1 float32

User Manual 118
Table 66 Directional Supervision Outputs

Permission dir IA Forward DirFw phsA DirFw phsA
Permission dir IB Forward DirFw phsB DirFw phsB
Permission dir IC Forward DirFw phsC DirFw phsC
Permission dir IAB Forward DirFw phsAB DirFwAB general
Permission dir IBC Forward DirFw phsBC DirFwBC general
Permission dir ICA Forward DirFw phsCA DirFwCA general
Permission dir IA Reverse DirRv phsA DirRv phsA
Permission dir IB Reverse DirRv phsB DirRv phsB
Permission dir IC Reverse DirRv phsC DirRv phsC
Permission dir IAB Reverse DirRv phsAB DirRvAB general
Permission dir IBC Reverse DirRv phsBC DirRvBC general
Permission dir ICA Reverse DirRv phsCA DirRvCA general
3.2.9 Capacitive Voltage Transformer (CVT) Lines

With the use of capacitive voltage transformers (CVTs), in the event of a very sharp voltage drop, faults very close to the relay or
with high SIR (Source Impedance Ratio), give rise to very serious transients in the voltage, which tend to cause overreaches in the
distance units. In conditions in which the current is very small, generally when the value of the SIR is very high with respect to the
line impedance, this problem will arise. To avoid it, the voltages are filtered when the seriousness of the transients is very acute.
3.2.9.1 Capacitive Voltage Transformer Logic

If capacitive voltage transformers are being used, this function will be enabled by the settings.
In order to determine when the voltages must be filtered, two conditions must be fulfilled: A fault has occurred and there is a
risk of overreaching (for which the SIR estimation will be used).
To estimate the SIR, the lowest value obtained from amongst all the units indicated by the phase identifier will be used. They
are compared with a threshold which will depend on the CVT type (which can be selected through the settings). If the SIR value
calculated is greater than the threshold specified and a fault is detected using the fault detector, then the filtered voltages will
be used. Otherwise, the voltages will be calculated as usual.
The filtered voltages are only used in zone 1 of the distance functions (unit 21). A digital bandpass filter is used.

❑ CVT type: Selects the type of supervision and with it, the threshold used to compare the SIR calculated to determine
whether or not filtered voltages should be used.
 Passive: SIR 10 threshold.
 Active: SIR 1 threshold.
❑ Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the CVT function.
❑ Node: PROT/RCVT1
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. Only acts when the function is enabled.
❑ Outputs: See Table 68..
 “CVT enabled”: Indicates that the CVTs are active and not blocked.
 "Voltages filtered": This is activated while filtered voltages are being used.

User Manual 119
Table 67 CVT Settings

CVTType CVT Type Passive / Active enum
Table 68 CVT Output

CVT Enabled StEna general (stVal in Ed2)
Voltages filtered FilterV general
3.2.9.2 SIR Calculation

SIR is understood as the source impedance ratio with respect to the line impedance.
It is calculated with the half cycle dft. The calculation is performed on the units indicated by the phase identifier. The SIR value
to bear in mind will always be the one corresponding to the one with lowest value amongst the units indicated by the phase
identifier.
The SIR and the option to use or not to use filtered voltages is assessed when the fault detector is activated. Depending on the
CVT supervision type ("Passive" or "Active"), different thresholds will be used to determine whether or not to used filtered
voltages.
If the SIR is greater than 1 for the actives or 10 for the passive ones, the high speed tripping is blocked and filtered voltages are
used in Zone 1, for both MHO and QUAD characteristics.
The formulation for calculating the SIR is shown in Table 69:
Table 69 Calculating the SIR for Different Units.
SIR for single phase faults SIR for single phase-phase faults
(Vrated/((Ia+3·I0  kn1 +IN2  kM1 )·Z1))-1 (Urated/(Iab·Z1))-1
(Vrated/((Ib+3·I0  kn1 +IN2  kM1 )·Z1))-1 (Urated/(Ibc·Z1))-1
(Vrated/((Ic+3·I0  kn1 +IN2  kM1 )·Z1))-1 (Urated/(Ica·Z1))-1
Where:
❑ Urated: Rated phase-phase voltage (3·Vrat).

❑ Vrated: Rated phase-ground voltage.
❑ Z1: The module of the positive sequence impedance of the line.
❑ Kn1: Zero-sequence compensation for zone 1.
1 zl0
Kn = ( − 1)
3 zl1
❑ Km1: Mutual compensation constant for zone 1 (double lines).

𝑍𝑚0
𝐾𝑚 =
3 · zl1


User Manual 120
3.3 SIGNALS AND COMMANDS
In this section all the protection functions are shown, the ones included in each model are indicated in the functional description.
3.3.1 Signals
There are available general signals that group data from several functions (see Table 70). These signals are in the node
PROT/PTRC1. In every model will be only the signals of the available functions.
❑ General Start. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip is started.
❑ General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip is activated.
❑ Pole A General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip of pole A is activated.
❑ Pole B General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip of pole B is activated.
❑ Pole C General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip of pole C is activated.
❑ OC General Start. Indicates that one of the overcurrent units is started.
❑ OC General Trip. Indicates that one of the overcurrent units is activated.
❑ 51 Start. Indicates that any of the time delay phase overcurrent unit is started.
❑ 51N Start. Indicates that one of the time delay neutral overcurrent units is started.
❑ 51ES Start. Indicates that one of the time delay earth system overcurrent units is started.
❑ 51UN Start. Indicates that one of the time delay unbalance overcurrent units is started.
❑ 51 Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay phase overcurrent units is activated.
❑ 51N Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay neutral overcurrent units is activated.
❑ 51ES Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay earth system overcurrent units is activated.
❑ 51UN Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay unbalance overcurrent units is activated.
❑ 50 Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous phase overcurrent units is started.
❑ 50N Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous neutral overcurrent units is started.
❑ 50ES Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous earth system overcurrent units is started.
❑ 50UN Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous unbalance overcurrent units is started.
❑ 50 Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous phase overcurrent units is activated.
❑ 50N Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous neutral overcurrent units is activated.
❑ 50ES Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous earth system overcurrent units is activated.
❑ 50UN Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous unbalance overcurrent units is activated.
❑ Voltage Start. Indicates that one of the voltage units is started.
❑ IOV Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous overvoltage units is started.
❑ IUV Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous undervoltage units is started.
❑ Minimum F Start. Indicates that one of the underfrequency units is started.
❑ Maximum F Start. Indicates that one of the overfrequency units is started.
❑ dfdt Start. Indicates that one of the df/dt units is started.
❑ Voltage Trip. Indicates that one of the voltage units is activated.
❑ IOV Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous overvoltage units is activated.
❑ IUV Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous undervoltage units is activated.
❑ Minimum F Trip. Indicates that one of the underfrequency units is activated.
❑ Maximum F Trip. Indicates that one of the overfrequency units is activated.

User Manual 121
❑ dfdt Trip. Indicates that one of the df/dt units is activated.
Table 70 General signals

General Start Str general
General Trip Op general
Pole A General Trip Op phsA
Pole B General Trip Op phsB
Pole C General Trip Op phsC
OC General Start StrOC stVal
OC General Trip OpOC stVal
51 Start Str51 stVal
51N Start Str51N stVal
51ES Start Str51ES stVal
51UN Start Str51UN stVal
51 Trip Op51 stVal
51N Trip Op51N stVal
51ES Trip Op51ES stVal
51UN Trip Op51UN stVal
50 Start Str50 stVal
50N Start Str50N stVal
50ES Start Str50ES stVal
50UN Start Str50UN stVal
50 Trip Op50 stVal
50N Trip Op50N stVal
50ES Trip Op50ES stVal
50UN Trip Op50UN stVal
Voltage Start StrV stVal
IOV Start StrIOV stVal
IUV Start StrIUV stVal
Minimum F Start StrFmin stVal
Maximum F Start StrFmax stVal
dfdt Start StrDfDt stVal
Voltage Trip OpV stVal
IOV Trip OpIOV stVal
IUV Trip OpIUV stVal
Minimum F Trip OpFmin stVal
Maximum F Trip OpFmax stVal
dfdt Trip OpDfDt stVal
3.3.2 Commands
Certain commands enable actions to be taken on the protection functions. Each function specific characteristics are listed in the
corresponding section. This section lists the general functions. Table 71 shows the functions affected by the general commands.
The blocking/ unblocking commands are stored so that they are maintained when the device is switched off. If a function is enabled by
the settings and blocked by a command, the status shows that is deactivated. All the functions blocked by a command are unblocked
with the command associated to the function, each time an ICD is sent or by the general unblocking command (DOrdRstBlk node
PROT/LLN0). Available from firmware version 5.18.15.4 and ICD version 6.1.13.31.
Since firmware version 6.11.19.29 and ICD 8.8.5.8, the function are unblocked when an ICD is sent, the setting "Reset block after ICD"
must be configured as "YES".
The general protection commands are in the PROT/PTRC1 node, allowing the blocking/unblocking of the associated functions:
❑ DOrdPrBl. Protection block. Affects all the protection functions.

❑ DOrdPhBl. Phase block. Affects all the phase functions.
❑ DOrdInsBl. Instantaneous block. Affects all the instantaneous functions.
❑ DOrdInsPhBl. Instantaneous phase block. Affects all the phase instantaneous functions.

User Manual 122
❑ DOrdTmPhBl. Timed phase block. Affects all the timed phase functions.
❑ DOrdINBl. Instantaneous neutral block. Affects all the neutral instantaneous functions.
❑ DOrdVBl. Voltage block. Affects all the voltage functions.
❑ DOrdDirBl. Directional block. Affects all the directional functions. Equivalent to giving directional permission.
Table 71 Command by functions
DOrdPrBl DOrdPhBl DOrdInsBl DOrdInsPhBl DOrdTmPhBl DOrdINBl DOrdVBl

Current units
Phase instantaneous (50)    
Phase timed (51)   
Neutral instantaneous (50)   
Neutral timed (51) 
Ground instantaneous (50)   
Ground timed (51) 
Unbalance instantaneous  
Unbalance block 
46FA Open phase  
37 Undercurrent  
50CSC Second harmonic restraint 
49 Thermal image 
Voltage/ Frequency / Power units
Phase overvoltage timed    
Phase instantaneous overvoltage     
Zero sequence overvoltage timed  
Zero sequence instantaneous overvoltage    
V2 overvoltage timed  
V2 instantaneous overvoltage   
Phase undervoltage timed    
Phase instantaneous undervoltage     
Frequency (81M/m) 
Frequency rate of change (81R) 
Minimum real power 
Maximum real power 
Real power inversion 
Reactive power inversion 
Minimum apparent power 
Maximum apparent power 
Remaining protection functions
Load encroachment 
Fuse failure 
SOFT Switch onto fault 
Line fault 
Breaker
50BF Single-pole/Three-pole breaker failure 
3.4 CURRENT UNITS
3.4.1 General overcurrent description
3.4.1.1 Timed characteristics

When enabled and unblocked, the unit acts when the setting value is exceeded during the programmed time.
To reset, the current must fall below 95% of the setting value.
The different curve options are shown in the curve appendix.

User Manual 123
The timed unit can be configured with a minimum response time, that is, a limit that prevents any unit from tripping below a
minimum time when the trip time corresponding to the curve in use is met. This is done to prevent timed trips from being
faster than instantaneous trips. It is configured with an additional time setting, so that if it is set to zero, there is no such limit.
The settings used in these functions (Table 72) are:
❑ Enabled. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not.

❑ Operation type.28 To be selected between:
 “Trip” generates function trips.
 “Start”, in which the function generates a pickup but no trips.
 “Block by IOC1”. The timed unit’s trip is blocked if the instantaneous unit 1 has picked up. The timed pickup is
not deactivated.
 “Block by IOC1, 2”. The timed unit’s trip is blocked if the instantaneous unit 1 or 2 has picked up. The timed
pickup is not deactivated.
 “Block by IOC1, 2, 3”. The timed unit’s trip is blocked if the instantaneous unit 1, 2 or 3 has picked up. The
timed pickup is not deactivated.
 "Inhib. by IOC1". The timed unit’s trip is blocked if the instantaneous unit 1 has picked up. The timed start is
not disabled and the timed pickup is not deactivated.
 "Inhib. by TOC1". The timed unit’s trip is blocked if the timed unit 1 has picked up. The timed start is not
disabled and the timed pickup is not deactivated.
disabled and the timed pickup is not deactivated.
disabled the timed pickup is not deactivated.
❑ Start value (A). Set in secondary amperes. It indicates the current value for which the function is activated.
❑ Operating Curve Type Indicates the type of curve selected from the options:
 ANSI-I Normal inverse(3)
 IEC-I Normal inverse (9) or Inverse (11)
 Definite time (49)
 IEEE Moderate Inverse (89)
 IEEE Very Inverse (90)
28
Options "Inhib. By X" are available from firmware version X.X.21.2 and ICD version 8.11.0.0

User Manual 124
 IEEE Extremely Inverse (91)

❑ Time dial. Indicates the time curve within the selected characteristic.
❑ Delay/minimum time (ms). It has a different functionality depending on the type of the curve selected:
 When the selected curve is a definite time, it indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of the
function must be met.
 In the rest of the curve, it indicates the minimum response time. i.e., in order for a trip to be produced, the time used
will be the greater between this setting and the time associated to the curve.
❑ Torque control. Selects the function’s directional type:
 “NO”. Acts as non-directional.
 “Forward”. Acts when the directional indicates forward.
 “Reverse”. Acts when the directional indicates reverse.
❑ Behaviour with Fuse fail. Defines the function’s action if a fuse failure is detected.
 "Idle". The fuse failure does not affect the function.
 "Non Directional". The function acts as non-directional when a fuse failure is detected.
 "Block". The function blocks, i.e., it does not act, when a fuse failure is detected.
 "Enable". The function is enabled when a fuse failure is detected.
❑ Reset type. Allows the emulation of the induction operation. The following options are available:
 "Instantaneous". If the current drops below 95% of the setting value, both the trip and the pickup reset
instantaneously.
 "Timed". If the current drops below 95% of the setting value, the trip drops out instantaneously, while the pickup reset
time will depend on the selected curve (family and index) and the current. If a definite time curve is selected, the
pickup will reset upon the completion of the time programmed for the pickup as of the moment in which it falls below
the pickup current, regardless of the current value.
❑ Operating Quantity. Indicates the measurement used by the function (52 ½ models only allow "Phasor"):
 "Phasor". Uses the fundamental measurement, without including harmonics.
 "RMS". Uses the effective value, including harmonics.
❑ Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function.
❑ Time delay cancel Input. Selects the signal which, when active, generates an instantaneous trip regardless of the set time.
recloser (3.13.6).
❑ Reclose perm. (R1,R2,R3,R4). Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in accordance with the recloser's
closing cycle (see reclosure permission mask).
protection events are not generate. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.

User Manual 125
Table 72 Timed overcurrent unit settings

PTOCEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Trip (1)
Start (2)
Block by IOC1 (3)
Block by IOC1,2(4)
Block by IOC1,2,3(5)
Optype Operation type28 Inhib. by IOC1 (6) enum
Inhib. by IOC2 (7)
Inhib. by IOC3 (8)
Inhib. by TOC1 (9)
Inhib. by TOC2 (10)
Inhib. by TOC3 (11)
StrVal Start value (A) 0,02 150,0 0,01 float32
IEC-IC Short inverse (13)
TmACrv Operating Curve Type enum
User curves 1 (33)
User curves 2 (34)
User curves 3 (35)
User curves 4 (36)
Definite time (49)
IEEE Moderate Inverse (89)
IEEE Very Inverse (90)
IEEE Extremely Inverse (91)
ANSI: 0,5 - 30 step 0,1
TmMult Time dial 0,025 30 0,005 IEC: 0,025-1,5 step 0,005 float32
IEEE: 0,025-15 step 0,005
OpDlTmms Delay/minimum time (ms) 0 600000* 10 int32
NO (0)
DirMod Torque control Forward (1) enum
Reverse (2)
Idle (0)
Non Directional (1)
FFailBeh Behaviour with Fuse fail enum
Block (2)
Enable (3)
Instantaneous (0)
RstTyp Reset type enum
Timed (1)
Phasor (0)
MesTyp Operating Quantity enum
RMS (1)
LogInBlk Blocking Input inref
LogInCaTm Time delay cancel Input inref
GenTrip General trip NO / YES Boolean
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1)
Reclose 2 (2)
Reclose 1-2 (3)
Reclose 3 (4)
Reclose 1-3 (5)
Reclose 2-3 (6)
ReclPerm Reclose perm. (R1,R2,R3,R4) 0 15 enum
Reclose 1-2-3 (7)
Reclose 4 (8)
Reclose 1-4 (9)
Reclose 2-4 (10)
Reclose 1-2-4 (11)
Reclose 3-4 (12)
Reclose 1-3-4 (13)

User Manual 126
Reclose 2-3-4 (14)

Reclose 1-2-3-4 (15)
MaskEna Enable Events record NO / YES Boolean
3.4.1.2 Instantaneous characteristics

When enabled and unblocked, the unit operates when the setting value is exceed during the programmed time.
To reset, the current must fall below 95% of the setting value.
The settings used in these functions (see Table 73) are:

❑ Operation type. To be selected between:
 “Trip” generates function trips.
 “Start”, in which the function generates a pickup but no trips.
❑ Start value (A). Set in secondary amperes. It indicates the current value for which the function is activated.
❑ Delay time (ms). Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of the function must be met.
❑ Torque control. Selects the function’s directional type:
 “NO”. Acts as non-directional.
 “Forward”. Acts when the directional indicates forward.
 “Reverse”. Acts when the directional indicates reverse.
❑ Behaviour with Fuse fail. Defines the function’s action if a fuse failure is detected.
 "Idle". The fuse failure does not affect the function.
 "Non Directional". The function acts as non-directional when a fuse failure is detected.
 "Block". The function blocks, i.e., it does not act, when a fuse failure is detected.
 "Enable". The function is enabled when a fuse failure is detected.
❑ Operating Quantity. Indicates the measurement used by the function:
 "Phasor". Uses the fundamental measurement, without including harmonics.
 "RMS". Uses the effective value, including harmonics.
❑ Time delay cancel Input. Selects the signal which, when active, generates an instantaneous trip regardless of the setting
time.
recloser (3.13.6).

User Manual 127
Table 73 Instantaneous overcurrent unit settings

PIOCEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Trip (1)
Optype Operation type enum
Start (2)
StrVal Start value (A) 0,02 150,0 0,01 float32
OpDlTmms Delay time (ms) 0 600000* 10 int32
NO (0)
DirMod Torque control Forward (1) enum
Reverse (2)
Idle (0)
Non Directional (1)
FFailBeh Behaviour with Fuse fail enum
Block (2)
Enable (3)
Phasor (0)
MesTyp Operating Quantity enum
RMS (1)
LogInTIn Time delay cancel input inref
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1)
Reclose 2 (2)
Reclose 1-2 (3)
Reclose 3 (4)
Reclose 1-3 (5)
Reclose 2-3 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3 (7)
Reclose 4 (8)
Reclose 1-4 (9)
Reclose 2-4 (10)
Reclose 1-2-4 (11)
Reclose 3-4 (12)
Reclose 1-3-4 (13)
Reclose 2-3-4 (14)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (15)
3.4.2 Directional characteristics

The overcurrent units have a setting (torque control) for selecting the unit’s directionality:
❑ No: the unit acts as non-directional.

❑ Forward: the unit acts as directional in a forward direction.
❑ Reverse: the unit acts as directional in a reverse direction.
There are logical trip direction inversion inputs that allow the different units' trip direction to be inverted.
There are logical “function X directional inhibition” inputs that allow the directional units to which they are applied to be converted
into non-directional. These inputs allow for a unit's conversion into non-directional in the case of a fuse failure, for example.
The negative sequence unit can be used in phases and in neutral.
3.4.2.1 Phase directional

The operation can be selected among: quadrature, quadrature 2 out of 3, positive sequence (S1) and positive + negative
sequences (S1+S2). The S2 directional has its own settings.
This function’s general settings and those applied in the quadrature, quadrature 2 out of 3 and positive sequence criteria are in
the PROT/RDIR1 node:
❑ Directional method. Indicates the directional criterion used.

User Manual 128
 “Quadrature”. Analyses each phase independently.

 “Quad. 2 out of 3”. Analyses each phase independently. However, in order to grant permission it must see the
direction in at least two phases.
 “Positive sequence”. Analyses the positive sequence.
 “S2 and S1 sequence”. Analyses the negative and positive sequences. The positive sequence is analysed only when the
negative sequence indicates polarization failure.
❑ Torque angle (º). Indicates the directional angle. Applies to quadrature, quadrature 2 out of 3 and positive sequence.
❑ Minimum V polarization (V). Indicates the minimum voltage for polarization; the direction cannot be reliably determined
below this value.
❑ Zone amplitude (º). Indicates the angle covered by the trip zone.
❑ Permission with low Vpol. Indicates the functioning of the directional when the polarization voltage is below the
threshold. If set to “YES”, it enables an overcurrent trip if the memorized polarization voltage is lower than the minimum
polarization voltage; if set to “NO”, the overcurrent trip is not allowed under those conditions.
❑ 67 directional Inversion. Selects the signal which, when active, inverts the trip direction.
❑ Phase directional blocking. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function. When the directional is blocked, it is
issues permission for the trip.
Table 74 Phase directional settings (Quadrature and positive sequence)

Quadrature
Quad. 2 out of 3
PolQty (PolSel in Ed2) Directional method enum
Positive sequence
S2 and S1 sequence
ChrAng Torque angle (º) 0 359 1 float32
Vpol Minimum V polarization (V) 1 200 0,1 float32
Amp (AmpVal in Ed2) Zone amplitude (º) 90 170 1 float32
EnaOpn (TripVpol in Ed2) Permission with low Vpol NO / YES Boolean
LogInInvDir 67 directional Inversion inref
LogInBlDir Phase directional blocking inref
The minimum polarization current is considered as 50% of the minimum setting of the three timed and instantaneous phase
units (50/51) that are enabled. When all units are disabled, the minimum polarization current is considered as 50% of the phase
rated current.
The quadrature and positive sequence units settings, commands and outputs.
❑ Node: PROT/RDIR1
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking.
 “DOrdInvDir”. Inverts the directional trip direction.
❑ Outputs: Table 75 shows the function’s output data.
 67 Forward X. The detected direction indicates forward. It is independent for each phase.
 67 Reverse X. The detected direction indicates reverse. It is independent for each phase.
 Polarization Failure X. Indicates that the direction has not been detected due to a polarization failure. It is independent
for each phase.
 Phase directional inhibition. Indicates that the directional is inhibited.
 Phase direction inversion. Indicates that the direction is opposite to the setting.

User Manual 129
Table 75 Phase directional outputs (quadrature and positive sequence)

67-Forward A Fw67 phsA
67-Forward B Fw67 phsB
67-Forward C Fw67 phsC
67-Reverse A Rv67 phsA
67-Reverse B Rv67 phsB
67-Reverse C Rv67 phsC
Polarization Failure A FailPol phsA
Polarization Failure B FailPol phsB
Polarization Failure C FailPol phsC
Phase Directional Inhibition BlkDir general
Phase Direction Inversion InvDir general
3.4.2.1.1 Quadrature
For the detection of directionality in phases, the polarization voltage corresponds to the quadrature connection (90º), in
which each phase’s current is compared with the phase to phase voltage between the other two phases (see Figure 70).
π
Phase Ia: Spol = Vbc Sop = Ia ∙ e−j∙(90º−MTA_FASES)∙180
π
Phase Ib: Spol = Vca Sop = Ib ∙ e−j∙(90º−MTA_FASES)∙180
π
Phase Ic: Spol = Vab Sop = Ic ∙ e−j∙(90º−MTA_FASES)∙180
Where, MTA_FASES is the setting "Torque angle (º)"
Signals forward when:
Amplitude º
|angle(Spol) − angle(Sop)| < ( )
2
Where, Amplitude is the setting "Zone amplitude (º)"
The “Quad. 2 out of 3” means that the unit only signals forward if this direction is seen in 2 phases. Avoids cases in which,
with a reverse fault, certain of the phases detect a forward fault (e.g., weak infeed). In the case of weak infeed due to the
opening of a transformer, there is only zero sequence current and therefore the three phases detect the same current. In
this case, one of the 3 phases will detect the fault in the opposite direction to the other two.
It operates as three single phase units in which polarization voltages are the phase to phase voltages of the healthy phases.
In the case of an ABC phase sequence, polarization is effected with Vab, Vbc and Vac, for Ic, Ia and Ib. In the case of a CBA
phase sequence, polarization is effected with Vba, Vcb and Vac, for Ic, Ia and Ib.
This unit’s signals are independent for each of the phases (See Table 75).
Memory
The polarization voltage is the voltage of the previous 3 cycles. If the voltage falls below the setting "Minimum V
polarization (V)", the value memorized in accordance with the memory management explained in the polarization memory
monitoring is used (see 3.4.3). It is also affected by the series compensation logic in so far that if it is set to “YES” the
memorized voltage is used as of the moment in which a fault or a voltage inversion is detected.
Trip permission with low polarization voltage
When the polarization voltage is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)" or the operating current is below the
minimum polarization current “Polarization Failure X” is indicated. In this situation, if the trip permission without
polarization V is set to “YES”, the trip is permitted; while if set to “NO”, it is blocked.

User Manual 130
Figure 70 Phase directional (Quadrature)
3.4.2.1.2 Positive sequence

The direction is determined by the comparison between the positive sequence voltage and current (see Figure 71).
S1pol = V1
π
S1op = I1 ∙ ej∙MTA_FASES∙180
Where, MTA_FASES is the setting "Torque angle (º)"
Signals forward when
Amplitude º
|angle(S1pol) − angle(S1op)| < ( )
2
This unit’s signals are the same as those of the quadrature, with the difference that the three phases are always given
simultaneously (See Table 75).
Memory
The polarization voltage is the positive sequence voltage of the previous 3 cycles. If it falls below the setting "Minimum V1
(V)", the value memorized in accordance with the memory management explained in the polarization memory monitoring
is used (See 3.4.3). It is also affected by the series compensation logic in so far that if it is set to “YES” the memorized
voltage is used as of the moment in which a fault or a voltage inversion is detected.
Trip permission with low Vpol
When the V1 polarization voltage is below the setting “Minimum V polarization (V)” or the operating current is below the
minimum polarization current “Polarization Failure X” is indicated.
The directional block is used when the operating current is below the minimum polarization current.
If V1 is below the setting “Minimum V polarization (V)” but the operating current is above the minimum polarization
current, if the trip permission without polarization V is set to “YES”, the trip is permitted; while if set to “NO”, it is blocked.

User Manual 131
Figure 71 Phase directional (Positive sequence)
3.4.2.1.3 Negative and positive sequence

Both methods are used to determine the direction, first by analysing the negative sequence:
❑ If the negative sequence indicates the direction, the positive sequence is not consulted.
❑ If the negative sequence indicates a polarization failure, the positive sequence is consulted.
3.4.2.2 Negative sequence

It is used both in phase and neutral directional.
The direction is determined by the comparison between the negative sequence voltage and current, with 3V2 greater than the
threshold "Minimum V polarization (V)" and I2 greater than the thresholds "Minimum I2 / I1 Ph (%)" and "Minimum 3I2 / Irated
(%)" (See Figure 72).
In the case of lines with series compensation, a Z2offset setting, which modifies the polarization voltage, is included.
𝜋
S2pol = −3 ∙ V2 + 3 ∙ I2 ∙ Z2Offset ∙ ej∙MTA_S2∙180
π
S2op = 3 ∙ I2 ∙ ej∙MTA_S2∙180
Where, MTA_S2 is the setting "Torque angle (º)"
Amplitude º
2
If Z2offset is not used:
S2pol is -3·V2
If Z2offset is used:
❑ With series compensation:

 S2pol is calculated with Z2Offset.
❑ Without series compensation:
 S2pol depends on the relation between S2pol and the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)". If the S2pol calculated
with Z2Offset is greater than "Minimum V polarization (V)", the calculated S2pol is used. On the other hand, if "-3·V2"
is greater than "Minimum V polarization (V)", S2pol = -3·V2 is used.

User Manual 132
When the S2pol polarization voltage is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)" or the negative sequence current (I2) is
below any of the thresholds "Minimum I2 / I1 Ph (%)" or "Minimum 3I2 / Irated (%)", “Polarization Failure S2” is indicated.
The directional block is used when the negative sequence current (I2) is below any of the thresholds "Minimum I2 / I1 (%)" or
"Minimum I2 / Irated (%)".
If S2pol is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)" and I2 is greater than the thresholds "Minimum I2 / I1 Ph (%)" and
"Minimum 3I2 / Irated (%)", if the trip permission without polarization V is set to “YES”, the trip is permitted; while if set to
“NO”, it is blocked.
For the phase overcurrent units, the negative sequence directional uses the "Permission with low Vpol" setting which is on the
node PROT/RDIR1 (Phase directional).
For the neutral overcurrent units, the negative sequence directional uses the "Permission with low Vpol" setting which is on
node PROT/GRDIR1 (Ground directional).
For the unbalanced overcurrent units, the negative sequence directional uses the "Permission with low Vpol 67Q" setting which
is on the node PROT/S2RDIR1 (Negative sequence directional).
This function’s general settings and those applied in the quadrature and positive sequence criteria are in the PROT/S2RDIR1
node:
❑ Torque angle (º). Indicates the directional angle.

below this value.
❑ Offset Z2 (Ohm). Offset impedance for the negative sequence directional unit. In multifunction, it must be set to 0.
❑ Minimum I2 / I1 Ph (%).Indicates the minimum value of I2 in relation to the percentage of I1.
❑ Minimum 3I2 / Irated (%). Percentage of rated I. Indicates the minimum value of I2 in relation to rated I.
❑ Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function. When the directional is blocked, it is issues
permission for the trip.
❑ S2 Directional inversion. Selects the signal which, when active, inverts the trip direction.
❑ Permission with low Vpol 67Q29. Indicates the functioning of the directional when the polarization voltage is below the
threshold. If set to “YES”, it enables an unbalance overcurrent trip if the polarization voltage is lower than the "Minimum
V polarization (V)" setting; if set to “NO”, the unbalance overcurrent trip is not allowed under those conditions.
Table 76 Negative sequence directional settings

ChrAng Torque angle (º) 0 359 1 float32
Amp
Zone amplitude (º) 90 170 1 float32
(AmpVal in Ed2)
Vpol Minimum V polarization (V) 1 200 0,1 float32
Ofs Offset Z2 (Ohm) 0 100 1 float32
BlkValI1 Minimum I2 / I1 Ph (%) 1 100 1 Value % of I1 float32
BlkValIn Minimum 3I2 / Irated (%) 1 100 1 Value % of In float32
LogInInvDir S2 Directional inversion inref
LogInBlDir Blocking input inref
TripVpol Permission with low Vpol 67Q NO / YES Boolean
29

User Manual 133
The negative sequence unit has settings, commands and outputs:
❑ Node: PROT/S2RDIR1
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 76.
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdInvDir”. Inverts the directional trip direction
 67-S2 Forward. The detected direction indicates forward.
 67-S2 Reverse. The detected direction indicates reverse.
 Polarization Failure S2. Indicates that the direction has not been detected due to a polarization failure.
 S2 Directional Inhibition. Indicates that the directional is inhibited.
 S2 Direction Inversion. Indicates that the direction is opposite to the setting.
Table 77 Negative sequence directional outputs

67-S2 Forward Fw67S2 general
67-S2 Reverse Rv67S2 general
Polarization Failure S2 FailS2 general
S2 Directional Inhibition BlkDir general
S2 Direction Inversion InvDir general
Figure 72 Negative sequence directional

User Manual 134
Figure 73 Negative sequence directional scheme
3.4.2.3 Ground directional

Affects neutral units, allowing or blocking the trip in accordance with the configuration.
The operation can be selected from among: angular, cosine, sine and watt-metric. Various options can be selected from within
the angular criteria.
This unit’s settings are in the PROT/GRDIR node. In accordance with the selected mode, they affect:
General settings.
❑ Ground directional method. Indicates the directional criterion used.

 “Angular criteria”.
 “I·cos phi”
 “I·sin phi”
 “Wattmetric”
❑ Minimum 3I0/Irated gnd (%). Percentage of rated neutral current. Indicates the minimum value of 3 I0 in relation to rated
I. It is used in zero sequence “I·cos” and “I·sin” mode.
❑ Ground directional block. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function. When the directional is blocked, it is
issues permission for the trip.
❑ 67N directional Inversion. Selects the signal which, when active, inverts the trip direction.
Settings with "Ground directional method" as Angular:
❑ Polarization method. Selected the polarization type from the options:

 V. By voltage.
 IPOL. By current
 IPOL → V. By current and, in the event of uncertainty, by voltage.
 IPOL or V. By current or by voltage.
 IPOL and V. By current and by voltage.

User Manual 135
❑ Voltage directional Type. Only applied if the polarization voltage has been selected.
 S0. Zero sequence.
 S2. Negative sequence.
 S2 and S0. Negative and zero sequence.
 S2 or S0. Negative or zero sequence.
 S2 → S0. Negative sequence and, in the event of uncertainty, zero sequence.
 S0 → S2. Zero sequence and, in the event of uncertainty, negative sequence.
❑ Torque angle (º). Indicates the directional angle.
below this value.
❑ Permission with low Vpol. Indicates the functioning of the directional when the polarization voltage is below the
threshold. If set to “YES”, it enables an overcurrent trip if the memorized polarization voltage is lower than the minimum
polarization voltage; if set to “NO”, the overcurrent trip is not allowed under those conditions.
❑ Minimum Ipol/Irated gnd (%). Indicates the minimum current for polarization; the direction cannot be reliably
determined below this value.
❑ Offset Z0 (Ohm). Offset impedance for the zero sequence directional unit.
❑ Minimum 3I0/I1 (%). Percentage of I1. Indicates the minimum value of I0 in relation to I1.
Settings with "Ground directional method" as Watt-metric, I·cos, I·sin
❑ Minimum power: Isin, Icos, W: Power value P=Vn·In·cos(-c), in which =Angle between Vn and In. If the power
negative and higher than this value, a forward fault is registered. If it is positive and higher than this value, a reverse fault
is registered.
❑ Icos/Isin method switch. If a signal is assigned to this input, it indicates the directional type used (independent of the
setting) I·cos if the input is 0 (deactivated) and I·sin if the input is 1 (activated). If no signal has been assigned, the
criterion selected for the setting is used.
The neutral units have settings, commands and outputs:
❑ Node: PROT/GRDIR1
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 78 for details.
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdInvDir”. Inverts the directional trip direction.
 67N-Forward. The detected direction indicates forward.
 67N-Reverse. The detected direction indicates reverse.
 Polarization Failure In. It indicates that the direction has not been detected due to a polarization failure.
 Gnd directional inhibition. Indicates that the directional is inhibited.
 Ground direction inversion. Indicates that the direction is opposite to the setting.

User Manual 136
Table 78 Neutral directional settings

“Angular criteria”
DirTyp “Icos phi”
Ground Directional method enum
“Isin phi”
“Wattmetric”
ChrAng Torque angle(º) 0 359 1 float32
Amp (AmpVal in Ed2) Zone amplitude (º) 90 170 1 float32
BlkValV Minimum V polarization (V) 0.530 200 0,1 float32
BlkValIn Minimum 3I0/Irated gnd (%) 1 100 1 Value % of I1 float32
LogInInvDir 67N directional Inversion inref
LogInBlDir Ground directional block inref
LogInChSC Icos/Isin method switch inref
V
IPOL
PolTyp
Polarization method IPOL → V enum
IPOL or V
IPOL and V
S0
S2
S2 and S0
PolQty (PolSel in Ed2) Voltage directional Type enum
S2 or S0
S2 →S0
S0 →S2
Ofs Offset Z0 (Ohm) 0 100 1 float32
BlkValI1 Minimum 3I0/I1 (%) 1 100 1 Value % of In float32
EnaOpn (TripVpol in Ed2) Permission with low Vpol NO / YES Boolean
BlkValIpol Minimum Ipol/Irated gnd (%) 1 100 1 Value % of I1 float32
BlkValW Minimum power: Isin,Icos,W 0 100 0,01 float32
Table 79 Neutral directional outputs

67N-Forward Fw67G neut
67N-Reverse Rv67G neut
Polarization Failure In FailIn neut
Gnd Directional Inhibition BlkDir neut
Ground Direction Inversion InvDir neut
3.4.2.3.1 Combinations with angular criteria

The In=3·I0 measurement can be calculated as the sum of the phase currents or as the measurement of the neutral
transformer, depending on the setting "I0 type: measured/calculated" in the node "PROT/LINPDIF1".
Polarizations
The various combinations according to the setting "Polarization method" are:
If Ineutral is less than "Minimum 3I0/Irated gnd (%)" of the neutral rated current or less than "Minimum 3I0/I1 (%)" of the
positive sequence current (I1), a “Polarization Failure In” is issued and no other actions are taken.
It is polarized by voltage. Depending on the setting "Voltage directional Type", the polarization voltage can be the zero
sequence, negative sequence or both.
Ipol
30
Avaliable from firmware version X.X.21.2 and ICD 8.11.0.0. Previous versions the minimun value was 1

User Manual 137
It is polarized by the ground current (Ipol). See 3.4.2.3.3.
I→V
If the I unit does not determine the polarization fault direction, the voltage signal combination is analysed.
If the result is “Without VPOL”, that is, the polarization voltage is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)", the trip
permission depends on the setting "Permission with low Vpol".
I and V
Both units (Ipol and V) are analysed. If both give the same result, a forward or reverse indication is made. It the result is
different, there is no permission.
If any of them does not determine the direction, a “Polarization Failure In” message is indicated and a decision is taken in
accordance with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
This combination is applicable to autotransformer when there is a malfunction of Ipol.
I or V
Both units (Ipol and V) are analysed. If any of them indicates forward or reverse, the corresponding signal is activated. If
one indicates forward and the other reverse, both directions are activated.
If they do not determine the direction, a “Polarization Failure In” message is indicated and a decision is taken in accordance
with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
Voltage directional Type
Furthermore, with this setting it can be selected among the following options:
S0
The direction is determined with the neutral current and the neutral voltage as polarization (see 3.4.2.3.2).
S2
The direction is determined with the negative sequence current and negative sequence voltage as polarization (see 3.4.2.2).
S0 and S2
Both units (S2 and S0) are analysed. If both give the same result, a forward or reverse indication is made. It the result is
different, there is no permission.
If any of them (S0 or S2) does not determine the direction, a "Polarization Failure In” or "Polarization Failure S2" message is
indicated and a decision is taken in accordance with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
Specific situations: One unit set in reverse and one set forward. S0 indicates reverse and S2 forward. No output is given.
V0 V2 Result
F F F
F R Nothing
R R R
R F Nothing
F Without Vpol Without Vpol
R Without Vpol Without Vpol
Without Vpol F Without Vpol
Without Vpol R Without Vpol
Without Vpol Without Vpol Without Vpol

User Manual 138
S0 or S2
Both units (S2 and S0) are analysed. If any of them indicates forward or reverse, the corresponding signal is activated. If one
indicated forward and the other reverse, both directions are activated.
If both of them (S0 or S2) do not determine the direction, a "Polarization Failure In” or "Polarization Failure S2" message is
indicated and a decision is taken in accordance with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
Specific situations:
V0 V2 Result
F F F
F R F&R
R R R
R F F&R
F Without Vpol F
R Without Vpol R
Without Vpol F F
Without Vpol R R
S2 → S0
If the S2 unit does not determine the direction, a “Polarization Failure S2” signal is activated and S0 is analysed.
If the conditions for determining the direction are still not given, a “Polarization Failure In” signal is activated and a decision
is taken in accordance with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
Example of specific situations:
One unit set in reverse and one set forward. S2 indicates reverse and S0 forward. Only reverse would be signalled (due to
S2).
S2 S0 Result
F F or R or Without Vpol F
R F or R or Without Vpol R
Without Vpol F F
Without Vpol R R
S0 → S2
If the S0 unit does not determine the direction, a “Polarization Failure In” signal is activated and S2 is analysed.
If the conditions for determining the direction are still not given, a “Polarization Failure S2” signal is activated and a decision
is taken in accordance with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
Example of specific situations:
One unit set in reverse and one set forward. S0 indicates reverse and S2 forward. Only reverse would be signalled (due to
S0).
S0 S2 Result
F F or R or Without Vpol F
R F or R or Without Vpol R
Without Vpol F F
Without Vpol R R
3.4.2.3.2 S0 polarization
The direction is determined by comparing the neutral current with the neutral voltage as polarization. The angle
determines the range in which the fault is considered as a forward fault and as a reverse fault. A Z0offset setting, which
modifies the polarization voltage, is included.
π
S0pol = −VN + IN ∙ Z0Offset ∙ ej∙MTA_S0∙180

User Manual 139
π
S0op = IN ∙ ej∙MTA_S0∙180
Where, MTA_S0 is the setting "Torque angle (º)"
Amplitude º
2
The VN=3·V0 voltage can be calculated using the phase to earth voltages of the phases or it can be measured by a
transformer, in accordance with the “3V0 Operating quantity” setting in the PROT/PVGE1 node.
If Z0offset is not used:
S0pol is -3·V0
If Z0offset is used:
❑ With series compensation:

 S0pol is calculated with Z0Offset
❑ Without series compensation:
 S0pol depends on the relation between S0pol and the setting "Minimum V polarization". If the S0pol calculated
with Z0Offset is greater than "Minimum V polarization (V)", the calculated S0pol is used. On the other hand, if "-
3·V0" is greater than "Minimum V polarization (V)", S0pol = "-3·V0 is used.
Figure 74 Zero sequence directional
When the S0pol polarization voltage is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)" or the neutral current is below to any of
the thresholds "Minimum 3I0 / Irated (%)" and "Minimum 3I0 / I1 (%)", “Polarization Failure In” is indicated.
The directional block is used when the neutral current is below to any of the thresholds "Minimum 3I0 / Irated (%)" and
"Minimum 3I0 / I1 (%)".
If S0pol is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)" and the operation current is greater than the thresholds "Minimum
3I0 / Irated (%)" and "Minimum 3I0 / I1 (%)", if the trip permission without polarization V is set to “YES”, the trip is permitted;
while if set to “NO”, it is blocked.

User Manual 140
Figure 75 Zero sequence directional scheme
3.4.2.3.3 I polarization
The direction is determined by comparing the ground current (Ipol) with the neutral current. To be able to verify the
direction, Ipol must be greater than the percent of neutral rated current indicated in the setting "Minimum Ipol/Irated gnd
(%)".
Figure 76 Directional with current polarization
There is a 5º zone between the non-trip zone and the trip zone in which the current directional status is maintained, both
for voltage and for current polarization.
When the neutral current is below any of the thresholds "Minimum 3I0 / Irated (%)" and "Minimum 3I0 / I1 (%)",
“Polarization Failure In” is indicated.

User Manual 141
When the Ipol is below to the percent of neutral rated current indicated in the setting "Minimum Ipol/Irated (%)",
“Polarization Failure In” is indicated. In this case, there is “NO” trip permission.
3.4.2.3.4 Watt-metric directional

This is for lines with Petersen coil compensation.
The In=3·I0 measurement can be calculated as the sum of the phase currents o as the measurement of the neutral
transformer, depending on the setting "I0 type" in the node "PROT/LINPDIF1".
transformer, in accordance with the “V0 measurement type” setting in the PROT/PVGE1 node.
In order to allow the directional unit to pickup, the following must be met:
❑ Vn exceeds the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)".

❑ For forward faults, the angle between the current and the displaced voltage, the maximum torque angle must be
between 95 and 265.
95º < 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 265º
❑ For reverse faults, the angle between the current and the displaced voltage, the maximum torque angle must be
between 275 and 85.
275º < 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 85º
❑ The power P=Vn·In·cos(-c) must exceed the minimum power "Minimum power: Isin, Icos, W" by the absolute
value. If the sign of P is negative, the fault is forward. If positive, the fault is reverse.
The equation to be implemented for calculating P is as follows:
P = [Re(V0) ∙ cos c + Im(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Re(I0) + [Im(V0) ∙ cos c − Re(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Im(I0)
c = Torque angle
 = 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0)
Figure 77 Directional with watt-metric polarization
Trip permission without V polarization
If the voltage VN is lower than "Minimum V polarization (V)", "Polarization Failure In" is indicated. If "Permission with low
Vpol" is set to "YES", the trip is allowed, if it is set to "NO", it is blocked.

User Manual 142
3.4.2.3.5 I*cos() / I*sin() directional

The In=3·I0 measurement can be calculated as the sum of the phase currents o as the measurement of the neutral
transformer, depending on the setting "I0 type" in the node "PROT/LINPDIF1".
transformer, in accordance with the “V0 measurement type” setting in the PROT/PVGE1 node.
An input can be programmed (“Icos/Isin method switch”) such that when activated the operating mode of I*cos() changes
to I*sin(). If programmed, this input cancels the setting: if deactivated, it runs the I*cos() algorithm. If activated, the
I*sin() algorithm is run, independently of the setting. It does not affect either the angular of the watt-metric directional.
I*cos() directional
❑ Vn exceeds the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)".

❑ For forward faults, the angle between the current and the displaced voltage, the maximum torque angle must be
between 95 and 265.
95º < a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 265º
between 275 and 85.
275º < a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 85º
❑ The minimum current "I minimum= In·cos(-c)" must exceed the minimum threshold "Minimum 3I0 / Irated (%)"
by the absolute value. If the sign is negative, the fault is forward. If positive, the fault is reverse.
[Re(V0) ∙ cos c + Im(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Re(I0) + [Im(V0) ∙ cos c − Re(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Im(I0)
I0 ∙ cos( − c) =
|V0|
c = Torque angle
 = angle(V0) − angle(I0)
Figure 78 Directional with cosine polarization
As the neutral units allow trip permission to be issued with forward and with reverse faults, in reality the characteristics will
be as follows.

User Manual 143
Figure 79 Forward/Reverse with cosine polarization
67N I*sin() directional
❑ Vn exceeds the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)". For forward faults, the angle between the current and the
displaced voltage, the maximum torque angle must be between 185 and 355.
185º < 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 355º
between 5 and 175.
5º < 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 175º
❑ The minimum current "I minimum=In·sin(-c)" must exceed the minimum threshold "Minimum 3I0 / Irated (%)"
by the absolute value. If the sign is negative, the fault is forward. If positive, the fault is reverse.
[Im(V0) ∙ cos c − Re(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Re(I0) − [Re(V0) ∙ cos c + Im(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Im(I0)
I0 ∙ sin( − c) =
|V0|
c = Torque angle
 = 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0)
Figure 80 Directional with sine polarization

User Manual 144
3.4.3 Polarization memory monitoring

It is used in the polarization of the phase directional (positive sequence and quadrature) and in the distance units (mho
characteristics).
Allows the memorized voltage to be used during the configured time when the current voltage is not apt.
This unit’s operating scheme for the distance unit is:
❑ If V1> Minimum V1 is met during at least 4 cycles, the memorized voltage is captured once again.
❑ V1mem is then update to the V1 value registered 3 cycles previously. Thus, in the moment in which the conditions for
using it are met, the value registered 3 cycles previously will be taken.
❑ V1mem is captured in the moment the voltage is above the setting Minimum V1 and is used during the time set in " V1
Memory Time (ms)".
❑ If the breaker is open (open pole logic) with the V1 above the setting "Minimum V1", the voltage V1 without memory is
used.
❑ If the series compensation logic is enabled, node PROT.PSEC1, the memorized voltage is used when the fault detection is
activated.
❑ If the "Blocking by power swinging" signal is activated, the actual V1 is used (not memorized)
❑ The logic input "Force V1 with memory" forces the use of memorized voltage in the positive sequence polarization.
❑ The logic input "Force V1 without memory" forces the use of non-memorized voltage in the positive sequence
polarization.
This unit’s operating scheme for the overcurrent directional units is:
❑ If Vx> Minimum Vx is met during at least 4 cycles, the memorized voltage is captured once again.
❑ Vxmen is then update to the Vx value registered 3 cycles previously. Thus, in the moment in which the conditions for
using it are met, the value registered 3 cycles previously will be taken.
❑ The 67-50/51 units are normally polarized without memory. The memorized voltage is used in the moment in which the
actual Vx voltage drops below Minimum Vx. The memory time is indicated in the maintenance time setting.
❑ If the series compensation is enabled, node PROT.PSEC1, the memorized voltage is used when the fault detection is
activated.
❑ The logic input "Force Vx with memory" forces the use of memorized voltage in the positive sequence polarization.
❑ The logic input "Force Vx without memory" forces the use of non-memorized voltage in the positive sequence
polarization.
The positive sequence voltage (V1) and the quadrature voltages are analysed separately (Vab, Vbc and Vac).
The function’s logic diagram is shown in Figure 81 (distance units), Figure 82 (overcurrent units, positive sequence) and Figure
83 (overcurrent units, quadrature).
This unit’s settings are:
❑ Minimum V1 (V). Indicates the minimum V1 value for employing the memorized voltage.
❑ V1 Memory Time (ms). Indicates the time during which the memorized voltage is used in the polarization by positive
sequence.
❑ Minimum Ph-ph voltage (V). Indicates the minimum quadrature voltage for employing the memorized voltage.
❑ Vc Memory Time (ms). Indicates the time during which the memorized voltage is used in the polarization by quadrature.
❑ Force V1 with memory. Forces the use of memorized voltage in the positive sequence polarization.
❑ Force V1 without memory. Forces the use of non-memorized voltage in the positive sequence polarization.
❑ Force Vc with memory. Forces the use of memorized voltage in the quadrature polarization.

User Manual 145
❑ Force Vc without memory. Forces the use of non-memorized voltage in the quadrature polarization.
Table 80 Directional memory monitoring settings

ValV1 Minimum V1 (V) float
MemV1Tmms V1 Memory Time (ms) int32
ValVc Minimum Ph-ph voltage (V) float
MemVcTmms VC Memory Time (ms) int32
LogInFV1M Force V1 without memory. inref
LogInFV1NM Force V1 with memory inref
LogInFVcM Force Vc without memory. inref
LogInFVcNM Force Vc with memory inref
The memory monitoring units have settings and outputs:
❑ Node: PROT/MSUPPTRC1
❑ Outputs:
 Memorized Ph-Ph Voltage. It is activated while the memorized phase-phase voltage is being used.
 V1 memorized. It is activated while the memorized V1 is being used.
 V1 memorized distance. It is activated while the memorized V1 is being used in the distance units.
The input signals of these schemes are:
❑ Fault detection. It´s the output of the Fault detection unit.

❑ The digital inputs are the settings of the function:
 Force V1 with memory
 Force V1 without memory
 Force VAB with memory. It is the setting "Force Vc with memory".
 Force VAB without memory. It is the setting "Force Vc without memory"
Table 81 Memorized voltage monitoring outputs

Memorized Ph-Ph Voltage Vcomp general
V1 memorized V1mem general
V1 memorized distance V1dist general

User Manual 146
Figure 81 Distance units. Positive sequence memorized monitoring
Figure 82 Positive sequence memorized monitoring
Figure 83 Memorized quadrature monitoring

User Manual 147
3.4.4 Series compensation

It affects the polarization signal of the distance and overcurrent units.
If it is enabled, the memorized voltage is used when the voltage is below the threshold set or when the fault detection is
activated. This unit applies to the distance and the phase overcurrent units.
❑ Enabled: Enables the function.

There are settings and outputs:
❑ Node: PROT/PSEC1
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 82
❑ Outputs: Table 83 shows the function's output data
 Series compensation status: Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 82 Series Compensation settings

SeCoEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Table 83 Series compensation Outputs

Series compensation status StEna general (stVal in Ed2)
3.4.5 Phase overcurrent
3.4.5.1 Instantaneous
There are 3 independent units for each of the phases.
Each of the three units has independent settings, commands and outputs.
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PIOC1
❑ Commands:
 IOC1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase. Where X is the
phase.
 IOC1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase. Where X is the phase.
 IOC1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general for all
three phases.
 IOC1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 IOC1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.

User Manual 148
Table 84 Instantaneous phase function outputs
Signal PIOC1 Signal PIOC2 Signal PIOC3 Data Attribute

IOC1 Start phase A IOC2 Start phase A IOC3 Start phase A Str phsA
IOC1 Start phase B IOC2 Start phase B IOC3 Start phase B Str phsB
IOC1 Start phase C IOC2 Start phase C IOC3 Start phase C Str phsC
IOC1 Trip phase A IOC2 Trip phase A IOC3 Trip phase A Op phsA
IOC1 Trip phase B IOC2 Trip phase B IOC3 Trip phase B Op phsB
IOC1 Trip phase C IOC2 Trip phase C IOC3 Trip phase C Op phsC
IOC1 Phase Status IOC2 Phase Status IOC3 Phase Status StEna stVal
IOC1 Phase Start IOC2 Phase Start IOC3 Phase Start Str general
IOC1 Phase Trip IOC2 Phase Trip IOC3 Phase Trip Op general
3.4.5.2 Timed
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PTOC1
❑ Commands:
 TOC1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase. Where X is the
phase.
 TOC1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase. Where X is the phase.
 TOC1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general for all
three phases.
 TOC1 Phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 TOC1 Phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Table 85 Timed phase function outputs
Signal PTOC1 Signal PTOC2 Signal PTOC3 Data Attribute

TOC1 Start phase A TOC2 Start phase A TOC3 Start phase A Str phsA
TOC1 Start phase B TOC2 Start phase B TOC3 Start phase B Str phsB
TOC1 Start phase C TOC2 Start phase C TOC3 Start phase C Str phsC
TOC1 Trip phase A TOC2 Trip phase A TOC3 Trip phase A Op phsA
TOC1 Trip phase B TOC2 Trip phase B TOC3 Trip phase B Op phsB
TOC1 Trip phase C TOC2 Trip phase C TOC3 Trip phase C Op phsC
TOC1 Phase Status TOC2 Phase Status TOC3 Phase Status StEna stVal
TOC1 Phase Start TOC2 Phase Start TOC3 Phase Start Str general
TOC1 Phase Trip TOC2 Phase Trip TOC3 Phase Trip Op general
3.4.6 Neutral overcurrent

Uses the neutral transformer input or 3·I0, depending on the setting "I0 type: measured/calculated" in the node "PROT/LINPDIF1".
In the 52 ½ models only 3·I0 is allowed.

User Manual 149
There are 3 independent units.Each of the three units has independent settings, commands and outputs.
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/GPIOC1
❑ Commands:
 GIOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 GIOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOC1 Ground Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 86 Neutral instantaneous function outputs
Signal GIOC1 Signal GIOC2 Signal GIOC3 Data Attribute

GIOC1 Start GIOC2 Start GIOC3 Start Str neut
GIOC1 Trip GIOC2 Trip GIOC3 Trip Op neut
IOC1 Ground Status IOC2 Ground Status IOC3 Ground Status StEna stVal
3.4.6.2 Timed
There are 3 independent units.
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/GPTOC1
❑ Commands:
 GTOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 GTOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOC1 Ground Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 87 Timed neutral function outputs
Signal GTOC1 Signal GTOC2 Signal GTOC3 Data Attribute

GTOC1 Start GTOC2 Start GTOC3 Start Str neut
GTOC1 Trip GTOC2 Trip GTOC3 Trip Op neut
TOC1 Ground Status TOC2 Ground Status TOC3 Ground Status StEna stVal

User Manual 150
3.4.7 Grounding overcurrent

Not available on all models (see model functions).
Employs the polarization current transformer input as a measurement.
This unit is not directional.
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/ESPIOC1
❑ Commands:
 ESIOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 ESIOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOC1 Earthing System Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 88 Instantaneous grounding function outputs
Signal ESIOC1 Signal ESIOC2 Signal ESIOC3 Data Attribute

ESIOC1 Start ESIOC2 Start ESIOC3 Start Str general
ESIOC1 Trip ESIOC2 Trip ESIOC3 Trip Op general
IOC1 Earthing System Status IOC2 Earthing System Status IOC3 Earthing System Status StEna stVal
3.4.7.2 Timed
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/ESPTOC1
❑ Commands:
 ESTOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 ESTOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOC1 Earthing System Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.

User Manual 151
Table 89 Timed grounding function outputs
Signal ESTOC1 Signal ESTOC2 Signal ESTOC3 Data Attribute

ESTOC1 Start ESTOC2 Start ESTOC3 Start Str general
ESTOC1 Trip ESTOC2 Trip ESTOC3 Trip Op general
TOC1 Earthing System Status TOC2 Earthing System Status TOC3 Earthing System Status StEna stVal
3.4.8 Unbalanced overcurrent

Employs 3 times the negative sequence as a measurement:
3·I2 = (Ia+a2·Ib+a·Ic) In which a = 1|120º
The calculation of the sequence takes into phase succession order setting (ABC/ACB).
The negative sequence directional is used by this unit.
The measurement type setting is not used, as the fundamental is always used.
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/UNPIOC1
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. It employs the settings in Table 73, with the exception of the
measurement type.
❑ Commands:
 UNIOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNIOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOC1 Unbalanced Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 90 Instantaneous unbalanced function outputs
Signal UNIOC1 Signal UNIOC2 Signal UNIOC3 Data Attribute

UNIOC1 Start UNIOC2 Start UNIOC3 Start Str general
UNIOC1 Trip UNIOC2 Trip UNIOC3 Trip Op general
IOC1 Unbalanced Status IOC2 Unbalanced Status IOC3 Unbalanced Status StEna stVal
3.4.8.2 Timed
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/UNPTOC1

User Manual 152
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. Employs the settings in Table 72, with the exception of the
measurement type.
❑ Commands:
 UNTOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNTOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOC1 Unbalanced Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 91 Timed unbalanced function outputs
Signal UNTOC1 Signal UNTOC2 Signal UNTOC3 Data Attribute

UNTOC1 Start UNTOC2 Start UNTOC3 Start Str general
UNTOC1 Trip UNTOC2 Trip UNTOC3 Trip Op general
TOC1 Unbalanced Status TOC2 Unbalanced Status TOC3 Unbalanced Status StEna stVal
3.4.9 Voltage control (51V/50V)

The phase overcurrent functions can be controlled by voltage in such a way that the pickup current decreases if the control voltage
is inferior to the rated current. To do so, the "Voltage control enabled" setting must be set to "YES"; if set to NO, the settings
programmed in the phase units are effective, as the voltage control is disabled. This setting is common for instantaneous and
timed.
It functions independently for timed and instantaneous and the action, the unit on which it is to act and the value of the new
settings of the phase overcurrent units can be selected.
Settings are used to determine which unit from among the three 51 and/or the three 50 units it is to act.
It affects the settings of the instantaneous and timed units (pickup, curve type, time index and additional time), but does not affect
the enabled of the units, which does not vary with the voltage control.
The control voltage is independent of the adjustment of phase voltage selection.
For correct operation of voltage control, it is necessary to have three voltage phases wired.
Timed function
When enabled, it affects the selected phase timed unit.
It has two functioning modes: boost and settings change.
This function is subordinated to the phase timed function, in the sense that it makes the phase timed operate with other settings.
However, if the phase timed function is disabled, function 51V has no effect.
(51V)-Boost by voltage (MODE 1).
It only affects the selected unit’s pickup threshold settings, with the rest of the settings remaining unchanged.
Each phase’s pickup current is controlled by a phase to phase voltage: IA by VAB, IB by VBC and IC by VCA.
❑ When the control voltage is 10% of the programmed value, the controlled pickup current is the 10% of the
programmed value.
❑ When the control voltage is 90% of the programmed value, the controlled pickup current is the 90% of the
programmed value.
❑ Between both values, the variation of the pickup current in relation to the control voltage is lineal.
❑ For control voltage values higher than the 90% of the rated value, the pickup current is the programmed value.
(51V)-Settings change (MODE 2).

User Manual 153
When one of the phase to phase voltages is lower than the control voltage (programmed value), function 51’s effective settings
switch from those programmed in "phase timed" to those programmed as “control by voltage”. In order to recover the “phase
timed” settings, the 3 phase to phase voltages must be greater than the control voltage.
Instantaneous function
(50V)-Settings change (MODE 2).
When enabled, it affects the selected phase instantaneous unit.
This function is subordinated to the phase instantaneous functions, in the sense that it makes the phase timed operate with other
settings. However, if the phase instantaneous functions are disabled, the 50V function has no effect.
When one of the phase to phase voltages is lower than the control voltage (programmed value), function 50’s effective settings
switch from those programmed in "phase instantaneous" to those programmed as “control by voltage”.
❑ Voltage control type: Affect the instantaneous and the timed units. If set to NO, the function is disabled. If set to YES, it is
enabled and the individual timed and instantaneous settings are consulted.
❑ Timed unit:
 Enabled. Indicates the timed unit’s functioning mode.
 NO. The timed unit is disabled.
 Boost. Functions in boost by voltage mode.
 Settings change. Functions in settings change mode.
 51 unit to control. Indicates the unit affected.
 51V Start value (A). In the change settings mode, its replace the value of the selected timed units.
 51V Operating Curve Type. In the change settings mode, its replace the value of the selected timed units.
 51V Time dial. In the change settings mode, its replace the value of the selected timed units.
 51V Operate delay time. In the change settings mode, its replace the value of the selected timed units.
❑ Instantaneous unit:
 Enabled. Indicates the timed unit’s functioning mode.
 NO. The timed unit is disabled.
 Settings change. Functions in settings change mode.
 50 unit to control. Indicates the unit affected.
 50V Start value (A). Replaces the value of the selected instantaneous units.
 50V Operate delay time. Replaces the value of the selected instantaneous units.

User Manual 154
Table 92 Control by voltage settings

PVOCEna Voltage control type NO / YES Boolean
Timed
NO (0)
PVOCTmpEna Enabled Boost (1) Boolean
Change settings (2)
TmpBlkValV 51V Voltage Control (V) 10 200 0,1 float32
PTOCUn 51 unit to control enum
TmpStrVal 51V Start Value (A) 0,1 150,0 0,01 float32
TmpAVCrv
51V Operating Curve Type IEC-IC Short inverse (13) enum
User curves 1 (33)
User curves 2 (34)
User curves 3 (35)
User curves 4 (36)
Definite time (49)
TmMult 51V Time dial 0,05 30,0 0,01 float32
TmpOpTmms 51V Operate delay time 0 600000 10 int32
Instantaneous
PVOCInstEna NO (0)
Enabled Boolean
Change settings (1)
InstBlkValV 50V Voltage Control (V) 10 200 0,1 float32
PIOCUn 50 unit to control enum
InstStrVal 50V Start Value (A) 0,1 150,0 0,01 float32
InstOpTmms 50V Operate Delay time 0 600000 10 int32
There are independent settings and outputs.
❑ Node PROT/PVOC1
❑ Outputs: The function’s output data are shown in Table 93.
 50 V Activation. Indicates that the instantaneous units' control by voltage is activated.
 51 V Activation. Indicates that the timed units' control by voltage is activated.
 Voltage Supervision Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general
for instantaneous and timed.
Table 93 Control by voltage function outputs

50 V Activation Op1 general
51 V Activation Op2 general
Voltage Supervision Status StEna stVal
3.4.10 2nd harmonic restraint

It permits the instantaneous and timed phase, neutral and unbalanced overcurrent units to be blocked (51, 50, 51N, 50N and 67Q).
Restraint by phase or for all the phases is available for the 50/51 units. The units to be blocked are selected by settings.

User Manual 155
To activate the restraint, the following must be met simultaneously:
❑ The fundamental current must exceed the minimum inrush value.

❑ The relationship between the 2nd harmonic value and the fundamental must exceed a set threshold.
❑ The 2nd harmonic current must exceed 1% of In (50mA with In=5A and 10ma with In=1A).
To deactivate the restraint, the following must be met:
❑ The current must be less than 95% of the minimum current threshold, or
❑ The current must be below 95% of the restraint percentage threshold.
The restraint is calculated independently for each phase and neutral.
The phase units’ restraint can act per phase (the restraint in any one phase only blocks the phase in question) or it can be general
(the restraint in any one phase blocks all the phases).
For the unbalanced unit restraint, it is sufficient that the conditions are given in a phase or in the neutral.
The units’ restraint settings are:
❑ Enabled. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not. The options available are:
 YES. It is enabled
 NO. It is disabled
 Only in close. It is enabled for a second after closing.
❑ I 2nd/fund. Threshold (%). Indicates the percentage of the 2nd harmonic in relation to the fundamental above which the
restraint is produced.
❑ Minimum current (A). Minimum value of the fundamental current in order for the restraint to be produced. No restraint
is indicated below this value, even when the % I 2nd/Ifund is above the setting.
❑ Restraint. Enables the units on which the restraint is to act to be indicated. There are separate settings for each unit. In
general, the setting is "NO / YES", except in those phases that can be:
 NO. Restraint is not permitted
 Phase. The restraint in one phase only blocks the phase in question.
 General. The restraint in one phase blocks all the phases.
❑ Harm.Restraint Blocking. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function.
There are independent settings, commands and outputs in each restraint unit.
Phases
❑ Node: PROT/PHAR1
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 94. There is restraint setting for each timed
and instantaneous phase overcurrent unit (NO / Phase / General) and unbalanced (NO / YES)
❑ Commands:
❑ Outputs:
 2nd harmonic restraint Ix. Indicates that the restraint has been activated in this phase. It is independent for each
phase.
 2nd harmonic restraint ph. Indicates that the restraint has been activated in one of the phases.
 Harm. Ph. restraint Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general for
all three phases.

User Manual 156
Table 94 Phase 2nd harmonic restraint settings
Data Setting Min. Max Step Remarks Type

NO (0)
PHAREna Enabled YES (1) Boolean
Only in close (2)
StrVal I 2nd/fund. Threshold (%) 10 100 1 float32
BlkValA Minimum current (A) 0,1 150,0 0,01 float32
NO (0)
Restr51U1 Restraint 51 Unit 1 Phase (1) enum
General (2)
Restr51U2 Restraint 51 Unit 2 NO/Phase/General enum
Restr67QT1 Restraint 67QT Unit 1 NO / YES Boolean
Restr67QI1 Restraint 67QI Unit 1 NO / YES Boolean
LogInBlk Harm.Restraint Blocking inref
Table 95 Phase restraint outputs

2nd harmonic restraint Ia Op phsA
2nd harmonic restraint Ib Op phsB
2nd harmonic restraint Ic Op phsC
2nd harmonic restraint ph Op general
Harm. Ph. restraint Status StEna stVal
Neutral
❑ Node: PROT/GPHAR1
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 96. There is restraint setting for each timed
and instantaneous neutral overcurrent unit (NO / YES).
❑ Commands:
 2nd harmonic restraint In. It indicates that the neutral restraint has been activated.
 Harm. Gr. restraint Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.

User Manual 157
Table 96 Neutral 2nd harmonic restraint settings

NO (0)
PHAREna Enabled YES (1) Boolean
Only in close (2)
StrVal I 2nd/fund. Threshold (%) 10 100 1 float32
BlkValA Minimum current (A) 0,1 150,0 0,01 float32
Restr51N1 Restraint 51N Unit 1 NO / YES Boolean
LogInBlk Harm.Restraint Blocking inref
Table 97 Neutral restraint outputs

2nd harmonic restraint In Op neut
Harm. Gr. restraint Status StEna stVal
3.4.11 2nd and 5th harmonic blocking

This unit allows the instantaneous and timed grounding overcurrent units to be blocked (51ES and 50ES).
To activate the blocking must be simultaneously satisfied:
The fundamental current value must exceed the minimum current.
And one or both of the following:
❑ The ratio between the value of the 2nd harmonic and the fundamental exceeds the threshold.
 The 2nd harmonic current should be greater than 1% of In (50mA with In=5A and 10mA with In=1A).
❑ The ratio between the value of the 5th harmonic and the fundamental exceeds the threshold.
 The 5nd harmonic current should be greater than 1% of In (50mA with In=5A and 10mA with In=1A).
To disable the blocking the following must be satisfied:
❑ Current is below the 95% minimum current threshold, or

❑ Current is below the 95% threshold blocking percentage for the 2nd and 5th harmonic
The settings of the blocking units are:
❑ Enabled. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not. The options available are:
 YES. It is enabled
 NO. It is disabled
❑ Threshold I2 º harm / I fundam. (%). Indicates the 2nd harmonic percentage respect to the above fundamental that
the blocking is produced
❑ Threshold I5 º harm / I fundam. (%). Indicates the 5nd harmonic percentage respect to the above fundamental that
the blocking is produced
❑ Min. Current (A). Minimum value of the fundamental current which blocks the units. Below this value no blocking is
allowed, despite the value of the I2/If% adjustment.
❑ Blocking. It indicates that units acting on restraint. There are separate settings for each unit, the setting is YES / NO
❑ Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function
❑ Enable Events record. Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the

User Manual 158
Settings, orders and outputs:
❑ PROT/IGPHAR1 node
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There is a settings table. For details, see Table 99. 2nd and 5nd grounding harmonic
blocking settings. Are available blocking adjustment for each unit timed and instantaneous overcurrent ground (No
/ Yes)
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function block and unblocking. Only acts when the function is enabled.
❑ Outputs: In the Table 98. , shows the function’s output data.
 Blocking 2 and 5 th harmonic status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 Blocking 2 and 5 th harmonic. Indicates that the blocking is activated on that ground.
Table 98. 2nd and 5nd grounding harmonic outputs

2nd and 5th Har Bloq Sts StEna stVal
2nd and 5th Har Bloq Op neut
Table 99. 2nd and 5nd grounding harmonic blocking settings

PHAREna Enabled NO/YES Boolean
StrVal2 I2nd / Ifund. Threshold (%) 5 100 1 5 float32
StrVal5 I5th / Ifund. Threshold (%) 5 100 1 5 float32
BlkValA Minimum current (A) 0,1 150 0,01 0,1 float32
Restr51U1 Blocking 51ES Unit 1 NO/YES Booleano
Restr51U2 Blocking 51ES Unit 2 NO/YES Booleano
Restr51U3 Blocking 51ES Unit 3 NO/ YES Booleano
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO/YES Booleano
3.4.12 Broken conductor

This is a definite time protection unit.
The pickup value to be set is, expressed as a decimal, and it depends on the setting "Operation type".
There are two modes of operation, selectable by setting. The relay trips once the programmed time has elapsed if the following
conditions are met:
❑ “Always”:
 The positive sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 The negative sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 I2/I1 ratio exceeds the setting value.
𝐼2 𝐼𝑎 + 𝑎2 · 𝐼𝑏 + 𝑎 · 𝐼𝑐
= 𝐼𝑛 𝑤ℎ𝑖𝑐ℎ, 𝑎 = 1∟120º
𝐼1 𝐼𝑎 + 𝑎 · 𝐼𝑏 + 𝑎2 · 𝐼𝑐
 Current value of one phase is greater than the setting "Minimum Phase I (%Irated)".
❑ “Yes with 52”:

 The positive sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 The negative sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 I2/Irated exceeds the setting value.

User Manual 159
𝐼2 1 𝐼𝑎 + 𝑎2 · 𝐼𝑏 + 𝑎 · 𝐼𝑐
= ( ) 𝐼𝑛 𝑤ℎ𝑖𝑐ℎ, 𝑎 = 1∟120º
𝐼𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 3 𝐼𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑
 I0/Irated: I0/Irated is bellow than the setting value. If set to 0, this setting will not be taken into account.
 If the breaker is closed, the current value of one or two phases is lower than the setting "Minimum Phase I (%Irated)".
Figure 84 shows the logic scheme of the function.

 “Always”
 “Yes with 52”
❑ Start value (%). If "Operation Type" is "Always", indicates the ratio I2/I1. In case of "Yes with 52", it indicates I2/Irated.
❑ Minimum Phase I (%Irated). Minimum phase current value.
❑ Max. Threshold I0/Irated (%). Maximum I0/Irated value (%) necessary to act.
recloser (3.13.6).
❑ Node: PROT/OPPTOC
❑ Commands:
 Broken conductor Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 Broken conductor Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 Broken conductor Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 100 Broken conductor function outputs

Broken conductor Start Str general
Broken conductor Trip Op general
Broken conductor Status StEna stVal

User Manual 160
Table 101 Broken conductor settings

OPPTOCEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Always (1)
Yes with 52 (2)
StrVal Start value (%) 5 100 0,1 float32
BlkIph Minimum Phase I (%Irated) 5 200 0,1 float32
BLkI0I1 Max. Threshold I0/Irated (%) 0 20 0,1 float32
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1)
Reclose 2 (2)
Reclose 1-2 (3)
Reclose 3 (4)
Reclose 1-3 (5)
Reclose 2-3 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3 (7)
Reclose 4 (8)
Reclose 1-4 (9)
Reclose 2-4 (10)
Reclose 1-2-4 (11)
Reclose 3-4 (12)
Reclose 1-3-4 (13)
Reclose 2-3-4 (14)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (15)

User Manual 161
Figure 84 Broken conductor logic
3.4.13 Thermal image

There are independent units for phase and neutral.
This function calculates a thermal capacity in accordance with the protected unit’s recent and current load conditions. The thermal
capacity is displayed as a % of the trip value. If the function is enabled, a warning signal is activated when the programmed value is
reached. When 100% is reached, the thermal image trip signal is activated. Once tripped as a result, it does not drop-out while the
calculated thermal capacity remains above the reset threshold setting and the rest of the locking conditions are fulfilled. The
calculated thermal capacity can be reset by logic input or by command.
The time which elapses before the trip is determined by the following curves, which establish the time in accordance with the ratio
between the current and the programmed rated current, and the programmed heating constant. According to the following
formula (starting from thermal capacity 0):
In which:
t: trip time
ζ1: heating constant
I: measured current
I0: programmed rated current
Once it has tripped, there is another programmable time constant for the cooling.
The heating curve is calculated using the following formula:

User Manual 162
In which:
Tf: final thermal capacity
Ti: initial thermal capacity
t: time
ζ1: heating time constant
For Ti = 0 the formula is reduced to
As
The heating curve is
The cooling curve is calculated using the following formula:
In which: Tf: final thermal capacity
Ti: initial thermal capacity
t: time
ζ2: cooling time constant
Starting from Ti = 1 (100 in %), which is the thermal capacity at which the trip is produced, the formula used to obtain a thermal
capacity of Tf = 0 (i.e., current I = 0) is as follows
The current measurements used in the units are:
❑ Phases
Ieq2=Imax2
Where:
Imax is the maximum current of the three phases.
❑ Neutral. The transformer grounding current is used. If this transformer does not exist, the neutral current is used.
The settings of each of these units are:

❑ Heating constant (s). Heating constant in seconds.
❑ Cooling constant (s). Cooling constant in seconds.
❑ Alarm threshold (%). Value at which a thermal image warning is issued.

User Manual 163
❑ Trip threshold (%).31 Value at which a thermal image trip is issued. It should be greater than the “Alarm threshold (%)”. If
it is smaller it is fixed to 100.
❑ Reset threshold (%). Thermal image reset value.
❑ Start current (A). Rated current for the calculation of the thermal image.
❑ Init input. Resets the thermal image value.
recloser (3.13.6).
❑ Calculus store. Allows the value calculated for the thermal image to be stored in the non-volatile memory. If set to “YES”,
the stored value will be the initial thermal image value used when the unit is booted; if set to “NO”, the initial thermal
image value is zero.
❑ Nodes:
 Phases: PROT/PTTR
 Neutral: PROT/GPTTR
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdIn”: Resetting to zero of thermal image value.
❑ Outputs: Table 103 shows the phase function’s output data and Table 104 shows ground function’s output data.
 Thermal Image X Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up. Where X is phase or ground.
 Thermal Image X Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped. Where X is phase or ground.
 Thermal Image X Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. Where X is phase or
ground.
 T. ph trip thermal image 32. Indicates time (minutes) until trip thermal image of phase with actual phase currents.
 T. gnd trip thermal image 32. Indicates time (minutes) until trip thermal image of ground with actual ground current.
Table 102 Thermal image settings

PTTREna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
ConsTms1 Heating constant (s) 30 18000 5 int32
ConsTms2 Cooling constant (s) 30 18000 5 int32
AlmVal Alarm threshold (%) 50 100 1 float32
TripVal Trip threshold (%) 50 100 1 float32
RepVal Reset threshold (%) 50 95 1 float32
Artg
Start current (A) 0,1 150,0 0,01 float32
(ARtg in Ed2)
LogInIn Init input inref
PTTREna General trip NO / YES Boolean
ValStore Calculus Store NO / YES Boolean
31
Available from firmware version 5.17.15.3 and ICD 6.1.13.29
32
Available from 6.11.19.17 of CPU, DSP 3.3 and ICD 8.7.2.2

User Manual 164
Table 103 Phase Thermal image function outputs

Thermal Image Phase Start Str general
Thermal Image Phase Trip Op general
Thermal Image Phase Status StEna stVal
Table 104 Neutral Thermal image function outputs

Thermal Image Ground Start Str general
Thermal Image Ground Trip Op general
Thermal Image Ground Status StEna stVal
3.4.13.1 Calculation Example

Figure 85 shows the trip times according to different heating constants.
Figure 86 shows an example of heating curves with a 3 minute time constant for I/I0 = 1 and for I/I0 = 2
Figure 85 Trip times
Figure 86 Heating curve example

User Manual 165
Figure 87 shows an example of a cooling curve with 3-minute constant.
Figure 87 Cooling curve example
Examples: Combined examples of cooling and heating

Supposing that it is heated with I/I0 =1 for 200sec, I/I0 =2 for the next 200 sec (without tripping) and, as of that point, it returns
indefinitely to I/I0 = 1 (both with 3 minute time constants):
2. Supposing that it is heated with I/I0 =0.5 for 200sec, I/I0 =1.5 until reaching 100%, at which point the trip is produced, as of
that point, it cools with I/I0 = 0 (both with 3 minute time constants):
3.4.14 Undercurrent
There are two independent undercurrent units.
They employ the phases’ fundamental measurements. The unit picks up when the current falls below the setting and drops out
when the current rises above 105% of the setting.
The pickup is generated for each phase, regardless of the setting “Operation type”. However, the unit’s trip takes the operation
type into account.

User Manual 166
The settings of each of these units are:

 “All (A,B,C)”. The unit trips when all the phases meet the undercurrent conditions
 “Any (A,B,C)”. The unit trips when at least one of the phases meets the undercurrent conditions
❑ Start value (A). Set in secondary amps. It indicates the current value for which the function is activated.
recloser (3.13.6).
Table 105 Undercurrent settings

PTUCEna Enabled NO / YES enum
All (A,B,C) (1)
Any (A,B,C)(2)
StrVal Start value (A) 0,02 10 0,01 float32
There are independent settings, commands and outputs in each unit.
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PTUC1
 Unit 2: PROT/PTUC2
❑ Commands:
 TUC1 phase X Start. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase and does not
consider the setting “Operation type”.
 TUC1 phase Start. Pickup of at least one phase. Indicates that at least one of the unit's phases has picked up. It does
not take into account the setting “Operation type”.
 TUC1 Start. Taking into account the setting “Operation type”, it indicates that the unit has picked up.
 TUC1 Trip. Taking into account the setting “Operation type”, it indicates that the unit has tripped.
 Undercurrent Unit 1 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general
for all three phases.

User Manual 167
Table 106 Phase undercurrent function outputs
PTUC1 Signals PTUC2 Signals Data Attribute

TUC1 phase A Start TUC2 phase A Start Str phsA
TUC1 phase B Start TUC2 phase B Start Str phsB
TUC1 phase C Start TUC2 phase C Start Str phsC
TUC1 Start TUC2 Start StrUC general
TUC1 Trip TUC2 Trip OpUC general
Undercurrent Unit 1 Status Undercurrent Unit 2 Status StEna stVal
TUC1 phase Start TUC2 phase Start Str general
3.4.15 Stub bus

Stub bus protection is an instantaneous overcurrent unit, but it order for it to be activated, the disconnector needs to be open. This
function is useful in breaker and a half configurations. It can be used as a fixed time overcurrent unit with its own settings or any of
the units available can be used with a logic which ensures that they are continuously blocked until the line switch is opened.
The settings used are as follows:

❑ Phase threshold (A): It is set as secondary amperes. It indicates the phase current value for which the function is
activated.
❑ Phase Delay Time (ms): Indicates the time during which the conditions for tripping the phase function must be met.
❑ Neutral threshold (A): It is set as secondary amperes. It indicates the neutral current value for which the function is
activated.
❑ Neutral Delay Time (ms): Indicates the time during which the conditions for tripping must be met.
recloser (3.13.6).
Table 107 Stub Bus function settings

PhStrVal Phase threshold (A) 0.02 200 0.01 float32
PhOpTmms Phase Delay Time (ms) 0 600000 10 uint32
NStrVal Neutral threshold (A) 0.02 200 0.001 float32
NOpTmms Neutral Delay Time (ms) 0 600000 10 uint32
There are independent settings, inputs, commands and outputs in each unit:
❑ Node: PROT/PSTB
❑ Settings. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 107.
❑ Logic inputs:
 89 Open/closed input. It indicates the disconnector status
❑ Commands:
 Stub Bus phase x Start. Indicates that the stub protection is started up by a phase. It is independent for each phase.
 Stub Bus neutral Start. Indicates that the stub protection is started up by the neutral.

User Manual 168
 Stub Bus phase X Trip. Indicates that the stub protection is tripped by a phase. It is independent for each phase.
 Stub Bus neutral Trip. Indicates that the stub protection is tripped by the neutral.
 Stub Bus Start. Indicates that the stub protection is started up by a phase or by the neutral.
 Stub Bus Trip. Indicates that the stub protection is tripped by a phase or by the neutral.
 Stub Bus Status. Indicates whether the stub protection is enabled or not.
❑ "Disconnector 1 Status (DI) = OPEN". It is the general status of the disconnector (SXWI)
Table 108 Stub Bus function outputs.

Stub Bus phase A Start Str phsA
Stub Bus phase B Start Str phsB
Stub Bus phase C Start Str phsC
Stub Bus neutral Start Str neutral (neut in Ed2)
Stub Bus phase A Trip Op phsA
Stub Bus phase B Trip Op phsB
Stub Bus phase C Trip Op phsC
Stub Bus neutral Trip Op neutral (neut in Ed2)
Stub Bus Start Str general
Stub Bus Trip Op general
Stub Bus Status StEna general
Figure 88 Stub Bus function diagram
3.4.15.1 Differential Stub bus

In the 52 ½ configuration, a differential stub bus protection is available, but in order for it to be activated, the disconnector
needs to be open.
With the function enabled by setting, it is only active when the 3 phases of the disconnector are open
With the disconnector open at one end, the protection is affected:
❑ The phase measurements of the local end are zero; therefore, the measures send to the remote end are zero.
❑ The line differential of the end with the disconnector open does not trip.

User Manual 169
❑ It does not allow direct trip commands from the other end.
It is calculated on each of the phases and on 3I0. The differential current and restraint of the two breakers are used, following
the curve of Figure 89.
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓 = |𝐼𝐵𝑟1 + 𝐼𝐵𝑟2 |
|𝐼𝐵𝑟1 | + |𝐼𝐵𝑟2 |
𝐼𝑝𝑎𝑠𝑜 =
2
Where
𝐼𝐵𝑟1 breaker 1 current
𝐼𝐵𝑟2 breaker 2 current
Figure 89 Stub differential protection curve with 2 slopes
Idifferential
Trip zone
2
Sensitivity 1
Irestraint
Ires1 Ires2
There are two independent units for phases and neutral (3I0) with settings, commands and outputs:
❑ Phases: Node DIF/PSTB

❑ Neutral: Node NDIF/PSTB
Table 109 shows the settings of each unit:

❑ Sensitivity (p.u.): Indicates the minimum value of the pickup of the differential characteristic in p.u. of rated current.
❑ Rest.current step 1 (p.u.): Indicates the restraint current for which the slope 1 starts in p.u. of rated current.
❑ Rest.current step 2 (p.u.): Indicates the restraint current for which the slope 2 starts in p.u. of rated current
Outputs: Table 110 and Table 111 show the output data of the function.
❑ Phase unit:

User Manual 170
 Start Stub diff. X. Indicates that the differential stub protection is started up by a phase. It is independent for each
phase.
 Trip Stub diff. X. Indicates that the differential stub protection is tripped up by a phase. It is independent for each
phase.
 Diff Phases stub status. Enabled and not blocked.
❑ Neutral unit:
 Start Stub diff.Neutro. Indicates that the differential stub protection is started up by neutral.
 Trip Stub diff.Neutro. Indicates that the differential stub protection is tripped up by neutral.
 Diff Neutral stub status. Enabled and not blocked.
Every unit has blocking commands:
❑ “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. Only acts when the function is enabled.
Table 109 Differential stub bus function settings

Ena Enabled 0 1 1 NO / YES Booleano
LoSet Sensitivity (p.u.) 0,1 10 0,01 float
RstA1 Current step 1 (p.u.) 0 10 0,01 float
RstA2 Current step 2 (p.u.) 0 10 0,01 float
Slope1 Slope 1 (%) 5 100 1 float
Slope2 Slope 2 (%) 5 200 1 float
OpDlTmms Aditional Time (ms) 0 60000 1 float
LogInBlk Blocking input -1 8388607 1 inref
GenTrip General Trip 0 1 1 NO / YES Booleano
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 NO / YES Booleano
Table 110 Phase differential stub bus output.

Diff Phases stub status StEna general
Start Stub diff.A Str phsA
Start Stub diff.B Str phsB
Start Stub diff.C Str phsC
Trip diff stub A Op phsA
Trip diff stub B Op phsB
Trip diff stub C Op phsC
Table 111 Neutral differential stub bus output.

Diff Neutral stub status StEna general StEna general
Start Stub diff.Neutro Str neutral Str neut
Trip diff stub Neutral Op neutral Op neut
3.5 VOLTAGE UNITS
3.5.1 General description

When enabled and unblocked, the overvoltage units act when the setting value is exceed during the programmed time. In order to
reset, the voltage must fall below the pickup value return percentage. For example, if the pickup threshold is 50V and the reset
percentage is 10%, the unit must register voltage above 50V in order to pickup and voltage below 45V in order to reset (50-0.1 50).
When enabled and unblocked, the undervoltage units act when the voltage is inferior to the setting value during the programmed
time. In order to reset, the voltage must exceed the pickup value return percentage. For example, if the pickup threshold is 50V and

User Manual 171
the reset percentage is 10%, the unit must register voltage below 50V in order to pickup and voltage above 55V in order to reset
(50+0.1 50).
The voltage units are not directional.
The voltage unit’s general settings are available in the PROT/PVGE1 node (return percentages and VO measurement type):
❑ Phase overV drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage below which the voltage must fall in order that the
instantaneous and timed phased units reset.
❑ Phase underV drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage above which the voltage must rise in order that the
instantaneous and timed phased units reset.
❑ 3V2 drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage below which the voltage must fall in order that the
instantaneous and timed V2 units reset.
❑ 3VO drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage below which the voltage must fall in order that the
instantaneous and timed VO units reset.
❑ 3VO Operating quantity. Indicates the measurement used for the VO overvoltage:
 Calculated: The 3 V0 measurement is used, i.e., the vector sum of the 3 ground to earth phases. 3V0=Va+Vb+Vc
 Measured: The measurement from the transformer configured as Vn is used.
Table 112 General voltage settings

RepValOVp Phase overV drop out (%) 50 99 1 float32
RepValUVp Phase underV drop out (%) 101 110 1 float32
RepValOV2 3V2 drop out (%) 50 99 1 float32
RepValOV0 3VO drop out (%) 50 99 1 float32
Calculated (0)
SelV0 3VO Operating quantity enum
Measured (1)
3.5.1.1 Instantaneous characteristics

When enabled and unblocked, the unit acts when the setting value is exceed during the programmed time.

❑ Operation type. Consult in each unit.
❑ Start value (V). Indicates the voltage value (in secondary volts) at which the function is activated.
recloser (3.13.6).

User Manual 172
Table 113 Instantaneous voltage unit settings

PIOVEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Standard (0)
Vphase-ground FUND(1)
Optype Operation type Vphase-ground FUND(2) enum
Vphase-ground RMS (3)
Vphase-phase RMS (4)
StrVal Start value (V) 0,5 200 0,01 float32
3.5.1.2 Timed characteristics

The different curve options are shown in the curve appendix.
The timed unit can be configured with a minimum of response time, that is, a limit that prevents any unit from tripping below a
minimum time when the trip time corresponding to the curve in use is met. This avoids timed trips which are quicker than the
instantaneous trips. It is configured with additional time setting, so that if it set to zero, there is no such limit.

❑ Start value (V). Set in secondary volts. Indicates the voltage value at which the function is activated.
❑ Operation type. Consult in each unit.
❑ Operating Curve Type Indicates the type of curve selected from the options:
 ANSI-I Normal inverse(3)
 IEC-I Normal inverse (9) / Inverse (11)
 Definite time (49)
❑ Time dial. Indicates the time curve within the selected characteristic.
❑ Delay/minimum time (ms). It has a different functionality depending on the type of curve selected:
 When the selected curve is a definite time, it indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of the
function must be met.
 In the rest of the curve, it indicates the minimum response time. i.e., in order for a trip to be produced, the time used
will be greater between this setting and the time associated to the curve.

User Manual 173
recloser (3.13.6).
Table 114 Timed voltage unit settings

PTVEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Standard (0)
Vphase-ground FUND (1)
Optype Operation type Vphase-ground FUND (2) enum
Vphase-ground RMS (3)
Vphase-phase RMS (4)
StrVal Start value (V) 0,5 200 0,01 float32
TmVCrv Operating curve type IEC-IC Short inverse (13) enum
User curves 1 (33)
User curves 2 (34)
User curves 3 (35)
User curves 4 (36)
Definite time (49)
TmMult Time dial 0,05 30,0 0,01 float32
OpDlTmms Delay/minimum time (ms) 0 600000 10 int32
3.5.2 Phase overvoltage

The phase overvoltage acts on the phase voltage transformers. If the unit is configured with phase to ground voltages, the
protection is wired with phase to ground measurements (Va, Vb and Vc), while if it is configured with phase to phase voltages, the
protection is wired with phase to phase measurements (Vab, Vbc and Vca).
The return percentage can be configured by the user in the PROT/PVGE1 node.
The setting “Operation type” allows for a selection to be made from among the following:
❑ “Vphase-ground FUND”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental value without harmonics.
❑ “Vphase-phase FUND”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and fundamental value without harmonics.
❑ “Vphase-ground RMS”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and rms value with harmonics.
❑ “Vphase-phase RMS”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and rms value with harmonics.
❑ “Standard”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental value without harmonics.

User Manual 174
If the PROT/TVTR voltage phase setting indicates that at least one of the phase-phase voltage options, the operation type can
only be selected as VFAs-phase Fund or Vphase-phase RMS. If any other type is selected, the unit will correct itself internally.
The return percentage is user-configurable (PVGE1).
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PIOV1
 Unit 2: PROT/PIOV2
❑ Commands:
❑ Outputs: Table 115 shows the function’s output data
 IOV1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase. Where X is the
phase.
 IOV1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase. Where X is the phase.
 IOV1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general for all
three phases.
 IOV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 IOV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOV1 Phase Enabled. 33 Indicates that the unit is enabled regardless of it being blocked or not.
Table 115 Instantaneous phase overvoltage function outputs
PIOV1 Signals PIOV2 Signals Data Attribute

IOV1 Start phase A IOV2 Start phase A Str phsA
IOV1 Start phase B IOV2 Start phase B Str phsB
IOV1 Start phase C IOV2 Start phase C Str phsC
IOV1 Trip phase A IOV2 Trip phase A Op phsA
IOV1 Trip phase B IOV2 Trip phase B Op phsB
IOV1 Trip phase C IOV2 Trip phase C Op phsC
IOV1 Phase Status IOV2 Phase Status StEna stVal
IOV1 Phase Start IOV2 Phase Start Str general
IOV1 Phase Trip IOV2 Phase Trip Op general
IOV1 Phase Enabled IOV2 Phase Enabled EnaIOV stVal
3.5.2.2 Timed
There is a single timed unit, which is independent for each of the phases.
❑ “Vphase-ground FUND”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental value without harmonics.
❑ “Vphase-phase FUND”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and fundamental value without harmonics.
❑ “Vphase-ground RMS”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and rms value with harmonics.
❑ “Vphase-phase RMS”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and rms value with harmonics.
❑ “Standard”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental.
If the PROT/TVTR voltage phase setting indicates that at least one of the phase-phase voltage options, the operation type can
only be selected as VFAs-phase Fund or Vphase-phase RMS. If any other type is selected, the unit will correct itself internally.
33
Available from firmware version X.X.21.6 and ICD 8.11.10.0

User Manual 175
There are settings, commands and outputs.
❑ Nodes: PROT/PTOV1
❑ Commands:
 TOV Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase. Where X is the
phase.
 TOV Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase. Where X is the phase.
 TOV Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general for all three
phases.
 TOV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 TOV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOV Phase Enabled. 33 Indicates that the unit is enabled regardless of it being blocked or not.
Table 116 Timed phase overvoltage function outputs

TOV Start phase A Str phsA
TOV Start phase B Str phsB
TOV Start phase C Str phsC
TOV Trip phase A Op phsA
TOV Trip phase B Op phsB
TOV Trip phase C Op phsC
TOV Phase Status StEna stVal
TOV Phase Start Str general
TOV Phase Trip Op general
TOV Phase Enabled EnaTOV stVal
3.5.3 Zero sequence overvoltage

There is a timed and an instantaneous unit.
The following can be configured in the PROT/PVGE1 node:
❑ The measurement used between Vn transformer measurement or the vector sum of the three voltage phases (3 V0).
❑ The return percentage is user-configurable (PVGE1).
The setting “Operation type” is not used, as the fundamental frequency measurement is always used.
There is one unit.
It has independent settings, commands and outputs.
❑ PROT/GPIOV1 node
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 112 and Table 113.
❑ Commands:

User Manual 176
 GIOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.

 GIOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOV V0 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 IOV (V0) Enabled. 33 Indicates that the unit is enabled regardless of it being blocked or not.
Table 117 Instantaneous zero sequence overvoltage function outputs

GIOV1 Start Str neut
GIOV1 Trip Op neut
IOV V0 Status StEna stVal
IOV (V0) Enabled EnaIOVV0 stVal
3.5.3.2 Timed
There is one timed unit.
❑ Nodes: PROT/GPTOV1
❑ Commands:
 GTOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 GTOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOV (V0) Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 TOV (V0) Enabled. 33 Indicates that the unit is enabled regardless of it being blocked or not.
Table 118 Timed zero sequence overvoltage function outputs

GTOV1 Start Str neut
GTOV1 Trip Op neut
TOV (V0) Status StEna stVal
TOV (V0) Enabled EnaTOVV0 stVal
3.5.4 Negative sequence overvoltage

There is a timed and an instantaneous unit.
Employs 3 times the negative sequence as a measurement:
3 · V2 = (Va + a2 · Vb + a · Vc) In which a = 1|120º
The calculation of the sequence takes into phase succession order setting (ABC/ACB).
The setting “Operation type” is not used, as the fundamental frequency measurement is always used.
There is one unit.
It has independent settings, commands and outputs.

User Manual 177
❑ Node: PROT/UNPIOV1
❑ Commands:
 UNIOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNIOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOV V2 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 IOV (V2) Enabled. 33 Indicates that the unit is enabled regardless of it being blocked or not.
Table 119 Instantaneous V2 overvoltage function outputs

UNIOV1 Start Str general
UNIOV1 Trip Op general
IOV V2 Status StEna stVal
IOV (V2) Enabled EnaIOVV2 stVal
3.5.4.2 Timed
There is one timed unit.
❑ Node: PROT/UNPTOV1
❑ Commands:
 UNTOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNTOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOV V2 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 TOV (V2) Enabled. 33 Indicates that the unit is enabled regardless of it being blocked or not.
Table 120 Timed V2 overvoltage function outputs

UNTOV1 Start Str general
UNTOV1 Trip Op general
TOV V2 Status StEna stVal
TOV (V2) Enabled EnaTOVV2 stVal
3.5.5 Phase undervoltage

The phase undervoltage acts on the phase voltage transformers. If the unit is configured with phase to ground voltages, the
protection is wired with phase to ground measurements (Va, Vb and Vc), while if it is configured with phase to phase voltages, the
protection is wired with phase to phase measurements (Vab, Vbc and Vca).

User Manual 178
The setting “Operation type”allows for a selection to be made from among the following:
❑ “Standard”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental

❑ “Vphase-ground FUND”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental value without harmonics
❑ “Vphase-phase FUND”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and fundamental value without harmonics
❑ “Vphase-ground RMS”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and rms value with harmonics
❑ “Vphase-phase RMS”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and rms value with harmonics
The return percentage is user-configurable (PVGE1).
❑ Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PIUV1
 Unit 2: PROT/PIUV2
❑ Commands:
 IUV1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase. Where X is the
phase.
 IUV1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase. Where X is the phase.
 IUV1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general for all
three phases.
 IUV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 IUV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IUV1 Phase Enabled. 33 Indicates that the unit is enabled regardless of it being blocked or not.
Table 121 Instantaneous phase undervoltage function outputs
PIUV1 Signals PIUV2 Signals Data Attribute

IUV1 Start phase A IUV2 Start phase A Str phsA
IUV1 Start phase B IUV2 Start phase B Str phsB
IUV1 Start phase C IUV2 Start phase C Str phsC
IUV1 Trip phase A IUV2 Trip phase A Op phsA
IUV1 Trip phase B IUV2 Trip phase B Op phsB
IUV1 Trip phase C IUV2 Trip phase C Op phsC
IUV1 Phase Status IUV2 Phase Status StEna stVal
IUV1 Phase Start IUV2 Phase Start Str general
IUV1 Phase Trip IUV2 Phase Trip Op general
IUV1 Phase Enabled IUV2 Phase Enabled EnaIUV stVal
3.5.5.2 Timed
There is a single timed unit, which is independent for each of the phases.
❑ “Standard”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental

User Manual 179
❑ “Vphase-ground FUND”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental value without harmonics
❑ “Vphase-phase FUND”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and fundamental value without harmonics
❑ “Vphase-ground RMS”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and rms value with harmonics
❑ “Vphase-phase RMS”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and rms value with harmonics
❑ Nodes: PROT/PTUV1
❑ Commands:
 TUV1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase. Where X is the
phase.
 TUV1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase. Where X is the phase.
 TUV Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general for all three
phases.
 TUV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 TUV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TUV Phase Enabled. 33 Indicates that the unit is enabled regardless of it being blocked or not.
Table 122 Timed phase undervoltage function outputs

TUV1 Start phase A Str phsA
TUV1 Start phase B Str phsB
TUV1 Start phase C Str phsC
TUV1 Trip phase A Op phsA
TUV1 Trip phase B Op phsB
TUV1 Trip phase C Op phsC
TUV Phase Status StEna stVal
TUV1 Phase Start Str general
TUV1 Phase Trip Op general
TUV Phase Enabled EnaTUV stVal
3.5.6 Minimum voltage

It analyzes the voltages of the two sides of the breaker, generating a trip when both voltages are below the threshold during the set
time
With the "General Trip" setting, the breaker opening command can be generated. The trip generated by this unit is not reclosabled.
Two units are available. In both units the voltage of the A side is the one selected in the synchronism (node RSYN):
❑ Vsyn1: Node VS/PIUV1

❑ Vsyn2: Node VS/PIUV2
Table 123 shows the settings used in this function:
❑ Enabled. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not

❑ Threshold A (V). Indicates the voltage value (in secondary volts) below which is considered undervoltage on the A side.
❑ Threshold B (V). Indicates the voltage value (in secondary volts) below which is considered undervoltage on the B side.

User Manual 180
❑ Voltage input34. It allows selecting the voltages used in this function from the options:
 V line. To activate, the undervoltage conditions must be met in the voltage Vs and the one selected on side A
of the synchronism function (node RSYN).
 V phases(All). To activate, the undervoltage conditions must be met in the voltage Vs and in all voltage phases.
 V phases(Any). To activate, the undervoltage conditions must be met in the voltage Vs and in the voltage of
any phases.
 Only Vs. To activate, the undervoltage conditions must be met in the voltage Vs. The phase voltages are not
considered.
recloser (3.13.6).
Outputs: Table 124 shows the function’s output data of the two units. The signals are the same for both units
❑ Low voltage status U1. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
❑ VSPIUV Start A – U1. Indicates that the voltage on the A side is below the “Threshold A” setting.
❑ VSPIUV Start B – U1. Indicates that the voltage on the B side is below the “Threshold B” setting.
❑ VSPIUV Start U 1. Indicates that the voltage of both sides is below the threshold setting.
❑ VSPIUV Trip U 1. Indicates that the voltage of both sides is below the threshold setting during the “Delay time” setting.
Each unit has blocking commands:
❑ “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. Only acts when the function is enabled.
Table 123 Minimum voltage settings

AStrVal Threshold A (V) 0,5 200 0,01 float32
BStrVal Threshold B (V) 0,5 200 0,01 float32
GenTrip Blocking input NO / YES Boolean
LogInBlk General Trip inref
V line (0)
TypeInV Voltage input V phases (All) (1) enum
V pases (Any) (2)
Only Vs (3)
Table 124 Minimum voltage outputs.
VS/PTUV1 VS/PTUV2 Data Attribute

Low voltage status U1 Low voltage status U2 StEna general
VSPIUV Start A – U1 VSPIUV Start A – U2 StrA general
VSPIUV Start B – U1 VSPIUV Start B – U2 StrB general
VSPIUV Start U 1 VSPIUV Start U 2 Str general
VSPIUV Trip U 1 VSPIUV Trip U 2 Op general
34
Available from firmware version 6.10.22.0 and ICD 8.12.0.0

User Manual 181
3.6 FREQUENCY UNITS
The frequency is measured each cycle and refreshed each half cycle, as shown in Figure 90.
Figure 90 Frequency Calculation
The voltage used in the frequency measurement is calculated as "2·Va-Vb-Vc". The algorithm is executed in the event of the voltage
registering zero. The frequency is calculated if the voltage measurement is greater than 2.5V.
Both the positive and negative registers are measured, although the frequency measurement is carried out for complete cycles.

User Manual 182
3.6.1 Frequency
This function is composed of 8 steps, which are programmable as maximum or minimum frequencies.
The function’s node, PROT/PTGF1, has independent settings for each step and common settings for all.
The common settings for all steps are as follows:
❑ Minimum voltage (V). Indicates the minimum voltage value required in at least one of the phases. If the three phase
voltages are below the value of the setting, the frequency protection does not act, that is, the unit does not start.
❑ Number of cycles (Start). Indicates the number of cycles during which the frequency conditions necessary for the unit to
pickup must be met.
❑ Number of cycles (Reset). Indicates the number of cycles during which the drop conditions necessary for the unit to reset
must be met in the event of the unit's not having tripped.
❑ OverFreq. Reset time (ms). Once tripped by overfrequency, this is the time during which the reset conditions must be met
in order to clear the trip from the unit. It is applied to all the steps configured as overfrequency.
❑ UnderFreq. Reset time (ms). Once tripped by underfrequency, this is the time during which the reset conditions must be
met in order to clear the trip from the unit. It is applied to all the steps configured as underfrequency.
recloser (3.13.6).
The independent settings for each of the 8 steps are:
❑ Enabled. Indicates whether the step is enabled or not.

❑ Start value (Hz). Indicates the frequency value at which the function is activated.
❑ Function type. Indicates whether its acts on overfrequency or underfrequency.
❑ Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the step.
The form in which it acts varies in accordance with type of step selected.
❑ Minimum frequency. Each step picks up when the frequency falls below the set value during a number of cycles equal or
higher than the “No. of pickup cycles” setting. Once it picks up, the programmed time must elapse in order for a trip to be
produced. If the unit has tripped, it drops out if the frequency is correct during the underfrequency reset time. If it has
picked up but has not tripped, it drops out if the frequency is correct during reset cycles.
❑ Maximum frequency. Each step picks up when the frequency exceeds the set value during a number of cycles equal or
higher than the “No. of pickup cycles” setting. Once it picks up, the programmed time must elapse in order for a trip to be
produced. If the unit has tripped, it drops out if the frequency is correct during the overfrequency reset time. If it has
picked up but has not tripped, it drops out if the frequency is correct during reset cycles.
❑ Nodes: PROT/PTGF1
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. It only acts on the enabled steps. If acts on the 8 steps
 “DOrdFminB”. Blocking and unblocking of the steps configured as minimum frequency. It only acts on the enabled
steps.
 “DOrdFmaxB”. Blocking and unblocking of the steps configured as maximum frequency. It only acts on the enabled
steps.

User Manual 183
 “DOrdFL1Bl”. Blocking and unblocking of step 1. It only acts if the step is enabled
 “DOrdFL2Bl”… “DOrdFL8Bl”. As above, but acts on steps 2 to 8.
❑ Outputs: Table 125 shows the function’s output data. They are independent for each step
 Level X Frequency Start. Indicates that the step has picked up. It is independent for each step.
 Level X Frequency Trip. Indicates that the step has tripped. It is independent for each step.
 Level X Frequency Status. Indicates the step’s status. Active when enabled and not blocked. Independent for each step.
 Level X Frequency Enabled. 35Indicates that the step is enabled regardless of it being blocked or not. Independent for
each step.
Table 125 Frequency function outputs

Level 1 Frequency Start Str1 general
Level 1 Frequency Trip Op1 general
Level 1 Frequency Status StEna1 stVal
Level 1 Frequency Enabled EnaF1 stVal
Same for the rest of the steps
Level 8 Frequency Start Str8 general
Level 8 Frequency Trip OP8 general
Level 8 Frequency Status StEna8 stVal
Level 8 Frequency Enabled EnaF8 stVal
35

User Manual 184
Table 126 General frequency protection settings
Data Parameter Min Max Step Remarks Type

BlkValV Minimum voltage (V) 15 200 1 float32
StrNumCyc Number of cycles (Start) 3 15 1 int32
RepNumCyc Number of cycles (Reset) 0 10 1 int32
OFRsDlTmms OverFreq. Reset time (ms) 0 7200000 10 int32
UFRsDlTmms UnderFreq. Reset time (ms) 0 7200000 10 int32
PTGFEna1 Step 1 enabled NO / YES Boolean
StrVal1 Step 1. Start value (Hz) 45 65 0,01 float32
OpDlTmms1 Step 1. Delay time(ms) 0 7200000 10 int32
StTyp1 Step 1. Function type Maximum/Minimum enum
LogInBlk1 Step 1. Blocking input uint32
PTGFEna2 Step 2. Enabled NO / YES Boolean
PTGFEna6 Step 6. enabled NO / YES Boolean
3.6.2 Frequency rate of change

This unit has 8 steps. In each step, a relay is activated if the frequency variation per time unit is higher than the set value. The
variation can represent a reduction and/or an increase in the frequency, depending on the setting “Operation type”.
The function’s node, PROT/PFRC1, has independent settings for each step and common settings for all.
The common settings for all steps are as follows:
❑ Enabled. Indicates whether the unit is enabled or not.

User Manual 185
❑ Operation type. Indicates the whether the frequency variation is a reduction (Negative), and increase (Positive) or both
(Negative and positive).
❑ Minimum current level (A). Indicates the minimum current value below which it does no act, the unit is not permitted to
pickup.
❑ Number of cycles (Start). Indicates the number of cycles during which the conditions necessary for the unit to pickup
must be met.
❑ Number of cycles (Reset). Indicates the number of cycles during which the drop conditions necessary for the unit to reset
must be met in the event of the unit's not having tripped.
❑ Reset delay time (ms). Once tripped, this is the time during which the reset conditions must be met in order to clear the
trip from the unit.
❑ Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the unit.
recloser (3.13.6).
❑ Minimum allowed voltage (V). The setting as used in the frequency protection (PTGF1). Indicates the minimum voltage
value.
❑ F. Mínima (Hz)36. Indicates the minimum frequency value below which the frequency protection does not act, the unit is
not permitted to pickup.
The independent settings for each of the 8 steps are:
❑ Supervision f max. Indicates the maximum frequency above with the frequency rate of change is not measured.
❑ f start value (Hz/s). Indicates the frequency variation value at which the function is activated.
❑ Trip lock. Selects the signal which, when active, locks the activation of the function; so, once activated, the signal is kept
until the lock signal and the rate of change signal are deactivated.
❑ Step x. Blocking input 37. Selects the signal which, when active, locks the activation of that step.
❑ Nodes: PROT/PFRC1
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. It only acts on the enabled steps. If acts on the 8 steps
❑ Outputs: Table 128 shows the function’s output data. They are independent for each step
 ROCOF df/dt Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. Common for all steps.
 Level X df/dt Start. Indicates that the step has picked up. It is independent for each step. Where X indicates the level
from 1 to 8.
 Level X df/dt Trip. Indicates that the step has tripped. It is independent for each step. Where X indicates the level from
1 to 8.
 ROCOF (dfdt) Enabled.37 Indicates that the ROCOF is enabled regardless of it being blocked or not. Common for all
steps.
 Level 1 df/dt blocked37. Indicates that the step is blocked. It is independent for each step. Where X indicates the level
from 1 to 8.
36
Available from firmware version X.X.21.2 and ICDs 8.11.0.0.
37
Available from firmware version X.X.22.8 and ICDs 8.14.0.0

User Manual 186
Table 127 Frequency rate of change settings
Data Parameter Min. Max Step Remarks Type

PFRCEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
Negative(0)
Optype Operation type Positive (1) uint32
Negative and Positive (2)
BlkValA Minimum current level (A) 0 100,0 0,1 float32
StrNumCyc Number of cycles (Start) 3 15 1 int32
RepNumCyc Number of cycles (Reset) 0 10 1 int32
RsDlTmms Reset delay time (ms) 0 7200000 10 int32
BlkValHz1 Step 1: Supervision f max 40 70 0,01 float32
StrVal1 Step 1: f start value (Hz/s) 0,20 10 0,0138 float32
OpDlTmms1 Step 1:Delay time (ms) 0 6000039 10 int32
LogInTrLck1 Step 1: Trip Lock uint32
LogInBlk1 Step 1. Blocking input 37 uint32
BlkValHz8 Step 8: Supervision f max 40 70 0,01 float32

StrVal8 Step 8: f start value (Hz/s) 0,20 10 0,0138 float32
OpDlTmms8 Step 8: Delay time (ms) 0 6000039 10 int32
LogInTrLck8 Step 8: Trip Lock uint32
LogInBlk1 Step 1. Blocking input 37 uint32
LogInBlk Blocking input uint32
BlkMinHz F. min (Hz)40 35 70 0.01 float32
Table 128 Frequency rate of change function outputs

ROCOF df/dt Status StEna stVal
ROCOF (dfdt) Enabled EnaRocof stVal
Level 1 df/dt Start Str1 general
Level 1 df/dt Trip Op1 general
Level 1 df/dt blocked37 BlkRocof1 stVal
Level 8 df/dt Start Str8 general
Level 8 df/dt Trip OP8 general
Level 8 df/dt blocked37 BlkRocof8 stVal
General operation.
The function is only effective for frequencies inferior to a threshold called “maximum monitoring frequency”, currents greater than
the threshold called “minimum current” and voltages greater than the minimum monitoring threshold:
❑ Minimum monitoring current. The maximum phase current is compared to this setting. If the minimum current
circulating in all the phases is inferior to the setting, the frequency rate of change unit is not allowed to pickup.
When a current is greater than the set threshold appears in at least one of the phases, the relay waits for 10 cycles
before running the frequency rate of change function.
38
Available from firmware version 8.0.22.0 and ICDs 8.11.0.0. In previous versions, the step is 0,05.
39
Available from firmware version 8.0.22.0 and ICDs 8.11.0.0. In previous versions, the maximun value is 2000.
40
Available from firmware version X.X.21.2 and ICDs 8.11.0.0.

User Manual 187
❑ Minimum monitoring voltage. If the phase B voltage is inferior to the setting, the frequency rate of change unit is
not allowed to pickup. When the voltage exceeds the set threshold, the relay waits for 10 cycles before running the
frequency rate of change function.
The frequency is measured each cycle and reloaded every half cycle, as shown in Figure 90.
The algorithm stores the periods of the signal’s last 4 cycles and calculates the frequency rate of change by comparing the current
cycle’s frequency measurement with the measurement taken from 4 cycles previously, taking into account the time lapse between
both (Figure 91).
df/dt = (f1 − f5)/(T1 + T2 + T3 + T4)
In which:
f5 =frequency measurement taken 4 cycles previously
f4 =frequency measurement taken 3 cycles previously T4 period of the 4th cycle starting from the end
f3 =frequency measurement taken 2 cycles previously T3 period of the 3rd cycle starting from the end
f2 =frequency measurement taken 1 cycle previously T2 period of the 2nd cycle starting from the end
f1 =Last frequency measurement T1 period of the last cycle
This calculation is repeated, taking into account the measurements separated by two cycles in order to ensure that the frequency
has fallen during the entire period, i.e., to ensure that an incorrect measurement does not lead to a trip. Two checks are carried
out:
❑ the measurement of the current cycle against that of the cycle minus two cycles
df/dt2 = (fn − fn − 4)/(tn − tn − 4)
❑ the measurement of the cycle minus two cycles against that of the cycle minus four cycles
df/dt3 = (fn − 4 − fn − 8)/(tn − 4 − tn − 8)
Figure 91 Frequency rate of change calculation
For the unit to pickup, the frequency rate of change must be exceeded by an absolute value during the set number of cycles. The
pickup is only produced if the frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change value meets the criterion selected in the setting
“Operation type”:
❑ Negative. The frequency rate of change/voltage rate is negative, i.e., when the current frequency is inferior to that
measured 4 cycles previously.
❑ Positive. The frequency rate of change/voltage rate is positive, i.e., when the current frequency is greater than that
measured 4 cycles previously.
❑ Negative and Positive. Acts on frequency rate of change/voltage rate in both directions.
During the pickup process, one measurement is allowed to be out of the pickup range without restarting the process. For example,
if 3 cycles are required to cause a pickup, the threshold need only be exceeded 3 times from a total of 4 consecutive
measurements.

User Manual 188
In order for a trip to occur once the unit has picked up, the frequency rate of change measurement must remain between the set
frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change value and a reset value to the frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change
minus 0.05Hz/s during the set time.
In order for the unit to reset once it has picked up, the frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change measurement must be
detected as being 0.05Hz/s below the set value during the number of cycles programmes as reset cycles.
In order for the unit to reset once it has tripped, the frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change measurement must be
detected as being 0.05Hz/s below the set value during the reset time. Any sealing signals that have been configured must register a
value of zero in order for the trip to be deactivated.
Figure 92 Frequency rate of change trip diagram
3.7 POWER UNITS
3.7.1 General
Using the voltage and current measurements, the real and reactive powers and the power factor are calculated. The values
obtained are used for the power protection functions.
The trip thresholds are programmed as a percentage of the rated apparent power, S = 3 · V · I, in which:
❑ Vn: rated phase to ground voltage (phase-ground). It is calculated from the phase to phase primary voltage of the local
end (node PROT/LINPDIF) and the voltage transformation ratio (node PROT/TVTR)
❑ In: The rated phase current of the local end, the PROT/ LIINPDIF node.
The units’ reset threshold is configured in the PROT/PDOP1 node, ranging from 0.1% to 5%:
❑ P reset threshold (%). Indicates the reset threshold for the real power units.
❑ Q reset threshold (%). Indicates the reset threshold for the reactive power units.
❑ S reset threshold (%). Indicates the reset threshold for the apparent power units.

User Manual 189
Table 129 Power units reset settings

RepValP P reset threshold (%) 0.1 5 0,1 float32
RepValQ Q reset threshold (%) 0.1 5 0,1 float32
RepValS S reset threshold (%) 0.1 5 0,1 float32
The power units’ settings are similar to each other. Each unit has independent settings:

❑ Start value (%). Indicates the percentage in relation to the rated power necessary for the unit to pickup.
❑ Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the step.
recloser (3.13.6).
Table 130 Power unit settings

PDUPEna (minimum) Boolean
Enabled NO / YES
PDOPEna(maximum) Boolean
1,0 (PDUP node)
PcStrVal Start value (%) 200,0 0,1 float32
0,5 (PDOP node)41
The settings, commands and outputs available are similar in all the units, with the exception of the node:
❑ Node: Indicated in each specific unit.

❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. Only acts if the unit is enabled.
 X Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 X Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 X Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Where X indicates the Power protection unit.
Table 131 Power function outputs

X Status StEna stVal
X Start Str general
X Trip Op general
41
Available from ICD version 8.3.22.3 and ICDs version 8.14.0.0. Until this release, on PDOP nodes, the minimum value was
1,0.

User Manual 190
3.7.2 Minimum real power

This unit’s node is PROT/PDUP1.
It provides protection against excessive decreases in the generated power. It compares the real power with the minimum power
given by the setting. In the event of the generated power being inferior to the power established in the setting during the
programmed time, the protection trips the corresponding relay. Any reverse power will be considered as below the minimum
power threshold and will thus activate the function.
In order to reset, the power must exceed the pickup threshold plus the reset percentage. For example, if the reset percentage is set
at 2%, the unit will reset if the power exceeds the 102% of the pickup threshold.
The settings, commands and outputs available are indicated in section 3.7.1.
Table 132 Minimum real power function outputs
Attribute (Edition
PDUP1 Signals Data (Edition 1) Attribute (Edition 1) Data (Edition 2)
2)
Minimum P Start Str stVal Str general
Minimum P Trip Op stVal Op general
Minimum P Status StEna stVal StEna stVal
3.7.3 Maximum real power

There are two independent units, whose nodes are PROT/PDOP1 and PROT/PDOP2.
It provides protection against excessive increases in the power generated. It compares the real power with the maximum power
given by the setting. In the event of the generated power being greater than the power established in the setting during the
programmed time, the protection trips the corresponding relay.
In order to reset, the power must be inferior to the pickup threshold less the reset percentage. For example, if the reset percentage
is set at 2%, the unit will reset if the power is inferior to 98% of the pickup threshold.
Table 133 Maximum real power function outputs
Attribute Attribute (Edition

PDOP1 Signals PDOP2 Signals Data (Edition 1) Data (Edition 2)
(Edition 1) 2)
High Maximum P Start Low Maximum P Start Str stVal Str general
High Maximum P Trip Low Maximum P Trip Op stVal Op general
Maximum P Level 1 Status Maximum P Level 2 Status StEna stVal StEna stVal
3.7.4 Real power inversion

The protection is activated when the real power flow is inverted (motorization of generators).
In order to act, the real power must be negative; in the event of the real power exceeding the set value during the programmed
time, the protection trips the corresponding relay.
In order to reset, the power must be inferior to the pickup threshold less the reset percentage.
For example, if the threshold is set at 100W, the unit will pickup as of a measured power of -100w. If the reset percentage is set at
2%, the unit will reset when the power is below -98W (98% of set value).

User Manual 191
Table 134 Real power inversion function outputs
Attribute Attribute
(Edition 1) (Edition 2)
High P Inversion Start Low P Inversion Start Str stVal Str general
High P Inversion Trip Low P Inversion Trip Op stVal Op general
P Inversion Level 1 Status P Inversion Level 2 Status StEna stVal StEna stVal
3.7.5 Reactive power inversion

The protection is activated when the reactive power flow is inverted (field loss in generators).
In order to act, the reactive power must be negative; in the event of the real power exceeding the set value during the
In order to reset, the power must be inferior to the pickup threshold less the reset percentage.
For example, if the threshold is set at 100W, the unit will pickup as of a measured power of -100w. If the reset percentage is set at
2%, the unit will reset when the power is below -98W (98% of set value).
Table 135 Reactive power inversion function outputs
Attribute Attribute
(Edition 1) (Edition 2)
High Q Inversion Start Low Q Inversion Start Str stVal Str general
High Q Inversion Trip Low Q Inversion Trip Op stVal Op general
Q Inversion Level 1 Status Q Inversion Level 2 Status StEna stVal StEna stVal
3.7.6 Minimum apparent power

This unit’s node is PROT/PDUP2.
It provides protection against excessive decreases in the power generated. It compares the apparent power with the minimum
power given by the setting. In the event of the generated power being inferior to the power established in the setting during the
In order to reset, the power must exceed the pickup threshold plus the reset percentage. For example, if the reset percentage is set
at 2%, the unit will reset if the power exceeds the 102% of the pickup threshold.
Table 136 Minimum apparent power function outputs

Signal Data (Edition 1) Data (Edition 2)
(Edition 1) 2)
Minimum S Start Str stVal Str general
Minimum S Trip Op stVal Op general
Minimum S Status StEna stVal StEna stVal
3.7.7 Maximum apparent power

It provides protection against excessive increases in the power generated. It compares the apparent power with the maximum
power given by the setting. In the event of the generated power being greater than the power established in the setting during the

User Manual 192
In order to reset, the power must be inferior to the pickup threshold less the reset percentage. For example, if the reset percentage
is set at 2%, the unit will reset if the power is inferior to 98% of the pickup threshold.
Table 137 Maximum apparent power function outputs

(Edition 1) 2)
High Maximum S Start Low Maximum S Start Str stVal Str general
High Maximum S Trip Low Maximum S Trip Op stVal Op general
Maximum S Level 1 Status Maximum S Level 2 Status StEna stVal StEna stVal
3.8 LOAD ENCROACHMENT
This unit specifies a functioning zone in which the phase-phase units of the distance functions are blocked (mho and quadrilateral).
Figure 93 shows this unit's diagram for phase combination AB (the other phase combinations are equivalents).
For the operation of the load encroachment, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
❑ The phase-phase impedance is between impedance margins (see Figure 93)42.

❑ The positive sequence and phase combination current exceeds the threshold (setting).
The unit’s settings are as follows:

❑ Minimum I1 threshold (A). Indicates the minimum current positive sequence and phase combination value necessary to
activate the unit.
❑ Z forward (Ohm). Indicates the forward load zone impedance module.
❑ Positive angle Forward (º). Indicates the load zone's positive limit angle forward.
❑ Negative angle Forward (º). Indicates the load zone's negative limit angle forward.
❑ Z reverse (Ohm). Indicates the reverse load zone impedance module.
❑ Positive angle reverse (º). Indicates the load zone's positive limit angle backwards.
❑ Negative angle reverse (º). Indicates the load zone's negative limit angle backwards.
❑ Blocking input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function.
It has independent settings, commands and outputs:
❑ Node: PROT/PLEC1
❑ Commands:
 Load Encroachment. Indicates that the unit is active.
 Load Encroachment Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
42
Since DSP version 4.0 phase-phase impedance is used. Previoues versions use positive sequence impedance.

User Manual 193
Table 138 Load zone settings

LoEnEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
BlkValI1 Minimum I1 threshold (A) 0,05 25 0,01 float32
FwRisLod Z forward (Ohm) 0,01 500 0,01 float32
FwAngLod Positive angle forward (º) 0 90 1 float32
FwNAngLod Negative angle forward (º) 270 359 1 float32
RvRisLod Z reverse (Ohm) 0,01 500 0,01 float32
RvAngLod Positive angle reverse (º) 90 180 1 float32
RvNAngLod Negative angle reverse (º) 180 270 1 float32
Table 139 Load zone function outputs

Load Encroachment Op general
Load Encroachment Status StEna stVal
Figure 93 Load Zone Diagram (Phases AB)
3.9 FUSE FAILURE
The measurement obtained from the half-cycle DFT is used to obtain results before the protection units are activated.
The fuse failure conditions are as follows:
❑ The three breakers are closed. (Open pole detector). Signals "Open pole (1 or 2)" and "3 open poles" of the scheme. If the open
pole detector is disabled, the three poles are considered closed.
❑ I1 positive sequence current is greater than 5% of the rated current. 43
❑ The increase in I1 positive sequence and the IN neutral current in relation to the current measured 1 cycle previously must be less
than 0.1A for 5A rated current or 0.02A for rated current 1A.
❑ The fault detection unit must be deactivated (Fault detection signal of the scheme).
❑ Distance units (mho or quadrilateral) and/or overcurrent units (phase, ground, earth system and unbalanced) have not picked up.
❑ The angle difference between currents I1 and I0 and those of 1 cycle previous are less than 5º.
43
From firmware version 5.19.15.7 and ICD version 6.3.1.4 can be set. In previous versions, it was fixed 5%.

User Manual 194
❑ The V1 positive sequence voltage, memorized 1 cycle previously, must exceed VFF and drop below 95% of VFF.
VFF = VN · 80% (V)
With VN as the rated phase to ground voltage. It is calculated from the phase to phase primary voltage of the local end (node
PROT/LINPDIF) and the voltage transformation ratio (node PROT/TVTR)
If the function detects all the above conditions, or if the “Fuse Fail input” is activated, a fuse failure pickup signal is produced and used
to block the units in question (configurable).
These conditions must be met during a programmable time in order for the fuse failure trip to be activated. Once tripped, the fuse fault
is maintained until the V1 voltage rises above VFF.
If any of the overcurrent functions (phase, ground, earth system and unbalanced) or distance units have picked up or if during the
timeout the relay picks up at least one of these units, the fuse failure output is not activated as the situation is considered a fault, not a
fuse failure.
The fuse failure pickup and trip are also activated when the digital “Fuse Fail input” is activated independently of the programmed
time. The fuse failure is only deactivated when the input is deactivated.
If the “Fuse Fail input” input is activated, the synchrocheck unit is deactivated.
The fuse failure pickup can be used as a blocking signal for other functions by means of each function’s logic signals.
The overcurrent units have settings that configure their functioning in the event of a fuse failure, allowing the enabling of the function,
the inhibition of directional, etc.

❑ Delay time (ms). Indicates the time during which the conditions must be met in order for the trip to take place.
❑ Fuse Fail input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates a fuse failure.
❑ FF input (B side-sinc1). It selects the signal which, when activated, indicates a fuse failure on breaker 1’s side B synchronism.
❑ FF input (B side-sinc2). It selects the signal which, when activated, indicates a fuse failure on breaker 2’s side B synchronism.
❑ Minimum I1/Irated(%)43.Indicates the minimum value of I1 in relation to rated I. 43
Table 140 Fuse failure settings

RFUFEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
LogInFF Fuse Fail input inref
LogInFFB1 FF input (B side-sinc1) inref
LogInFFB2 FF input (B side-sinc2) inref
BlkValI1 Minimum I1/Irated(%) 2 10 1 uint32

User Manual 195
Figure 94 Fuse failure scheme
❑ Node: PROT/RFUF1
❑ Commands:
 Fuse Failure Start. Indicates that the fuse failure has picked up.
 Fuse Failure Trip. Indicates that the fuse failure has tripped, that is, the additional time has elapsed with the unit picked up.
 Fuse Failure B1 Activation. Indicates that fuse failure is activated on breaker 1’s synchronism B side.
 Fuse Failure B2 Activation. Indicates that fuse failure is activated on breaker 2’s synchronism B side.
 Fuse Failure Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 141 Fuse failure function outputs

Fuse Failure Start Str general
Fuse Failure Trip Op general
Fuse Failure B1 Activation FFB1 general
Fuse Failure B2 Activation FFB2 general
Fuse Failure Status StEna stVal

User Manual 196
3.10 POWER SWING
This unit determines the function conditions according to which distance function trips is disabled for single-phase and/or phase-phase
units and for each zone, depending on the settings.
Differentiation is made between stable and unstable power swing.
❑ Stable swing: when distance functions can be blocked by generating the "Power Swing Blocked" signal.
❑ Unstable swing: when some system elements can be tripping to prevent the disturbance extending. To do this, this
function generates the "OST- Out of Step Tripping" signal.
To determine swinging conditions, the complete positive sequence impedance is used (for 3 closed poles) or the minimum impedance
of phase (A, B, C) or phase combination (AB, BC or CA) of the closed poles (if there is 1 open pole). By calculating the position of this
impedance in the R/X diagram, it is possible to measure how and at what speed it is moving. To do this, on the one hand, some zones
are defined in the diagram, and on the other some transfer times from one zone to another are defined. These zones and times are
parameterised by settings.
Figure 95 shows the power swinging characteristic diagram.
Figure 95 Power Swing Characteristic
Figure 97 shows this unit's logic diagram. On the one hand, it shows the "PSB" signal's activation conditions and on the other, the "OST"
signal's activation conditions.
"Power Swing Blocking" (PSB) is activated when any of the following conditions is fulfilled:
❑ The positive sequence impedance takes a time longer than the "Blocking Time (ms)" (setting) to pass from the outside
zone to the middle zone and the unblocking signal is not activated (see Figure 95).
❑ The positive sequence impedance goes into the middle zone and the time between going from the outside zone to the
middle zone is longer than the "Trip Time (ms)" (setting) and shorter than the "Blocking Time (ms)" (setting) and the
unblocking signal is not activated. In this case the trip must be enabled and not blocked (see Figure 95).
If the 3 poles are closed, the blocking only affects the phase-phase units. With 1 pole open, the blocking affects all single- and phase-
phase units. The breaker status is determined by digital inputs.
Once activated, the "PSB" signal is maintained for 2 seconds as long as no unblocking conditions are fulfilled and that it is inside the
outer zone. If the "Memory Enabled" setting is "YES", blocking will last 1 second once outside the outer zone. If it is "NO", there is no
blocking once outside the outer zone.
Each of the zones, for both the Mho and Quadrilateral characteristics can be blocked or unblocked by this function depending on the
setting selection: "Zone 1 Blocking"…"Zone 5 Blocking".
It is also possible to block the teleprotection using the setting "Teleprotection Blocking" so that TPR reception and TPT transmission is
ignored.

User Manual 197
The activation of "Trip by Power Swing" (OST) is determined depending on the "Trip Enabled" setting. If this setting is "NO", the trip is
never activated.
If the setting is IN_ZMED, the conditions for activation are as follows:
❑ The positive sequence impedance goes into the middle zone and the time between going from the outside zone to the
middle zone is longer than the "Trip Time (ms)" (setting) and shorter than the "Blocking Time (ms)" (setting).See Figure
95.
❑ The unblocking signal is not activated.
If the setting is OUT_ZMED, the conditions for activation are as follows:
❑ If the case is as above (the positive sequence impedance enters the middle zone and the time it takes to go from the
outer zone to the middle zone is greater than "Trip Time (ms)" and less than "Blocking Time (ms)", the impedance leaves
the middle zone through the opposite side to where it entered. See Figure 95.
❑ When the previous condition is fulfilled, once the set time "Trip delay" has elapsed, since the impedance leaves the
middle zone and if it does not enter again.
❑ The unblocking signal is not activated.
The unblocking signal is activated if any of the following conditions is fulfilled:
❑ The positive sequence threshold is less than "I1 Minimum threshold (A)" (setting).
❑ There is more than one pole open.
❑ The fuse failure function is active.
❑ The impedance stays in the internal zone for a time longer than the one indicated in the "Internal Zone unblock T (ms)".
❑ If there are 3 poles closed and the following conditions are fulfilled during "After fault Reset time (ms)" (setting):
 The phase selector detects a two or single-phase fault using the negative sequence percentage (I2>0.05xIrated
& I2/I1>10%).
 The negative sequence current exceeds "I2 Threshold (A)" (setting).
The unit’s settings are as follows:

❑ Memory Enabled. Indicates whether or not the swing blocking signal will be maintained for 1 second, after leaving the
outer zone.
❑ Zone X Blocking. Enables or disables blocking each zone of the unit.
❑ Teleprotection Blocking. Enables or disables teleprotection blocking.
❑ Middle zone Right R. Resistive limit of the middle zone for R>=0 (See Figure 95).
❑ Middle zone Left R. Resistive limit of the middle zone for R>=0 (See Figure 95).
❑ Middle zone Top Z. Limit impedance of the middle zone for X>=0 (See Figure 95).
❑ Middle zone Bottom Z. Limit impedance of the middle zone for X<0 (See Figure 95).
❑ Internal zone Right R. Resistive limit of the inner zone for R>=0 (See Figure 95).
❑ Internal zone Left R. Resistive limit of the inner zone for R<0 (See Figure 95).
❑ I1 Minimum threshold (A).This is the minimum I1 required to activate the swing function.
❑ Slope angle. Indicates the slope angle of the resistive limits (See Figure 95).
❑ Power swing detection zone. (Distance between zones) 44. Indicates the width of the outer zone (See Figure 95).
❑ Blocking time (ms). Time for going between the outer zone and middle zone for activating blocking.
❑ Trip Enabled. Indicates the way of determining whether there is a trip condition.
❑ Trip Time (ms). Time for going between the outer zone and middle zone for activating the trip.
44
Until the version 8.1.0.0 of ICD the name was " Distance between zones "

User Manual 198
❑ Internal Zone unblock T (ms). Minimum time in milliseconds for which the impedance must remain in the "inner zone" to
unblock operating in all zones.
❑ I2 threshold (A). With 3 poles closed, if I2 exceeds this threshold and the fault selector is activated, unblocking occurs.
❑ After fault Reset time (ms). This is the time that elapses before disabling swing blocking as soon as a phase-phase or
single-phase fault is detected (based on the I2 threshold in the phase selector).
❑ Trip delay. It is only used, when the power swing trip is enabled with the option “OUT_ZMED”. It is the time since the
impedance leaves the middle zone, without returning into it, until the trip signal occurs.
❑ Trip Blocking input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the trip by swinging.
recloser (3.13.6).
Table 142 Power swing settings

OOSEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
BlkMemEna Memory Enabled NO / YES Boolean
Z1Blk Zone 1 Blocking NO / YES Boolean
: The same for zones 2, 3 , 4
Z5Blk Zone 5 Blocking NO / YES Boolean
TpBlk Teleprotection Blocking NO / YES Boolean
RisMedRi Middle zone Right R 0,05 500 0,01 float32
RisMedLe Middle zone Left R 0,05 500 0,01 float32
ReacMedHi Middlezone Top X 0,05 500 0,01 float32
ReacMedLo Middle zone Bottom X 0,05 500 0,01 float32
RIntRi Internal zone Right R 0,05 500 0,01 float32
RIntLe Internal zone Left R 0,05 500 0,01 float32
I1Val I1 Minimum threshold (A) 0,05 500 0,01 float32
BlArg Slope angle 45 90 0,01 float32
ZDisOhm Power swing detection zone 0,1 100 0,1 float32
SwgTmms Blocking time (ms) 5 100 5 int32
NO (0)
TrEna Trip Enabled IN_ZMED (1) uint32
OUT_ZMED (2)
TrTmms Trip Time (ms) 5 100 5 int32
UnBlTmms Internal Zone unblock T (ms) 60 10000 5 int32
I2Val I2 threshold (A) 0 100 0,01 Float32
RstTmms After fault Reset time (ms) 0 1000 5 int32
TrDelay Trip delay 0 1000 5 int32
TrRepNu Repetitions for trip 1 3 1 int32
TrIntTmms Interval time for trip (ms) 0 1000 5 int32
LogInTrBlk Trip Blocking input inref
❑ Node PROT/RPSB1
❑ Commands:
 "DOrdOpBlk": Blocking and unblocking of the trip by power swing. Only applicable if the "Trip Enabled" setting is not
set to "NO".

User Manual 199

 Z1 Ph-Ph Blocked PSB. Indicates blocking of the phase-phase units in zone 1.
 ….. Same for zones 2 to 5.
 Z1 Gnd Blocked PSB. Indicates blocking of the single-phase units in zone 1.
 ….. Same for zones 2 to 5.
 Teleprotection blocked PSB. Indicates that the teleprotection is blocked by the power swing.
 Power swing blocked. Time conditions are fulfilled when passing from the outer zone to the middle zone without
detecting a fault.
 Power swing Trip. Trip signal by power swing.
 Power swing unblocked. Blocking reset by power swing.
 PSB unblocked internal zone. The impedance has stayed in the inner zone for the time indicated in the "Inner zone
unblocking time" and no other unblocking conditions have been fulfilled.
 Z in ZMED+. The impedance seen is in the middle zone positive. The impedance has a positive resistive component.
 Z in ZMED-. The impedance seen is in the middle zone negative. The impedance has a negative resistive component.
 Z in Middle zone. The impedance seen is in the middle zone.
 Z in External zone. The impedance seen is in the external zone.
 Z in Internal zone. The impedance seen is in the internal zone.
 Power swing status. Indicates whether or not the power swing function is enabled.
 Power swing trip status. Indicates whether or not the trip power swing function is enabled.

❑ Breaker status. The breaker status signals are determined by the digital inputs:
 3 poles closed. Indicates the 3 poles are closed.
 52 2 poles open. Indicates 2 poles are open.
 52 3 poles open. Indicates the 3 poles are open.
Table 143 Power Swing Function Outputs

Z1 Ph-Ph Blocked PSB Z1PhBl general
… The same for zones 2, 3 , 4 and 5
Z1 Gnd Blocked PSB Z1GndBl general
… The same for zones 2, 3 , 4 and 5
Teleprotection blocked PSB TPBl general
Power swing blocked Blk general (stVal in Ed2)
Power swing Trip Op general
Power swing unblocked UnBlk general
PSB unblocked internal zone ZMUnBl general
Z in ZMED+ ZMPIn general
Z in ZMED- ZMNIn general
Z in Middle Zone Zmed general
Z in External Zone ZEXT general
Z in Internal Zone Zint general
Power swing Status StEna general (stVal in Ed2)
Power swing trip status TrPt general

User Manual 200
Figure 96 Power Swing Logic Diagram (Trip).
Figure 97 Power Swing Logic Diagram (Blocking).

User Manual 201
3.11 SWITCH ONTO FAULT
This unit provides an instantaneous three-phase trip when a fault occurs upon the generation of a breaker closure command (manual
or by input).
The function is enabled during a programmable time ("Activation time (ms)") in the following situations:
❑ Upon the closure of the 3-poles or

❑ Following the closure command.
Depending on the “Operation type” setting, the action of the switch onto fault is produced when:
 Programmed as “V and I" or "(V and I) or Z2”: The phase voltage is below a threshold (set in the open pole detector) and the
phase current is above a threshold for ½ cycle. There must be no fuse failure. The measurement used is that obtained from the
half cycle DFT45
 Programmed as “Z2” or “(V and I) or Z2”: The zone 2 of the distance units (mho or quadrilateral) is started.
 Programmed as "programmable pick up I": The Programmable SOTF Pick up input is activated.
During the "Activation time (ms)" that the function is enabled, an offset of 0.1 ohms is applied to the mho characteristic in zone 2. On
the other hand, the X reach is set to 0.05 ohms, contrary to the programmed direction, in the quadrilateral characteristic in zone 2.
Therefore, the three - phase faults are protected in the origin. Also, the directional supervision is not used and both directions are
allowed.
Depending on the configuration set the switch onto fault can be active with any closing. 46
❑ To enable it after a manual closing and to produce a definitive trip (no reclosing allowed):
 Reclose perm. (R1, R2, R3, R4): NO.
 Trip permission by recloser: Only "Recloser lockout" and "Trip permission after manual closing" have to be selected.
❑ To enable it after any closing and to produce a definitive trip (no reclosing allowed):
 Reclose perm. (R1, R2, R3, R4): NO.
 Trip permission by recloser: Select "Recloser lockout" and the desired trip permissions.
❑ To allow reclosings:
 Reclose perm. (R1, R2, R3, R4): Select the desired option.
 Trip permission by recloser: Do not select "Recloser lockout" and select the desired trip permissions.
The function’s settings are:

❑ Operation type. Indicates the unit’s operation type.
 Programmable47. The action is produced with the logical pickup input.
 V and I. The V and I measurements are checked in order to determine the switch onto fault.
 Z2 or (V and I). The V and I measurements or the zone 2 start signals are checked in order to determine the switch onto fault.
 Z2. The zone 2 start signals are checked in order to determine the switch onto fault.
❑ Operation delay start input. When it is enabled and dead line is detected, it allows switch onto fault function.
❑ Normalized voltage Reset. Indicates if resetting due to voltage above the threshold is enabled or not. It only works, if the
"Operation type" is "Z2" or "Z2 or (V and I)".
❑ I phase threshold (A). Indicates the current value for indicating a switch onto fault.
❑ Activation time (ms). Indicates the time during which the unit is enabled once the start conditions have been met.
45
Available from firmware version 6.0.18.2. Until that version it uses one cycle DFT
46
Available from firmware version 5.19.15.7 and ICD version 6.1.13.27 on. Until that version only acts with manual closings.
47

User Manual 202
❑ SOFT Start input47 Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the activation of the switch onto fault. It only functions if the
operation type is set to “programmable”.
❑ Trip Permission by recloser46. Indicates the trip and block permission in accordance with the recloser status: standby, blocked,
safety time after reclosing, after closing. It is configured bit by bit; for additional details, see section corresponding to the recloser
(3.13.6.3).
❑ Reclose perm. (R1, R2, R3, R4) 46. Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in accordance with the recloser's closing
cycle (see reclose permission mask).
The voltage threshold set in the open pole detector is used.
❑ Node: PROT/PSOF1
❑ Commands:
 Switch onto Fault Activation. Indicates that the switch onto fault has been activated.
 Switch onto Fault Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 144 Switch onto fault settings

PSOFEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
Programmable (1) 9
V and I (2)
Optype Operation type uint32
Z2 or (V and I) (3)
Z2 (4)
TimAutEna Operation delay start input NO / YES
VNorRst Normalized voltage reset NO / YES
IThr I phase threshold (A) 0,01 200,0 0,01 float32
OpTmms Activation time (ms) 100 1000 10 int32
LogInSt SOFT Start input9 inref
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1)
Reclose 2 (2)
Reclose 1-2 (3)
Reclose 3 (4)
Reclose 1-3 (5)
Reclose 2-3 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3 (7)
Reclose 4 (8)
Reclose 1-4 (9)
Reclose 2-4 (10)
Reclose 1-2-4 (11)
Reclose 3-4 (12)
Reclose 1-3-4 (13)
Reclose 2-3-4 (14)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (15)
Table 145 Switch onto fault function outputs

Switch onto Fault Trip Op general
Switch onto Fault Status StEna stVal

User Manual 203
Figure 98 shows the complete switch onto fault unit scheme.

❑ Z2G Start. Indicates that any of the zone 2 phase-ground units have started.
❑ Z2F Start. Indicates that any of the zone 2 phase-phase units have started.
❑ 52_1 Closure command (Manual). Indicates manual close command of breaker 1
❑ 52_1 breaker closed (without reclosure command). The three poles of breaker 1 have been closed without reclose command.
❑ 52_2 Closure command (Manual). Indicates manual close command of breaker 2
❑ 52_2 breaker closed (without reclosure command). The three poles of breaker 2 have been closed without reclose command.
❑ Deenergized line in phases A, B and C. It´s the signal "DeadLine Phase ABC" of the dead line function.

User Manual 204
Figure 98 Switch onto fault scheme

User Manual 205
3.12 BREAKER FAILURE
If a fault is detected, it is important to act quickly and for the switch to work correctly. However, it may be that an error occurs and it is
not able to interrupt the fault current.
The breaker failure function checks that there is no current via the switch, for a given time after the trip situation. If it is detected that
the current continues to be above a value established by the setting, a signal is activated so that secondary switches can act.
3.12.1 Single pole breaker Failure

The protection device has a complete breaker fault functional feature, with single-pole or three-pole functioning.
If the unit is enabled, it functions as follows (see Figure 99 y Figure 100):
❑ If the equipment indicates a trip signal or an external protection signal is received via a logic input, depending on the
value of the "Start type" setting, it will heed to one or the other to start up a timer.
❑ If the trip situation disappears or the function is tripping or starting externally, to verify this, the "Time signal relapse
(ms)" must elapse.
❑ If, following the period programmed as “Retrip time delay (ms)”, the current of one of the phases exceeds the
programmed "Phase current threshold (A)", the retrip signal is activated.
❑ If the "52 Supervision" setting is "YES", if, following the period programmed as “Retrip time delay (ms)” one of the poles
remains closed, after that time, the retrigger signal and the retrigger signal of that pole are activated.
❑ If, following the period programmed as “Trip time delay (ms)”, the current of one of the phases exceeds the programmed
"Phase current threshold (A)", the trip signal is activated.
❑ Regardless of the “Trip time delay (ms)”, if a blocked switch logic input is activated, the trip signal is activated.
❑ If the "Sealed by current" setting is "YES", the signals are only deactivated when the phase and neutral currents fall below
their drop out values.
In this unit, functioning does not contemplate the breaker status digital input, but rather the current values. The measurement
obtained from the half-cycle DFT of the full-cycle DFT is used (the lowest of both).
Each of the phases and neutral is analysed independently.
It has independent settings and outputs.
❑ Nodes:
 PROT/FRBRF1. The functions uses the measurements from the transformers 1, 2 and 3 (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1).
 PROT/FRBRF2. The functions uses the measurements from the transformers 4, 5 and 6 (Ia2, Ib2, Ic2). Only with 52 1/2
configurations.
❑ Commands:
The settings used by this unit are as follows:

❑ Start type. The following options are available:
 External trips: the function's start logic inputs are taken into consideration.
 Internal trips: the equipment's internal trip activations are taken into consideration.
 Both: both the external activations (depending on the initial inputs) and the equipment's internal trip activations are
taken into account.

User Manual 206
❑ Operation type. The following options are available:

 Three-pole: functioning according to the Figure 100 diagram.
 Single-pole: functioning according to the Figure 99 diagram.
❑ Sealed by current. Indicates whether or not the disappearance of the trigger signal causes the function to relapse. In
other words, if the trip signal has to be permanent or simply a pulse.
❑ Time signal relapse (ms). Indicates the time for which the start situation is to be maintained, after the disappearance of
the internal trip or input start.
❑ Supervision by current. Indicates whether or not current is simultaneously needed with the trip order, in order for the
timers to start.
❑ Phase current threshold (A). Indicates the current value below which the phase is considered as open.
❑ Gnd current threshold (A). Indicates the current value below which the neutral is considered as open.
❑ Retrip time delay (ms). Indicates the waiting time for the activation of the retrip signal if the current does not drop below
the drop out level.
❑ Trip time delay (ms). Indicates the waiting time for the activation of the trip signal if the current does not drop below the
drop out level.
❑ Pole A BF start input. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the start of breaker failure timing for phase A.
❑ Pole B BF start input. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the start of breaker failure timing for phase B.
❑ Pole C BF start input. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the start of breaker failure timing for phase C.
❑ 3 pole BF start input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the start of the breaker fault timing.
❑ 52 Supervision48. If set to YES, the signals can also be activated if the breaker poles are closed.
Table 146 Breaker failure Settings

RBRFEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
External Trips (1)
InitType Start type Internal Trips (2) enum
Both (3)
Three-pole (0)
OpType Operation type enum
Single-pole (1)
CurLoc Sealed by current NO / YES Boolean
InRsTmms Time signal relapse (ms) 0 120000 1 Float
CurSpv Supervision by current NO / YES Boolean
DetValAPhs Phase current threshold (A) 0,02 150 0,01 Float
DetValAGnd Gnd current threshold (A) 0,02 150 0,01 Float
RfailTmms Retrip time delay (ms) 0 120000 1 Float
FailTmms Trip time delay (ms) 0 120000 1 Float
LogInBlk Blocking input Int32
LogInBFInA Pole A BF start input Int32
LogInBFInB Pole B BF start input Int32
LogInBFInC Pole C BF start input Int32
LogInBFI3P 3 pole BF start input Int32
SupEna 52 Supervision NO / YES Boolean
The breaker failure function's output signals are as follows:
❑ 50BF Retrigger pole A (Br1). Indicates that there has been a retrip due to a breaker failure in phase A.
48
Available from firmware versión 5.18.15.5 and ICDs version 6.1.14.1

User Manual 207
❑ 50BF Retrigger pole B (Br1). Indicates that there has been a retrip due to a breaker failure in phase B.
❑ 50BF Retrigger pole C (Br1). Indicates that there has been a retrip due to a breaker failure in phase C.
❑ Retrigger 50BF (Br1). Indicates that there has been a retrip due to a breaker failure in one of the poles.
❑ Time BF completed (Br1). Indicates that the trip signalling timer has finished.
❑ Trip 50BF (Br1). Indicates that there has been a trip due to a switch fault. This means that besides complying with the
timing indicated by "BF time finished", the current that circulates through the switch exceeds the function's activation
threshold.
❑ Start 50BF pole A (Br1). It is activated when the breaker fault conditions for the pole A are met during the set time.
❑ Start 50BF pole B (Br1). It is activated when the breaker fault conditions for the pole B are met during the set time.
❑ Start 50BF pole C (Br1). It is activated when the breaker fault conditions for the pole C are met during the set time.
❑ 50BF Ia exceeded (Br1). Indicates that in the breaker's pole A, the current exceeds the programmed fault detection
threshold.
❑ 50BF Ib exceeded (Br1). Indicates that in the breaker's pole B, the current exceeds the programmed fault detection
threshold.
❑ 50BF Ic exceeded (Br1). Indicates that in the breaker's pole C, the current exceeds the programmed fault detection
threshold.
❑ 50BF In exceeded (Br1). Indicates that in the neutral, the current exceeds the programmed fault detection threshold.
❑ Breaker failure status (Br1). Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 147 Breaker failure function outputs
Signal RBRF1 Signal RBRF2 Data Attribute

50BF Retrigger pole A (Br1) 50BF Retrigger pole A (Br2) ReOp phsA
50BF Retrigger pole B (Br1) 50BF Retrigger pole B (Br2) ReOp phsB
50BF Retrigger pole C (Br1) 50BF Retrigger pole C (Br2) ReOp phsC
Retrigger 50BF (Br1) Retrigger 50BF (Br2) ReOp general
Time BF completed (Br1) Time BF completed (Br2) TmBF general
Trip 50BF (Br1) Trip 50BF (Br2) Op general
50BF Start pole A (Br1) 50BF Start pole A (Br2) StrF phsA
50BF Start pole B (Br1) 50BF Start pole B (Br2) StrF phsB
50BF Start pole C (Br1) 50BF Start pole C (Br2) StrF phsC
50BF Ia exceeded (Br1) 50BF Ia exceeded (Br2) StrThr phsA
50BF Ib exceeded (Br1) 50BF Ib exceeded (Br2) StrThr phsB
50BF Ic exceeded (Br1) 50BF Ic exceeded (Br2) StrThr phsC
50BF In exceeded (Br1) 50BF In exceeded (Br2) StrThr Neut
The input signals to this function are:
❑ Pole A General Trip. Indicates that pole A general trip is operating.

❑ Pole B General Trip. Indicates that pole B general trip is operating.
❑ Pole C General Trip. Indicates that pole C general trip is operating.
❑ Tripolar Trip. Indicates that a 3 poles trip is activated.
❑ IA measurement. It is the fundamental phase A measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
❑ IB measurement. It is the fundamental phase B measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
❑ IC measurement. It is the fundamental phase C measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
❑ IN measurement. It is the fundamental neutral measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
❑ 52_x Locked. Indicates that the breaker is locked, where "x" is the breaker number.

User Manual 208
Figure 99 Single-pole phase A breaker Fault Diagram
The scheme for phases B and C is the same, replacing phase A with B or C as appropriate.
Figure 100 Three-pole Complete breaker Fault Diagram

User Manual 209
3.12.2 Breaker failure with low load

It detects breaker failure in three pole trips with low load.
The unit starts when the breaker status or overcurrent and start signal conditions are fulfilled:
❑ 52 status or overcurrent:
 If the "52 Supervision" set to "YES" and any pole is closed. The breaker status is determined with the 52 status digital
inputs.
 When enabled “Enable with Ground current”, the neutral current (3I0 for 52 ½ configuration) is greater than the
setting “Gnd current threshold (A)”.
❑ Start signal:
 Pole x BF start or 3 pole BF start signal lis received.
 If “2 pole trip allowed” is enabled, BF start signal of at least two phases is received.
The setting “Supervision Initial” 49 selects the start mode:
❑ YES. The unit starts when the breaker status or overcurrent conditions are fulfilled and the start signal is activated.
❑ NO. The unit starts when the start signal is activated.
The trip is generated when the “Trip time delay (ms)” finishes and none of the start conditions has been deactivated.
The retrip is generated when the “Retrip time delay (ms)” finishes and none of the start conditions has been deactivated.
If the "Supervision by current" setting is "YES", the retrip and trip signals are only activated when the neutral current is above the
“Gnd current threshold (A)” setting.
If the trip situation disappears or the function is tripping or starting externally, to verify this, the "Time signal relapse (ms)" must
elapse
If the "Sealed by current" setting is "YES", the signals are only deactivated when the neutral current falls below their drop out
values.
In 52 ½ configurations, the function is independent for every breaker, using 3I0 because the neutral measurement is not available.
49

User Manual 210
Figure 101 50BF low load scheme
Two independent functions are available (settings, outputs, commands…). Two nodes are used:
❑ Nodes:
 PROT/RGBF1. In 52 ½ configurations, the functions uses the measurements from the transformers 1, 2 and 3 (Ia1, Ib1,
Ic1).
 PROT/ RGBF2. In 52 ½ configurations, the functions uses the measurements from the transformers 4, 5 and 6 (Ia2, Ib2,
Ic2). Only with 52 1/2 configurations.
❑ Commands:
The settings used by this unit are as follows:

❑ Start type. The following options are available:
 External trips: the function's start logic inputs are taken into account.
 Internal trips: the equipment's internal trip activations are taken into account.
 Both: both the external activations (depending on the initial inputs) and the equipment's internal trip activations are
taken into account.
❑ 2 pole trip allowed. It allows the start of the unit with phase-phase trips.
❑ Enable with Ground current. It allows the start of the unit when the neutral current is greater than the setting “Gnd
current threshold (A)”.

User Manual 211
❑ Gnd current threshold (A). Indicates the current value below which the neutral is considered as open.
❑ Retrip time delay (ms). Indicates the waiting time for the activation of the retrip signal if the current does not drop below
the drop out level.
❑ Trip time delay (ms). Indicates the waiting time for the activation of the trip signal if the current does not drop below the
drop out level.
❑ Pole A BF start. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the start of breaker failure timing for phase A.
❑ Pole B BF start. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the start of breaker failure timing for phase B.
❑ Pole C BF start. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the start of breaker failure timing for phase C
❑ 3 pole BF start. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the start of breaker failure timing.
❑ Enable Events Record. Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the function’s
❑ 52 Supervisión50.If set to YES, the the start of breaker failure can also be activated if the breaker poles are closed.
❑ Sealed by current50. Indicates whether or not the disappearance of the trigger signal causes the function to relapse. In
other words, if the trip signal has to be permanent or simply a pulse.
❑ Time signal relapse (ms)50. Indicates the time for which the start situation is to be maintained, after the disappearance of
the internal trip or input start
❑ Supervision by current49. If set to "YES", the retrip and trip signal are only activated when the neutral current is above the
setting “Gnd current threshold (A)”.
❑ Supervision Initial49. It selects whether the start of the unit is monitored by the status of the breaker and overcurrent or
only the start signal is used.
Table 149 shows the function's output signals:
❑ Retrip BF low load. Indicates that there has been a retrip due to a breaker failure.
❑ Trip BF low load. Indicates that there has been a trip due to a breaker failure.
❑ Start BF low load. It is activated when the breaker fault conditions have happened. If this conditions are activated during
the set time, generate the breaker failure signals.
❑ BF low load status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 148 50BF low load setting

Ena Enabled YES/NO Bolean
External Trips
InitType Start type 1 3 1 Internal Trips enum
Both
TPhTrEna 2 pole trip allowed YES/NO Bolean
GndDetEna Enable with Ground current YES/NO Bolean
BlkGndA Gnd current threshold (A) 0,02 150 0,01 float
RetrTmms Retrip time delay (ms) 0 60000 1 int32
TrTmms Trip time delay (ms) 0 60000 1 int32
LogInBlk Blocking input 1 int32
LogInBFInA Pole A BF start 1 int32
LogInBFInB Pole B BF start 1 int32
LogInBFInC Pole C BF start 1 int32
LogInBFI3P 3 pole BF start 1 int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO/YES Boolean
SupEna 52 Supervision NO/YES Boolean
CurLoc Sealed by current 0 1 int32
InRsTmms Time signal relapse (ms) 0 120000 1 int32
CurSpv Supervision by current NO/YES Boolean
IniSpv Supervisión initial49 NO/YES Boolean
50
Available from firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICDs version 8.1.0.4

User Manual 212
Table 149 50BF low load signals
RGBF1 RGBF2 Data Attribute

BF low load status U1 BF low load status U2 StEna stVal
Retrip BF low load - Unid 1 Retrip BF low load - Unid 2 ReOp general
Trip BF low load - Unid 1 Trip BF low load - Unid 2 Op general
Start BF low load - Unid 1 Start BF low load - Unid 2 Str general

User Manual 213
3.13 TRIP LOGICS
3.13.1 67NQ Teleprotection Schemes

High voltage line protection requires protection systems which are especially fast, selective and reliable with the aim of not
jeopardising the stability of the electrical system. To fulfil these requirements, it is necessary to use teleprotection systems
associated to the protection equipment installed in each end of the line. The protection device is equipped with a teleprotection
system for completely protecting the line with high-speed protection.
They are based upon the use of teleprotection signals between both end terminals of the line. The effect upon the output relays’
operation is determined according to the signals given by the protection along with the signals given by the other terminal.
From firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.4, there is a new setting: "TPTx Delay time (ms)".
From firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.4, in the 67NQ teleprotection schemes, single pole trips are allowed. The
“Single Pole Trip 67NQ” setting must be set to “YES” in the node PROT/ZPMPT (see chapter "Single pole Trip") and the phase
selector must indicate single phase to ground fault (see chapter "Phase selector").
The signals used in the schemes are:
❑ TPTx: teleprotection signal sent by a terminal.

❑ TPRIx: teleprotection signal received by a terminal.
❑ GSL: security channel loss signal (unblocking scheme).
❑ GSLRx: security channel loss signal received (unblocking scheme).
Figure 102 Basic Teleprotection Diagram
3.13.1.1 Introduction
3.13.1.1.1 Fault Detection Units
Teleprotection 67NQ scheme will operate on the instantaneous directional unit No. 1 (forward), 2 (forward) and 3 (backwards).
❑ Zone 1 (forward): Unit 1 with instantaneous, unbalanced and neutral overcurrent (UNPIOC1 and GPIOC1).
❑ Zone 2 (forward): Unit 2 with instantaneous, unbalanced and neutral overcurrent (UNPIOC2 and GPIOC2).
❑ Zone 4 (backwards): Unit 3 with instantaneous, unbalanced and neutral overcurrent (UNPIOC3 and GPIOC3).
Therefore, unit 1 can be assimilated to distance zone 1, unit 2 to zone 2, and unit 3 to zone 4. Unit 3 must be programmed
backwards.
3.13.1.1.2 Scheme Type

The schemes respond to two basic types:
❑ Blocking schemes: The signal received indicates that the fault is outside the protected zone. A relay can trip on an
overreaching zone if, after a definite time, the blocking signal has not been received.

User Manual 214
❑ Permissive schemes: The signal received allows an instantaneous trip in the overreaching zone. The additional ECHO,
weak infeed and Current Reversal Blocking schemes can be used.
When selecting a particular scheme, it is useful to bear in mind the following characteristics for each of them: In the case of an
internal fault in the protected line and a communication channel fault in permissive schemes, protection is disabled for tripping,
whilst in blocking schemes, tripping is assured. However, in blocking schemes, if there is an external fault and a communication
channel fault, the device can trip.
If the communication system forms an integral part of the energy transport line, as in the case of carrier waves, it is best to use the
blocking schemes, since internal faults may disturb or attenuate the carrier signal. Likewise, it is best to use blocking schemes in
weak infeed configurations as they are more reliable compared to permissive schemes.
Finally, it should be mentioned that permissive schemes are faster than blocking schemes, given that the latter involve slightly
longer fault clear times, due to the security waiting time for receiving the potential blocking signal.
Several schemes are available:
❑ Step trip (none)

❑ Permissive overreaching (Overreaching POTT)
❑ Permissive underreaching (Underreaching PUTT)
❑ Directional blocking scheme
❑ Directional comparison unblocking scheme
Additionally, the following can be selected together with the schemes:
❑ Direct transfer trip

❑ Echo
❑ Weak infeed
❑ Current Reversal Blocking
3.13.1.1.3 Flexible Units
The signals that activate the sending of the teleprotection between the different overcurrent units can be configured for all the
schemes. Two settings are included - "67NQ Permissive Units" and "67NQ Block Units" which enable both logic inputs to be carried
with the starts of the desired units. In this way, the signals carried to the schemes can be made flexible.
The following logic inputs are configurable using flexible inputs. It is possible to connect any logic input to them:
❑ Faults forward ("67NQ Permissive Units").

❑ Faults backwards ("67NQ Block Units").
Figure 103 Permissive Logic Diagram
Figure 104 Inverse Directional Scheme

User Manual 215
3.13.1.1.4 Input / output signals

The following signals are used in the schemes:
❑ TPTx 67NQ: Teleprotection signal sent by a terminal.

❑ TPRIx_67NQ: Teleprotection input received by a terminal.
❑ TPRx_67NQ: Follows the TPRIx input to become activated, but memorises the input during the set time "TPRx Drop out
time (ms)" (RsRTPTmms) to deactivate itself. If this setting is equal to zero, then TPRx coincides with the input TPRIx. TPRx
is used in the teleprotection schemes.
❑ GSLRx_67NQ: Line security signal loss. Indicates that the data channel established between the two teleprotection
devices is inactive.
Figure 105 Teleprotection Reception
Figure 106 TPTx Block Scheme
3.13.1.1.5 Three terminal lines

In the case of three terminal lines, the signals taken into account are the signals received from each terminal.
Figure 107 Teleprotection reception in three terminal lines
Permissive Schemes
Blocking Schemes

User Manual 216
3.13.1.1.6 Settings and signals

The settings for selecting the protection schemes are:
❑ Scheme type: Selects the type of scheme. Allows you to select between:
 Step Trip (0)
 Overreaching POTT(1)
 Underreaching PUTT(2)
 Direct.comp. block(3)
 Direct.comp. unbl.(4)
❑ TPRx Drop out time (ms). Memorization time of the teleprotection received signal (TPRx).
❑ Block delay time (ms). Additional waiting time for the block signal.
❑ GSL Minimum time (ms). Minimum security signal loss time to allow trips.
❑ GSL Maximum time (ms). Maximum time during which the trip permission for loss of security signal is enabled.
❑ GSL Drop out time (ms). Drop out time following the recovery of the security channel.
❑ ECHO enabled. Enables the ECHO function.
❑ ECHO pulse time (ms). The duration of the ECHO signal pulse.
❑ ECHO Blocking time (ms). Time after the deactivation of the signal 67NQ_FW during which it is considered as being active.
❑ ECHO delay time (ms). The time during which the conditions for the activation of the ECHO signal must be met.
❑ Current Reversal Blocking. Enables trip blocking for a time after seeing a change in the fault's direction. (Reversal
direction memorisation).
❑ Current rev pickup t. (ms). Reversal direction memorization time.
❑ Weak Infeed Enabled. Enables the weak infeed function.
❑ Weak infeed Threshold (V). Voltage threshold to consider weak infeed.
❑ TPRx_67 line 1. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 1 teleprotection signal has been received.
❑ GSLRx_67 line 1. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 1 security signal loss has been received.
❑ TP Trip Block. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the teleprotection trip.
❑ TPTx Blocking input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the blocking of the TPTX signal transmission.
❑ ECHO Start value. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates ECHO pickup for teleprotection schemes.
❑ Block ECHO (logic input). Selects the signal which, when active, indicates ECHO blocking for teleprotection schemes.
❑ 67NQ Permissive Units. Allows the selection of an alternative pickup signal for unit 2: selects the signal which when
active, indicates the activation of the 67Q pickup signal used in permissive units. If this signal is configured, 67NQ
functions are not taken into account.
❑ 67NQ Block Units. Allows the selection of an alternative pickup signal for unit backwards: selects the signal which when
active, indicates the activation of the 67NQ pickup signal used in blocking units. If this signal is configured, 67NQ
functions are not taken into account.
❑ Weak Infeed Blocking. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the blocking of the weak infeed scheme.
recloser (3.13.6).
❑ Trip permission by recloser. Indicates the trip and block permission in accordance with the recloser status: standby,

User Manual 217
❑ Reclose permission51. Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in accordance with the recloser's closing
❑ TPTx Delay time (ms). TPTx signal delay time.
Table 150 Teleprotection scheme settings

Step Trip (0)
Overreaching POTT (1)
SchTyp (TypSch in
Scheme type 0 4 1 Underreaching PUTT (2) enum
Ed2)
Direct. comp. block. (3)
Direct. comp. unbl.(4)
RsRTPTmms TPRx Drop out time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
BlkTmms Block delay time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
LoGMinTmms GSL Minimum time (ms) 0 400 10 int32
LoGMaxTmms GSL Maximum time (ms) 0 400 10 int32
LoGRepTmms GSL Drop off time (ms) 0 400 10 int32
EcEna ECHO enabled 0 1 1 NO / YES enum
EcTmms ECHO pulse time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
EcBlkTmms ECHO Blocking time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
EcActTmms ECHO delay time (ms) 0 200 10 int32
RvAEna Current Reversal Blocking 0 1 1 NO / YES enum
RvATmms Current rev. pickup T (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
WIEna Weak Infeed Enabled 0 1 1 NO / YES enum
WeiVal Weak Infeed Threshold (V) 0,1 200 0,01 float
LogInRTP1 TPRx _67 line 1 1 inref
LogInRTP2 TPRx _67 line 2 1 inref
LogInPSG1 GSLRx_67 line 1 1 inref
LogInPSG2 GSLRx_67 line 2 1 inref
LogInBl TP Trip Block 1 inref
LogInETPBl TPTx Blocking input 1 inref
LogInECOSt ECHO Start value 1 inref
LogInECOBl Block ECHO 1 inref
LogInAlU 67NQ Permissive Units 1 inref
LogInBlU 67NQ Block Units 1 inref
LogInWIBl Weak Infeed Blocking 1 inref
GenTrip General Trip 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean
TripPerm Trip permission by recloser 0 254 1 Bit meaning (1) ING
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2)
ReclPerm Reclose permission int32
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose 1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose 1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean
DlETPTmms TPTx Delay time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
It has independent settings and outputs:
❑ Node PROT/OCPSCH1
❑ There are no commands.
❑ Outputs: Table 151 shows the function's output data:
 TPRx 67NQ L1. Indicates that the line 1 teleprotection signal has been received.
51
From firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.4, single pole reclosures are allowed. Until this version, only three
pole reclosure are allowed.

User Manual 218
 TPRx 67NQ L2. Indicates that the line 2 teleprotection signal has been received.
 GSR 67NQ L1. Indicates that the line 1 security signal loss has been received.
 GSR 67NQ L2. Indicates that the line 2 security signal loss has been received.
 TPTx 67NQ. Indicates that the teleprotection signal has been activated.
 ECHO 67NQ. Indicates that the ECHO signal has been activated.
 STOP 67NQ. The directional blocking scheme indicates that there is a fault but that it is not backwards. It is used to
indicate that TPTx is not being sent.
 WI 67NQ Trip. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have been met during the configured time. There are
independent signals for each phase and a general signal.
 Teleprotection 67NQ Trip. Indicates that the teleprotection has tripped.
 Weak infeed phase 67NQ. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have been met in at least one phase.
 Permissive 67NQ Activation. Indicates that the permissive units have been activated.
 Block Inverted Current 67NQ. Indicates that current inversion block has been activated.
 Memory Inverted Current 67NQ: Current inversion block memorized. Indicates that current inversion block
memorization has been activated.
 67NQ SGL end permission L1. End of permission due to security signal loss in line 1.
 67NQ SGL end permission L2. End of permission due to security signal loss in line 2.
 Teleprotection 67NQ status. Indicates whether or not the teleprotection function is enabled. If the "Scheme type"
setting is selected as "Step Trip", it means that teleprotection is disabled. Any other option means that it is enabled.
 ECHO 67NQ Status. Indicates whether or not the ECHO function is enabled.
 Weak infeed 67NQ status. Indicates whether or not the weak infeed function is enabled.
 Trip 67NQ A. Indicates that the phase A trip is activated, when the "Single Pole Trip 67NQ" setting, located in the
PROT/ZPMPT node, is enabled.
 Trip 67NQ B. Indicates that the phase B trip is activated, when the "Single Pole Trip 67NQ" setting, located in the
 Trip 67NQ C. Indicates that the phase C trip is activated, when the "Single Pole Trip 67NQ" setting, located in the

User Manual 219
Table 151 Teleprotection scheme outputs.

TPRx 67NQ L1 ProRx stVal
TPRx 67NQ L2 ProRx2 stVal
SGR 67NQ L1 GSL1Rx stVal
SGR 67NQ L2 GSL2Rx stVal
TPTx 67NQ ProTx stVal
ECHO 67NQ Echo stVal
STOP 67NQ STOPTx stVal
27WI 67NQ Phase A WeakInF phsA
27WI 67NQ Phase B WeakInF phsB
27WI 67NQ Phase C WeakInF phsC
27WI 67NQ Trip WeakInF stVal
Teleprotection 67NQ Trip Op stVal (general in Ed2)
Weak Infeed Phase 67NQ StrWeakInF stVal
Permissive 67NQ Activation OpPerUnit stVal
Block Inverted Current 67NQ RvABlk stVal
Memory Inverted Current 67NQ MBlkInvDir stVal
67NQ SGL end permission L1 GSL1End stVal
67NQ SGL end permission L2 GSL2End stVal
Teleprotection 67NQ status TpSt stVal
ECHO 67NQ Status EchoSt stVal
Weak infeed 67NQ status WeiOpSt stVal
Trip 67NQ A OpNQA stVal
Trip 67NQ B OpNQB stVal
Trip 67NQ C OpNQC stVal
3.13.1.2 Permissive underreaching

It causes an instantaneous teleprotection trip upon the reception of the teleprotection signal (TPRIx), together with the pick up
of unit 2, as long as the reverse memorization of unit 3 is not activated (Memory Inverted Current). It is used to accelerate the
trips at one end with the other indicates this.
This scheme is based on the idea that at least one of the protection devices at one end of the line will see the fault in zone 1. If
a terminal sees the fault in zone 1 and the other one sees it in zone 2, the fault can be considered as being inside the line
between both devices, in the section of the line close to the terminal which sees it in zone 1.
The terminal that sees the fault in unit 1, besides setting off an instantaneous trip, sends the trip permission signal (TPTx) to the
other end while unit 1 is activated. The terminal which detects the fault in unit 2 generates an instantaneous trip with the
reception of the teleprotection signal (TPRIx) together with the activation of unit 2 as long as unit 3 is not activated.
Figure 108 Permissive Underreaching Logic Diagram
Figure 108 and Figure 103 show the permissive underreaching protection scheme. This figure is used to analyse how the
protection devices will act in the event of faults in F1, F2 and F3:

User Manual 220
Figure 109 Fault examples
❑ Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in unit 1, causing an instantaneous trip and sending a permission signal to protection
B. Protection B sees the fault in unit 2 and will set off a high-speed trip when it sees the fault in unit 2 and will receive
protection A's permission command.
❑ Fault F2: Both protection devices see the fault in unit 1, causing a high-speed trip. Furthermore, redundant commands
are given by the communication channels.
❑ Fault F3: None of the protection devices will trip instantaneously. Protection A sees the fault in unit 2 but B does not see
the fault in the line to protect, not sending the permission signal to protection A. Hence, A's action in unit 2 will take place
in unit 2 time.
Inverse direction block: signal "Memory Inverted Current" can be eliminated from the logic by disabling this function. In this
case, "Memory Inverted Current" would be set permanently to 0.
In lines with more than two terminals, to apply this scheme, checks must be made to ensure that in the event on any fault in
any point in the line, at least the protection of one of the ends is detect in zone 1.
The scheme is applied to three-terminal lines by carrying an OR signal to the three of them from the TPRx of the other two ends
(See Figure 107).
3.13.1.3 Permissive overreaching

It produces an instantaneous teleprotection trip upon the reception of the teleprotection signal (TPRx), together with the pick
up of unit 2, as long as the memorized reverse zone is not activated (Memory Inverted Current).
In this protection scheme, a fault is considered internal to the line if both terminals see the fault in unit 2. An instantaneous trip
is caused if the teleprotection signal is received, together with activation of unit 2 as long as the memorised unit 3 is not
activated.
The teleprotection signal is sent upon the activation of the unit 2, without the detection of a reverse fault (Memory Inverted
Current).
Figure 110 Permissive Overreaching Logic Diagram
Figure 110 and Figure 103 show the permissive overreaching protection scheme. This figure is used to analyse how the

User Manual 221
❑ Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in zone 1(PIOC1 or GPIOC1), causing an instantaneous trip and sending a permission
signal to protection B, given that it sees the fault in zone 2 (PIOC2 or GPIOC2) (zone 2 includes zone 1). Protection B trips
instantaneously when it sees the fault in zone 2 and receives a permission order from protection A. Protection B will also
send a permission signal to protection A but it has already instantaneously tripped in zone 1.
❑ Fault F2: Both protection devices see the fault in zone 1, causing a high-speed trip. Furthermore, redundant commands
❑ Fault F3: Protection A sees the fault in zone 2 and sends the permission signal to B, which sees the fault backwards. When
A does not receive the permission signal from B, zone 2's action will take place in zone 2 time. Protection B receives the
permission signal from A, but when it sees the fault backwards, it will not trip.
Any fault in unit 3 (PIOC3 or GPIOC3) it will normally be eliminated in unit 3 time.
3.13.1.4 Directional unblocking

The directional unblocking scheme is used in overreaching schemes. Together with the TPRx signal, the channel loss signal
(GSLRx) is received.
In usual conditions, the signal GSLRx has the same value as the TPRx signal. Thus, if the TPRx signal is activated, GSLRx is also
activated. If both signals are deactivated there is not fault and the guard channel signal is not lost.
If the overreaching unit 2 (PIOC2 or GPIOC2) acts, the security signal works as an unblocking signal.
An instantaneous teleprotection trip will be issued by the zone 2 activation:
❑ If the unblock signals TPRx and GSLRx are received or

❑ When the device only receives the GSLRx signal, the timers start. When the “GSL minimum time (ms)” (LoGMinTmms)
delay is over without the reception of the TPRx signal, a trip is issued. Once the “GSL maximum time (ms)” has elapsed, no
trip is enabled. Once the loss off channel signal is deactivated again a third timer starts. When the “GSL drop out time
(ms)” delay is over the previous logic is newly applied.
Figure 111 Treatment of Line 1 channel loss signals

User Manual 222
Figure 113 TPTx and Trip Signal Scheme
The figures show the directional unblocking protection scheme. This figure is used to analyse how the protection devices will
act in the event of faults in F1, F2 and F3:
Figure 114 Directional Unblocking Protection

User Manual 223
N.B.: The signals received in GSLRx and TPRx directional blocking can only be received with values (active, active), (active,
inactive) or (inactive, inactive). They can never be (inactive, active) because the transmitter/receiver that sends the signals,
when there is communication and receives TPR gives the signals GSR and TPR and when there is no communication, gives GSR
but not TPR.
The GSLRx signal is active in 2 cases:
❑ When the security signal is lost or

❑ When TPRx is received. In this case, it is converted into a non-blocking signal. It behaves in the same way as in the case of
overreaching.
The GSLRx signal is deactivated when there is communication and there is no TPRx.
Table 152 GSLRx and TPRIx Values in Directional Unblocking
GSLRx TPRIx TRIP Remark

0 0 0 Guard channel is not lost and there is not fault.
1 1 1 Guard channel is not lost and there is fault. GSLRx signal becomes a non-blocking signal
(GSLRx = 1).
1 0 Time Guard channel is not lost and we do not know if there is fault.
window When signal loss of guard channel is activated it opens a time window during which it can
produce GSLRx shot if the signal remains active for the programmed time (TPSG) without
reception of TPRIx
0 1 It is not possible because if we have TPRIx, it is because there is communication
Analysis is made of how the protection devices will act in the event of faults in F1, F2 and F3:
❑ Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in zone 1, causing an instantaneous trip and changing the security signal to an
unblocking signal given that it sees the fault in zone 2 (zone 2 includes zone 1). Protection B sees the fault in zone 2 and
when it receives the unblocking signal from A, it will speed up the trip. If the security channel is lost, when protection B's
zone 2 is activated, it will speed up its trip if it receives the channel loss signal for the time programmed for "security
signal loss".
❑ Fault F2: Both protection devices see the fault in zone 1, causing a high-speed trip.
❑ Fault F3: Protection A sees the fault in zone 2 but does not speed up its trip given that protection B sees the fault in zone
4 and therefore will not change the security signal for an unblocking signal.
3.13.1.5 Directional blocking

The TPTx blocking signal is sent if a backwards fault is detected (Memory Inverted Current).
A stop channel signal (STOP 67NQ) is activated if a forward fault is detected (overcurrent units 1 and 2) and it is maintained
during “Block delay time (ms)” (BlkTmms), without the detection of a fault in the unit 3 Memory Inverted Current).
If the channel interruption signal (STOP 67NQ) is activated and the signal TPRx is not received, the signal "Teleprotection 67NQ
Trip" is activated.
If the input “TPTx Blocking input” is activated the signal TPRx is not sent. Furthermore, if the “TP Trip Block” input is activated,
the signal "Teleprotection 67NQ Trip" is blocked.
The blocking time is an additional delay time to give time for the blocking signal to be received and is programmable by the
user. The transmission time must be as low as possible with the aim of reducing this delay to a minimum.
The Figure 115, Figure 103 and Figure 104 show the directional blocking protection scheme. This figure is used to analyse how
the protection devices will act in the event of faults in F1, F2 and F3:

User Manual 224
Figure 115 Directional Blocking Scheme
Figure 116 Directional Blocking Protection
❑ Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in zone 1 causing an instantaneous trip. Protection B detects the fault in zone 2
and once the blocking time has elapsed, it will trip given that a blocking command is not received from A since A does not
detect the fault in zone 4.
❑ Fault F3: Protection A detects the fault in zone 2 but does not cause a fast trip given that protection B sees the fault in
zone 4 and will therefore send a blocking signal to A.
Care must be taken with the coordination of the blocking unit backwards (for example, B's zone 4) of each end with the
overreaching unit of the other end (A's zone 2), these being set so that the reach of the reverse unit is always greater than the
overreach's.
Figure 117 Coordinating the Reverse Blocking Unit.
This scheme has the advantage of not being sensitive to noise in the communication channel and has the disadvantage of
possibly causing untimely trips if the communication channel is lost.
The blocking scheme is usually used in long lines when the teleprotection signal is transmitted via the protected line by the
carrier wave and the diminishing of the signal transmitted at the point of fault can be so severe that reception at the other end
of the line cannot always be ensured.

User Manual 225
3.13.1.6 ECHO
It is used together with permissive overreaching schemes by acting on the teleprotection (TPTx) signal.
The ECHO 67NQ signal only provides a programmable pulse. The ECHO function sends the teleprotection (TPTx) signal with any
of the following conditions:
❑ The ones corresponding to the permissive overreaching scheme.

❑ If TPRIx is received and no forward or reverse faults are detected.
 programmable for a minimum time (setting " ECHO delay time(ms)"), or
 the breaker is open (in this situation, it does not wait for the programmed time to elapse).
It is used together with permissive overreaching schemes in cases where one end of the line is open (Figure 119 end B) or is a
weak end (Figure 120 end B). In the event of a fault on the line near the weakly-fed or open end, the distance unit of this end of
the line does not detect the fault. Hence, the trip will not be issued, nor will the permission signal be sent to the other end of
the line. Hence, since the permission signal will not be received, the strongly-fed end of the line will not speed up its trip.
To speed up the trip at the strongly-fed end in the event of a fault at the opposite end, the Echo function returns the TPRIx
signal received to the remote terminal if it does not detect a fault forward or backwards, or if the circuit breaker is open.
The resending of the TPRIx received (ECHO 67NQ) will be instantaneous if the circuit breaker is open and will suffer a delay
(EcActTmms) if there is a weak power supply. This delay makes it possible to cover situations in which there is a higher fault
detection time, or it start slightly later due to an unfavourable distribution of the fault current. This delay is usually set to
approximately 40ms.
“ECHO 67NQ” is a pulse that during “ECHO pulse time (ms)” (EcTmms), which is normally set to approximately 50 ms, thus
assuring that the signal received is even recognised with different action times of the protection equipment at ends of the lines
and with different response times of the transmission equipment.

User Manual 226
Figure 118 Echo Scheme and Weak Infeed
Figure 119 Echo logic protection with breaker open in B

User Manual 227
Figure 119 shows the ECHO Logic Sample, with the circuit breaker in B Open This scheme will be used to analyse how the
protection devices act in the event of faults F1 and F2 with the basic permissive overreaching scheme.
❑ Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in its zone 1 and hence instantaneously trips and sends a permission signal to B.
End B is open so the fault is cleared.
❑ Fault F2: Protection A detects the fault in zone 2 and sends a permission signal to B. When the protection device in B
detects that the circuit breaker is open, it will resend the permission signal to protection A without delay. When
protection A detects the fault in zone 2 and having received the permission signal, it will speed up its trip.
Figure 120 Echo and weak infeed example
Figure 120 shows the ECHO logic, and Weak infeed. This scheme will be used to analyse how the protection devices act in the
event of faults F1 and F2 with the basic permissive overreaching scheme.
❑ Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in unit 1 and will hence trip instantaneously and send a permission signal to B. The
protection in B, being weakly fed, will not detect the fault, but as it receives the permission signal, it will send back to A
with the programmed delay, but A will be open. The circuit breaker at end B will remain closed.
❑ Fault F2: Protection A detects the fault in unit 2 and sends a permission signal to B. The protection in B, being weakly fed,
will not detect the fault, but as it receives the permission signal, it will send back to A with the programmed delay. When
protection A sees the fault in unit 2 and has received the permission signal, it will speed up its trip. The circuit breaker at
end B will remain closed.
3.13.1.7 Weak infeed (27WI)

This is a complement to ECHO 67NQ, where if ECHO 67NQ conditions are met, with the circuit breaker closed and undervoltage
in at least one of the phases, a trip is produced.
The undervoltage unit associated to the weak infeed function has its own settings and is not dependent on the undervoltage
units.
The thresholds are 0.1V to 200V.
If an unblocking scheme is used, the TPRIx signal is replaced by TPRIx & GSL.
If one end of the line is weakly fed (Figure 120 end B) with the echo logic, as seen in the previous section, the trip at the
strongly fed end is accelerated. However, the weakly fed end remains closed. This logic allows the opening of this end of the
line.
To detect the fault at the weak end, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
❑ TPRIx signal received (it will be sent to the strongly-fed end, as described in the ECHO function).
❑ The circuit breaker is closed.
❑ Undervoltage is detected in one of the phases (as a consequence of the fault). The settings recommended are 70%Vn for
the voltage.

User Manual 228
Figure 121 Protection in the weak infeed Logic, with End B Weakly Fed
Figure 121 shows the weak infeed logic, with end B weakly fed. This scheme will be used to analyse how the protection devices
act in the event of F1 faults with the basic permissive overreaching scheme.
will not detect the fault and when it receives the permission signal, it will send it to A after the set time. When protection
A sees the fault in unit 2 and has received the permission signal, it will speed up its trip. When protection B fulfills the
ECHO conditions and detects undervoltage (due to the existence of the fault), it will give the trip command.
3.13.1.8 Inverse directional block

It delays the teleprotection trip for a number of cycles in order to allow the remote terminal time to clear the permission signal
(TPTx) following a change in the flow direction due to the opening of the breaker.
It is used in double circuit lines to prevent trips due to the change in the current flow which is caused when the circuit breaker
is opened at one end of the faulty line when this fault is cleared. The reversal of the current implies the reversal of the
protection device's directional elements, as well as the increase in the apparent distance to the fault. The time between the
repositioning of the distance elements and the functioning of the unit may give rise to a trip in the healthy parallel line.
When the scheme is a blocking one, it keeps the blocking signal for a set time "Block delay time (ms)", blocking the trip for a
time after detecting a change in the fault's direction. When the scheme is permissive, it blocks the trip and the emission of the
permission for a set time after changing the direction in which it detects the fault (backwards to forward).
The overcurrent unit 2 signal is used with a memorization time "Current Reversal Blocking(ms)" (RvATmms), which enables the
"Memory Inverted Current" signal to be used in the rest of the schemes (see Figure 104).
The following figures show the change in the current flow when the fault occurs and when circuit breaker K is opened to clear
this fault:
Inverse direction blocking with permissive schemes:
❑ When faults F occurs as can be seen in Figure 122.1, protection K will detect the fault in zone 1, J will either detect it in 1
or 2 and H backwards. In this situation, K instantaneously opens the circuit breaker and sends the permission signal to J
and likewise, G sends the permission signal to H.
❑ When K opens, the current's flow is inverted as can be seen in Figure 122.2. In this new situation, G will detect the fault
backwards and H will detect it in zone 2. These conversions are not simultaneous or instantaneous. Hence, H could trip
before G removes the permission signal. To prevent this trip, the teleprotection trip is delayed for a number of cycles, to
give the remote terminal time to remove the permission signal.

User Manual 229
Figure 122 Change in the Current Flow When the Fault Occurs in a Double Circuit Line
Inverse direction blocking with blocking scheme:
❑ When the fault occurs as can be seen in Figure 121, protection K will detect the fault in zone 1, J will either detect it in 1
or 2 and H backwards. When H detects the fault in its zone 4, it sends a blocking signal to G (or it does not send the TPRIx
signal, which is the same), preventing tripping due to acceleration in zone 2.
backwards and H will detect it in zone 2. H would trip before receiving the blocking signal from G. To prevent this, H will
continue to detect the fault backwards, allowing time to receive the blocking signal.
It is recommended that the additional blocking time be set as follows:
Additional blocking time = operating time of the circuit breaker at the other end of the line (typically 3 cycles) + the reset time
of the communication channel (1 cycle) + the reset time of zone 2 of the relay at the other end of the line (1 cycle) = 5 cycles.
3.13.2 Z Teleprotection Schemes

High voltage line protection requires protection systems which are especially fast, selective and reliable with the aim of not
jeopardising the stability of the electrical system. To fulfil these requirements, it is necessary to use teleprotection systems
associated to the protection equipment installed in each end of the line. The protection device is equipped with a teleprotection
system for completely protecting the line with high-speed protection.
They are based upon the use of teleprotection signals between both end terminals of the line. The effect upon the output relays’
operation is determined according to the signals given by the protection along with the signals given by the other terminal.
From firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.4, the option of the phase-segregated teleprotection is included. When the
phase-segregated teleprotection is chosen, the teleprotection schemes are performed per phase. Moreover, the setting "TPTx
delay time (ms)" is included.

User Manual 230
❑ TPTx: teleprotection signal sent by a terminal.

❑ TPRIx: teleprotection signal received by a terminal.
❑ GSL: security channel loss signal (unblocking scheme).
❑ GSLRx: security channel loss signal received (unblocking scheme).
3.13.2.1 Introduction
3.13.2.1.1 Fault Detection Units
Teleprotection Z scheme will operate on the distance unit 21, Zone 1 and Zone 2 (forward), and zone 4 (backwards). Mho and quad
are both affected.
❑ Zone 1 (forward): Unit 21 zone 1 (PDIS1).

❑ Zone 2 (forward): Unit 21 zone 2 (PDIS2).
❑ Zone 4 (backwards): Unit 21 zone 4 (PDIS4).
3.13.2.1.2 Scheme Type

The schemes respond to two basic types:
❑ Blocking schemes: The signal received indicates that the fault is outside the protected zone. A relay can trip on an
overreaching zone if, after a definite time, the blocking signal has not been received.
❑ Permissive schemes: The signal received allows an instantaneous trip in the overreaching zone. The additional ECHO,
weak infeed and Current Reversal Blocking schemes can be used.
When selecting a particular scheme, it is useful to bear in mind the following characteristics for each of them: In the case of an
internal fault in the protected line and a communication channel fault in permissive schemes, protection is disabled for tripping,
whilst in blocking schemes, tripping is assured. However, in blocking schemes, if there is an external fault and a communication
channel fault, the device can trip.
If the communication system forms an integral part of the energy transport line, as in the case of carrier waves, it is best to use the
Current Reversal Blocking scheme, since internal faults may disturb or attenuate the carrier signal. Likewise, it is best to use
blocking schemes in weak infeed configurations as they are more reliable compared to permissive schemes.
Finally, it should be mentioned that permissive schemes are faster than blocking schemes, given that the latter involve slightly
longer fault clear times, due to the security waiting time for receiving the potential blocking signal.
Several schemes are available:
❑ Step trip (none)

❑ Permissive overreaching (Overreaching POTT)
❑ Permissive underreaching (Underreaching PUTT)
❑ Directional blocking scheme
❑ Directional comparison unblocking scheme
Additionally, the following can be selected together with the schemes:
❑ Direct transfer trip

❑ Echo
❑ Weak infeed
❑ Current Reversal Blocking
3.13.2.1.3 Flexible Units
In the case of the non-phase-segregated teleprotection, the signals that activate the sending of the teleprotection between the
different distance units can be configured for all the schemes. Two settings are included "Z Permissive Units (1 bit)" and "Z Block

User Manual 231
Units (1 bit)" which enable both logic inputs to be carried with the pickups of the desired units. In this way, the signals carried to
the schemes can be made flexible.
The following logic inputs are configurable using flexible inputs. It is possible to connect any logic input to them:
❑ Faults forward ("Z Permissive Units (1 bit)").

❑ Faults backward ("Z Block Units (1 bit)").
Figure 123 and Figure 124 show the logic diagrams with the configurable logic inputs.
Figure 123 Permissive Logic Diagram
Figure 124 Inverse Directional Blocking Scheme
In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection, the permissive and block units have several selection options. One signal per phase
is activated.
❑ Z Permissive Units (3 bits).

 Predefined. Correspond to Zone 2
 Zone 3.
 Zone 5
❑ Z Block Units (3 bits).
 Predefined. Correspond to Zone 4
 Zona 3.
 Zona 5

User Manual 232
Figure 125 Permissive logic Diagram phase A, phase-segregated teleprotection
Figure 126 Inverse Directional Blocking Scheme, phase A, phase-segregated teleprotection
3.13.2.1.4 Input / output signals

The following signals are used in the schemes:
❑ TPTx_21. Teleprotection signal sent by a terminal. In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection there is one signal per
phase.
❑ TPRIx_21. Teleprotection input received by a terminal. In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection there is one signal
per phase.
❑ TPRx_21. Follows the TPRIx_21 input to become activated, but memorises the input during the set time “TPRx Drop out
time (ms)” (RsRTPTmms) to deactivate itself. If this setting is equal to zero, then TPRx21 coincides with the input TPRIx
21. TPRx is used in the teleprotection schemes. In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection there is one signal per
phase.

User Manual 233
❑ GSLRx_21. Line security signal loss. Indicates that the data channel established between the two teleprotection devices is
inactive.
Figure 127 Teleprotection Reception
Figure 129 Phase A phase-segregated teleprotection reception
Figure 130 Phase A phase-segregated teleprotection, TPTx Block Scheme
3.13.2.1.5 Three terminal lines

In the case of three terminal lines, the signals taken into account are the signals received from each terminal.

User Manual 234
Figure 131 Teleprotection reception in three terminal lines
Permissive Schemes
Blocking Schemes
In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection there is one signal per phase.
Figure 132 Teleprotection reception in 3 terminal lines, phase A, phase-segregated teleprotection.
Permissive Schemes, phase A
Blocking Schemes, phase A
3.13.2.1.6 Settings and signals

The settings for selecting the protection schemes are:
❑ Scheme type: Selects the type of scheme. Allows you to select between:
 Step Trip (0)
 Overreaching POTT(1)
 Underreaching PUTT(2)
 Direct.comp. block(3)
 Direct.comp. unbl.(4)
❑ TPRx Drop out time (ms). Memorization time of the teleprotection received signal (TPRx).
❑ Block delay time (ms). Additional waiting time for the block signal.
❑ GSL Minimum time (ms). Minimum security signal loss time to allow trips.
❑ GSL Maximum time (ms). Maximum time during which the trip permission for loss of security signal is enabled.
❑ GSL Drop out time (ms). Drop out time following the recovery of the security channel.
❑ ECHO enabled. Enables the ECHO function.

User Manual 235
❑ ECHO pulse time (ms). The duration of the ECHO signal pulse.
❑ ECHO Blocking time (ms). Time after the deactivation of the signal Z_FW (Z Permissive Units) during which it is considered
as being active.
❑ ECHO delay time (ms). The time during which the conditions for the activation of the ECHO signal must be met.
❑ Current Reversal Blocking. Enables trip blocking for a time after seeing a change in the fault's direction. (Reversal
direction memorisation).
❑ Current rev pickup t. (ms). Reversal direction memorization time.
❑ Weak Infeed Enabled. Enables the weak infeed function.
❑ Weak infeed Threshold (V). Voltage threshold to consider weak infeed.
❑ TP Trip Block. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the teleprotection trip.
❑ TPTx Blocking input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the blocking of the TPTX signal transmission.
❑ ECHO Start value. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates ECHO start for teleprotection schemes.
❑ Block ECHO (logic input). Selects the signal which, when active, indicates ECHO blocking for teleprotection schemes.
❑ Z Permissive Units (1 bit). Allows the selection of an alternative pickup signal for zone 2: selects the signal which when
active, indicates the activation of the Z pickup signal used in permissive units. If this signal is configured, Z functions are
not taken into account. Only in the non-phase-segregated protection.
❑ Z Block Units (1 bit). Allows the selection of an alternative pickup signal for backwards zone: selects the signal which
when active, indicates the activation of the Z pickup signal used in blocking units. If this signal is configured, Z functions
are not taken into account. Only in the non-phase-segregated protection.
❑ Weak Infeed Blocking. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the blocking of the weak infeed scheme.
❑ Reclose permission. Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in accordance with the recloser's closing
❑ TPTx Delay time (ms). TPTx signal delay time.
❑ Phase-segregated teleprotection. Enables the phase-segregated teleprotection.
❑ TPRx_21 line 1A. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 1's phase A teleprotection signal has been
received. Only in phase-segregated teleprotection.
❑ TPRx_21 line 1B. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 1's phase B teleprotection signal has been
❑ TPRx_21 line 1C. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 1's phase C teleprotection signal has been
❑ TPRx_21 line 2A. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 2's phase A teleprotection signal has been

User Manual 236
❑ TPRx_21 line 2B. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 2's phase B teleprotection signal has been
❑ TPRx_21 line 2C. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 2's phase C teleprotection signal has been
❑ Z Permissive Units (3 bits). It allows to select an alternative zone to zone 2. It selects the zone, whose start, causes the
activation of the permissive units. It is only used when the teleprotection is phase-segregated.
 Predefined (0). It correspond to Zone 2.
 Zone 3 (1)
 Zone 5 (2)
❑ Z Block Units (3 bits). It allows to select an alternative zone to zone 4. It selects the zone, whose start, causes the
activation of the block units. It is only used when the teleprotection is phase-segregated.
 Predefined (0). It correspond to Zone 4
 Zone 3 (1)
 Zone 5 (2)

User Manual 237
Table 153 Teleprotection scheme settings

Step Trip (0)
Overreaching POTT (1)
SchTyp Scheme type 0 4 1 Underreaching PUTT (2) enum
Direct. comp. block. (3)
Direct. comp. unbl.(4)
RsRTPTmms TPRx Drop out time (ms) 0 4 1 int32
BlkTmms Block delay time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
LoGMinTmms GSL Minimum time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
LoGMaxTmms GSL Maximum time (ms) 0 400 10 int32
LoGRepTmms GSL Drop out time (ms) 0 400 10 int32
EcEna ECHO enabled 0 400 10 NO / YES enum
EcTmms ECHO pulse time (ms) 0 1 1 int32
EcBlkTmms ECHO Blocking time (ms) 0 10000 10 int32
EcActTmms ECHO delay time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
RvAEna Current Reversal Blocking 0 200 10 NO / YES enum
RvATmms Current rev pickup t. (ms) 0 1 1 int32
WIEna Weak Infeed Enabled 0 10000 10 NO / YES enum
WeiVal Weak Infeed Threshold (V) 0 1 1 float
LogInRTP1 TPRx _21 line 1 0,1 200 0,01 inref
LogInRTP2 TPRx _21 line 2 inref
LogInPSG1 GSLRx_21 line 1 inref
LogInPSG2 GSLRx_21 line 2 inref
LogInBl TP Trip Block inref
LogInETPBl TPTx Blocking input inref
LogInECOSt ECHO Start value inref
LogInECOBl Block ECHO inref
LogInAlU Z Permissive Units inref
LogInBlU Z Block Units inref
LogInWIBl Weak Infeed Blocking inref
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 1 1 enum
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
DlETPTmms TPTx Delay time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
SegTpc Segregated teleprotection NO – 1 bit (0) / YES - 3 bits (1) enum
LogInRTP1A TPRx_21 line 1A inref
LogInRTP1B TPRx_21 line 1B inref
LogInRTP1C TPRx_21 line 1C inref
LogInRTP2A TPRx_21 line 2A inref
LogInRTP2B TPRx_21 line 2B inref
LogInRTP2C TPRx_21 line 2C inref
Predefined (0)
Zone 3 (1) enum
PmsAIU Z Permissive Units (3 bits) Zone 5 (2)
Predefined (0)
Zone 3 (1) enum
BlkBIU Z Block Units (3 bits) Zone 5 (2)
It has independent settings and outputs:
❑ Node PROT/ZPSCH1
❑ There are no commands
❑ Outputs: Table 154 shows the function's output data:
 TPRx Z L1. Indicates that the line 1 teleprotection signal has been received.

User Manual 238
 TPRx Z L2. Indicates that the line 2 teleprotection signal has been received.
 GSR Z L1. Indicates that the line 1 security signal loss has been received.
 GSR Z L2. Indicates that the line 2 security signal loss has been received.
 TPTx Z. Indicates that the teleprotection signal has been activated.
 ECHO Z. Indicates that the ECHO signal has been activated.
 STOP Z. The directional blocking scheme indicates that there is a fault but that it is not backwards. It is used to indicate
that TPTx is not being sent.
 27WI Z Trip Weak infeed trip. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have been met during the configured time.
 27WI Z Phase X. Weak infeed trip. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have been met during the configured
time. There are independent signals for each phase.
 Teleprotection Z Trip. Indicates that the teleprotection has tripped.
 Weak Infeed Phase Z. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have been met in at least one phase.
 Permissive Z Activation. Indicates that the permissive units have been activated.
 Block Inverted Current Z. Indicates that current inversion block has been activated.
 Memory Inverted Current Z: Current inversion block memorized. Indicates that current inversion block memorization
has been activated.
 85_L1_END_perm_GSL_Z. End of permission due to security signal loss in line 1.
 85_L2_END_perm_GSL_Z. End of permission due to security signal loss in line 2.
 Teleprotection Z status. Indicates whether or not the teleprotection function is enabled. If the "Scheme type" setting is
selected as "Step Trip", it means that teleprotection is disabled. Any other option means that it is enabled.
 ECHO Z Status. Indicates whether or not the ECHO Z function is enabled.
 Weak infeed Z status. Indicates whether or not the weak infeed function is enabled.
 TPRx Z L1A. Indicates that the line 1 phase A teleprotection signal has been received.
 TPRx Z L1B. Indicates that the line 1 phase B teleprotection signal has been received.
 TPRx Z L1C. Indicates that the line 1 phase C teleprotection signal has been received.
 TPRx Z L2A. Indicates that the line 2 phase A teleprotection signal has been received.
 TPRx Z L2B. Indicates that the line 2 phase B teleprotection signal has been received.
 TPRx Z L2C. Indicates that the line 2 phase C teleprotection signal has been received.
 TPTx Z_A. Indicates that the teleprotection phase A signal has been activated.
 TPTx Z_B. Indicates that the teleprotection phase B signal has been activated.
 TPTx Z_C. Indicates that the teleprotection phase C signal has been activated.
 ECHO Z_A. Indicates that the ECHO phase A signal has been activated.
 ECHO Z_B. Indicates that the ECHO phase A signal has been activated.
 ECHO Z_C. Indicates that the ECHO phase A signal has been activated.
 STOP Z_A. The directional blocking scheme indicates that there is a fault but that it is not backwards. It is used to
indicate that TPTx phase A is not being sent.
 STOP Z_B. The directional blocking scheme indicates that there is a fault but that it is not backwards. It is used to
indicate that TPTx phase B is not being sent.
 STOP Z_C. The directional blocking scheme indicates that there is a fault but that it is not backwards. It is used to
indicate that TPTx phase C is not being sent.
 Teleprotección Trip Z_A. Indicates that a teleprotection phase A has tripped.
 Teleprotección Trip Z_B. Indicates that a teleprotection phase B has tripped.
 Teleprotección Trip Z_C. Indicates that a teleprotection phase C has tripped.
 Permissive U activation A. Indicates that the permissive units for phase A have been activated.
 Permissive U activation B. Indicates that the permissive units for phase B have been activated.
 Permissive U activation C. Indicates that the permissive units for phase C have been activated.

User Manual 239
 Block invertion current A. Indicates that current A inversion block has been activated.
 Block invertion current B. Indicates that current B inversion block has been activated.
 Block invertion current C. Indicates that current C inversion block has been activated.
 Memory invertion current A. Current A inversion block memorized. Indicates that current A inversion block
 Memory invertion current B. Current B inversion block memorized. Indicates that current B inversion block
 Memory invertion current C. Current C inversion block memorized. Indicates that current C inversion block
Table 154 Teleprotection schemes signals

TPRx Z L1 ProRx stVal
TPRx Z L2 ProRx2 stVal
GSR Z L1 GSL1Rx stVal
GSR Z L2 GSL2Rx stVal
TPTx Z ProTx stVal
ECHO Z Echo stVal
STOP Z STOPTx stVal
27WI Z Phase A WeakInF phsA
27WI Z Phase B WeakInF phsB
27WI Z Phase C WeakInF phsC
27WI Z Trip WeakInF stVal
Teleprotection Z Trip Op stVal
Weak Infeed Phase Z StrWeakInF stVal
Permissive Z Activation OpPerUnit stVal
Block Inverted Current Z RvABlk stVal
Memory Inverted Current Z MBlkInvDir stVal
85_L1_END_perm_GSL_Z GSL1End stVal
85_L2_END_perm_GSL_Z GSL2End stVal
Teleprotection Z status TpSt stVal
ECHO Z Status EchoSt stVal
Weak infeed Z status WeiOpSt stVal
TPRx Z L1A ProRxA stVal
TPRx Z L1B ProRxB stVal
TPRx Z L1C ProRxC stVal
TPRx Z L2A ProRx2A stVal
TPRx Z L2B ProRx2B stVal
TPRx Z L2C ProRx2C stVal
TPTx Z_A ProTxA stVal
TPTx Z_B ProTxB stVal
TPTx Z_C ProTxC stVal
ECHO Z_A EchoA stVal
ECHO Z_B EchoB stVal
ECHO Z_C EchoC stVal
STOP Z_A STOPTxA stVal
STOP Z_B STOPTxB stVal
STOP Z_C STOPTxC stVal
Teleprotection Trip Z_A TpcTripA stVal
Teleprotection Trip Z_B TpcTripB stVal
Teleprotection Trip Z_C TpcTripC stVal
Permissive U activation A OpPerUnitA stVal
Permissive U activation B OpPerUnitB stVal
Permissive U activation C OpPerUnitC stVal
Block invertion current A RvABlkA stVal
Block invertion current B RvABlkB stVal
Block invertion current C RvABlkC stVal
Memory invertion current A MBlkInvDirA stVal
Memory invertion current B MBlkInvDirB stVal
Memory invertion current C MBlkInvDirC stVal

User Manual 240
3.13.2.2 Permissive underreaching

It causes an instantaneous teleprotection trip upon the reception of the teleprotection signal (TPRIx), together with the pick up
of zone 2, as long as the reverse memorization of zone 4 is not activated (21 memory inverted current). It is used to accelerate
the trips at one end with the other indicates this.
This scheme is based on the idea that at least one of the protection devices at one end of the line will see the fault in zone 1. If
a terminal sees the fault in zone 1 and the other one sees it in zone 2, the fault can be considered as being inside the line
between both devices, in the section of the line close to the terminal which sees it in zone 1.
The terminal that sees the fault in zone 1, besides setting off an instantaneous trip, sends the trip permission signal (TPTx) to
the other end while zone 1 is activated. The terminal which detects the fault in zone 2 generates an instantaneous trip with the
reception of the teleprotection signal (TPRIx) together with the activation of a unit in zone 2 as long as zone 4 is not activated.
Figure 134 Permissive Underreaching Logic Diagram
In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection, a TPTx of the faulted phase will be sent. For producing the teleprotection trip of
one phase, the TPRx of this phase and the corresponding permissive unit has to be activated. In addition, it the does not have
to see the fault backwards in that phase (Z Block units).
There is one signal per phase.
❑ TPTx_A: Fault AN, AB, CA.

❑ TPTx_B: Fault BN, AB, BC.
❑ TPTx_C: Fault CN, BC, CA

User Manual 241
Figure 135 Permissive Underreaching Logic Diagram, phase A, phase-segregated teleprotection
Figure 136 and Figure 123 show the permissive underreaching protection scheme. This figure is used to analyse how the
Figure 136 Fault examples
III
II
Protección Protección
x1 u1
x2 u1 x1 u2
x3 u3
A B
F1 F2 I F3
II
III
❑ Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in zone 1, causing an instantaneous trip and sending a permission signal to protection
B. Protection B sees the fault in zone 2 and will set off a high-speed trip when it sees the fault in zone 2 and will receive
protection A's permission command.

User Manual 242
❑ Fault F3: None of the protection devices will trip instantaneously. Protection A sees the fault in zone 2 but B does not see
the fault in the line to protect, not sending the permission signal to protection A. Hence, A's action in zone 2 will take
place in zone 2 time.
Inverse direction block: signal "Memory Inverted Current" can be eliminated from the logic by disabling this function. In this
case, "Memory Inverted Current" would be set permanently to 0.
In lines with more than two terminals, to apply this scheme, it has to be ensured that in the event on any fault in any point in
the line, at least the protection of one of the ends detects it in zone 1.
The scheme is applied to three-terminal lines by carrying an OR signal to the three of them from the TPRx of the other two ends
(See Figure 107).
3.13.2.3 Permissive overreaching

It produces an instantaneous teleprotection trip upon the reception of the teleprotection signal (TPRx), together with the pick
up of zone 2, as long as the memorized reverse zone is not activated (Memory Inverted Current).
In this protection scheme, a fault is considered internal to the line if both terminals see the fault in zone 2. An instantaneous
trip is caused if the teleprotection signal is received, together with activation of a unit in zone 2 as long as the memorised zone
4 is not activated.
The teleprotection signal is sent upon the activation of the zone 2 units, without the detection of a reverse fault (Memory
Inverted Current).
Figure 137 Permissive Overreaching Logic Diagram
one phase, the TPRx of this phase and the corresponding permissive unit has to be activated. In addition, it the does not have
to see the fault backwards in that phase (Z Block units).
 TPTx_A: Fault AN, AB, CA.

 TPTx_B: Fault BN, AB, BC.
 TPTx_C: Fault CN, BC, CA.

User Manual 243
Figure 138 Permissive Overreaching Logic Diagram, phase A, phase-segregated teleprotection
Figure 137 and Figure 123 show the permissive overreaching protection scheme. This figure is used to analyse how the
❑ Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in zone 1 (PDIS1), causing an instantaneous trip and sending a permission signal to
protection B, given that it sees the fault in zone 2 (PDIS2) (zone 2 includes zone 1). Protection B trips instantaneously
when it sees the fault in zone 2 and receives a permission order from protection A. Protection B will also send a
permission signal to protection A but it has already instantaneously tripped in zone 1.
❑ Fault F3: Protection A sees the fault in zone 2 and sends the permission signal to B, which sees the fault backwards. When
A does not receive the permission signal from B, zone 2's action will take place in zone 2 time. Protection B receives the
permission signal from A, but when it sees the fault backwards, it will not trip.
Any fault in zone 3 (PDIS3) will be eliminated in zone 3 time.
3.13.2.4 Directional unblocking

The directional unblocking scheme is used in overreaching schemes. Together with the TPRx signal, the channel loss signal
(GSLRx) is received.
In usual conditions, the signal GSLRx has the same value as the TPRx signal. Thus, if the TPRx signal is activated, GSLRx is also
activated. If both signals are deactivated there is not fault and the guard channel signal is not lost.
If the overreaching zone 2 (PDIS2) acts, the security signal works as an unblocking signal.
An instantaneous teleprotection trip will be issued by the zone 2 activation:
❑ If the unblock signals TPRx and GSLRx are received or

User Manual 244
❑ When the device only receives the GSLRx signal, the timers start. When the “GSL minimum time (ms)” (LoGMinTmms)
delay is over without the reception of the TPRx signal, a trip is issued. Once the “GSL maximum time (ms)” has elapsed, no
trip is enabled. Once the loss off channel signal is deactivated again a third timer starts. When the “GSL drop out time
(ms)” delay is over the previous logic is newly applied.
The directional unblocking scheme does not allow phase-segregated teleprotection.

User Manual 245
Figure 141 TPTx and Trip Signal Scheme
The figures show the directional unblocking protection scheme. This figure is used to analyse how the protection devices will
act in the event of faults in F1, F2 and F3:
Figure 142 Directional Unblocking Protection scheme
N.B.: The signals received in the directional blocking (GSLRx and TPRx) can only be received with the values (active, active),
(active, inactive) or (inactive, inactive). They can never be (inactive, active) because the transmitter/receiver that sends the
signals, when there is communication and receives TPR gives the signals GSR and TPR and when there is no communication,
gives GSR but not TPR.
The GSLRx signal is active in 2 cases:
❑ When the security signal is lost or

❑ When TPRx is received. In this case, it is converted into a non-blocking signal. It behaves in the same way as in the case of
overreaching.
The GSLRx signal is deactivated when there is communication and there is no TPRx.

User Manual 246
Table 155 GSLRx and TPRIx Values in Directional Unblocking
GSLRx TPRIx TRIP Remark

0 0 0 Guard channel is not lost and there is not fault.
1 1 1 Guard channel is not lost and there is a fault. GSLRx signal becomes a non-blocking signal (GSLRx = 1).
Guard channel is not lost and we do not know if there is a fault.
Time
1 0 When signal loss of guard channel is activated it opens a time window during which it can produce GSLRx shot if the
window
signal remains active for the programmed time (TPSG) without reception of TPRIx
0 1 It is not possible because if we have TPRIx, it is because there is communication
Analysis is made of how the protection devices will act in the event of faults in F1, F2 and F3:
❑ Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in zone 1, causing an instantaneous trip and changing the security signal to an
unblocking signal given that it sees the fault in zone 2 (zone 2 includes zone 1). Protection B sees the fault in zone 2 and
when it receives the unblocking signal from A, it will speed up the trip. If the security channel is lost, when protection B's
zone 2 is activated, it will speed up its trip if it receives the channel loss signal for the time programmed for "security
signal loss".
❑ Fault F3: Protection A sees the fault in zone 2 but does not speed up its trip given that protection B sees the fault in zone
4 and therefore will not change the security signal for an unblocking signal.
3.13.2.5 Directional blocking

The TPTx blocking signal is sent if a backwards fault is detected (Memory Inverted Current).
A stop channel signal (STOP Z) is activated if a forward fault is detected (zone 1 or zone 2) and it is maintained during “Block
delay time (ms)” (BlkTmms), without the detection of a fault in zone 4 (Z4_MEM).
If the channel interruption signal (STOP Z) is activated and the signal TPRx is not received, the signal "Teleprotection Z Trip" is
activated.
If the input “TPTx Blocking input” is activated the signal TPRx is not sent. Furthermore, if the “TP Trip Block” input is activated,
the signal "Teleprotection Z Trip" is blocked.
Figure 143 Directional Blocking Scheme
The blocking time is an additional delay time to give time for the blocking signal to be received and is programmable by the
user. The transmission time must be as low as possible with the aim of reducing this delay to a minimum.
one phase, the TPRx of this phase does not have to be activated. In addition, the STOP signal and the permissive units of this
phase have to be activated.
 The signals corresponding to phase A, are activated with the faults AN, AB, CA.

User Manual 247
 The signals corresponding to phase B, are activated with the faults BN, AB, BC.
 The signals corresponding to phase C, are activated with the faults CN, BC, CA.
Figure 144 Directional Blocking Scheme, phase A, phase-segregated teleprotection
The Figure 123 and Figure 124 show the directional blocking protection scheme. This scheme is used to analyse how the
❑ Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in zone 1 causing an instantaneous trip. Protection B detects the fault in zone 2
and once the blocking time has elapsed, it will trip given that a blocking command is not received from A since A does not
detect the fault in zone 4.
❑ Fault F3: Protection A detects the fault in zone 2 but does not cause a fast trip given that protection B sees the fault in
zone 4 and will therefore send a blocking signal to A.
Figure 145 Directional blocking example
Care must be taken with the coordination of the blocking unit backwards (for example, B's zone 4) of each end with the
overreaching unit of the other end (A's zone 2), these being set so that the reach of the reverse unit is always greater than the
overreach's.
Figure 146 Coordinating the Reverse Blocking Unit

User Manual 248
This scheme has the advantage of not being sensitive to noise in the communication channel and has the disadvantage of
possibly causing untimely trips if the communication channel is lost.
The blocking scheme is usually used in long lines when the teleprotection signal is transmitted via the protected line by the
carrier wave and the diminishing of the signal transmitted at the point of fault can be so severe that reception at the other end
of the line cannot always be ensured.
3.13.2.6 ECHO
It is used together with permissive overreaching schemes by acting on the teleprotection (TPTx) signal.
The ECHO Z signal only provides a programmable pulse. The ECHO function sends the teleprotection (TPTx) signal with any of
the following conditions:
❑ The ones corresponding to the permissive overreaching scheme.

❑ If TPRIx is received and no forward or reverse faults are detected.
 programmable for a minimum time (setting " ECHO delay time(ms)"), or
 the breaker is open (in this situation, it does not wait for the programmed time to elapse).

User Manual 249
Figure 147 Echo and weak infeed scheme
Figure 148 Weak infeed scheme signals

User Manual 250
In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection, one TPRx will be received per phase, also activating one ECHO per phase.
Figure 149. Echo and weak infeed scheme, phase A, phase-segregated teleprotection
It is used together with permissive overreaching schemes in cases where one end of the line is open (Figure 119 end B) or is a
weak end (Figure 120 end B). In the event of a fault on the line near the weakly-fed or open end, the distance unit of this end of
the line does not detect the fault. Hence, the trip will not be issued, nor will the permission signal be sent to the other end of
the line. Hence, since the permission signal will not be received, the strongly-fed end of the line will not speed up its trip.
To speed up the trip at the strongly-fed end in the event of a fault at the opposite end, the Echo function returns the TPRIx
signal received to the remote terminal if it does not detect a fault forward or backwards, or if the circuit breaker is open.
The resending of the TPRIx received (ECHO Z) will be instantaneous if the circuit breaker is open and will suffer a delay
(EcActTmms) if there is a weak power supply. This delay makes it possible to cover situations in which there is a higher fault
detection time, or it start slightly later due to an unfavourable distribution of the fault current. This delay is usually set to
approximately 40ms.

User Manual 251
"ECHO Z" is a pulse that during "ECHO pulse time (ms)" (EcTmms), which is normally set to approximately 50 ms, thus assuring
that the signal received is even recognised with different action times of the protection equipment at ends of the lines and with
different response times of the transmission equipment.
Figure 150 Echo logic protection with breaker open in B
Figure 148 shows the ECHO Logic Sample, with the circuit breaker in B Open This scheme will be used to analyse how the
protection devices act in the event of faults F1 and F2 with the basic permissive overreaching scheme.
❑ Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in its zone 1 and hence instantaneously trips and sends a permission signal to B.
End B is open so the fault is cleared.
❑ Fault F2: Protection A detects the fault in zone 2 and sends a permission signal to B. When the protection device in B
detects that the circuit breaker is open, it will resend the permission signal to protection A without delay. When
protection A detects the fault in zone 2 and having received the permission signal, it will speed up its trip.
Figure 151 Echo and weak infeed example
Figure 148 shows the ECHO logic, and Weak infeed. This scheme will be used to analyse how the protection devices act in the
event of faults F1 and F2 with the basic permissive overreaching scheme.
❑ Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in unit 1 and will hence trip instantaneously and send a permission signal to B. The
protection in B, being weakly fed, will not detect the fault, but as it receives the permission signal, it will send back to A
with the programmed delay, but A will be open. The circuit breaker at end B will remain closed.
will not detect the fault, but as it receives the permission signal, it will send back to A with the programmed delay. When
protection A sees the fault in unit 2 and has received the permission signal, it will speed up its trip. The circuit breaker at
end B will remain closed.
3.13.2.7 Weak infeed (27WI)

This is a complement to ECHO Z, where if ECHO Z conditions are met, with the circuit breaker closed and undervoltage in at
least one of the phases, a trip is produced.
The undervoltage unit associated to the weak infeed function has its own settings and is not dependent on the undervoltage
units.
The thresholds are 0.1V to 200V.
If an unblocking scheme is used, the TPRIx signal is replaced by TPRIx & GSL.

User Manual 252
If one end of the line is weakly fed (Figure 120 end B) with the echo logic, as seen in the previous section, the trip at the
strongly fed end is accelerated. However, the weakly fed end remains closed. This logic allows the opening of this end of the
line.
To detect the fault at the weak end, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
❑ TPRIx signal received (it will be sent to the strongly-fed end, as described in the ECHO function).
❑ The circuit breaker is closed.
❑ Undervoltage is detected in one of the phases (as a consequence of the fault). The settings recommended are 70%Vr for
the voltage.
Figure 152 Protection in the Weak Infeed Logic, with End B Weakly Fed
Figure 121 shows the weak infeed logic, with end B weakly fed. This scheme will be used to analyse how the protection devices
act in the event of F1 faults with the basic permissive overreaching scheme.
❑ Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in zone 2 and sends a permission signal to B. The protection in B, being Weak
Infeed, will not detect the fault and when it receives the permission signal, it will send it to A after the set time. When
protection A sees the fault in zone 2 and has received the permission signal, it will speed up its trip. When protection B
fulfills the ECHO conditions and detects undervoltage (due to the existence of the fault), it will give the trip command.
3.13.2.8 Inverse directional block

It delays the teleprotection trip for a number of cycles in order to allow the remote terminal time to clear the permission signal
(TPTx) following a change in the flow direction due to the opening of the breaker.
It is used in double circuit lines to prevent trips due to the change in the current flow which is caused when the circuit breaker
is opened at one end of the faulty line when this fault is cleared. The reversal of the current implies the reversal of the
protection device's directional elements, as well as the increase in the apparent distance to the fault. The time between the
repositioning of the distance elements and the functioning of the unit may give rise to a trip in the healthy parallel line.
When the scheme is a blocking onee, it keeps the blocking signal for a set time "Block delay time (ms)”, blocking the trip for a
time after detecting a change in the fault's direction. When the scheme is permissive, it blocks the trip and the emission of the
permission for a set time after changing the direction in which it detects the fault (backwards to forward).
The zone 4 signal is used with a memorization time "Current rev pickup t (ms)" (RvATmms), which enables the "Memory
Inverted Current" signal to be used in the rest of the schemes.
In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection, the signal used for the blocking will depend on what is set in "Z Block Units (3
bits)”, activating a signal per phase.
 The signals corresponding to phase A, are activated with the faults AN, AB, CA.
 The signals corresponding to phase B, are activated with the faults BN, AB, BC.
 The signals corresponding to phase C, are activated with the faults CN, BC, CA.
The following figures show the change in the current flow when the fault occurs and when circuit breaker K is opened to clear
this fault:

User Manual 253
Figure 153 Change in the Current Flow When the Fault Occurs in a Double Circuit Line
Inverse direction blocking with permissive schemes:
❑ When faults F occurs as can be seen in Figure 122.1, protection K will detect the fault in zone 1, J will either detect it in 1
or 2 and H backwards. In this situation, K instantaneously opens the circuit breaker and sends the permission signal to J
and likewise, G sends the permission signal to H.
backwards and H will detect it in zone 2. These conversions are not simultaneous or instantaneous. Hence, H could trip
before G removes the permission signal. To prevent this trip, the teleprotection trip is delayed for a number of cycles, to
give the remote terminal time to remove the permission signal.
Inverse direction blocking with blocking scheme:
❑ When the fault occurs as can be seen in Figure 121, protection K will detect the fault in zone 1, J will either detect it in 1
or 2 and H backwards. When H detects the fault in its zone 4, it sends a blocking signal to G (or it does not send the TPRIx
signal, which is the same), preventing tripping due to acceleration in zone 2.
backwards and H will detect it in zone 2. H would trip before receiving the blocking signal from G. To prevent this, H will
continue to detect the fault backwards, allowing time to receive the blocking signal.
It is recommended that the additional blocking time be set as follows:
Additional blocking time = operating time of the circuit breaker at the other end of the line (typically 3 cycles) + the reset time
of the communication channel (1 cycle) + the reset time of zone 2 of the relay at the other end of the line (1 cycle) = 5 cycles.
3.13.3 Direct trip

This additional teleprotection scheme causes a single-pole or three-pole trip upon the reception of the teleprotection signal,
regardless of the status of the protection functions.
In order to operate correctly, it must be enabled. Furthermore, a digital input must be programmed as a direct trip, otherwise it
is like being disabled.
The reception signals associated to the direct trip are:
❑ Direct trip pole A, B or C: Causes an external single-pole trip in the corresponding pole.
❑ Direct trip pole ABC: Causes the command to open as well as an external three-pole trip.
Any digital signal can be used as an output signal for signalling a direct trip to the other extreme, either via the programming of
the digital outputs or via the programmable logics.
If a trip is received by two or more poles, it is considered to be a three-pole trip.

User Manual 254
A particular feature of the scheme is the direct trip, in which the input signals are generic but unit 1's signals zone used as the
output signals.
The settings for the configuration of this unit are shown in Table 158.
❑ Enabled: Enables the direct trip function:

❑ Direct trip - Pole A. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the reception of the pole A direct trip.
❑ Direct trip - Pole B. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the reception of the pole B direct trip.
❑ Direct trip - Pole C. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the reception of the pole C direct trip.
❑ Direct trip - 3 Pole ABC. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the reception of the pole ABC direct trip.
This unit's settings and outputs are as follows:
❑ PROT/ZPDTS1 logical node

❑ No commands are available.
 Direct Trip Signal A. Indicates that the pole A direct trip signal has been received.
 Direct Trip Signal B. Indicates that the pole B direct trip signal has been received.
 Direct Trip Signal C. Indicates that the pole C direct trip signal has been received.
 Direct Trip Signal ABC. Indicates that the pole ABC direct trip signal has been received.
 Direct Trip Status. Indicates the function’s status.
Table 156 Direct trip settings

DTEna Enabled NO / YES
LogInDTA Direct trip - pole A inref
LogInDTB Direct trip - pole B inref
LogInDTC Direct trip - pole C inref
LogInDT Direct trip - 3 pole ABC inref
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 15 enum
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
Table 157 Direct trip outputs

Direct Trip Signal A DTTRx phsA
Direct Trip Signal B DTTRx phsB
Direct Trip Signal C DTTRx phsC
Direct Trip Signal ABC DTTRx general
Direct Trip Status StEna stVal

User Manual 255
Figure 154 Direct Trip Scheme
3.13.4 External trip

This function allows you to program any signal as an external trip. It can be one pole or three poles trip. It does not have
enabled setting, it is enough the configuration of any of the logical inputs.
It also provides a setting that performs a mask that allows it to produce a general trip. In the case the general trip is not
allowed, it can be used to start the recloser or the breaker failure (50BF) by external cause. There is another setting for this unit
to indicate if it can be reclosed, if it is allowed, that is, it works as the rest of the trips.
Receiving two poles trips it generates three pole trip.
❑ External trip - pole A. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that there is an external A pole trip.
❑ External trip - pole B. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that there is an external B pole trip.
❑ External trip - pole C. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that there is an external C pole trip.
❑ External trip - 3 pole. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that there is an external three-pole trip.
recloser (3.13.6).
This unit's settings and outputs are in the PROT/ZPEXT1 logical node:
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables (see Table 158).
❑ No commands are available.
 External trip pole A. Indicates the activation of an external A pole trip.
 External trip pole B. Indicates the activation of an external B pole trip.
 External trip pole C. Indicates the activation of an external C pole trip.
 External trip 3 pole. Indicates the activation of an external three-pole trip.
 External trip 1 pole. Indicates the activation of an external single-pole trip.
 External trip Status. Indicates the function’s status.

User Manual 256
Table 158 External trip settings

LogInExTA External trip - pole A inref
LogInExTB External trip - pole B inref
LogInExTC External trip - pole C inref
LogInExABC External trip - 3 pole inref
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 15 enum
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
Table 159 External trip outputs

External trip pole A ExtOp phsA
External trip pole B ExtOp phsB
External trip pole C ExtOp phsC
External trip 3 pole ExtOp general
External trip 1 pole ExtMOp general
External trip Status StEna stVal
3.13.5 Teleprotection serial communication

The signals used by the teleprotection unit can be sent in the differential communication message (see the chapter 3.1.1
Differential protection communications).
3.13.6 Trip logic

Each protection unit has a mask that allows it to produce a general trip:
❑ If a unit trips during a specific recloser status (blocked, in security t, etc.) and the corresponding mask is set to “YES”, the
trip is sent to the general trip output.
❑ If the mask is set to “NO”, the trip is produced but the "direct trip" signal is not received. In this way, the recloser is
independent of any trips used for signalling.
❑ If the recloser is out of service, all the units programmed to produce a general trip will issue a trip.
In the event of a specific trip failing to activate the “general trip”, the fault report is not generated.
If a trip is produced at the same time as another trip which activates the general trip, all the trips are reflected in the fault
report: those which go to GT and those which do not.
The general trip signals last at least the time of the setting “Min.time general trip(ms)” 52 of the XCBR node.
The picks ups are affected in the same way as with each unit's trips. Each of the relay’s pickups generates a signal. This signal
passes through the trip mask filter and is included in an OR in order to generate a "General pick up" signal.
3.13.6.1 Single pole Trip

Depending on the fault, it allows single pole trips, that is, the open command is given to one pole.
ZPMPT node allows to enable of the single-pole trip. The available settings are:
52

User Manual 257
❑ Enabled. It allows one pole trips. If it is disabled, all trips will be 3 poles trips.
❑ Force three pole. Selects the signal which, when active, forces all the trip to be three poles.
❑ Single Pole Trip 67NQ53. Allows single pole trips for 67NQ teleprotection scheme.
❑ Single Pole Trip Weak Infeed53. It allows single pole trips for Weak Infeed in the Z teleprotection scheme Z, or in Z and
67NQ.
Table 160. Single Pole Trip settings

MPTEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
LogInFoTP Force three pole inref
SPlTr Single Pole Trip 67NQ NO / YES Booleano
NO (0) / YES only Z (1) /
SPlTrWei enum
Single Pole Trip Weak Infeed YES Z and 67NQ (2)
The output signals are:
❑ Single-phase tripping Status. It indicates that the Single Pole Trip is activated.
❑ Force 3 Pole trip. It indicates that the Force three pole input is activated.
❑ Single phase 67NQ status. It indicates that the Single Pole Trip for 67NQ teleprotection scheme is activated.
❑ Single phase WI status. It indicates that the Single Pole Trip for 67NQ teleprotection scheme is activated.
Table 161. Single Pole Trip outputs

Single-phase tripping Status StEna general (stVal in Ed2)
Force 3 Pole trip FoTP general
Single phase 67NQ status SPlSt stVal
Single phase WI status WISt stVal
Single Pole Trip is generated when the following conditions are fulfilled:
❑ Single Pole Trip must be enabled.

❑ Force three pole input must not be activated.
❑ A single pole trip must happen. It can be:
 Zone 1 Single pole trip.
 Zone 2 Single pole trip accelerated by teleprotection. The zone 2 time delay trips are always three pole.
 Single pole external trip.
❑ When the recloser is enabled, it must be in standby and the “Reclose mode” must be one of the single pole recloser (1
pole, 1P/3P o Dependent).
When the recloser is disabled by setting, it doesn´t affect and single Pole Trip is generated when the other conditions are
fulfilled. In that case, a reclose of an external device is allowed.
The three poles trip is generated with all the trips that are not single pole.
3.13.6.2 General trip mask

It is independent for each of the protection units.
Indicates if this unit produces a general trip or not. The protection functions can be enabled or disabled and can trigger a trip
and/or a pickup independently of which units are to open the breaker. The general trip signal is sent to the breaker and is
configured by means of this mask.
53

User Manual 258
In order, upon tripping, for a unit to activate the general trip, it must meet (see Figure 155):
❑ Be enabled.
❑ Have its general trip mask set to YES.
❑ If the recloser is enabled, the unit must not be blocked by the trip permission mask.
Each protection unit has an independent setting which is used to enable or disable its general trip. Its reference is "GenTrip"
and allows the options “NO / YES”.
Figure 155 General trip scheme
DIGITAL SIGNAL
79 in service
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL SIGNAL with 79 blocked
79 blocked
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL SIGNAL with 79 in standby
79 in stand-by
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
with 79 in time t
DIGITAL SIGNAL Following manual closure
79 in time following Manual
Closure
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in recalim t 1
79 in TIME t 1
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in TIME t 2
79 in TIME t 2
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in TIME t 3
79 in TIME t 3
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in time t 4
79 in TIME t 4
DIGITAL INPUT
51-1 Trip
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
DIGITAL INPUT
General trip
DIGITAL INPUT
51-2 Trip
AJ 51-2->D.G.
………………………….
DIGITAL INPUT
Unit X Trip
AJ X->D.G.
Table 162 General trip (in each protection node)

GenTrip General trip YES/NO
3.13.6.3 Trip permission masks

They are independent for each of the protection units and are configured in the protection nodes.
This mask is used to select which trips are associated to the “general trip” (with the recloser in service), depending on the status of
the recloser.
Independently of these settings, the protection units pickup and trip, activating their corresponding signals.
The unit that is to produce the trip (activate the general trip signal) can be selected by programming 4 trip masks peer unit and
which are active in the following moments:
❑ Standby (supervising or reset).

User Manual 259
❑ Reclaim time following manual closure.

❑ Reclaim time following reclosure 1, 2, 3 or 4.
❑ Recloser blocked (external or internal block).
If the recloser is out of service, these masks have no effect, and thus all the units programmed to produce a general trip will issue a
trip.
Each protection unit has independent masks. If a unit trips during a specific recloser status (blocked, in security t, etc.) and the
corresponding mask is set to “YES”, the trip is sent to the general trip output. If the mask is set to “NO”, the trip is produced but the
"direct trip" signal is not received.
Reclosure block. When selected, the trip of this unit blocks the recloser. Detailed description in the chapter “Post-trip reclosure
permission mask”.
Each protection unit has an independent setting which is used to enable or disable the unit’s permissions. The reference is
“TripPerm”. The setting is configured as a bit field where each bit corresponds to a selection, indicating the integer value:
Bit meaning (1) Bit Value

Reclosure block 0 NO / YES
Trip permission 79 standby 1 NO / YES
Trip permission 79 blocked 2 NO / YES
Permission for trip in reclaim time following reclosure 1 3 NO / YES
Permission for trip in reclaim time following manual closure 7 NO / YES
An example of use with trip permissions in standby and following reclosures would be the decimal value 122 (01111010 in binary),
broken down into:
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
The maximum allowed value with all permissions enabled is 255 (11111111 in binary).
Table 163 Trip permission after reclosing (each protection node)

TripPerm Trip Permission by reeng. 0 8191 1 int32
3.14 CT SUPERVISION
If the event of neutral current in the 4th transformer, a fault may be detected in at least one of the relay input channels (adaptation
transformer + internal circuitry). The absolute value of three times the zero sequence current (calculated using the phase currents) is
compared with the current measured at the transformer, taking the phase (RTF) and neutral (RTN) transformation ratios into account.
None of the phases must exceed 1.5 times the rated current.
The unit activates a “CT monitoring alarm signal” when the following conditions are met.
❑ The measurements are outside the range:

|Ia + Ib + Ic | ∙ RTF
0.8 < < 1.3
|IN | ∙ RTN
❑ The measurement ratios meet:
|Ia + Ib + Ic | ∙ RTF − |IN | ∙ RTN
> 0.2
RTF
❑ |Ia+Ib+Ic-IN|/3>>10%·max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|)+5%·Irated

❑ The measurement of 3 current phases is less than 1.5 times the rated current.

User Manual 260
The settings for the configuration of the current transformer monitoring are shown in Table 164.
❑ Enabled: Enables the CT monitoring function.

Table 164 CT monitoring settings

CTSpvEna Enabled NO / YES enum
❑ PROT/CCTS1 node
❑ Settings. There are 6 settings tables.
❑ There are no logical inputs or commands.
 CT Supervision Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 CT Supervision. Indicates that the CT monitoring conditions have been met.
Table 165 CT supervision outputs

CT Supervision Status StEna stVal
CT Supervision CTSpv general
3.15 VT SUPERVISION
The negative and zero sequence voltages are compared with the rated voltage, generating alarm signals.
❑ Vn>10%Vn Supervision: it is active when V0 voltage is greater than the 10% of the rated voltage.
❑ V2>10%Vn Supervision: it is active when V2 voltage is greater than the 10% of the rated voltage.
It has no settings nor commands:
❑ Node GEN/LLN0
Table 166 VT supervision outputs

Vn>10%Vn Supervision VnSpv stVal
V2>10%Vn Supervision V2Spv stVal

User Manual 261
BREAKER
4. BREAKER
4.1 BREAKER LOGICS
4.1.1 Breaker status

The breaker unit uses the PROT/XCBR1 and PROT/XCBR2 logical nodes (if there is more than one breaker). The settings used for
each breaker are:
❑ Configuration type: Indicates the breaker configuration scheme. It can be set to “Single” or "Breaker and a Half". Available
only in the XCBR1.
❑ Breaker type: Indicates the type of breaker employed:
 1 or 2 DI.General Status. Only one input is used for the status of the three poles.
 3 or 6 DI.Per Pole. An independent input is used for the status of each of the three poles.
❑ Pole failure time (ms): Indicates the time (ms) during which the difference between the type a and type b inputs must be
detected in the breaker status in order for the failure to be registered. Although the setting is unique, it affects the three
poles.
❑ 52a input: If the breaker type is "1 or 2 DI.General Status", it indicates the breaker status.
❑ 52a-Pole A: If the breaker type is "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole", it indicates the phase A breaker status.
❑ 52a-Pole B: The same as phase A, but for B.
❑ 52a-Pole C: The same as phase A, but for C.
❑ 52b input: If the breaker type is "1 or 2 DI.General Status", it indicates the breaker status.
❑ 52b-Pole A: If the breaker type is "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole", it indicates the phase A breaker status.
❑ 52b-Pole B: The same as phase A, but for B.
❑ 52b-Pole C: The same as phase A, but for C.
❑ Open blocking: When active, it blocks the manual breaker open commands. The trips are not blocked.
❑ Close blocking: When active, it blocks the breaker closure commands.
❑ Breaker open command input: When active, it generates a breaker open command.
❑ Close command input: When active, it generates a breaker closure command.
❑ 52 Blocking input: When active, it indicates the breaker is blocked. It is used in 50BF, open pole detector and recloser.
❑ Trip sealed: Allows the open commands to be enabled. When it is enabled, the open command is maintained after the
cause of the trip has disappeared and until the breaker is detected as open.
❑ Close sealed: Allows the closure commands to be enabled. When it is enabled, the closure command is maintained after
the cause of the closure has disappeared and until the breaker is detected as closed.
❑ 52 Supervision: Allows breaker status supervision function.
❑ Sync. Delay Time (s). This is the maximum time waited before the synchronism grants permission before a manual closure.
If closure permission is granted before the conclusion of this time, a closure command is issued. On the other hand, if this
time elapsed without permission being granted, the closure commnad is not executed. 54
❑ Synchrocheck supervision55. Indicates whether the manual closure is to be monitored with synchronism. If it´s set “YES”,
the manual close permission must be activated to generate the close command .
❑ Synchrocheck type55. Indicates whether the synchronism is internal or external.
54
Available from firmware version 5.19.15.7 and ICD version 6.3.0.0.
55

User Manual 262
BREAKER
❑ External syncro. Permission55. Logical external synchronism permission logic. Selects the signal which, when active,
indicates the existence of permission for synchronism.
❑ Min.time general trip(ms)56. Indicates the minimum duration time of the general trip signals per pole and global;
independently if the signal that causes the trip is deactivated before this time.
Table 167 Breaker status settings

BrNum Configuration type Single / Breaker and a Half enum
1 or 2 DI.General Status
BrTyp 52 Status detection enum
3 or 6 DI.Per Pole
FaBrTmms Pole failure time (ms) 0 10000 10 Int32
LogIn52a1 52a input Int32
LogIn52a1A 52a-Pole A Int32
LogIn52a1B 52a-Pole B Int32
LogIn52a1C 52a-Pole C Int32
LogIn52b1 52b input Int32
LogIn52b1A 52b-Pole A Int32
LogIn52b1B 52b-Pole B Int32
LogIn52b1C 52b-Pole C Int32
LogInOpBl Open blocking Int32
LogInClBl Close blocking Int32
LogIn52Op Breaker open command input Int32
LogIn52Cl Close command input Int32
LogInBlBr 52 Blocking input Int32
TrLck Trip sealed NO / YES Boolean
ClLck Close sealed NO / YES Boolean
SupEna 52 Supervision NO / YES Boolean
SyWaTms Sync. Delay Time (s) 0 600 0.01 float
VSynEna Synchrocheck supervision NO/YES Boolean
SynTyp Synchrocheck type Internal/External enum
LogInExSy External sync. Permission Int32
GTTmms Min.time general trip(ms)56 0 150 10 Int32
Breaker status via digital input
The status of the general breaker and by pole is determined with the status of digital inputs and breaker type setting. Used to
determine the status of the breaker without uncertainty and employed in functions that require the breaker’s status to be known,
such as the opening and closure sealing logic, the recloser, etc.
The 52b status inputs take precedence over the 52a status inputs, i.e., if 52b status inputs have been configured, the breaker status
is determined by means of these inputs, independently of the status of the 52a inputs.
Depending on the breaker type setting, the functioning is:
❑ 1 or 2 DI.General Status. The general 52b Status input is used for the breaker status. If it is not configured, the general 52a
Status input is used. The phase breaker status matches the general.
❑ 3 or 6 DI.Per Pole. The independent phases 52b Status inputs are used for the breaker status. If they are not configured,
the independent phases 52a Status inputs are used. The general breaker status is generated from the phases, taking into
account the following:
 Closed general status, if all the phases are closed.
 Open general status, if at least one of the phases is open.
Table 168 shows this function’s outputs.
❑ 52_1 Closed (Simple Log.). Indicates the breaker's general status, in accordance with the status of the digital inputs.
❑ 52_1 X Closed (Simple Log.). Indicates the status of each of the breaker's phases, in accordance with the status of the
digital inputs. Where "X" indicates the pole (A, B or C).
56

User Manual 263
BREAKER
Breaker status monitoring
The status of each pole (open, closed) is determined in accordance with a combination of N/O and N/C inputs. If inconsistencies are
detected between the N/O and the N/C inputs after the failure time (”Pole failure time (ms)”), a failure is signalled and no other
action is taken (relative to the discrepancy) until the anomaly is corrected. The functioning of this unit is shown in Figure 156.
52 Supervision setting allows breaker status supervision function
❑ PROT/XCBR1 node
❑ PROT/XCBR2 node. Applies only in configurations with 2 switches
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table . The setting "Configuration type" is only
available in XCBR1, while the rest are on both nodes.
❑ There are associated commands:
 Pos. Switch opening or closure command.
 LOrdLc52Op. Local mode switch opening or closure command.
 LOrdMaBl. Locking or unlocking operations command for switch in local mode.
 BlkCls. Locking or unlocking switch closure operations command.
 52_1 Open: Indicates that the 52 is open. There are independent general and phase signals.
 52_1 Closed: Indicates that the 52 is closed. There are independent general and phase signals.
 52_1 Undetermined: Indicates that the 52 is undetermined. There are independent general and phase signals.
 52_1 Failure: Indicates that the 52 has a failure. There are independent general and phase signals.
 Close Command - Breaker 1: Indicates that a closure command has been generated.
 Open Command - Breaker 1: Indicates that an opening command has been generated.
 Ph. X Open Command - Br1: Indicates that a Phase X opening command has been generated. X can be A, B or C.
 Close Failure - Br1: Indicates that a failure has occurred in some closing switch pole because maximum closing time has
exceeded.
 Ph. X Close Failure- Br1: Indicates that a failure has occurred in closing switch X pole because maximum closing time
has exceeded. X can be A, B or C.
 Open Failure - Br1: Indicates that a failure has occurred in some opening switch pole because maximum closing time
has exceeded.
 Ph. X Open Failure- Br1: Indicates that a failure has occurred opening switch X pole because maximum closing time has
exceeded. X can be A, B or C.
 Breaker settings error: Indicates that breakers are not properly defined and it is activated in the following situations:
 No consistency between the breakers and recloser setting: "Select 2 breakers"
 No consistency between the breakers and breaker setting: "Configuration type".
In Figure 156 the status switch logic diagram is displayed. Input signals to this scheme are:
❑ Enab, Logic 52_1: This input indicates the 52 status detection mode. Corresponds to XCBR "52 Status detection" setting
and allows the following values:
 "1 or 2 DI.General Status": There is only one digital input to indicate the switch status.
 "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole". There are three digital inputs to indicate the status of each phase.
❑ 52a input: Indicates the switch a logic input. Applies to "52a input" setting. Active if the switch is closed.
❑ 52b input: Indicates the switch b logic input. Applies to "52b input" setting. Active if the switch is open.
❑ 52a Pole A: Indicates the phase A 'a logic' input. Applies to "52a-Pole A" Active if the pole is closed.
❑ 52b Pole A: Indicates the phase A 'b logic' input. Applies to "52b-Pole A" Active if the pole is open.
❑ 52a Pole B: Indicates the phase B 'a logic' input. Applies to "52a-Pole B" Active if the pole is closed.

User Manual 264
BREAKER
❑ 52b Pole B: Indicates the phase B 'b logic' input. Applies to "52b-Pole B" Active if the pole is open.
❑ 52a Pole C: Indicates the phase C 'a logic' input. Applies to "52a-Pole C" Active if the pole is closed.
❑ 52b Pole C: Indicates the phase C 'b logic' input. Applies to "52b-Pole C" Active if the pole is open.
Figure 156 Breaker status.
SETTING
Enab. Logic 52_1 = 1 POLE / 4 STATUSES
Enab. Logic 52_1 = 3 POLES / 4 STATUSES
SETTING
DIGITAL INPUT POLE
FAILURE T
52a input
0
DIGITAL INPUT
52b input
SETTING
DIGITAL INPUT POLE DIGITAL SIGNAL
FAILURE T DIGITAL SIGNAL 52_1 Undetermined
52a-Pole A
52_1 phase A Undetermined
0
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase A Open
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase A Closed
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase A Failure
DIGITAL INPUT
52b-Pole A
SETTING
DIGITAL INPUT POLE
FAILURE T DIGITAL SIGNAL
52a-Pole B
52_1 phase B Undetermined
0 DIGITAL SIGNAL
DIGITAL SIGNAL 52_1 Open
52_1 phase B Open
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase B Closed
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase B Failure
DIGITAL INPUT
52b-Pole B
SETTING DIGITAL SIGNAL

DIGITAL INPUT POLE 52_1 closed
FAILURE T DIGITAL SIGNAL
52a-Pole C
52_1 phase C Undetermined
0
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase C Open
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase C Closed
DIGITAL SIGNAL
DIGITAL SIGNAL 52_1 failure
DIGITAL INPUT 52_1 phase C Failure
52b-Pole C

User Manual 265
BREAKER
Table 168 Breaker status outputs
XCBR1 Signal XCBR2 Signal Data Attribute

52_1 Open 52_2 Open OpenBr general
52_1 Closed 52_2 Closed CloseBr general
52_1 Undetermined 52_2 Undetermined UndetBr general
52_1 Failure 52_2 Failure FailureBr general
52_1 Phase A Open 52_2 Phase A Open OpenBr phsA
52_1 Phase A Closed 52_2 Phase A Closed CloseBr phsA
52_1 Phase A Undetermined 52_2 Phase A Undetermined UndetBr phsA
52_1 Phase A Failure 52_2 Phase A Failure FailureBr phsA
52_1 Phase B Open 52_2 Phase B Open OpenBr phsB
52_1 Phase B Closed 52_2 Phase B Closed CloseBr phsB
52_1 Phase B Undetermined 52_2 Phase B Undetermined UndetBr phsB
52_1 Phase B Failure 52_2 Phase B Failure FailureBr phsB
52_1 Phase C Open 52_2 Phase C Open OpenBr phsC
52_1 Phase C Closed 52_2 Phase C Closed CloseBr phsC
52_1 Phase C Undetermined 52_2 Phase C Undetermined UndetBr phsC
52_1 Phase C Failure 52_2 Phase C Failure FailureBr phsC
52_1 Undetermined 52_2 Undetermined Pos stVal
52_1 Open 52_2 Open Pos OpenBr
52_1 Closed 52_2 Closed Pos CloseBr
52_1 Failure 52_2 Failure Pos FailureBr
52_1 Closed (Simple Log.) 52_2 Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt general
52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.) 52_2 A Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt phsA
52_1 B Closed (Simple Log.) 52_2 B Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt phsB
52_1 C Closed (Simple Log.) 52_2 C Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt phsC
Close Command - Breaker 1 Close Command - Breaker 2 OpCls general
Open Command - Breaker 1 Open Command - Breaker 2 OpOpn general
Ph. A Open Command - Br1 Ph. A Open Command - Br2 OpOpn phsA
Ph. B Open Command - Br1 Ph. B Open Command - Br2 OpOpn phsB
Ph. C Open Command - Br1 Ph. C Open Command - Br2 OpOpn phsC
Close Failure - Br1 Close Failure - Br2 ClsFailBr general
Ph. A Close Failure- Br1 Ph. A Close Failure- Br2 ClsFailBr phsA
Ph. B Close Failure- Br1 Ph. B Close Failure- Br2 ClsFailBr phsB
Ph. C Close Failure- Br1 Ph. C Close Failure- Br2 ClsFailBr phsC
Open Failure - Br1 Open Failure - Br2 OpenFailBr general
Ph. A Open Failure- Br1 Ph. A Open Failure- Br2 OpenFailBr phsA
Ph. B Open Failure- Br1 Ph. B Open Failure- Br2 OpenFailBr phsB
Ph. C Open Failure- Br1 Ph. C Open Failure- Br2 OpenFailBr phsC
Open Blocked - Br1 Open Blocked - Br1 BrBlk general
Closing Blocked - Br1 Closing Blocked - Br1 BrClBlk general
Breaker settings error Error general
4.1.2 Breaker failure and operating logic

The opening and closure failure time settings determine the time lapse between the issue of the corresponding command and the
reception of the breaker’s activity signal, on the understanding that the breaker has acted correctly. To the contrary, the open
failure and closure failure signals are generated and failure and general indications are issued.
This unit’s settings are grouped in PROT/RBFS1 (breaker 1) and (PROT/RBFS2) logical nodes:
❑ Open failure time (ms): If an open command is given, the breaker should be open before this time.
❑ Close failure time (ms): If a close command is given, the breaker should be closed before this time.
Table 168 shows the operating logic’s output Data, which are available in the PROT/XCBR nodes.

User Manual 266
BREAKER
Table 169 Breaker status monitoring settings

OpTmms Open failure time (ms) 20 100000 1 Int32
ClTmms Close failure time (ms) 20 100000 1 Int32
4.1.3 Locking logic

The trip and close commands can be locked with the breaker status, depending on the configuration of the trip sealing and closure
sealing settings. Figure 157 and Figure 158 show the sealed trip and closure schemes. The general trip signals have a minimun time
duration set in "Min.time general trip(ms)". 56
Figure 157 Trip logic scheme shows Trip logic scheme. The input signals of this scheme are:
❑ Trip Sealed 52-1: Setting that indicates whether trip will be sealed after completing trip conditions and manual opening.
Corresponds to XCBR setting "Trip sealed".
❑ General Trip: Corresponds to the signal "General trip" generated with any trip.
❑ Pole A (B,C) General Trip: Corresponds to the signals "Pole A General Trip", (B, C) generated with any phase trip.
❑ Manual open command input**: Indicates that open command has been generated by the logic input "Open Command -
Breaker 1" or by user command.
❑ Manual Open blocking: Indicates that blocking command has been generated by the logic input "Open blocking" or by user
command.
❑ 52a pole A: Enabled indicates that phase A is closed. Corresponds to the signal "52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)".
❑ 52a pole B: Enabled indicates that phase B is closed. Corresponds to the signal "52_1 B Closed (Simple Log.)".
❑ 52a pole C: Enabled indicates that phase C is closed. Corresponds to the signal "52_1 C Closed (Simple Log.)".

User Manual 267
BREAKER
Figure 157 Trip logic scheme
Figure 158 shows Closure logic scheme. The input signals of this scheme are:
❑ General trip: Indicates the signal generated with any trip. It is shown in "General trip".
❑ Manual open command: Internal signal indicating that open command has been generated by the logic input "Breaker
open command input" or by user command, and is not blocked by the logic input "Open blocking" neither by user
command.
❑ Close sealed: Setting that indicates whether will be sealed after completing the close order. Corresponds to the XCBR
"Close sealed" setting.
❑ RECLOSURE Command**: Internal signal indicating an OR of the reclosure commands. They are displayed on signals "52_1
Reclose Command" (switch reclosure) and "Reclosing Command F_RREC" (frequency reclosure). It should not be blocked
by the logic input "Close Blocked" neither by user command.
❑ Close command: Indicates the logic input "Close Command - Breaker" is enabled, a closure order has been launched by
user command or a close order coupling. Formerly sincrocheck's "Perm. Manual Close" must be enabled and must not be
blocked by the logic input "Close blocking" neither by user command.
❑ 52_1 closed: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
❑ 52_1A closed: Signal indicating that phase A is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
❑ 52_1B closed: Signal indicating that phase B is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 B Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
❑ 52_1C closed: Signal indicating that phase C is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 C Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.

User Manual 268
BREAKER
Figure 158 Closure logic scheme
4.1.4 Open pole detector

It determines the open pole or poles using the digital inputs, current and/or voltage measurement.
In order for a pole to be considered open, a combination of the following conditions must be met (depending on the operation type
setting):
❑ A phase’s breakers indicate that the phase is open (in the case of 1 ½ breaker, two are employed)
❑ The current is below the threshold set in the open pole due to current detection logic.
❑ The current and the voltage are below the threshold (according to the setting). In this case, if there is a fuse failure the
open pole due to voltage signal is not activated.
To determine the breaker’s status by digital input, the 52b (normally closed) of each phase is employed, when configured. If the
52b is not configured, the 52a is used (normally open).
If a single pole open is detected, the following functions can be blocked, if they are selected by settings:
❑ Neutral overcurrent, sensitive neutral and unbalance.

❑ Overvoltage V0 and V2.
There is a delay of one cycle before the reset of the 3PO output (three open pole). Therefore, there is also a one-cycle delay in the
change from 3PO to 1PO (1 open pole).
There is a delay of one cycle before the reset of the 1PO output (when the breaker closes).
Figure 159 shows Open pole detector scheme. The input signals of this scheme are:
❑ 52_1A Closed: Signal indicating that phase A is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
❑ 52_1 Closed: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
❑ 52_1 Blocked: Internal signal indicating that switch is blocked by the breaker 1 logical input "Close blocking" or by a
blocking user command.
❑ 52_2A Closed: Signal indicating that phase A is closed. Corresponds to the "52_2 A Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
❑ 52_2 Closed: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_2 Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.

User Manual 269
BREAKER
❑ 52_2 Blocked: Internal signal indicating that switch is blocked by the breaker 2 logical input "Close blocking" or by a
blocking user command.
❑ Configuration type = Breaker and a Half: Setting that allows to select switches configuration schemes. Corresponds to the
setting "Configuration type".
❑ Phase A Open ( I < ): Signal "Phase A Open ( I < )".
❑ DeadLine Phase A: Signal indicating that phase A is de-energized. Corresponds to "Deadline Phase A" signal.
And their equivalents for phases B and C.
Figure 159 Open pole detector scheme
The settings for the configuration of the open pole detector are shown in Table 170 Open pole detector settings
❑ Enabled: Enables the open pole detector function.

❑ Operation type. Indicates the manner in which the open pole is detected:
 V and I. The voltage and current conditions must be met.
 I and 52. The current and 52 status input conditions must be met.
 V and I and 52. The voltage and current and 52 status input conditions must be met.
 V and I or 52. The voltage and current or the 52 status input conditions must be met.
 Only 52. The 52 status input conditions must be met.
❑ Voltage threshold. Indicates the voltage value below which the phase is considered as broken.
❑ Current threshold. Indicates the current value below which the phase is considered as open.
❑ Neutral and Unbalance Units Block. Indicates whether the unbalance and neutral units are to be blocked upon the
detection of an open pole.
❑ Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the open pole detector function.

User Manual 270
BREAKER
Table 170 Open pole detector settings
Name IEC 61850 Setting Minimum Maximum Step Remarks Type

OPDEna Enabled NO / YES enum
V and I (1)
I and 52 (2)
Optype Operation type V and I and 52 (3) enum
V and I or 52 (4)
Only 52 (5)
OpValV Voltage threshold (V) 10,0 165,0 0,1 floating
OpValI Current threshold (A) 0,01 0,5 0,01 floating
UnbUnBl Neutral and Unbalance Units Block NO / YES Boolean
❑ PROT/POPD1 node
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function block and unblocking. Only acts if the unit is enabled.
 Open Pole Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 Pole A Open. Indicates that the open pole conditions have been met in phase A.
 Pole B Open. Indicates that the open pole conditions have been met in phase B.
 Pole C Open. Indicates that the open pole conditions have been met in phase C.
 1PO- One Pole Open. Indicates that there is only one pole open (A, B or C).
 2PO- Two Pole Open. Indicates that there are two poles open.
 3PO- Three Pole Open. Indicates that there are three poles open.
 PO-Some Pole Open. Indicates that at least one pole is open, but not all three.
 Phase A Open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase A current is below the threshold.
 Phase B open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase B current is below the threshold.
 Phase C open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase C current is below the threshold.
 Deadline Phase A. Indicates that pole A is de-energized.
 Deadline Phase B. Indicates that pole B is de-energized.
 Deadline Phase C. Indicates that pole C is de-energized.
 Deadline Phase ABC. Indicates that the three poles are de-energized.

User Manual 271
BREAKER
Table 171 Open pole detector outputs

Open Pole Status StEna stVal
Pole A Open OpenPole phsA
Pole B Open OpenPole phsB
Pole C Open OpenPole phsC
1PO- One Pole Open OneOpenPole general
2PO- Two Pole Open TwoOpenPole general
3PO- Three Pole Open ThreeOpenPole general
PO-Some Pole Open OpenPole general
Phase A Open ( I < ) OpenPhs phsA
Phase B Open ( I < ) OpenPhs phsB
Phase C Open ( I < ) OpenPhs phsC
Deadline Phase A DeadLine phsA
Deadline Phase B DeadLine phsB
Deadline Phase C DeadLine phsC
Deadline Phase ABC DeadLine general
4.1.4.1 Open pole due to current

This is used to detect the breaker status with the current measurement. Using the half- and full-cycle DFT measurements (the
lower of the two), it is determined whether the current is below a minimum noise threshold in at least one of the phases (see
Figure 160)
If the open pole detection is activated in at least one of the phases, the phases overcurrent instantaneous units are reset.
The current threshold is indicated in the open pole detector (PROT/POPD).
The output signals are in the PROT/POPD node (see Table 171):
❑ Phase A Open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase A current is below the threshold.
❑ Phase B open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase B current is below the threshold.
❑ Phase C open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase C current is below the threshold.
Figure 160 Open pole due to current scheme
ANALOGUE INPUT
DIGITAL SIGNAL
IA (min (dft,dft ½)) +
< Phase A Open ( I < )
SETTING -
Current threshold (A)
ANALOGUE INPUT
DIGITAL SIGNAL
IB (min (dft,dft ½)) +
-
< Phase B Open ( I < )
DIGITAL SIGNAL
ANALOGUE INPUT +
< Phase C Open ( I < )
IC (min (dft,dft ½)) -
4.1.4.2 Dead or de-energized line

It detects a line’s disconnected phases. If a phase’s voltage and current levels simultaneously drop below the voltage and
current thresholds, this phase is considered dead. In such cases, the following signal is generated for each phase: "Deadline
Phase x", in which x is A, B or C. Figure 161 shows a diagram of the dead line. The voltage and current thresholds are as
indicated in the open pole detector (PROT/POPD).
The output signals are in the PROT/POPD node (see Table 171):
❑ Deadline Phase A. Indicates that pole A is de-energized.

❑ Deadline Phase B. Indicates that pole B is de-energized.

User Manual 272
BREAKER
❑ Deadline Phase C. Indicates that pole C is de-energized.

❑ Deadline Phase ABC. Indicates that the three poles are de-energized.
Figure 161 Dead line scheme
4.1.5 Pole discordance

If any of the poles are detected as having a status different to that of the other poles during a configurable period of time, the pole
discordance signal is generated. A differentiation is made between single open pole discordance and two open pole discordance. A
trip can be generated or the action can be limited to signalling. It allows a selection to be made between two modes of operation
(see Figure 162 and Figure 163).
Input signals of this scheme are:
❑ 52_1 failure: Indicates that 52 is in fault because "Pole failure time (ms)" time has been exceeded. Corresponds to "52_1
Failure" signal.
❑ 52_1 phase A open: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)" signal
deactivated.
❑ 52_1 phase B open: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 B Closed (Simple Log.)" signal
deactivated.
❑ 52_1 phase C open: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 C Closed (Simple Log.)" signal
deactivated.
Equivalent signals are used in switch 2.

User Manual 273
BREAKER
Figure 162 Mode 1 pole discordance
Figure 163 Mode 2 pole discordance
❑ Enabled: Enables the open pole detector function.

❑ Operation type. Indicates the unit’s operation type.
 M1: Signaling
 M1: Signal and Trip
 M2: Signaling
 M2: Signal and Trip
❑ 1 pole open time (ms). Time for the discordance activation with 1 open pole.
❑ 2 pole open time (ms). Time for the discordance activation with 2 open poles.

User Manual 274
BREAKER
Table 172 Pole discordance settings

PDEna Enabled NO / YES enum
M1: Signaling
M1: Signal and Trip
M2: Signaling
M2: Signal and Trip
PTmms1 1 pole open time (ms 100 60000 10 Int32
PTmms2 2 pole open time (ms 100 60000 10 Int32
❑ Node:
 PROT/RPLD1 for Breaker 1.
 PROT/RPLD2 for Breaker 2.
❑ Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables.
❑ Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function block and unblocking. Only acts if the unit is enabled.
❑ Outputs: Table 173 Pole discordance outputs shows the function’s output data.
 Pole Discordance Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 52_1 Start Discordance. Indicates that the function has started.
 52_1 Trip Discordance. Indicates that the function has tripped.
 52_1 Discordance open 1P. Indicates that there is discordance with only one open pole.
 52_1 Discordance open 2P. Indicates that there is discordance with two open poles.
Table 173 Pole discordance outputs

Pole Discordance Status StEna stVal
52_1 Start Discordance StrPDBr1 general
52_1 Trip Discordance OpPDBr1 general
52_1 Discordance open 1P OneOpenBr1 general
52_1 Discordance open 2P TwoOpenBr1 general
4.2 BREAKER OPERATION SUPERVISION
It monitors the breaker’s operations after the trip and closure commands or with external start by activating the supervision inputs, as
selected by setting. In addition to signals, the counters generated by these functions are shown in the statistical data.
In breaker and a half configurations two breakers are supervised:
❑ In models, where there is only one current input, ki2 and electrical supervisions are only performed on breaker 1. In
breaker 2 only mechanical operations are supervised. See Table 174 (breaker 1) and Table 175 (breaker 2) for settings and
Table 176 and Table 177 for signals.
❑ In models, where there are two current inputs, ki2 and electrical supervisions are performed on both breakers. See Table
174 and Table 176 for both breakers.
The supervision is independent for each breaker and the start depends on the setting "Supervision type"57:
❑ Internal. The monitoring starts with the trip and closure commands generated by the device.
57

User Manual 275
BREAKER
❑ External57. The monitoring starts with the activation of the signals configured in the logical inputs "Opening supervision pole x" and
"Closing supervision".
The settings for the configuration of this unit are shown in Table 174 (breaker 1) and Table 175 (breaker 2):
❑ ki2 calculation type. Indicates the calculation type between kI2*t, kI2 and kI.
❑ ki2 time (ms). Indicates the timeout following the trip for the measurement of the ki2 calculation current.
❑ Alarm value ki2. Indicates the ki2 summation threshold which, when exceeded, generates a “ki2 exceeded” signal.
❑ Initial value ki2. Indicates the initial value of the ki2 summation when a reset command is received.
❑ Trips exceeded window (min). Time window in minutes for the excessive number of trips counter.
❑ Maximum number of trips. Maximum number of trips permitted in the set time window.
❑ Mechanical opening T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the opening command until the detection of the open pole
by the digital input status.
❑ Mechanical closing T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the closure command until the detection of the closed pole
by the digital input status.
❑ Electrical opening T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the opening command until the detection of the absence of
current in the phase.
❑ Electrical closing T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the closure command until the detection of the presence of
current in the phase.
❑ Inactivity time (days). Indicates the maximum number of days without breaker activity.
❑ Opening dispersion T (ms). Indicates the maximum dispersion time between two poles upon opening.
❑ Closing dispersion T (ms). Indicates the maximum dispersion time between two poles upon closing.
❑ Supervision type57. Indicates the supervision type between:
 Internal: The monitoring starts with the trip and closure commands generated by the device.
 External: The monitoring starts with the activation of the signals configured in the logical inputs.
❑ Opening supervision pole A57. Selects the signal that when activated, initiates the opening supervision of the pole A.
❑ Opening supervision pole B57. Selects the signal that when activated, initiates the opening supervision of the pole B.
❑ Opening supervision pole C57. Selects the signal that when activated, initiates the opening supervision of the pole C.
❑ Closing supervision57. Selects the signal that when activated, initiates the closing supervision.
❑ Breaker wear enabled58: “WearEna”. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not.
❑ Switching cycles at Ir.58: “OpIrtg”. Maximum number of switching cycles at rated operating current.
❑ Switching cycles at Isc.58: “OpIsc”. Maximum number of switching cycles at rated short circuit current.
❑ Rated I short-circ.(A)58: “Irsc”. Rated short circuit current in secondary amperes.
❑ Maximun switching cycles58: “AlmVal”. Indicates the wear value for which the alarm signal is generated.
There are independent settings and outputs:
❑ Node
 PROT/CBOU1 for Breaker 1.
 PROT/CBOU2 for Breaker 2.
❑ Settings. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 174 andTable 175.
❑ Commands: Table 179 shows the available commands:
 KI2 GLOBAL INIT. The ki2 values are reset to the set initial value "Initial value ki2". There are commands for
resetting each phase's value or global reset for all phases.
58

User Manual 276
BREAKER
 OPEN INIT. They reset the opening counters to zero. There are commands for resetting each phase's counter
and a global reset for all the phases.
 TRIP INIT. They reset the trip counters to zero. There are commands for resetting each phase's counter and a
global reset for all the phases.
 CLOSE INIT. They reset the closure counters to zero. There are commands for resetting each phase's counter
and a global reset for all the phases.
 MAX CURRENT BREAK INIT. It resets the maximum interrupted current
 CURRENT LEVEL INIT. It resets the overcurrent level timers.
 STATISTIC INIT. It resets the statistic data: opening, trip and close counters, ki2, cut current and times. The
reclose counter is not reset.
 52 TIME INIT. It resets the breaker operating times.
 INACT DAYS INIT. It resets the days of breaker inactivity.
 RESET Supervision57. It resets the maximun and average dispersion time for each pole pair and the average
opening and closure time.
 RESET Wear58. It resets the breaker wear values.
❑ Outputs: The meaning of each signal is detailed in the function explanation.
 Table 176 shows the function’s output data for breaker 1 (CBOU1) and for the second breaker in 52 ½
configuration where there are independent current inputs for each breaker (CBOU2).
 Table 177 shows the function’s output data for the second breaker in 52 ½ configuration where there is only
one current input for each phase (CBOU2).

User Manual 277
BREAKER
Table 174 Operation monitoring settings (All settings)

Ki2 (0)
KIType ki2 calculation type 0 2 1 KI (1) enum
KI2t (2)
KITmms ki2 time (ms) 0 100 10 Int32
KIAlarm Alarm value ki2 0 100000 1 Int32
KIInit Initial value ki2 0 100000 1 Int32
ExTrTmm Trips exceeded window (min) 1 60 1 Int32
ExTrNum Maximum number of trips 0 500 1 Int32
OpMeTmms Mechanical opening T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
ClMeTmms Mechanical closing T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
OpElTmms Electrical opening T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
ClElTmms Electrical closing T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
NoOpDays Inactivity time (days) 0 10000 1 Int32
OpDisTmms Opening dispersion T (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
ClDisTmms Closing dispersion T (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
MaskEna Enable Events record 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean
SupType Supervision type 0 1 1 Internal/External Int32
LogInSupOpA Opening supervision pole A Int32
LogInSupOpB Opening supervision pole B Int32
LogInSupOpC Opening supervision pole C Int32
LogInSupCl Closing supervision Int32
WearEna Breaker wear enabled NO/YES Boolean
OpIrtg Switching cycles at Ir. 100 1000000 1 Int32
OpIsc Switching cycles at Isc. 1 1000 1 Int32
Irsc Rated I short-circ.(A) 0.1 200 0.1 Float
AlmVal Maximun switching cycles 0 10000000 1 Float
Table 175 Operation monitoring settings in Breaker 2 (models with one current input)

ExTrTmm Trips exceeded window (min) 1 60 1 Int32
ExTrNum Maximum number of trips 0 500 1 Int32
OpMeTmms Mechanical opening T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
ClMeTmms Mechanical closing T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
NoOpDays Inactivity time (days) 0 10000 1 Int32
OpDisTmms Opening dispersion T (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
ClDisTmms Closing dispersion T (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
MaskEna Enable Events record 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean
SupType Supervision type 0 1 1 Internal/External Int32
LogInSupOpA Opening supervision pole A Int32
LogInSupOpB Opening supervision pole B Int32
LogInSupOpC Opening supervision pole C Int32
LogInSupCl Closing supervision Int32
WearEna Breaker wear enabled NO/YES Boolean
OpIrtg Switching cycles at Ir. 100 1000000 1 Int32
OpIsc Switching cycles at Isc. 1 1000 1 Int32
Irsc Rated I short-circ.(A) 0.1 200 0.1 Float
AlmVal Maximun switching cycles 0 10000000 1 Float

User Manual 278
BREAKER
Table 176 Breaker monitoring signals
Signal CBOU1 Signal CBOU2 Data Attribute

Phase A ki2 exceeded Br2 Phase A ki2 exceeded KI2 phsA
Phase B ki2 exceeded Br2 Phase B ki2 exceeded KI2 phsB
Phase C ki2 exceeded Br2 Phase C ki2 exceeded KI2 phsC
ki2 exceeded Br2 ki2 exceeded KI2 general
Maximum ki2 exceeded Br2 Maximum ki2 exceeded MaxKI2 general
Pole A mechan.time exceeded Br2 Pole A mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsA
Pole B mechan.time exceeded Br2 Pole B mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsB
Pole C mechan.time exceeded Br2 Pole C mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsC
Pole A electric time exceeded Br2 Pole A electric time exceeded ElecTmExc phsA
Pole B electric time exceeded Br2 Pole B electric time exceeded ElecTmExc phsB
Pole C electric time exceeded Br2 Pole C electric time exceeded ElecTmExc phsC
Pole A inactivity time exceeded Br2 Pole A inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsA
Pole B inactivity time exceeded Br2 Pole B inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsB
Pole C inactivity time exceeded Br2 Pole C inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsC
DispTmExc phsAB
AB dispersion time exceeded Br2 AB dispersion time exceeded
(DiTmExcAB in Ed2) (general in Ed2)
DispTmExc phsBC
BC dispersion time exceeded Br2 BC dispersion time exceeded
(DiTmExcBC in Ed2) (general in Ed2)
DispTmExc phsCA
CA dispersion time exceeded Br2 CA dispersion time exceeded
(DiTmExcCA in Ed2) (general in Ed2)
Pole A excessive nbr trips Br2 Pole A excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsA
Pole B excessive nbr trips Br2 Pole B excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsB
Pole C excessive nbr trips Br2 Pole C excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsC
Excessive nbr trips Excessive nbr trips Br2 PolTrExc general
Switch.cycles exceeded Br2 Switch.cycles exceeded SwCyExc phsA
Ph A Switch.cycles exceeded Br2 Ph A Switch.cycles exceeded SwCyExc phsB
Ph B Switch.cycles exceeded Br2 Ph B Switch.cycles exceeded SwCyExc phsC
Ph C Switch.cycles exceeded Br2 Ph C Switch.cycles exceeded SwCyExc general
Br. wear status Br2. wear status StEna stVal
Table 177 Monitoring signals in Breaker 2 (models with one current input)

Pole A mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsA
Pole B mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsB
Pole C mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsC
Pole A inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsA
Pole B inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsB
Pole C inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsC
AB dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc (DiTmExcAB in Ed2) phsAB (general in Ed2)
BC dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc (DiTmExcBC in Ed2) phsBC (general in Ed2)
CA dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc (DiTmExcCA in Ed2) phsCA (general in Ed2)
Pole A excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsA
Pole B excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsB
Pole C excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsC
Excessive nbr trips PolTrExc general

User Manual 279
BREAKER
Table 178 Breaker operation supervision measurements
Breaker 1 measurements (CBOU1) Breaker 1 measurements (CBOU2) Data Attribute

Ki2 accumulated ph.A B1 Ki2 accumulated ph.A B259 KI2A phsA
Ki2 accumulated ph.B B1 Ki2 accumulated ph.B B259 KI2A phsB
Ki2 accumulated ph.C B1 Ki2 accumulated ph.C B259 KI2A phsC
Max.Ki2 accumulated B1 Max.Ki2 accumulated B259 MaxKI2A general
T.electric opening Br.1 A T.electric opening Br.2 A59 ElOpnTmsA mag
T.electric opening Br.1 B T.electric opening Br.2 B59 ElOpnTmsB mag
T.electric opening Br.1 C T.electric opening Br.2 C59 ElOpnTmsC mag
T.mechanic opening Br.1 A T.mechanic opening Br.2 A MeOpnTmsA mag
T.mechanic opening Br.1 B T.mechanic opening Br.2 B MeOpnTmsB mag
T.mechanic opening Br.1 C T.mechanic opening Br.2 C MeOpnTmsC mag
T.opening dispersion Br.1 AB T.opening dispersion Br.2 AB DiOpnTmsAB mag
T.opening dispersion Br.1 BC T.opening dispersion Br.2 BC DiOpnTmsBC mag
T.opening dispersion Br.1 CA T.opening dispersion Br.2 CA DiOpnTmsCA mag
T.electric closing Br.1 A T.electric closing Br.2 A59 ElClsTmsA mag
T.electric closing Br.1 B T.electric closing Br.2 B59 ElClsTmsB mag
T.electric closing Br.1 C T.electric closing Br.2 C59 ElClsTmsC mag
T.mechanic closing Br.1 A T.mechanic closing Br.2 A MeClsTmsA mag
T.mechanic closing Br.1 B T.mechanic closing Br.2 B MeClsTmsB mag
T.mechanic closing Br.1 C T.mechanic closing Br.2 C MeClsTmsC mag
T.closing dispersion Br.1 AB T.closing dispersion Br.2 AB DiClsTmsAB mag
T.closing dispersion Br.1 BC T.closing dispersion Br.2 BC DiClsTmsBC mag
T.closing dispersion Br.1 CA T.closing dispersion Br.2 CA DiClsTmsCA mag
Inactive days Br.1 A Inactive days Br.2 A NoOpDayA mag
Inactive days Br.1 B Inactive days Br.2 B NoOpDayB mag
Inactive days Br.1 C Inactive days Br.2 C NoOpDayC mag
Max.dispersion opening 1 AB Max.dispersion opening 2 AB MaxDiOpAB mag
Max.dispersion opening 1 BC Max.dispersion opening 2 BC MaxDiOpBC mag
Max.dispersion opening 1 CA Max.dispersion opening 2 CA MaxDiOpCA mag
Max.dispersion closing 1 AB Max.dispersion closing 2 AB MaxDiClAB mag
Max.dispersion closing 1 BC Max.dispersion closing 2 BC MaxDiClBC mag
Max.dispersion closing 1 CA Max.dispersion closing 2 CA MaxDiClCA mag
Avg.dispersion opening 1 AB Avg.dispersion opening 2 AB MedDiOpAB mag
Avg.dispersion opening 1 BC Avg.dispersion opening 2 BC MedDiOpBC mag
Avg.dispersion opening 1 CA Avg.dispersion opening 2 CA MedDiOpCA mag
Avg.dispersion closing 1 AB Avg.dispersion closing 2 AB MedDiClAB mag
Avg.dispersion closing 1 BC Avg.dispersion closing 2 BC MedDiClBC mag
Avg.dispersion closing 1 CA Avg.dispersion closing 2 CA MedDiClCA mag
Avg.electric opening 1 A Avg.electric opening 2 A MedElOpAB mag
Avg.electric opening 1 B Avg.electric opening 2 B MedElOpBC mag
Avg.electric opening 1 C Avg.electric opening 2 C MedElOpCA mag
Avg.electric closing 1 A Avg.electric closing 2 A MedElClAB mag
Avg.electric closing 1 B Avg.electric closing 2 B MedElClBC mag
Avg.electric closing 1 C Avg.electric closing 2 C MedElClCA mag
Avg.mechanical opening 1 A Avg.mechanical opening 2 A MedMeOpAB mag
Avg.mechanical opening 1 B Avg.mechanical opening 2 B MedMeOpBC mag
Avg.mechanical opening 1 C Avg.mechanical opening 2 C MedMeOpCA mag
Avg.mechanical closing 1 A Avg.mechanical closing 2 A MedMeClAB mag
Avg.mechanical closing 1 B Avg.mechanical closing 2 B MedMeClBC mag
Avg.mechanical closing 1 C Avg.mechanical closing 2 C MedMeClCA mag
Max.electric opening 1 A Max.electric opening 2 A MaxElOpAB mag
Max.electric opening 1 B Max.electric opening 2 B MaxElOpBC mag
Max.electric opening 1 C Max.electric opening 2 C MaxElOpCA mag
Max.electric closing 1 A Max.electric closing 2 A MaxElClAB mag
Max.electric closing 1 B Max.electric closing 2 B MaxElClBC mag
Max.electric closing 1 C Max.electric closing 2 C MaxElClCA mag
Max.mechanical opening 1 A Max.mechanical opening 2 A MaxMeOpAB mag
Max.mechanical opening 1 B Max.mechanical opening 2 B MaxMeOpBC mag
Max.mechanical opening 1 C Max.mechanical opening 2 C MaxMeOpCA mag
59
Only available in models with six current inputs, that is two current inputs for each phase.

User Manual 280
BREAKER
Max.mechanical closing 1 A Max.mechanical closing 2 A MaxMeClAB mag

Max.mechanical closing 1 B Max.mechanical closing 2 B MaxMeClBC mag
Max.mechanical closing 1 C Max.mechanical closing 2 C MaxMeClCA mag
Br1 Pole wear A Br2 Pole wear A BrWear phsA
Br1 Pole wear B Br2 Pole wear B BrWear phsB
Br1 Pole wear C Br2 Pole wear C BrWear phsC
Table 179 Breaker monitoring commands

KI2 GLOBAL INIT DOrdki2In ctlVal
KI2 A INIT Dordki2InA ctlVal
KI2 B INIT Dordki2InB ctlVal
KI2 C INIT Dordki2InC ctlVal
OPEN INIT DordOpInit ctlVal
OPEN A INIT DordOpInA ctlVal
OPEN B INIT DordOpInB ctlVal
OPEN C INIT DordOpInC ctlVal
TRIP INIT DordTrInit ctlVal
TRIP A INIT DordTrInA ctlVal
TRIP B INIT DordTrInB ctlVal
TRIP C INIT DordTrInC ctlVal
CLOSE INIT DordClInit ctlVal
CLOSE A INIT DordClInA ctlVal
CLOSE B INIT DordClInB ctlVal
CLOSE C INIT DordClInC ctlVal
MAX CURRENT BREAK INIT DordImaxOp ctlVal
CURRENT LEVEL INIT DordILevel ctlVal
STATISTIC INIT DordStatIn ctlVal
52 TIME INIT Dord52Tin ctlVal
INACT DAYS INIT DordIDayIn ctlVal
RESET Supervision SupRst ctlVal
RESET Wear WearRst ctlVal
kI2 sum:
After the selected supervision start signal, the kI2 counter increases in accordance with the selected setting. The value of each
phase’s current is calculated in primary (CT ratio), as kA primary. There are a total of 3 counters (one for each phase). Additionally60, it
is available a counter of maximun kI2, where in each opening the maximum value of the three phases is used to calculate the ki2.
If it exceeds the set threshold (the treatment is pole to pole), a “Phase X Ki2 exceeded” signal is generated. While in this situation, the
corresponding signal is sent to control. The signals are:
❑ Phase X ki2 exceeded. Where X is the phase. It is independent for each phase.
❑ ki2 exceeded. One for all the phases.
❑ Maxki2 exceeded. Activated when the counter of maximun kI2 exceeds the set threshold.
In order to calculate the pole wear, the type of calculation wanted can be programmed from among kI2*t, kI2 and kI.
❑ If Ki2 is chosen, the kA2 are calculated with I as the current measured after exceeding the set timeout following the trip.
❑ If kI is chosen, only the sum of the currents in kA is calculated, with I as the current measured after exceeding the set timeout
following the trip.
❑ If Ki2 *t is chosen, the Ki2 /100 value is accumulated every 10ms, with I as the current measured after exceeding the set timeout
following the trip. The accumulation terminates when I<0.05 A.
Excessive number of trips:
It counts the trips produced in the time, generating a signal when the number of trips is higher than the programmed number during
the programmed time and changes to a definite trip. The time period is reset upon a manual closure. The counter may be reset to the
initial value at any moment by means of a command. The signals are:
60
Available from version 5.24.16.1 of firmware and 7.0.0.0 of ICD.

User Manual 281
BREAKER
❑ Pole X excessive nbr trips. Independent for each phase

❑ Excessive nbr trips. One for all the phases.
Open counter:
There are independent open and trip counters for each phase:
❑ The trip commands generated by the protection are considered trips.

❑ A breaker's changes from closed to open (including manual and trip openings) are considered openings.
There are 6 counters: 3 trip counters and 3 open counters. There is a reset command for each counter.
Closure counters:
There are independent closure counters for each phase. A breaker's changes from open to close are considered closures.
There is a reset command for each counter.
Operating time for electric opening and closure by pole:
They count the time elapsed from the activation of the selected supervision start signal unto its electric operation, measured with the
current:
❑ Trip time: The time elapsed from the open command until the detection of the absence of power.
❑ Closure time: The time elapsed from the closure command until the detection of the presence of power.
The open pole detector current threshold is used.
These times are compared with the threshold settings. Events are generated per pole when the thresholds are exceeded “Pole X
electric time exceeded”:
❑ If the time elapsed from the open command exceeds the setting “Electrical opening T (ms)”
❑ If the time elapsed from the closure command exceeds the setting “Electrical closing T (ms)”
The maximum and average opening and closing times are calculated since the "RESET Supervision" command57. When this command is
received, these times are reset to zero and the maximum and average time calculation for each pole begins.
Mechanical opening and closure operating time per pole:
They count the time elapsed from the activation of the selected supervision start signal unto its mechanical operation, detected in the
digital inputs status:
❑ Trip time: Indicates the time elapsed as of the opening command until the detection of the open pole by the digital input status.
❑ Closure time: Indicates the time elapsed as of the closure command until the detection of the closed pole by the digital input
status.
These times are compared with the threshold settings. Events are generated per pole when the thresholds are exceeded “Pole X
mechan.time exceeded”:
❑ If the time elapsed from the open command exceeds the setting “Mechanical opening T (ms)”
❑ If the time elapsed from the closure command exceeds the setting “Mechanical closing T (ms)”
The maximum and average opening and closing times are calculated since the "RESET Supervision" command 57. When this command is
received, these times are reset to zero and the maximum and average time calculation for each pole begins.
Opening and closure dispersion time for each pole pair:
They count the difference between the opening and closure times for every two poles. There are opening/closure counters for pole
pairs AB, BC and CA. The breaker status is determined by means of the digital input status.
These times are compared with the threshold settings. Events are generated per pole when the thresholds are exceeded “XY dispersion
time exceeded”:
❑ During the opening, a comparison is made with the "Opening dispersion T (ms)" setting.
❑ During the closure, a comparison is made with the "Closing dispersion T (ms)" setting.

User Manual 282
BREAKER
The available measurements are:
❑ T.opening dispersion Br.1 xy. Indicates the opening dispersion for each pair of poles in the last opening of the breaker.
❑ T.closing dispersion Br.1 xy. Indicates the closing dispersion for each pair of poles in the last closing of the breaker.
❑ Max.dispersion opening 1 xy. Indicates the maximum opening dispersion for each pair of poles since the "reset supervision"
command.
❑ Max.dispersion closing 1 xy. Indicates the maximum closing dispersion for each pair of poles since the "reset supervision"
command.
❑ Avg.dispersion opening 1 xy. Indicates the average opening dispersion for each pair of poles since the "reset supervision"
command.
❑ Avg.dispersion closing 1 xy. Indicates the average closing dispersion for each pair of poles since the "reset supervision" command.
Days of breaker inactivity without status change:
The days elapsed, since the last opening or closure of the breaker, are counted for each pole. Complete fractions of 24 hours since the
last action are considered. Partial periods of 24 hours are not accumulated, i.e., if 2 days and 20 hours have passed since the last action,
the counter will indicate 2 days. If at this point the time count is reset to zero, the 20 hours would be lost.
These counters are compared with the “Inactivity Time (days)” setting and an event is generated per pole in the event of it being
exceeded "Pole X inactivity time exceeded".
Last interrupted current:
The current value upon the trip is indicated per pole.
Maximum interrupted current:
The maximum current value measured at the moment of the trip is indicated per pole. The three poles can be reset to zero using the
reset command.
Breaker wear61
This function monitors the wear of the breaker based on the operations performed and the current cut. The higher the cut current, the
less operations are allowed.
In 52 ½ configurations, two breakers are monitored. In models, where there is only one current input the supervision is only performed
on breaker 1. In models, where there are two current inputs the supervision is performed on both breakers.
This function uses the data provided by the breaker manufacturer, to determine the wear with the number of operations and the
cut-off current.
61

User Manual 283
BREAKER
Figure 164 Operations- Cut current curve
The wear caused in each operation responds to the equation:
𝐼𝑟𝑡𝑔 𝛼
𝑜𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛_𝑤𝑒𝑎𝑟 = 𝑂𝑝𝐼𝑟𝑡𝑔 ∙ ( )
𝐼𝑠𝑐
where:
OpIrtg: Setting of maximum number of switching cycles at rated operating current.
Irtg: Rated current
Irsc: Short circuit rated current
Isc: Short circuit current

log( 𝑂𝑝𝐼𝑟𝑡𝑔)−log(𝑂𝑝𝐼𝑟𝑠𝑐)
α: The slope of the wear curve. 𝛼 = | |
log( 𝐼𝑟𝑡𝑔)−log(𝐼𝑟𝑠𝑐)
With each switching, the breaker wear increases with the wear of the operation with respect to the number of switching at the
nominal current.
𝑂𝑝𝐼𝑟𝑡𝑔
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙_𝑤𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑘 = 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙_𝑤𝑒𝐴𝑅𝑘−1 +
𝑜𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛_𝑤𝑒𝑎𝑟
The settings are shown in Table 174 and Table 175:
❑ Breaker wear enabled: “WearEna”. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not.
❑ Switching cycles at Ir.: “OpIrtg”. Maximum number of switching cycles at rated operating current.
❑ Switching cycles at Isc.: “OpIsc”. Maximum number of switching cycles at rated short circuit current.
❑ Rated I short-circ.(A): “Irsc”. Rated short circuit current in secondary amperes.
❑ Maximun switching cycles: “AlmVal”. Indicates the wear value for which the alarm signal is generated.
The signals are shown in Table 176:
❑ Ph A Switch.cycles exceeded. Activated when the pole A Maximun switching cycles are exceeded.
❑ Ph B Switch.cycles exceeded. Activated when the pole B Maximun switching cycles are exceeded.
❑ Ph C Switch.cycles exceeded. Activated when the pole C Maximun switching cycles are exceeded.
❑ Switch.cycles exceeded. Activated when Maximun switching cycles are exceeded in any pole.
❑ Br. wear status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Measurements are shown in Table 178:

User Manual 284
BREAKER
❑ Br1 Pole wear A. Indicates the percentage of accumulated wear of the pole A, considering 100% the number of switching cycles at
Ir
❑ Br1 Pole wear B. Indicates the percentage of accumulated wear of the pole B, considering 100% the number of switching cycles at Ir
❑ Br1 Pole wear C. Indicates the percentage of accumulated wear of the pole c, considering 100% the number of switching cycles at Ir
Each breaker has a command to reset the wear value:
❑ RESET Wear."WearRst" It resets the breaker wear values.

Overcurrent levels:
Indicates the time in seconds during which each phase's current is within each of the following ranges (with In as the set rated current):
❑ Seconds with the current between 2 and 5 times In

❑ Seconds with the current between 5 and 12.5 times In
❑ Seconds with the current between 12.5 and 20 times In
❑ Seconds with the current greater than 20 In
There are 12 counters (4 for each phase).
4.3 TRIP AND CLOSE CIRCUITS SUPERVISION
It monitors the circuits by pole, detecting any discontinuity with the breaker open and closed. It requires the assignment of the
monitoring inputs (the breaker circuit with open and closed breaker, the closure circuit with open and closed breaker).
Up to six trip circuits and three closure circuits can be monitored, using the number of digital inputs required.
Figure 165 Closure circuit monitoring Figure 165 shows an example of the wiring for the monitoring of the closure circuit. The wiring for
the trip circuit is similar.
When the breaker is closed, the contact “52a” contact is also closed. If there is continuity in the circuit, the input programmed as
“Close circuit 52 closed” is detected as closed. If there is no continuity, it is detected as open (circuit failure). On the other hand, the
input programmed as “Coil supervision 52 open” is detected as open; if it is detected as closed, it is considered a circuit failure 62.
When the breaker is open, the contact “52b” contact is also closed. If there is continuity in the circuit, the input programmed as “Close
circuit 52 open” is detected as closed. If there is no continuity, it is detected as open (circuit failure). On the other hand, the input
programmed as “Coil supervision 52 closed” is detected as open; if it is detected as closed, it is considered a circuit failure62.
The "close circuit failure" or "open circuit failure" signals are activated after the time set in "Closing supervision time (ms)" and
"Opening supervision time (ms)", respectively, after detection of the fault, if it remains after that time63.
This unit can be blocked if the breaker status is Undetermined. If the "Status 52a" and "Status 52b" inputs are configured and both are
deactivated, the coil fault is not generated64.
62
Available from firmware version X.X.24.0. In previous versions, this conditions was not considered as falilure.
63
In firmware versions prior to X.X.21.2 and ICD 8.11.0.0, the time is 20 seconds not configurable.
64
Available from firmware 9.5.27.2 and ICD 8.17.0.0.

User Manual 285
BREAKER
Figure 165 Closure circuit monitoring
The settings for the configuration of this unit are shown in Table 180:
❑ Trip circuit enabled: Enables the monitoring of the trip circuits.

❑ Close circuit enabled: Enables the monitoring of the closure circuits.
❑ Close circuit 52 open - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the closure circuit with the breaker open.
❑ Close circuit 52 closed - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the closure circuit with the breaker closed.
❑ Open circuit 52 open - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the trip circuit with the breaker open.
❑ Open circuit 52 closed - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the trip circuit with the breaker closed.
❑ Opening supervision time (ms)65. Timeout to give "open circuit failure".
❑ Closing supervision time (ms)65. Timeout to give "close circuit failure".
❑ Block with 52 undefined64. Enables the monitoring the unit block when the breaker status is undetermined, that is, 52a
and 52b inputs are deactivated.
❑ Node.
 PROT/RBCS1: breaker1's circuit supervision.
 PROT/RBCS2: breaker 2's circuit supervision.
 X trip coil failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the pole X trip coil.
 X closing coil failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the pole X closure coil.
 1 trip circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the trip coil of pole A1, B1 or C1.
 2 trip circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the trip coil of pole A2, B2 or C2.
 1 closing circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the closure coil of pole A1, B1 or C1.
 2 closing circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the closure coil of pole A2, B2 or C2.
 Coil alarm Br164. Indicates that there has been failure in any coil.
65
Available from firmware version X.X.21.2 and ICD 8.11.0.0.

User Manual 286
BREAKER
Table 180 Circuit supervision settings

TCEna Trip circuit enabled Boolean
CCEna Close circuit enabled Boolean
LogInCCOA1 Close circuit 52 open - A1 inref
LogInCCOB1 Close circuit 52 open - B1 inref
LogInCCOC1 Close circuit 52 open - C1 inref
LogInCCOA2 Close circuit 52 open - A2 inref
LogInCCOB2 Close circuit 52 open - B2 inref
LogInCCOC2 Close circuit 52 open - C2 inref
LogInCCCA1 Close circuit 52 closed - A1 inref
LogInCCCB1 Close circuit 52 closed - B1 inref
LogInCCCC1 Close circuit 52 closed - C1 inref
LogInCCCA2 Close circuit 52 closed - A2 inref
LogInCCCB2 Close circuit 52 closed - B2 inref
LogInCCCC2 Close circuit 52 closed - C2 inref
LogInTCOA1 Open circuit 52 open - A1 inref
LogInTCOB1 Open circuit 52 open - B1 inref
LogInTCOC1 Open circuit 52 open - C1 inref
LogInTCOA2 Open circuit 52 open - A2 inref
LogInTCOB2 Open circuit 52 open - B2 inref
LogInTCOC2 Open circuit 52 open - C2 inref
LogInTCCA1 Open circuit 52 closed - A1 inref
LogInTCCB1 Open circuit 52 closed - B1 inref
LogInTCCC1 Open circuit 52 closed - C1 inref
LogInTCCA2 Open circuit 52 closed - A2 inref
LogInTCCB2 Open circuit 52 closed - B2 inref
LogInTCCC2 Open circuit 52 closed - C2 inref
SpOpTmms65 Opening supervision time (ms) 0 100000 50 Int32
SPClTmms65 Closing supervision time (ms) 0 100000 50 Int32
BlkUnd64 Block with 52 undefined Boolean
Table 181 Coil monitoring outputs
RBCS1 Signals RBCS2 Signals Data Attribute

A1 trip coil failure A1 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC1 phsA
B1 trip coil failure B1 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC1 phsB
C1 trip coil failure C1 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC1 phsC
A2 trip coil failure A2 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC2 phsA
B2 trip coil failure B2 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC2 phsB
C2 trip coil failure C2 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC2 phsC
A1 closing coil failure A1 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC1 phsA
B1 closing coil failure B1 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC1 phsB
C1 closing coil failure C1 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC1 phsC
A2 closing coil failure A2 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC2 phsA
B2 closing coil failure B2 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC2 phsB
C2 closing coil failure C2 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC2 phsC
1 trip circuit failure 1 trip circuit failure Br2 FailTC1 general
2 trip circuit failure 2 trip circuit failure Br2 FailTC2 general
1 closing circuit failure 1 closing circuit failure Br2 FailCC1 general
2 closing circuit failure 2 closing circuit failure Br2 FailCC2 general
Coil alarm Br164 Coil alarm Br2 ColAlm stVal

User Manual 287
AUTOMATISMS 
5. AUTOMATISMS
The close command of the breaker can be manual close command or automatic (recloser):
❑ Three poles close command can be monitored by synchronism; while one pole close commands are not monitored by synchronism
❑ Manual close command can be monitored by synchronism
Receiving a manual close command, the status of the coupler is checked:
❑ If the coupler is selected, it is generated if the coupling conditions are met in the set time
❑ If the coupler is not selected, it is monitored by the synchronism function
5.1 SYNCHRONISM
The synchronism function or “Synchrocheck” waits for the appropriate conditions established in the settings, to determine breaker
closure, both manual and automatic.
Two voltage signals from the two sides of the breaker, which we will call side A and side B, are compared.
Side A corresponds to the voltage input selected with the setting “Side A Phase Select”. This setting selects the analogue input used.
The selection between ground to phase and phase to phase voltages is made with the setting “Operating Voltages” of the node TVTR.
With this setting a compensation factor is applied to equalize the module and the angle of the two voltages compared (side A and side
B).
Side B corresponds to the analogue voltage input connected to the synchronism voltage terminals.
Table 182 shows the settings of this function for undervoltage and synchronism:
❑ Enabled. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not. When enabled, the function tests the synchronism conditions. When
disabled, manual closure permission is granted, but automatic permission is refused.
❑ Side A phase Select: selectable between A/AB, B/BC or C/CA, corresponding to the measurement of the selected voltage
transformer. A/AB for transformer 10, B/BC for transformer 11 and C/CA for transformer 12.
❑ Compensation factor (Vs1): the factor by which the module is multiplied in order to equalize the voltages.
❑ Compensation angle (Vs1): the factor to be added to the angle in order to equalize the voltages.
❑ A-Side Voltage presence (V): the voltage measured in side A must exceed this value in order to consider that there is voltage on
that side of the breaker.
❑ A-Side Lack of Voltage (V): the voltage measured in side A must be lower than this value in order to consider that there is an
absence of voltage on that side of the breaker. It must be at least 5% less than Voltage presence.
❑ B-Side Voltage presence (V): the voltage measured in side B must exceed this value in order to consider that there is voltage on that
side of the breaker.
❑ B-Side Lack of Voltage (V): the voltage measured in side B must be lower than this value in order to consider that there is an
absence of voltage on that side of the breaker. It must be at least 5% less than Voltage presence.
❑ Autoreclose condition. Indicates the conditions for granting reclosing permission with undervoltage:
 Without permission: under no circumstances will the function grant undervoltage permission
 Not A and Yes B: there must be an absence of voltage on side A and presence of voltage on side B in order for the function to
grant undervoltage permission.
 Yes A and Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on side B and presence of voltage on side A in order for the function to
 Not A and Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on both sides of the breaker in order for the function to grant
undervoltage permission.
 Not A or Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on one of the sides of the breaker in order for the function to grant

User Manual 288
AUTOMATISMS 
 A xor B: there must be voltage presence on one side of the breaker and an absence on the other in order for the function to
 Not A: there must be an absence of voltage on side A in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on side B in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
❑ Manual closing condition. Indicates the conditions for granting manual closing permission with undervoltage:
 Without permission: under no circumstances will the function grant undervoltage permission
 Not A and Yes B: there must be an absence of voltage on side A and presence of voltage on side B in order for the function to
 Yes A and Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on side B and presence of voltage on side A in order for the function to
 Not A and Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on both sides of the breaker in order for the function to grant
 Not A or Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on one of the sides of the breaker in order for the function to grant
 A xor B: there must be voltage presence on one side of the breaker and an absence on the other in order for the function to
 Not A: there must be an absence of voltage on side A in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on side B in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
❑ Enabling of synchrocheck with reclosure:
 None: under no circumstances will the function grant synchronism permission.
 No compensation: comparisons between angles, modules and frequencies are taken into account to grant permission if the set
conditions are met during the programmed time
 With compensation: in addition to the module and frequency comparisons, breaker close time is taken into account. See
Figure 166.
 Zero compensation: a specific case of enabling with compensation and also taking into account that closure permission will be
granted when the angle difference is 0°. See Figure 166.
 Always.66 The function grants synchronism permission with present of voltage on both sides of the breaker.
❑ Enabling of synchrocheck with manual closure:
 None: under no circumstances will the function grant synchronism permission.
 No compensation: comparisons between angles, modules and frequencies are taken into account to grant permission if the set
conditions are met during the programmed time
 With compensation: in addition to the module and frequency comparisons, breaker closure time is taken into account. See
Figure 166.
 Zero compensation: a specific case of enabling with compensation and also taking into account that closure permission will be
granted when the argument difference is 0°. See Figure 166.
 Always.66 The function grants synchronism permission with present of voltage on both sides of the breaker.
❑ Breaker close time (s): taken into account when calculating the angle difference and providing that the enabling "with
compensation" has been programmed. In this case, the frequency slip is taken into account to compensate for this time.
❑ Voltage difference (V): the difference between the voltage modules on side A and side B must be less than this value in order for
permission to be granted.
❑ Frequency difference (Hz): the difference between the frequencies on side A and side B must be less than this value in order for
❑ Angle difference (º): the difference between the voltage angles on side A and side B must be less than this value in order for
❑ Slip threshold (Hz): if the difference between the frequencies in side A and side B is greater than this value there is frequency slip.
Otherwise, it is not considered frequency slip.67
66
67

User Manual 289
AUTOMATISMS 
❑ Sync.Time Man.closing(ms): the time during which the conditions for the granting of permission for closure must be met.
❑ Sync. Time Autoreclose(ms): the time during which the conditions for the granting of permission for reclosure must be met.
❑ Blocking input: logic input which, when active, blocks the function. When blocked, manual closure permission is granted, but
automatic permission is refused.
❑ Close blocking: logic input which, when active, blocks the breaker close permission (manual and automatic).
❑ Fuse failure signal: fuse failure logic input which, when active, blocks the breaker close permission (manual and recloser)
❑ A-Side Maximum V. (V)66. To fulfill the synchronism, the side A voltage must be greater than the “A-Side Voltage presence (V)”
setting and below the "A-Side Maximum V" setting. If they are set to the same value, the "A-Side Maximum V" is considered
200V.
❑ B-Side Maximum V. (V)66. To fulfill the synchronism, the side B voltage must be greater than the “B-Side Voltage presence (V)”
setting and below the "B-Side Maximum V" setting. If they are set to the same value, the "B-Side Maximum V" is considered
200V.
❑ A-Side V aux68. It selects the voltage that replaces the synchronization voltage on the A side when the logic input "Side A-V switch"
is activated. The options are:
 Not apply. The option is disabled.
 Vline. It selects the voltage input selected with the setting “Side A Phase Select”.
 Vs1. It selects the voltage input connected to the synchronism voltage terminals Vs1.
❑ Side A-V switch.68 Logic input which, when active, replaces the line voltage from side A with the one selected in "A-Side V aux".
When the voltage is switched, the compensation factors to be used are those corresponding to the selected voltage. The signal " A
Side V aux selected " is also activated.
❑ B-Side V aux. 68 It selects the voltage that replaces the synchronization voltage on the B side when the logic input " Side B-V switch"
is activated. The options are:
 Not apply. The option is disabled.
 Vline. It selects the voltage input selected with the setting “Side A Phase Select”.
❑ Side B-V switch.68 Logic input which, when active, replaces the line voltage from side B with the one selected in "B-Side V aux".
When the voltage is switched, the compensation factors to be used are those corresponding to the selected voltage. The signal “B
Side I1 V aux selected" is also activated.
The synchronism function can be disabled by means of a setting (“NO”). By means of a “fuse failure” or a “breaker closure permission
block” digital input both manual and automatic permission are refused.
When disabled, manual closure permission is granted but not automatic closure permission. In order to give closure permission when
enabled, the function contemplates the conditions that grant undervoltage permission or synchronism permission. If any of them
grants permission, closure permission is granted. Manual and automatic closure permissions are analysed independently.
❑ Undervoltage:
 When disabled undervoltage permission is refused.
 When enabled, undervoltage conditions are analysed. If undervoltage permission is granted, closure permission is granted,
independently of synchronism conditions.
❑ Synchronism: when undervoltage permission is not granted, synchronism conditions are analysed.
 When disabled synchronism permission is refused.
 When enabled, synchronism conditions are analysed.
The function has independent settings, commands and outputs:
❑ Node: PROT/RSYN1
❑ Settings and logical inputs: There are 6 settings tables. See Table 182.
68

User Manual 290
AUTOMATISMS 
❑ Commands:
 DOrdSyBlk1: Function block and unblocking. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 DOrdPeBlk1: Close permission block and unblock. Only acts when the function is enabled.

User Manual 291
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 182 Synchronism settings

SynEna Enabled NO/YES enum
SiASel Side A Phase Select A/AB, B/BC, C/CA enum
CoModVs1 Compensation factor (Vs1) 0.1 3 0.01 float
CoArgVs1 Compensation angle (Vs1) 0 330 30 float
PrVSiA A-Side Voltage presence (V) 10 200 0.1 float
AbVSiA A-Side Lack of Voltage (V) 10 200 0.1 float
BrClTmms1 Closing time (ms) 0 100000 10 float
None
No compensation
SyWReEna1 Sync. Enabled (AR) Zero compensation enum
With compensation
Always
None
No compensation
SyWMaClEna1 Sync. Enabled (Close) Zero compensation enum
With compensation
Always
SyDifV1 Voltage difference (V) 0 90 0.1 float
SyDifF1 Frequency difference(Hz) 0.01 5 0.01 float
SyDifA1 Angle difference (º) 0 360 1 float
SlThr Slip threshold (Hz) 0.01 0.5 0.01 float
ReTmms1 Sync. Time (Autoreclose) 0 100000 10 float
MaClTmms1 Sync.Time (Man.closing) 0 100000 10 float
PrVSiB1 B-Side Voltage presence (V) 10 200 0.1 float
AbVSiB1 B-Side Lack of Voltage (V) 10 200 0.1 float
Without permission
Not A and Yes B
Yes A and Not B
Not A and Not B
ClCond1 Manual closing condition enum
Not A or Not B
A xor B
Not A
Not B
Without permission
Not A and Yes B
Yes A and Not B
Not A and Not B
ReCond1 Autoreclose condition enum
Not A or Not B
A xor B
Not A
Not B
LogInBlSy1 Blocking input inref
LogInBlCl1 Close blocking inref
LogInRFF Fuse failure signal inref
MaxVSiA69 A-Side Maximum V. (V) 10 200 0.1 float
MaxVSiB69 B-Side Maximum V. (V) 10 200 0.1 float
Not apply
Vline
AuxVSiA A-Side V aux. enum
Vs1
Vs2
LogInSwA Side A-V switch inref
Not apply
Vline
AuxVSiB B-Side V aux. enum
Vs1
Vs2
LogInSwB Side B-V switch inref
69

User Manual 292
AUTOMATISMS 
Synchrocheck function signals (see Table 183).
❑ Enable Synchro Breaker 1: Indicates whether the function is enabled or not.

❑ V presence Va/Vab side A: indicates if the voltage on the phase A/AB of side A is greater than the setting “A-Side Voltage presence
(V)”
❑ V presence Vb/Vbc side A: indicates if the voltage on the phase B/BC of side A is greater than the setting “A-Side Voltage presence
(V)”.
❑ V presence Vc/Vca side A: indicates if the voltage on the phase C/CA of side A is greater than the setting “A-Side Voltage presence
(V)”.
❑ V presence ABC side A: indicates if the voltage of the three phases of side A is greater than the setting “A-Side Voltage presence
(V)”.
❑ V presence side B B1: indicates if the voltage on the side B is greater than the setting “B-Side Voltage presence (V)”.
❑ No Voltage Va/Vab side B: indicates if the voltage on the phase A/AB of side A is less than the setting “A-Side Voltage presence (V)”.
❑ No Voltage Vb/Vbc side B: indicates if the voltage on the phase B/BC of side A is greater than the setting “A-Side Voltage presence
(V)”.
❑ No Voltage Vc/Vca side B: indicates if the voltage on the phase C/CA of side A is greater than the setting “A-Side Voltage presence
(V)”.
❑ No Voltage ABC side A: indicates if the voltage of the three phases of side A is less than the setting “A-Side Voltage presence (V)”.
❑ No Voltage side B B1: indicates if the voltage on the side B is less than the setting “B-Side Voltage presence (V)”.
❑ A Side Maximun V exceeded 70: It indicates that the voltage on the A side is geater than the setting “A-Side Maximum V. (V)”.
❑ B Side I1 Maximun V exceeded70: It indicates that the voltage on the B side is geater than the setting “B-Side Maximum V. (V)”.
❑ A Side V aux selected 70. It indicates that the auxiliary voltage on the A side has been selected. This auxiliary voltage will be used as
the side A voltage of the synchronism unit.
❑ B Side I1 V aux selected 70. It indicates that the auxiliary voltage Vs1 on the B side has been selected. This auxiliary voltage will be
used as the side B voltage of the synchronism unit.
For the following signals, it is necessary that voltage presence is detected on both sides of the breaker:
❑ Positive slip Breaker 1: it is active if the frequency on the side B is also greater than that on side A by more than the setting.
❑ Negative slip Breaker 1: it is active if the frequency on the side A is also greater than that on side B by more than the setting.
❑ Underfrequency side B B1: it is active if the frequency difference of both sides exceeds the setting value and the frequency on side
A is greater than that on side B.
❑ Overfrequency side B B1: it is active if the frequency difference of both sides exceeds the setting value and the frequency on side B
is greater than that on side A.
❑ Delay without comp. side B 1: when the difference between the angles exceeds the setting value and is greater on side A than on
side B.
❑ Adv. without comp.side B B1: when the difference between the angles exceeds the setting value and is greater on side B than on
side A.
❑ Delay with comp. side B 1: when the difference between the angles, calculated by taking into account breaker closure time,
exceeds the setting value and is greater on side A than on side B.
❑ Advance with comp. side B 1: when the difference between the angles, calculated by taking into account breaker closure time,
exceeds the setting value and is greater on side B than on side A.
❑ Over Module side B B1: when the voltage difference is greater than the programmed setting and the voltage in B is greater than in
A.
❑ Under Module side B B1: when the voltage difference is greater than the programmed setting and the voltage in A is greater than in
B.
❑ Perm. without comp. B1: indicates that differences in voltage, angle and frequencies are lower than the corresponding settings.
70
Available since firmware version 6.0.18.2 and ICD 8.2.0.

User Manual 293
AUTOMATISMS 
❑ Perm. with comp. B1: when the necessary conditions related to the voltage, angle argument and frequencies differences are given,
taking into account the breaker closure time for calculating the angle argument difference.
❑ Perm. Manual Close V B1: Manual closure permission for voltage checks. It´s active when the undervoltage conditions are met.
❑ Permission Recloser V B1: Reclosure permission for voltage checks. It´s active when the undervoltage conditions are met.
❑ Perm. Manual Close B1: closure permission for undervoltage or for synchronism. It is active, due to compliance with the
undervoltage conditions or the synchronism conditions. If the function is disabled, manual closure permission will also be signalled.
❑ Perm. Reclose Br 1: reclosure permission for undervoltage or synchronism, so that the recloser decides on the automatic closure of
the breaker. It is actived, due to compliance with the undervoltage conditions or the synchronism conditions.
❑ Filtering sync 1 signals. 71 It is activated if the setting " Filter automatism signals ", of the PROT / LLN0 node, is set to YES and the
filter conditions are met.
SIGNAL FILTERING 71:
There is the option to filter signals and allow them only in certain situations, for this the setting " Filter automatism signals "
(FilSignal), of PROT/LLN0 node, must be set to YES
Filtered signals:
❑ Positive slip Breaker 1

❑ Negative slip Breaker 1
❑ Underfrequency side B B1
❑ Overfrequency side B B1
❑ Delay without comp. side B 1
❑ Adv. without comp.side B B1
❑ Delay with comp. side B 1
❑ Advance with comp. side B 1
❑ Over Module side B B1
❑ Under Module side B B1
❑ Perm. without comp. B1
❑ Perm. with comp. B1
❑ Perm. with 0 comp. B1
If the "Filter automatism signals" setting is YES, signals are always filtered, except:
❑ For 1 second after the breaker closes.

❑ After a manual command, until the close failure or synchro timeout occurs after manual close (whichever is longer).
❑ With recloser in cycle in progress.
The "Filtering sync 1 signals" signal is activated when the sync signals are filtered and not generated.
Table 183 Synchronism function outputs for breaker 1
Signal Data Atribute

Positive Slip Breaker 1 PosSlipBr1 stVal
Negative Slip Breaker 1 NegSlipBr1 stVal
Underfrequency side B B1 UFSideBBr1 stVal
Overfrequency side B B1 OFSideBBr1 stVal
Delay without comp. side B 1 DBNSlipBr1 stVal
71

User Manual 294
AUTOMATISMS 
Adv. without comp.side B B1 ABNSlipBr1 stVal

Delay with comp. side B B1 DBSlipBr1 stVal
Advance with comp. side B 1 ABSlipBr1 stVal
Over Module side B B1 OAbsBBr1 stVal
Under Module side B B1 UAbsBBr1 stVal
Perm. without comp. B1 PNoSlipBr1 stVal
Perm. with comp. B1 PSlip0Br1 stVal
Perm. Manual Close B1 PMCBr1 stVal
Perm. Close Recloser Br 1 PRecBr1 stVal
Perm. Manual Close V B1 PMClVChBr1 stVal
Permission Recloser V B1 PRecVChBr1 stVal
Permission with compens. 1 PSlipBr1 stVal
Enable Synchro Breaker 1 EnaBr1 stVal
V presence Va/Vab side A SAVPres phsA
V presence Vb/Vbc side A SAVPres phsB
V presence Vc/Vca side A SAVPres phsC
V presence ABC side A SAVPres general
No Voltage Va/Vab side A SAVAbs phsA
No Voltage Vb/Vbc side A SAVAbs phsB
No Voltage Vc/Vca side A SAVAbs phsC
No Voltage ABC side A SAVAbs general
Voltage presence side A SAPres stVal
No Voltage side A SAAbs stVal
V presence side B B1 SBVPresBr1 stVal
No Voltage side B B1 SBVAbsBr1 stVal
A Side Maximun V exceeded70 SAVExc stVal
B Side I1 Maximun V exceeded70 SBVExcBr1 stVal
A Side V aux selected70 AuxASel stVal
B Side I1 V aux selected70 AuxVs1Sel stVal
Filtering sync 1 signals 71 FilSign1 general
5.1.1 Undervoltage permission

Permission is granted if there is voltage on one or on both sides of the breaker. In order to verify whether there is no voltage
present on one side of the breaker, the voltage measured is checked to see whether it is lower than the programmed value (see
Table 182).
The detection of the presence or the absence of voltage is always done in all the phases. However, the analysis of the conditions for
granting or refusing breaker close permission is only carried out if the function is enabled.
5.1.2 Synchronism permission

Synchronism permission is given when following conditions indicated by the corresponding setting are simultaneously fulfilled
during a programmable time. These conditions are based on the comparison of voltage modules, phases and frequency on both
sides of the breaker. The analysis is performed whenever there is voltage on both sides of the breaker and it is below the maximum
voltage setting.

User Manual 295
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 166 Synchronism check with compensation
If “Sync. Enabled” is selected “with compensation”, the frequency slip is used to compensate the breaker closing time:
ϕUB (with compensation) =ϕUB + ωslip·TCB
∆ϕ with compensation =ϕUB (with compensation) -ϕUA
In which:
Frequency slip ∆f=fB-fA (Hz)
Slip speed ωslip=∆f·360º (º/s)
Breaker closure time TCB (s)
To consider the slip frequency difference must exceed the "Slip threshold (Hz)" setting.
If this angle difference decreases when the “Sync. Enabled” is set with compensation and closure in 0º, the condition for granting
permission will be:
|∆ϕ with compensation|=0
If the angle difference is increasing, the following must be met:
|∆ϕ with compensation|<angle difference setting
When the “Sync. Enabled” is set with compensation, in order for permission to be granted the difference must be around 0º, the
following must be met:
Synchronism function measurements available in the unit status:
❑ Module, angle, frequency of the voltage on side A.

❑ Module, angle, frequency of the voltage on side B.
❑ The difference between the module, angle, frequency of the voltage on side A and side B. They are only available when
the voltage presence conditions are met on both sides.
5.1.3 Two breakers application

It is available an independent synchronism function for a second breaker.
As in the first breaker, this unit has function to check the presence of voltage on both sides of the breaker, and the test of the
synchronism conditions to give close permission.
The side A voltage is the same for both synchronisms, so the same voltage and settings are used (“Side A phase Select”,
“Compensation factor (Vs1)” and “Compensation angle (Vs1)”).

User Manual 296
AUTOMATISMS 
The side B voltage is the Vs2 (V synchronism 2).
When “Side A-Vs1 selection” signal is activated, the side A voltage corresponds to the analogue voltage input connected to the
synchronism voltage terminals (Vs1) and side B voltage to the Vs2 (V synchronism 2).
For breaker and a half applications, with closing sequence reclosing "Brk1 then Brk2" or " Brk2 then Brk1" the setting "Autoreclose
condition" depends on the state of the breaker, so that if the first breaker of the sequence is blocked, the second breaker uses the
first breaker´s setting . For example, with "Brk1 then Brk2" if breaker 1 is blocked , it will not be close command of that breaker, so
the "Autoreclose condition" of the second breaker ( RSYN2 ) will use the setting of the first breaker ( RSYN1 ).
The function has independent settings, commands and outputs for the second breaker. The meaning of these data is the same as
the first breaker.
❑ Node: PROT/SECRSYN1
❑ Outputs: Table 184 shows the function’s output data. They are similar to the first breaker, but for the second.
Table 184 Synchronism function outputs for breaker 2
Signal Data Atribute

Positive Slip Breaker 2 PosSlipBr2 stVal
Negative Slip Breaker 2 NegSlipBr2 stVal
Underfrequency side B B2 UFSideBBr2 stVal
Overfrequency side B B2 OFSideBBr2 stVal
Delay without comp. side B 2 DBNSlipBr2 stVal
Adv. without comp. side B B2 ABNSlipBr2 stVal
Delay with comp. side B B2 DBSlipBr2 stVal
Advance with comp. side B 2 ABSlipBr2 stVal
Over Module side B B 2 OAbsBBr2 stVal
Under Module side B B2 UAbsBBr2 stVal
Perm. without comp. B2 PNoSlipBr2 stVal
Perm. with comp.B2 PSlip0Br2 stVal
Perm. Manual Close B2 PMCBr2 stVal
Perm. Close Recloser B2 PRecBr2 stVal
Perm. Manual Close V B 2 PMClVChBr2 stVal
Perm. Recloser V B2 PRecVChBr2 stVal
Permission with compens. 2 PSlipBr2 general
Enable Synchro Breaker 2 EnaBr2 general (stVal in Ed2)
Voltage presence side B B2 SBVPresBr2 general (stVal in Ed2)
No Voltage side B B2 SBVAbsBr2 general (stVal in Ed2)
B Side I2 Maximun V exceeded70 SBVExc2 stVal
B Side I2 V aux selected70 AuxVs2Sel stVal

User Manual 297
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 185 Synchronism settings for breaker 2

SynEna Enabled NO/YES enum
CoModVs2 Compensation factor (Vs1) 0.1 3 0.01 float
CoArgVs2 Compensation angle (Vs1) 0 330 30 float
BrClTmms2 Closing time (ms) 0 10000 10 float
No, Without compensation,
With compensation (0º),
SyWReEna2 Sync. Enabled (AR) enum
With compensation
Always
No, Without compensation,
With compensation (0º),
WMaClEna2 Sync. Enabled (Close) enum
With compensation
Always
SyDifV2 Voltage difference (V) 0 90 0.1 float
SyDifF2 Frequency difference(Hz) 0.01 2 0.01 float
SyDifA2 Angle difference (º) 0 360 1 float
SlThr Slip threshold (Hz) 0.01 0.5 0.01 float
MaClTmms2 Sync. Time (Autoreclose) 0 10000 10 float
ReTmms2 Sync.Time (Man.closing) 0 10000 10 float
PrVSiB2 B-Side Voltage presence(V) 0 200 0.1 float
AbVSiB2 B-Side Lack of Voltage (V) 0 200 0.1 float
Without permission
Not A and Yes B
Yes A and Not B
Not A and Not B
ClCond2 Manual closing condition enum
Not A or Not B
A xor B
Not A
Not B
Without permission
Not A and Yes B
Yes A and Not B
Not A and Not B
ReCond2 Autoreclose condition enum
Not A or Not B
A xor B
Not A
Not B
LogInBlSy2 Blocking input inref
LogInBlCl2 Close blocking inref
LogInRFF Fuse failure signal inref
MaxVSiB272 B-Side Maximum V. (V) 10 200 0.1 float
Not apply
Vline
AuxVSiB B-Side V aux. enum
Vs1
Vs2
LogInSwB Side B-V switch inref
72

User Manual 298
AUTOMATISMS 
5.1.4 Application auxiliary voltage

Two examples of application and use of auxiliary voltages according to configuration are shown.
Double busbar configuration
Figure 167 Double busbar
In double busbar configuration, there is only one breaker and the synchronism unit 1 (RSYN1) is used.
The side A voltage is independent of the disconnectors, but the side B voltage depends on the disconnector. When 89_1 is closed,
Vs1 is used, but when it is opened Vs2 is used. It affects the voltage (module and argument) and frequency used in the synchronism
function. The settings could be:
❑ A-Side V aux: Not apply

❑ Side A-V switch: Not asigned
❑ B-Side V aux: Vs2
❑ Side B-V switch: disconnector Status 89_1 opened
The synchronism function (undervoltage and synchronism) depends on the disconnector status:
❑ Disconnector Status 89_1 closed. The voltage selected on the A side is compared with the voltage of the input Vs1.
❑ Disconnector Status 89_1 opened. The voltage selected on the A side is compared with the voltage of the input Vs2.

User Manual 299
AUTOMATISMS 
52 ½ Configuration
Figure 168 52 ½
In 52 ½busbar configuration, there are two breakers and both units of synchronism unit 1 are used (RSYN1 and SEC/RSYN).
With the disconnector closed, the synchronism units use:
❑ RSYN1. It compares side A voltage with Vs1.

❑ SEC/RSYN1. It compares side A voltage with Vs2.
With the disconnector open, both synchronism units compare Vs1 with Vs2.
The settings could be:
❑ RSYN1
 A-Side V aux: Vs1
 Side A-V switch: disconnector Status 89_1 opened
 B-Side V aux: Vs2
 Side B-V switch: disconnector Status 89_1 opened
❑ SEC/RSYN1
 B-Side V aux. Not apply
 Side B-V switch. Not asigned

User Manual 300
AUTOMATISMS 
5.2 COUPLER
The function generates a close command, to allow coupling of two net sections separated by a breaker.
When the coupler is selected, the manual closing commands are monitored with the coupler; while otherwise they are monitored with
synchronism.
The coupler is selected when:
❑ The setting “Enabled” is set to “YES”.

❑ There is a Coupler selection order with a pulse in the logical input “Coupler selection Order” or with the command “Coupler
selection”.
The coupler is deactivated when:
❑ The setting “Enabled” is set to “NO”.

❑ There is a Coupler deselection order with a pulse in the logical input “Coupler deselection” or with the command “Coupler
deselection”.
❑ A close command has been generated by the coupler.
❑ The time “Coupling Max.Time (s)” has finished without meeting the closing conditions.
From firmware version 6.0.18.0 and ICD 8.1.0.14, the "Permanent selection" setting is added. If the "Permanent selection" setting is
ON, it remains indefinitely selected until there is a no selection command or coupling is disabled.
With the coupler selected, the coupler function starts when the following conditions are fulfilled:
❑ There is a manual close command. (Not recloser).

❑ There is voltage presence on both sides of the breaker.
Once the coupler starts, a time counter is started during which the function will give the closing command, if the coupling conditions
according to the operating mode are met.
If close breaker commnad is set or setting time “Coupling Max.Time (s)” is over then coupler goes to not selected state, if the
“Permanent selection” setting is NO.
If being started, the cancellation order is received either by pulse at the logical input or by commnad, the coupling is still selected but it
does not generate the closing command.
The voltages used is Vs1 and the voltage set in “Side A Phase Select” setting in synchronism. The frequency slip use the set of the
synchronism function.
There are two running modes: loop mode and coupler mode.
LOOP MODE
This mode is set if there is voltage presence on both sides of breaker and frequency difference is less than the setting “Slip threshold
(Hz)”.
In this case the breaker closure command is set if coupler conditions are fulfilled:
❑ Voltage difference is less than “Voltage difference (V)” setting.

❑ Angle difference is less than “Angle difference (º)” setting.
❑ Frequency difference is less than “Frequency difference (Hz)” setting.
When the close breaker command is set; if the “Permanent selection” setting is “NO” the coupler goes to “not selected” status.
COUPLER MODE
This mode is set if there is voltage presence on both sides of breaker and frequency difference is more than the setting “Slip threshold
(Hz)”.

User Manual 301
AUTOMATISMS 
In this case the breaker closure order is set if coupler conditions are confirmed:
❑ Voltage difference is less than “Voltage difference (V)” setting.

❑ Frequency difference is less than “Frequency difference (Hz)” setting.
❑ The angle difference fulfills the conditions of closing with compensation. The angle difference is calculated based on frequency slip
and “Breaker close time (s)” setting.
The closing condition depends on the frequency slip:
❑ In loop mode (frequency difference is less than the setting “Slip threshold (Hz)”), the angle difference must be less than “Angle
difference (º)” setting.
❑ In coupler mode, the frequency slip and the breaker closing time are used to calculate the angle condition:
ϕUB (with compensation) =ϕUB + ωslip·TCB
∆ϕ (with compensation) =ϕUB (with compensation) - ϕUA
Where,
Frequency slip ∆f=fB-fA (Hz)
Slip speed ωslip=∆f·360º (º/s)
Breaker closure time TCB (s)
If this angle difference decreases, the condition for order breaker closure will be:
|∆ϕ with compensation|=0
If the angle difference is increasing, the following condition must be met:
Figure 141 Coupler angle calculation.
Table 154 shows settings:
❑ Enabled
 YES: coupler function is activated.
 NO: coupler function is desactivated.
❑ Voltage difference (V): the difference between the voltage modules on side A and side B must be less than this value in
order for breaker closure command is set.

User Manual 302
AUTOMATISMS 
❑ Frequency difference (Hz): the difference between the frequencies on side A and side B must be less than this value in
order breaker closure command is set
❑ Angle difference (º): the difference between the voltage angles on side A and side B must be less than this value in order
for breaker closure command is set
❑ Coupling Max.Time (s): maximum time during which the conditions must be met.
❑ Breaker close time (s): taken into account when calculating the angle difference, the frequency slip is taken into account
to compensate for this time.
❑ Permanent selection73: set to YES, it remains indefinitely selected until there is a non-selection command or coupler
function is desactivated.
The function has independent settings, commands and outputs:
❑ Node: PROT/RCOU1
❑ Settings and logical inputs: There are 6 settings tables.
❑ Commands:
 Coupler selection Order: if this signal is set, then the coupler changes to selected state to start evaluating coupler
conditions.
 Coupler deselecting: if this signal is set then the coupler changes to unselected state, it stops evaluating coupler
conditions.
 Coupler cancelation: if this signal is set then, the breaker closure command is blocked, the coupler remains in selected
state.
❑ Outputs: Table 183 Synchronism function outputs shows function outputs.
 Enable coupling B1: If it is set, the coupler is enabled.
 Acting Coupling B1. If it is set, the coupler is selected and acting.
 Coupling not selected B1: If it is set, the coupler is not selected.
 Coupling cancelled time B1: If it is set, the coupler is not acting due to override maximum elapsed time.
 Coupling UnderF. side B B1: it is active if the frequency difference of both sides exceeds the setting value and the
frequency on side A is greater than that on side B.
 Coupling OverF. side B B1: it is active if the frequency difference of both sides exceeds the setting value and the
frequency on side B is greater than that on side A.
 Couple Delay with comp. B B1. side B 1: when the difference between the angles exceeds the setting value and is
greater on side A than on side B.
 Co -U Advance with comp. B B1: when the difference between the angles exceeds the setting value and is greater on
side B than on side A.
 Coupling Over Module side B B1: when the voltage difference is greater than the programmed setting and the voltage
in B is greater than in A.
 Coupling Under Module B B1: when the voltage difference is greater than the programmed setting and the voltage in A
is greater than in B.
 Perm. Coup. without comp. B1: indicates that differences in voltage, angle and frequencies are lower than the
corresponding settings.
 Perm. Coup. with comp. B1: when the necessary conditions related to the voltage, angle argument and frequencies
differences are given, taking into account the breaker closure time for calculating the angle argument difference.
 Close order Coupling B1: It´s active when the coupler conditions are met.
73

User Manual 303
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 186 Coupler settings.

CoEna Enabled 0 1 1 NO / YES enum
CoDifV Voltage difference (V) 0 90 0.1 float
CoDifF Frequency difference (Hz) 0.01 5 0.01 float
CoDifA Angle difference (º) 0 180 1 float
CoTms Coupling Max.Time (s) 0 20 1 float
LogInSeCo Coupler selection Order int32
LogInNoSe Coupler deselection int32
LogInCaCo Coupler cancelation int32
BrClTmms1 Closing time (ms) 0 100000 10 int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 NO / YES enum
PerSel74 Permanent selection 0 1 1 NO / YES enum
Table 187 Coupler Outputs
signal Data Attribute

Enable coupling B1 StEna stVal
Acting Coupling B1 Work stVal
Coupling not selected B1 NoSelect stVal
Coupling cancelled time B1 TmExcCancl stVal
Coupling UnderF. side B B1 UFSideB stVal
Coupling OverF. side B B1 OFSideB stVal
Couple Delay with comp. B B1 DelayBSlip stVal
Co -U Advance with comp. B B1 AdvBSlip stVal
Coupling Over Module B B1 OAbsB stVal
Coupling Under Module B B1 UAbsB stVal
Perm. Coup. without comp. B1 PermNoSlip stVal
Perm. Coup. with comp. B1 PermSlip stVal
Close order Coupling B1 CloseOrd stVal
5.2.1 Two breakers application

It is available an independent coupler function for a second breaker.
As in the first breaker, this unit has function to check the presence of voltage on both sides of the breaker, and the test of the
coupler conditions.
The voltages used are Vs2 and the voltage set in “Side A Phase Select” setting.
The function has independent settings, commands and outputs for the second breaker. The meaning of these data is the same as
the first breaker.
❑ Node: PROT/RCOU2
❑ Outputs: Table 184 shows the function’s output data. They are similar to the first breaker, but for the second one.
74

User Manual 304
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 188 Coupler settings breaker 2

CoEna Enabled 0 1 1 YES/NO enum
CoDifV Voltage difference (V) 0 90 0.1 float
CoDifF Frequency difference (Hz) 0.01 5 0.01 float
CoDifA Angle difference (º) 0 180 1 float
CoTms Coupling Max.Time (s) 0 20 1 float
LogInSeCo Coupler selection Order int32
LogInNoSe Coupler deselection int32
LogInCaCo Coupler cancelation int32
BrClTmms1 Closing time (ms) 0 100000 10 int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 YES/NO enum
PerSel Permanent selection 0 1 1 NO / YES enum
Table 189 Coupler Outputs Breaker 2

Enable coupling B2 StEna stVal
Acting Coupling B2 Work stVal
Coupling not selected B2 NoSelect stVal
Coupling cancelled time B2 TmExcCancl stVal
Coupling UnderF. side B B2 UFSideB stVal
Coupling OverF. side B B2 OFSideB stVal
Couple Delay with comp. B B2 DelayBSlip stVal
Co -U Advance with comp. B B2 AdvBSlip stVal
Coupling Over Module B B2 OAbsB stVal
Coupling Under Module B B2 UAbsB stVal
Perm. Coup. without comp. B2 PermNoSlip stVal
Perm. Coup. with comp. B2 PermSlip stVal

User Manual 305
AUTOMATISMS 
5.3 RECLOSER
The unit allows up to 4 reclosures to be effected. The first one can be single-pole or three-pole, but the next 3 must be three-pole. In
order to make the recloser as useful as possible, the number of reclosures allowed is programmable (0 is not permitted).
There are different close times for each of the closures and for the first single-pole or three-pole.
The recloser is put into service – out of service by means of a setting. Only when enabled by setting can it be put into service-out of
service by means of a command via communications or the keyboard.
Programmable reclaim time following manual closure and following automatic closure.
The 4 closure counters (total, first, second, third and fourth closures) are stored in non-volatile memory and can be viewed in the
console and on the display. These counters can be set to 0 by command or by the keyboard.
The closure cycle can be started either by the unit's own protection trips or by external trips from other protections.
The main recloser statuses are:
❑ Supervising status.
This is the normal status, during which the recloser “monitors” for the occurrence of any trips. If any trip occurs, the recloser is
activated.
❑ Ongoing cycle status.

The status of the recloser while activated, from the first trip up to the closure of the breaker and the elapse of the reclaim time
(successful reclosure), or until all the programmed reclosures have been unsuccessfully executed. In the first case, the recloser
switches to “supervising” and, in the second, to “definitive trip”.
❑ Definitive trip status.

The recloser’s final situation once it has run all the programmed attempts and the breaker remains open due to the existence of a
permanent fault. It only leaves this status when the breaker is closed manually.
❑ Internal block status.

The status is reached as a result of different causes. The reclosure cycle cannot be started nor can the termination of the cycle be
provoked if the cycle is running. It is cancelled by a breaker closure.
Definitions:
❑ Reclosable units.
These units are capable of initiating the reclosure process. By default, they are overcurrent or distance units. The non-reclosable
units are those whose trips do not initiate the reclosure cycle (voltage, frequency, power units, etc). There is an input “External
trip” that can be one pole or three poles.
❑ Trips permitted following reclosure.

Each of the units that are blocked during the reclaim time following each reclosure are programmed by means of "YES" or "NO".
5.3.1 Settings, signals and commands

The general settings used in the recloser (PROT/ZRREC node) are (see Table 190):

❑ Reclose mode. Indicates the reclose mode between:
 1 Pole. It allows a single closure only if the first trip is single-pole. In any other case, it gives a definitive trip.
 3 Pole. It allows as many closures as there are programmed in the number of closures before giving the final trip. It
forces all trips to be three-pole.

User Manual 306
AUTOMATISMS 
 1P/3P. It allows as many closures as there are programmed in the number of closures before giving the final trip. The
first closure will be single-pole if the first trip was single-pole and three-pole if it was three-pole. All other closures of
the cycle will be three-pole.
 Dependent. If the first trip is single-pole, it allows as many closures as there are programmed in the number of
closures before giving the final trip; while if the first trip is three-pole, it only allows one closure.
 Configurable:75 The Reclose mode is selected with the logical inputs or commands: “Enable/Disable 1P mode” and
“Enable/Disable 3P mode”. When no option is selected, the recloser is blocked.
❑ Reclose number. Indicates the maximum number allowed before the issue of the definitive trip.
❑ 3 Pole Reclose 1 time (s). This is the timeout following the first three-pole trip until the recloser issues a closure command
❑ 1 Pole Reclose 1 time (s). This is the timeout following the first single-pole trip until the recloser issues a closure
command
❑ Reclose 2 time (s). This is the timeout following the three-pole trip until the recloser issues the second closure command
❑ Reclose 3 time (s). This is the timeout following the three-pole trip until the recloser issues the third closure command
❑ Reclose 4 time (s). This is the timeout following the three-pole trip until the recloser issues the fourth closure command
❑ Time after man. closing(s). Reclaim time following manual closure. The time following the manual closure of the breaker,
during which the existence of a protection trip is monitored. In such a case, a definitive trip is triggered instead of a
change to supervising status.
❑ Reclaim time Ph-Ph (s). Reclaim time following automatic closure following three-pole trip. This is the time following the
automatic closure of the breaker due to a three-pole trip, during which the existence of a protection trip is monitored. In
such a case, the cycle is continued instead of a change to supervising status.
❑ Reclaim time ground (s). Reclaim time following automatic closure following single-pole trip. This is the time following the
automatic closure of the breaker due to a single-pole trip, during which the existence of a protection trip is monitored. In
such a case, the cycle is continued instead of a change to supervising status.
❑ Incomplete sequence. Indicates whether the incomplete sequence function is enabled or not.
❑ Incomplete sequence T (s). Indicates the maximum time for the completion of the reclosure process.
❑ 79 Blocking level input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the recloser. The recloser must be enabled by
setting; on the other hand this input is not available.
❑ 79 Blocking pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated, blocks the
recloser. The recloser must be enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is not available. Since firmware version
5.18.15.5, if recloser is blocked by pulse, when the input is set “Not assigned”, the recloser is unblocked.
❑ 79 Unblock pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated, unblocks
the recloser. The recloser must be enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is not available.
❑ Pause+Reset AR time input. Selects the signal which, when active, restarts the closure time.
❑ Pause input. Selects the signal which, when active, stops the closure time.
❑ Autoreclose sequence reset. Selects the signal which, when active, restarts the closure process. If the breaker is open,
“Recloser Lock 52 open” is activated and waits for it to be closed. If it is close, “Recloser Lock manual closing” is activated.
In any case, once closed, it waits for the reclaim time following manual closure to return to supervising status.
❑ On line pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated, the recloser
goes to “On service”. The recloser must be enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is not available.
❑ Out of line pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated, the recloser
goes to “Out of service”. The recloser must be enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is not available. Since
firmware version 5.18.15.5, if recloser is Out of line by pulse, when the input is set “Not assigned”, the recloser is On line.
❑ Enable 1P mode75. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated, enables the 1P
mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is "Configurable". The recloser mode will be:
 "1 Pole" when the 3P mode is not selected
 "1P/3P" when the 3P mode is not selected
❑ Disable 1P mode 75. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated, disable the 1P
75

User Manual 307
AUTOMATISMS 
 "3 Pole" when the 3P mode is selected

 "Blocked" when the 3P mode is not selected
❑ Enable 3P mode 75. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated, enables the 3P
 "3 Pole" when the 1P mode is not selected
 "1P/3P " when the 1P mode is selected
❑ Disable 3P mode 75. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated, disable the 3P
 "1 Pole" when the 1P mode is selected
 "Blocked" when the 1P mode is not selected
Table 190 General recloser settings

RecEna Enabled 0 1 1 NO/YES Enum
1 Pole
3 Pole
RecTyp Reclose mode 0 3 1 1P/3P Enum
Dependent
Configurable
UseCyc Reclose number 1 4 1 Int32
Rec1PhTms 3 Pole Reclose 1 time (s) 0,05 600 0,01 float
Rec2PhTms Reclose 2 time (s) 1 600 1 float
Rec1GTms 1 Pole Reclose 1 time (s) 0,05 600 0,01 float
PReSe3Tms Reclaim time Ph-Ph (s) 1 600 1 float
PReSe1Tms Reclaim time ground (s) 1 600 1 float
MaClSeTms Time after man. closing(s) 1 600 1 float
BlInSecEna Incomplete sequence 0 1 1 NO/YES enum
BlInSecTms Incomplete sequence T (s) 1 600 1 float
LogInReLB 79 Blocking level input inref
LogInRePB 79 Blocking pulse input inref
LogInRePUb 79 Unblock pulse input inref
LogInTmRst Pause+Reset AR time input inref
LogInTmPau Pause input inref
LogInRst Autoreclose sequence reset inref
LogInRPOn On line pulse input inref
LogInRPOff Out of line pulse input inref
LogIn1POn Enable 1P mode inref
LogIn1POff Disable 1P mode inref
LogIn3POn Enable 3P mode inref
LogIn3POff Disable 3P mode inref
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 NO/YES Boolean
The general settings used for the supervising for synchronism (PROT/RLSS1 node) are (see Table 191):
❑ Synchrocheck type. Indicates whether the synchronism is internal or external.

❑ Check 3 pole first reclose. Three-phase closure 1 monitoring. Indicates whether the first closure is to be monitored with
synchronism.
❑ Check rest of autorecloses. Monitoring remaining closures. Indicates whether the closures other than the first are to be
monitored with synchronism.
❑ Sync. Delay Time (s). Synchronism timeout. This is the maximum time waited before the synchronism grants permission
before a three-phase closure. If closure permission is granted before the conclusion of this time, a closure command is
issued. On the other hand, if this time elapsed without permission being granted, a definitive trip is triggered.

User Manual 308
AUTOMATISMS 
❑ External syncro. Permission. Logical external synchronism permission logic. Selects the signal which, when active,
indicates the existence of permission for synchronism.
Table 191 Monitoring by synchronism settings

SynTyp Synchrocheck type Internal/External enum
Rec1SyEna Check 3pole first reclose NO/YES Boolean
RecSyEna Check rest of autorecloses NO/YES Boolean
SyWaTms Sync. Delay Time (s) 0.05 600 0.01 float
LogInExSy External syncro. Permission inref
The settings used for the monitoring by reference voltage (PROT/RVRS1 node) are (see Table 192):

❑ Delay time (s). This is the time, following the opening of the breaker that is waited for the activation of the reference
voltage signal to allow the reclosure. It is used to wait for the activation of an external signal before allowing a reclosure.
E.g., to wait for the line voltage to disappear following a trip (e.g., if there were motors or batteries connected) before
reconnecting the line.
❑ Minimum time (s). This is the minimum time during which the vref signal must be seen to be active in order to consider
the existence of reference voltage.
❑ Reference Voltage input. Logical Vref input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the existence of reference
voltage (Vref).
Table 192 Monitoring by Vref settings

VrefEna Enabled NO/YES enum
VrefWaTms Delay time (s) 0.05 600 0.01 float
VrefMinTms Minimum time (s) 0.05 600 0.01 float
LogInVref Reference Voltage input inref
Table 193 shows the output signal of the monitoring by reference voltage (PROT/RVRS1 node):
❑ Presence of Vref. Indicates the presence of reference voltage.

❑ Blocked without Vref. Indicates blocking by absence of reference voltage.
Table 193 Monitoring by Vref outputs

Presence of Vref PresVref general
Blocked without Vref BlkVref general
The setting used for blocking a closure due to a failure in the breaker’s coils (PROT/RTCS1 node) is (see Table 194):
❑ Block by Coil failure. Indicates whether the recloser blocking by failure in the breaker’s coils is enabled or not.
Table 194 Closure block settings

ClBlTCF Block by Coil failure NO/YES Boolean
Signals
The recloser’s output signals are in the PROT/ZRREC1 node and are shown in Table 195 and Table 196.
The general recloser signals are:

User Manual 309
AUTOMATISMS 
❑ Recloser in service. Indicates whether it is enabled and not locked by an external blocking input. Internal blocking signals
don´t affect this signal. When the recloser is disabled by setting, the recloser´s signals don´t activate.
❑ Recloser in standby. Indicates that it is in standby or supervising.
❑ Recloser Blocked. Indicates that it is locked. If the recloser is out of service, this signal is activated. If the recloser is on
line, this signal is activated by internal and external block.
❑ Definitive trip. Indicates that it is in the definitive trip. It´s activated by maximum reclose number or a trip with the
recloser blocked.
❑ Definitive Trip+Ext blocked. Indicates that it is in definitive trip and external block. It includes trips with the recloser out of
service or blocked.
❑ Reclose command. Automatic breaker closure command.
❑ 79 in progress. Active from the moment the breaker is opened by a trip until the monitoring or definitive trip status is
reached.
❑ Reclosing 1 in progress. During the closure cycle 1. As of the opening of the breaker by the first trip or until supervising is
reached following the reclaim time or trip which leads to it being blocked (by Definitive T.) or a new cycle is produced.
❑ Reclosing 1 1P in progress. During the closure cycle 1, if only one pole is open by a single-pole trip.
❑ Reclosing 1 3P in progress. During the closure cycle 1, the three poles are open by a three-pole trip.
❑ Reclosing 2 in progress. During the closure cycle 2. As of the opening of the breaker by a three-pole trip during the
reclaim time following the first reclosure until the closure command is given or the block is produced.
reclaim time following the second reclosure until the closure command is given or the block is produced.
reclaim time following the second reclosure until the closure command is given or the block is produced.
❑ Safety time. Following the closure of the breaker, the reclaim time is counted until supervising is entered or a new closure
cycle is initiated.
❑ Safety time manual closing. Following the automatic closure of the breaker, the reclaim time is counted until supervising
is entered or a new closure cycle is initiated.
❑ Safety time reclosing. Following the manual closure of the breaker, the reclaim time is counted until supervising is
entered or a new closure cycle is initiated.
❑ Safety time 1st reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the first closure, the reclaim time is counted until
supervising is entered, a new closure cycle is initiated or the definitive trip is triggered.
❑ Safety time 2nd reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the second closure, the reclaim time is counted until
supervising is entered, a new closure cycle is initiated or the definitive trip is triggered.
❑ Safety time 3rd reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the third closure, the reclaim time is counted under
supervising is entered or the definitive trip is triggered.
❑ Safety time 4th reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the fourth closure, the reclaim time is counted under
supervising is entered or the definitive trip is triggered.
❑ Presence of Vref. Indicates the presence of reference voltage.
❑ Recloser paused. Indicates that the recloser is in pause in the closure time counter.
❑ Reclosing Started. Indicates that the reclosure process has started.
❑ Reclosing 1 Started. Indicates that the first reclosure process has started.
❑ Reclosing 2 Started. Indicates that the second reclosure process has started.
❑ Reclosing 3 Started. Indicates that the third reclosure process has started.
❑ Reclosing 4 Started. Indicates that the fourth reclosure process has started.
❑ Successful Reclosing. Indicates that the reclosure process was completed successfully.
❑ Breaker Reclosing ongoing. Indicates that the breaker is reclosing.
❑ Prepare 3 pole trip. Indicates that the following trips will be three-pole.
 If the recloser is enabled by setting, it happens when:

User Manual 310
AUTOMATISMS 
 The Autoreclose mode is 3 Poles

 The Autoreclose mode is 1P/3P or Dependent 3 Poles and the first trip has happened.
 The recloser is blocked
 The recloser is paused by absence of Vref
 The fault has changed from single-pole to three-pole.
 If the recloser is disabled by setting, it happens when:
 The “Single Pole Trip” is disabled by setting (node ZPMPT)
 The input “Force three pole” is activated
❑ Pole trip allowed. Indicates that single-pole trip is allowed. It happens if the Autoreclose mode is 1 Pole, 1P/3P or
Dependent and the recloser is “in standby”.
❑ Last pole trip. Indicates the last trip has been single-pole.
❑ Evolving fault. Indicates the fault has evolved from single-pole to three-pole
❑ Mode 1P Enabled.75 Indicates that selected reclose type allows 1P reclose.
❑ Mode 3P Enabled.75 Indicates that selected reclose type allows 3P reclose.
❑ Recloser Enabled76. Indicates that the recloser is enabled regardless of it being blocked or not.
76

User Manual 311
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 195 General recloser outputs

Auto
Recloser in service general
(RecSt in Ed2)
Recloser in standby RestST general
RecCyc
79 in progress general
(RecCycOn in Ed2)
Successful Reclosing RecOK general
Definitive Trip DefTrip general
Reclose Command OpCls general
Blk
Recloser Blocked general
(RecBlk in Ed2)
Reclosing 1 in progress RecCyc1 general
Reclosing 1 1P in progress RecCycMon1 general
Reclosing 1 3P in progress RecCycTr1 general
Safety time SecTime general
Safety time manual closing ManClSecT general
Safety time reclosing RecSecT general
Safety time 1st reclosing Rec1SecT general
Safety time 2nd reclosing Rec2SecT general
Safety time 3rd reclosing Rec3SecT general
Safety time 4th reclosing Rec4SecT general
Recloser paused Pause general
Reclosing Started RecPrIn general
Reclosing 1 Started RecPrIn1 general
Definitive Trip+Ext blocked DefTripBlk general
Breaker Reclosing ongoing BrRec general
Prepare 3 pole trip Op3pol general
Pole trip allowed EnaPol general
Last pole trip OpPol general
Evolving fault EvOp general
Mode 1P Enabled Rec1PEn general
Mode 3P Enabled Rec3PEn general
Recloser Enabled76 EnaRREC stVal
The recloser blocking signals are:
❑ 79 Internal Block. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to any cause.
❑ 79 Block Definitive Trip. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to a definitive trip.
❑ 79 Block 52 open. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to a manual opening.
❑ 79 Block Trip Exceeded. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to an excessive number of trips.
❑ 79 Block switch on fault. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to a switch onto fault, i.e., a trip is produced
during the reclaim time following a manual closure.
❑ 79 Block 3P trip. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to a three-pole trip, in the single-pole modes. Recloser
Lock No Syncrocheck. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to the absence of syncrcheck.
❑ 79 Block without Vref. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to the absence of vref.
❑ 79 Block Pole discordance. If the discordance function acts, the reclosure cycle is blocked.
❑ 79 Block Close Failure. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to the close failure. Related to the breaker
monitoring.

User Manual 312
AUTOMATISMS 
❑ 79 Block opening Failure. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to the open failure. Related to the breaker
monitoring.
❑ 79 External Block. Indicates that the recloser is in external block due to any cause.
❑ 79 External Block Comms. Indicates that the recloser is in external block due to command.
❑ 79 External Block Input. Indicates that the recloser is in external block due to logical input.
❑ 79 Block Start failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to reclosing start failure.
❑ 79 Block A Start failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to pole A reclosing start failure.
❑ 79 Block B Start failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to pole B reclosing start failure.
❑ 79 Block C Start failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to pole C reclosing start failure.
❑ 79 Block End of cycle. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to the end of the reclosing cycle.
❑ 79 Block manual closing. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to manual reclosing.
❑ 79 Block Trip In Safety time. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to a trip in safety time.
❑ 79 Block Incomplete sequence. Indicates that the recloser is blocked because the sequence time is exceeded.
❑ 79 Block TC Failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to breaker circuit supervision failure.
Table 196 Recloser block outputs

79 Internal Block BlkInt general
79 Block Definitive Trip BlkIntDeTr general
79 Block 52 open BlkIntOpBr general
79 Block Trip Exceeded BlkInExcTr general
79 Block switch on fault BlkIntSOF general
79 Block 3P trip BlkInt3PTr general
79 Block No Syncronism BlkINoSync general
79 Block without Vref BlkINoVref general
79 Block Pole discordance BlkIPoleD general
79 Block Close failure BlkIClFail general
79 Block opening failure BlkIOpFail general
79 External Block BlkExt general
79 External Block Comms BlkExtComs general
79 External Block Input BlkExtDI general
79 Block Start failure BlkIntInFa general
79 Block A Start failure BlkIAInFa general
79 Block B Start failure BlkIBInFa general
79 Block C Start failure BlkICInFa general
79 Block End of cycle BlkICyEnd general
79 Block manual closing BlkIManCl general
79 Block Trip In Safety time BlkITrMaSe general
79 Block Incomplete sequence BlkInSec general
79 Block TC Failure BlkClsTrip general
Commands
The recloser commands are in the node PROT/ZRREC1:
❑ "DOrdReEn" . It enables/Disables the recloser. This command only operates, when the recloser is enabled by setting. It is
maintained at shutdown.
❑ "DOrdReclEn" It enables/Disables the recloser in local mode. This command only operates, when the recloser is enabled
by setting and in local mode. It is maintained at shutdown.
❑ BlkRec. It blocks/unblocks the recloser. It is not maintained at shutdown.
❑ "DOrdRecIni". It resets the recloser counters.
❑ "1P mode".75 It enables/disables the 1P mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is "Configurable". With these
commands the recloser mode can be 1 P, 1P/3P or blocked.

User Manual 313
AUTOMATISMS 
❑ "3P mode".75 It enables/disables the 3P mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is "Configurable". With these
commands the recloser mode can be 3 P, 1P/3P or blocked.
5.3.1.1 Reclosure counters

There are independent reclosure counters for the first (single-pole and three-pole), second, third, fourth reclosures and for the
totals.
They are stored in a non-volatile memory and displayed in the statistical data (communications and display).
These counters can be set to 0 by command.
5.3.1.2 Excessive number of trips

It allows the number of trips within the time to be limited.
A signal is generated the trip limit is exceeded (“Reclose number” setting) within a set time (“Trips exceeded window (min)”
setting in the CBOU node).
It sets recloser to “Internal block”, signalling “Excessive nbr trips” and “Definitive trip”.
5.3.2 General operation

After a certain period following the introduction of voltage (or after resetting), the recloser enters in one of the states:
❑ If the recloser is enabled:

 Supervising status when the breaker is closed (passing through manual closure) or
 Manual Opening (manual opening block) if the breaker is open.
❑ If the recloser is disabled or there is a block signal, the reclosure cycle is not launched and it remains in the blocked status
Figure 169 Recloser initialization
It remains in the Manual Opening and Definitive Trip statuses until the breaker is closed manually.
Following the closure:
❑ If the breaker does not open during the block (or reclaim) time, it goes to Supervising status.
❑ If there is a manual opening, it enters Manual Opening Block.
❑ If there is an opening by a protection, it enters Definitive Trip Block.
If the protection acts but the breaker does not open (or the trip remains active) during the programmed time, it enters internal
block due to opening failure and the corresponding signal is activated. It leaves this status following a manual opening, a breaker
closure command or a reset.
The Supervising (or standby) status is maintained until:
❑ There is a manual opening.

❑ The protection acts and opens the breaker, initiating the cycle when applicable.
The cycle consists of 1 to 3 reclosures.

User Manual 314
AUTOMATISMS 
During each cycle a programmed time is observed and the breaker closes. If the breaker does not trip due to a protection within
the reclaim time, the Supervising (standby) status is entered. If it does, the following closure is initiated. If this was the last, the
Definitive Trip is initiated.
If, following the action of the protection, the breaker does not open in the preset time or the relay continues to trip, the internal
block begins to operate. If, following a closure and while the safety time is being counted, there is a manual opening. In this case, it
enters Manual Opening Block and exits the cycle.
If, while the reclosure time is being counted, a manual closure is produced, the recloser aborts the reclosure cycle and enters
“Manual closure”. Following the corresponding reclaim time, it returns to standby.
If, once closed, a reset is received, it also enters manual closure.
The action of the external block prevents the cycle from being entered, or the exit from any ongoing cycle. If the breaker opens
while the block is in effect, it enters Definitive Trip block.
If the synchrocheck function is enabled and the synchrocheck monitoring setting is set to “YES”, this function must issue closure
permission in order for the closure relay to be activated.
The figures below show the sequence of events for a reclosure which has been programmed for three reclosure attempts (TR1, TR2
and TR3, respectively), with a reclaim time of Tsec, for different situations:
a.- Successful first reclosure.
Once the Supervising status has been reached, a new trip causes a new cycle to begin and reclosure 1 is started once more, as
shown below:

User Manual 315
AUTOMATISMS 
b.- Successful second reclosure.
c.- Successful third reclosure.
d.- Changes to definitive trip after exhausting the number of programmed reclosures.
e.- Changes to definitive trip due to a trip during the reclaim time following a manual closure.

User Manual 316
AUTOMATISMS 
5.3.3 Post-trip reclosure permission mask

They are independent for each of the protection units and are configured in the protection nodes.
The enabling of the corresponding R1, R2 and R3 post-trip reclosure permission mask is checked with each trip. If they are not
enabled, the reclosure cycle is interrupted.
In the event of simultaneous trips (before the opening of the breaker), the units with reclosure permission are taken into account in
order start the reclosure cycle.
Additionally, the trips which force the recloser to enter a block are also checked.
If consecutive trips are produced in different units, the relay reviews the tripped units’ masks and allows as many reclosures as
correspond to the minimum number allowed for the units involved.
That is, if the minimum number of reclosures is set to 3, reclosures 1, 2 and 3 are allowed.
Once the number of permitted cycles has been exceeded, a new trip causes the recloser to enter “Definitive trip block”.
Reclosable trips
These are trips that are capable of initiating the reclosure cycle is programmed accordingly. In general, they are trips corresponding
to the overcurrent and distance units, as well as the external trip inputs.
Each trip’s programming options are:
❑ Reclosure following a trip set to “YES”

In order to allow reclosure following a specific trip type, the reclosure permission settings must be set to “YES”.
If various units issue a trip command during a fault and at least one of the tripped units has reclosure permission, the reclosure
cycle is initiated, unless one of the units is set to produce a 79 block.
❑ Reclosure following a trip set to “NO”

If, in the event of simultaneous trips, reclosure is not to be produced by a specific unit but rather the units with permission are to
have precedence, i.e., the reclosure cycle is to be initiated.
Likewise, there are various unit block inputs (for status and for pulses), thus making it possible to transfer any signal that is to be
used to avoid the reclosure to this input.
Non-reclosable trips
If a non-reclosable trip is produced (27, 59, 59N, 81, 81R), the reclosure unit will not launch the reclosure sequence for this cause
and, depending on whether the reclosure block mask has been set to “YES”, it will force the recloser to enter the definitive trip
status.
If the trip does not open the breaker (because it has not given rise to the general trip), the recloser will remain in its current status.
Non-reclosable unit’s can be made to produce a reclosure by means of the connection to the trip output corresponding to the
“Configurable autoreclose” input.
Recloser block due to trip
This is used when a specific unit is not to produce a reclosure following a trip and when this unit is to prevail over those with
permissions in the event of simultaneous trips.
If this mask is not used, two units may trip simultaneously and the recloser may reclose due to one of the units being reclosable.
In the event of the non-reclosable unit tripping on its own, the breaker will open and remain in a blocked status.
In addition to these masks, the relay has logic inputs that allow the recloser to be blocked. Through the logical assignment of
internal signals to these inputs, the user can modify the operation of the recloser.
Each protection unit has an independent setting which is used to enable or disable this unit’s reclosure due to trip permissions. The
reference is “ReC1Perm”. The setting is configured as a menu of options.
The PacFactory has a drop-down menu showing the possible combinations. These options are different between the distance units
that generates single-pole trip and the units that only produces three-pole trip:

User Manual 317
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 197 Options of reclosure permissions following trip (tripolar units)
Data Reference
0 NO None reclose is allowed
1 Reclose 1 Only the first reclose is allowed.
2 Reclose 2 Only the second reclose is allowed.
3 Reclose 1-2 The first and second recloses are allowed.
4 Reclose 3 Only the thrird reclose is allowed.
5 Reclose 1-3 The first and thrird recloses are allowed.
6 Reclose 2-3 The second and thrird recloses are allowed.
7 Reclose 1-2-3 All recloses are allowed
8 Reclose 4 Only the fourth reclose is allowed.
9 Reclose 1-4 The first and fourth recloses are allowed.
10 Reclose 2-4 The second and fourth recloses are allowed.
11 Reclose 1-2-4 The first, second and fourth recloses are allowed.
12 Reclose 3-4 The thrird and fourth recloses are allowed.
13 Reclose 1-3-4 The first, thrird and fourth recloses are allowed.
14 Reclose 2-3-4 The second, thrird and fourth recloses are allowed.
15 Reclose 1-2-3-4 All recloses are allowed
Table 198 Options of reclosure permissions following trip (distance units with one pole trip)
Data Reference
0 NO None reclose is allowed after a trip of the unit
1 Reclose 1 (1P) Only the first reclose is allowed after a one pole trip of that unit
2 Reclose 1 (3P) Only the first reclose is allowed after a three poles trip of that unit
3 Reclose 1 (1P/3P) Only the first reclose is allowed after a trip of that unit
4 Reclose 2-3-4 The second, third and fourth recloses are allowed
5 Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 The first (if it is one pole),the second, third and fourth recloses are allowed
6 Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 The first (if it is three poles), the second, third and fourth recloses are allowed
7 Reclose 1-2-3-4 All recloses are allowed
Table 199 Options of reclosure permissions following trip (distance units with three poles trip)
Data Reference
0 NO None reclose is allowed after a trip of the unit
2 Reclose 1 (3P) Only the first reclose is allowed after a trip of that unit
4 Reclose 2-3-4 The second, third and fourth recloses are allowed after a trip of that unit
7 Reclose 1-2-3-4 All recloses are allowed after a trip of that unit
Table 200 Reclosure permissions following trip (in each protection node)

ReclPerm Reclosure permission 0 255 1 Int32

User Manual 318
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 170 Recloser start

User Manual 319
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 171 Example of trip and reclosure permission operation

User Manual 320
AUTOMATISMS 
5.3.4 Fault type selection

Depending on which unit has provoked the initiation of the reclosure process, the reclosure time to elapse before the generation of
the reclosure signal, as well as the reclaim time following the reclosure, is selected.
Internal Trips
Depending on the type of trip produced, there are 2 types of reclosure:
❑ Reclosure following a single-pole trip. This trip is produced by distance zone 1 and teleprotection unit.
❑ Reclosure following a three-pole trip (the rest).
If a single-pole trip evolves to a three-pole trip before the reclosing, the times are restarted in accordance with the three-pole trip.
External trips
Includes the following signals:
❑ DPE - External protection trip: Can be single-pole or three-pole.

❑ DPR-Reclosable programmable trip. An internal signal which is wired for logics and whose activation allows the reclosure
cycle to be initiated.
Upon the opening of the breaker and once it has been determined whether the fault is single-pole or three-pole, a reclosure time
that is programmed in accordance with the chosen setting is launched.
5.3.5 Breaker open timeout

Once the relay has tripped (activation of the general trip), the recloser waits during the opening failure time, till the breaker opens
(by contact) and the trip disappears. If the breaker does not open upon the conclusion of this time, “opening failure block” is
entered.
If during this programmed period of time the breaker opens, the ongoing cycle is initiated and the “79CC-Ongoing cycle” signal is
activated.
This signal will remain active until the cycle terminates upon its completion and a standby or block status is entered.
If the 52 NO and NC inputs are programmed, the 52b (NC) will be taken into consideration to detect the opening. If only the 52a
(NO) input is programmed, this signal at zero will be used as an open status.
5.3.6 Number of reclosures available

The total number of reclosures can be selected by settings.
The reclosures which are to be possible following the tripping of a specific unit can also be selected.
The enabling of the corresponding R1, R2, R3 and R4 permission mask is checked with each trip. If they are not enabled, the
reclosure cycle is interrupted.
In the event of simultaneous trips (before the opening of 52), the units with reclosure permission are taken into account in order
start the reclosure cycle.
Additionally, the trips which force the recloser to enter a block are also checked.
If consecutive trips are produced in different units, the relay reviews the tripped units’ masks and allows as many reclosures as
correspond to the minimum number allowed for the units involved. That is, if the minimum number of reclosures is set to 3,
reclosures 1, 2 and 3 are allowed.
Once the number of permitted cycles has been exceeded, a new trip causes the recloser to enter “Definitive trip block”.
All the trips (reclosable, non-reclosable and block) are checked up to the moment in which the breaker opens.
Any block trips which appear are sent directly to a blocked recloser.

User Manual 321
AUTOMATISMS 
If there are only reclosable trips, the reclosure cycle is begun with the time of the first reclosable produced by the trip.
Examples of operation.
The total number of reclosure cycles is set to 2 and Autoreclose mode to Dependent.
Example 1:
❑ Unit 50 trips (three-pole trip with reclosure available in all except the first one). Recloser does not reclose as the reclosure
permission is not allowed in CC1. Recloser would enter “Internal Block-Definitive Trip”
Example 2:
❑ 52 is closed and reclaim time following manual closure is initiated.

❑ Unit 51N trips (with R1, R2 and R3 reclosure permission for three-pole trips). 79 recloses with “Three-pole Reclose 1 time
(s)”.
❑ With 52 closed, and while “Reclaim time Ph-Ph (s)” is running, unit 50 trips (with R2 and R3 reclosure permission)
Reclosure R2 is not performed because the first trips has been three-pole. Recloser would enter “Internal Block-Definitive
Trip”
Example 3:
❑ In standby, Zone 1 single-pole trips (with R1 reclosure permission for single-pole trips). 79 recloses with “single-pole
Reclose 1 time (s)”.
❑ With 52 closed, and while “Reclaim time ground (s)” is running, a three-pole trip happens (with R2 and R3 reclosure
permission for three-pole trips). 79 recloses with “Reclose 2 time (s)”.
❑ With 52 closed, and while “Reclaim time ground (s)” is running, a three-pole trip happens (with R2 and R3 reclosure
permission for three-pole trips). 79 recloses with “Reclose 3 time (s)”.
❑ With 52 closed, and while “Reclaim time ground (s)” is running, a three-pole trip. 79 recloses with “Reclose 3 time (s)”.
Recloser does not reclose because the maximum reclosure number is exceeded. Recloser would enter “Internal Block-
Definitive Trip”
Example 4:
❑ While in standby, a 50 trip with R1 permission is produced and, before 52 opens, another 50N with R2 permission,
programmed without blocking, trip is produced.
❑ In this case, the 50 trip would take precedence, provoking the reclosure cycle.
Example 5:
❑ While in standby, a 50 trip with R1 permission is produced and, before 52 opens, another 50N programmed with blocking
trip is produced.
❑ In this case, when the 50N trip is produced and the breaker opens, the reclosure cycle would be interrupted and “Internal
Block-Definitive Trip” would be entered.
5.3.7 Reference voltage monitoring

This is used to wait for the activation of an external signal before allowing a reclosure. For example, to wait for the disappearance
of the line voltage following a trip (if there were motors or batteries connected to the line) or for a specific network condition
(power fluctuations, etc).
This monitoring is equivalent to a pause signal that halts the reclosure cycle during the VREF timeout.
It operates as follows:
❑ Once the breaker has opened and the trip has dropped out, the reclosure cycle is initiated and the reclosure time is
launched.
❑ In the absence of VREF, “VREF timeout” is launched, during which the VREF signal should be activated to allow the
continuation of the reclosure process.

User Manual 322
AUTOMATISMS 
❑ If the VREF signal does not appear prior to the elapse of this time, the internal 79 block due to absence of VREF” status is
entered.
❑ This status is cancelled by means of a closure or following the activation of the recloser reset input.
Figure 172 Reference voltage monitoring scheme
5.3.8 Re-initiation of reclosure time

The digital “Pause with reclosure reinitiation” input is used to reset the reclosure time counter to zero.
When the “Pause with reclosure reinitiation” input is activated, the recloser time counter (dead time) is reset to zero and the 79 is
halted until this input is cleared.
When this input is deactivated, the reclosure time count is restarted.
5.3.9 Pausing of reclosure time

The digital “Pause input” input is used to pause the reclosure time counter.
When this input is activated, the reclosure time counter (dead time) is halted until this input is cleared.
When this input is deactivated, the reclosure time count continues.
Figure 173 Reclosure time with pause and restart scheme

User Manual 323
AUTOMATISMS 
5.3.10 Incomplete sequence block

The two pause inputs can be used to wait for a certain signal, although the cycle can be extended indefinitely. It is thus important
to prevent the recloser from remaining permanently in the current cycle.
This timed is used to check that the recloser has exceeded a defined time without issuing a closure command nor becoming
blocked or resetting, thus causing the recloser to enter a block by incomplete sequence status.
Figure 174 Block by incomplete sequence scheme
5.3.11 Synchronism monitoring

It only applies to three-pole trips. If the trip is single-pole, the synchronism is not checked before reclosure command.
After a three-pole trip, if a specific reclosure is set to “monitored by synchronism” and once the reclosure time has elapsed, there is
a maximum timeout equivalent to the “Sync. Delay Time (s)” setting in which the “synchronism permission” signal is to activate.
Upon the issue of the synchronism permission the reclosure command is activated.
If synchronism permission is not activated, the “Block due to lack of synchronism” status is entered.
The first and the rest of the reclosures can be set to monitoring by synchronism by means of a setting. This allows the first
reclosures to be carried out quickly and without the need to check for synchronism, in the case of specific faults, and normal
reclosures for the rest.
Settings can be used to establish whether the synchronism is to check the relay’s functioning or that or an external input.
There is a setting within the synchronism unit to enable monitoring by synchronism for the recloser and for manual closing. As they
are independent settings, by disabling function 25 it is possible to monitor the reclosure with the external synchronism input.
If the setting “Synchrocheck type” is internal, the recloser waits the permission signal is activated. If the setting is external, the
recloser waits the activation of the “External syncro. Permission” input.
5.3.12 Closure block by trip circuit monitoring

If the closure block by trip circuit monitoring is set to “YES”, when the reclosure command is activated while the trip circuit
monitoring logic’s “trip circuit failure” signal, the closure command is not received and "Internal block due to failure in the SPV trip
circuit" is signalled.
This status is cancelled by the manual closure of the breaker following the elapse of the reclaim time.
5.3.13 52 closure timeout

Once the relay has issued a reclosure command (Activation of the 79 output-reclosure command), the breaker should close during
the closure failure timeout (by contact), If the breaker has not closed upon the conclusion of the timeout, "79 block due to closure
failure" s entered and the reclosure command is deactivated. If there is a trip during that time, the reclose command is cancelled
and a definitive trip is generated.

User Manual 324
AUTOMATISMS 
This status is cancelled by means of a manual closure.
If the 52 NO and NC inputs are programmed, the 52b (NC) will be taken into consideration to detect the closure.
If only the 52b (NC) is programmed, this denied signal will be used.
5.3.14 Recloser statuses

During its operation, the recloser enters through various statuses that are grouped together as stables and transitory.
5.3.14.1 Stable statuses

The "Recloser" function has 5 stable statuses, i.e., statuses in which it can remain indefinitely until something occurs to cancel
the status. They are:
❑ Out of service.
❑ Supervising, standby or reset.
❑ Manual opening.
❑ Internal block. Includes the Definitive trip.
❑ External block.
❑ Reclosure successful
5.3.14.1.1 Out of service

It will be placed out of service by settings (Enabled “NO”).
If it is in service, it can be placed out of service by pressing the R key on the keyboard or by means of a command or logical
input.
This status is exited when the function is enabled by a setting or command (R key or command or logical input). The transitory
manual closure setting is entered if the breaker is closed at this time. If the breaker is open, internal block (due to manual
opening) is entered.
The functioning is similar when the relay lights and the reclosure setting is set to “YES”.
5.3.14.1.2 Supervising or standby

This is the normal status, during which the recloser “monitors” for the occurrence of any trips. If any trips occur, the
recloser is activated.
This status is entered:
❑ Whenever the breaker is closed for a period that exceeds the reclaim time (following a manual closure or following
a trip).
❑ If the breaker is closed and in the external block status, when the block signal is cleared.
This status is exited:
❑ By the action of the protection and the subsequent opening of the breaker. If reclosure is to follow, the cycle is
initiated. If not, Definitive trip is entered.
❑ Due to the manual opening of the breaker. Manual Opening is entered.
5.3.14.1.3 Manual opening

This status is entered by a manual opening command (by command, contact or other causes, but not by a trip).
This status is cancelled when the 52 is closed manually (by command, contact, etc., by not by reclosure).

User Manual 325
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 175 Manual opening
5.3.14.1.4 Internal block

There is a general internal block status with different signalling, in accordance with the cause. This status is entered as
result of different causes:
❑ Opening failure
❑ Closure failure
❑ Manual opening
❑ Three-phase Trip
❑ Definitive trip
❑ Incomplete sequence
The reclosure cycle is not started in this status. The cycle is abandoned if it has already been started and Definitive Trip is
signalled if the breaker has opened as a result of a protection trip.
This status is cancelled by the closure of the breaker following the elapse of the reclaim time.
In all cases, a generic “internal block” signal is activated, in addition to a specific signal identifying the cause of the block. In
those cases where the block status occurs after a trip and the opening of the 52, “definitive trip block” is also indicated.

User Manual 326
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 176 Block scheme
Internal block as a result of an opening fault
This status is entered if, following the elapse of the breaker fault time after a trip, the breaker remains closed.
This status is cancelled when the breaker opens. The opening failure time is the same as that of the opening fault with
contact function.
Figure 177 Opening failure block scheme
DGITAL SIGNAL
General trip Time
DIGITAL SIGNAL S RECLAIM T

OPENING
52 DIGITAL SIGNAL
Phase A open command Recloser Lock opening failure
0
DIGITAL SIGNAL R
52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)

User Manual 327
AUTOMATISMS 
Internal block as a result of a closure failure
This status is entered of any of the following conditions are met:
❑ If the breaker remains open following the elapse of the breaker closure failure time after a closure command.
“Definitive trip” is also signalled.
❑ If the trip circuit failure block is enabled. If, when activating the closure command, the command activates the trip
and closure circuits’ monitoring logic’s "trip circuit failure” signal, the closure command is not issued and “closure
command blocked" is signalled. Following the elapse of the closure failure time, the block by closure failure status
is entered.
This status is cancelled by the manual closure of the breaker following the elapse of the reclaim time.
Internal block by open breaker (manual opening)
This status is entered by a manual opening or by means of a breaker command when the 79 is in standby or in a current
cycle.
It is cancelled by a manual breaker closure. The transitory Manual Closure status is entered.
Definitive trip
This status is activated following a trip that fails to produce a reclosure due to a 79 block or for having reached the end of
the cycle with the fault intact:
❑ A trip is produced within a period that is shorter than the reclaim time following a manual breaker closure.
❑ A trip is produced in a period that is shorter than the reclaim time following the last reclosure.
❑ A protection trip is produced while the block status is active.
❑ A protection trip is produced while the recloser is out of service.
❑ An excessive number of trips are produced within a defined time.
❑ The recloser does not issue a closure command due a voltage monitoring failure (synchronism).
❑ The recloser issues a closure command and the recloser does not close in the closure failure time.
❑ The recloser does not issue a closure command due to an interlock (for example, a trip circuit failure) and the
recloser does not close in the closure failure time.
❑ The voltage presence conditions are not met during a current cycle.
❑ If a trip does not produce a reclosure due the programming of a block (with the block taking precedence over other
functions with permissions) or the absence of the programming of a reclosure (unless there is another function
with reclosure permission trips simultaneously).
❑ A switch onto fault function trip following a manual closure.
❑ By incomplete sequence.
This status is cancelled by one of the following causes.
❑ Manual breaker closure, following which the transitory MC (Manual Closure) status is activated.
❑ Reception of recloser’s reset input.

User Manual 328
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 178 Internal block statuses diagram
Incomplete sequence block.
See the “Incomplete sequence block” section.
5.3.14.1.5 External block

This status is activated by:
❑ Activation of the recloser’s logical block input.

❑ Reception of a block command. There are block and unblock commands.
No cycles are started while the block is active and any cycles which had already been started are terminated. “internal 79
block”, “external 79 block by communication” or “external 79 block by input” is signalled. “Definitive trip + Trip &
extern.block” is also signalled if the breaker has been opened by a protection trip (general trip) or by an external protection.
5.3.14.1.6 Successful reclosure

Successful reclosure is signalled when, following the issue of a closure command and the closure of the three 52 poles, the
reclaim time elapses without a new trip being produced.
The “successful reclosure” signal is activated and remains so until the relay trips once again.
5.3.14.2 Transitory statuses

Transitory statues are those statuses in which the system cannot remain for longer than a specific time.

User Manual 329
AUTOMATISMS 
5.3.14.2.1 Manual closure

This status is activated as a result of a manual breaker closure or by means of a command (not be reclosure), independently
of whether a cycle is in progress. It maximum duration is equivalent to the reclaim time following manual closure.
This status is cancelled by one of the following causes:
❑ Due to the manual opening of the breaker. An internal block due to manual opening is activated.
❑ Due to the action of the protection. An internal block due to definitive trip is activated.
❑ Following the elapse of the safety time. Standby is activated.
❑ Due to the activation of the external block input or block command. An external block is activated.
❑ Due to the action of the protection following an opening failure (52 does not open or the unit remains tripped). An
internal block due to an opening fault is activated.
Figure 179 Reclaim time following manual closure
5.3.14.2.2 First closure. Phase 1: Timed.

This is reached at the start of the cycle. Its maximum duration is equivalent to the first closure time. If monitoring by
synchronism is activated, the synchronism timeout is added, if there is no synchronism upon the termination of the
reclosure time count. There are different settings for the first single-pole and three-pole reclosing.
At the same time as the closure time count, the monitoring by VREF (during a maximum “VREF timeout” period) and by
synchronism.
This is cancelled by:
❑ Manual breaker closure. “Internal block” is activated and “Temporary block by manual closure” is signalled.
❑ Following the elapse of the reclosure time. Phase 2 of the closure is entered.
❑ Activation of the external block input. “External block” is activated.
❑ Failure to meet the reference voltage (VREF) monitoring conditions. An internal block is activated and Internal
block due to absence of VREF and Definitive trip is signalled.
❑ Failure to meet the synchronism monitoring conditions. An internal block is activated and Internal block due to
synchronism fault and Definitive trip is signalled.

User Manual 330
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 180 Reclosure line scheme
Figure 181 Opening timeout scheme

User Manual 331
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 182 Reclosure timeout scheme
5.3.14.2.3 First closure. Phase 2: closure command.

This is reached once the first closure timed is complied with. It activates the closure command and increments the closures
meter.
It is cancelled:
❑ Because the breaker has closed in the permitted time. Phase 3 entered.
❑ Because the permitted time has elapsed without the closure of the breaker. An internal block is activated and
“Internal block due to closure failure” and “Definitive trip” is signalled. The relay’s Breaker failure due to contact
signal is also activated.
5.3.14.2.4 First closure. Phase 3: breaker closure.

This is reached following the closure command issued in phase 2 when the breaker has closed. It maximum duration is
equivalent to the reclaim time following automatic closure. It deactivates the closure signal.
It is cancelled:
❑ Due to the manual opening of the breaker. “Internal block” is activated and “Internal block by manual opening” is
signalled.
❑ Due to a protection trip. The second reclosure process is entered, phase 1.
❑ Because the block time has elapsed without the opening of the breaker. Standby is activated.
A low current permanent fault may cause tripping following the elapse of the safety period. To avoid, in the event of all the
reclosures being first reclosures and no definitive trip is produced, the automatic extension of the timeout due the pick up
of a unit capable of producing a reclosable general trip in standby (“Trip permission with 79 in standby” set to “YES”) until
reset or a trip is produced.

User Manual 332
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 183 Closure scheme
Figure 184 Timeout following closure scheme
5.3.14.2.5 Second closure

This is reached as a result of protection trip in the timeout following the closure originated by the first closure. Its
functioning (phases, activated relays, etc.) is the same as that of the first closure.
5.3.14.2.6 Third closure

This is reached as a result of protection trip in the timeout following the closure originated by the second closure. Its
functioning (phases, activated relays, etc.) is the same as that of the first closure.
5.3.14.2.7 Ongoing cycle

The status of the recloser while activated, from the first trip and the opening of the breaker up to the closure of the breaker
and the elapse of the safety period (successful reclosure), or until all the programmed reclosures have been unsuccessfully
executed. In the first case, the recloser switches to “supervising” and, in the second, to “definitive trip”
If, during the operating cycle, a manual order (or command) is given to the circuit breaker, the recloser suspends the cycle
and switches "internal block due to manual opening" or "manual closure".
These same applies if a reset signal is received.

User Manual 333
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 185 Ongoing cycle scheme
5.3.15 Application with two breakers

When having a double breaker configuration, both breakers trip at the same time. With this function, the recloser operation mode
with the two breakers can be selected between:
❑ Both breakers reclose simultaneously.

❑ Combine the closings following a programmed sequence.
❑ Automatically, only closes one of the breakers.
In any of those cases, once the security time has passed, both breakers must be closed in order to finish the reclosing successfully.
After a single phase trip, the recloser waits for the opening of only one pole in both breakers. If more than one pole opens, it blocks
and signalizes definitive trip. If the tripped pole does not open in both breakers, after waiting a time, it blocks by open failure. To
begin the process, both breakers have to open.
If both breakers open correctly, the reclosing cycle begins after the time set, to close the breaker selected with the closing
sequence. If a single phase fault is detected, it can evolve to a three phase fault during the ongoing cycle. At this moment, a new
three phase reclosing waiting time begins to give closing permission. If, when giving a reclosing permission, the breaker is open or
tripped, it blocks.
The recloser considers that a breaker is blocked, if a manual opening has been made or if it is blocked by a digital input or setting. In
this case, it does not operate, and will only be able to operate the other breaker if the setting "Permit closure 52_x with 52_y
blocked" says so.
With manual closing of a breaker, the recloser is blocked by manual closing , counting the safety time after manual closing.
The "Closing sequence" defines how the recloser acts:
❑ Brk1. The reclose cycle only generates close command for breaker 1.
 Generates open command on both breakers and wait for them to open. If any of them is not open,then it will block by
open failure and not continue reclosure cycle.
 Generates close command for breaker 1 and waits for closure (with or without synchronism). Breaker 2 is not closed.
❑ Brk2. The reclose cycle only generates close command for breaker 2.It is same as above, but breakers are exchanged.
❑ Brk1 and Brk2. The reclose cycle generates close command for both breakers simultaneously.
 Generates open command on both breakers and wait for them to open. If any of them is not open,then it will block by
open failure and not continue reclosure cycle.
 Generates close command for both breakers and wait for closure (with or without separate synchronism) to pass
safety time. If one of them gives closure failure, the setting value Block by Br1 Close Fail is checked
 NO:The closing sequence continues considering only the other breaker
 YES: Recloser is locked and it will block by close failure.
 If either closed, it starts counting recloser safety time.
 If recloser safety time ends up without trips and breaker is closed, it returns to standby.
 If new protection trip is produced, a new closing sequence is started
 If an excessive number of trips are produced in any breaker, then it will block and not continue reclosure cycle
❑ Brk1 then Brk2. The reclose cycle generates close command for breaker 1. When the reclose cycle has finished
successfully (Successful Reclosing), the breaker 2 close command is generated, once the sequence time since the breaker
1 close command has finished

User Manual 334
AUTOMATISMS 
 Generates open command on both breakers and wait for them to open. If any of them is not open, then it will block by
open failure and not continue reclosure cycle
 Generates close command for breaker 1 and waits for closure (with or without synchronism). When recloser safety
time ends up without trips and breaker 1 is closed (Successful Reclosing), the breaker 2 close command is generated. If
one of them gives closure failure, the setting value Block by Br1 Close Fail is checked
 NO: Closing sequence continues considering only the breaker 2 checking synchronism 2.
❑ Brk2 then Brk1. The reclose cycle generates close command for breaker 2. When the reclose cycle has finished
successfully (Successful Reclosing), the breaker 1 close command is generated, once the sequence time since the breaker
2 close command has finished. It is same as above, but breakers are exchanged.
❑ Brk1 - Brk2. The reclose cycle generates close command for breaker 1. When the breaker 1 has closed, the sequence time
starts. When the sequence time finishes without a new trip, the breaker 2 close command is generated. If during sequence
time with the breaker 1 closed, there is a trip, the next reclose cycle starts until the maximum allowed reclosure by setting.
The sequence is the following:
 Generates open command on both breakers and wait for them to open. If any of them is not open, then it will
block by open failure and not continue reclosure cycle
 Generates close command for breaker 1 and waits for closure (with or without synchronism). When the
breaker 1 is closed, the sequence time starts. When the sequence time finishes without a new trip, the breaker
2 close command is generated. If breaker 1 gives closure failure, the setting value Block by Br1 Close Fail is
checked
 NO: Closing sequence continues considering only the breaker 2 checking synchronism 2.
❑ Brk2 - Brk1. The reclose cycle generates close command for breaker 2. When the breaker 1 has closed, the sequence time
starts. When the sequence time finishes without a new trip, the breaker 2 close command is generated. It is same as Brk1 -
Brk2, but breakers are exchanged.
If the close sequence is "Brk1 then Brk2" or " Brk1 - Brk2" and breaker 1 is blocked or in manual opening, the breaker 2 close
condition (ReCond2) uses the first breaker´s setting (ReCond1). In case of "Brk2 then Brk1" or " Brk2 - Brk1" and breaker 2 is
blocked or in manual opening, the breaker 1 close condition (ReCond1) uses the second breaker´s setting (ReCond2).
It has independent settings and outputs (logical node PROT/SECRREC)
Table 201 shows the settings of this function:
❑ Select 2 breakers
It allows operating with two breakers (“YES”). In that case, follows the settings detailed bellow to include a second breaker
in the closing scheme.
❑ Closing sequence
Definition of the breaker or breakers that will reclose automatically. In the case of having to reclose two breakers, it can be
done simultaneously or following a sequence.
❑ Sequence time (ms):

Time passed between the first breaker reclosing order and the second, following the aforementioned closing sequence.
Used only by the "Brk1 then Brk2" and "Brk2 then Brk1" sequences.
❑ Block by Br2 Close Fail

When set to “YES”, it blocks the recloser if there is closing failure in the breaker 1.
When set to “NO”, when there is breaker 1 close failure, it allows following the sequence selected for closing the breaker 2.
❑ Block by Br1 Close Fail

When set to “YES”, it blocks the recloser if there is closing failure in the breaker 2.

User Manual 335
AUTOMATISMS 
When set to “NO”, when there is breaker 2 close failure, it allows following the sequence selected for closing the breaker 1
❑ Br1 Permission if 2 blocked

When set to “YES”, it allows the closing of the breaker 1, if the breaker 2 is blocked.
When set to “NO”, it does not allow the closing of the breaker 1, if the breaker 2 is blocked.
❑ Br2 Permission if 1 blocked

When set to “YES”, it allows the closing of the breaker 2, if the breaker 1 is blocked.
When set to “NO”, it does not allow the closing of the breaker 2, if the breaker 1 is blocked.
❑ 52_1 reclosing block

Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the closing of the breaker 1.
❑ 52_2 reclosing block

Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the closing of the breaker 2.
❑ Enable Events record

Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the function’s protection events are
not generated. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.
Table 201 Two breaker recloser settings

SelBr2 Select 2 breakers NO/YES Boolean
Brk1 (0)
Brk2 (1)
Brk1 and Brk2 (2)
ClSec Closing sequence Brk1 then Brk2 (3) enum
Brk2 then Brk1 (4)
Brk1 - Brk2 (5)
Brk2 - Brk1 (6)
SecTmms Sequence time (ms): 50 600000 10 Int32
BlkF1 Block by Br2 Close Fail NO/YES Boolean
BlkF2 Block by Br1 Close Fail NO/YES Boolean
Cl1Br2LcEna Br1 Permission if 2 blocked NO/YES Boolean
Cl2Br1LcEna Br2 Permission if 1 blocked NO/YES Boolean
BlkBr1 52_1 reclosing block Int32
BlkBr2 52_2 reclosing block Int32
MaskEna Enable Events record NO/YES Boolean
Table 202 shows the outputs of the breaker 1:
❑ Reset sequence.
It stops the closing sequence and is activated in the following situations:
 The recloser is in standby.

 The recloser is blocked. Also if there is a closing failure in any of the breakers.
 Start of each of the ongoing cycles.
❑ Signals of the breaker 1:
 52_1 Reclose Command: Breaker 1 reclosing activation order.
 52_1 closure failure: Breaker 1 closure failure activation.
 The breaker 1 is not closed, after the closing time.
 52_1 Manual opening: Breaker 1 manual opening activation signal.

User Manual 336
AUTOMATISMS 
 The opening of the breaker is detected without initializing the recloser cycle. Once the opening is detected, waits two
cycles before signalling manual opening. This time avoids the opening by an external trip.
 52_1 blocked. Breaker 1 blocking status, caused by the setting “52_1 reclosing lock”, the internal signal “Operations
Locked - Br.1” or the manual opening of the breaker.
 52_1 Successful Reclosing: Breaker 1 reclosing activation order state..Breaker 1 has properly completed its reclosing
cycle.
❑ Signals of the breaker 2:
 52_2 Reclose Command: Breaker 2 reclosing activation order.
 52_2 closure failure: Breaker 2 closure failure activation.
 The breaker 1 is not closed, after the closing time.
 52_2 Manual opening: Breaker 2 manual opening activation signal.
 The opening of the breaker is detected without initializing the recloser cycle. Once the opening is detected, waits two
cycles before signalling manual opening. This time avoids the opening by an external trip.
 52_2 blocked. Breaker 2 blocking status, caused by the setting “52_2 reclosing lock”, the internal signal “Operations
Locked - Br.2” or the manual opening of the breaker.
 52_2 Successful Reclosing: Breaker 2 reclosing activation order state..Breaker 2 has properly completed its reclosing
cycle.
Table 202 Two breaker recloser outputs (breaker 1)

Reset sequence ReSec general
52_1 Reclose Command RecOrdBrk1 general
52_1 closure failure RecFailBr1 general
52_1 Manual opening ManOpen1 general
52_1 blocked BlkBrk1 general
52_1 Successful Reclosing RecOK1 general
52_2 Reclose Command RecOrdBrk2 general
52_2 closure failure RecFailBr2 general
52_2 Manual opening ManOpen2 general
52_2 blocked BlkBrk2 general
52_2 Successful Reclosing RecOK2 general
Figura 186 Breakers` blocking type

User Manual 337
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 187. Autoreclose sequence with 2 breakers

User Manual 338
DISCONNECTOR
6. DISCONNECTOR
The disconnector unit uses the PROT/XSWI1 logical node. The settings used are:
❑ Disconnector type: Indicates the type of disconnector employed:

 1 or 2 DI.General Status. Only one input is used for the status of the three poles.
 3 or 6 DI.Per Pole. An independent input is used for the status of each of the three poles.
❑ 89a input: If the disconnector type is "1 or 2 DI.General Status", it indicates the disconnector status.
❑ 89a-Pole A: If the disconnector type is "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole", it indicates the phase A disconnector status.
❑ 89a-Pole B: The same as phase A, but for B.
❑ 89a-Pole C: The same as phase A, but for C.
❑ 89b input: If the disconnector type is "1 or 2 DI.General Status", it indicates the disconnector status.
❑ 89b-Pole A: If the disconnector type is "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole", it indicates the phase A disconnector status.
❑ 89b-Pole B: The same as phase A, but for B.
❑ 89b-Pole C: The same as phase A, but for C.
❑ Enable Events record: Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the
Table 203 Disconnector status settings

1 or 2 DI.General Status
BrTyp Disconnector type enum
3 or 6 DI.Per Pole
LogIn89a1 89a general status Int32
LogIn89a1A 89a Pole A status Int32
LogIn89a1B 89a Pole B status Int32
LogIn89a1C 89a Pole C status Int32
LogIn89b1 89b general status Int32
LogIn89b1A 89b Pole A status Int32
LogIn89b1B 89b Pole B status Int32
LogIn89b1C 89b Pole C status Int32
Disconnector status
The status of the general disconnector and by pole is determined with the status of digital inputs and disconnector type setting.
Used to determine the status of the disconnector without uncertainty and employed in functions that require the disconnector’s
status to be known, such as the stub bus protection, etc.
The 89b status inputs take precedence over the 89a status inputs, i.e., if 89b status inputs have been configured, the disconnector
status is determined by means of these inputs, independently of the status of the 89a inputs.
Depending on the disconnector type setting, the functioning is:
❑ 1 or 2 DI.General Status. The "89b general status" input is used for the disconnector status. If it is not configured, the "89a
general status" input is used. The phase disconnector status matches the general.
❑ 3 or 6 DI.Per Pole. The independent "89b Pole X status" inputs are used for the disconnector status. If they are not
configured, the "89a Pole X status" inputs are used, where "X" indicates the pole (A, B or C). The general disconnector
status is generated from the phases, taking into account the following:
 Closed general status, if all the phases are closed.
 Open general status, if at least one of the phases is open.
Table 204 shows this function’s outputs.
❑ Disconnector 1 Status (DI). Indicates the disconnector's general status, in accordance with the status of the digital inputs.

User Manual 339
DISCONNECTOR
❑ Disconnector 1 X Status (DI). Indicates the status of each of the disconnector's phases, in accordance with the status of the
digital inputs. Where "X" indicates the pole (A, B or C).
Table 204 Disconnector status outputs
XSWI1 Signal Data Attribute

Disconnector 1 Status (DI) StEna general
Disconnector 1 A Status (DI) StEna phsA
Disconnector 1 B Status (DI) StEna phsB
Disconnector 1 C Status (DI) StEna phsC

User Manual 340
BREAKER AND A HALF CONFIGURATION 
7. BREAKER AND A HALF CONFIGURATION

The model LD2 is specific for breaker and a half configurations.
The current inputs are independent for every breaker. There are two inputs for every phase.
The analogue input 7 can be selected with the setting "Current 7 type" of the node TCIN:
❑ Ipol. The analogue input 7 is used as polarization current.

❑ In2. The analogue input 7 is used as Parallel line Neutral current 2.
The polarity of the phases of each of the breaker can be selected as incoming / outgoing, with the settings of the node TCIN:
❑ Local End polarity Br1. It selects the polarity (incoming / outgoing) of the currents IA1, IB1, IC1.
❑ Local End polarity Br2. It selects the polarity (incoming / outgoing) of the currents IA2, IB2, IC2.
Available analogue inputs in model ZT1 are:
Model T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12

LD2 I A1 I B1 I C1 I A2 I B2 I C2 In2/Ipol Vs2 Vs1 VA VB VC
In topology 52 ½, the total phase current is calculated as the sum of the current of each breaker, taking into account the polarity. If
incoming it´s sum, if outgoing it´s subtraction.
Br1 incoming Br1 incoming Br1 outgoing Br1 outgoing

Br2 incoming Br2 outgoing Br2 incoming Br2 outgoing
Ia = Ia1 + Ia2 Ia = Ia1 - Ia2 Ia = -Ia1 + Ia2 Ia = -Ia1 - Ia2
Ib = Ib1 + Ib2 Ib = Ib1 - Ib2 Ib = -Ib1 + Ib2 Ib = -Ib1 - Ib2
Ic = Ic1 + Ic2 Ic = Ic1 - Ic2 Ic = -Ic1 + Ic2 Ic = -Ic1 - Ic2
As neutral current, the zero sequence is used (3·I0).
The calculations for sequences are performed with total currents.
7.1 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
The following points indicate the functions affected by the configuration 52 ½.
The breaker status follows the criteria:
❑ To consider closed, simply one of the breaker is closed

❑ To consider open, both breakers must be open.

User Manual 341
Table 205 Available functions
LD2
Differential functions
87: differential protection (Instantaneous and percentage)
Second harmonic restraint and blocking (Cross blocking)
87N: Restricted earth
V/f Overexcitation
5º harmonic level Overexcitation
Directional supervisión
Saturation detector
Load compensation
86 function
Distance functions
Quadrilateral Characteristic (5 zones) 
Mho Characteristic (5 zones) 
21 High Speed 
Zone 1 Extension 
Double Lines  (Note 2)
Lines with Series Compensation 
CVT: Lines with Capacitive Voltage Transformers 
Common protection functions
SOFT Switch onto fault 
27 Undervoltage 
59 Overvoltage 
59N Zero sequence overvoltage 
47 V2 overvoltage protection 
Minimun voltage 
Frequency (81M/m) 
Frequency rate of change (81R) 
3x50/51 (67) Solo fasor
50N/51N (67N) Solo I0
50G/51G. Grounding overcurrent  (Note 1)
46TOC (67Q), 46IOC(67Q) 
46FA Broken conductor 
50CSC Second harmonic restraint Solo fases
37 Undercurrent 
49 Thermal image  (Note 3)
32 Power units 
Stub bus differential 
Teleprotection
Teleprotection (21) 
Teleprotection (67/67Q) 
Monitoring Units
68LE Load encroachment 
68FF Fuse failure 
78 Power Swing 
Fault locator 
Breaker Monitoring
k12 breaker monitoring per pole 
Closing and trip circuit monitoring 
Excessive number of trips 
Open pole / Faulted line detector 
Breaker status logic 
Pole discordance 
50BF breaker failure two breakers
50BF breaker failure (Single-pole/Three-pole) 
Low load breaker failure 
Automatisms two breakers
Synchronism 
Recloser (Single-pole/Three-pole) 
Frequency recloser 
Note 1: Available if the analogue input 7 is used as polarization current.

User Manual 342
Note 2: Available if the analogue input 7 is used as Parallel line Neutral current 2.
Note 3: The phase unit is always available and the neutral is available when the analogue input 7 is used as polarization current
Table 205 shows the available functions. Some of them that depends on the analogue 7 type.
❑ Neutral overcurrent. It always uses the zero sequence.

❑ Directional. If the polarization current is not available, the I polarization is not allowed.
❑ Distance units. If In2 current is not available, current compensation is not used, independently of the value of the setting
"Km Module".
❑ The calculations for sequences are performed with total currents.
❑ Grounding overcurrent. It is only available when analogue input 7 is configured as polarization current.
❑ Restricted ground. It´s only available when analogue input 7 is configured as polarization current.
❑ Neutral 50BF is not available.
❑ Breaker logic. It uses both breakers independently.
7.1.1 Differential functions

Phase measurements used are the sum of the current phasor of each breaker for both fundamental and harmonics. They are used
in:
❑ Differential protection (Instantaneous and percentage)

❑ Second harmonic restraint and blocking (Cross blocking)
❑ 5º harmonic level Overexcitation
❑ Directional supervision
The measures sent to the remote end are the sum of the current phasor of each breaker.
Restricted ground (87N) is only available when analogue input 7 is configured as polarization current.
7.1.2 Distance functions

Phase measurements used are the sum of the current phasor of each breaker for both fundamental and harmonics.
If In2 current is not available, current compensation is not used, so the calculations of the characteristics don´t take into account
the settings of the 5 zones:
❑ Km Module. Indicates the mutual compensation factor module of the parallel lines.
❑ Km Angle (º). Indicates the parallel lines mutual compensation factor angle.
The signals used in each phase of the Mho characteristic are:
Table 206 Mho characteristic signals
Unit Sop (Operation signal) Spol (Polarization signal)

AN [ Ia + 3·I0  knx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Va Va1: current or memorized
BN [ Ib + 3·I0  knx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Vb Vb1: current or memorized
CN [ Ic + 3·I0  knx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Vc Vc1: current or memorized
AB Iab  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vab Vab1: current or memorized
BC Ibc  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vbc Vbc1: current or memorized
CA Ica  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vca Vca1: current or memorized
The signals used in each phase of the quadrilateral characteristic are:

User Manual 343
Table 207 quadrilateral characteristic signals
Unit Ieq Vpol Ipol

AN [ Ia + 3·I0  k0x ] Va 3I0, 3I2 or Max(3I0, 3i2)
BN [ Ib + 3·I0  k0x ] Vb 3I0, 3I2·a or Max(3I0, 3I2·a)
CN [ Ic + 3·I0  k0x ] Vc 3I0, 3I2· a2 or Max(3I0, 3I2·a2)
AB Iab Vab I2· a2 or Iab
BC Ibc Vbc I2 or Ibc
CA Ica Vca I2· a or Ica
If In2 current is not available, current compensation is not used, the the calculations of SIR for CVT is:
Table 208 Calculating the SIR for Different Units
SIR for single phase faults SIR for single phase-phase faults
(Vnom/((Ia + 3·I0kn1 )·Z1)) - 1 (Unom/(Iab·Z1)) - 1
(Vnom/((Ib + 3·I0kn1 )·Z1)) - 1 (Unom/(Ibc·Z1)) - 1
(Vnom/((Ic + 3·I0kn1 )·Z1)) - 1 (Unom/(Ica·Z1)) - 1
7.1.3 General protection functions

Phase measurements used are the sum of the current phasor of each breaker for both fundamental and harmonics.
As neutral current, the zero sequence is used (3·I0).
Phase overcurrent.
The measure can only be phasor.
Neutral overcurrent.
It uses the zero sequence (3·I0). The measure can only be phasor.
If the polarization current is not available, the I polarization is not allowed.
Watt-metric and I*cos() / I*sin() directional always use 3·I0.
Grounding overcurrent.
It´s only available when analogue input 7 is configured us polarization current.
Second and fifth harmonic block
It´s only available when analogue input 7 is configured us polarization current; because it´s used to block Grounding overcurrent.
Thermal image.
It´s only available for phase.
The neutral unit is available when analogue input 7 is configured us polarization current.
Stub bus differential.
It´s only available in 52 ½ models.
The operation is indicated by the "Stub bus" in chapter "Protection functions".
7.1.4 Breaker
The breaker status uses both breakers:
❑ To consider closed, simply one of the breaker is closed

❑ To consider open, both breakers must be open.
Breaker logic uses both breakers independently (see chapter "Breaker") with nodes:

User Manual 344
❑ Breaker status. Nodes XCBR1 and XCBR2

❑ Inputs based breaker failure. Nodes RBFS1 and RBFS2.
❑ Pole discordance. Nodes RPLD1 and RPLD2.
❑ Breaker operation supervision. Nodes CBOU1 and CBOU2.
7.1.4.1 Breaker failure (50BF)

The operation is indicated by the "Breaker failure" in chapter "Protection functions".
The function is performed independently on each of the breakers.
Neutral 50BF is not available.
There are independent functions (settings, signals, commands…) for every breaker. The nodes are:
❑ Node PROT/FRBRF1. The function uses the measures of the current transformers 1, 2 y 3 (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1).
❑ Node PROT/FRBRF2. The function uses the measures of the current transformers 4, 5 y 6 (Ia2, Ib2, Ic2).
7.1.4.2 Open pole detector

The operation is indicated by the "Open pole detector" in chapter "Breaker".
It uses the sum of the current phasor of each breaker.
To consider open, both breakers must be open.
The signals generated by this function are used in other protection functions:
❑ Distance mho and quadrilateral characteristics

❑ 21 High Speed zone
❑ Phase selector
❑ Directional
❑ Mho and quadrilateral supervision
❑ Load encroachment
❑ Power swing
7.1.4.3 Dead or de-energized line

Dead line analysis is performed for each of the breaker 77. The settings are common for both breaker and are indicated in the
dead line function. Table 209 shows the available signals.
Table 209 Dead line signals per breaker
Signal Data Atributte

A1 open phase (I <) OpnPhs1 phsA
B1 open phase (I <) OpnPhs1 phsB
C1 open phase (I <) OpnPhs1 phsC
A2 open phase (I <) OpnPhs2 phsA
B2 open phase (I <) OpnPhs2 phsB
C2 open phase (I <) OpnPhs2 phsC
7.1.5 Breaker and a half supervision

It is used to avoid nuisance tripping on near faults but outside the protected area.
77
From firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.20

User Manual 345
In external faults with large current flow, one of the current transformers can saturate without providing line current to the fault
and in this case:
❑ There is phase current with any direction (as measured current is spurious) and voltage close to zero, which can generate a
trip of the distance unit.
❑ If it is a phase-phase fault, zero sequence current appears due to saturation and neutral directional units can act.
An output signal is available.
❑ Node: PROT/BHPTRC1
❑ Output: Table 210 shows the signals of this function.
 Block by External Fault: It is activated when an external fault is detected to protect the area, which can cause false
alarms.
Table 210 52 ½ supervision
Signal Data Atributte

Block by External Fault ExFIBI general
Phase currents of the two breakers are compared (IA1 and IA2, IB1 and IB2, IC1 and IC2).
An external fault is considered when, at least at some phase, the current of the two breakers exceed 3 times the rated current in
rms value.
If the currents are in phase, the fault is internal; while if the current are in opposite direction (continuous current) the fault is
external. There are several factors that make the currents are not exactly in phase in internal faults and not in opposite phase in
external fault, the following angular criteria is applied:
Figure 188. Angular criteria for external faults
The signal "Block by External Fault" is activated when in some phase the following conditions are met:
❑ The current at the same phase of the two breakers exceeds 3 times the nominal current in rms value.
❑ The angle difference between the same phase of the two breakers is between 110º and 250º.
In this situation the following units are blocked:
❑ Distance units, programmed as forward, which have involved the phase that indicates external fault. And for zone 1 all
units programmed as forward are blocked.
❑ Neutral directional programmed as forward is blocked.

User Manual 346
FAULT LOCATOR 
8. FAULT LOCATOR
The fault locator for single and double lines processes the information collected in relation to each fault and calculates the estimated
distance to the point in which the fault has occurred, as well as the fault resistance.
The initial data necessary in order to arrive at the final calculation is:
❑ Sample by sample values of the voltage and current signals collected in the moment in which the fault is produced.
❑ The impedance parameters of the line in which the fault has occurred.
❑ Length of the line.
❑ The Voltage transformers and Current transformers transformation ratios of the bay that captured the fault.
The result is the distance to the fault in km or miles, together with the fault resistance and a locator exit code.
The node corresponding to the fault locator is PROT/RFLO.
All the settings are in primary values.
The settings necessary for the operation of the distance calculation algorithm are as follows (see Table 211):
❑ Enabled. Indicates whether the locator is enabled or not.

❑ Line length (Kms or miles). Indicates the length of the protected line.
❑ Z1 Imp. (Ohm p.u.length). The line’s positive sequence impedance module by unit length.
❑ Z1 angle (º). The line’s positive sequence impedance angle.
❑ Z0 Imp.(Ohm p.u.length). The line’s zero sequence impedance module per unit length.
❑ Z0 angle (º). The line’s zero sequence impedance angle.
❑ Y1(1/ohm p.u.length)*10e-9. Imaginary part of the line’s positive sequence admittance.
❑ Y0(1/ohm p.u.length)*10e-9. Imaginary part of the line’s zero sequence admittance.
❑ Z1 Local Source (Ohm). Local source positive sequence impedance module.
❑ Z1 Local Source angle (º). Local source positive sequence impedance angle.
❑ Z0 Local Source (Ohm). Local source zero impedance module. This setting only applies when the relay is set to receive phase to
phase voltages and the fault locator is enabled. The relay internally calculates the zero sequence voltage from the zero sequence
current (I0=IN/3) and the settled local source zero sequence impedance. With this value and with the phase to phase voltages is
able to calculate the single phase voltages and execute the calculation like the normal case.
❑ Z0 Local Source angle (º). Local source zero sequence impedance angle. This setting only applies when the relay is set to receive
phase to phase voltages.
❑ Z1 Remote Source (ohm). Remote source positive sequence impedance module.
❑ Z1 Remote Source angle (º). Remote source positive sequence impedance angle.
❑ Z1eq Parallel (Ohm). Positive sequence impedance module in parallel with the line.
❑ Z1eq Parallel Angle (º). Positive sequence impedance angle in parallel with the line.
❑ Phase current sens. (A). Minimum variation threshold in the phase current (in primary value) for the detection of the fault.
❑ Ground current sens. (A). Minimum variation threshold in the neutral current (in primary value) for the detection of the fault.
❑ Voltage sensitivity (V). Minimum variation threshold in the voltage (in primary value) for the detection of the fault.
❑ Locator output permanent. Indicates whether the distance measurement is maintained until the next fault (set to “YES”) or only the
seconds indicated in the “Locator output duration(s)” setting (set to “NO”).
❑ Locator output duration(s). Distance measurement maintenance time (s).
❑ Line type. Allows the user to select between single line or double line.
❑ Z0M Mutual(Ohm p.u.length). Mutual impedance module, by unit length. This setting only applies when the relay is set to double
lines.
❑ Z0M Mutual angle (º). Mutual impedance angle. This setting only applies when the relay is set to double lines.

User Manual 347
FAULT LOCATOR 
❑ Filter enabled. If set to “YES” and if the fault point is detected during the ten cycles following a breaker closure, the neutral current
is checked to see whether is exceeds the “I Minimum after close (A)” setting. If it is, inrush is considered to exist and prefault
current values equal to zero are employed in order to avoid the inrush distortion in these measurements. The neutral current is
also checked to see whether it exceeds the “Ground maximum current (A)” setting. If it is set to “NO”, neither the inrush nor the
neutral current are measured.
❑ I Minimum after close (A). Current threshold (in primary value) for the detection of inrush. Only used if the filter setting is enabled.
If a switch on to fault is detected (by the status of the breaker) during the first 10 cycles, single – phase ground faults that do not go
beyond the INmin threshold are blocked. If it is set to 4999A all the faults (single – phase and polyphase) are blocked. A possible
use is when there is a great distortion in the shape of a wave after a closing. For example, in the case of a distribution with a lot of
transformers hanging from the line, the breaker closing will cause a high inrush that can make the low current earth faults
calculation results distorted. With the I0min threshold the earth fault calculation is filtered, the I0of which must be lower than this
threshold.
❑ Ground maximum current (A). Threshold (in primary value) indicating the system’s maximum neutral current under normal
conditions. It is only used if the filter setting is enabled.
Ohm p.u indicates ohms per unit of length. For a line length of 100 km and a line impedance of 100 ohm, the setting in ohm p.u is
calculated as follows:
Ohm p.u = Line impedance / line length = 100 ohm /100km = 1 ohm p.u,
If the impedances are available in secondary values, these can be converted to primary values with the following formula:
𝑉_𝑇𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠_𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜
𝑍𝑃𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑟𝑦 = 𝑍𝑆𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑦
𝐼_𝑇𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠_𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜
There are independent settings:
❑ PROT/RFLO node:
❑ Settings: There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 196.

User Manual 348
FAULT LOCATOR 
Table 211 Locator settings

LocEna Enabled Boolean
LinLenKm (LinLenkm in Ed2) Line length (Kms or miles) 0.1 5000 0.1 float
Z1Mod Z1 Imp. (Ohm p.u.length) 0.001 300 0.001 float
Z1Ang Z1 angle (º) 15 90 0.1 float
Z0Mod Z0 Imp.(Ohm p.u.length) 0.001 300 0.001 float
Z0Ang Z0 angle (º) 15 90 0.1 float
Y1 Y1(1/ohm p.u.length)*10e-9 0 50000 0.1 float
Y0 Y0(1/Ohm p.u.length)*10e-9 0 50000 0.1 float
Z1LMod Z1 Local Source (Ohm) 0.001 20000 0.001 float
Z1LAng Z1 Local Source angle (º) 15 90 0.1 float
Z0LMod Z0 Local Source (Ohm) 0.001 300 0.001 float
Z0LAng Z0 Local Source angle (º) 15 90 0.1 float
Z1RMod Z1 Remote Source (Ohm) 0.001 20000 0.001 float
Z1RAng Z1 Remote Source angle(º) 15 90 0.1 float
Z1mMod Z1eq Parallel (Ohm) 0.001 20000 0.001 float
Z1mAng Z1eq Parallel angle (º) 15 90 0.1 float
PhsASens Phase current sens. (A) 10 100000 0.1 float
NeuSens Ground current sens. (A) 10 100000 0.1 float
PhsVSens Voltage sensitivity (V) 10 100000 0.1 float
PlsTms Locator output duration(s) 0 7200 1 Int32
PlsFEna Locator output permanent 0 1 1 Boolean
Linetype Line type 0 1 1 Single /Double enum
ZmMod Z0M Mutual(Ohm p.u.length) 0.0001 300 0.0001 float
ZmAng Z0M Mutual angle (º) 15 90 0.1 float
FilEna Filter enabled 0 1 1 Boolean
IminAfCl I Minimum after close (A) 0 5000 0.1 float
NMaxVal Ground maximum current (A) 0 5000 0.1 float
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 Boolean
From firmware version 5.20.15.8 and ICD version 6.3.0.0, the angle range is 15-90º. In previous versions it was 0-360º.
If any of the following parameters is unknown, the recommended values are:
Admittances (Y1,Y0): 0
Source impedance (Z1R, Z1S):
Module: 20000
Argument: 45º
Parallel impedance (Z1eq):
Module: 20000
Argument: 45º
Sensitivities:
I = 50% pick up 51 (A)
I0 = 50% pick up 51N (A)
V = 5% nominal voltage (V)
8.1 LOCATOR OPERATION
The process that follows the locator’s algorithm can be summarized in 4 steps, which are explained below:

User Manual 349
FAULT LOCATOR 
❑ Fault instant detection

❑ Pre-fault and post-fault filtering
❑ Determination of the fault type
❑ Localization algorithm
8.1.1 Fault detection

Once the protection has picked up, the fault detection algorithm starts processing the analogue signals received in search of the
exact instant in which a fault has been produced. This search is made by comparing samples from consecutive cycles.
8.1.2 Pre-fault and post-fault filtering

The distance calculation algorithm uses the fundamental components of the voltage and current waves. The filtering extracts the
components from the signals stored at the pick up.
The collected signals are processed by a digital filter which provides the fundamental voltage and current components. A cosine
filter is used for this stage.
8.1.3 Determination of the fault type

Before launching the distance calculation algorithm in conjunction with the pre-fault and fault measurements calculated in the
previous step, the fault type must be defined.
The locator includes an algorithm that determines which phases have been affected by the fault. The algorithm is based on the
well-known Girgis method for distance relays. This procedure, which analyses the different magnitudes of change between the pre-
fault and post-fault situations in the current’s fundamental component, has demonstrated enviable precision in its results.
8.1.4 Distance calculation

The distance calculation algorithm has been developed for single (see Figure 189) and double lines.
When a fault happens in a line corresponding to our relay, the information gathered by the locator, placed at one extreme of the
line, is reduced to the voltage and current values.
The data necessary to fully determine the system are obtained from the situation existing in the instant immediately preceding the
fault and in the situation of the fault itself.
8.1.4.1 Filtered by the maximum neutral current level (cross country faults)
In cross country faults (simultaneous faults in different lines or in the same line, e.g. AN in the protected line and BN in the
adjacent line), the zero sequence current level detected in the system is superior to the maximum zero sequence current level
for single phase faults.
In these situations, the protection locates the fault but indicates that the “Ground maximum current (A)” setting has been
exceeded, as in these situations the voltages are distorted by the lack of the adjacent line fault and can cause erroneous
calculations in the fault distance.
This mode is only operative if the “Filter enabled” setting is active. In this case, the result of the localization will be displayed in
the fault report, although in the control measurements it will be reported as invalid.

User Manual 350
FAULT LOCATOR 
Figure 189 Line topology
8.2 PRESENTATION OF THE RESULTS
The presentation of the results is carried out in several ways:
❑ By display. In the “Fault reports” submenu.

❑ In the faults report.
❑ In a control measurement. It remains active during the programmed time or until another fault is produced.
In addition to the distance calculated, the fault resistance and the locator exit code are provided both in the display and in the fault
report. The locator exit codes are shown below:
❑ LOCATED: The fault has been located.

❑ LITTLE PREFAULT/ LITTLE PRE: There are few pre-fault cycles, pre-fault cycles <3 cycles.
❑ LITTLE POSTFAULT/ LITTLE POST: There are few post-fault cycles.
❑ TRUNC: The fault has been processed but the localization algorithm has been truncated because the high number of
iterations.
❑ IN>I: The neutral current (IN) is greater than the set maximum neutral current.
❑ IN<I: The neutral current (IN) is lower than the set minimum neutral current following closure.
❑ NOT FAULT: The fault instant has not been detected.
❑ OUT OF LINE: The calculated distance is out of the set line length. If the calculated distance is greater than 150% of the
line length, the distance value is not shown.
❑ NOT ENABLED: The locator is not enabled.
❑ NEGATIVE DISTANCE: The distance calculated is negative. In this case, the distance value is not displayed.
❑ NOT LOCATED: The locator algorithm has not run.
For example, a locator result indicating the LITTLE PRE/IN>I/OUT OF LINE code should be interpreted as follows:
The location algorithm does not have sufficient pre-fault cycles and therefore considers that the fault sample is in the cycle in which the
digital pick up was produced. Furthermore, the neutral current in the system has exceeded the current value set in the “Ground
maximum current (A)” setting (this check is only carried out when the “Filter enabled” setting is set to “YES”). By exceeding this value,
the distance calculation may be erroneous. Therefore, although it is shown in the fault report it is marked as an invalid control
measure. Finally, the distance calculation has returned a value in excess of the value established in the “Line length” setting. If this
result is between 100% and 150% of the line length, it will be displayed. If it is greater, the distance will appear as NOT CALCULATED.

User Manual 351
FAULT LOCATOR 
The distance is always calculated but it will not be sent to the dispatching centre (61850 nor Procome) if one of the blockings codes of
the locator is activated. In the fault report, the distance is always included with the locator exit code.
The locator blocking causes are:
❑ Not enough cycles (< 2.5 cycles). In this case, no calculation is done.
❑ Ineutral is below the setting “I Minimum after close (A)” (resistive or distant fault). In this case the calculation is done, but
it is not sent to the dispatching centre.
❑ Ineutral is above the setting “Ground maximum current (A)” (possible cross country fault). In this case the calculation is
done, but it is not sent to the dispatching centre.
❑ General block by switch onto fault. In this case the calculation is done, but it is not sent to the dispatching centre.
8.3 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE
The model used in the example is a single distribution line.
The capacity values of the positive, negative and zero sequences are zero, so that these values do not affect the reach.
Line parameters, in primary values, are the following:
Current and voltage transformers:
Current transformation ratio (CT): 3000/1
Voltage transformation ratio (VT): 360000/100
Line parameters
Line length: 20km
Positive sequence resistance: 0.0315 Ω/km
Positive sequence inductance: 0.312 Ω/km
Zero sequence resistance: 0.269 Ω/km
Zero sequence inductance: 0.766 Ω/km
Local Source parameters:
Impedance: 6Ω
Angle: 84.2º

User Manual 352
FAULT LOCATOR 
FOR A LINE WITH THE FEATURES DESCRIBED ABOVE, FAULT LOCATOR COULD BE SET AS FOLLOWS:
Setting Value
Enabled YES
Line length 20
Z1 Imp. (ohm p.u. length) 0.314
Z1 angle (º) 84.2
Z0 Imp. (ohm p.u. length) 0.81
Z0 angle (º) 70.6
Y1 (1/ohm p.u. length)*10e-9 0
Y0 (1/ohm p.u. length)*10e-9 0
Z1 Local Source (ohm) 6
Z1 Local Source Angle.(º) 84.2
Z1 Remote Source (ohm) 20000
Z1 Remote Source Angle (º) 45
Z1eq Parallel (ohm) 20000
Z1eq Parallel Angle. (º) 45
Phase Current sensitivity (A) 40% PhaseOverCurr.Setting * CT
Ground Current sensitivity (A) 40% GroundOverCurr.Setting* GCT
Voltage sensitivity (V) 5% Vrated * VT
Locator output duration(s) 7200
Locator output permanent YES
Line type Simple
Filter enabled NO
Enable Events Record YES
WHERE:
PhaseOverCurr.Setting: Starting threshold of the phase overcurrent units.
GroundOverCurr.Setting: Starting threshold of the ground overcurrent units.
Vrated: Rated Voltage
CT: Phase current ratio.
GCT: Ground current ratio
VT: Phase voltage ratio.

User Manual 353
MONITORING 
9. MONITORING
9.1 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY MONITORING
This function checks if the external supply voltage is within the set range. It generates two signals:
❑ Auxiliary power supply greater than maximum threshold. If the supply voltage exceeds the set maximum threshold.
❑ Auxiliary power supply lower than minimum threshold. If the supply voltage is below the set minimum threshold.
The settings for configuring the external power supply monitoring (Table 212):
❑ Enabled: Enables the external power supply monitoring function.

❑ Minimum threshold. Indicates the minimum power supply voltage threshold, below which an alarm is issued.
❑ Maximum threshold. Indicates the maximum power supply voltage threshold, above which an alarm is issued.
Table 212 External power supply monitoring settings

SupSpvEna Enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
LoSuppV Minimum threshold 10 280 1 float
HiSuppV Maximum threshold 10 280 1 float
MaskEna Enable Events record NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
There are two independent functions with settings, commands and outputs:
❑ Node:
 PROT/CESS1 for power supply 1
 PROT/CESS2 for power supply 2 (only in devices with redundant power supply)
❑ Settings. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 212.
❑ There are no logical inputs or commands
 Vcc Supervision Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 HH Infeed. Indicates that the power supply has exceeded the maximum threshold.
 LL Infeed. Indicates that the power supply is below the minimum threshold.
❑ Measurement. The external power supply values are available in the node GEN/LLN0 (see Table 214)
Table 213 Power supply monitoring outputs
Signal (CESS1) Signal (CESS2: redundant power supply) Data Attribute

Vcc Supervision Status Vcc 2 Supervision Status StEna stVal
HH Infeed HH Infeed 2 OverVcc general
LL Infeed LL Infeed 2 UnderVcc general

User Manual 354
MONITORING 
Table 214 Power supply measurement
Measurement Data Attribute

Power supply Psup net
Power supply2 Psup2 net
9.2 TEMPERATURE MONITORING
This function checks if the temperature is within the set range. It generates two signals:
❑ Temperature greater than maximum threshold. If the temperature exceeds the set maximum threshold.
❑ Temperature lower than minimum threshold. If the temperature is below the set minimum threshold.
The settings for configuring the external power supply monitoring (Table 212):
❑ Enabled: Enables the temperature monitoring function.

❑ Minimum temperature (ºC). Indicates the minimum temperature threshold, below which an alarm is issued.
❑ Maximum temperature (ºC). Indicates the maximum temperature threshold, above which an alarm is issued.
Table 215 Temperature monitoring settings

TmpSpvEna Enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
LoTmpVal Minimum temperature (ºC) -40 0 1 float
HiTmpVal Maximum temperature (ºC) 50 100 1 float
❑ PROT/CTSU1 node
❑ Settings. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 215.
❑ Outputs: Measurement. The temperature value is available (see Table 217)
❑ Table 216 shows the function’s output data.
 Enabled. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 Temperature greater than maximum threshold. Indicates that the temperature has exceeded the maximum threshold.
 Temperature lower than minimum threshold. Indicates that the temperature is below the minimum threshold.
❑ Measurement. The temperature value is available (see Table 217)
Table 216 Temperature monitoring outputs

Enabled StEna stVal
Power supply greater than maximum OverTemp general
Power supply lower than minimum UnderTemp general
Table 217 Temperature measurement

Temperature Temp net

User Manual 355
MONITORING 
9.3 DIS BLOCKING BY LACK OF VAUX
If enabled, it checks that the external power supply exceeds the battery failure threshold, generating an alarm signal when it is below
the threshold.
In devices with redundant power supply, every power supply generates an independent DFFA signal. With the setting "Power Supply" a
general DFFA signal in generated.
The settings for configuring the battery failure monitoring (Table 218)
❑ Enabled: Enables the battery failure monitoring function.

❑ Power Supply: In devices with redundant power supply, selects which power supply generates the DFFA signal:
 PS1. Only Power supply 1 generates DFFA
 PS2. Only Power supply 2 generates DFFA
 PS1 or PS2. Weak Infeed DFFA1 or DFF2 indicates DFFA
 PS1 and PS2. Both power supplies must indicate DFFA.
Table 218 Battery failure monitoring settings

SupSpvEna Enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
PS1
PS2
SrcSpv Power Supply enum
PS1 or PS2
PS1 and PS2
There are independent settings and outputs:
❑ PROT/CSUS1 node
❑ Settings. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 218.
 Enabled. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 Weak Infeed DFFA. Indicates that the external power supply is below the minimum threshold as indicated in the
setting "Power supply".
 Weak Infeed DFFA1. Indicates that the external power supply 1 is below the minimum threshold.
 Weak Infeed DFFA2. Indicates that the external power supply 2 is below the minimum threshold.
Table 219 Battery failure monitoring outputs

Enabled StEna stVal
Weak Infeed DFFA DFFA general
Weak Infeed DFFA1 DFFA1 general
Weak Infeed DFFA2 DFFA2 general
9.4 INTERNAL BATTERY FAILURE MONITORING
The internal battery used for data maintenance is checked to ensure that it does not fall below a security level.
There are independent outputs:

User Manual 356
MONITORING 
❑ GEN/LPHD1 node
❑ It does not use settings.
❑ There are no logical inputs or commands.
 Internal battery failure. Indicates that the internal battery level is below the minimum threshold.
❑ Measurement. The battery value is available (see Table 221)
Table 220 Internal battery failure outputs

Battery failure BatAlm general
Table 221 Internal battery measurement

internal battery IntBat net
9.5 UNIT CHECKS
The unit continually checks the various incorporated elements and cards. If an error is detected in any of the elements or cards, an
alarm is generated. If the error affects the unit’s operation, a critical error is generated, which in addition to the signal acts on :
❑ Colour front LED. Non-configurable status LED, which indicates the unit’s general status. If the LED is green, it indicates
that everything is correct, while if it is red it indicates a critical error in the unit.
❑ CPU Relay. Non-configurable 3-contact relay, which indicates the unit’s general status. If the LED is active (common
terminal – NO), it indicates that everything is correct, while if it is deactivated (common terminal– NC) it indicates a critical
error in the unit. If the unit is switched off, the relay is deactivated.
❑ The unit's alarm signals are to be found in the LPHD node. The available signals indicate faults in the card check, in the
communications between the cards, in the unit’s configuration, etc.:
❑ Critical hardware error. Indicates that a critical error has been produced. In addition to this signal, the cause that produced
the signal will be indicated.
❑ CPU error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the CPU. It generates critical error signal.
❑ Analogue error. Indicates an error in transformers card. It generates critical error signal.
❑ I/O micro error. Indicates an error in the I/O cards’ micro.
❑ Analogue connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communications between the CPU and the
transformers card. It generates critical error signal.
❑ I/O connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communication between the CPU and an I/O card. It
generates critical error signal. Additionally, it will indicate the card which has suffered the failure:
 Error card address x. Indicates that there is a communication error with the card with the address x.
❑ Front connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communications between the CPU and the unit’s
front card. It generates critical error signal.
❑ Shared analogue memory error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data exchange memory between the CPU
and the transformers card. It generates critical error signal.
❑ Error shared I/O memory. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data exchange memory between the CPU and
the I/O cards. It generates critical error signal.
❑ RTC clock error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the real time clock.
❑ Continuous component monitoring alarm. Indicates that an error in the continuous measurement monitoring has been
detected in the transformers card.

User Manual 357
MONITORING 
❑ Alarm settings. Indicates that errors have been detected in the storage of the unit’s settings. It generates critical error
signal.
❑ FW Alarm. Indicates that the relay firmware versions are incompatible.
❑ Memory check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the checking of the unit’s memory. It generates critical
error signal.
❑ Converter check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the transformers card AD converter. It generates
critical error signal.
❑ Converter voltage level alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the transformers card reference voltages. It
generates critical error signal.
❑ Relay activation alarm. Indicates that an error has been detected in the activation of at least one of the I/O cards’ relays. It
generates critical error signal.
❑ I/O configuration error. Indicates that the configuration of the I/O cards does not coincide with the unit’s correct
configuration. It generates critical error signal.
❑ General Vdc error. Indicates a failure in the internal power supply levels. It generates critical error signal.
❑ Frequency configuration error. This is not a unit failure, but rather a configuration failure. Indicates that the frequency
measurement of the signals being injected into the unit do not match the set measurement, that is, the unit is configured
as 50Hz and the signals which are being injected are greater than 55Hz; or that the unit is configured as 60 Hz and the
signals being injected are less than 55 Hz.
❑ Internal battery failure. Indicates that the data storage battery is below the security levels and that the data may be lost at
shutdown.
❑ Version compatibility error. Indicates that the versions of the unit's firmware are not correct.
❑ Time setting configuration alarm. Indicates that there is an error in the configuration of the unit’s time setting.
❑ For each I/O card there is are 5 signals, indicating:
 Status OK. Indicates that the card is configured correctly and without errors.
 Configured & No_detected. Indicates that the card is configured by the user, but not detected in the unit. This may be
because it is not assembled or because it has an error. Equivalent to the current communication error.
 Different configuration. The type indicated by the user and the type detected by the unit do not coincide.
 No_configured & detected. Indicates that card that has not been configured by the user has been detected in an
address.
 Internal card error. A card check error has been received (includes relay check).
❑ ICD error. Indicates the last ICD received by the device was wrong and it was refused by the device. Once activated, this
signal is deactivated when a correct ICD is received.
❑ Power supply 1 OFF. Indicates that the power supply 1 is turned off. It is only available in devices with redundant power
supply.
❑ Power supply 2 OFF. Indicates that the power supply 2 is turned off. It is only available in devices with redundant power
supply.
❑ SV Board Error. Indicates that there is an error in the sampled values board.
❑ Analog Input Config OK. Indicates that analog input configuration is correct. It only applies to devices with input/output
modules with analogue inputs (16DI/8AI).
Table 222 Checking signals

Critical hardware error HwCrAlm stVal
CPU error CPUAlm stVal
Analogue error AnaAlm stVal
I/O micro error ESAlm stVal
Analogue connection error AnaComAlm stVal
I/O connection error ESComAlm stVal
Front connection error MMIComAlm stVal
Shared analogue memory error AnDPMAlm stVal

User Manual 358
MONITORING 
Shared I/O memory error ESDPMAlm stVal

RTC clock error RTCAlm stVal
Continuous component monitoring alarm Harm0Alm stVal
Alarm settings SettingAlm stVal
Firmware alarm FwAlm stVal
Memory check alarm MemAlm stVal
Converter check alarm ADCAlm stVal
Converter voltage level alarm VRefAlm stVal
Relay activation alarm DOAlm stVal
I/O configuration error IOCnfError stVal
Card address error 1 GGIO1Alm stVal
Same as rest of I/O up to 8
Card address error x (x from 2 to 8) GGIOxAlm stVal
General Vdc error VccError stVal
Frequency configuration error FrConfAl stVal
Internal battery failure BatAlm stVal
Version compatibility error VerAlm stVal
Time setting configuration alarm HSetAlm stVal
ICD error FailICD stVal
Card 1 ok GGIO1Ok stVal
Card 1 ConfiguredYNo_detected GGIO1Nodet stVal
Card 1 Different configuration GGIO1Dif stVal
Card 1 No_configured Y Detected GGIO1NConf stVal
Card 1 Internal card error GGIO1HwErr stVal
Same as rest of I/O up to 8
Front ok FRONTOk stVal
Front Configured Y No_detected FRONTNodet stVal
Different front configuration FRONTDif stVal
Front No_configured Y Detected FRONTNConf stVal
Front Internal card error FRONTHwErr stVal
Power supply 1 OFF FailSup1 stVal
Power supply 2 OFF FailSup2 stVal
SV Board Error SVError stVal
Analog Input Config OK AnaI stVal

User Manual 359
CONFIGURATION 
10. CONFIGURATION
10.1 FRECUENCY, MEASUREMENT AND TRANSFORMERS
The current and voltage transformers are configured in the Differential General settings (PDIF node).
10.1.1 Current
The rated current and the transformation ratios are configured in the Differential General settings (PDIF node).
10.1.2 Frequency and voltage

The rated voltage are configured in the Differential General settings (PDIF node).
The PROT/TVTR node is used for the voltage transformation ratios (see Table 223).
❑ Phase transformation ratio. Indicates the phase voltage transformation ratio.

❑ Voltage phases used. Selects the voltage phases used in the protection functions. Different phase
combinations (both earth to phase and phase to phase) can be selected:
 None. No voltage is enabled
 A. Earth-phase voltage only operates in phase A
 B. Earth-phase voltage only operates in phase B
 A-B. Earth-phase voltages operate in phases A and B
 C. Earth-phase voltage only operates in phase C
 A-C. Earth-phase voltages operate in phases A and C
 B-C. Earth-phase voltages operate in phases B and C
 A-B-C. The three earth-phase voltage operate
❑ Frequency. Selects the unit’s rated operating frequency 50Hz or 60Hz
❑ VN transformation ratio. Indicates the neutral voltage transformer ratio.
❑ Synchro I voltage ratio. Indicates synchronism 1 voltage transformer ratio.
❑ Synchro II voltage ratio. Indicates synchronism 2 voltage transformer ratio. Only in devices with two
synchronism voltages.

User Manual 360
CONFIGURATION 
Table 223 Voltage characteristics

VRat Phase transformation ratio 1 10000 0.1 float
VSel Voltage phases used 0 8 1 enum
HzRtg (HzVal in Ed2) Frequency 50Hz (0) /60Hz (1) enum
VNRat VN transformation ratio 1 10000 0.1 float
VsRat1 Synchro I voltage ratio 1 10000 0.1 float
VsRat2 Synchro II voltage ratio 1 10000 0.1 float
10.1.3 Power and energy

The PROT/MPWE node, which indicates the conditions for the power calculation, is used (see Table 224):
❑ Change sign P. Indicates if the sign change in the real power calculation is enabled.
❑ Change sign Q. Indicates if the sign change in the reactive calculation is enabled.
❑ Real energy constant. Indicates the real energy impulse factor, i.e., the number of kWh by virtue of
which the counter is incremented by one unit.
❑ Reactive energy constant. Indicates the reactive energy impulse factor, i.e., the number of kWh by
virtue of which the counter is incremented by one unit.
The energy counters value is available in the PROT/MMTR node, with the data:
❑ Positive real energy counter: SupWh.

❑ Negative real energy counter: DmdWh.
❑ Positive reactive energy counter: SupVArh.
❑ Negative reactive energy counter: DmdVArh.
Table 224 Power characteristics

PSiCh Sign change P NO (0) / YES (1) float
QSiCh Sign change Q NO (0) / YES (1) float
CorWh78 Active energy constant 0.5 1000 0.001 float
CorVArh78 Reactive energy constant 0.5 1000 0.001 float
78
From firmware version 9.5.29.2 the range is 0,5 to 1000 with step 0,001. In previous versions the range was 1 to
1000 with step 1.
User Manual 361
CONFIGURATION 
10.2 CID
10.2.1 Data Storage

The unit has a CID file that follows the format defined in section 6 of the IEC 61850 standard. It is available via the following path by
FTP/SFTP “SCL/validated”, in which all the unit’s configuration information is saved, either structured in nodes that follow the IEC
61850 format or in private parts.
10.2.2 Updating CID

There are different ways to change the settings. They are listed below:
❑ Using MMS in IEC 61850

❑ Using local display
❑ Using the pacFactory (PC tool)
❑ By sending the CID by FTP/SFTP to the “SCL/notvalidated” directory
❑ Using the website.
Independently of the form used from among those listed above, the changes to the affected setting are stored in the unit’s CID file.
CONFIGURATIONS USING ED1:

On devices with IEC61850 Edition 1 configurations, when any setting is changed, the paramRev field in the node in which the
new setting has been written, as well as the LLN0 node of the Logical Device to which the node belongs, are updated in the CID
file.
The format of the paramRev data is as follows:
XXX year.month.day.time.minute.second [paramRev origin text]
❑ Where “XXX” is an integer counter that is incremented each time paramRev is updated by a setting change.
❑ "paramRev origin text“depends on the origin of the setting change:
Origin of settings change paramRev text origin

MMS IEC 61850 client BROWSER IP
Local display USER DISPLAY
pacFactory USER TOOL
New CID CID UPDATE
In the case of “New CID”, only those settings in the CID sent to the unit and which are out of range will be updated in
paramRev.
10.3 GENERAL
Two nodes are used for the general configuration of the unit
❑ GEN/LLN0. Includes the unit’s generic configuration settings

❑ PROT/LLN0. Includes the protection units’ generic configuration settings 79
The settings available in the GEN/LLN0 node are shown in protection events mask enablind. Allows the generation of protection events
associated to the function. If set to "NO", the function's protection events are not generated. If set to "YES", the function's specific
mask is contemplated:
79
Not available in CD and PB models

User Manual 362
CONFIGURATION 
❑ Language. Indicates the unit’s language. Affects the display, reports, etc.
❑ Functional key block. It allows the functional key to be blocked. When blocked commands with functional key are not
allowed.
❑ Functional keys (remote). It allows key commands with the device in remote mode.
❑ Leds Blocking. Allows the activation of the LEDs to be blocked.
❑ Blocking allowed by command. It allows blocking the reception of block/unblock protection commands.
❑ Reset Digital Output. Indicates the logic input that, when activated, reset all the digital outputs.
❑ The supported IRIG-B formats are B002, B003, B006, B007 and IEEE1344. It select whether the year is taken into account in
the synchronization by IRIG. The options are:
 “UTC without year”. The year is not taken into account and all the formats are admitted.
 “UTC with year”. With formats B006, B007 and IEE1344 the year is not taken into account. It cannot be used with
formats B002 and B003 because they set the year to zero value.
 “Local without year”. The year is not taken into account. All the formats are admitted.
 “Local with year”. With formats B006, B007 and IEE1344 the year is not taken into account. It cannot be used with
formats B002 and B003 because they set the year to zero value.
❑ Local/remote selection. Indicates the logic input that, when activated,changes the device between local/remote.
❑ Erase records. Indicates the logic input that, when activated, deletes the unit’s report queues. Affects protection events,
faults, disturbance reports, historical measurement reports, etc.
❑ Remote/ Local type. It indicates how the unit will behave when it has to block the commands it is sent. See 18.2.1
❑ Flicker Enable. Enables the digital inputs’ swing supervising function.See 0
❑ Block full records. When set to "NO", queues are circular, when the maximun number of registers is fullfiled, the oldest
one is erased. If sets to "YES", when the maximun number of registers is fullfiled, the queue is blocked and no more
registers are stored. It affects protection events, faults, disturbance reports, historical measurement reports.

User Manual 363
CONFIGURATION 
Table 225 General settings

Lang Language Spanish (0) / English (1) Boolean
BlkFKeys Functional keys blocking NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
FKeysRem Functional keys (remote) Boolean
BlkFrCom Leds Blocking NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
LogInReDO Blocking allowed by command inref
BlkComm Reset Digital Outputs Boolean
UTC without year /
UTC with year /
IrgType IRIG-B002 format enum
Local without year /
Local with year
LogInLR Local/remote selection inref
LogInDelRe Erase records inref
Not treated (0)
Iberdrola (1)
LRmode Remote/Local Type 0 3 1 enum
Exclusive (2)
No HMI (3)
FlickerEna Flicker Enabled 0 1 1 NO (0) / YES (1) enum
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
BlkFRec Block full records NO (0) / SI (1) Boolean
The settings available in the PROT/LLN079 node are shown in protection events mask enabling. Allows the generation of protection
events associated to the function. If set to "NO", the function's protection events are not generated. If set to "YES", the function's
specific mask is contemplated:
❑ Relay ON. Indicates whether the relay in service or not. If it is out of service, the protection functions do not act.
❑ Phase order. Selects the phase sequence ABC/CBA. Affects the direct and inverse sequences and, therefore, the functions
that use them. To check whether the order corresponds to wiring, check that the values expected for the indicated
configuration are obtained in the sequence measurements and that the phase current arguments (as seen in the status
screen) match selected sequence.
❑ Select Setting group 1. Indicates the logic input which, when activated, selects the settings table 1 as active.
❑ Fault reports (Prim./sec.). Select the measurements of the display fault reports between primary and secondary.

User Manual 364
CONFIGURATION 
Table 226 General protection settings

OnLine Relay ON NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
PhsOrd Phase order ABC (0) /CBA (1) enum
LogInSet1 Select Setting group 1 inref
LogInSet6 Setting change table 6 inref
FaRepTy Fault reports (Prim./sec.) Secondary (0) / Primary (1) enum
10.4 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The unit can host a variable number of input-output cards variable (from 1 to 7). Each card is configured with an internal address from
2 to 7. The power supply is assigned address 1, which is not configurable.
Each card is represented in the IEC 61850 data model as an instance of the GGIO node in the Logical Device called “GEN”. Each GGIO
has the internal address of the physical card as an instance. Thus, for example, if a unit has two input-output cards with internal
addresses 1 and 4, the GEN/GGIO1 and GEN/GGIO4 nodes will exist in the data model.
The number of digital input settings and signals present in each GGIO depends on the type of card used. Continuing the example, if the
card with the internal address 1 has 6 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs, the GGIO1 node will have 6 digital input signals and 4 digital
output signals, as well as the settings corresponding to each digital input and output available.
The data model associated to the GGIOs is common to all and has 32 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs. Nevertheless, in each card
only the data associated with its own inputs and outputs are updated.
For each GGIO there is a boolean setting called MaskEna (event record enabled). If set to “YES”, the activation/deactivation of the
digital inputs and outputs will generate protection events. To the contrary, they will not be stored as event records.
10.4.1 Inputs
There are 2 settings available for each digital input:
❑ DIxTmms: Digital input time x (ms). This is a software filter for the activation/deactivation of digital inputs. It indicates the
milliseconds (range 0 to 100 ms80) which a digital input must be seen activated in order to be considered active. In order to
calculate an input's total activation time, the input’s hardware filter delay – which is approximately 1ms – must be added
to this time.
❑ DIxType: Digital input type x. Defines whether the input is to be interpreted as active when it is seen as closed (NO) or
when it is seen as open (NC)
Each digital input has an associated digital signal indicating its status (see Table 227). Each GGIO indicates the status of all its digital
inputs (up to 32).
Table 227 Digital input signals

Digital input 1 Ind1 stVal
Remaining inputs
80
From firmware version 5.20.15.8 and ICD version 6.3.0.0. In previous versions the maximun was 20ms

User Manual 365
CONFIGURATION 
10.4.2 Outputs
There are 3 settings available for each digital output:
❑ DOxSig: Assignment digital output x. Assigns the activation of the digital output. There are several assignment possibilities:
 Signals: They can be signals generated by the unit (trips, logics, hw check, digital inputs and outputs)
 Commands: All of the commands available in the unit can be directly programmed to a physical output
❑ DOxTmms: Digital output time x (ms). The output activation time defines the minimum operational time of each physical
output following activation (in milliseconds). The range is 0.05 to 5000 ms. The output remains active in accordance with
this time setting or the duration of the associated signal, whichever is greater.
❑ DOxTyp: Digital output type. Each output’s type is defined from among the options:
 “Not”. The output follows the assigned signal, i.e., the output is activate when the signal is active. When the
signal is deactivated, the output will deactivate if the digital output time has elapsed. To the contrary, the
output will remain active until this time elapses.
 “Stored”. Once activated, the output remains active until the relay deactivation command is issued, with the
signal assigned to the output deactivated. The command can be issued by the action of a digital input
programmed as “Local reset”, a command or by keyboard/display.
 “Trip”.79 Once activated, the output remains active until the following conditions are met: the signal assigned
to the output is deactivated and the breaker is open.
 “Close”.79 Once activated, the output remains active until the following conditions are met: the signal assigned
to the output is deactivated and the breaker is closed.
Each digital input has an associated digital signal indicating its status (see Table 229). Each GGIO indicates the status of all its digital outputs
(up to 16).
Table 228 Input/output settings

OscTms Input oscillation time (s) 1 60 1 Int32
Nchanges Number of changes 0 255 1 Int32
DI1Tmms Digital Input Time 1 (ms) 0 100 1 Int32
DI1Type Digital Input Type 1 NO (0) / NC (1) enum
DI2Tmms Digital Input Time 2 (ms) 0 100 1 Int32
DI2Type Digital Input Type 2 NO (0) / NC (1) enum
Remaining inputs DI3x, DI4x..
DO1Sig Digital Output Assignment 1 Int32
DO1Tmms Minimum Output Time 1 (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
DO1Ty Digital Output Type 1 enum
DO2Sig Digital Output Assignment 2 enum
DO2Tmms Minimum Output Time 2 (ms) 0 5000 1 enum
DO2Ty Digital Output Type 2 Int32
Remaining inputs DI3x, DI4x..
Table 229 Digital output signals

Digital output 1 SPCSO1 stVal
Remaining outputs
10.4.3 Analogue inputs

With modules type -R, -S, -T, -U, -V, -W, -X, -Y, there are available 8 analogue inputs that can be: ±1mA, ±2.5mA, ±5mA, ±20mA,
±5V, ±10V. Each input type is selected in the order, it´s not configurable by user´s settings.

User Manual 366
CONFIGURATION 
Each input has a % measure refered to the input full scale (100% with the full scale), that is, it the input type is 20mA, the 100%
indicates that the input current is 20mA.
Table 230 Analogue measurements

GGIOx.Measure 1 AnIn1 mag
10.4.4 Treatment of digital input flicker

Flicker consists of a fast and continuous change of a digital input, usually associated with a failure in the input’s contact. The
function allows a control to be performed to disable the flickering digital inputs or signals in order to prevent them from interfering
with the control system, as a disabled digital does not generate status changes.
The supervising of the swing in the digital inputs or the supervising of the flicker is conducted in accordance with certain user-
configurable settings.
On the one hand, there is a general setting that allows this function to be enabled or disabled. If this setting is disabled, not flicker
treatment is performed.
General setting for the configuration of the flicker treatment (Table 231):
❑ FlickerEna: Enables the digital inputs’ swing supervising function.

Table 231 General flicker treatment setting

FlickerEna Flicker enabled 0 1 1 NO (0) / YES (1) enum
❑ GEN/LLN0 node
Once the general flicker setting has been enabled (Table 231), there are two more setting per card for treating the
swing. They are “OscTms” and “Nchanges” which can be seen in Table 228:
❑ OscTms: The time between changes in the same direction in order for a signal to be deemed to be swinging. When a signal
is swinging a swinging signal is produced. The unit is seconds.
❑ Nchanges: The number of changes that must be produced in a swinging signal in order for the signal to become invalid and
cease from sending changes. If this setting is set to zero, it disables the swing treatment for this card, i.e., the flicker
treatment is not performed for this card.
❑ GEN/GGIOx node, in which x depends on the card’s internal address (see section 10.4)
Once a signal has been detected as swinging, it becomes questionable and oscillatory.
If this situation continues and the number of set changes (“Nchanges” setting) is exceed, the signal becomes invalid and oscillatory.
It ceases to send the changes and sends the signal's last known valid status.
When the time difference between two changes is greater than the inputs’ swing time (“OscTms” setting), the signal changes to
valid.
10.5 LEDS
10.5.1 Via GEN/IHMI node

The LEDs are programmed within the IHMI node located in the “GEN” Logical Device. There are 2 settings available for each LED:

User Manual 367
CONFIGURATION 
❑ LexSig: Assignment led x. Assigns the activation of LED x using any of the signals generated by the unit
❑ LExTyp: LED type x. It can be programmed as “not” and “stored”. In the first case, the activation of the LED follows
the activation of the signal programmed in the setting described above. If it is programmed as “stored”, the LED’s
activation will remain even if the signal that provoked its activation drops out, until the signal programmed in the
LogInReLed setting available in the IHMI node is activated.
There is a general setting for all the LEDs that indicates the logic signal used to switch of the LEDs:
❑ LED reset. Selects the signal which, when active, switches off the LEDs.
The LEDs are updated every 200ms. Thus, for the correct activation of the LEDs, the assigned signal must remain active for at least
150 ms. To the contrary, the LED cannot be activated.
Table 232 LED settings

LogInReLed LED reset inref
Le1Sig Led 1 assignment 0 20 1 Int32
Le1Ty Led 1 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
Le2Sig Led 2 assignment 0 20 1 Int32
Le2Ty Led 2 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
Remaining LEDs up to 19
10.5.2 Via CTRL/IHMI node

If the unit, in addition to the “GEN” logical device’s IHMI node defined in the previous section, has an IHMI node located in “CTRL”
Logical Device, the unit’s treatment in relation to the configuration of the LEDs differs as follows:
❑ The parameterization of the assignment of LEDs is carried out by the settings present in the CTRL/IHMI node.
❑ The parameterization of the LEDs type is carried out by the settings present in the CTRL/IHMI node.
The settings present in this node are detailed below

InRef1 Led 1 assignment - - - InRef
LEDSe1 Led 1 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
InRef2 Led 2 assignment - - - InRef
LEDSe2 Led 2 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
Remaining LEDs up to 19
There are 2 settings available for each LED:
❑ InRefx: Assignment led x. Assings the activation of LED x using any of the signals generated by the unit. The
assignment is carried out by means of a character string (see next section “Configuration with InRef”)
❑ LEDSex: LED type x. It can be programmed as “not” and “stored”. In the first case, the activation of the LED follows
the activation of the signal programmed in the setting described above. If it is programmed as “stored”, the LED’s
activation will remain even if the signal that provoked its activation drops out, until the signal programmed in the
LogInReLed setting available in the GEN/IHMI node (defined in the previous section) is activated.
10.6 CONFIGURATION WITH INREF
The InRef type settings are programmed by a string of characters in which the reference of the IEC 61850 object containing the value to
be employed as an input is indicated. The following format, as defined in the part 7.2 of the IEC 61850 standard, is employed:
LDName/LNName.DataObjectName[.SubDataObjectName[. ...]].DataAttributeName
For example,
❑ In order to program InRef1 with the GGIO1 input signal 1, the reference to be written in the InRef is:

User Manual 368
CONFIGURATION 
GEN/GGIO1.Ind1.stVal
❑ In order to program the PTOC 1 phase A trip, the reference is:
PROT/PTOC1.Op.phsA
10.7 GENERIC COMMAND
Generic commands are available within the Logical Device "GEN" on the ordGGIO1 node, which will be active for 100msg.
The commnad are the following:
❑ SPCS01, Generic command 1

❑ ………..
Are available signals associated with these generic commands, which will be available in logic, output, etc.

Generic command 1 activation Ind1 stVal
--------- stVal
Generic command 1 desactivation Ind17 stVal
--------- stVal
10.8 NAMES
The PROT/LPHD node is used for the general configuration of the units’ names and the installation.
Short names are used for the generation of the disturbance recorder and fault file names.
The settings for this node are shown in Table 233
❑ Installation name: Full name of the installation.

❑ Short name of the installation. Short name of the installation. Limited to 10 characters, this is used in the generation of
disturbance recorder and fault files. Only alphanumeric characters without accents, numbers and "_" are allowed in the
name.
❑ Relay name. Full name of the relay.
❑ Short relay name. Short name of the installation. Limited to 10 characters, this is used in the generation of disturbance
recorder and fault files. Only alphanumeric characters without accents, numbers and "_" are allowed in the name.
❑ Name of breaker 1. Full name of breaker 1.
❑ Name of breaker 2. Full name of breaker 1.

User Manual 369
CONFIGURATION 
Table 233 Name settings

InstNam Installation name String
InstShNam Installation short name 10 alphanumeric characters String
RelNam Relay name. String
RelShNam Relay short name 10 alphanumeric characters String
BkrNam1 Breaker 1 name String
BkrNam2 Breaker 2 name String
10.9 IPRV NODES CONFIGURATION
10.9.1 General IPRV settings

The device has several settings (included in the GEN/genIPRV logical node) to set certain operating modes.
These settings are considered special and they are configurable via an IEC 61850 connection or sending the CID file after editing the
values from pacFactory tool (menu Settings -> IPRV). They do not appear in the display or section pacFactory protection settings.
The settings included in this logical node are:
❑ LocalTim: Allows to force sending local time in IEC 61850 timestamps. It is important to know that this is not normative
because IEC 61850 standard defines that the timestamps must be sent in UTC format. However, with this option the device
is adapted to systems that only use local time. The default value is 0, which indicates the use of UTC. The value 1 indicates
the use of local time.
❑ MaxConn: Sets the maximum number of IEC 61850 connections that are accepted. Limited to a maximum value of 16.
❑ AplicTms: Defines the disconnection timeout at the application level. After this time (in seconds) without receiving any IEC
61850 messages the server automatically closes the connection.
❑ TipoServ: Defines some operation modes of the device.
 Value 0: Default operation mode.
 Value 1: Special operation mode that includes:
 Enable IP checking to validate a new ICD/CID file. If the IP address and the mask indicated in the
communications section of the ICD/CID file do not match the addresses of the device the file is not validated. If
the IP address of the device is changed once the file has been validated, the IEC 61850 server is disabled and
waits for the change of the IP address of the device with the one in the file or to receive a new CID file with the
correct IP.
 When a command is received, the value that the device saves in "orIdent" attribute is the IP address from
which the command was sent, regardless of the value that the client sent in the message.
 Value 2: Special operation mode that includes:
 Enable IP checking to validate a new ICD/CID file. In addition to the IP address and mask, it includes the
gateway address.
 When a report is enabled, the SCL IP address of the client is verified against the connected IP to allow that
action.
❑ AuthReq: Allows activating the password authentication in the establishment of IEC 61850 connection. The password
received is checked against the one assigned to the user “user61850”.
 The default password for this user is: user61850.
❑ DevGoose: Selects the Ethernet port for GOOSE messages. Any online change of this value requires the reset of the device
and therefore the signal ResetDev is activated.
 Eth1: GOOSE publication and reception enabled on interface ETH1.
 Eth2: GOOSE publication and reception enabled on interface ETH2.

User Manual 370
CONFIGURATION 
 Both (Eth1): Reception on both interfaces (ETH1 and ETH2). Publication is sent by only one configurable
interface for each GOOSE. By default port ETH1.
 Both (Eth2): Reception on both interfaces (ETH1 and ETH2). Publication is sent by only one configurable
interface for each GOOSE. By default port ETH2.
❑ NoGsVlan: Defines the use of the VLAN tag in GOOSE messages. Any change in this value causes the activation of the signal
ResetDev. Default value is 0.
 Value 0: GOOSE messages are sent with VLAN TAG and are received with or without VLAN TAG.
 Value 1: GOOSE messages are sent and received only without VLAN TAG.
❑ IprvMod: Sets the access level to reports, commands and logs from the different IP addresses configured in the IPRV logical
nodes defined in the following paragraph:
 Permissive: By default all IP addresses not configured in the IPRV logical nodes have access to reports,
commands and logs. The IP addresses included in the IPRV logical nodes will have the configured access level.
 Restrictive: Only IP addresses configured in the IPRV logical nodes have access to reports, commands and logs.
The access level is configured individually for each IP address. Other IP addresses do not have access.
❑ IprvConn: The value 1 limits the IEC 61850 connections only to IP addresses configured on IPRV logical nodes and any
connection from other IP address will be rejected. The value 0 allows the connection from any IP address.
❑ KAPeriodTms: Keep Alive Period. Sending period (in seconds) of keep alive messages under responding connection
conditions. Limited to a minimum value of 1 and a maximum value of 3600.
❑ KAInterTms: Keep Alive Interval. Time interval (in seconds) between requests when no response has been received.
Limited to a minimum value of 1 and a maximum value of 3600.
❑ KARetries: Keep Alive Retries. Number of send retries before closing the connection. Limited to a maximum value of 15.
❑ ChkGseAppId: Enabling APPID attribute verification of GOOSE. Enables the verification of the APPID attribute of the
receiving GOOSE messages to confirm the subscription.
 Value 0: Disabled.
 Value 1: Enabled.
Only the settings that indicate the activation of the signal ResetDev require a restart of the device to be effective.
10.9.2 IEC 61850 clients IPRV settings

There are 8 instances of this logical node (GEN/IPRVx) to configure the level access to reports, commands and logs of up to 8 IEC
61850 clients. Each client is identify by its IP address. The available settings for each logical node are:
❑ Addr: IP address of the client.

❑ EnaRpt: Enumerated value to configure the access level to reports from the defined IP address.
 [0] All: Allows access to all reports.
 [1] Yes: Allows access only to the reports defined in RptNam fields.
 [2] No: Not allowed access to any report.
❑ CmdEna: Boolean setting that with value 1 allows the execution of commands from the defined IP address.
❑ EnaLog: Enumerated value to configure the access level to logs from the defined IP address.
 [0] Read only: Only read access to the logs.
 [1] Read/write: Read and write access to the logs.
The signal GEN/IPRVx.St.stVal indicates whether the address configured on that node is in communication with the device. In case
of multiple connections from the same IP, the signal is 0 when all are closed.
These settings are considered special and they are configurable via an IEC 61850 connection or sending the CID file after editing the
values from pacFactory tool (menu Settings -> IPRV). They do not appear in the display or section pacFactory protection settings.

User Manual 371
CONFIGURATION 
10.10 MEASUREMENT’S RANGE AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION
Measures logical nodes which have the AdRanMea setting have the possibility of the automatic configuration of the measures
ranges (with value 1 in the AdRanMea setting).
AdRanMea settings in different logical nodes are independent. Each logical node can be configured independently.
Only de ranges of measures with a sAddress value are calculated.
If the value of AdRanMea setting is 1, the range configuration cannot be modified via IEC 61850 protocol.
The values that are automatically calculated are:
Measures:
❑ rangeC.hhLim.f
❑ rangeC.hLim.f
❑ rangeC.lLim.f
❑ rangeC.llLim.f
❑ rangeC.min.f
❑ rangeC.max.f
Angles:
❑ rangeAngC.hhLim.f
❑ rangeAngC.hLim.f
❑ rangeAngC.lLim.f
❑ rangeAngC.llLim.f
❑ rangeAngC.min.f
❑ rangeAngC.max.f
The calculation is made based on the values of scale range and transformation ratio of each measure as follows:
❑ Signed measures:
❑ max: scale range * transformation ratio
❑ min: - (scale range * transformation ratio)
❑ Unsigned measures
❑ max: scale range * transformation ratio
❑ min: 0
And the value of the factor configured in the multiplier attribute is applied:
❑ If multiplier > 0 it is divided by 10 multiplier

❑ If multiplier < 0 it is multiplied by 10 multiplier
In both cases the limits are configured as:
❑ hLim = max
❑ hhLim = max
❑ lLim = max * 4 / 5

User Manual 372
CONFIGURATION 
❑ llLim = max * 4 / 5
The rest of the configuration values of each measurement (db, SIUnits, multiplier, dbAng, limDb) are not modified.
10.11 INCIDENT REPORT
For the configuration of the information collected in the event report, the GEN/GSOE node is used.
The settings available on the GEN/LLN0 node are listed in Table 234:
❑ Goose signals: Indicates whether signals related to Gooses (sAddress of type GS) are included or not in the event report.
❑ Control logics:. Indicates whether or not the signals generated in control logics (LS type sAddress) are included in the event
report.
❑ Command information. Indicates whether or not the return information signals of the commands (sAddress of type RS) are
included in the event report.
❑ Quality: Indicates whether validity changes to any signal are included in the event report or not.
❑ Event Faults files Opt. 2: Enables the generation of the second option of event and fault reports in XML format (for more
details see the "Incident Report" section of the "Data acquisition functions" chapter).
Table 234. Incident report configuration settings
Dato Ajuste Mínimo Máximo Paso Observaciones Tipo

GSEvt Goose signals NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
LSEvt Control logics NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
RSEvt Command information NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
QEvt Quality NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
FilesOp2 Event Faults files Opt. 2 NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean

User Manual 373
RTD AND ANALOGUE OUTPUTS MODULE 
11. RTD AND ANALOGUE OUTPUTS MODULE

The device can have upto 2 RTD boards with 11RTD and 4 analogue outputs each one.
Each board will use an instance of the node RTD/GGIO in the logical device “GEN”.
❑ Nodes GEN/RTD/GGIO1 y GEN/RTD/GGIO2

❑ Settings and logical inputs. For details see Table 235.
❑ Commands:
 "DOrdRst". RESET RTD: Reset of the RTD signal configured as "Latching".
❑ Output: Table 236 shows output data of each RTD board.
❑ Measurements: Table 237 shows output measurements of each RTD board.
Table 235 shows the settings used for each board:
❑ Enabled. It enables the board. If the board is disabled, it does not measure the RTD inputs.
❑ There are 11 groups of settings, one for each RTD input.
 RTD1 Application. It selects the RTD input aplication between the options:
 Only measured. It only has temperature measurement. It does not generate overtemperature alarms.
 Generic. It has temperature measurement and generates overtemperature alarms.
 RTD1 Type of sensor. It selects the type of sensor connected to the input between:
 No. The input is disabled and it does not measure the temperature.
 PT100
 Ni100
 Ni120
 Cu10
 Overtemperature settings. They are used when the generic application is selected. See overtemperature chapter.
❑ There are 4 groups of settings, one for each analogue output.
 Analog Output 01 Type. It selects the type and the range of the analogue output:
 0-1mA
 0-20mA
 4-20mA
 0-10V
 Analog Output 01 Value. It selects the device measurement used to generate the value of the analogue output. The options
are:
 Not assigned
 Phase A I max., Phase B I max., Phase C I max. Secondary current maximeter. Full escale is 1.2·In
 VA, VB, VC, V avg. Secondary simple voltage. Full escale is 1.2·Vn
 VAB, VBC, VCA, UC avg. Secondary compound voltage. Full escale is 1.2·Vn·√3
 IN, IA, IB, IC, I avg. Secondary simple current. Full escale is 1.2·In
 P(Active Pow.). Secondary P absolute value. Full escale is 3·1,2·Vn·1,2·In
 Q(Reactive Pow.). Secondary Q absolute value. Full escale is 3·1,2·Vn·1,2·In
 S(Apparent Pow.). Secondary S value. Full escale is 3·1,2·Vn·1,2·In
 Cos A, Cos B, Cos C, Cos avg. Absolute value of power factor. Full scale 1

Manual de usuario 374
Table 236 shows output data of each RTD board:
❑ RTD1 Enabled. It indicates the RTD board is eneabled.

❑ RTD1 conf alarm. It indicates board configuration error.
❑ RTD1 data failure. It indicates that any of the configured RTD inputs has a failure: it is detected that the circuit is open or the
temperature is out of range.
❑ RTD1 Reset. It indicates the RTD reset command has been received.
❑ RTD1 Generic Temp Alarm. It is activated when low or high temperature alarm is detected. The inputs configured as "Not grouped"
don´t activated this signal.
❑ RTD1 Generic Temp Trip. It is activated when temperature trip is detected. The inputs configured as "Not grouped" don´t activated
this signal.
❑ There are 11 groups of signals, one for each RTD input.
 Low Temp. RTD1.1 Alarm. It is activated when the RTD overtemperature is enabled and the temperature is greater that the
setting "RTD1 Low alarm temp".
 High Temp. RTD1.1 Alarm. It is activated when the RTD overtemperature is enabled and the temperature is greater that the
setting "RTD1 High alarm temp".
 RTD1.1 Trip 1. It is activated when the RTD overtemperature is enabled and the temperature is greater that the setting "RTD1
Trip temp".
 RTD1.1 Failure. It is activated when the RTD is enabled and it is detected that the circuit is open or the temperature is out of
range.
Table 237 shows output measurements of each RTD board:
❑ There are 11 temperature measurements, one for each RTD input.

 Tmp1. It indicates the temperature of the RTD input, calculated with the resistance measured and the type of sensor.
❑ There are 4 output measurements, one for each analogue output.
 OutAn1. It indicates the output value, calculated with the configured measurement and the type of output.
The temperature and the output values can be monitored with:
❑ Front panel Display

The display will show them, when the GGIO screens have been selected in the configuration. The RTD board screen will show the
temperature in the left and the outputs in the right.
❑ Status report.
Every RTD board has a view where the temperatures are show as EAx (where x=1..11) and the analogue outputs are show as SAx
(where x=1..4).
❑ IEC 61850 data model (see Table 237).
The temperature is shown in ºC. When the board or the RTD input is disabled, the temperature is show as "---" in the display and status
report. Whe the value is out of range (-50ºC.. 250ºC) or there is a failure (for example the circuit is open), the temperature is show as
"OoR".
The analogue output value depends on the configured measurement and the type of output. When the value is greater than the output
full scale, the output value will be the full. The units are mA when the types are 0..1mA, 0..20mA or 4..20mA and voltios when the
selected range is 0..10V.
An example of the analogue value calculation:
With settings "Analog Output 01 Type = 0-1mA" and "Analog Output 01 Value = Ia", if Irated=5A and the Ia value is 1A, the analogue
output value is 0,167mA.

Table 235 RTD board settings
Maximu
Data Setting Minimum Step Remarks Type
m
Ena Enabled YES / NO enum
Only measured
Ena1 RTD1 Application
Generic
No
PT100
RTDTyp1 RTD1 Type of sensor 0 3 1 Ni100 enum
Ni120
Cu10
Off
Not grouped
AlmHiEna1 RTD1 High alarm 0 3 0 enum
Non locking
Latching
AlmHiTmp1 RTD1 High alarm temp 1 250 1 Int32
Off
Not grouped
AlmLoEna1 RTD1 Low alarm 0 3 0 enum
Non locking
Latching
AlmLoTmp1 RTD1 Low alarm temp 1 250 1 Int32
Off
Not grouped
TripEna1 RTD1 Trip 0 3 0 enum
Non locking
Latching
TripTmp1 RTD1 Trip temp 1 250 1 Int32
:
:
Other RTDs upto 11
Ena11 RTD11 Application
RTDTyp11 RTD11 Type of sensor 0 3 1 enum
AlmHiEna11 RTD11 High alarm 0 3 0 enum
AlmHiTmp11 RTD11 High alarm temp 1 250 1 Int32
AlmLoEna11 RTD11 Low alarm 0 3 0 enum
AlmLoTmp11 RTD11 Low alarm temp 1 250 1 Int32
TripEna11 RTD11 Trip 0 3 0 enum
TripTmp11 RTD11 Trip temp 1 250 1 Int32
0-1mA
0-20mA
TypAn1 Analog Output 01 Type 0 3 1 enum
4-20mA
0-10V
Not assigned
Phase A Imax, Phase B Imax, Phase C Imax,
VA, VB, VC, V avg. ,
VAB, VBC, VCA, UC avg.,
ValAn1 Analog Output 01 Value 0 21 1 IN, IA, IB, IC, I avg., enum
P(Active Pow.),
Q(Reactive Pow.),
S(Apparent Pow.),
Cos A, Cos B,Cos C, Cos avg.
:
:
Other outputs upto 4
TypAn1 Analog Output 04 Type 0 2 1 enum
ValAn1 Analog Output 04 Value 0 21 1 enum

Table 236 RTD board outputs

RTD1 Enabled RTDEna general
RTD1 conf alarm ConfAlm general
RTD1 data failure DataFail general
RTD1 Reset RTDRs general
RTD1 Generic Temp Alarm GenTmpAlm general
RTD1 Generic Temp Trip GenTrip general
Low Temp. RTD1.1 Alarm LoTARTD1 general
High Temp. RTD1.1 Alarm HiTARTD1 general
RTD1.1 Trip TripRTD1 general
RTD1.1 Failure FailRTD1 general
……. Same for the rest of the 11 RTD
High Temp. RTD1.11 Alarm LoTARTD11 general
RTD1.11 Trip HiTARTD11 general
RTD1.11 Failure TripRTD11 general
High Temp. RTD1.11 Alarm FailRTD11 general
Table 237 RTD board measurements

Temperature 1 Tmp1 Mag
Same for the rest of the 11 RTD
Temperature 11 Tmp11 mag
Analog. output 1 OutAn1 mag
Same for the rest 4 outputs
Analog. output 4 OutAn4 mag
11.1 OVERTEMPERATURE THROUGH RTDS
The devices which have inputs for RTD probes will have an overtemperature unit through RTD.
Each RTD is treated individually, having its own settings and signals (Table 235 and Table 236):
❑ The "RTD1 Application" must be set to "Generic".

❑ RTD1 High alarm. It selects the signal´s type among the options:
 Off. It is disabled.
 Not grouped. Análisis de temperatura sin enclavamiento, generando señales individuales por cada RTD y no
generando las señales agrupadas.
 Non locking. There is non locking when the temperature drops off. The signal is activated when the
temperature exceed the setting and it´s deactivated when it drops 5º bellow the setting.
 Latching. The signal is latched when the temperature drops off. The signal is activated when the temperature
exceed the setting and it´s necessary a restoration command to deactivate the signal when the temperature
drops 5º below the setting.
❑ RTD1 High alarm temp. Indicates the temperature value at which the High alarm temperature signal is activated.
❑ RTD1 Low alarm. It selects the signal´s type among the options:

❑ RTD1 Low alarm temp. . Indicates the temperature value at which the Low alarm temperature signal is activated.
❑ RTD1 Trip. It selects the signal´s type among the options:
❑ RTD1 Trip temp. . Indicates the temperature value at which the Trip temperature signal is activated.
RTD functions do not act over the "general trip", over which other protection functions act, and they do not either produce fault
report.
The "RTD failure" signal is activated when it is detected that the circuit is open in the input of RTD which is not programmed as "Out
of service" and it is deactivated when the problem is solved or when the guilty RTD is programmed as "Out of service ". So as to
know which one it is, an event that identifies it in the failure detection moment is given.
The RTD signals may be acted by any of the RTDs, depending on its programming. That way, the activation may be:
❑ Without interlocking: the signal is deactivated when the temperatura drops 5º below the value that caused the activation
❑ With interlocking, being necessary a restoration command to deactivate this signal when the temperatura drops 5º below
the value that caused the activation.
The reset command can be configured in a functional key of the front interface.
The RTD measurements are shown in the status report, display and communication (IEC61850 and protocols)

SYNCHRONIZATION 
12. SYNCHRONIZATION
Several synchronization sources are permitted, with the following priority:
❑ IEEE1588v281
❑ IRIG-B
❑ SNTP
❑ Communication protocols
❑ pacFactory (see specific user manual)
❑ Local display
In case of active synchronization with any of the sources, the sources of lower priority are blocked. Some examples:
❑ If there is synchronization by IEEE1588v2, synchronization for any other cause is not permitted. In order to consider the absence of
IEEE1588v2 synchronization and to allow other sources, 1.5 minutes must elapse without synchronization:
 When disabled by setting
 When you lose IEEE 1588v2 communication through the port (synchronization does not arrive)
 When it loses traceability or precision (the master is not synchronized)
❑ If there is synchronization by IRIG, synchronization for any other cause is not permitted. In order to consider the absence of IRIG
synchronization and to allow other sources, 1.5 minutes must elapse without the reception of correct IRIG frames.
❑ If there SNTP synchronization, the synchronization of protocols is not permitted, nor pacFactory nor display. However, if IRIG
synchronization is received, the SNTP is blocked and IRIG is synchronized.
❑ Synchronization by pacFactory and by display have the same priority and can be run simultaneously.
12.1 GENERAL SETTINGS
The unit’s data model has a GEN/LTIM node for the configuring the summer/winter time change.
In the ICD 8.13.5.0 and fimware 8.0.22.0 version the settings were changed. The settings for versions before and after that change are
detailed below.
Settings for firmware versions lower than 8.0.22.0
The node has the following settings (see Table 238):
❑ Offset Local Time-UTC (min): Offset Local Time-UTC (min). A setting that indicates the number of minutes by which the time setting
must be put forward/put back when changing between summer/winter time. Range between -720 and 720 minutes (-12 to + 12
hours)
❑ Summer-winter time change enabled: Time change enabled. A boolean setting that allows the time setting to be changed
❑ Summer Calendar Pattern: Summer Calendar Pattern. Three selectable values:
 Last of month: Last week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 First of month: First week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Second of month: Second week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Third of month: Third week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Fourth of month: Fourth week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Day of month: Selects the day of the month indicated in DayD
❑ Day Week Summer: Indicates the day of the week for the change to summer time (Monday.. Sunday)
❑ Month Summer: Indicates the month in which the change to summer time occurs (January.. December)
81
Available from firmware version 6.0.18.0
User Manual 379
SYNCHRONIZATION 
❑ Day Summer: Indicates the day in which the change to summer time occurs (1.. 31)
❑ Time Summer: Indicates the time at which the time changes to summer time
❑ Minute Summer: Indicates the minute (within the time set on HrD) when the time changes to summer time
❑ Winter Calendar Pattern: Winter Calendar Pattern. Equivalent to OccD but from winter to summer
❑ Day Week Winter: Indicates the day of the week for the change to winter time (Monday.. Sunday)
❑ Month Winter: Indicates the month in which the change to winter time occurs (January.. December)
❑ Day Winter: Indicates the day in which the change to winter time occurs (1.. 31)
❑ Time Winter: Indicates the time at which the time changes to winter time
❑ Minute Winter: Indicates the minute (within the time set on HrS) when the time changes to winter time
❑ Not Synchro Time (min): Timeout to activate synchronization alarm.
Table 238 Synchronization settings

TmOfsTmm Offset Local Time-UTC (min) -720 720 1 Int32
TmUseDT Summer-winter time change enabled NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
OccD Summer Calendar Pattern 0 2 1 enum
WkDayD Day Week Summer 0 6 1 enum
MthD Month Summer 1 12 1 enum
DayD Day Summer 1 31 1 Int32
HrD Time Summer 0 23 1 Int32
MnD Minute Summer 0 59 1 Int32
OccS Winter Calendar Pattern 0 2 1 enum
WkDayS Day Week Winter 0 6 1 enum
Mths Month Winter 1 12 1 enum
DayS Day Winter 1 31 1 Int32
HrS Time Winter 0 23 1 Int32
MnS Minute Winter 0 59 1 Int32
SyncAlmTm Not Synchro Time (min) 1 1440 1 Int32
Settings for firmware version 8.0.22.0 and later with ICD 8.13.5.0 and later
The node has the following settings (seeTable 239):
❑ Offset Local Time-UTC (min): Offset Local Time-UTC (min). A setting that indicates the number of minutes by which the time setting
must be put forward/put back when changing between summer/winter time. Range between -720 and 720 minutes (-12 to + 12
hours)
❑ Summer-winter time change enabled: Time change enabled. A boolean setting that allows the time setting to be changed
❑ Not Synchro Time (min): Timeout to activate synchronization alarm
❑ Summer ocurrence: If the "Summer type" setting is fixed to "Time" this setting is ignored. When the “Summer type” setting is set to
“WeekDay”, it allows choosing the day of the month in which the time change to summer time will be made. As follows:
 0. Last of month, refers to the weekday set in “TmChgDT.weekDay”
 1. First of month, refers to the weekday set in “TmChgDT.weekDay”
 2. Second of month, refers to the weekday set in “TmChgDT.weekDay”
 3. Third of month, refers to the weekday set in “TmChgDT.weekDay”
 4. Fourth of month, refers to the weekday set in “TmChgDT.weekDay”
❑ Summer type: Allows you to select how to express the date of the change to summer time. When set to “Time”, it allows expressing
the date based on the day of the month. If it is set as "WeekDay", it allows expressing the date based on the day of the week.
 Time
 The time change will be made taking into account the setting "Summer day". If "Summer day" has been set to, for
example, 24, the time change will be made on the 24th of the month. The settings "Summer ocurrence" and "Summer
week day" will not be taken into account.
 WeekDay
User Manual 380
SYNCHRONIZATION 
 The time change will be made taking into account the settings “Summer ocurrence" and "Summer week day". If, for
example, “Summer ocurrence" has been set to 0 and "Summer week day" has been set to "Sunday", the time change
will be made on the last Sunday of the month. The setting “Summer day” will not be taken into account
❑ Summer repetition period: Indicates how often the change to summer time will be made. The change of daylight saving time can
only be done annually. This setting can only be set as "Year".
❑ Summer week day: If the "Summer type" setting is fixed to "Time" this setting is ignored. When the “Summer type” setting is set to
“WeekDay”, it indicates the day of the week for the change to summer time.
❑ Summer month: Indicates the month in which the change to summer time occurs
❑ Summer day: Indicates the day of the month in which the change to summer time occurs. If the "Summer type" setting is set to
"WeekDay" this setting is ignored. When the "Summer Type" setting is set to "Time" this setting indicates the day of the month in
which the change to summer time occurs
❑ Summer hour: Indicates the time at which the time changes to summer time
❑ Summer minute: Indicates the minute (within the time set on TmChgDT.hr) when the time changes to summer time
❑ Winter occurrence: Equivalent to “TmChgDT.occ” but for the change to winter time
❑ Winter type: Allows you to select between two ways to express the date of the time change to winter time. When set to “Time”, it
allows expressing the date based on the day of the month. If it is set as "WeekDay", it allows expressing the date based on the day
of the week.
❑ Winter repetition period: Indicates how often the time change will be made. The change of daylight saving time can only be done
annually. This setting can only be set as "Year".
❑ Winter week day: If the "Winter type" setting is fixed to "Time" this setting is ignored. When the “Winter type” setting is set to
“WeekDay”, it indicates the day of the week for the change to winter time
❑ Winter month: Indicates the month in which the change to winter time occurs
❑ Winter day: Indicates the day in which the change to winter time occurs. If the "Winter type" setting is set to "WeekDay" this
setting is ignored. When the " Winter Type" setting is set to "Time" this setting indicates the day of the month in which the change
to winter time occurs
❑ Winter hour: Indicates the time at which the time changes to winter time
❑ Winter minute: Indicates the minute (within the time set on TmChgST.hr) when the time changes to winter time

User Manual 381
SYNCHRONIZATION 
Table 239 Synchronization settings

TmOfsTmm Offset Local Time-UTC (min) -720 720 1 Int32
TmUseDT Summer-winter time change enabled NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
SyncAlmTm Not Synchro Time (min) 1 1440 1 Int32
TmChgDT.occ Summer ocurrence 0 4 1 Int32
TmChgDT.occType Summer type Time (0)
enum
WeekDay (1)
TmChgDT.occPer Summer repetition period Year (4) enum
TmChgDT.weekDay Summer week day Monday (1)
Tuesday (2)
Wednesday (3)
Thursday (4) enum
Friday (5)
Saturday (6)
Sunday (7)
TmChgDT.month Summer month January (1)
February (2)
March (3)
April (4)
May (5)
June (6)
enum
July (7)
August (8)
September (9)
October (10)
November (11)
December (12)
TmChgDT.day Summer day 1 31 1 Int32
TmChgDT.hr Summer hour 0 23 1 Int32
TmChgDT.mn Summer minute 0 59 1 Int32
TmChgST.occ Winter ocurrence 0 4 1 Int32
TmChgST.occType Winter type Time (0)
enum
WeekDay (1)
TmChgST.occPer Winter repetition period Year (4) enum
TmChgST.weekDay Winter week day Monday (1)
Tuesday (2)
Wednesday (3)
Thursday (4) enum
Friday (5)
Saturday (6)
Sunday (7)
TmChgST.month Winter month January (1)
February (2)
March (3)
April (4)
May (5)
June (6)
enum
July (7)
August (8)
September (9)
October (10)
November (11)
December (12)
TmChgST.day Winter day 1 31 1 Int32
TmChgST.hr Winter hour 0 23 1 Int32
TmChgST.mn Winter minute 0 59 1 Int32
12.1.1 Signals
There are signals indicating the synchronization source (Table 240):
❑ Synchronization by IEEE1588: Active when the device is synchronized by IEEE1588. It is maintained activated for 90 seconds after
an IEEE1588 synchronization.
User Manual 382
SYNCHRONIZATION 
❑ Synchronization by IRIG-B: Active when the device is synchronized by IRIG-B. It is maintained activated for 90 seconds after an IRIG-
B synchronization.
❑ SNTP synchronization: Active when the device is synchronized by SNTP. It is maintained activated the period defined by not synchro
timeout SNTP setting (ValTm) after an SNTP synchronization.
❑ Synchronization by protocols: Active if the last synchronization was been received by communications protocols.
❑ Synchronization by display: Active if the last synchronization was been received by the front keyboard.
❑ Synchronization by console: Active if the last synchronization has been received from the PacFactory console.
❑ Device not synchronized: Synchronization alarm. Active if a valid synchronization (IRIG-B, SNTP or protocols) has not been received
during the timeout configured by the not synchro time setting (SyncAlmTm).
❑ Daylight saving time: Active if the local time has summer correction.
Table 240 Synchronization source

Synchronization by IEEE1588 SyncPTP stVal
Synchronization by IRIG-B SyncIRIGB stVal
Synchronization by SNTP SyncSNTP stVal
Synchronization by protocols SyncProt stVal
Synchronization by display SyncDispl stVal
Synchronization by console SyncCons stVal
Device not synchronized SyncAlm stVal
Daylight saving time TmDT stVal
12.2 IEEE 1588V2
The IEEE Std. 1588-2008, also known as IEEE 1588v2 or PTPv2, offers a good solution for clock synchronization in distributed systems
with high accuracy requirements. It works through Ethernet networks and achieves accuracy in the submicrosecond range.
Ingepac EF IEDs support IEEE 1588v2 and specifically the IEC 61850-9-3:2016 Ed1, also nown as Power Utility Profile (PUP), which allows
compliance with the highest synchronization classes of IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61869-9.
Following the IEC 61850-9-3:2016 Ed1 profile:
❑ The PTP over IEEE 802.3 transport mapping, specified in Annex F of IEEE 1588v2, shall be the only transport mechanism used.
❑ The peer delay request mechanism specified in Chapter 11.4 and Annex J.4 of IEEE 1588v2 shall be the only path delay
measurement mechanism in operation.
Ingepac EF IEDs support IEEE 62439-3:2016 Ed 3 Annex A when 1588 synchronization over PRP or HSR is needed.
12.2.1 Settings
There are 4 settings to set up IEEE 1588v2. They all belong to the GEN/LTMS logical node described in 1.4.1.
❑ Main Time Source: The string “1588” must be set up in this setting in order to enable 1588v2.
❑ PTP interface: This setting specifies the interface in which the IED will listen to IEEE 1588v2 messages.
❑ PTP delay mechanism: The Mechanism used peer to peer (P2P).
❑ PRP or HSR PTP master: This setting specifies whether for devices with PRP/HSR modules is enabled for the module itself to act as
PTP master in the absence of GPS and only intended to achieve local synchronization of the measurement (sampled values ) in
Ingeteam process bus solutions.
❑ This setting is available from firmware version 9.5.28.1.

User Manual 383
SYNCHRONIZATION 
12.3 IRIG-B
The device is equipped with an input for synchronization by GPS, using IRIG-B time codes (consult chapter 2 for more details about the
input).
The supported IRIG-B formats are B002, B003, B006, B007 and IEEE1344. The configuration is with the IrgType setting in the GEN\LLN0
logical node (General configuration). The different options are (depending on whether the GPS send UTC or local time):
❑ “UTC without year”. The year is not taken into account and all the formats are admitted.
❑ “UTC with year”. With formats B006, B007 and IEE1344 the year is not taken into account. It cannot be used with formats
B002 and B003 because they set the year to zero value.
❑ “Local without year”. The year is not taken into account. All the formats are admitted.
❑ “Local with year”. With formats B006, B007 and IEE1344 the year is not taken into account. It cannot be used with formats
B002 and B003 because they set the year to zero value.
12.4 SNTP
The available implementation of the SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) is based on the points described in RFC5905. To improve the
accuracy of the synchronization and to take into account the possible delays introduced by the network, the "On-Wire" protocol, which
is described within the RFC itself, is used.
This correction algorithm uses four timestamps numbered from T1 to T4, with the timestamp of sending or receiving each message, to
calculate the offset that is required to apply to the time of the equipment after sending each synchronization request.
The following image shows in a general way the synchronization scheme:
The time offset obtained using this calculation is the deviation to be applied in the SNTP client clock to obtain the time of the SNTP
server that synchronizes it. It is a valid method for both LAN networks as well as for WAN networks that have higher response times.
The SNTP settings are included in the LTMS logical node.
Note: There is an optional configuration mode with the SNTP-IP value in the communications section of the ICD file, which is
maintained for backward compatibility with previous configuration files. The IED only uses that option if no configuration is included in
the LTMS node. Nevertheless, the recommended configuration option is through the LTMS node settings.

User Manual 384
SYNCHRONIZATION 
12.4.1 Settings
The SNTP settings are in the GEN/LTMS logical node:
❑ Main Time Source: IP address of the main NTP server. Broadcast addresses are not allowed. Value 0.0.0.0 disables the
main source.
❑ Secondary Time Source: IP address of the secondary NTP server. Broadcast addresses are not allowed. Value 0.0.0.0
disables the secondary source.
❑ Not Synchro time SNTP (min): Elapsed time in which it has not been received any correct SNTP response (the checked
fields are detailed below) from any of the sources configured for SNTP synchronization to consider the SNTP as not
synchronized. Range value is 1 to 1440 min.
❑ SNTP Polling Time (seg): Time interval between synchronization requests to the NTP servers. Range value is 10 to 3600
seconds. If the configured time is less than the real polling communication process (requests and retries in case of failure)
the synchronization active request will finish normally and a new polling timer will be started.
❑ SNTP Time delay Unicast message (seg): Waiting time for the response to an unicast synchronization request. If no
response is received in that time interval a unicast request retry cycle will be started. Range value is 1 to 60 seg.
❑ Retry number: Number of unicast request retries in case there is no response from the NTP server to a request. If the
configured number of retries finishes without response with the main source the device tries to synchronize with the
secondary source. If the configured number of retries finishes without response with the secondary source that
synchronization process is finished and the device waits the polling period to send a new request. Range value is 0 to 9.
❑ PTP interface: This setting specifies the interface in which the IED will listen to IEEE 1588v2 messages.
❑ PTP delay mechanism: This settings specifies which delay Mechanism to use: peer to peer (P2P) or end to end (E2E) delay
mechanism.
❑ PRP or HSR PTP master: This setting specifies whether for devices with PRP/HSR modules is enabled for the module itself
to act as PTP master in the absence of GPS and only intended to achieve local synchronization of the measurement
(sampled values ) in Ingeteam process bus solutions.
❑ This setting is available from firmware version 9.5.28.1.
(*) Available from firmware version 6.3.20.0, the necessary settings to enable and configure symmetric key authentication in SNTP
requests:
❑ SNTP authentication: This setting enables the authentication in SNTP messages based on the keys file configured.
❑ SNTP key: The number of the key used for the authentication. It shall match with the value configured in the SNTP server
used as synchronization source.
Table 241 SNTP settings LTMS node

TmSrcSet1 Main Time Source IP address VisString255
TmSrcSet2 Secondary Time Source IP address VisString255
ValTm Not Synchro timeout SNTP (min) 1 1440 1 Int32
PollTms SNTP Polling Time (seg) 10 3600 1 Int32
EspTms SNTP Time delay Unicast message (seg) 1 60 1 Int32
NRetry Retry number 0 9 1 Int32
PTPIface PTP Interface 1 2 1 Eth1/Eth2 enum
PTPDelM PTP delay mechanism 0 1 1 P2P / E2P enum
PTPMaster PRP or HSR PTP master NO / YES Boolean
SNTPAuth SNTP authentication (*) NO / YES Boolean
TrustedKey SNTP key (*) 1 65535 1 Int32

User Manual 385
SYNCHRONIZATION 
The keys file is configurable from the website82, and it shall be shared between the IED and the SNTP server. The following key types
are supported by the IED:
❑ MD5
❑ SHA
❑ SHA1
❑ RIPEMD160
To provide additional information, a digital signal and a counter have been added with data about the status of the SNTP
authentication:
❑ AuthCfgErr: Configuration error boolean signal. Indicates that there is some type of error in the configuration of the keys
file or in the selected settings. In this case, the IED sends SNTP requests without authentication so it can be synchronized.
❑ AuthRspErr: Counter with the number of not authenticated responses or with authentication failure. When this occurs, the
response obtained is discarded and the device is not synchronized. This counter is increased in case of:
 The SNTP server rejected the request (because the key was not configured or the expected signed value did
not match).
 The received authentication is not considered valid (the calculated signed value does not match the expected
one).
The following diagram details the synchronization process:
82
Available from firmware version 6.5.22.0

User Manual 386
SYNCHRONIZATION 
The following values are checked in the synchronization responses to consider them valid and apply the time to the internal clock:
❑ Message length.
❑ Flags mode: Server.
❑ Flags version number: NTP version 4.
❑ Flags leap indicator: Different from 3.
From the following firmware versions of Ingepac EF these checks are also available:
 Ingepac EF version 6.1.18.5:

❑ Flags version number: NTP version 3 or 4.
❑ Valid stratum value: Between 1 and 15.
❑
 Ingepac EF version 6.3.20.0:
❑ The origin timestamp received in the response packet must match with the transmitted timestamp on the request.

User Manual 387
SYNCHRONIZATION 
12.5 QUALITY FLAGS IEC 61850
In the IEC 61850 data there are quality flags which detail the validity of the time in a timestamp sent by communications. These are the
used quality flags:
❑ Clock Not Synchronized: Active jointly with the synchronization failure alarm.
❑ Leap Second: It is activated if the synchronization source provides this data. Active for SNTP, IRIG-B and 1588.
❑ Clock Failure: Active jointly with the failure of the internal RTC clock.

User Manual 388
DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS 
13. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS

The information generated by the unit is stored in xml format files, except the format of the oscillography, which is stored in comtrade
format.
13.1 STATUS REPORT
The status report indicates the current status of the protection, showing instantaneous values. This report is updated approximately
every 1 second.
The information available in the status message is:
❑ Version. Indicates the unit version:

 CPU: Shows the CPU’s main firmware version.
 CPU2: Shows the firmware version of the FPGA and interface with I/O modules.
 OTHER: Shows the analogue card's firmware and I/O modules.
 Only in models with sampled values reception modules:
 SV: Shows the module main firmware version
 SV-FPGA: Shows the firmware version of the FPGA.
❑ General. Displays the unit’s general data:
 Relay date and time. Within the <Date> tag, the date (Date) and time (Time) are shown.
 Active table. Within the <Setting Group> tag, the active table number is shown.
❑ Measurements: Within the Measurements tag, the unit’s measurements are shown. The measurements correspond to
the fundamental frequency.
 <Analog>: Type, module and angle of each of the unit’s 12 transformers.
 <Sequence>: Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents and voltages (module and angle).
 <Power>: Total real, reactive and apparent power.
 <Frequency>. Frequency value.
 <Battery> External power supply battery voltage.
 <InternalBattery> Internal battery voltage for maintenance of Data.
 <Maximeter>. Indicates the maximeter value for each current and voltage phase. It has a “Reset” button.
 <Thermal>. Phase and neutral thermal image value. It also has a “Reset” button.
 <Temperature> Indicates the unit’s temperature.
 The LD models show information of:
 Differential current. Indicates the fundamental value of the three phases.
 Restraint current. Indicates the Restraint current of the three phases.
 2° harmonic differential current. Indicates the value of the three phases.
 End measures. For each end, indicates the fundamental and 2° harmonic of the total currents (module and
angle) of the three phases.
 Total current. Indicates the total current of the three phases. Only in 52 ½ configurations.
 The TD models show information of:
 2° to 5th harmonic differential current. Indicates the value of the three phases.
 Sequences of current, maximeter and thermal image are independent of each winding.
 The CB models show information of:

User Manual 389
 <CapacitorBank.> Indicate the input measurements to capacitor bank connect/disconnection automatism, voltage
and reactive.
❑ Input and output status. The status of the digital inputs and outputs is indicated in each of the cards available in the unit.
Each card is distinguished by its address, indicated in GGIO1 to GGIO8.
 Digital inputs. Ind1.stVal to Ind32.stVal indicate “Y” if enabled and “N” if not. There are as many values as there are
inputs in the card.
 Digital outputs. SPCSO1.stVal to SPCSO16.stVal indicate “Y” if enabled and “N” if not. There are as many values as
there are outputs in the card.
❑ Protection units. Indicates the current status of each of the functions: enabled, pick up, trip and last trip. In each of the
functions the data available in each node are indicated.
 Status. In <StEna.stVal>, the function is indicated as active and not blocked with “Y”. “N” is used to indicate that the
function is not enabled or blocked or in operation
 Pick up. Indicates in <Str> whether the unit is picked up “Y” or not “N”. The data depends on the unit, for example, for
phase A it would be Str.phsA.
 Activation. Indicates in <Op> whether the unit is tripped “Y” or not “N”. The data depends on the unit, for example, for
phase A it would be Str.phsA.
 Last trip. Indicated within <l>. “Y” is used to indicate if the last trip was due to this cause, whilst "N" is used to indicate
otherwise.
❑ Recloser status: Indicates the current status of the recloser. The signals are in <RREC1>. “Y” is used to indicate active
signals, whereas "N" is used to indicate inactive signals. The available signals and their references are indicated in the
recloser section. These include:
 in service/blocked.
 in stand-by.
 ongoing cycle, indicating the closure cycle that is currently active.
 definitive trip.
 internal block, distinguishing different causes.
 External block.
 “Put Into Service and “Put Out of Service” buttons
❑ Frequency recloser status: Indicates the current status of the frequency recloser. The signals are in <FRREC1>. “Y” is used
to indicate active signals, whereas "N" is used to indicate inactive signals. The available signals and their references are
indicated in the frequency recloser section.
❑ Synchronism check unit status. The general status of the synchronism is displayed in RSYN1 and the presence of voltage in
RVRS1. “Y” is used indicated active signals and "N" for inactive signals. The available signals and their references are
indicated in the synchronism section.
❑ In CB models (Capacitor Bank): Status of capacitor bank connect/disconnection automatism. Indicates the actual state of
automatism. The signals are in <ZCAP>, indicating for each of the signals if is active "Y" or no "N". In the section of
capacitor bank automatism are indicated available signals and their reference, among which are:
 Automatism Status
 Trip Block 86
 Reactive Converter Fail
 Manoeuvre Inhibit for each breaker
 Excesive Manoeuvre
 Open command
 Period type (Rush, Off-peak, Normal)
 Season
❑ Protection status. With the “PROT” data in LLN0, “Y” indicates whether the relay is in service, “N” indicates if the relay is
out of service.
❑ General status. Indicated in LLN0 with the “GEN” data, in which the following is indicated:

User Manual 390
 Unit hw status. Indicating if there is failure "Y" or "N".

 Local/remote mode. Indicating if it is local, "Y" or "N".
 Events pending dispatch. Indicating if there is an event pending dispatch, "Y" or "N".
 Failure in IRIG synchronization. Indicating if there is failure, "Y" or "N".
 V2 and Vn voltage monitoring. Indicating if there is failure, "Y" or "N".
 Check on internal communication between cards. Indicating if there is failure, "Y" or "N".
❑ Open pole logic status. Shown in POPD1, indicating:
 StEna.stVal. Indicates whether the function is enabled, “Y” or “N”.
 OpenPole. For each pole and general, indicating whether open “Y” or closed “N”
 Number of open poles. One (OneOpPole), two (TwoOpPole), three (ThreeOpPol) or at least one (OpenPole)
 Broken conductor. Indicating whether the phase is broken for each of the poles, “Y” or “N”.
 Deal line. Indicating whether there is a dead line for each of the poles, “Y” or “N”.
❑ Breaker status. Shown in XCBR. There is independent information of every breaker, indicating:
 BrDISt. For each pole and general, the status of the associated digital input: closed “Y”, open “N”.
 CloseOrdBr. For each pole and general, the status of the closure command: active “Y”, inactive “N”.
 OpenOrdBr. For each pole and general, the status of the opening command: active “Y”, inactive “N”.
 ClsFailBr. For each pole and general, indicating whether there has been a failure in the closure command, “Y” or “N”
 OpenFailBr. For each pole and general, indicating whether there has been a failure in the opening command, “Y” or
“N”
❑ Breaker monitoring status. Shown in CBOU1, indicating the value of the ki2 sum for each pole.
❑ Monitoring units.
 CCTS1. CT monitoring. There is function enabled data (StEna.stVal) and CT monitoring activation data (CTSpv.general)
 CTSU1. Temperature monitoring. There is a function enabling data (StEna.stVal) and an indication of the temperature
above (OverTemp) and below (UnderTemp) the threshold.
 CESS1. External power supply monitoring. Indication of external power supply above (OverVcc) or below (UnderVcc)
the threshold. Also indicates whether the function is enabled or not (StEna.stVal).
 CSUS1. Indicates battery failure status (DFFA), if it is activated “Y" or deactivated “N”.
The status data are displayed on the PacFactory console and in the unit's display:
❑ PacFactory. All the status message information is displayed, grouped in tabs according to the information:
 General. The date, active table, versions and measurements are displayed.
 I/O. The digital inputs and outputs are displayed.
 Enabled. Indicates whether the units are operative (enabled and not blocked) or not.
 Protection status. The status of the protection units is displayed, i.e., if they are picked up and/or tripped.
 Breaker and monitoring. The breaker, breaker monitoring and circuits statuses are displayed.
 Recloser, synchronism or capacitor bank. The status of the recloser, synchronism or capacitor bank units is displayed.
 Check. The results of the various checks that are carried out in the unit are displayed.
❑ Display. Grouped into several screens and displaying:
 General: Date and active table.
 Transformer measurements and configuration.
 Current and voltage maximeters.
 I/O. The digital inputs and outputs are displayed.
Figure 190 PacFactory status screen

User Manual 391

User Manual 392
13.2 PRIMARY MEASUREMENTS REPORT
This report indicates the measurement transformers’ primary measurements, applying the transformer ratio. The maximeter
information is used for the maximeter reports.
The information available in the measurements message is:
❑ Distance. In the <Distance> tag, indicating the distance of the last fault.
❑ Currents. Within the <Currents> tag, showing the rms current measurements in primary:
 Earth-phase.
 The module and angle of each phase, neutral and sensitive neutral.
 The average current module of the three phases.
 THD of each phase, neutral and sensitive neutral.
 Thermal image <Thermal>. Value of phase and neutral thermal image.
 Sequences <Sequence>. Current sequences module (I0, I1, I2)
❑ Voltages Within the <Voltage> tag, showing the rms voltage measurements in primary:
 Earth-phase.
 The module and angle of each phase and neutral.
 The average voltage module of the three phases.
 THD of each phase and neutral.
 Phase-phase <Phase>.
 Phase pair module (AB, BC and CA) and average.
❑ Sequences. Voltage sequences module (V0, V1, V2)
 Frequency. Frequency value.
 Powers. Within the <Power> tag, showing the rms measurements for each phase and total:
 Real power. Per phase and total.
 Reactive power. Per phase and total.
 Apparent power. Per phase and total.
 Power factor <Power Factor>. Per phase and average.
 Energy counters <Energy>. There is a reset button for the energy counters.
 Last reset command date
 Positive and negative real energy counter value
 Positive and negative reactive energy counter value
❑ Maximeters. Shows the maximum value and the date on which it was produced. There is a reset button for the
maximeter.
 Current. For each phase.
 Voltage. For each phase.
 Real power. For phase and total.
 Reactive power. For phase and total.
 Apparent power. For phase and total.

User Manual 393
Figure 191 PacFactory measurements screen
13.3 FAULT REPORT
The fault reports include information about the unit’s data during the fault, as well as the active settings during the fault. The last 20
faults are stored in a non-volatile memory.
The name of the file uses the standard IEEE C37.232-2007, using the fields:
Start Date, Start Time, Time Code, Station Identifier, Device Identifier, Company Name
For example, “100626, 46702262,+2h30t,Substation,Rele1,Ingeteam”, which means:
❑ Start Date: Trip date with a 2-character format for the year, the month and the day. For example, 26/june/2010 would be 100626.
❑ Start Time: Indicates the milliseconds as of 00:00 of the day, that is, milliseconds as of midnight.
❑ Time Code: Indicates the time zone amplitude sign, and can indicate minutes if necessary. For example, “t +2” indicates time zone
2, while “+2 h30t” indicates that the time zone is 2 hours 30 minutes.
❑ Station Identifier. Indicates the substation name. The installation’s short name (InsShNam) from the “PROT/LPHD1” node is used"
❑ Device Identifier. Indicates the unit’s name. The relay’s short name (RelShNam) from the “PROT/LPHD1” node is used"
❑ Company Name. Indicates the name of unit’s manufacturer, in this case, Ingeteam.
The information available in the fault is:
❑ Date and time: <Fecha>. Indicates the date as a string in the “dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss.ms” format, i.e., “23/04/09 10_41_30_256”.
There are three dates available
 Start of the fault (first unit picked up): <Inicio>
 Trip (first unit tripped): <Disparo>.
 End of fault (when the trip signal disappears): <Fin>
❑ Configuration: <Config>. Indicates the configuration of each of the 12 transformers: type and scale range.
❑ Pre-fault and fault. Indicates the values measured before the fault and upon the fault. They are grouped into “Pre-fault” and
“Fault”, and the same data is available in both cases:

User Manual 394
 Transformer measurements <Analog>. It indicates the measurement in the module and the angle of each transformer.
 Sequences. Indicates the measurements in the module and the angle of the current sequences (I0, I1 and I2) and the voltage
(V0, V1 and V2).
 Powers. Indicates the measurements of the total real, reactive and apparent powers.
 The LD models show information of:
 Restraint current. Indicates the Restraint current of the three phases
 2° harmonic differential current. Indicates the value of the three phases.
 End measures. For each end, indicates the fundamental and 2° harmonic of the total currents (module and
angle) of the three phases.
 The TD models show information of:
 Sequences of current, maximeter and thermal image are independent of each winding.
❑ Distance to fault.
❑ Frequency in the moment of the fault.
❑ Thermal image upon trip. The thermal image is indicated as a % of phases and neutral.
❑ Fault max. Maximum values of the current channels and I0 during the fault.
❑ Breaker. Indicates breaker monitoring data upon the fault.
 Open current. For each phase, indicates the current value upon the trip.
 Sigma ki. For each phase, indicates the sigma ki2 value.
 Num. reclose. Number of recloser performances.
❑ Fault and trip type <Tipo/Type>: Summary of the fault with the 3-letter code formed by combinations of the characters A, B, C, N,
NS and G (if tripped by a phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), DIF (differential), RG (restricted earth), RTP (teleprotection),
IF (phase overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D (current unbalance), VO (zero-sequence overvoltage), HV (overvoltage), LV
(undervoltage), RTP (teleprotection), DT (transferred trip), DP (pole discordance), v/f (overexcitation v/f), IT (thermal image).
Example: AC is a two-phase fault in phases A and C.
 Fault type: Indicates the pick up type.
 Trip type: Indicates the trip type.
❑ Details of units. Indicates the picked up and tripped units. Indicates whether the unit is active “Y” or not “N” for each logical node
available in the unit.
 Pick up. Indicates in <Str> whether the unit is picked up “Y” or not “N”. The data depends on the unit, for example, for phase A
it would be Str.phsA.
 Activation. Indicates in <Op> whether the unit is tripped “Y” or not “N”. The data depends on the unit, for example, for phase
A it would be Str.phsA.
❑ Active settings. Active settings in the moment of the fault. Indicates the setting file name. It can be accessed to consult the settings.

User Manual 395
Figure 192 PacFactory fault screen
13.4 INCIDENT REPORT
The unit stores in a queue of 1000 non-simultaneous protection events in a non-volatile memory. Each protection event is recorded
with its date and time, as well as the current and voltage measurements of all the transformers and the frequency. Keep in mind that
the non-volatile memory recording process takes a certain amount of time and, if the equipment is turned off, some last event that
occurred very close to the time it was turned off might not finish recording.
The protection events can be masked individually, so that only protection events configured by the user are generated. These enablings
are available in the GEN/RSUC node.
The information available in each record is:
❑ Date: With a resolution of one millisecond.

❑ Information. Within the <Inf> tag the protection event signal number and its status 0 (Deactivation) / 1 (Activation) are
indicated. Each protection event record can have up to 16 simultaneous signals.
❑ Measurements. The transformer measurements at the time of the protection event (module and angle) and frequency
measurement are shown for each of the unit’s transformers.
❑ The LD models show information of:
 Differential current. Indicates the fundamental value of the three phases.
 Restraint current. Indicates the Restraint current of the three phases
 2° harmonic differential current. Indicates the value of the three phases.

User Manual 396
Figure 193 Example of protection event record
<Reg Fecha="15-06-10 21:50:38:792">

<Inf Sen="8426" Status="1"/>
<Inf Sen="8433" Status="0"/>
<Med>
<T1 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T2 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T3 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T4 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T5 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T6 Mod="0.00" Arg="38.10"/>
<T7 Mod="31.68" Arg="58.53"/>
<T8 Mod="99.94" Arg="-62.01"/>
<T9 Mod="99.95" Arg="178.00"/>
<T10 Mod="31.67" Arg="58.54"/>
<T11 Mod="99.98" Arg="-62.02"/>
<T12 Mod="99.94" Arg="178.00"/>
<FRE Hz="50.00"/>
</Med>
</Reg>
Figure 194 PacFactory protection event screen
13.5 HISTORICAL MEASUREMENT REPORT
The unit saves a queue of historical measurement reports in the non-volatile memory. Depending on the registered measurements,
4000 or 1000 registers are available.
Each record includes the maximum, minimum and average currents of each measurement, calculated within a programmable time
window, detected during a programmable recording period. The measurements are secondary.
The historical measurement report is grouped into records in which the first corresponds to the oldest and the last to most recent, so
that when the file is opened, the first item we see is the oldest.
The format of this file for each record is:
❑ Record number
❑ Date: With second precision: Day and Time
❑ Measurements: Maximum/minimum/average magnitude values:
The settings employed by this unit are in the PROT/MHRE node:

User Manual 397
❑ Sample time window. Indicates the time in minutes during which the average is calculated
❑ Record interval. Indicates the time in minutes in which each record is created
❑ Start time. Indicates the time after which the historical measurement record is started
❑ End time. Indicating the time up to which the historical measurements record is carried out
❑ Calendar mask. Indicates whether the historical measurements record is created every day (YES) or if it is only created on
the days indicated in the day selection mask.
❑ Day selection. It indicated, for each day of the week, whether the record was created.
❑ Register mode83. Selects between standard or extended:
 Standard. It saves 4000 registers, with máximum, mínimum and average of the mean currents and voltages, real,
reactive and apparent power, frequency and external power supply.
 Extended. Extended number of measures. It saves 1000 registers, with máximum, mínimum and average of the phase
and neutral currents, phase voltages, current and voltage sequences, real, reactive and apparent power, power factor
and the result of 10 measurements data logics AutGGIO.AnIn.
The units of the measurements are:
❑ Current. The units are secondary amps.

❑ Voltage. The units are secondary volts.
❑ Real power. The units are secondary watts.
❑ Reactive power. The units are secondary VAR.
❑ Apparent power. The units are secondary VA.
❑ Frequency. Units are Hz.
❑ External power supply. The units are volts.
Table 242 Historical measurement settings

SmTmm Sample time window 1 15 1 minutes uint32
RegIntTmm Record interval 1 1440 minutes uint32
StH Start time 0 23 1 uint32
EndH End time 0 23 1 uint32
DayEna Calendar mask YES/NO Boolean
SunEna Selection Sunday YES/NO Boolean
MonEna Selection Monday YES/NO Boolean
TueEna Selection Tuesday YES/NO Boolean
WedEna Selection Wednesday YES/NO Boolean
ThuEna Selection Thursday YES/NO Boolean
FriEna Selection Friday YES/NO Boolean
SatEna Selection Saturday YES/NO Boolean
RegType Register mode Standard / Extended Boolean
83
Available from firmware version 5.19.15.7 and ICD version 6.3.0.0. Previous versions is fixed “Standard”.

User Manual 398
Figure 195 Example of records
<REG Num="0" Day="18/04/10" Time="00:00:37">
<I_A Max="0.000" Min="0.000" Media="0.000"/>
<V_V Max="0.000" Min="0.000" Media="0.000"/>
<P_W Max="0.00" Min="0.00" Media="0.00"/>
<Q_VAR Max="0.00" Min="0.00" Media="0.00"/>
<S_VA Max="0.00" Min="0.00" Media="0.00"/>
<f_Hz Max="0.000" Min="0.000" Media="0.000"/>
<Batery_V Max="120.51" Min="120.51" Media="120.51"/>
</REG>
13.6 STATISTICAL DATA REPORT
Displays the statistical data calculated in the unit: currents, action times and counters. It has reset buttons.
The values available are:
❑ The current statistics are grouped in the <Current> tag and include:
 <ki2> Ki2 accumulated by each of the 3 phases. Each phase can be independently reset to the initial value.
 <Cut> Opened current. Indicates the last (Last) and maximum (Maximum) open current per phase
❑ The counters are grouped in the <Counters> tag and include:
 <Reclose> Reclosure counter. Indicates the number of reclosures effected, separating them according to first, second,
third and fourth reclosure. There is a command for resetting the counter.
 <Openings>. Opening counter for each of the 3 phases, includes trips and manual openings. There are commands for
resetting each phase's counter and a global counter for all the phases.
 <Trip>. Trip counter for each of the 3 phases. There are commands for resetting each phase's counter and a global
counter for all the phases.
 <Close>. Closure counter for each of the 3 phases. There are commands for resetting each phase's counter and a global
counter for all the phases.
❑ The timers are grouped in the <Timers> tag and include:
 <Opening>. Indicates the electric (Electrical) and mechanical (Mechanical) opening times in milliseconds per phase
(maximum, average and last) and the dispersion for each pair of phases (maximum, average and last).
 <Close>. Indicates the electric (Electrical) and mechanical (Mechanical) closure times in milliseconds per phase
(maximum, average and last) and the dispersion for each pair of phases (maximum, average and last).
 <Inactivity> Indicates the days of breaker inactivity for each phase.
❑ There are commands to reset:
 Opening and close times
 Inactivity days
 Dispersion times.
❑ There is a command for the complete reset of each breaker: opening, trip and close counters, ki2, cut current and times.
The reclose counter is not reset.
❑ Models with two breakers, current, counters and times are independent for each breaker.
❑ <Time> Indicates the time in seconds during which the current has been within specific ranges.
 From 2 to 5 times In

User Manual 399
 From 5 to 12.5 times In

 From 12.5 to 20 times In
 From 20 to 40 times In
Figure 196 PacFactory statistics screen
13.7 MAXIMETER/MINIMETER REPORT
Displays the maximum and minimum values integrated in the time. It has buttons to individually reset the maximeters and/or
minimeters.
The Data displayed are:
❑ Each phase’s current

❑ Each phase’s voltage
❑ Real power per phase and total
❑ Reactive power per phase and total
❑ Apparent power per phase and total
❑ Frequency
❑ External battery measurement

User Manual 400
Figure 197 PacFactory maximeter/minimeter screen
13.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
The oscillography is stored in binary comtrade format. There is a CFG config file and a DAT data file for each.
For additional information see on “IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power Systems”.
It allows 16 analogue signals:
❑ 12 analogue inputs from the transformers (current and voltages)

❑ 4 frequency measurements84 (V phase B, V synchronism, frequency 2Va-Vb-Vc, V synchronism 284)
❑ External battery used as the power supply of the equipment
❑ LD models show the differential and restraint currents of the three phases.
It allows up to 15084 digital signals, selected among all the signal of the equipment.
The trigger signals are selected among the registered signals, when the set “Trigger Signal” is set to “YES”. If it is set to “NO”, that signal
is registered but does not start the oscillography.
The length is set in cycles (Total Duration), from 20 up to 420 cycles (8,4 seconds for 50Hz and 7 seconds for 60Hz).
Pre-fault duration (cycles) indicates the pre-fault cycles that are stored in each disturbance recorder prior to the trigger, being able to
vary between 1 and 415 cycles.
The number of samples can be selected among the options of the following table. Depending on the device and ICD used, the number
of the samples per cycle is different to adapt to the different devices. The relationship between them is shown in the following table
84
Available since firmware version 6.0.18.2 and ICD 8.2.0.0. Up to that version there are 100 digital signals and 3 frequencies

User Manual 401
Table 243 Options of samples per cycle
Equivalent Conventional Sampled values Sampled values

Setting85
setting Devices 80/cycle 96/cycle
Full 144 144 80 96
1 de 2 72 72 40 48
1 de 3 48 48 40 32
1 de 4 36 36 20 24
1 de 6 24 24 20 16
1 de 9 16 16 20 16
The continuous mode allows increasing the length if at the end of the register there is a trigger signal activated. In that case, the
register continues the number of cycles set in the “Total Duration (cycles)”, checking again the trigger signals at the end of the new
register. The total register is limited to 5Mb or 3 times the setting “Total Duration (cycles)” (the most restrictive of both).
In order for the trigger signal to act, it has to change the status, that is, it has to pass from deactivated to activated. If one trigger signal
is continuously activated, it does not start, nor extend the oscillography register.
The digital signals set to “NO” in the “Trigger signal” setting are displayed, but do not start, nor extend the oscillography register.
The oscillography allows to display signals that do not start the register. For example, the protection trip signal can initialize an
oscillography register, where the start signals are displayed. Table 244 shows an example of an oscillography configuration, with 11
digital signals registered but only three signals start the register (General trip, 51 trip and GGIO1 Digital input 1). At the end of the
register, if one of these three signals, continues activated, the oscillography is extended the cycles set in “Total Duration (cycles)”;
otherwise the oscillography is finished.
Table 244 Oscillography configuration example
Settings Value
Recorded signal 01 General trip
Trigger Signal 01 YES
Recorded signal 02 General start
Trigger Signal 02 NO
Recorded signal 03 51 start
Recorded signal 04 51 trip
Señal registrada oscilo 05 IOC1 Trip phase A
Recorded signal 06 IOC1 Trip phase B
Recorded signal 07 IOC1 Trip phase C
Recorded signal 08 IOC1 Start phase A
Recorded signal 09 IOC1 Start phase B
Recorded signal 10 IOC1 Start phase C
Recorded signal 11 GGIO1Digital input 1
10Mb of non volatile memory is available to store oscillography registers. The total number of registers depends on the settings. Table
245 shows some examples of the capacity (with the continuous mode set to “NO”), where the most influential settings are the length
and the number of samples.
85
Available since ICD version 8.1.0.18

User Manual 402
Table 245 Oscillography capacity
Total Duration
Number of samples/cycle Number of digital signals Number of oscillographys
(cycles)
420 144 100 3
420 144 32 3
420 36 100 13
420 36 32 15
50 144 100 27
50 144 32 32
50 36 100 98
50 36 32 121
20 144 100 34
20 144 32 78
20 36 100 206
20 36 32 271
20 16 100 350
20 16 32 499
The settings employed by this unit are in the PROT/RDRE node:
❑ Total Duration (cycles). Indicates the total duration of disturbance recorder (in cycles).
❑ Pre-fault duration (cycles). Indicates the pre-fault cycles that are stored in each disturbance recorder
❑ Number of samples/cycle. Indicates the samples per cycle stored in the disturbance recorder.
❑ Recorded signal X. Indicates the signal that is stored in record position X. If programmed as -1, no signals are recorded.
❑ Trigger X signal. If the signal is configured, it indicates whether it provokes a disturbance recorder pick up (1) or not (0). If
set to “No”, it is only displayed.
The trigger and recorded signals are repeated up to 100 possible signals.
Table 246 Oscillography settings

OscCyc Total Duration (cycles) 20 420 1 cycles Int32
PreCyc Prefault duration (cycles) 1 415 1 cycles Int32
NuSaCy Number of samples/cycle enum
OscReg1 Recorded signal 1 Int32
OscTrg1 Trigger 1 signal 0 1 1 YES/NO Boolean
OscReg2 Recorded signal 2 Int32
OscTrg2 Trigger 2 signal 0 1 1 YES/NO Boolean
Recorded signal and trigger up to 15084 0 1 1 YES/NO Boolean
The disturbance record configuration file (CFG) contains the general disturbance recorder information (Figure 198):
❑ Total number of analogue and digital channels available in the disturbance recorder.
❑ Analogue channel data: bay, identification, measurements scaled (multiplier "a", offset "b") and limits (maximum and
minimum).
The real value of the signal, using the value of the sample is "a·sample + b".
❑ Indication that samples are secondary values ("S") and conversion factor to primary values (it`s the setting “transformer
ratio” of the channel). As the samples are secondary values, the conversion factor to secondary is “1”.
❑ Digital input data: bay and identification.
❑ Sample data: signal frequency, sampling frequency, number of the last sample.
❑ Disturbance recorder start and end dates.
❑ Data file format
The disturbance recorder data file (DAT) includes the information captured in the disturbance recorder, with the following
available for each sample:

User Manual 403
❑ Sample number
❑ Sample time
❑ Analogue samples values
❑ Digital signals values
The name of the file uses the standard IEEE C37.232-2007, using the fields:
Start Date, Start Time, Time Code, Station Identifier, Device Identifier, Company Name
For example, “20100626, 46702262,+2h30t,Substation,Rele1,Ingeteam”, which means:
❑ Start Date: Trip date with a 4-character format for the year, the month and the day. For example,
26/june/2010 would be 20100626.
❑ Start Time: Indicates the milliseconds since 00:00 of the day, that is, milliseconds since midnight.
❑ Time Code: Indicates the time zone amplitude sign, and can indicate minutes if necessary. For example, “t +2”
indicates time zone 2, while “+2 h30t” indicates that the time zone is 2 hours 30 minutes.
❑ Station Identifier. Indicates the substation name. The installation’s short name (InsShNam) from the
“PROT/LPHD1” node is used".
❑ Device Identifier. Indicates the unit’s name. The relay’s short name (RelShNam) from the “PROT/LPHD1” node
is used".
❑ Company Name. Indicates the name of unit’s manufacturer, in this case, Ingeteam.
Figure 198 Configuration file
13.9 INCIDENT AND FAULT REPORTS IN XML FORMAT
The devicet has the option of generating protection events and fault report files in an XML format that is more suitable for possible
interpretation by third-party tools than the files described in the previous sections which are intended for use in Ingeteam's pacFactory
configuration tool. .
This functionality is available from firmware version 9.5.28.1.
The generation of these protection events and fault reports in XML can be enabled and disabled using the boolean setting "FilesOp2" of
the GEN/GSOE logical node. This setting does not affect the generation of the fault and event reports described in previous sections,
which are always generated.
The name of the event files will include the date of the first event they contain (replacing the “:” and “.” with “,”):
InformeSucesos_[date first event].xml. For example, EventReport_2022-02-10T19,16,49,947Z.xml
User Manual 404
The events that will be recorded in these files will be the same events recorded in the protection events report defined in the previous
section, and they will be located in the “Reports/Prot_SOE” directory.
The name of the fault report is "InformeFaltas.xml" and it will be located in the “Reports/Faults” directory.
The files will be accessible by FTP or sFTP if the user has the appropriate permissions.
At least the last 1000 non-simultaneous events and up to a maximum of 20 faults will be stored.
The events have a consecutive sequence number (sqNum), which is reset to a value of 1 in case of an event deletion command.
In order to maintain a file size of approximately 500 KB, each event file will contain 500 non-simultaneous events (each of these events
may have multiple signals recorded at the same instant of time).
Taking the above into account, to keep at least the last 1000 non-simultaneous events, a minimum of two and a maximum of three
event files are available. When the third file is complete, the oldest file will be deleted and a new one will be started. In this way, the
device always save a minimum of 1000 and a maximum of 1500 non-simultaneous events.
If it is detected that the "FilesOp2" setting has been disabled, the files created so far will be deleted and no new event reports will be
generated. If, later, it were enabled again, the files corresponding to the last 1000 non-simultaneous events would be generated.
The "FilesOp2" setting only disables the generation of XML reports located in the “Reports/Prot_SOE” directory. This means that, when
disabled, even if these files are not created, the events continue to be recorded in memory and in the file intended for use in the
pacFactory tool.
At each restart of the device, the protection events and fault files are regenerated in XML with the data stored in the IED's memory. In
the events, when the name of the files carries the date and time of the first event, the name of the files could change with respect to
those that the equipment had before the shutdown.
13.9.1 Structure of the protection events file

The events will be under a header with the following information:
❑ “ip”: IP address of the device in IPv4 format.

❑ “iedName”: IEDName of the device (value configured in the CID of the IED).
❑ “man”: Name of the manufacturer.
❑ “sn”: Serial number of the device.
❑ “mod”: Unit model.
Under this header the list of recorded events will be included. Each of which will contain the following information:
❑ “sqNum”: Event number

❑ “date”: Date and time of occurrence of the event with millisecond precision in UTC format.
❑ “q”: Quality of time.
❑ evtDatST: Section of signals associated with the event. It will contain the following information:
❑ “propId”: Signal identifier.
❑ “stdrId”: Possible 6-character code to be assigned in the signal description.
❑ “val”: Acronym.
❑ “desc”: Description of the signal.
❑ “q”: Signal quality (good, invalid, questionable).
❑ evtMeas: Section of measures associated with the event. It will contain the following information:
❑ “origin”: mode in which the measurements are presented: primary/secondary. By default, it will be
primary.
❑ m: each of the measures. Contains the following information:
❑ “propId” : Measurement identifier (voltage, voltArg, current, curArg, timex, difCurrent, BiasCurrent)
❑ “stdrId”: Matching text with the "propId" field (voltage, voltArg, current, curArg, timex, difCurrent or
BiasCurrent).
❑ “unit”: Measurement unit.
❑ Module values/voltage and current arguments (V1, V2, V3, VN, V4 and I1, I2, I3, IN, I4).
13.9.2 Structure of the faults file

All faults will be under a header with the following information:
❑ “ip”: IP address of the device in IPv4 format.

❑ “iedName”: IEDName of the device (value configured in the CID of the IED).
❑ “man”: Name of the manufacturer.
❑ “sn”: Serial number of the equipment.
❑ “mod”: Unit model.
Under this heading, the list of recorded faults will be included. Each fault will contain the following information:
❑ “sqNum”: Fault number

❑ “date”: Date and time of fault trigger with millisecond precision in UTC format.
❑ start time:
❑ “date”: Start date and time of the fault with millisecond precision in UTC format.
❑ end-time:
❑ “date”: End date and time of the fault with millisecond precision in UTC format.
❑ type:
❑ “fault”: Start type.
❑ “trip”: Trip type.
❑ “distance”: Distance to the fault (in km).
❑ “duration”: Duration of the fault (in ms). It is calculated as the difference between the end time and the
start time of the fault.
❑ units: Section of the started and/or fired units. It will contain the following information:
❑ u: each one of the units:
❑ “stdrId”: Possible 6-character code to be assigned in the signal description.
❑ “desc”: Description of the signal.
❑ fltMeas: Section of measures associated with the fault. It will contain the following information:
❑ “origin”: mode in which the measurements are presented: primary/secondary. By default, it will be
primary.
❑ “type”: indicates if the measurements correspond to the pre-fault, to the fault or others. Possible values:
prefault/fault/other.
❑ m: each of the measures. Contains the following information:
❑ “propId” : voltage, voltArg, current, curArg, timex, difCurrent, BiasCurrent, brkCurrent.
❑ “stdrId”: Matching text with the "propId" field (voltage, voltArg, current, curArg, timex, difCurrent,
BiasCurrent or brkCurrent).
❑ “unit”: Measurement unit.
❑ Module values/voltage and current arguments (V1, V2, V3, VN, V4 and I1, I2, I3, IN, I4).
USB ACCESS 
14. USB ACCESS

The unit can be accessed via the front USB to retrieve reports and CID from the device and to load a new CID or a firmware update.
The USB port can be configured on the security settings. This is also available from the local HMI (Menu: Password -> USB Configuration).
The configuration options are:
❑ Without password: No password is needed. It is strongly recommended not to use this option.
❑ With password: The local HMI password must be entered before any USB operation.
❑ Disabled: The USB port is disabled.
With the USB disabled, ICD and firmware loading and data download of the equipment are not allowed. More details about the USB access
configuration can be found in the “Cybersecurity functions” section of this manual.
14.1 DOWNLOADING REPORTS
When a pendrive is inserted, the following appears in the front above the current screen, indicating that the device has been detected:
USB Detected
The unit’s reports are automatically dumped onto the pendrive.
While the data is being downloaded, the following appears in the front above the current screen:
USB Detected
Downloading data
Just in case there is a CID, an ICD or and IID in the pendrive, the user will be asked for a confirmation to load this file into the unit.
WANT TO START
THE CID UPDATE
CANCEL
ACCEPT
PRESS ENTER: RUN OPTION
If accepted, the following appears on the screen:
USB Detected
Downloading data
If canceled, downloading is assumed to be complete, and the following appears on the screen for 5 seconds:
REMOVE THE
USB DEVICE

User Manual 408
USB ACCESS 
As of this moment, the pendrive can be removed.
Only the reports existent in the unit at the time of the download will appear in the pendrive, with the data structure:
❑ Root with the short installation and relay name (PROT/LPHD node), and the iedName, separated by “_”·, i.e.,
“Instalacion_Rele_iedName”
❑ COMTRADE. This directory contains the disturbance recorders generated in the unit
❑ FAULT RECORDS. This directory contains the fault records generated in the unit.
❑ The rest of the unit’s reports are dependent on the root:
 Maximetro.xml
 Sucesos.xml
 Informe_Estadisticos.xml
 Registro.xml
 CID
For detailed information about these reports, see Chapter 10, “DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS
”.
Figure 199 USB Tree
14.2 LOADING CID
When a pendrive is inserted into the front USB port, a check is run to see if an ICD exists. If there is an ICD, it is copied into the directory
“public/SCL/notvalidated” in order that it may be operative in the unit. When the access is configured “With Password”, the
permissions of the user are checked to verify that this action is allowed.
During the search for the ICD, the existence of a file with an ICD, icd, CID, cid, IID or iid extension is checked. There is not an established
filename as only the extension is checked.
If there is more than one file with one of the indicated extensions, the ICD is considered invalid and not ICD is captured.
14.3 LOADING FIREWALL CONFIGURATION
When a pendrive is inserted into the front USB port, a check is run to see if a firewall configuration file exists. In that case, it is copied
into the system in order that it may be operative in the unit. When the access is configured “With Password”, the permissions of the
user are checked to verify that this action is allowed.
During the search, the existence of a file with “fwc” extension is checked. There is not an established filename as only the extension is
checked.
If there is more than one file with one of the indicated extensions, the file is considered invalid and not captured.

User Manual 409
USB ACCESS 
14.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE
For firmware update via USB, a USB flash drive must be inserted in the front USB port, with a "FW" directory with a valid firmware file.
When the access is configured “With Password”, the permissions of the user are checked to verify that this action is allowed.
In the local display, the user will be prompted for a confirmation to start the update. It is very important that during the process of
updating firmware the device is not turned off since in that case the device could become unusable.
After the update the device will restart automatically and the result of the update can be consulted either in the device versions screen
or in the latest updates screen (consult display section).

User Manual 410
FTP ACCESS 
15. FTP ACCESS

The public user for FTP access is as follows:
❑ User: ftpuser
❑ Password: ftpuser
Available from firmware version 5.25.16.1, the device implements a sFTP access for secure connections as follows:
❑ User: sftpuser
❑ Password: sftpuser
The passwords can be modified from the local display or from the software tool pacFactory.
The key modification meets the criteria defined by the IEEE1686 standard (available from firmware version 6.3.20.0):
 Minimum length of 8 characters.

 At least one character of each type: uppercase, lowercase, numeric and special (not alphanumeric).
In addition to some own criteria to provide additional security:
 It is not allowed to reuse the previous key: including modifying only uppercase / lowercase. It is required a minimum of 4
characters modified with respect to the previous string.
 Palindromes are not accepted.
These user profiles allows direct access to the following directorys and files:
Config directory:
❑ config/SYSTEM_LOG: Text files with system information.

❑ CIDupdates.log: Log of events of the CID files received.
❑ swupdates.log: Log of events of the firmware upddates.
❑ System.log: Los of system information events.
❑ Versions.log: Versions of the device.
❑ ftp.log: Log of events of the FTP access (available from firmware version 5.25.16.1)
❑ config/VALIDATION_TRACES: Text files with the received CIDs validation information.

❑ log_lib850.log: Log of events related with the IEC 61850 parser.
❑ validation_traces.log: Los of events of general parser.
LD directory:
❑ LD/PROT/COMTRADE: Oscilografy files in Comtrade format.

❑ LD/PROT/FAULT_RECORDS: Fault report files.
❑ LD/PROT/FAULT_SETTINGS: Settings files associated with fault reports.
SCL directory:
❑ SCL/NotValidated: Directory to copy the new CID file to configure the device.
❑ SCL/Validated: Directory with the active CID configuracion file (read only).
The user for ftp firmware update is as follows:
❑ User: ftpUpdat

User Manual 411
FTP ACCESS 
❑ Password: ftpUpdat
With this user you can access the directory "downloads" where a valid firmware file should be copied. Once the file is copied the update
will start automatically.
It is very important that during the process of updating firmware the device is not turned off since in that case the device could become
unusable.
After the update the device will restart automatically and the result of the update can be consulted either in the device versions screen or
in the latest updates screen (consult display section).
15.1 PACFACTORY ACCESS
The user for PacFactory access depends on the connection type:
connection type ftp sftp

user ftppac sftppac
password ftppac sftppac
15.2 ACCESS CONTROL
Available from firmware version 5.25.16.1: The device incorporates a management of failed accesses which after 5 consecutive
attempts to establish a connection using a wrong password, the access to that user is blocked for 10 minutes. From this moment, any
failed attempt blocks the user 10 more minutes. While a user is blocked the correct password is also not accepted to access.
The goal is to harden the system to avoid "brute-force attacks" to recover a key by trying all possible combinations until finding the one
that gains access.
There is a signal on GEN/LLN0 indicating the activation of this block for some user.
 AccAlm: Access alarm. Active when access control is blocking a user.
In addition, all FTP accesses are registered in a log file located in /config/SYSTEM_LOG folder called ftp.log.
In this file, the accesses of any FTP client are recorded, indicating the source IP address and the date and time. Any uploads or
downloads of files are also recorded.

User Manual 412
MAPPING THE UNIT’S SIGNALS, MEASUREMENTS AND METERS
16. MAPPING THE UNIT’S SIGNALS, MEASUREMENTS AND METERS

The binding of the IED internal data to the IEC 61850 data model is configured in the short address (sAddress) attribute.
The sAddr attribute allows the allocation of a short address to DO attributes. According to the IEC 61850 standard short addresses can be
used as IED internal identification for the attribute. In this scope the format of the content is private to the IED and any tool that process
the ICD/CID file shall preserve imported contents in exported SCL files.
All the signals (trips, logics, hw check, digital inputs-outputs, etc.), measurements and meters that are generated in the unit are identified
by a number that appears in the sAddress of each of these elements.
In the factory ICD configuration file, all the internal data is preconfigured, and the user cannot modified them apart from the description
texts.
For new data created at engineering phase, as control logics output data, the software configuration tool allows the creation of sAddress
values.
16.1 SIGNALS
The distribution of the unit’s signals is effected using four numbers as a base: 0, 8192, 16384, 24576. All the unit’s signals are divided
into four types, taking these four digits as references:
16.1.1 Type A signals

This type of signal refers to all those signals with sAddress identification numbers between digits 0 and 8191.
These signals include digital inputs and Goose signals.
❑ Digital Inputs
 Identification number between 0 and 287.
Example: sAddr="S,0,5,0;TX1:GGIO1.Digital input 6,TX2:GGIO1.Digital Input 6,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of digital input number six from the first card in the ICD
sAddress.
 GEN/GGIO node
❑ Goose Signals
 In turn, the Goose signals are divided into RIO modules and LGOS nodes.
RIO modules
Example: sAddr="GS,0,288,0;TX1:RIO1.St,TX2:RIO1.St,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first signal from the first RIO module in the ICD
sAddress.
 GEN/RIO node
LGOS nodes
Example: sAddr="GS,0,608,0;TX1:LGOS1.St,TX2:LGOS1.St,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first signal from the first LGOS node in the ICD
sAddress.
 GEN/LGOS node
Therefore, the distribution of these signals based on their identification number is as follows:

User Manual 413
Table 247 Type A signal mapping
DIGITAL
INPUTS
(0 - 287)
GOOSE
SIGNALS
(288 - 1695)
The number of this type of signal reserved in the unit is 1696.
16.1.2 Type B signals

This type of signal includes type B protection signals, fast protection logic signals, fast control logic signals and signals resulting from
orders.
❑ Type B protection signals

Example: sAddr="S,0,9091,0;TX1:TOC1 Phase trip,TX2:TOC1 Phase Trip,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of a type B protection signal in the ICD sAddress.
PROT/PTOC1 node
 Additional type B protection signals: Identification number between 9472 and 10751
❑ Fast protection logics
Example: sAddr="PS,0,9216,0;TX1:Protection logic 1,TX2:Protection logic 1,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first protection logic in the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/pGGIO node
❑ Fast control logics
Example: sAddr="LS,0,9344,0;TX1:Fast logic 1,TX2:Fast logic 1,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first fast control logic in the ICD sAddress.
 CTRL/AutGGIO2 node
❑ Signals resulting from orders
Example: sAddr="RS,0,10754,1;TX1:,TX2:,AC:1.2,ED:0.1,AD:0.0" />
In the example, we can see the identification number of a signal in the ICD sAddress.
 The node depends on the configuration of the CID

User Manual 414
Table 248.Type B signal mapping
PROTECTION SIGNALS
TYPE B
(8192 - 9215)
FAST PROTECTION LOGIC

SIGNALS
(9216 - 9343)
FAST CONTROL LOGIC

SIGNALS
(9344 - 9471)
ADDITIONAL
PROTECTION SIGNALS
TYPE B
(9472 -10751)
SIGNALS RESULTING
FROM ORDERS
(10752 - 10879)
16.1.3 Type C signals

These signals include the type C protection signals.
❑ Type C protection signals

Example: sAddr="S,0,16384,0;TX1:Recloser in service,TX2:,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first type C protection signal in the ICD sAddress.
PROT/RREC1 node

User Manual 415
Table 249.Type C signal mapping
TYPE C PROTECTION
SIGNALS
(16384 - 16991)
16.1.4 Type D signals

This type of signal refers to all those signals with sAddress identification numbers between digits 24576 and higher.
This type of signal includes the type D protection signals, the communication failure signals for all the bays that are connected to
the unit, the slow logic control signals, signals resulting from orders and Loc and LocSta signals (for more information about these
signals go to 1.2.1 Command blocks by command hierarchies, in IEC 61850 commands)
❑ Type D protection signals

Example: sAddr="S,0,24576,0;TX1:Relay in service,TX2:OnLine,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first type D protection signal in the ICD sAddress.
PROT/LLN0 node
 Additional protection signals: Identification number between 27936 and 28063
❑ Communication failure control signals
❑ Slow control logics
Example: sAddr="LS,0,25120,0;TX1:Slow logic 1,TX2:Slow logic 1,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first slow control logic in the ICD sAddress.
❑ Signals resulting from orders
 Example: sAddr=" RS,0,26908,4;TX1:CSWI4 opClsOr,TX2:,AC:3.7.8.4,ED:1.1.1.1,AD:0.0.0.0"
❑ Loc signals
 Example: sAddr=" S,0,27424,0;TX1:GEN.LLN0.Loc,TX2:GEN.LLN0.Loc,AC:1.2,ED:0.0,AD:0.0"
❑ LocSta signals
 Example: sAddr="S,0,27680,0;TX1:GEN.RIOGGIO1.LocSta,TX2:GEN.RIOGGIO1.LocSta,AC:1.2,ED:0.0,AD:0.0"

User Manual 416
Table 250 Type D signal mapping
TYPE D PROTECTION SIGNALS

(24576 - 24991)
CONTROL SIGNALS (COM FAILURE)

(24992 - 25119)
SLOW LOGIC CONTROL SIGNALS

(25120 - 26399)
SIGNALS RESULTING FROM

ORDERS
(26400 - 27423)
LOC SIGNALS
(27424 - 27679)
LOCSTA SIGNALS
(27680 – 27935)
ADDITIONAL
PROTECTION SIGNALS
(27936 - 28063)
16.1.5 SIGNALS SADDRESS

Through the sAddress fields of each signal, its behavior and display can be modified. The method to modify the fields of the
sAddress must always be the configuration tool. Manually modifying these values can cause errors and the associated signal to
malfunction.
The sAddress has the following format:
sAddr=”a,b,c,d;TX1:TEXT LANG 1,TX2:TEXT ID2,AC:1.2.3.4,ED:1.1.1.1,AD:1.0.1.0,TX3:TEXT SOE 1,TX4:TEXT SOE 2”
NOTE: TX3 and TX4 fields are available from firmware version 8.0.22.0
❑ First group: Signal identification

❑ a: Signal type:
 S (letter corresponding to signals)
 PS (letter corresponding to protection logic signals)
 LS (letter corresponding to signals of the rest of the logics)
 GS (letter corresponding to reception goose signals)
 RS (letter corresponding to signals for order return information)

User Manual 417
❑ b: UCL number of the signal. (Value 0 for internal UCL). Maximum 4 characters.
NOTE: in GS and RS type signals it will always be the internal UCL, that is, value 0.
❑ c: Signal number, the highest 3 bits indicate the type of signal buffer. Maximum 5 characters.
NOTE: in GS and RS type signals, the signal number in the database will be in a range reserved for signals of its type.
❑ d: Number of bits of the signal. Maximum 2 characters.
 Boolean signals: with value 0 or 1.
 Double signals: 4 bits.
 Enumerated signals: As many bits as states have the enum.
❑ Second group:
Texts and acronyms that we can assign to each signal and the configuration of events and alarms to be shown on the
display and in the SOE file. These texts would be the ones that we are going to use to identify the signals on the display,
logic and protection console.
Each field has an identifier before it, followed by a colon and the value of the field:
❑ TX1: Element text in Language 1 (Maximum 29 characters)

❑ TX2: Element text in Language 2 (Maximum 29 characters)
❑ AC: Index of the acronym in the list of acronyms for each of the signal states. It depends on the number of states
associated with the signal, so that there will be as many assigned values as the signal has states. Each of the
assigned values refers to an acronym index, so a different one is assigned to each state.
❑ ED: Event on display. It depends on the number of states associated with the signal, so that there will be as many
assigned values as the signal has states. For each state a field is associated, so that if the field is “0” (NO EVENT), no
event is assigned to that state, and if it is “1” (EVENT), if it is associated with an event. This means that, if there is a
“1” in any of the states, that change will be shown on the display and in the SOE file (Cybersecurity SOE file
available since firmware version 8.0.22.0).
This signal must be sent to the event queue when it goes from any other state to this state.
❑ AD: Alarm on display. Reserved for a future implementation.
❑ TX3: SOE text in Language 1 (Maximum 119 characters), this field is optional but if the TX4 field is configured, the
TX3 field becomes mandatory. Signal text in language 1 to be displayed in the SOE file.
❑ TX4: SOE text in Language 2 (Maximum 119 characters), this field is optional. Signal text in language 2 to be
displayed in the SOE file.
The texts of the signals that are displayed in the SOE are configured and function as follows:
❑ If there are no TX3 and TX4 in the saddress, the description of the signal configured in the texts TX1 and TX2 is
displayed in the SOE.
"TX1: TEXT LANGUAGE1, TX2: TEXT LANGUAGE2, AC: 1.2.3.4, ED: 1.1.1.1, AD: 1.0.1.0"
❑ If there is TX3 and there is no TX4 in the saddress, the description of the signal configured in the text TX3 is
displayed in the SOE in language 1 and in language 2 the text TX2 is displayed.
"TX1: TEXT LANGUAGE1, TX2: TEXT LANGUAGE2, AC: 1.2.3.4, ED: 1.1.1.1, AD: 1.0.1.0, TX3: TEXT SOE 1”
❑ If there are TX3 and TX4 in the saddress, the description of the signal configured in the texts TX3 and TX4 is
displayed in the SOE.
"TX1: TEXT LANGUAGE1, TX2: TEXT LANGUAGE2, AC: 1.2.3.4, ED: 1.1.1.1, AD: 1.0.1.0, TX3: TEXT SOE 1, TX4: TEXT
SOE 2"
❑ If there are TX3 and TX4 in the saddress, but one of them is not configured, that is, if the TX3 field is empty, the
text of TX1 is displayed and if the TX4 field is empty, the text of the TX2 field is displayed.
"TX1: TEXT LANGUAGE1, TX2: TEXT LANGUAGE2, AC: 1.2.3.4, ED: 1.1.1.1, AD: 1.0.1.0, TX3:, TX4:"

User Manual 418
16.2 MEASUREMENTS
All the unit's measurements are divided into four types:
❑ Protection measurements.
Example: sAddr="M,0,124,1;TX1:I average,TX2: AVERAGE I"
In the example, we can see the identification number of a protection measurement in the ICD sAddress.
PROT/MMXU1 node
 Additional measurements: Identification number between 744 – 948 and 979 - 1471.
 PROT LD
❑ Goose Measurements
Example: sAddr="GM,0,300,0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first Goose measurement in the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/LGOS node
❑ Measurements resulting from logics
Example: sAddr="LM,0,556,0;TX1:Logic measurement 1,TX2:Logic analog 1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first logic measurement in the ICD sAddress.
❑ Measurements resulting from analogical input boards
Example: sAddr="M,0,688,0;TX1:Measure 1,TX2:Measure 1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first measurement in the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/GGIO node
❑ RTD boards measurements
Example: sAddr="M,0,949,0;TX1:Temperatura 1,TX2:Temperature 1"
 GEN/RTD
Therefore, the distribution of these measurements based on their identification number is as follows:

User Manual 419
Table 251 Measurement mapping
PROTECTION MEASUREMENTS
(0 - 299)
GOOSE MEASUREMENTS
(300 - 555)
MEASUREMENTS RESULTING FROM CONTROL LOGICS

(556 - 687)
MEASUREMENTS RESULTING FROM ANALOGICAL

INPUT BOARDS
(688 - 743)
ADDITIONAL
(744 - 948)
RTD BOARDS MEASUREMENTS

(949 - 978)
ADDITIONAL
(979 - 1471)
The number of measurements reserved in the unit is 1472.
16.3 COUNTERS
All the unit's counters are divided into three types:
❑ Protection counters
Example: sAddr="C,0,0;TX1:Active energy out,TX2:Active Energy Out"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first protection counter in the ICD sAddress.
 Additional protection counters: Identification number between 150 and 229.
 GEN and PROT LDs
❑ Counters resulting from logics
Example: sAddr="LC,0,32;TX1:Logic counter 1,TX2:Logic counter 1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first logic counter in the ICD sAddress.

User Manual 420
❑ Goose counters
 Identification number between 230 and 357
Example: sAddr="GN,0,232;TX1:GOOGGIO2.DPSInd3,TX2:GOOGGIO2.DPSInd3,AC:1.2.3.4,ED:1.1.1.1,AD:0.0.0.0"/>
 GEN/GOOGGIO node
Therefore, the distribution of these counters based on their identification number is as follows:
Table 252 Counter mapping
PROTECTION COUNTERS
(0 - 31)
COUNTERS RESULTING FROM CONTROL LOGICS

(32 - 149)
ADDITIONAL
PROTECTION COUNTERS
(150 - 229)
GOOSE COUNTERS
(230 - 357)
The number of counters reserved in the unit is 358.

User Manual 421
LOGICS
17. LOGICS
This document explains the operating mode of the logics generation tool of logic devices.
The EF family’s logics are fragments of executable code generated by the user using a PC tool, both in text and graphic formats. These
logics can be defined in an IED’s data model (using iedFactory) or in a particular instance (using substationFactory or the pacFactory
settings tool).
There are two different types of logics: control logics and protection logics.
In this chapter the device logics are defined and an introduction to the configuration options is presented. For more details about the logics
configuration consult the user manual of the software configuration tool (pacFactory / energyFactorySuite).
17.1 CONTROL LOGICS
The logics can be used to customize the behaviour of an IED. For example, automatism can be added or calculations between different
magnitudes can be carried out.
The logics are run in two different tasks, each with different priorities: one for fast logics and one for slow logics.
The running time for the fast logics is 2 milliseconds. The running time for the slow logics is approximately 10 milliseconds, although
given that this is a lower priority task it may occasionally be affected by other higher priority tasks.
Each configured logic must be included in one of these two tasks, in accordance with the manner in which they are to be run – fast
logics or slow logics.
To edit a control logic from substationFactory, the user must select the corresponding IED and click on the editor icon. To edit the
control logic from pacFactory, click on the "Logics" option in the “Configuration” menu or in the side menu.
The logics are defined in program blocks called POU (program organization unit). Two of the languages defined in the IEC-61131-3
standard are offered for the creation of each POU: one textual (ST) and one graphic (FBD).
There are three types of POU, as defined in the IEC-61131-3 standard: PROGRAM, FUNCTION_BLOCK and FUNCTION. The programs are
the senior hierarchy POUs, with each one corresponding to a task to be run on the device. Each PROGRAM can refer to several
FUNCTION_BLOCK and FUNCTION. In turn, a FUNCTION_BLOCK can refer to one or more FUNCTION.
At the IED level, two PROGRAM corresponding to the two above tasks are automatically defined: one for the fast logics (FastLog) and
the other for the slow logics (SlowLog). These PROGRAM cannot be deleted nor can their names be modified. New PROGRAM cannot
be created at any level, either.
All the new signals, measurements and counters that are created in the data model must be assigned a number that appears in the
sAddress of each of these elements.
The range values are:
❑ Fast control logics signals: Value between 9344 and 9471.

❑ Slow control logics signals: Value between 25120 and 26399.
❑ Measurements: Value between 556 and 687.
❑ Counters: Value between 32 and 149.

User Manual 422
LOGICS
17.2 PROTECTION LOGICS
The various protection functions can be configured by means of settings associated to the unit’s internal signals, vg enablings or blocks.
The protection functions treat these signals as inputs, although they do not modify their value. In order to assign them a value, the
protection logics are used.
The protection logics have two main differences in relation to the control logics:
❑ The result of a protection logic is always a Boolean value, to be assigned in one of the protection function's settings.
❑ The protection logic editor has been simplified to facilitate the programming of this type of logic.
The number of available logics is defined by the unit’s data model.
Each logic signal has a value obtained from an associated logic. These logics are fragments of code created in one of the two possible
languages - ST (text) or FBD (graphic). The corresponding language must be selected when a logic corresponding to a signal is edited for
the first time.
Each protection logic is independent from the rest and need not be included in a POU in order to be run. When a protection logic is
saved in the editor, an attempt is made to compile the information. If no error is found, a call to the logic in question is automatically
generated so that the logic is run when a CID (configured IED description) message is sent to the device or sent from pacFactory.
The protection logics are run every 2 milliseconds, as are the fast control logics.
To edit a protection logic from substationFactory, the user must select the corresponding logic signal and click on the editor icon. This
icon has three statuses to indicate the status of the corresponding logic:
Icon Logic statuses:

No logic has been edited for this signal. The value of the signal will be 0 (false).
Logic edited and ready to be run.
Logic edited, but with errors. Logic will not be run.
The following image shows a detail of the expander with four signals with logic signals of different statuses:
Details of the expander with protection logic signals
To edit a protection logic from pacFactory, click on the "Protection Logics" option in the “Configuration” menu or in the side menu.
A screen with a list of the available protection logic signals, along with the logic’s status icon and an access button for each logic’s
editor, will be shown.

User Manual 423
LOGICS
Details of the protection logics list in pacFactory
17.3 DATABASE SIGNALS
All of the IED’s database signals, measurements, meters and commands can be accessed as readings from the logics (the data model’s
basic data with valid sAddress). There is a set of data within this database that can be modified from the control logics:
Signal type Description

Critical signals Digital signals that can be modified from the fast task (FastLog)
Non-critical signals Digital signals that can be modified from the slow task (SlowLog)
Measurements Floating point data that can be modified from both tasks
Meters Whole numbers that can modified from both tasks
Commands Commands can only be generated from the slow task (SlowLog)
Both the data’s value and its quality can be accessed. If data is modifiable from the logic, the same will apply to the value and the
quality.
The data that can be modified from the logic may be preset in the unit's data model or they can be configured in the engineering
phase.
Only the status of the signal to which the logic in question is associated can be modified from the protection logics.
17.4 OUTPUT DATA UPON POWER-UP
Output data can maintain its value after the device is powered off and on.
In the logics, user can define variables of type RETAIN, which have the property of remaining with the value that they had before the
power off of the device.

User Manual 424
LOGICS
The maximum size allowed for all the logics of each group (protection and control) is 96 bytes. This means that if the variables that we
define with this property are of type BOOL (that is, the type associated to the logical signals) we can define a maximum of 96 RETAIN
variables.
Example of using variables in the logics:
There are global variables belonging to the model that can be used in the logic. For example all the signals like Trips or Starts of
protection functions. In the protection logics, each logic has a variable associated with it that is the output of that logic. That output is
also visible as a signal and can be sent in reports or GOOSES, assign it to a digital output, etc.
Each logic can also have internal variables. Once inside the logic editor, click on the "Show interface editor" option to see and / or add
internal variables to the logic (select the VAR tab).
A new variable can be created in 2 ways:
1.- When a non-recognized text is written in the algorithm, an assistant appears asking if you want to add it as a variable.
2.- Writing directly in the cell (if in tabular mode), as shown in next figure.
An internal variable to the logic can be made permanent selecting the RETAIN option in the Retain column.

User Manual 425
LOGICS
The initial value is optional. If it is assigned, it is the value it takes the first time the logic is executed. In the case of the variables not
marked as Retain each time the device is started, the variable is restarted with that value. In the case of Retain variables, it is only
started when the logic has been created or changed. Of course, it is highly recommended to initialize the variables.
When a "Function Block" is used in a logic, it is also considered a variable. If one of the predefined "Function Block" in the editor's right-
hand tab is dragged into the editing window, such as a SR flip-flop (SetReset), an SR1 variable of type SR is added. By activating the
option "Show interface editor" we can see how it is in the list of variables (next figure). In this case, if we want to store the internal
states of this block, we must also select the corresponding RETAIN option.
In the case of the "Function Blocks" with RETAIN option, the size in bytes used depends on the number of internal variables of that
block. In the case of the SR they are 3 bytes.
The example (previous figure) is a simple logic in graphic language to demonstrate how to make permanent the internal state of a SR
flip-flop.

User Manual 426
IEC 61850 COMMANDS
18. IEC 61850 COMMANDS
18.1 RUNNING IEC 61850 COMMANDS
Commands can be issued for controllable elements (elements whose functional constraint is “CO”) that may belong to different Data
classes (detailed in IEC 61850-7-3). Common data classes available in the IED are:
❑ Controllable single point (SPC)

❑ Controllable double point (DPC)
❑ Controllable enumerated status (ENC)
❑ Binary controlled step position information (BSC)
❑ Binary controlled analog process value (BAC)
❑ Controllable analogue process value (APC)
❑ Integer controlled step position (ISC)
❑ Controllable enumerated status (INC)
The device implements the following services defined by IEC 61850 standard:
❑ Select (Sel) / SelectWithValue (SelVal)

❑ Cancel
❑ Operate (Oper)
❑ CommandTermination (CmdTerm)
The structure required to operate the command has the following fields:
❑ CtlVal. Command value. The type will be different, in accordance with element’s the CDC (Common Data Class).
❑ Origin. It includes information about the origin of the command, divided into two fields:
 orCat. Origin category. Indicates the type of origin that issues the command (local, substation, remote command, etc.)
 orIdent. Octect string that allows the identification of the command origin.
❑ CtlNum. It is the sequence number of the command.
❑ T: The timestamp when the command was generated.
❑ Test: It defines whether the control service request is going to be used with test purposes or not.
❑ Check: Delimits the kind of checkup that must be performed to the command before running it.
Because the Ingepac EF device implements edition 2 of the IEC61850 standard but maintains compatibility with the existing
configurations of edition 1, the differences in the data used to track orders are explained below:
In addition to informing of the changes in the status signals of the elements on which the commands are to be run, the reports
also provide information on the changes in the status of the two data associated with the command process itself: OpOpnOr
and OpClsOr.
These data have four possible statuses:

User Manual 427
Table 253 OpOpnOr and OpClsOr statuses
Value Explanation enum

STANDBY Command in standby 0
IN PROGRESS Command in process 1
SUCCESSFUL Command run successfully 2
UNSUCCESSFUL Failure in running of command 3
For opening commands in general, OpClsOr remains in STANDBY, the sequence for OpOpnOr would be STANDBY - IN PROGRESS
- SUCCESSFUL / UNSUCCESSFUL – STANDBY. In the case of a closure command, OpOpnOr would remain in standby and OpClsOr
would continue the complete sequence. If the command’s CtlModel indicates that the command has normal security, no return
information is available from the device and, therefore, the sequence would be STANDBY - IN PROGRESS – STANDY.
CONFIGURACIONES USING ED2:
In the second edition of IEC61850 standard, three new data elements are defined in order to follow the command process:
opOk, OpRcvd and tOpOk. These new elements have a new functional constraint, “OR”.
OpRcvd is activated upon the reception of a command and deactivated about 10 milliseconds later.
OpOk is activated at the same time as the command pulse (the pulse that will afterwards be transmitted to a digital output, for
example) and tOpOk shows the timestamp when opOk was activated.
OpOk and OpRcvd may be set as RS signals, editing their sAddr in the CID using the configuration tool. In this way, their values
will be refreshed in the internal database and will be available for internal logics.
In addition to these elements, it is also possible to generate a series of indications, through signals from the database, to
provide complementary information on the return of the orders.
In the logical nodes where it is necessary to have this return information of the controls, the normative class has been extended
defining the following data objects with CDC = "ACT", which in turn includes the optional data "originSrc".
❑ OpOpnPrg / OpClsPrg: Execution of opening and closing controls (order in progress).

❑ OpOpnFail / OpClsFail: Failure of opening and closing controls (command failure).
The configuration for the use of these return signals is done through the configuration tool, through the sAddr field of the
command itself. However, the return signals have an RS type sAddr.
In both configurations, upon completion of an order execution, part 7-2 of the IEC 61850 standard defines the possible reasons for
termination. The following table lists the AddCause values used by the device:

User Manual 428
Table 254 AddCause considered
Value Cause Explanation enum

Unknown Unknown cause Command not successful due to unknown causes 0
Not-Supported Not configured 1
Blocked-by-switching-
Blocked by hierarchy Not successful since one of the downstream Loc switches like in CSWI has the value TRUE 2
hierarchy
Select-failed Selection failure Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select service) 3
Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position (Pos in XCBR or XSWI) or the switch
Invalid-position Invalid position 4
reaches an invalid position.
Position-reached Position reached Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in XCBR or XSWI) 5
Parameter-change-in- Parameter change in
Control action is blocked due to running parameter change 6
execution execution
Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or XCBR/XSWI) is in a mode (Mod) which does
Blocked-by-Mode 8
not allow any switching
Control action is blocked due to interlocking of switching devices (in CILO attribute
Blocked-by-interlocking Block signal activated 10
EnaOpn.stVal=“FALSE” or EnaCls.stVal=“FALSE”
Command-already-in-
Command in execution Control service or cancel is rejected, because control action is already running 12
execution
Control action is blocked due to some internal event that prevents a successful operation
Blocked-by-health Health signal activated 13
(Health)
Control action is blocked, because another control action in a domain (for example, substation)
1-of-n-control 1 of n block 14
is already running (in any XCBR or XSWI, the DPC.stSeld=“TRUE”).
Abortion-by-cancel Command cancelled Control action is aborted due to cancel service 15
Time-limit-over Time exceeded Control action is terminated due to exceed of some time limit 16
Object not selected Object not selected Control action is rejected, since object is not selected 18
Object-already-selected Object already selected Select action is not executed, because the addressed object is already selected 19
Abortion-by- Abortion by
Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection with the client that issued the control 23
communication-loss communication loss
None Command accepted Control action successfully executed 25
Inconsistent-parameters Inconsistent parameters The parameters between successive control services are not consistent 26
Locked-by-other-client Locked by other client Another client has already reserved the objet 27
On the other hand, the operating mode of a specific command is defined by the ctlModel configuration parameter associated with that
command, according to the following table:
Table 255 Possible ctlModel
Value Explanation enum

The object is not controllable, only the services that apply to a status object are supported. The attribute ctlVal does
status-only 0
not exist.
direct-with-normal-security Direct control with normal security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 1
sbo-with-normal-security SBO control with normal security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 2
direct-with-enhanced-
Direct control with enhanced security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 3
security
sbo-with-enhanced-security SBO control with enhanced security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 4
Other configuration parameters that determine the progress of the command are:
❑ PulseConfig. This data structure defines the command’s output pulse type (pulse, duration, pulse train). The command is
not terminated until the last pulse ends.
❑ OperTimeOut. Maximum switching time, after which, failure occurs if the command has not been successfully executed.
❑ sboTimeout. The time during which the command selection remains activated.
In the following sections, the operation process of a command depending on the ctlModel is described in detail.

User Manual 429
18.1.1 DIRECT_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (1)
If the command’s ctlModel is DIRECT_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (1), the process to follow will be as shown in the following figure:
Figure 200 Direct command process with normal security
IEC 61850 Client IEC 61850 Server Process
Operate
Checkup for
operation
Origin, blocks…
Operate
Response
Upon receiving a request to run a command by an Operate Request, the device analyses the validity of the request, checking the
client’s authorization and any possible blocks, and responds positively or negatively by an Operate Response to the client. If the
response is positive, the command is sent to the device.
18.1.2 SBO_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (2)
If the command’s ctlModel is SBO_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (2), the process is similar, but including a selection prior to execution:
Figure 201 Command process with select before operate and normal security
Select
Checkup for
selection
Origin,
selection…
Select
Response
Operate Checkup for

operation
Origin, blocks…
Operate
Response

User Manual 430
In this case, after receiving a selection request the selection's permission is checked and, when applicable, a positive response is sent.
At that moment a timer starts. This timer will cancel the selection after the sboTimeOut timeout ends. If an operate request is received
before the conclusion of the timeout, the same process as described for the direct commands with normal security is followed.
If the selection is not accepted, the response will be negative and the process is concluded.
18.1.3 DIRECT_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (3)

When the command’s ctlModel is DIRECT_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (3), the process starts exactly as the direct commands with
normal security, as shown in the diagram below:
Figure 202 Direct command process with enhanced security
Operate
Checkup for
operation
Origin, blocks…
Operate
Response
Command
Termination
After sending the operate request to the device, the return information of the element on which the command is executed is expected,
so that the device can inform the client throught a Command Termination if the operation has been successfully executed.
If the device’s return information is received before the conclusion of the operTimeout (the maximum execution time) and the position
requested has been reached, the IED then sends to the client a positive Command Termination.
If the operTimeout time is exceeded without having received the information from the device, or if it is received but the position
requested has not been reached, the Command Termination will be negative. In this case, the cause of the failure of the command will
be included in the AddCause field.
18.1.4 SBO_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (4)

The ctlModel SBO_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (4) includes, in addition to the enhanced security process of the commands modelled
as DIRECT_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY, the SelectWithValue service in order to select the command before operate. In this way, it is
verified that the value sent in the selection process is the same as the one sent during the execution. The scheme to be followed is:

User Manual 431
Figure 203 Command process with select before operate and enhanced security
IEC 61850 Client 61850 Server Process

Select
Checkup for
selection
Origin,
Select selection…
Response
Operate
Checkup for
operation
Operate Origin, blocks…
Response
Command
Terminationn
Similarly to direct orders with enhanced security, if the order fails, the cause of the failure is reported in the AddCause field.
18.2 COMMAND BLOCKS
The commands sent to the device can be blocked for different reasons in which the execution cannot be allowed. In part 7-2, of the IEC
61850 standard, the possible reasons for failure of a command are detailed.
The following subsections describe the different blocks implemented by the device.
IMPORTANT NOTE: The order of these sections matches exactly with the order of blocking verification that the IED follows. So once
a block is applied, the command will not prosper and next blocks will not be checked.
18.2.1 Command blocks by inconsistent parameters

The parameters of the command are checked to ensure that there have been no changes to them.
This block only affects commands with ctlModel SBO_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (4) that are performed through the
SelectWithValue service.
The reason for command failure when this block is generated is "inconsistent parameters" (AddCause = 26).
18.2.2 Command blocks by switching hierarchy

The next possible cause of locking a command is switching hierarchy blocking (AddCause = 2). The IED implements a hierarchy of
commands that implies the blocking of the orders according to their origin and the configuration of the device.
In the standard IEC 61850, part 7-3, it is defined the possible origins of a command that are affected by blockages due to the
switching hierarchy.
 "not-supported": Only accepted in the mode that the order hierarchy is not handled.

User Manual 432
 "remote-control": corresponds to a remote origin.

 "station-control" or "maintenance": corresponds to a console.
 "bay-control": corresponds to a console at bay / local level or to the display.
 "automatic-bay", "automatic-static" or "automatic-remote". By default, orders sent by IEC61850 with these
origins are allowed, except for the modes that strictly check the local origin of the order (LRMode, Edition 2
and Exclusive Edition 2).
Under the section "Command blocks by interlocking" it is explained the particular operation for these origins in
H automation architectures.
 "process": Commands with this origin are not accepted in any case. The process source is reserved for changes
in the state of control elements that do not come from commands. If there is a change in a signal associated
with a command but the change of state has not been a consequence of an order, but a spontaneous change,
the order orCat will be written to "PROCESS".
The "Remote/Local Type" setting determines how the device will behave at the moment of blocking the commands by hierarchy. It
is found in the data model as "GEN/LLN0.LRmode" or in the display under "General configuration: Remote / Local Type". The
following values are available:
Table 256. Available values for LRMode
LRmode Numeric Value

Not treated 0
Iberdrola 1
Exclusive 2
No HMI 3
ExclusiveBR 4
Edition2 5
ExclusiveEd2 6

Depending on the mode selected, it can be taken into account the status of the signals GEN/LLN0.RemCtlBlk (remote control
signal status) and GEN/LLN0.Lockey (HMI signal status).
To interpret the tables in the next sections with edition 1 configurations, it is necessary to consider the first columns according
to the following relation:
❑ Loc = RemCtlBlk
❑ LocSta = Lockey
In any case, for these configurations, as the data model specific to ICD Ed2 is required, any LRMode associated with Edition 2 is
not available.

Depending on the mode selected, the MltLev setting of the LLN0 of the logical device GEN can be taken into account, as well as
the status of the Loc and LocSta signals.
MltLev is a boolean setting that can be found in the data model in "GEN/LLN0.MltLev", and indicates if more than one level
(Originator) has the switching authority. This setting only applies to Edition2 and ExclusiveEd2 modes.
Loc is a boolean status signal ("GEN/LLN0.Loc.stVal"). It shows the local status, which is unique for the device, so all the Loc
signals show always the same status (the standard defines this signal in several nodes with configured commands). To be able
to modify this state, we have two options:
 Sending a command on the RemCtlBlk ("GEN/LLN0.RemCltBlk") element. This way, every Loc signal will be set
to the same value as "GEN/LLN0.RemCltBlk.stVal".
 Configuring the LogInLR setting ("GEN/LLN0.LogInLR") to a valid signal reference, so that this signal status
stablishes the value of every Loc. It is important to note that this setting predominates over sending the

User Manual 433
command to the RemCtlBlk element explained in the previous point. Therefore, when this setting is configured
the command over the RemCtlBlk element is not allowed.
LocSta is a boolean status signal ("GEN/LLN0.LocSta.stVal"). Its status shows if station or remote origins are accepted, and as in
the case of Loc, it is unique for the device although it may exist in several logical nodes. To modify the status of LocSta, a
command on the controllable LocSta element "GEN/LLN0.LocSta" can be issued. Every LocSta element in the device will show
the same status value.
The operating characteristics of each of the LRmode values are detailed in the following points:
❑ LRMode: Not treated
No switching hierarchy blocking on commands is applied. It is the only mode that allows commands from the "not-
supported" origin.
❑ LRMode: Iberdrola
The status of Loc and LocSta signals is taken into account. The following tables show for each combination whether the
order is blocked or allowed, depending on the origin of the order.
Table 257. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "Iberdrola"
Loc LocSta Bay Station Remote

(1) (1) allowed blocked blocked
(1) (0) allowed allowed blocked
(0) (1) blocked blocked allowed
Table 258. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "Iberdrola"

Table 259. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for LocSta on mode "Iberdrola"

(0) (1) blocked blocked blocked
❑ LRMode: Exclusive
This mode of operation implies that when activating the status of the RemCtlBlk (associated with Loc), the activation of the
value of the LocSta signal is automatically generated. Deactivation is independent.
The status of Loc and LocSta signals is taken into account in this mode.
Because the activation of the RemCtlBlk signal triggers the activation of the LocSta, in the "Exclusive" LRMode, it is not
possible to reach the Loc = 1 and LocSta = 0 state from the table’s origins. It is only possible to reach this value after a
LRMode change or using "automatic" origin, however, the behavior is exactly the same as for Loc = 1 and LocSta = 1.

User Manual 434
Table 260. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "Exclusive"

(0) (0) blocked allowed blocked
Table 261. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "Exclusive"

Table 262. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for LocSta on mode "Exclusive"

❑ LRMode: No HMI
Only the status of the Loc signal is taken into account. The following table shows for each combination whether the
command is blocked or allowed, depending on the origin.
Table 263. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "No HMI"
Loc Bay Station Remote

(1) allowed blocked blocked
(0) blocked allowed allowed
Table 264. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "No HMI"
Loc Bay Station Remote

* The LocSta table has not been included because is not used in this mode. The command blocks applied will be those of
RemCtlBlk.
❑ LRMode: ExclusiveBR
This is a particular case of the "Exclusive" LRMode mode. This LRMode differs in that the LocSta variable is not activated
automatically when the RemCtlBlk is activated and it is possible to modify the LocSta if the equipment is in local mode (Loc
= 1) from the same origin (bay-control).
The following tables show for each combination whether the order is blocked or allowed, depending on the origin of the
order.

User Manual 435
Table 265. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "ExclusiveBR"

Table 266. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "ExclusiveBR"

Table 267. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for LocSta on mode "ExclusiveBR"

❑ LRMode: Edition2
Only for Edition 2 configurations. If LRMode is "Edition2", the normative hierarchies of commands described in Part 7-4 of
Edition 2 of IEC61850 standard (Annex B) apply.
This implies that the local origin of the command is considered strictly, so that if Loc = 1, no command (nor selection) from
IEC61850 communications is accepted regardless of what is indicated in the origin field (even if it is a bay-level console and
commands with 'bay-control' origin). Therefore, when the equipment is in local mode (Loc = 1) only commands sent from
display or logic are accepted.
In this mode, the MltLev setting of the LLN0 of the logical device GEN, as well as the status of Loc and LocSta signals, is used
to determine if a command is required to be blocked by switching hierarchy.
The following table shows for each combination whether the command is blocked or allowed, depending on the origin. This
table affects all orders, including RemCtlBlk and LocSta.

User Manual 436
Table 268. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "Edition2"
MltLev Loc LocSta Bay Station Remote

(0) (1) (1) allowed* blocked blocked
(0) (1) (0) allowed* blocked blocked
(0) (0) (1) blocked allowed blocked
(0) (0) (0) blocked blocked allowed
(1) (1) (1) allowed blocked blocked

(1) (1) (0) allowed blocked blocked
(1) (0) (1) allowed allowed blocked
(1) (0) (0) allowed allowed allowed
* The local origin is checked strictly: Only display or logics.
❑ LRMode: ExclusiveEd2
Only for Edition 2 configurations. If the LRMode is set to "ExclusiveEd2", the command switching hierarchy blocks are the
same as in the "Edition2" case, except for the commands over the LocSta and RemCtlBlk.
When operating a command on these two elements, the verification of the local origin is not strict, that is, commands
received from IEC61850 communications with origin 'bay-control' or 'automatic' sources are allowed.
The following tables show the behavior of the switching hierarchy blocks on these two orders:
Table 269. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "ExclusiveEd2"

NOTE: MtlLev is not included as it does not modify the table.
Table 270. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for LocSta on mode "ExclusiveEd2"
MltLev Loc LocSta Bay Station Remote

(0) (1) (1) blocked blocked blocked

For all other commands, the local origin check remains strict, as detailed in the LRMode "Edition2" mode.
18.2.2.1 Exceptions to switching hierarchy blocks

Any order sent from the logics or from the pacFactory tool is not affected by switching hierarchy blocks.
In protection commands, hierarchy locks are the same as those in control commands, with the exception of the following
commands, that are never blocked by switching hierarchy.
 Reset commands for statistical data

 Reset commands for maximeter and minimeters

User Manual 437
 Reset commands for energy counters

 Reset commands for queues
 Reset commands for LEDs and relays
 Battery connection/disconnection commands
In the LLN0 node of the logical device GEN the FKeysRem setting is defined. When is set to '1', it allows any order given from
the device’s display without any hierarchical blocking.
Additionally, with the configuration tool it is possible to set (in the sAddress), for each command of type SPC and DPC, if the
switching hierarchy blocks shall be avoided. It can be choosen whether this affects the opening command, the closing
command, or both.
18.2.3 Command 1 of n blocks

It ensures that multiple orders are not executed simultaneously. If a second command is received before the first command is
completed, the error is indicated as "1 of n" block (AddCause = 14).
18.2.4 Command blocks by mode (Mod/Beh)

This block is performed depending on whether the test bit of the received command is activated or not, and based on the Beh
status of the logic node. It has to be taken into account that the mode block is not checked in the case of making commands over
the Mod element or when the origin is display or logics. In case of blocking, the order is rejected with "blocked by mode" reason
(AddCause = 8).
Table 271. Blocks by mode (Mod/Beh)
Command Test Bit Beh=On(1) Beh=Test(3) Beh=Off(5)

0 Allowed BLOCKED_BY_MODE BLOCKED_BY_MODE
1 BLOCKED_BY_MODE Allowed BLOCKED_BY_MODE
The IED contemplates 3 possible Beh / Mod values: 1: ON / 2: BLOCKED / 3: TEST / 4:TEST-BLOCKED / 5: OFF.
When the Beh is Off this block also applies to the selection of the command. As the test bit is not sent in the selection request, it
can not be checked in the other cases. The value Off is only defined in those logical nodes that it makes sense to disable the node
(for example protection functions).
Only with Edition2 configurations, to determine the Beh status of the logical node on which the command is executed, different
levels of hierarchy are defined:
❑ Mod of the own logical node.

❑ Mod of the LLN0 of the logical device to which the logical node belongs.
❑ Mod of the LLN0 of the logical device defined in the GrRef.
The GrRef setting is defined in the Edition2 of the standard and allows to relate a logical device to depend upon the main logical
device, that is “GEN” or the equivalent. Its data type is objRef and it is found in the LLN0. The format to be used is the own logical
device concatenated to the IEDname of the installation.
The following table details the calculation of Beh of a logical node according to the different levels of hierarchy. The GrRef can also
have an empty value and therefore considered unconfigured (NC):

User Manual 438
Table 272. Calculation of Beh according to hierarchy
GrRef LD LDMode LNMode LNBeh

➔
LLN0.Mod LLN0.Mod LN.Mod LN.Beh
On / NC On On ➔ On
On / NC On Test ➔ Test
On / NC On Off ➔ Off
On / NC Test On ➔ Test
On / NC Test Test ➔ Test
On / NC Test Off ➔ Off
Blocked On On ➔ Blocked
Blocked On Test ➔ Test-Blocked
Blocked On Off ➔ Off
Blocked Test On ➔ Test-Blocked
Blocked Test Test ➔ Test-Blocked
Blocked Test Off ➔ Off
Test On On ➔ Test
Test On Test ➔ Test
Test On Off ➔ Off
Test Test On ➔ Test
Test Test Test ➔ Test
Test Test Off ➔ Off
Test-Blocked On On ➔ Test-Blocked
Test-Blocked On Test ➔ Test-Blocked
Test-Blocked On Off ➔ Off
Test-Blocked Test On ➔ Test-Blocked
Test-Blocked Test Test ➔ Test-Blocked
Test-Blocked Test Off ➔ Off
NOTE: Mod / Beh to Off is not accepted in LLN0 nodes.
Commands on Mod elements are not blocked by mode, however, the values accepted for Gen/LLN0.Mod depend on the settings
GEN/LLN0.LogInMdBlk and GEN/LPHD1.LogInMdTest. These settings are further explained in chapter CHARACTERISTICS OF THE IEC
61850 INTERFACE > TEST MODE.
18.2.5 Command blocks by Heatlh

The possibility of blocking commands based on a selectable alarm signal via the configuration tool (in a sAddress field) is available.
If this alarm signal is activated, the command will be blocked by "Blocked by Health" reason (AddCause = 13). It is possible to set a
different configuration for each command.
18.2.6 Command blocks by Interlocking

In IEC61850 Edition 2 configurations, the blocks by interlocking (EnaOpn/EnaCls) are only checked if the command is issued with
the “interlock-check” bit activated. If not, the command will not be checked against this blocking conditions.
On the other hand, in edition 1 configurations or other protocols different than IEC61850, the block by interlocking is always
checked.
The standard defines that the signals of the CILO logical nodes shall be used, but using the configuration tool it is allowed to select
these or any other signal in a generic way to perform the interlocking block. Signals can be set for both the opening and closing
blocks. The reason for the failure associated with this type of block is the "blocked by Interlocking" (AddCause = 10).
In addition, within interlocking blocks, there is a check for installations in H automation architectures. This configuration is
performed using the configuration tool (automation signal sAddress field). When this signal is configured, the following logic is
followed:
❑ Automation signal activated:

 Only commands whose origin is "automatic" are accepted.

User Manual 439
❑ Automation signal deactivated:

 Commands whose origin is "automatic" will be blocked.
For this section it is important to take into account the order followed to check the blocks, so that for example, with LRMode
configured to Edition2, and with the IED in local mode, automatic orders will be blocked by switching hierarchy before reaching this
kind of block.
18.2.7 Commands blocks due to invalid/reached position

The IED allows configuring blocks on commands based on the status of the item on which the order is intended and taking into
account whether an opening or closing is sent.
These blocks are configured through the configuration tool (in a sAddress field) indicating the desired operating mode for each
command.
The commands will be blocked in accordance with the following table:
Table 273 Blocks in accordance with the command mode
Estado invalido /
Open status Close status
desconocido
Open Close Open Close Open Close
Command Mode 0 / -1 ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED
Command Mode 1 BLOCK (1) ALLOWED ALLOWED BLOCK (1) BLOCK (2) BLOCK (2)
Command Mode 2 BLOCK (1) ALLOWED ALLOWED BLOCK (1) ALLOWED BLOCK (2)
Command Mode 3 ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED BLOCK (1) ALLOWED BLOCK (2)
Thus, the blocks marked with (1) are blocks by "position reached" (AddCause = 5) and those marked with (2) are by "invalid
position" (AddCause = 4).
18.3 COMMANDS FOR OTHER POSITIONS
The configuration of these commands is related to the protocol by which they are propagated.
When the command is configured as a command of another device or UCL, the order will be sent to the corresponding device behaving
as a direct order with normal security (ctlModel = 1). The check of return information, pulseConfig, timeouts and blocks must be
performed on the device to which the order belongs.
18.4 COMMAND SADDRESS
Through the sAddress fields of each command the behavior explained in some of the previous sections can be modified. The method
for modifying the sAddress fields must always be the configuration tool. Manually changing these values can cause errors and
malfunction of the associated command.
Indicatively, the sAddress of a command has the following format:
sAddr = " a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j,k,l,m,n,o,p,q,r,s;TX1:Language 1 text,TX2: Language 2 text "
❑ a:= O (letter corresponding to the command) / LO (Letters corresponding to the command logics)
❑ b:= Command UCL number. Maximum 4 characters.
Value 0 is used to select internal Ucl.

User Manual 440
❑ c:= Command number. Maximum 4 characters.

Number of the first associated internal command. Each control element has two internal commands associated. The first
corresponds to the “ON” command (ctlVal = 1) and the second to the “OFF” command (ctlVal = 0). The sAddress value has
to be configured always as the number of the first command, which corresponds to the “ON”.
❑ d:= Enabling off/aperture signal number (EnaOpn). Maximum 5 characters.

Only if configured: It is the number of the signal that allows or blocks the OFF/aperture command, in case of it is activated
or deactivated respectively.
❑ e:= Enabling on/close signal number (EnaCls). Maximum 5 characters.

Only if configured: It is the number of the signal that allows or blocks the ON/close command, in case of it is activated or
deactivated respectively.
❑ f:= Expected status inverted. (1 character)

When set to 1 indicates that the expected status of the signal associated with the command is inverted.
❑ g:= Health signal number. Maximum 5 characters.

Only if configured: It is the number of the alarm signal that is used to block the order. If the alarm signal is not active, the
remaining locks are checked.
❑ h:= Command Mode. It accepts four possible values (0-3)

Depending on this field, the commands will be blocked for "invalid position" or "position reached". The absence of this field
or a -1 value, assumes the same operation as that corresponds to a 0 value.
The table with the explanation of each mode can be found in the corresponding blocks section.
❑ i:= H automation signal number. Maximum 5 characters.

Only if configured: If it is a valid signal number, the status of the signal is checked to know if the equipment is in automatic
or not:
 If signal value is '1', H automation is activated, so command requests over this element from any origin that is
not “automatic” will be blocked
 If signal value is '0', H automation is not activated, so command requests over this element from any
“automatic” origin will be blocked
❑ j:= UCL number of the enabling off/aperture signal (field d). Maximum 4 characters.
The value 0 is used to refer to internal ucl. If it is empty the ucl number of the command is used.
❑ k:= UCL number of the enabling on/close signal (field e). Maximum 4 characters.
❑ l:= UCL number of the H automation signal (field i). Maximum 4 characters.
❑ m:= Disable block by switching hierarchy (ON/close). 1 character.

Setting this field to value 1 disables blocks per switching hierarchy for the ON command.
❑ n:= Disable block by switching hierarchy (OFF/aperture). 1 character.

Setting this field to value 1 disables blocks per switching hierarchy for the OFF command.
❑ o:= UCL number of the H automation signal (field i). Maximum 4 characters.
❑ p: RS signal associated with return of command (only Ed2): opOpnPrg. Maximum 5 characters.
❑ q: RS signal associated with return of command (only Ed2): opClsPrg. Maximum 5 characters.
❑ r: RS signal associated with return of command (only Ed2): opOpnFail. Maximum 5 characters.
❑ s: RS signal associated with return of command (only Ed2): opClsFail. Maximum 5 characters.

User Manual 441
The UCL associated to the four return signals of commands Ed2 is the UCL of the command itself.
❑ t: Return signal for non boolean commands.
❑ u: Apply LocSta switching hierarchy. 1 character. Setting this field to 1 means that this command will have the same
switching hierarchy blocking criteria as LocSta. The activation of this field implies ignoring both m and n fields.
❑ TX1:= Command text language1. Maximum 16 characters.
❑ TX2:= Command text language2. Maximum 16 characters.

User Manual 442
RIO MODULES
19. RIO MODULES
19.1 CONFIGURATION
The RIO modules are configured using the RIOGGIO logic nodes A maximum of 8 nodes of this type is contemplated.
Each node has series of attributes that allow us to select the RIO modules with which we are to communicate and to configure the
outputs to be published:
Table 274 RIO module configuration attributes in Edition 1
ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION
The RIO number to which we want to associate the current node. It is a configurable value
NumRIO.setVal
between 0 and 99.
The RIO module to which we want to associate. It can accept the 1 (12 inputs / 4 outputs) or 2
TypeRIO.setVal
(8 inputs / 2 outputs). The value 0 is reserved to indicate that the node is not configured.
InRef1.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s first output.
InRef2.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s second output.
InRef3.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s third output.
InRef4.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s fourth output.
Table 275 RIO module configuration attributes in Edition 2
The RIO number to which we want to associate the current node. It is a configurable value
NumRIO.setVal
between 0 and 99.
The RIO module to which we want to associate. It can accept the 1 (12 inputs / 4 outputs) or 2
TypeRIO.setVal
(8 inputs / 2 outputs). The value 0 is reserved to indicate that the node is not configured.
InRef1.setSrcRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s first output.
InRef2.setSrcRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s second output.
InRef3.setSrcRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s third output.
InRef4.setSrcRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s fourth output.
19.2 OPERATION
When we have configured a RIOGGIO logical node correctly, the expected performance in the different attributes is as follows:

User Manual 443
RIO MODULES
Table 276 Operation of RIO module attributes
Status of the communication with the associated RIO module. The value 1 indicates that it is
St.stVal
correct.
Indicates that the configured RIO type does not match that which is being received. This value
CfgErr.stVal
is only displayed in IEC 61850, it has no associated signal in the internal data base.
Ind[1..17].stVal The values received from the RIO module.
The values sent to the RIO module. The value always coincides with the signals configured in
SPSCO[1..4].stVal
the InRefs in the same index.
Both the elements received and the communication status has associated signals with fixed position in the internal database. The
signals are distributed as follows:
Table 277 Internal signals associated with RIO modules
LOGICAL NODE ELEMENT ASSOCIATED INTERNAL SIGNALS
Communication status 288

RIOGGIO1
Values received in command From 289 to 305.

RIOGGIO2

RIOGGIO3

RIOGGIO4

RIOGGIO5

RIOGGIO6

RIOGGIO7

RIOGGIO8

User Manual 444
CHANGES REQUIRING THE REBOOTING OF THE DEVICE
20. CHANGES REQUIRING THE REBOOTING OF THE DEVICE

The modification of the value of certain attributes requires the resetting of the device in order for the modification to have effect. In order
to inform of the need to manually reset of the device, the ResetDev.stVal signal has been defined within the GEN node’s LLN0. In some
cases, it is enough to send a new ICD / CID file.
For standard IEC61850 Ed1 configurations only, after a change on LGOS logical node subscription settings, the server does not require a
reset only if the LGOS was completely configured when the server started. In other case, the change of any of the settings will activate the
reset required signal.
The following table details the possible causes to activate this signal:
Table 278 Setting changes that require the manual reset of the device
LOGICAL NODE ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION DEACTIVATION WITH ICD FILE

The multicast reception MAC associated to
MAC.setVal YES
the goose
GoCBRef.setRef Goose control block reference YES
LGOS – Applies only on

IEC61850 Ed1 GoDatSetRef.setRef Dataset reference YES
configurations.
(Only if not completely GoID.setVal Goose identifier YES

configured at start-up)
ConfRev.setVal Configuration revision YES
LGOS data attribute assigned to one goose

InRef_.intAddr YES
data value
RIO module Type. Involves modifying the

RIOGGIO TypeRIO.setVal YES
structure of the goose.
Network interface associated to the Goose

genIPRV DevGoose.setVal YES
messages.
genIPRV NoGsVlan.setVal VLAN use in Goose messages YES
YES, it is also deactivated after the

LLN0 IRMod.setVal InRefs mode
modification of an InRef data
Change of the I/O cards configuration from
- Commercial code the local HMI (change in the commercial NO
code)
Cybersecurity Signals Configuraction
- Cybersecurity signals NO
modification with a Security Audit User

User Manual 445
DETAILS OF THE IEC61850 INTERFACE
21. DETAILS OF THE IEC61850 INTERFACE

The IEC 61850 server is conforming to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
For the details of the IEC 61850 interface implementation consult the following documents for the Ingepac EF family:
❑ PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement for the IEC 61850 interface
❑ PIXIT: Protocol Implementation eXtra Information for Testing for the IEC 61850 interface
❑ TICS: Technical Issues Implementation Conformance Statement
The Ingepac EF family maintains compatibility with the existing ICDs developed following Edition 1. The last point of this section describes
the GOOSEs subscription for that case. The remaining points refer to functionalities associated with Edition 2 configurations.
Tabla 279. Summary of IEC61850 interface characteristics
CHARACTERISTICS VALUE
Maximum number of clients that can establish an association simultaneously 5 (configurable up to 16)
80 per Logical Device

Maximum number of datasets
3500
Total maximum number of items in datasets
255
Maximum number of report control blocks
64
Maximum number of Logical Devices per IED
32
Maximum number of GOOSEs that can be published
256
Maximum number of items published in a single GOOSE
256 signals
Maximum total number of signals in published GOOSEs
No limit for measures and counters
32 GOOSEs
Maximum number of GOOSE you can subscribe to
256
Maximum number of subscribed items in a single GOOSE
21.1 GOOSE SUBSCRIPTION
According to IEC 61850 Edition 2 the GOOSE subscription is configured using the Inputs-ExtRef elements in the CID file.
The Inputs section defines all external signals that will be received via GOOSE messages from other IEDs. In this section, each ExtRef
element references to one external item and the intAddr element makes the binding of the external signal to an IED internal configured
data.
The CID file of an IED with configured GOOSE subscriptions contains several IED sections. The IED section of the server device itself and
IED sections from each of the IEDs sending GOOSE messages to which the device is subscribed.
These external IED sections only contain the data model needed for the subscription to reduce the size of the CID file.
LGOS logical node is used to monitor GOOSE subscriptions. There are 32 instances of LGOS logical node, which allow monitoring up to
32 GOOSE subscriptions.
The only configuration value in the LGOS logical node is the GoCBRef (Reference to the subscribed GOOSE control block).

User Manual 446
The monitored values are:
❑ NdsCom: Subscription needs commissioning. When true, the received GOOSE message does not conform the current
subscription configuration; either the dataSetRef is wrong, the data set members, the configuration revision number, ...
❑ St:If true, the GOOSE subscription is active, other is inactive
❑ SimSt: If true, subscribed GOOSE messages with the simulation bit set are being received and accepted
❑ LastStNum: Last state number received
❑ ConfRevNum: Expected configuration revision number of the GOOSE messages
❑ RxConfRevNum: Configuration revision number of the received GOOSE messages
The St and SimSt data are mapped to the internal database to be used in for example logics or local display. The other values are only
available through the IEC 61850 communication.
The factory CID file contains 2 logical nodes (GOOGGIO1 and GOOGGIO2) with available data for the internal binding of the received
values.
Each of these logical nodes contains:
❑ 32 boolean signals (Ind1 to Ind32 data)

❑ 4 dbpos signals (DPSInd1 to DPSInd4 data)
❑ 4 float values (AnIn1 to AnIn4 data)
In models with the "Extended control" option the IED data model can be extended with more logical nodes in the control logical device
for internal binding of the data received in GOOSE messages.
Extension capacity:
❑ Signals: Up to a total of 1024 internal signals (including the 2 GOOGGIO nodes) and taking into account that the dbpos
signals occupy 4 internal signals.
❑ Measures: Up to a total of 256 measures (float values).
As established in Edition 2 of the standard, it is possible to subscribe to both data attributes and data objects. The recommendation
following criteria of efficiency and response time is to use data attributes in GOOSE messages. In any case, the device supports the
subscription to data objects of the following CDCs:
❑ Status: SPS, DPS, ENS, ACT, ACD.

❑ Measured: MV, CMV, WYE, DEL, SEQ, DEL y SEQ.
❑ Controllable: SPC, DPC, ENC.
For more information about the GOOSE subscription configuration process consult the software tool manual
(energyFactorySuite/pacFactory).
21.2 GOOSE SIMULATION
The device implements the GOOSE simulation mode defined in the IEC 61850 Edition 2.

User Manual 447
This mode allows the simulation of any GOOSE that is present in the communication network so that two GOOSES with the same
information data will be present at the same moment, the real one without the simulation bit active and the simulated one with the
simulation bit active. If the subscriber is in simulation mode, once it has received the first simulation GOOSE its values will be used
instead of the values of the original GOOSE.
Therefore, if the device is in simulation mode, it still accepts 'original' GOOSE messages, and only discards the 'original' GOOSE
messages for those GOOSEs which are simulated.
Simulation mode is enabled with the controllable data "Sim" included in the LPHD logical node in the GEN logical device.
In each LGOS logical node, used to monitor GOOSE subscription, the SimSt status shows with TRUE value that subscribed GOOSE
messages with the simulation bit set are being received and accepted.
When the subscriber is not in simulation mode (GEN/LPHD.Sim.stVal=false) the simulated GOOSEs are ignored. The device keep on
using the "real" GOOSE messages.
When the subscriber is in simulation mode (GEN/LPHD.Sim.stVal=true) the simulated GOOSEs are used for operational purposes. The
device ignore the "real" GOOSE messages after a first simulated one has been received. The corresponding LGOS.SimSt is set when the
first simulated message is received and only cleared when LPHD.Sim.stVal is set to false.
Once the device has received a simulated message for one of the subscribed GOOSE messages, it will not process the real one until the
simulation mode of the device (LPHD.Sim.stVal) is set to false.
The following state machine, from IEC 61850 TISSUES data base (num. 1151), displays the different states and illustrates the
supervision of GOOSE subscription with regards to LGOS.St and LGOS.SimSt
stm LGOS
[LPHD.Sim.stVal==FALSE]
Initial
LPHD.Sim.stVal
== TRUE
[y] [n]
subscription normal
goose as long as no
[LPHD.Sim.stVal == TRUE] subscribtion normal [normal GOOSE message received] w ait for normal GOOSE
w ait for normal or [TAL expired] simulated GOOSE
goose
simulated GOOSE receiv ed
[LPHD.Sim.stVal == FALSE] [TAL expired] SimSt.stVal = FALSE
SimSt.stVal = FALSE St.stVal = FALSE
SimSt.stVal = FALSE SimSt.stVal = FALSE
St.stVal = TRUE
St.stVal = FALSE [normal GOOSE received] St.stVal = TRUE
[LPHD.Sim.stVal==FALSE]
[simulated GOOSE received] [LPHD.Sim.stVal == FALSE]
[simulated GOOSE received]
w ait for Simulated

subscription simulated [TAL expired] GOOSE
GOOSE
[simulated GOOSE received] SimSt.stVal = TRUE
SimSt.stVal = TRUE St.stVal = FALSE
St.stVal = TRUE

User Manual 448
It is possible to enable a GOOSE transmission simulation mode with the "TestEna" and "LogInTest" setpoints, included in GEN\LPHD
logical node:
❑ TestEna: If this setpoint is TRUE enables the GOOSE transmission simulation mode
❑ LogInTest: This setpoint allows to configure a signal which, when active, enables the GOOSE transmission simulation mode
In this mode all the GOOSEs transmitted by the device have the simulation field with TRUE value and the mode is indicated in the status
data GEN\LPHD.TestSt.
The following logic for the two configuration setpoints is used:
❑ TestEna=FALSE : TestSt=FALSE
❑ TestEna=TRUE and LogInTest=(not configured) : TestSt=TRUE
❑ TestEna=TRUE and LogInTest=(Signal data with value=TRUE) : TestSt=TRUE
❑ TestEna=TRUE and LogInTest=(Signal data with value=FALSE) : TestSt=FALSE
21.3 TEST MODE
The device implements the Test mode defined in the IEC 61850 Edition 2.
Switching between the modes (Mod.stVal) only happen as a result of an operator command to the data object Mod.
The values of Mod and Beh that are used are:
❑ On:
❑ The application represented by the LN works.
❑ All communication services work and get updated values.
❑ Control commands with test bit will be rejected with AddCause "Blocked-by-mode".
❑ Test:
❑ The application represented by the LN works.
❑ All communication services work and get updated values.
❑ Data objects will be transmitted with quality “test”.
❑ Control commands with test bit will be accepted only by LNs in “test” mode.
❑ Test/Blocked86:
❑ Digital outputs are not activated physically.
❑ The rest of the functionality works as Test mode.
❑ On-Blocked:
❑ Digital outputs are not activated physically.
❑ The rest of the functionality works as On mode.
❑ Off:
❑ The application represented by the LN doesn’t work.
❑ No process output is possible. No control command should be acknowledged (negative response).
86
Blocked modes are available since firmware versión 6.11.19.24 and ICD 8.8.5.7

User Manual 449
❑ Data objects will be transmitted with quality “invalid”.

❑ Only the data object Mod and Beh should be accessible by the services.
There is also the possibility of changing the mode (Mod.stval) through device settings:
❑ LogInMdTest: Test mode signal setting

 Included in the GEN/LPHD logical node
 Allows to configure any signal from the equipment
❑ LogInMdBlk: Blocked mode signal setting

 Included in the GEN/LPHD logical node
 Allows to configure any signal from the equipment
The combination of the two settings results in the following modes:
❑ LogInMdTest configured and LogInMdBlk not configured.

 LogInMdTest=(Data signal with value=TRUE): Same result as executing a "test" command on the Mod data
 LogInMdTest=(Data signal with value=FALSE): Same result as executing a "on" command on the Mod data
❑ LogInMdTest not configured and LogInMdBlk configured.
 LogInMdBlk=(Data signal with value=TRUE): Same result as executing a "on-blocked" command on the Mod data
 LogInMdBlk=(Data signal with value=FALSE): Same result as executing a "on" command on the Mod data
❑ LogInMdTest y LogInMdBlk configured.

 LogInMdTest=(Data signal with value=TRUE) y LogInMdBlk =(Data signal with value=FALSE): Same result as executing a
"test" command on the Mod data
 LogInMdTest=(Data signal with value=FALSE) y LogInMdBlk =(Data signal with value=TRUE): Same result as executing a
"on-blocked" command on the Mod data
 LogInMdTest=(Data signal with value=TRUE) y LogInMdBlk =(Data signal with value=TRUE): Same result as executing a
"test-blocked" command on the Mod data
 LogInMdTest=(Data signal with value=FALSE) y LogInMdBlk =(Data signal with value=FALSE): Same result as executing a
"on" command on the Mod data
Depending on the value of the test mode signal and block mode signal settings, the commands on the Mod data that are allowed are
the following:
❑ LogInMdTest and LogInMdBlk not configured

 Commands on the Mod are allowed without restrictions.
❑ LogInMdTest and LogInMdBlk configured
 Commands on the Mod of the highest hierarchy LD are not allowed.
 Commands on the Mod of a non-hierarchical LD are allowed.
 Commands on the Mod of any LN are allowed.
❑ LogInMdTest configured and LogInMdBlk not configured
If LogInMdTest=(Data signal with value=TRUE):

User Manual 450
 Commands on the Mod of any LN are allowed

 Commands on the Mod of a non-hierarchical LD are allowed
 Commands on the Mod of the highest hierarchy LD are allowed only to go from "test" mode to "test/blocked" mode
and from "test/blocked" mode to "test" mode.
If LogInMdTest=(Data signal with value=FALSE):

 Commands on the Mod of the highest hierarchy LD are allowed only to go from "on" mode to "on/blocked" mode and
from "on/blocked" mode to "on" mode
❑ LogInMdTest not configured y LogInMdBlk configured
If LogInMdBlk=(Data signal with value=TRUE):

 Commands on the Mod of the highest hierarchy LD are allowed only to go from "on-blocked" mode to "test-blocked"
mode and from "test-blocked" mode to "on-blocked" mode
If LogInMdBlk=(Data signal with value=FALSE):

 Commands on the Mod of the highest hierarchy LD are allowed only to go from "on" mode to "test" mode and from
"test" mode to "on" mode
To know the status or mode in which the equipment is located, there are two signals:
❑ TestModeSt: Test mode status signal

 Included in the logical node GEN/LLN0
 If the equipment is in "test" or "test/blocked" mode, the signal is activated. Otherwise it is deactivated
❑ BlkModeSt: Blocked mode status signal

 Included in the logical node GEN/LLN0
 If the equipment is in "on-blocked" or "test/blocked" mode, the signal is activated. Otherwise it is deactivated
21.3.1 Logical devices management hierarchy

Logical devices or LD, are used to represent a group of typical automation, protection or other functions. The functions are defined
as logical nodes contained and managed in logical devices. The hierarchy determines how the mode (e.g. On, Off, Test …) of these
functions and sub-functions is managed, so that a change in the value of the mode at higher level influences the lower levels.
LLN0 of the logical devices that can be configured with a hierarchy contains a setting data named GrRef whose type is objRef.
In order to configure a hierarchy GrRef value must be “IEDname/GEN” or its equivalent. It is also possible to leave it blank, so the
devices will be independent .
The device implements the hierarchy on these logical devices:
❑ CTRL: Control functions (only present in devices with "Extended control")

❑ GEN: General functions
❑ PROT: Protection functions

User Manual 451
GEN is considered the main logical node and its LLN0 logical node does not have the GrRef setting. CTRL and PROT logical devices
can be configured with a hierarchy.
The typical hierarchy configuration is to assign the GEN logical device as higher level of CTRL and PROT. In this case, the functions of
CTRL and PROT logical devices are considered sub-functions of the GEN logical node and if the mode of the GEN logical device is
modified (GEN/LLN0.Mod) it will affect the CTRL and PROT logical devices also.
The mode of the LNs in any logical device may be changed individually with its own Mod, or globally by means of LLN0 of each
logical device. Only changes in GEN/LLN0.Mod will affect the other logical devices that are configured as lower level in the
hierarchy.
For more details about how hierarchy affects commands behaviour, consult on this manual the "Command Blocks: Commands
blocks by mode (Mod/Beh)" section.
21.4 SERVICE TRACKING
Service tracking is represented by the logical node LTRK and is defined as the function in charge of recording the parameters values
used by any service defined in IEC 61850-7-2 (after a service execution). It is thus possible to read, report or log these values for system
behavior analysis.
The trigger option for these data is "data-update", so it has to be configured in the associated control block if, for example, it is
included in a report.
Service type values tracked by Ingepac EF:
❑ 16 - SelectActiveSG
❑ 17 - SelectEditSG
❑ 19 - ConfirmEditSGValues
❑ 24 - SetBRCBValues
❑ 26 - SetURCBValues
❑ 34 - SetGoCBValues
❑ 43 - Select
❑ 44 - SelectWithValue
❑ 45 - Cancel
❑ 46 - Operate
❑ 47 - CommandTermination
❑ 54 - InternalChange
Service error implemented values:
❑ 0 - no-error
❑ 1 - instance-not-available
❑ 2 - instance-in-use
❑ 3 - access-violation
❑ 4 - access-not-allowed-in-current-state
❑ 5 - parameter-value-inappropriate
❑ 6 - parameter-value-inconsistent

User Manual 452
❑ 7 - class-not-supported
❑ 8 - instance-locked-by-other-client
❑ 9 - control-must-be-selected
❑ 10 - type-conflict
❑ 11 - failed-due-to-communications-constraint
❑ 12 - failed-due-to-server-constraint
The logical node LTRK contains data classes with functional constraint FC=SR needed for track the previously defined services. The
following common attributes are included in all services:
❑ objRef: Reference of the object that is being tracked: either a control block that is being accessed or a control object that is
being controlled.
❑ serviceType: Type of the tracked service.
❑ errorCode: Error associated to the service that is specified by serviceType; value no-error for successful service.
❑ originatorID: Originator of the service. In general, the IP address of the client.
❑ t: TimeStamp of the completion of the service.
❑ d: Description
The following specific data objects are and included in the LTRK logical node:
Command service tracking:
Each enumerated has its own particular EncTrk, in which the ctlVal matches with the enumerated type defined for the controllable
object.
The index at the end may be incremented (For example EncTrk2) to define different instances.
❑ SpcTrk: Control service tracking for controllable single point.

❑ DpcTrk: Control service tracking for controllable double point.
❑ EncTrk1: Control service tracking for enumerated controllable. Mod (On/Off)
❑ EncTrk2: Control service tracking for enumerated controllable. Mod (On/Test/Off)
❑ ApcFTrk: Control service tracking for APC type commands with float.
❑ ApcITrk: Control service tracking for APC type commands with integer.
❑ BscTrk: Control service tracking for BSC type commands.
❑ IscTrk: Control service tracking for ISC type commands.
❑ BacTrk: Control service tracking for BAC type commands.
❑ IncTrk: Control service tracking for INC type commands.
 Associated services:
▪ Select, SelectWithValue, Cancel, Operate
 Specific attributes (in addition to common attributes):

User Manual 453
▪ ctlVal
▪ origin
▪ ctlNum
▪ T
▪ Test
▪ Check
▪ respAddCause
Unbuffered report service tracking:
The IED generates a tracking register when a SetURCBValues is done over the following attributes: rptID, rptEna, datSet, optFlds,
bufTm, trgOps, intPd and resv, what is according to IEC 61850-7-2 Subclause 15.3.2.3.1.
The change of other attributes associated to a URCB like confRev, gi, etc. will not generate a tracking register.
The attributes RptEna and Resv of the URCB instances are tracked at loss of association with the Client, with ServiceType =
InternalChange, with “127.0.0.1” as content of the originatorID field.
❑ UrcbTrk: Access service tracking for unbuffered report control block.

▪ SetURCBValues

▪ rptID
▪ rptEna
▪ resv
▪ datSet
▪ confRev
▪ optFlds
▪ bufTm
▪ sqNum
▪ trgOps
▪ intgPd
▪ gi
▪ owner
Buffered report service tracking:
The IED generates a tracking register when a SetBRCBValues is done over the following attributes: rptID, rptEna, datSet, optFlds,
bufTm, trgOps, intPd, purgeBuf, entryID, and resvTms, what is according to IEC 61850-7-2 Subclause 15.3.2.2.1.
The setting of other attributes associated to a BRCB like confRev, gi, etc. will not generate a tracking register.
The attributes RptEna and ResvTms of the control block are tracked at loss of association with the Client with ServiceType =
InternalChange, with “127.0.0.1” as content of the originatorID field.
❑ BrcbTrk: Access service tracking for buffered report control block.

▪ SetBRCBValues

▪ rptID

User Manual 454
▪ rptEna
▪ datSet
▪ confRev
▪ optFlds
▪ bufTm
▪ sqNum
▪ trgOps
▪ intgPd
▪ gi
▪ purgeBuf
▪ entryID
▪ timeOfEntry
▪ resvTms
▪ owner
Goose service tracking:
❑ GocbTrk: Access service tracking for goose control block.

▪ SetGoCBValues

▪ goEna
▪ goID
▪ datSet
▪ confRev
▪ ndsCom
▪ dstAddress
▪ minTime
▪ maxTime
▪ fixedOffs
Settings service tracking
❑ SgcbTrk: Access service tracking for setting group control block.

▪ SelectActiveSG
▪ SelectEditSG
▪ ConfirmEditSGValues

▪ numOfSG
▪ actSG
▪ editSG
▪ cnfEdit
▪ lActTm
▪ resvTms
21.5 SUBSTITUTION MODEL
It allows to establish individually the values of some data that are sent through the protocol IEC61850.

User Manual 455
Usually, input from the process or the result of the calculation from a function provides the value of a data (in that case, the source is
called "process"). In case of substitution model, the value of the data may be provided by an operator making use of an IEC 61850
client.
Substitution model is available for the following common data classes:
❑ SPS (Single Point Status)

❑ DPS (Double Point Status)
❑ INS (Integer Status)
❑ SPC (Single Point Control)
❑ DPC (Double Point Control)
❑ MV (Measured Value)
❑ CMV (Complex Measured Value)
The IEC 61850 standard does not define the substitution model for other classes like ACT (Protection activation information), ACD
(Directional protection activation information), VSS (Visible String Status) or any of the settings classes.
Data classes that allow substitution have an attribute "subEna". If it is set to TRUE, the value of the data used for the IEC 61850
communications is the value configured in the following attribute (depending on the data type):
❑ Value:
❑ subVal: SPS, DPS, INS, SPC, DPC
❑ subMag: MV
❑ subCVal: CMV
❑ Quality: The attribute "subQ" is the value used to substitute the data attribute q. When subEna is true, the source quality
bit substituted is always set.
On measurement data substitution, the value is checked against the configuration of the measure (max, min, db …) so the substituted
value is affected by such configuration.
It is the responsibility of the client application, in particular in the case of multiple attributes to be substituted, to set the relevant
substitution values before enabling substitution, as well as, disable substitution on all substituted values.
The substituted values only apply to the IEC 61850 communication values. These means that the substituted values are not used in the
logics or protection functions of the device.
There are several data with a special behavior for which the substitution of the value affects to the behaviour of the IEC61850 server:
❑ BlkGoose.stVal: It allows blocking the transmission of all gooses.

❑ TestSt.stVal: It allows enabling the simulation bit in transmitted gooses.
❑ Sim.stVal: It allows activating the simulation mode.
Also defined in the substitution model, it is available the attribute "subID". When the substitution is activated, the device automatically
sets the subId to the IP address of the client device that activated the substitution. After this moment, the client can write any other
string to identify itself. Later when substitution is deactivated, the value is modified to a fixed empty string. In conclusion, this attribute
can be only modified after setting subEna to true.
21.6 FILE TRANSFER
The IED implements the IEC61850 MMS file services. Following the Edition 2 of the IEC61850 standard, the structure of files and
directories is based on a FLAT FILESYSTEM with pseudofolders. This means that it is not accessed through folders, it is only allowed to
read the root directory where all the existing files in the different subfolders are shown concatenating the path to the file name.
The available permissions are the same as those of the user 'ftpuser', and only writing the pseudofolder /SCL/notvalidated/ is allowed.

User Manual 456
This behavior is used from firmware version 6.0.17.0 for both Edition 1 and Edition 2 configurations. In firmware versions prior to this
(only Edition 1 configurations were supported) the file and directory structure is based on folders, being able to access and read each
one separately.
21.7 EDITION1 SUBSCRIPTION. LGOS MODEL.
Only for ICD configured as Ed1: This model makes it possible to configure and supervise the complete status of each reception goose
within a single logical node.
Each goose subscription is associated with one LGOS logical node wich contains the configuration for that subscription, so there can be
as many subscriptions as LGOS logical nodes in the data model. The factory CID file contains up to 32 LGOS logical nodes that allow the
subcription to up to 32 goose messages.
To use the received data in the goose message they must be mapped to LGOS data. Each LGOS has:
❑ 17 boolean signals (Ind1 to Ind17 data)

❑ 4 dbpos signals (DPSInd1 to DPSInd4 data)
❑ 8 float values (AnIn1 to AnIn8 data)
21.7.1 Configuration values

Used to establish the desired subscription parameters for each goose.
To create a subscription it must be configured:
❑ Configuration data of the Goose message to subscribe.

❑ Data assignment: Each data from the received Goose message can be assigned to one data in the LGOS logical node
in which the received value will be copied.
Table 280 LGOS model configuration values
ConfRev.setVal Must match the value received in the goose.
GoCBRef.setRef The goose reference to which we subscribe.
GoDatSetRef.setRef The reference of the dataset to which we subscribe.
GoID.setVal The identifier of the goose to which we subscribe.
The reference to the signal in which the goose element established by the InRef index is
InRef[..].intAddr
received. It must be a mapped signal within the goose signals range.
MAC.setVal The multicast MAC to which we subscribe.
These values, apart from the “intAddr” for the internal data assignement, must be the same ones received in the Goose message.
The data mapping is configured with the InRef data (InRef1 to InRef34). The InRef index indicates the reception goose data position
associated with that InRef (InRef1 associated to first goose data, InRef2 associated to second goose data, etc.)

User Manual 457
In the InRefx.intAddr attibute must be configured the LGOS data in which the value will be copied. The value must be:
❑ Boolean signals: Indx.stVal / Indx.q

❑ Dbpos signals: DPSIndx.stVal / DPSIndx.q
❑ Float values: AnInx.mag.f / AnInx.q
If in the Goose message the qualities of the data are also received they must be assigned to a “q” data of one of the LGOS node
data, like the rest of the Goose data.
To configure this assignment the user must know the format of the data of the Goose message because the selected data in the
LGOS node to copy the received value must have the same format.
Each LGOS logical node in the the factory CID data model has 34 InRef data so the device can subscribe to Gooses with up to 34
elements.
For example if the configured value is InRef3.intAddr = Ind2.stVal this means that the third value in the received goose (that must
be a boolean value) will be copied to the LGOSx.Ind2.stVal data.
The software tool allows configuring these goose subscritpions manually or automatically (for more information consult the
pacFactory software tool manual).
21.7.2 Supervision values

They indicate information about the status of the goose subscription at all times. The status signal conditions the updating of the
rest of the Data. If the status is incorrect, the rest of the signals will not be updated with the values received.
Table 281 LGOS model supervision values
St.stVal Subscription status. Value “1” indicates that the subscription was successful.
Sim.stVal Activated when the subscription is received in test mode.
NdsCom.stVal Activated when the subscription has the “Needs Commissioning” flag activated.
LastStNum.stVal The last status number received.
ConfRevNum.stVal The configuration revision received.
Note: Only the St data is mapped to the internal database to be used in for example logics or local display. The other values are
only available through the IEC 61850 communication.
21.7.3 Checked values

The following values are checked to decide if the goose message is valid:
❑ TAL (Time Allowed to Live) not zero

❑ MAC multicast
❑ Dataset

User Manual 458
❑ GoCBRef
❑ GoID
It is also checked that the types of each goose data mach the types of the LGOS data in which they will be copied.

User Manual 459
TCP/IP NEWORK CONFIGURATION
22. TCP/IP NEWORK CONFIGURATION
22.1 DESCRIPTION
In the device has a front Ethernet interface and may have up to two rear Ethernet interfaces. Each of which can be configured to
belong to the network that the user wants, as seen in the figure below:
❑ ETH0, frontal Ethernet.

❑ ETH1, rear Ethernet.
❑ ETH2, rear Ethernet.
The rear ethernets can be selected from one of the following options (see commercial code):
❑ Independent port
❑ Redundancy module configurable between PRP, HSR and Switch mode
❑ Link failover redundancy (both ethernet ports used)
The configuration of each network can be made:
❑ From the device Display (see section of the display).

❑ From PacFactory configuration tool (see user manual pacFactory).
The device has signals to indicate the link status of each of the ethernet ports in the LPHD1 node of the logical device GEN:
Table 282. Link status signals

Link Ethernet 0 Eth0Link stVal
Link Ethernet 1 Eth1ALink stVal
Link Ethernet 1 redundant Eth1BLink stVal
Link Ethernet 2 Eth2ALink stVal
Link Ethernet 2 redundant Eth2BLink stVal

User Manual 460
Redundant Link indications are only used in the case of redundant communications. In non-redundant communications, the link
indications are shown in the Eth1ALink and Eth2ALink data.
In the link failover redundancy the link indications are shown in the Eth1ALink and Eth1BLink data.
22.2 COMMUNICATIONS REDUNDANCY
The device has several options of physical communications redundancy divided into two hardware solutions:
❑ PRP / HSR / Switch mode (Options O and P of the commercial code)

❑ Link redundancy (Options I, J and K of the commercial code)
When the device has the PRP/HSR/Switch mode module, the user can configure any of the three options or consult the configured
option from the local display (Initial menu - Communications - Configuration PRP / HSR / Sw) or from the web server of the device
(Maintenance menu - Communications - IP network configuration).
22.2.1 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP)

The PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol) is a redundancy communication protocol defined in the IEC 62439-3 standard and it is one
of the redundancy mechanism recommended in IEC 61850 networks.
In the PRP protocol the device use two redundant ethernet ports and the protocol is based on the simultaneous transmission and
reception of data via both independent ports.
In PRP solutions two independent ethernet networks are used. Each device is attached to both networks and sends and receives all
the frames over both LANs simultaneously, consumes the first frame and discards the duplicate. With this mechanism PRP ensures
zero-packet loss and zero recovery time upon single network failures.
The two LANs have no connection between them and are assumed to be fail-independent, both are identical in protocol at the
MAC-LLC level, but they can differ in performance and topology.
Devices without PRP (Single attached nodes or SANs) can be connected to one of the redundant ethernet networks but in that case
they only can communicate with the devices connected to the same network. In order to enable redundancy in non-PRP devices an
external converter called RedBox (Redundancy Box) can be used.
With the PRP protocol additional information called RCT (Redundancy Control Trailer) is added to the Ethernet frame at the link
layer in order to control redundancy. Appending the RTC could generate oversized frames that would work in most cases but in
others may require to adapt the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of the ethernet board of the SAN.
22.2.2 HIGH-AVAILABILITY SEAMLESS REDUNDANCY (HSR)

The HSR is a redundancy communication protocol defined in the IEC 62439-3 standard and it is one of the redundancy mechanism
recommended in IEC 61850 networks.
In the HSR protocol the device use two redundant ethernet ports and the protocol is based on the simultaneous transmission and
reception of data via both independent ports.
In the HSR networks no external switches are used, instead each device has two ring ports, and all the devices are connected in a
ring topology, with one port of the device connected to the previous device and the other connected to the following device.
For each frame to send, the device sends it duplicated over both ports. So one frame travels in the ring in the clockwise direction
and the other frame travels in counter-clockwise direction. Each direction is treated as a separate network. So if there is a failure in
one point of the network, the frames reach the destination using the other direction in the ring. With this mechanism HSR ensures
zero-packet loss and zero recovery time upon single network failure.
An HSR tag is placed at the beginning of each frame to allow early identification of frames. With this tag each device can identify
the HSR tagged traffic and reject the duplicated frames coming from the both ports of a device and the frames circulating in the
ring. When a device receives a frame directed to it or that it sent, the frame is discarded and it is not forwarded again in the ring.
The frame is also discarded if it is a frame that it already sent in the same direction (i.e. multicast frames).

User Manual 461
Devices within the ring are restricted to be HSR-capable IEDs. In order to enable redundancy in non-HSR devices an external
converter called RedBox (Redundancy Box) can be used.
22.2.3 SWITCH MODE

In the switch mode both ethernet ports act as an unmanaged switch forwarding the network traffic.
The recommended network topology would be a cascade or Daisy-chain connection without closing a communication ring because
the IED integrated switch does not implement the RSTP protocol.
22.2.4 LINK FAILOVER REDUNDANCY

With the link failover redundancy the device uses two ethernet ports for a redundant communication.
In this redundancy mode the device communicates by one of the ethernet ports and if there is a link failure in that port, switches to
the redundant port if the link status of that port is active.
If the link status of the passive port returns to normal, the communication is maintained in the active port and the devices only
change the active port in case of link failure.
In this redundancy, unlike the case of PRP redundancy, it should not be used two independent ethernet networks. The two
Ethernet ports of the equipment must be connected to different network switches, but must belong to the same network, so that
the switches should be connected at some point in the network.
This switching is almost instantaneous, allowing even Gooses redundancy without loss or minimal loss (1 repetition). Regarding
communications with IEC 61850 clients, depending on the ring reconfiguration time communications, we even could not lose the
connection or the open session.
The device has link failover redundancy status signals in the logical node LPHD1 of the GEN logic device, to indicate which of the
two channels is active and to indicate possible failures in the redundancy.
Table 283. Link failover redundacy status signals

Channel A active Ethernet 1 Eth1Ast stVal
Channel B active Ethernet 1 Eth1Bst stVal
Ethernet redundancy Alarm EthRAlm stVal
22.3 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT NETWORK CONFIGURATION
When configuring the network of the device it must be taken into account the following considerations:
❑ Basic concepts about networks:

 The format of the IP address or mask have the dotted decimal notation. The checks are performed according to this
standard.
 Addresses ending in 0 correspond to networks, not devices. For example : 192.168.200.0
 Addresses ending in 255 correspond to broadcast messages. For example : 192.168.200.255
 All network traffic for an IP address that is not included in the configured networks, will be redirected to the default
gateway configured.
❑ It is not allowed the IP address or mask 0.0.0.0.
❑ It is not allowed the IP address or mask 255.255.255.255.

User Manual 462
❑ From version 5.25.16.1 of firmware it is possible to configure several IP addresses in the same ethernet interface. For
previous versions it is not allowed.
❑ Gateways configuration:
 There can be only one default Gateway in the devices and it will be associated to a specific Ethernet interface.
 If a Gateway is configurec, the static routes for the ethernet traffic will be determined by up to 10 groups or three
parameters:
 IP address of the network or destination host. This IP address indicates the network or the device you want
to connect to.
 Network mask or destination host mask.
 Gateway IP address. It must be in the same net segment than the IP address configured in that ethernet
port; because in another way the device will not access to the gateway.
 If the IP address of the network or destination host or the mask of the network or destination host are not configured,
the default values are:
 IP address: 0.0.0.0, it will be all the networks or default gateway.
 Network Mask: 255.255.255.255, it will be all networks or default gateway.
 The configuration of gateways can only be done from the Display.
 When changing the IP address, the gateways that are no longer accessible by the new IP will be removed
permanently.
 The IP change command keeps the mask that was associated with that Ethernet interface.
 Do not configure two different Ethernet interfaces within the same network segment. When you configure
two interfaces within the same network segment, the device will use only one of them.
22.4 GOOSES
GOOSE messages (IEC 61850 peer-to-peer communications) are not on the TCP/IP layer, they are Ethernet packets and are configured
at the MAC level.
The devices subscribes to multicast MAC addresses for receiving messages and transmit to a specific Multicast MAC address.
Ethernet interface ETH0 is not ready to receive / transmit packets GOOSE.
22.5 FIREWALL
From firmware version 5.25.16.1 the device incorporates a firewall functionality through which any port in UDP or TCP/IP
communications (eg PING, FTP, sFTP, HTTP, etc.) can be blocked.
The firewall function can be enabled or disabled independently for each of the network interfaces. In case of link failover redundancy
interfaces, only the ETH1 interface shall be configured for both rear Ethernets.
Each TCP or UDP port can be configured as "closed" or "opened". When the firewall function is enabled on a network interface by
default all ports are closed and those that want to be left opened must be configured. And in the case of configuring a port as open the
IP addresses from which the port will be accessible can be configured or leave it open for any IP address.
Configuration is done from the device website or from pacFactory / energyFactorySuite software tool. Refer to the user manual of the
tool for more details on the configuration.
More details about the firewall can be found in the “Cybersecurity functions” section of this manual.

User Manual 463
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES 
23. COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES

This section gives a general description of the communications features and the connections for exchanging data needed in the 87L
function (line differential protection).
The general features are summarised in the points below:
❑ 1 or 2 ports that can be selected:

 GOF, POF, RS232C, RS485
 Single-mode optical fibre with the following options:
 ST or LC type connectors.
 Scope from 20 to 120km.
❑ IEEE C37.94 (multi-mode OF). ST connector.
❑ 87L proprietary protocol between ends.
❑ Speed options: 64Kbits, 128Kbits, 192Kbits and 256Kbits.
❑ Redundancy option in communications.
❑ Master-Master/Master-Slave configuration.
❑ Analog measurement and digital signal exchange (configurable).
❑ Option of synchronisation with GPS.
❑ Reliable detection of communications failures (CRC 32-bit).
❑ Error Rate Monitoring, Propagation Time and Variation in the propagation time.
❑ Backup option through 21 and 67 depending on the communications status.
23.1 SYNCHRONISATION
A ping-pong method is used, which does not need an external synchronisation signal, to measure the propagation times between one
end and another. With these times it is possible to make calculations for synchronising measurements. However, if there is no
symmetry in communications, the synchronisation will not be exact and differences will appear between the measurements of both
ends and therefore a certain element of non-existent differential current.
Symmetry is the condition that the propagation time in one direction is exactly the same as the propagation time in the opposite
direction.
To avoid this type of inconvenience, there is the option of synchronisation with PPS or IRIG-B. See 2.4.4 for the characteristics and
1.4.1 for the connection.
There is a signal in the Ingepac EF-LD device whether the following synchronisation exists: “Terminals Synchronised”. It is deactivated
providing that there is no synchronisation with either of the possible ends. If synchronisation has been established but the pulses or
IRIG-B are lost, synchronisation is maintained for 90 seconds before the signal is deactivated. This signal can be used for example, to
block the differential function when synchronisation is lost and it is being transmitted via a network with asymmetry.
We recommend the following:
❑ GPS synchronisation does not have to be used with point-to-point communications and for telecommunications networks with
fixed or symmetrical routing.
❑ It is highly recommended that you use synchronisation with GPS if you are using telecommunications networks with variable or
unspecified routing.
23.2 COMMUNICATIONS
There are two possible options for Ingepac EF-LD protection devices to communicate:

User Manual 464
❑ Direct connection (point to point). The protection devices are connected to each other using a cable.
❑ Connection via Telecommunications Networks. Each protection device is connected to a communications device which acts as the
link to the network (multiplexor).
The telecommunications networks most used for connecting this type of protection device are as follows:
❑ PDH (Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy)

❑ SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy).
There are two cases in telecommunications networks:
❑ Networks with fixed routing or with known fixed route changes, which assure symmetry in communications. This is more likely in
SDH networks.
❑ Networks with unknown and/or variable routing in which symmetry is not assured.
In the first case, synchronisation via GPS does not need to be used.
In the second case, synchronisation via GPS is recommended. If this is not possible and the level of asymmetry is known, the
characteristic of the differential function should be adjusted to take into consideration the non-existent differential current component
added for this purpose. The following table shows the error inserted in the differential current for different asymmetry times:
1 ms 500us 200us
50 Hz 31 % 15 % 6%
60 Hz 37 % 19 % 7.5 %
In telecommunications networks, there may be events that cause variations in the propagation time. In Ingepac EF-LD, this condition is
checked. If variations are detected in propagation times above a level set by the user (0-500us), the sensitivity threshold of the
differential characteristic is increased. If these variations exceed the maximum setting (500us), then the function is blocked. For more
information, see section 3.1.
A check is also made to ensure that the propagation time does not exceed 80 ms. If this is the case, the differential function is blocked.
23.3 REDUNDANCY
Direct point-to-point connections do not have the inconveniences of delays and synchronisations which are characteristic of
connections using telecommunications networks. However, a failure in a point-to-point connection cannot recover as quickly as in
networked connections.
Ingepac EF-LD protection equipment is able to use communications redundancy.
Redundancy is possible in the case of a two-terminal scheme when two ports are configured which are dedicated to the
communications of the differential function. The channel (COM3 or COM4) assigned to “port 1” will be the “primary port” and the
channel assigned to “port 2” will be the “secondary port”. In a stable situation, communication will always take place via the primary
port. If a communications failure is detected in the primary port and the secondary port is operational, communication will be
transferred via the secondary port. When communication is recovered via the primary port, the situation becomes stable once more
and communication will take place via the primary port.
If there is a point-to-point connection and another connection via a telecommunications network, it is recommended that the former
be assigned with the primary port. The network connection can be used as a backup in the secondary port.
23.4 DIRECT CONNECTION (POINT-TO-POINT)
Direct connection (without a telecommunications network) between the ends can be achieved via RS-232, RS-485, multi-mode optical
fibre or single-mode optical fibre. The conditions of possible noise and interference and the distances supported are limitations which
incline towards choosing Optical Fibre.
This type of connection always involves joining the transmission channel (Tx) of one end to the reception end (Rx) of the other.
Ingepac EF-LD devices must have the correct interfaces to permit this type of connection. The options are contained in the
commercial code (see section 1.2).

User Manual 465
The connection options via optical fibre are explained below.
23.4.1 Multimode Optical Fibre

The possible options are as follows:
Maximum
Cable Type Permitted attenuation Wavelength Connector
distance
Multi-mode glass optical fibre:
62.5/125 µm 11db 2km 820nm ST
50 /125 µm 9dB
Multi-mode optical fibre:
V-Pin connector
200Μm HCS (silicone) 22dB 1.9 km 660nm
(HP standard)
1Mm plastic 24.7db 115 m
23.4.2 Single-mode optical fibre

The possible options are as follows:
Permitted Maximum Minimum

Cable type Wavelength Connector
attenuation distance distance
Single-mode optical fibre LC duplex
30db 60 Km 1 Km 1310nm, Laser
9/125 nm ST
Single-mode optic fibre LC duplex
40db 120 Km 20 Km 1550nm, Laser
9/125 nm ST
N.B.:
It is highly recommended that you use attenuators if you are going to connect single-mode optical fibre cables shorter than the
length indicated as the minimum distance. Attenuators should be placed at the transmitter output (connector Tx).
23.5 CONNECTION WITH COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES (MULTIPLEXER)
Connections via a telecommunications network are made using communications devices which permit the connection of Ingepac EF-LD
devices to the network, establishing a virtual link between them. These devices are called multiplexers (MUX) or Pulse Code
Multiplexers (PCM). They use standard protocols such as:
❑ IEEE-C37.94 (Optical Fibre Interface)

❑ UIT-G.703 (Galvanical Interface)
23.5.1 IEEE-C37.94 Interface

This interface offers the possibility of using up to twelve 64 Kbs channels each. If a device needs to send at a higher speed (always
Nx64), N channels of the ones available will need to be occupied. It provides a connection via multi-mode optical fibre.
There are different user options for this interface:
❑ Direct connection to a MUX device which uses this standard.

❑ Connection to an external optocoupler device (C37.94 optical to G.703 electrical interface converter).
From the perspective of Ingepac EF-LD, the two cases are identical and no special adjustment needs to be made.
In the second case, information will be needed to adapt the optocoupler device. The section gives a practical example of using
external converter devices.
The characteristics of multi-mode optical fibre for this connection are as follows:

User Manual 466
Permitted Maximum
Cable type Wavelength Connector
attenuation distance
Multi-mode glass optical fibre:
62.5/125 µm 13db 2km 850nm ST
50/125 µm 9dB
23.6 EXAMPLE OF CONNECTING A C37.94 - G.703 CONVERTER
This section describes how to connect an Ingepac EF-LD device to a multiplexer using an external C37.94 to G.703 converter. This
optocouplers or converter devices can be used to connect to MUX for access to SDH and PDH networks.
The G.703 standard has different interfaces: E0 (64Kbs), E1 (2Mb), etc. Hence, there are different C37.94 to G703 converters for
converting to E0, to non-structured E1, to structured E1, etc.
23.6.1 C37.94 - G.703 E1 2Mb Converter.

This example indicates the steps for installing the 21-219, C37.94 to structured G.703 E1 converter.
As a general rule, connect the Tx transmission line of the Ingepac EF-LD device to the Rx reception line of the device and vice versa.
In 21-219 devices, you can use two C37.94 channels, but in this example, we will limit ourselves to using Channel 0.
In this device, the part of the G.703 E1 2Mb interface consists of two BNC 75 Ohm connectors for connection to the MUXs. If two
21-219 converters are to be connected to each other, output Tx of one must go to input Rx of the other and vice versa.

User Manual 467
Configuring the clock source for G.703 synchronisation.
There are different alternatives for defining the master clock used in the G.703 standard:
❑ Network’s master clock.

SDH networks have a precise master clock for keeping a system quite safe with a very low error rate. In this case, 21-219
converter devices can be synchronised with the network’s master clock. To do this, the MUXs must be configured so that
re-synchronisation and a telegram format compatible with the G.704 standard is permitted.
In terms of the 21-219 converters, the external clock source must be configured for synchronisation in both devices. To do
this, there is a rotational switch on the front of the 21-219 which allows you to select the clock source, amongst other
items. In this case, the switch must be set to “0”, which is the default configuration.
❑ Master clock of one of the 21-219 devices.

The internal clock of one of the 21-219 devices can be used as the master clock. This option is applicable to a test phase, in
which the converters are connected to each other with a crossed G.703 connection (without multiplexers).
To achieve this, the internal clock source in only one of the 21-219 devices must be configured so that there is only one
master clock. In this case, the rotational switch must be set to position “1”.
The other 21-219 devices must be configured with the external clock option as indicated in the previous section.
Also, this option must be applied when the network does not provide such a precise clock (e.g. PDH networks) and the
multiplexers are configured so that they do not interfere with synchronisation (functioning in transparent mode).
23.6.2 C37.94 - G.703 E0 Converter.

For the converter to the G703 E0 (64Kbs) standard, 21-216, the steps are practically the same. In this case, the G.703 interface is an
RJ45 codirectional port. Twisted pair cables must be used. If you want to connect the two 21-216 devices to each other, a specific
crossed cable must be made.
The list of pins in the RJ45 port is as follows:
RJ45 pin Signal

1 Tx + (TIP-out)
2 Tx - (RING-out)
4 Rx + (TIP-in)
5 Rx - (RING-out)
Case Mesh

User Manual 468
KEYBOARD AND GRAPHIC DISPLAY 
24. KEYBOARD AND GRAPHIC DISPLAY
24.1 GENERAL OPERATION
24.1.1 Display structure

The screens are grouped into the following types:
❑ Graphic pages. Only available in models featuring "extended monitoring functions".

❑ I/O pages
❑ Secuence of Events (SOE)
❑ Protection events pages
❑ Alarm pages. Only available in models featuring "extended monitoring functions".
❑ Device status pages
❑ Fault pages. Not available in CDx models.
❑ Measurements pages. Only available in CD1 y CD2 models
❑ Grouping of other screens
Each display type has its own treatment.
There are also menu pages (which include the protection, control and general settings, such as the date and time, password, FW
versions, etc.), which are treated differently to those mentioned above. These screens access is mentioned in the section Login
Access.
24.1.2 Organization of the pages

The pages are organized into screen types, whose order of presentation is configurable using an external tool. The tool also enables
the unit’s start page to be assigned. The keys “(Left), →(Right)” allow the user to scroll through the different screen types
defined as main screens. The screens can be scrolled in both directions: upon reaching the last screen type the display returns to
the first screen, and vice-versa.
By clicking on the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys in any screen, the screens belonging to the same type are shown. The I/O, SOE, and fault
pages are presented in a preconfigured order. However, in the graphic and alarm screens the presentation order is defined using an
external tool.
If, when in any screen belonging to specific type, we press “(Left), →(Right)”, the following screen type is displayed whilst the
screen position remains within the type in question. Thus, when scrolling through the screen types the last screen types selected
when exiting a specific type are shown.
If no keys are pressed within a period greater than 5 minutes, the unit returns to the start page and the first page of each type is
selected.
By pressing on <ESC> from any screen we return to the start page, whilst the current page of each screen type is maintained.
There is a special screen type called “Menu to Other Screens” that contains an index of screens not considered important enough
to have been defined as main screens and which enables access to the same. This screen is configurable via a PC tool.
By pressing <MENU> from within any screen, the first page of the settings menus is displayed.
The possibility of multi-language is available.
Device with IP protection covers
If the unit is fitted with an IP protection cover, only certain buttons will be accessible from the front, depending on the model in
question:

User Manual 469
❑ Preset Keys (1/2 chassis – 5U and 19” chassis – 4U)

The only keys available are I, O, SEL, INF and DES.
The INF button allows the different screens to be displayed in a circular mode, whilst the order is configurable via a PC tool.
❑ Functional Keys (1/2 chassis – 5U and 19” chassis – 4U)

The only keys available are I, O, F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 and the DOT key.
The DOT button allows the different screens to be displayed in a circular mode, whilst the order is configurable via a PC tool.
24.1.3 Login Access

There are 2 access possibilities depending on Display mode setting (More details can be found in the “Cybersecurity functions”-
Settings Tab section of this manual):
❑ Numeric Password:
By pressing <MENU> from any screen, a screen such as the one shown will appear and request a password be entered.
Figure 204 Password request screen
Menu pages can be accessed with read or modification permissions.
If password entered is correct and  (Enter) is pressed, permission will be given to change settings. The “♦” symbol will
appear in the bottom left of the screen, as will the text “CHANGE SETTINGS”. However, if <ESC> key is pressed, it will only
be allowed to read settings. In this case, a text indicating “VIEW SETTINGS” will be shown. The <ESC> key will function in the
same way even when some of the password’s numbers have been entered.
For more information, consult the section 4.2 of the Password Management in this manual.
❑ User-password:
Once the display mode setting is configured to user-password, access will be the same as with numeric password until a
change is made to the network configuration. During this time only the network settings change is allowed.
After changing the network configuration from the device display, the access will no longer be available through a numeric
password and the next times the Menu key is pressed, a virtual keyboard will be displayed to enter the username and
password.

User Manual 470
Users defined locally on IED or users defined on a remote server such as LDAP can be used for access.
Depending on the user permissions, different screens will be displayed.
There is the option to configure a login message to be displayed. (More details can be found in the “Cybersecurity
functions”-Settings Tab section of this manual). Press  (Enter) to login or ESC to return to the previous screen.
Operation
 The  (Up),  (Down),  (Left) and → (Right) keys are used to navigate around the virtual keyboard, and 
(Enter) is used to confirm the selected keyboard field.
 The user must be entered and then select the "Validate" field before pressing  (Enter).
 After entering the user the password must be entered and select the "Validate" field before pressing  (Enter).
24.1.4 Treatment of the functional keys

The functional keys are configured with the PC tool, with the control and associated status being configured for each key. In
addition there is a check box to reverse the status of the signal associated with the functional key. This option only applies to
Boolean (not double) signals.
The possible values of the status signal associated to the functional key and its corresponding representation via the LEDs are:
❑ Not configured: the 2 LEDs OFF.

❑ Unknown Status: the 2 LEDs OFF.
❑ OFF Status: upper LED OFF and lower LED ON.
❑ ON Status: upper LED ON and lower LED OFF.
❑ Invalid Status: the 2 LEDs ON.
The functional keys have 3 operating modes configurable by setting “GEN/LLN0/FbuttType”:
❑ “Functional keys” Mode:

 By pressing the key, the associated item is selected and the corresponding LED or LEDs blink.
 Once the item has been selected, the associated command can be executed by pressing the “I” or “O” keys.
 Once the above-mentioned key has been pressed, the unit executes the command and the lit LED or LEDs cease to
blink.
 Once a command has been executed, the status of the associated LED or LEDs is updated. In case of a failure, a
window indicating the cause of the failure will appear in the display.

User Manual 471
❑ “Command 52 + Functional” Mode:

 By pressing the key, the associated item is selected and the corresponding LED or LEDs blink.
 Once the item is selected, depending on its status one of this windows is shown:
 ON Status: displays the confirmation window for the OFF command.
 OFF Status: displays the confirmation window for the ON command.
 Unknown / Undetermined Status: Displays the confirmation window for the two possible ON and OFF
commands. With the " (Up) or (Down)" keys the desired command is selected and with the (Enter) key
the command confirmation window appears. With the "ESC" key to exit the selection screen.
 Once a command has been executed, the status of the associated LED or LEDs is updated. In case of a failure, a
window indicating the cause of the failure will appear in the display.
❑ “Command Confirmation” Mode:

 The operation is the same as the "Functional Keys" mode but with the particularity that every time the user executes
an command (I / O buttons) a confirmation message will appear on the display (pressing the ENTER key executes the
command and Pressing ESC cancels).
 This mode will be applied for both the graphical screens commands and the functional key commands (contemplating
that we can be in any of the display screens)
NOTE 1: To change this setting from the display, the settings menu is accessed and in the initial menu select the 'general settings'
menu and press the ENTER key. Within this node, the setting is 'Command Type'. The 'With confitmation' option is selected and the
settings are validated.
NOTE 2: When a function key has not a configured signal but it has a configured command the 2 LEDs remain OFF until the function
key is pressed. At that moment the 2 LEDs start blinking.

User Manual 472
24.1.5 Graphics pages

The maximum number of graphic screens is 9.
Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to switch from one group of graphic screens to another.
The order of the “live points” that have commands and the sequence of the graphic screens can be modified using the PC tool.
Figure 1 Single Line diagram Figure 2 Single Line diagram with indication of non-run command
The treatment of controls WITH Preset Keys:
❑ To run a command, we must first select the item to be sent. To do so, and once we have selected the screen
containing the item to be sent, we must press “SEL”. The symbol of the item that has been configured to priority 1
and which has an associated command will appear and begin to flash.
❑ By pressing “SEL” we scroll through the different “live points” with commands, in accordance with the preset
order.
❑ Once the item to be sent has been selected, the process is as follows:
 Press the key “I” for the following commands: close, in service, automatic, remote control, etc.
 Press the key “O” for the following commands: open, out of order, manual, local, etc.
 By pressing the key “DES” (if the item has maintenance configured), the command will be run, in accordance
with the item's status – if it is set to maintenance, the command will be “remove maintenance”, if it is not in
maintenance, the command will be “set to maintenance”.
❑ If the command fails or if it can not be run due to a block, a small screen indicating the reason for the failure will be
displayed. This indication appears for 5 seconds, during which no operations can be carried out on the item.
❑ If the command is successful, no additional screen will be shown and the item's status will be refreshed.
❑ If it is in the control selection, only the “SEL”, <ESC> and “I, O, DES” keys are allowed.
The treatment of controls WITHOUT Preset Keys:
❑ To run a command, we must first select the item to be sent. To do so, and once we have selected the screen
containing the item to be sent, we must press  (Enter). The symbol of the item that has been configured to
priority 1 and which has an associated command will appear and begin to flash.
❑ By pressing the “(Left), →(Right)” keys, we scroll through the different “live points” with commands, in
accordance with the preset order.

User Manual 473
❑ Once the item to be sent has been selected, the process is as follows:
 Press the key “I” for the following commands: close, in services, automatic, remote control, etc.
 Press the key “O” for the following commands: open, out of order, manual, local, etc.
❑ If the command fails or if it can not be run due to a block, a small screen indicating the reason for the failure will be
displayed. This indication appears for 5 seconds, during which no operations can be carried out on the item.
❑ If the command is successful, no additional screen will be shown and the item's status will be refreshed to show
"normal".
❑ If it is in the control selection, only the <ESC>, (Left), →(Right) and “I, O” keys are allowed.
By pressing <ESC>, we exit the control selection, as we also do if we refrain from pressing any keys for a period of more than “10
sec”.
The measurements are displayed with the number of decimal points and digits preset with the configuration tool. The possible
situations that are covered when viewing a measurement are:
❑ Invalid: An '*' is placed in front of the measurement, there is no associated flashing. E.g.: * 25.3
❑ Outside range: '####' is displayed without flashing when the measurement’s value exceeds the maximum value for
the specified nº of digits and decimal points. E.g.: measurement value = 100 and number of digits = 2.
❑ Alarm: An 'A' is displayed in front of the measurement, with flashing, when the measurement exceeds the set
range. There is an upper and a lower limit. E.g.: If an alarm is activated when the upper limit is greater than 200 A,
the measurement will be displayed as follows: A 202.
Each of the measurements displayed in the graphic screens can be configured so that their values are referred to the primary or the
secondary.

User Manual 474
24.1.6 I/O pages

The device may be equipped with different types of cards, which are distinguished by the combination of inputs and outputs
grouped in 2 columns. Each card’s information is grouped in a page.
A text indicating the type of card, the address of the module assigned by HW and an indication of the current page number/number
of total pages, which is the same as that of the card, is displayed at the top of the screen.
An indication of a card failure is shown in the lower part of the screen. If the circle is filled, the card is in failure, whereas if it is
empty, the card is functioning correctly (Figure 205).The order of this type of screen is defined by the different card’s addresses –
the card with the lowest address is displayed first and the pages can be scrolled using the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys.
The digital I/O data are listed in 2 columns. Each column contains a graphic symbol (a circle), followed by the input or output text
and the corresponding number of terminals:
The digital signals are displayed as an empty circle, when disabled, or a filled circle, when enabled. In the event of an invalid signal,
an empty circle with a cross is displayed to represent a disabled status and a filled circle with an inverted cross is displayed to
represent an enabled status (Figure 206).
Figure 205 I/O Screen Figure 206 I/O Screen with card failure

User Manual 475
24.1.7 Event pages

The event screens display a chronological record of all the changes that take place in the signals that have been configured as
events in the display.
Each event’s presentation includes the date and time to the millisecond, a 29 character text and a 7 character acronym.
The texts to be displayed, as well as the signals’ identification, are set in attributes of the CID and may be modified using an
external tool.
The screen order is defined chronologically. Their display order goes from the newest to the oldest. Within each screen, the most
recent are shown at the top of the page and the oldest at the bottom.
We can scroll through the pages using the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys, going from the last page to the first, and vice-versa. The page
order runs from the first page, which has the most recent events, to the last page, which has the oldest events. The “ (Down)” key
is used to scroll from the first page to the following in increasing order, whereas the “ (Up)” key is used to scroll from the last page
to the previous pages.
Only the last 160 events are displayed in these pages.
The total number of pages and the number of the page currently displayed, as well as the number of events in the display, is shown
in the last row.
Treatment:
When accessing this screen for the first time, the most recent events are displayed. The “ (Down)” and “ (Up)” arrows are used
to scroll through the pages, as indicated above.
If new changes are registered whilst we are viewing the 1st page of this type of screen, the Display is refreshed accordingly and the
older changes are moved downwards.
When viewing any page other than the 1st page if new changes are registered, the Display will not be refreshed and the previous
data is shown. In such a case, a flashing, inverted video “NEW CHANGES” message is shown at the top of the page.
This indication is cleared when the most recent changes are viewed. To do so, we must go to the first screen.
Figure 207 Event Screen

User Manual 476
24.1.8 Protection event pages

The protection event screens display a chronological record of all the changes that take place in the signals that have been set as
such. Each protection event’s presentation includes the date and time to the millisecond, a 29 character text and a 7 character
acronym.
The texts to be displayed are defined in attributes of the CID. Signals are identified as protection events by means of the
corresponding enabling function in the corresponding settings node and by configuring the event masks. They can be modified
using the PC tool.
Figure 208 Protection event Screen
The screen order is defined chronologically. Their display order goes from the most recent to the oldest. Within each screen, the
most recent are shown at the top of the page and the oldest at the bottom (Figure 208). If the protection event list is empty, a text
indicating that the protection event queue is empty will appear.
We can scroll through the pages using the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys, going from the last page to the first, and vice-versa. The page
order runs from the first page, which has the most recent protection events, to the last page, which has the oldest protection
events. The “ (Down)” key is used to scroll from the first page to the following in increasing order, whereas the “ (Up)” key is
used to scroll from the last page to the previous pages.
Only the last 160 protection events are displayed in these pages.
The  (Enter) key is used to select the first protection event from the screen being viewed, whilst the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys are
used to scroll to the next protection event, with the following treatments:
❑ If, whilst at the bottom of the page, we press “ (Down)”, we are taken to the next page with the first selected
protection event, unless we are already viewing the last page, which case the display will not be changed.
❑ If we are in the protection event selected and we press “ (Up)” key, we are taken to the previous page, although
the last protection event remains activated, unless we are in the first page and in which case the display will remain
unchanged.
Once this protection event has been selected, we can press  (Enter) to view the page with the measurements associated to the
protection event. Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to switch from one page to another if there is more than one measurements
page per protection event. These pages are browsed in a cyclical manner, going from the first to the last, and vice-versa, as
corresponds.
Use <ESC> to exit the screen displaying the measurements associated to the protection event. Within the protection events’
screen, the change is deselected by clicking on <ESC> once again.
The total number of pages and the number of the page is currently displayed, as well as the number of protection events in the
display’s queue, is shown in the last row.

User Manual 477
Treatment:
When accessing this screen for the first time, the most recent protection events are displayed.
The “ (Down)” and “ (Up)” arrows are used to scroll through the pages, as indicated above
If the appearance of new protection events is detected, a flashing, inverted video “NEW INC” (new protection event) message is
shown at the top of the page.
This indication is cleared when the latest protection events are viewed. To do so, no protection events must be selected and we
must go to the first screen. Once we have arrived at this screen, if we scroll back the first screen with the most recent protection
events to have been registered will be displayed.
24.1.9 Alarm pages

These screens emulate an alarm panel, displaying each alarm as a rectangle with a text inside. The page format is set and includes 2
columns containing 6 rectangles each. There will be a maximum of 15 alarm pages, i.e., a maximum of 180 alarms.
2 lines of 12 characters can be displayed within each rectangle. Each alarm’s texts, identification and the number of alarms are
configured using an external tool.
When in standby status, the text is displayed in a normal video with white background and, when enabled, in an inverted video
with a dark background.
When the alarm changes status, the signal’s text begins to flash and appears and disappears within the new status.
If the signal is invalid, the text will be displayed with a cross covering the entire rectangle. If the signal does not exist, the
corresponding alarm's gap will be displayed.
Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to switch from page to another.
Individual acknowledgements of receipt are not issued for the alarms. Instead, it is possible to issue acknowledgement for all the
alarms displayed in the page that is being viewed. To do so, we must press  (Enter) in an active alarm page and the following
message will appear in a small screen:
Confirm receipt of all alarms of the page?
If we then press <ESC>, the message is cleared and no acknowledgment of the alarms is issued. If we press  (Enter), the message
disappears and an acknowledgment is issued for all the alarms displayed on the page.
An indication of the total pages and the number of the page displayed will appear at the top of the page.

User Manual 478
Figure 209 Alarm panel
24.1.10 Device status pages

The device status displays may differ depending on the model. Values may be referred to the primary or secondary.
NOTE: The measurements correspond to the fundamental frequency.
The different screens depending on the model samples of the device:
24.1.10.1 MDx, CDx, ZTx, CBx and BFx Models

There are 3 pages which describe the device status.
❑ Screen 1:
 Relay date and time.
 Frequency value.
 Type, module and angle of each of the unit’s 12 transformers.
❑ Screen 2:
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents and voltages (module and angle).
 Total real, reactive and apparent power.
❑ Screen 3:
 Active table number (not available in CDx models).
 External power supply battery voltage.
 Phase and neutral thermal image value (only for MDx models).
 Restricted Earth value (only for MD0, MD2, TDx and LDx models).
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage phase (not available in CD0 model).
 Device temperature.
 Measures reactive power (only for CB model).
NOTE: The CD0 model only has a single screen with the following information:


User Manual 479
Figure 210 Device Status page 1, page 2 and page 3
24.1.10.2 TDx Models

❑ Screen 1:
❑ Screen 2:
 Maximeter value for each current phase of each winding
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage in TD0 model
❑ Screen 3:
 Active table number (not available in CDx models).
 Phase and neutral thermal image value (only for MDx models).
 Restricted Earth value (only for MD0, MD2, TDx and LDx models).
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage phase (not available in CD0 model).
 Measures reactive power (only for CB model).
❑ Measurements screen (4)
 Differential measures
 Restraint measures
 Differential 2º harmonics measures.
 Restricted Earth values.
❑ Measurements screen (5)
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents (module and angle) of each winding.
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of voltages (module and angle) in TD0 model.

User Manual 480
Figure 211 Device Status page 1, page 2 and page 3
Figure 212 Device Status page 4 and page 5
24.1.10.3 LDx Models

❑ Measurements Screen 1:
❑ Measurements screen 2
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents and voltages (module and angle).
 Active table number.

User Manual 481

 Phase and neutral thermal image value.
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage phase.
❑ Measurements screen (4) Figure 212
 Differential measures
 Restraint measures
 Differential 2º harmonics measures
❑ Terminal Measurements screen (5)
 Synchronized measurements all terminals.
NOTE: The LD3 model does not have voltages and power.
24.1.10.4 VR0 Models

 Maximeter value of current and voltage.
❑ Measurements screen 2
 Active table number.
 Control Voltage.
 Band Center Value.
 Deviation.
 LDC Compensation.
 Circulating Current.
 Tap Number.
 Operations Counter.

User Manual 482
24.1.11 Fault pages

These pages display the last 20 fault reports filed by the protection.
These screens are divided into two levels. The first level displays a list of the most recent faults, as well as the fault number and the
fault trip date for each case (Figure 214). The total number of pages and the number of the page being displayed is shown at the
top, whilst the number of faults stored in the unit is shown in the last row.
If the fault list is empty, a text indicating that the fault queue is empty will appear (Figure 213).
The faults are ordered from the most recent or latest (Fault nº 1) to the oldest.
Figure 213 Empty fault list Figure 214 Fault list
The second level displays all the information related to the fault, organized in several pages. The page is displayed with the number
of the fault being displayed, as well as an indication of the number of the current page and the total number of pages per fault.
Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to navigate through the first level screen. The page scroll is cyclical - when the end of the page is
reached we are taken to the next first level page and we are taken from the first page to the last page and vice-versa in accordance
with the key we press.
By pressing  (Enter), we access the second level of the selected fault. Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to move between the
second level screens pertaining to a single fault. Use <ESC> to return to the first level page.
The values can refer to the primary or to the secondary. It is allowed to enable / disable the treatment to automatically display the
last fault on the display from the Configuration / Settings section of the display configuration tool.
Each screen’s content will be displayed as follows:
The contents of each screen may differ depending on the model, then the different possibilities:
24.1.11.1 MD, ZT, BC, BF and PB Models

There are 4 screens with data for each fault:
❑ Start Screen, which includes fault’s data.

 Date and time: Indicates the date in the “dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss.ms” format. There are three dates:
 Start of the fault (first unit picked up).
 Trip (first unit tripped).
 End of fault (when the trip signal disappears).

User Manual 483
 Frequency in the moment of the fault.

 Pick up and trip types: Summary of the fault with the 3-letter code formed by combinations of the characters
A, B, C, N, NS and G (if tripped by a phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), RTP (teleprotection), IF (phase
overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D (current unbalance), VO (zero-sequence overvoltage), HV
(overvoltage), LV (undervoltage), RTP (teleprotection), DT (transferred trip), DP (pole discordance), IT (thermal
image). Example: AC is a two-phase fault in phases A and C.
 Pick up type.
 Trip type.
 Distance: distance to the fault.
 Rf: resistance fault.
 LOC: locator code.
 Thermal image upon trip. The thermal image is indicated as a % of phases and neutral.
 Breaker. Indicates breaker monitoring data upon the fault:
 Open current. For each phase, indicates the current value upon the trip.
 Sigma ki. For each phase, indicates the sigma ki2 value.
❑ Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (I)”.
Figure 215 2nd level Fault Screens, page 1 and page 2
 Pre-fault and fault. Indicates the values measured before the fault and upon the fault. This screen displays the
following values:
 Transformer measurements <Trafos>. It indicates the measurement in the module and the angle of
each transformer.
 Restricted Earth value.
❑ Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (II)”.
following values:
 Sequences. Indicates the measurements in the module and the angle of the current sequences (I0,
I1 and I2) and the voltage (V0, V1 and V2).
 Power. Indicates the measurements of the total real, reactive and apparent powers.
❑ Tripped units screen, displays the picked up and the tripped units.

User Manual 484
Figure 216 2nd level Fault Screens, page 3 and page 4
NOTE: only the first 7 picked up and tripped units are displayed. If the number is greater than 7, a text appears at the bottom of
the screen indicating that there are more picked up units.
24.1.11.2 TDx Models


A, B, C, N, NS and G (if tripped by a phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), DIF (differential), RG (restricted
earth), IF (phase overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D (current unbalance), VO (zero-sequence
overvoltage), HV (overvoltage), LV (undervoltage), v/f (overexcitation v/f), IT (thermal image). Example: AC is a
two-phase fault in phases A and C.
 Pick up type.
 Trip type.
 Thermal image upon trip. The thermal image is indicated as a % of phases and neutral of each winding.
❑ Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (I)”
 Breaker. Indicates breakers monitoring data upon the fault of each winding:

following values:
 Transformer measurements <Trafos>. It indicates the measurement in the module and the angle of
each transformer.

User Manual 485
Figure 217 2nd level Fault Screens, page 1, page 2 and page 3
❑ Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (III)”.

following values:
 Differential current measure
 Restraint current measure
❑ Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (IV)”.
following values:
I1 and I2) of each winding.
 Sequences. Indicates the measurements in the module and the angle of the voltage (V0, V1 and V2)
in TD0 model.
Figure 218 2nd level Fault Screens, page 4, page 5 and page 6

User Manual 486
24.1.11.3 LDx Models


A, B, C, N, NS and G (if tripped by a phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), DIF (differential), RG (restricted
earth), IF (phase overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D (current unbalance), VO (zero-sequence
overvoltage), HV (overvoltage), LV (undervoltage), v/f (overexcitation v/f), IT (thermal image). Example: AC is a
two-phase fault in phases A and C.
 Pick up type.
 Trip type.
 Distance: distance to the fault.
 Rf: resistance fault.
 LOC: locator code.
 Thermal image upon trip. The thermal image is indicated as a % of phases and neutral.
 Breaker. Indicates breaker monitoring data upon the fault:
❑ Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (I)”

Transformer measurements <Trafos>. It indicates the measurement in the module and the angle of each
transformer.
following values:
I1 and I2) and the voltage (V0, V1 and V2).
❑ Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (III)”.
following values: Differential current measure and Restraint current measure.
 Restricted Earth value.
24.1.12 Measurement pages

There are 5 screens displaying the unit’s rms measurements referred to the primary (not available for devices without measure
module, for example CD0).
NOTE: Certain wiring diagrams have invalid measurements that do not exist. They are represented by “---“.

User Manual 487
❑ Measurements screen (I)

 Module and angle of each of the unit’s 8 transformers and phase to phase voltages.
❑ Measurements screen (II)
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents and voltages (module).
 Frequency.
❑ Measurements screen (III)
 Power by real and reactive phase and apparent rms.
 Power factor per phase.
❑ Measurements screen (IV)
 Total real, reactive and apparent rms power.
 Total power factor.
 Real and Reactive Energy.
❑ Measurements screen (V)
 The harmonic distortion (%) of the 8 transformers’ measurements.

User Manual 488
Figure 219 Screen 1 Figure 220 Screen 2 Figure 221 Screen 3
Figure 222 Screen 4 Figure 223 Screen5
24.1.13 Menu to other screens page

This screen allows an access menu for the other types of screen that have not been given the consideration of main screens to be
displayed. We can group little-used screens within this screen and thus reduce the size of the main loop, making the movement
between those screens that are considered the most important quicker.
The content of this screen is set using the external configuration tool. Screens that are included in the main screen list cannot be
included in this menu.
The image below shows the following types of screen grouped in this screen: Events and Faults.

User Manual 489
Figure 224 Other screens
24.1.14 Shortcut menu page

This screen appears when we press “R”.
It contains those commands that can be given to the unit without having to enter a Password. The commands will vary in
accordance with the unit’s family.
Some examples are given below.

❑ Recloser command.
❑ Bank automatism command (for unit’s with a capacitor bank).
❑ .....
By pressing “R”, this page appears showing the first selected command. By clicking on the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys we can move
between the commands. By pressing “ (Enter)”, the selected command is run.
Figure 225 Quick access menu

User Manual 490
24.2 CONTROL AND PROTECTION MENUS PAGES
24.2.1 Operation of the menus

These screens enable us to view and modify the control and protection settings values. They consist of several levels of menus and
sub-menus.
24.2.1.1 Access to settings Menus

Login must be done by entering the correct credentials after pressing <MENU> key.
More details can be found in “Keyboard and Graphic Display”- Login Access section of this manual.
24.2.1.2 General operation

We can access the start menu screen by pressing <MENU> from any of the other pages described in the preceding paragraphs.
To exit the menus pages from the start page we must press <MENU> or <ESC>.
To move from a menu to a submenu we must select the menu that we want to explore and press  (Enter). To return to the
previous menu, we must press <ESC>. The <MENU> key enables us to return to the start menu from any submenu.
The  (Up),  (Down) keys can be used to change a menu's active line. If all the menu’s options can be displayed on the screen,
only the active line is changed when we change line. On the other hand, if not all of the menu’s options can be displayed on the
screen at the same time and the cursor is situated over the first or the last of the screen's menus, the menu will scroll up or
down, in accordance with the key used.
An indication of the number of the item selected from the total number of items in the menu on the screen currently displayed
is shown in the bottom right of the screen.
In the settings screens when a node does not exist in the cid an '*' before the text is displayed, indicating that the node is
disabled.
The display change active table indicated by the following "(A)" the active table at that time.
Figure 226 Initial Settings Menu

User Manual 491
24.2.1.3 Settings change operation

By pressing  (Enter) on an item from a settings menu screen that has no submenus, the settings changes screen will appear
(Figure 227). This screen displays the data corresponding to the first 6 settings. The selected setting can be modified using 
(Up),  (Down).
If all the node’s settings can be displayed on the screen, only the selected setting is changed when we change setting. On the
other hand, if not all of the menu’s options can be displayed on the screen at the same time and the cursor is situated over the
first or the last of the screen's settings, the settings will scroll up or down, in accordance with the key used. To return to the
menu screen, we must press <ESC>.
If the node is disabled, it is not allowed to modify settings and the display of the settings would be similar to the one you have
when entering the settings only mode. In the last row the text "DISABLED NODE" is displayed.
The following data can be seen on this screen:
❑ The following will appear at the top of the screen:

 Description of the settings node.
 Name of the settings node in IEC 61850.
 Current table (for settings which have the possibility of multiple tables).
 The number of the selected setting and the total number of the node’s settings.
❑ There are 3 lines for each setting, indicating the following:
 Description of the setting.
 Name of the setting in IEC 61850 and its corresponding value.
 New value of the setting. When this screen is accessed for the first time, the current value and the new value
coincide.
❑ The “VALIDATE PARAMETERS?” text appears in the last line. When selected and after pressing  (Enter), all the
changes to the screen's settings are validated. Until we press  (Enter) with the last line selected the changed
settings will not be validated.
❑ WARNING: If the user only has viewing permissions, the last line will not appear on the settings change screens.

User Manual 492
Figure 227 Settings change screen Figure 228 Setting Validated Screen
By pressing <ESC> after modifying a setting in the page, a confirmation message indicating that the user is about exit without
saving the settings in the CID appears:
Exit without changing settings?
Thus, by pressing  (Enter) we exit the screen and all the changes made so far in that menu are cleared. If we press <ESC> when
the message appears, we remain where we were.
By pressing  (Enter) after having modified one of the page's settings, another window appears. At this point, the user has 2
options:
❑ Wait until the CID modification process is completed with the new settings. At this point there are 3 possible
situations:
 If the modification is carried out successfully, a “Changing the settings OK” text will appear (Figure 228).
 If an error occurs during the CID modification process, an “Error in changing settings” text will appear.
 If a time out failure occurs whilst saving the modified settings, a “Time out in changing settings " message will
appear.
❑ Press  (Enter) and return to the settings change screen without the assurance of having modified the CID.
24.2.1.4 Settings Types

By pressing  (Enter) on one of the items that enables settings to be changed (the settings are text strings only be displayed),
and providing that the user has modification permissions, one of different types of small window will appear:
24.2.1.4.1 Option Type

By pressing  (Enter) on a setting of this type, a small window (Figure 229) displaying the following data appears:
❑ Setting name in IEC 61850.

❑ Setting description.
❑ Current setting value.
❑ New value of the setting. When this screen is accessed for the first time, the current value and the new value
coincide.
❑ The number of the current option from among the options available

User Manual 493
Using the  (Up),  (Down) keys, we can move through the different options in a circular manner, that is, when we reach
the last option we are returned to the first option. The selection option is chosen by pressing  (Enter). To exit without
selecting, press <ESC>.
Figure 229 Small screen for modifying OPTION type setting
24.2.1.4.2 Numeric Type

These can be changed using the numeric keys. The number is validated by pressing  (Enter), whilst <ESC> is used to cancel
and start again. The following data is displayed in each small window:
❑ Setting name in IEC 61850.

❑ Setting description.
❑ Current setting value.
❑ The setting’s new value. This field, which is empty, is where the value of the new setting entered via the keyboard
will be displayed.
❑ Maximum setting value.
❑ Minimum setting value.
❑ Setting step or increase.
The desired value is entered directly. The digits are entered from left to right. For example, to enter the number 2345, we
must successively press 2, 3, 4, 5,  (Enter).
The entered value is checked in order to ensure that it meets the maximum, minimum and step restrictions. Should it fail to
meet any of these restrictions, the “INVALID VALUE” text is shown. This text disappears when a number key is pressed.
There are 2 possibilities within this type, depending on the number, decimal or integer format.
Decimal: See Figure 230.
Integer: There are some integer type settings whose value is a signal number. In such cases, the “NOT DEFINED” text (Figure
232) indicates that this setting has no associated signal. If we wish to associate a signal, we must enter the desired signal
number with numeric keypad and press  (Enter).
Figure 230 Small screen for modifying DECIMAL Figure 231 Small screen for modifying INTEGER Figure 232 Small screen for modifying INTEGER
type setting type setting type setting

User Manual 494
24.2.1.4.3 Date Type

Equivalent to a numeric, although the numeric data entered are successively allocated in blocks of two to Day, month, year,
hour, minute, second. When the seconds have been entered, no further data can be entered until we have press  (Enter)
or <ESC> (the latter key deletes the data entered. If no data has been entered, we exit the settings modification). The
format displayed on the screen is: Day/Month/Year Hour:Min:sec
2 digits must always be entered for year, month and date. This means that in order to enter “1” we must enter “01”.
If the user enters an incorrect value, the last character entered can be deleted with the “” (Left) key.
To exit without saving any changes, press <ESC>.
Once the correct data have been entered, press  (Enter) to check that the values entered are valid. In the event of an
error, an “INCORRECT DATE” text will be shown. If the data are valid, no windows will be shown.

User Manual 495
Figure 233 Unit date and time setting screen
24.2.2 Password management
24.2.2.1 Changing the Settings Menu Password

The password may contain between 4 and 8 digits. The password is 1357 by default.
When we press a numeric key within the password screen, each keystroke will be considered part of the password and will be
indicated in the display with “*”. When we have entered between 4 and 8 characters and pressed "Enter", the data entered will
be validated against the unit’s password. If the password entered is incorrect, a warning text will be displayed.
Pressing <ESC> enables us to access the settings menus with viewing only permissions. If we enter the correct password we will
be able to view and modify. <ESC> will function even when certain of the password’s numbers have been entered, i.e., if we
press <ESC> while we are entering the password we will access the menu with viewing only permission.
The user can change the password, providing that he or she knows the former password.
You will be asked to type the password twice before changing it. The password numbers will appear hidden as they are entered
(the “*” will appear for each number entered). Once the first password has been entered, press  (Enter) and enter the second
password. Once the second password has been entered, press  (Enter) and the password will be changed (providing the two
passwords entered are the same). As with the numbers, they are entered from left to right.
Default key can be restored from the web, within the 'Reset configuration' option in the Cybersecurity/RBAC tab (available
since firmware version 9.4.28.0)

User Manual 496
Figure 234 Password modification screen

User Manual 497
24.2.2.2 Changing FTP and SFTP Passwords

The FTP or SFTP password modification screen is accessed via the settings menu. The screen shows a virtual keyboard with the
possible characters to select.
From firmware version 6.2.19.0:
❑ The user whose password is going to be modified is displayed above the virtual keyboard.
❑ The new password must be entered 2 times.
❑ Non-alphanumeric characters are added to the virtual keyboard
❑ A log is generated in the 'system.log' file with the password change attempt result.
❑ From firmware version 6.6.21.2, the option to modify the users 'ftppac' and 'sftppac' password was added.
Figure 235 FTP Password modification screen
Operation
❑ We must use the  (Up),  (Down),  (Left) and → (Right) keys to navigate around the virtual keyboard, whilst 
(Enter) is used to confirm the selected keyboard field.
❑ We must enter the old password and select the "Validate" field before finally pressing  (Enter).
❑ We must then enter the new password and select the "Validate" field before finally pressing  (Enter).
❑ We must then re-enter the new password and select the "Validate" field before finally pressing  (Enter).
❑ A small window showing the result of the password modification (OK or the cause of the failure) will be displayed.
If the user enters an incorrect value, must leave and enter the screen and start again.
24.2.2.3 Commands management

24.2.2.3.1 Commands from the keyboard
There is a new settings menu within the Password screen to set the handling of commands from the keyboard. These
settings can only be changed from the display. There are 2 settings:
❑ Enabling key request to execute a command.

User Manual 498
❑ Maximum time in which the entered password is valid, after this time you must enter the password again (time in
seconds).
Operation:
In graphic displays when you press the select key command the small screen that will ask the key display, after entering the
correct password will have some time to execute orders. After this time, the execution of orders will not be allowed. The
function keys have the same function.
The key settings menu and commands execution is the same, if you access the settings menu with the correct password will
be able to execute commands from the function keys without re-enter the password.
On the other hand, if you accessed the settings menu but only with permission from view settings, if you want to run a
command from the function keys will have to enter the password, same operation as if they were in a main menu screen.
24.2.2.3.2 PacFactory commands

From firmware version 6.1.18.5, the device implements the possibility of receiving remote control commands from the
pacFactory software tool as an alternative control channel to the telecontrol center.
The device considers the origin of these commands as "Remote" and applies the configured Local / Remote command
hierarchy.
For security reasons this functionality is disabled in the factory configuration and can only be enabled or disabled from the
local HMI of the device. It is not possible to modify the configuration by communications or from the pacFactory
configuration tool.
The function is configured by the setting "pacFactory Commands" ("YES": enabled / "NO": disabled).
If the device has this functionality enabled, the pacFactory configuration tool will detect it at the beginning of the
communication and enable an access to the command window in the "Tools -> Sending commands" menu.
24.2.2.4 Restore factory settings

From firmware version 8.0.22.0, two new menus related to cybersecurity have been included:
❑ Restoring RBAC users to factory settings, implies automatic reset of the IED.
❑ Restoring the Security Settings to factory values, implies automatic reset of the IED
24.3 NETWORK CONFIGURATION
From the display it is possible to view and modify the network parameters of the equipment. For this there are a series Network
configuration menus.
Figure 236 Figure 237

User Manual 499
The previous figures show 2 examples of possible situations:
❑ Figure 236 shows that the equipment has a network configuration with the 3 independent and enabled interfaces.
❑ Figure 237 shows that the device has a network configuration of ETH1 and ETH2 in Link Redundancy mode, and ETH1 has
been disabled.
24.3.1 Ethernet Configuration

❑ Ethernets Viewing
When accessing the data of an interface from the main menu of network configuration, a screen similar to Figure 238 will
be displayed, where the list of ips is presented, and 2 additional menus: Create new ips and enable or disable the interface
It is showing.
Figure 239 shows how the network interface, IP address, netmask, MAC address, and status link parameters are displayed
on the display, indicating whether the network cable is connected.
Depending on the configuration of the back ethernets the representation of some data of these interfaces varies:
ETH2 link: When a device is configured as a switch or link redundancy in the Network configuration screen on the ETH2
interface line, the text of Switch or Link Redundancy. The network parameters are the same as the ETH1 interface except
the link. For this reason, the ETH2 link status is displayed on the ETH1 screen.

User Manual 500
Figure 238 Figure 239 Figure 240
❑ Ips Editing
From the display screen (Figure 239) and having permissions to change settings by pressing the  (Enter) key, the screen in
Figure 241 shows the current data and a second row where you can enter the new values. Use the  (Up),  (Down) keys to
navigate the IP and MASK fields in a circular way, that is, when you reach the last, you return to the first one.
Figure 241 Ethernet parameters setting changes screen
To exit, press <ESC>.
Only the IP and MASK fields can be modified. If you want to change any of these fields, you must activate the special mode
keypad to do this, press the <MENU> key. For more information, consult the point 1.2.1 in this manual.
error, a small screen displaying the cause of the error will be shown.
❑ Ips Removing
From the ip display screen (Figure 239) you can delete the ip that is being displayed by pressing the (Left) key.
❑ Creating new ips

Once on this screen (Figure 242) you can use the following keys:

User Manual 501
 For information on how to enter the numbers, refer to the Functioning of the menus in this manual.
 The  (Left) key is used to delete the last entered value.
 The  (Up) and  (Down) keys to move between the IP line and the MASK line.
 The <ESC> key is used to exit the previous menu.
 The  (Enter) key is used to apply the change.
❑ Disabling / Enabling Ethernets

Once on this screen (Figure 244 and Figure 245) you can use the following keys:
 The  (Up),  (Down) and  (Left) keys to change the setting value.
 The <ESC> key is used to exit the previous menu.
 The  (Enter) key is used to apply the change.

User Manual 502
When an ethernet is disabled, all ips associated with that interface will be deleted. The DISABLED text will appear in the
Network Setup menu. If we access the menu of this interface will be shown the screen of Figure 246, with the ip 0.0.0.0.
If you want to enable again, change the setting to YES and then edit the IP1 to add the desired ip and mask
❑ Network configuration screen when there is a failure in the display configuration.

When there is a fault in the configuration of the display, there is the possibility to see the network configuration of the
equipment, pressing the  (Enter) key alternates the display of the error message and the screen with the network
configuration. The network configuration screen is shown below.
Figure 246
❑ Restore factory settings

At the end of the Network Configuration menu there is an option to restore the factory settings of the ethernets.

User Manual 503
24.3.2 Gateway Configuration

From the display it is also possible to view, add, modify and delete the gateways that are configured on the device. Up to 10
gateways can be configured, ONLY 1 of which can be a default gateway.
The following figures show the screens with the different interfaces for the unit’s network and gateways. We can see that a default
gateway with IP address 192.169.183.4 and a gateway with IP address 192.168.183.1 have been configured. The remaining
gateways have not been configured.
❑ Viewing a Gateway
If we select Gateway 2 and press  (Enter), the following screen appears (Figure 248) showing the Gateway’s data values
and a legend at the bottom with the different options available to the user.
Figure 247 Network Configuration Figure 248 Gateway display screen Figure 249 Default Gateway edition screen
If we select Gateway 1 and press  (Enter), the default gateway screen appears (Figure 249).
❑ Editing or creating a Gateway

If we press  (Enter) in the Gateway configuration screen and we have permission to change settings (having entered the
correct password into the password screen), the Gateway edition and creation screen will appear with the current data and
a second row into which the new values can be entered.
The following situations may arise when configuring a Gateway:
❑ Gateway Not Configured

 To add a default Gateway, we only have to complete the GATEWAY field (the Gateway IP address) and press 
(Enter). If not, an error will occur.
 To add a Gateway with a specific network destination, we must complete the 3 fields and press  (Enter). If
not, an error will occur.
❑ Gateway Configured
 To edit a default Gateway (Figure 249), we only have to modify the GATEWAY field (the Gateway’s IP address)
and, once the desired value has been entered, press  (Enter) for the change to become effective.
 To edit a Gateway with a specific network destination, we change the desired parameter(s) and press 
(Enter). Any parameters that are not modified will retain the current values.
To add a new Gateway, select a non-configured gateway, for example Gateway 3, and press  (Enter).
This screen shows the values of the Gateway’s 3 fields as non-configured. In such a case, we can only exit or edit (add) the
Gateway. By pressing  (Enter) again, the Gateway edition/creation screen will be displayed.

User Manual 504
The  (Up),  (Down) keys are used to move between destination IP address, destination network mask and the Gateway IP
address fields in a circular manner. This is not possible in the default Gateway, which has a single editable field.
To exit without saving any changes, press <ESC>.
If we want to enter the Gateway with the destination IP 10.15.1.6, Gateway mask 255.255.255.255 and Gateway IP address
192.168.182.252, you must activate the special mode keypad to do this, press the <MENU> key. For more information,
consult the point 1.2.1 in this manual.
error, a small screen displaying the cause of the error will be shown.
The screen will display the new configuration and the new Gateway introduced.
NOTE: If a default Gateway is configured, the last Gateway will ALWAYS be displayed, even if more gateways with a specific
network destination are added.
Figure 250 Gateway parameters setting changes screen
❑ Deleting a Gateway
If we press the “” (Left) key in the Gateway configuration screen and we have permission to change settings (having
entered the correct password into the password screen), the Gateway that is being displayed will be deleted.

User Manual 505
24.4 OTHER SCREENS
24.4.1 Contrast setting

To access the contrast setting screen we must press “0” and “9” at the same time in a screen that is not within the unit's settings
menu. Once we have pressed these two keys, the following image will appear in the display:
Figure 251 Contrast setting screen
If we then press  (Up) the contrast’s intensity will increase, and if we press  (Down), the intensity will decrease. To exit this
screen, press  (Enter).
24.4.2 USB treatment

When the user inserts a USB key, a small window will appear in the display indicating that a USB device has been detected and the
USB treatment will begin.
Figure 252 USB detected Figure 253 Remove the USB device

User Manual 506
Once the treatment has terminated, the following window will appear in the display indicating that we can remove the USB device.
NOTE: If the USB device is not removed within 5 seconds, the small screen will disappear and the display will return to the previous
screen.
Added a new menu of settings in the Password screen to set the USB treatment, this setting can only be changed from the display.
The setting will have 3 possible values:
❑ Disabled: The USB treatment is not available.

❑ With password: The USB treatment is available but needs the introduction of the key settings menu.
❑ Without password: The USB treatment is available without having to enter the password.
24.4.3 System Information

In this menu the information concerning Product Information and detailed version of the device.
The content of each submenu is:
❑ Product information: commercial computer code and the serial number of the CPU is displayed.
❑ Device versions:
 Versions of the CPU and the boards of the device are displayed.
 Sampled values firmware version. Only in models with sampled values modules.
 Micros expansion boards versions (CPU and HMI).
 Logic and CID versions.
❑ Last updates: last 18 updates are shown, for each update there is a record with the following data:
 Date and time of the update.
 Filename update.
 Result of the update.
❑ Last CIDs loaded: The display will show the latest cids loaded from the device boots where the following information is
displayed:
 Date and time.
 Cid name.
 Result validation.

User Manual 507
24.4.4 CID validation

Messages relating to the receipt and processing of a new CID on the device are displayed in a small window, the operation is as
follows:
❑ After a new CID give the device a small window indicating that you are validating the CID is displayed. Throughout the
process of validation when any key is pressed, the window disappears and you can access the different menus display.
❑ Once the validation process resulting CID (CID Validated / CID unvalidated) is indicated in a new window, which will remain
on the display until you press any key or two minutes have elapsed.
Messages received new setting display is visualized between the windows and the window CID validating the result.
24.4.5 Security Logs

Are available which record user actions from the keyboard / display, such as:
❑ if the password setting menu or the key is modified FTP

❑ If the password is correct or incorrect
❑ Whether to enable / disable Enabling Ethernet ports
❑ If there is a change in the network configuration
From firmware version 8.0.22.0, the following user actions from the keyboard / display are recorded in an audit file:
❑ Successful and wrong login

❑ Log-out by user inactivity (timeout) or user logged out
❑ Settings change
❑ Unauthorized access.
❑ IED synchronization

User Manual 508
24.4.6 Test Screens

There are 2 test screens on your device for digital outputs and programmable LEDs. To enter these screens need to have entered
the correct password to enter the settings menu.
The output test screen is in the Setup menu of GGIO cards. It defines the different cards and display equipment shown to modify
the time setting output activation.
Once access to one of the cards all outputs and the corresponding connection is. To activate the desired output is only necessary to
select and press  (Enter).
Pressing  (Up) or  (Down), keys allow to select different outputs. To return to the previous menu, press the '<ESC> key.
Figure 254 Digital Output Test Figure 255 GGIO1 Test Figure 256 Leds Test
The LED screen test is in the I/O/Leds configuration menu.
To activate the desired LED is only necessary to select and press  (Enter) key. Pressing  (Up) or  (Down), keys allow to select
different led. To return to the previous menu, press the '<ESC> key.
24.4.7 Other Communications Menu Screens

❑ The following submenus are available within the Communications menu:
❑ Network Configuration: mentioned in its corresponding section.
❑ PRP / HSR / Sw configuration: the ethernet corresponding to PRP, HSR or switch is configured (only available in models
with redundancy module PRP/HSR/Switch mode).
❑ Process Bus: shows the information of ethernets 3 and 4 if they are available (only available in models with sampled values
subscriptions).
❑ Communications protocols: a series of slave / server and master protocols are available depending on the model of the
equipment.

User Manual 509
WEB APPLICATION 
25. WEB APPLICATION
25.1 INTRODUCTION
This document describes the features and capabilities of the Web Application, which is supplied within the firmware and allows to set
up and monitor the target IED.
The Web Application has been built in order to be responsive, HTML5 and CSS3 compliant and as lightweight as possible. It is supported
by the following browsers and versions:
❑ Google Chrome version 40.0.2214 or higher.

❑ Mozilla Firefox version 35.0.1 or higher.
❑ Internet Explorer version 10 or higher.
25.2 WEB APPLICATION LOGIN
First, the IP address of the IED must be entered into the browser's address bar in order to load the login page, i.e.: http://100.0.0.1.
Depending on the FW version, there are different login pages:
❑ Login (Firmware prior versions to 8.0.22.0)

❑ Login (available from firmware version 8.0.22.0)
25.2.1 Login (Firmware prior versions to 8.0.22.0)

By accessing the Web Application, the login screen where you need to enter username and password corresponding.
Authentication is required to access the Web Application.
Regardless of whether the connection is local or remote, there are two levels of users. Administrators permission to view and
modify parameters in the installation and Visualizers that have access to information, but they can not modify any parameter.
Username and password corresponding by default are:
Administrator user: User: admin Password: modifica
Visualizer user: User: consulta Password: consulta
If the user has an administrator access level asks if you want to log on with permission to modify or permissions only view.

User Manual 510
WEB APPLICATION 
Furthermore, if there is already a session of another user with administrator permissions on the system, it asks if you want to end
the session and start a new with administrator permissions or if you want to log on with viewing permissions, keeping the session
existing administrator.
Once the authentication has been successful, the Web Application starts to load several tabs detailed in section 1.3.
25.2.2 Login (available from firmware version 8.0.22.0)

The login page needs a valid username and its password to login.
Users defined locally on IED or users defined on a remote server such as LDAP can be used for access.
Depending on the user permissions, different information will be displayed on the WEB page.
Once the login has been successful the Web Application starts to load several tabs described below.
25.3 TABS
The WEB application consists of a menu with the following main tabs:
❑ Reports
❑ Settings
❑ Maintenance
❑ SW/Configuration
❑ Cybersecurity (available from firmware version 8.0.22.0)
❑ IEC61850 Data (available from firmware version 6.3.20.0)
❑ Logout
The tabs displayed will depend on the permissions of the user used to access the IED. IED name is included in the top bar and the
version web is displayed as 'v:X.X.X.X' (available since firmware version 9.5.28.1)

User Manual 511
WEB APPLICATION 
25.3.1 Reports
The tabs displayed in this section depend on the IED model. These are some examples of the tabs displayed:
❑ Status
❑ Measures
❑ Statistics (available from firmware version 6.2.19.3)
❑ Maximeters (available from firmware version 6.2.19.3)
❑ Events
❑ Oscillography (available from firmware version 6.2.19.2)
25.3.1.1 Status
In the Status tab real-time information about measures and signals is shown. It is possible to read this information periodically or
each time the read button is clicked.
On the left two main menu are displayed: Measurements and Signals.
In the Measurements menu, the main measures taken in the secondary are shown.

User Manual 512
WEB APPLICATION 
In the Signals menu, the most important signals regarding IED status, protection units, input and outputs status, etc. are shown.

User Manual 513
WEB APPLICATION 
25.3.1.2 Protection Events

In this tab, the list of events recorded by the IED can be displayed and a compressed file with all the events can be downloaded.

User Manual 514
WEB APPLICATION 
25.3.2 Settings
In this tab, it is possible to read and change the settings of the IED. Cybersecurity related settings cannot be changed from this tab.
There is a specific tab for these settings. It will be explained in later sections
The settings are arranged in menus regarding their functionality, and they are read from the IED according to these menus. At the
bottom of the page there are three buttons in order to read settings, erase changes and send changes to the IED.
The settings are displayed as tables where the first column is the description of the setting, the second column is its value in the IED
and the last column is its value on the WEB. The background color of each setting's row changes according to its value. If the value
in the IED and the value on the WEB do not match the background will turn into yellow. On the other hand, if the value on the WEB
is not valid the background will turn into red.
In addition, it is possible to change the active table and view the value of each setting for every table from this WEB page.
25.3.3 Maintenance
This tab contains the following tabs:

User Manual 515
WEB APPLICATION 
❑ Communications (MTU configuration available from firmware version 9.1.24.0 and WEB version higher than 1.0.14.14)
❑ Users (only in FW versions without RBAC access control and firmware versions prior to 8.0.22.0)
❑ Change password (available from firmware version 8.3.23.0 and web version higher than 1.0.14.5)
❑ Device logs (available from firmware version 8.3.23.0 and web version higher than 1.0.14.5)
❑ Serial Number (available from firmware version 9.0.24.0 and WEB version higher than 1.0.14.11)
25.3.3.1 Communications
The following menus are available:
❑ Synchronization. It is possible to synchronize the IED with the desired date and time.
❑ IP Network configuration. It allows to configure the IED's IP addresses, static routes and Maximum Transmission
Unit (MTU).
❑ IP Network Tools. It is possible to execute a ping command from the IED and view IED's actual IP configuration and
routing tables.
❑ Protocol sniffer. It allows to capture communication information in the different ETH interfaces of the equipment.
25.3.3.2 Users
In this tab, detailed information about current active sessions logged into the WEB is shown, such as, session access mode and
connection datetime.
Additionally, it is possible to change password of the user who started the session, by clicking on 'Change password' button.

User Manual 516
WEB APPLICATION 
25.3.3.3 Change password

In this tab, it is possible to change the password of the user who accesses the Web Application.
25.3.3.4 Device logs

In this tab it is allowed to Read and Download various logs from the equipment depending on the user's permissions.
The visualization of the logs on the WEB shows the most modern log first. This coincides with the treatment that is done on the
display with the visualization of control and protection events.
When downloading the file, the order it has in the file itself is maintained, that is, the oldest events first.

User Manual 517
WEB APPLICATION 
25.3.3.5 Serial Number

In this tab commercial code, serial number of device and CPU are shown. Serial number of device is allowed to modify if and
when user has security management permission.
25.3.4 SW/Configuration
The SW/Configuration tab contains the following tabs:
❑ Configuration
❑ Firmware (available from firmware version 6.2.19.3)
❑ Remote Commands
25.3.4.1 Configuration
In this tab it is possible to load the configuration file if user has configuration change permission. Otherwise, 'Load' button will
be disabled.
The current configuration file version loaded on the IED is shown as well as the history of the loaded configuration files.

User Manual 518
WEB APPLICATION 
25.3.4.2 Firmware
In this tab it is possible to load the FW if user has firmware change permission. Otherwise, 'Load' button will be disabled.
The current SW versions loaded on the IED are shown as well as the history of the loaded FW versions and the commercial
code.
25.3.4.3 Remote Commands

This tab has two options:
❑ System reboot
❑ Download Backup
25.3.5 Cybersecurity
This tab contains the following tabs:
❑ Logs
❑ NTP Symetric Keys
❑ Firewall Cfg
❑ Certificates

User Manual 519
WEB APPLICATION 
❑ Settings
❑ RBAC
❑ Password Dictionary
The tabs displayed depend on the permissions assigned to the user who has accessed the WEB.
25.3.5.1 Logs
This tab is only enabled for users with 'security audit' permission. It is used to configure rsyslog functionality.
❑ Logs configuration options:SOE Enable, TypeEvSOE and Time Format.

Available from firmware version 9.1.26.0 there are 2 new options: Quality Format and source.
❑ Remote servers configuration: Name, IP address of the remote server, Port, Input mode, TLS. Auth Mode, CA File
and Log file.
Available from firmware version 9.1.26.0 there are 4 new options: Keep alive enabled, Keep alive retries number,
Keep alive interval between retransmissions and Keep alive period.
More details about rsyslog functionality can be found in the “Cybersecurity functions” section of this manual.
NOTE: when the Read button is pressed, the IED configuration will be reloaded, and the modifications made in the Web column
will be lost.

User Manual 520
WEB APPLICATION 
25.3.5.2 NTP Symetric Keys

Through this tab can be loaded, downloaded, and deleted the NTP symmetric keys file. Furthermore, it is also possible to
reading it to show its content in a text box in this page.
Note that to complete the NTP symmetric keys file load, it must have '.keys' extension, otherwise it will be rejected.
25.3.5.3 Firewall configuration

Firewall functionality can be configured independently for each ethernet port through this WEB page.
With this functionality only communication protocols that are needed to meet the functional requirements will be allowed in
each ethernet port.
Once the firewall is enabled on an ethernet port, access will only be available to the TCP/UDP ports that are specifically
enabled.

User Manual 521
WEB APPLICATION 
In addition to the predefined ports in the firewall configuration, you can add/configure more TCP / UDP ports and choose
whether the filtering is as a server or as a client.
25.3.5.4 Certificates
Currently, through this page can be updated, downloaded, and deleted the certificates used by the IED, such as LDAP
certificate, client and manufacturer signed firmware CA, etc.
Only files with a .pem, .crt or .cer extension and a maximum size of 50KB are allowed.

User Manual 522
WEB APPLICATION 
25.3.5.5 Settings
This tab is used to configure the security settings of the equipment.
The settings on this tab are grouped into the following categories:
❑ LDAP
❑ Access
❑ Password
❑ Session
❑ Display
❑ Whitelist
❑ FW
❑ Login message
❑ HTTPS
❑ USB
❑ Autodetection
There is a list of all the settings with their description in the "Cybersecurity section" of this manual.

User Manual 523
WEB APPLICATION 

User Manual 524
WEB APPLICATION 
NOTE: Within the Log Configuration the 'Mode' setting is renamed to 'CID Private Configuration' from FW version 9.5.29.2
onwards.

User Manual 525
WEB APPLICATION 
25.3.5.6 RBAC
In this tab, users with 'RBAC management' permission can:
❑ Create a new user.

❑ Change password of an existing user.
❑ Change role of an existing user.
❑ Create a new rol or delete previously created one (available from firmware version 9.4.28.0).
❑ Activate a blocked user.
❑ Block an existing user.
❑ Delete an existing user.
❑ Reset RBAC configuration.
❑ Restore numeric key for display access to the default one (available from firmware version 9.4.28.0).
❑ See the list of all configurable users and enable/disable:
▪ System users
▪ Legacy users (available since FW version 9.5.29.2)
▪ Default security manager. NOTE: 'Default security manager' user can NOT disable himself/herself.
25.3.5.7 Password Dictionary

Through this tab can be updated, downloaded, and deleted a password dictionary.

User Manual 526
WEB APPLICATION 
25.3.6 IEC61850 Data

This tab contains information about IEC61850 communications:
❑ Configured reports
❑ Server connections
❑ Client connections
❑ Goose recepcion
❑ Goose transmission
The information shown in this section depends on the configuration loaded in the IED and de IED model.
25.3.7 Logout
This tab is to end the session and return to login page of Web Application.

User Manual 527
DNP PROTOCOL 
26. DNP PROTOCOL
26.1 INTRODUCTION
DNP3.0 protocol is available to communicate with a DNP master station. This protocol interface is suitable for both physical media and
network connection management layer as IP protocol.
Following topics are described in this document:
❑ DNP3.0 communication configuration settings

❑ Digital signals, measurements, counters and commands database configuration, using an Ingeteam software
❑ DNP3.0 Device Profile implemented
26.2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
Following DNP3.0 settings can be configured using the software proveed by Ingeteam:
❑ Enable protocol:
 Yes
 No
❑ Slave address: DNP slave address of the device. Range values from 1 to 65532. Default value: 1.
❑ Master address: DNP master address of the master device. Range values from 1 to 65532. Default value: 1.
❑ Port Number: Selection of the device communication interface port. COM1 to COM6 are device physical interfaces
available for serial transmission. Ethernet1 and Ethernet 2 indicates the two available network ports.
 Disable
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
 Ethernet 1
 Ethernet2
❑ Comm speed (bauds): Selection of the communication baud rate. Only for serial communication.
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud

User Manual 528
DNP PROTOCOL 
❑ Parity: Selection of the communication parity bits used in asynchronous transmission. DNP3.0 Standard recommends no
parity. Only for serial communication.
 None
 Even
 Odd
❑ Number of Stop bits: Selection of the number of stop bits used in asynchronous transmission. Only for serial
communication.
 1 bit
 2 bits
❑ Communication control: It enables selection of the communication control type using serial control signals. Only for serial
communication.
 Normal: No control over uart signals is carried out in frames transmission or reception
 Fixed + DCD: RTS signal is required to be constantly activated during transmission and DCD signal is tested to
transmit.
 RTS: RTS signal handling: it is activated during transmission. In case of RS485 uart use, this setting value is
recommended.
 RTS+CTS: RTS and CTS signals handling: RTS signal is activated to transmit, and CTS signal activation is expected
to start transmission. Once transmission is over, RTS signal will be deactived.
 RTS+CTS+DCD: RTS, CTS and DCD signals handling: RTS signal is activated to transmit, and CTS activation and
DCD deactivation are expected to start transmission.
❑ Min. respond delay (ms): After the reception of a message is completed, RTS flag activation to start a new transmission
will be set once this time is over. Range values from 0 to 1000 ms.
This setting treatment applies in those cases of ‘Communication control’ with RTS signal control enabled.
❑ CTS max delay (ms): Time for CTS signal activation once RTS signal is activated in transmission process. Range values from
0 to 1000 ms.
This setting treatment applies in those cases of ‘Communication control’ with CTS signal control enabled.
❑ Carrier stabilization (ms): Time before starting the transmission of a new message to allow carrier stabilization. Range
values from 0 to 1000 ms.
This setting treatment applies for any value of ‘Communication control’ setting.
❑ RTS drop-off time (ms): Time for the RTS deactivation after the message last byte transmission. Range values from 0 to
1000 ms.
❑ ACK delay time(ms): Timeout for data link confirmation. Range values from 100 to 10000 ms.
❑ Need time delay (m): Time in minutes after receiving a synchronization message or after a device start up to check local
clock. If local time is not valid, synchronization is requested to the master. Range values from 0 to 10 min.
❑ Permission to synchronize: Synchronization from a DNP master can be chosen as a source among the available ones.
 Yes
 No
❑ Local time offset (h): Offset time in hours to be added to local clock. Range values from -12 to +12 hours.
❑ Communication fail T.(min): Time to activate DNP communication failure signal after no valid message reception. Range
values from 0 to 10000 min.
❑ Data link confirm: Data link layer confirmation is required. In an Ethernet communication, this setting must be set No.
 No
 Yes

User Manual 529
DNP PROTOCOL 
❑ Max. App Fragment Size: DNP application message maximum size in bytes. Range values from 512 to 3072 bytes.
❑ Freeze time counters: Frozen counters data will be transmitted with the freeze time tag in respond to a Counter request
with VAR 0.
 No
 Yes
❑ Default Status: Digital data, analog input and counters can be sent to the master with a status byte if variation is not
defined in the received request, even if it is a Class 0 request.
This setting is bit-configured as follows:

Bit Description Value
0 Any data with status 1 (all)
1 Digitals inputs with status 2 (only digitals)
2 Analog inputs with status 4 (only analogs)
3 Counters values with status 8 (only actual counters)
4 Frozen counter values with status 16 (only frozen counters)
Note: Any combination of these values is possible. For example, if digital and analog inputs are required to be sent with
status byte, then this setting is calculated as follows:
Setting = Digital input with status value + Analog input with status value = 2 + 4 = 6
❑ Bin. output status default: Binary outputs with status are included in a respond to a Class 0 Request.
 No
 Yes
❑ Analog output status def.: Analog outputs with status are included in a respond to a Class 0 Request.
 No
 Yes
❑ Frozen Counters status def.: Frozen counters with status are included in a respond to a Class 0 Request.
 No
 Yes
❑ Analog input bits default: "Var" field value in analog input objects when no variation is included in the master request.
 16 bits
 32 bits
 Short floating point
❑ Normalized: Analog value format.
 Secondary: Real values
 Normalized: Normalized values. ‘Limit Scale’ field in Analog Configuration Table is used to calculate the analog
input normalized value
 Primary: Analog input real values in primary. Relation of transformation is applied to the value sent to the
master
❑ Counter bits default: "Var" field value in counter objects when no variation is included in the master request.
 16 bits

User Manual 530
DNP PROTOCOL 
 32 bits
❑ Enable unsolicited: Unsolicited responses of class 1, 2 or 3 are generated and spontaneously transmitted to the master.
 No
 Yes
❑ Enable collision avoidance87: It enables collision avoidance detection using DCD uart signal.
❑ Fixed Unsolicited T.out (ms): Fixed waiting time before transmitting an unsolicited response. Range values from 0 to 5000
ms.
❑ Variable Unsolicited T.out (ms): Variable waiting time additional to the previous setting of fixed time. Value options are:
Setting Value Time in ms
0 255
1 127
2 63
3 31
4 15
5 7
6 3
7 1
❑ Unsolicited Repeat T.out (s): Timeout for an unsolicited message confirmation reception. Range values from 0 to 630 s.
❑ Max.number rep. without solic.: Maximum number of retransmissions of an unsolicited response. Range values from 0 to
65535. No limit is configured for number of retransmissions if setting is set to 0.
❑ Special operations: Some operational characteristics can be configured:
Bit Bit indication at 1
0 Transmission of current counters with OBJ = 21
1 Reserve
2 Transmission of unsolicited responses with IIN field included every 10 seconds
3 Reserve
4 Reserve
5 Reserve
6 No transmission of Restart message is sent on device start-up
❑ Change wait time (s): Waiting time for the SOE in the internal queue before processing the events. It is only necessary if
there are data from different IEDs to sort them chronologically. Range values from 0 to 20 s.
❑ TCP Listen Port: Port number used for establishing the TCP connection. Range values from 0 to 65535. Default value:
20000.
❑ Unsolicited react. delay (s): Timeout to start a new cicle of retries of a not confirmed unsolicited message transmission.
Range values from 0 to 3600 s. Not used if value is 0.
❑ Command selection time (ms)88: Execution command reception waiting time after command selection. Range values from
0 to 40000 ms.
❑ Max command wait time (ms): Timeout for the command success before responding to the master including the result of
the command. If timeout expired, “Not supported” is indicated in the response. Range values from 0 to 1000 ms.
❑ Enable T.correct.buf.events: This setting allows a time correction of any digital events time tag kept in the device waiting
to be transmitted to the master. This correction is done as soon as a first syncrhronization is received. Until this
syncrhronization is received, no digital events will be transmitted to the master.
87
Setting not available anymore. This feature is now configured using ‘RTS+CTS+DCD’ option in ‘Communication Control’
setting
88
New setting range available from ICD version 8.18.x.x on. Previous range: 100 – 15000 ms.

User Manual 531
DNP PROTOCOL 
The DNP3.0 configuration settings are in GEN\DNPITCP1 node IEC 61850 data model, detailed as following:
Table 284 DNP protocol settings

ProtEna Enable protocol No/Yes Boolean
Slave Slave address 0 65532 1 Int32
Master Master address 0 65532 1 Int32
Disable
COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port Number COM4 Enum
COM5
COM6
Ethernet 1
Ethernet2
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
Speed Comm speed (bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
None
Parity Parity Even Enum
Odd
1 bit
Stopbit Number of Stop bits Enum
2 bits
Normal
Fixed + DCD
RtsType Communication control RTS Enum
RTS+CTS
RTS+CTS+DCD
RtsTmms Min. respond delay(ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
CtsTmms CTS max delay (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
CarTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
RtsOffTmms RTS drop-off time (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
AckTmms ACK delay time(ms) 100 10000 10 Int32
SynDl Need time delay(m) 0 10 1 Int32
SynEna Permission to synchronize No/Yes Boolean
SynOfs Local time offset(h) -12 12 1 Int32
ComFailTm Communication fail T.(min) 0 10000 1 Int32
LinkAck Data link confirm No/Yes Boolean
MaxAppSize Max. App Fragment Size 512 3072 256 Int32
FrzCnt Freeze time counters No/Yes Boolean
Bit 0: All with status
Bit 1: Digitals with status
Bit 2: Analogs with status
StDefault Default status 0 31 1 Int32
Bit 3: Counters with status
Bit 4: Frozen counters with
status
BinOutSt Bin. output status default No/Yes Boolean
AnOutSt Analog output status def. No/Yes Boolean
FrCntSt Frozen Counters status def. No/Yes Boolean
16 bits
AnInBits Analog input bits default 32 bits Enum
Short floating point
Primary
Normalized Normalized Normalized Enum
Secondary

User Manual 532
DNP PROTOCOL 

16 bits
CntBits Counter bits default Enum
32 bits
UnSolEna Enable unsolicited No/Yes Boolean
FixedTmms Fixed Unsolicit.Timeout (ms) 0 5000 10 Int32
255
127
63
31
VarTmms Var. Unsolicit. Timeout (ms) Enum
15
7
3
1
UnSolTmms Unsolicit. Repeat T.out (s) 0 630 1 Int32
UnSolMaxR Max.number rep. without solic. 0 65535 1 Int32
SpecialBeh Special operations 0 255 1 Int32
CambTms Change wait time (s) 0 20 1 Int32
TcpPort TCP Listen Port 0 65535 1 Int32
ReacTms Unsolicited react. delay (s) 0 3600 1 Int32
TselecTmms Command selection time (ms) 0 40000 10 Int32
TOWaitTmms Max command wait time (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
FixSynEna Enable T.correct.buf.events No/Yes Boolean
26.3 CONFIGURATION TABLES
26.3.1 Digital Points Configuration Table

DNP3.0 simple or binary points and double-bit binary points can be configured in the device to be sent to the master station.
Simple points use one register and double points can use up to 4 registers for each point:
For each DNP digital point, following fields must be configured:
❑ Type: Type of DNP digital point

 Simple: Single point: State of the digital point represented in one bit
 DP: Double point: State of the digital point represented in 2 bits (up to 4 possible states of the point).
❑ DNP Signal: DNP digital point address in master station database.

 For binary input points (‘Simple’ type):
Range values from 0 to 4093. First DNP digital point must be 0 and no gaps are allowed in database.
 For 2-binary input points (‘DP’ type):

Range values from 0 to 127. First DNP double digital point must be 0 and no gaps are allowed in database.

User Manual 533
DNP PROTOCOL 
❑ CIN: Internal ID interpretation code:

 For binary input points (‘Simple’ type):
 ‘SP’ or CIN value 0: Single point
Both, state and quality status of the input configured in “Internal ID” field, are sent to master
station with the address indicated in "DNP Signal" field.
 ‘SP online’ or CIN value 1: Single point always online
Only state of the input configured in “Internal ID” field, is sent to master station with the address
indicated in "DNP Signal" field. Quality status is always ‘online’.
 For 2-binary input points (‘DP’ type):
 ‘DP Intermediate’ or CIN value 0:
Input assigned in ‘Internal ID’ field is assigned to the intermediate state in the DNP 2-bit binary
input point. State to 1 in the internal ID is considered as a transition state 00 in the DNP double
point.
 ‘DP Open’ or CIN value 1:
Input assigned in ‘Internal ID’ field is assigned to the open state in the DNP 2-bit binary input point.
State to 1 in the internal ID is considered as a 01 state in the DNP double point.
 ‘DP Closed’ or CIN value 2:
Input assigned in ‘Internal ID’ field is assigned to the close state in the DNP 2-bit binary input point.
State to 1 in the internal ID is considered as a 10 state in the DNP double point.
 ‘DP Failure’ or CIN value 3:
Input assigned in ‘Internal ID’ field is assigned to the failure state in the DNP 2-bit binary input
point. State to 1 in the internal ID is considered as a transition state 11 in the DNP double point.
Quality status of the DNP signal is an OR of the internal input’s quality status.
AddIn tip: By selecting ‘DP Intermediate’ option and a ‘dbPos’ 61850 type internal ID in the first register of the
double point, the configuration software fills up the rest of the registers for this double point.
❑ Internal IED: IED or device with the digital input point. Value 0 indicates the point is in this device. Range values
from 0 to 32.
❑ Internal ID: Internal input in the device.

AddIn tip: By clicking in the red rounded field showed as following, it is possible select the input searching in the
61850-node tree. Once the input is selected, the configuration software fills up ‘Internal ID’, ‘Description’ and
‘61850 Reference’ fields.
❑ Class: DNP class assigned to the digital point:

 Class 0: no events are transmitted if there is a state or quality status change. These points are transmitted to
the master stations in response to a Class 0 Request.
 Class 1: any state or quality status change in these points are transmitted as class 1 data to the master station.
❑ Time: Time format used in the event timestamp:

 Without time

User Manual 534
DNP PROTOCOL 
 Absolute time
 Relative time. Previously, both stations have been established the basis of the relative time
❑ Inverted: Inverted status of the point is transmitted to the master station.

 Not inverted
 Inverted
26.3.2 Analog Points Configuration Table

Any analog point to be transmitted to the master station, must be configured in this table. One register is required for each analog
point:
For each DNP analog point, following fields must be configured:
❑ DNP Signal: DNP analog point address in master station database.

Range values from 0 to 1023. Gaps are allowed in database.
❑ Internal IED: IED or device with the analog input point.

Value 0 indicates the point is in this device. Range values from 0 to 32.

AddIn tip: In the same way as showed in ‘Digital Point Configuration Table’, it is possible select the analog input
searching in the 61850-node tree. Once the analog input is selected, the configuration software fills up ‘Internal
ID’, ‘Description’ and ‘61850 Reference’ fields.
❑ Class: DNP class assigned to the analog point:

 Class 0: no events are transmitted if there is a value change. These points are transmitted to the master
stations in response to a Class 0 Request.
 Class 1: any value change higher than its configured deadband is transmitted as class 1 data to the master
station.
station.
station.
❑ Deadband: Absolute variation value to cause an event.

It is applied over the value to be transmitted. Range values from 0 to 10000. If deadband is 0, no event is
generated.

User Manual 535
DNP PROTOCOL 
❑ Dec: Factor of 10 to modify the analog value to be transmit.

Range values from -6 to 4. At value 0, no modification is made to the transmitted value. Positive values multiply
and negative values divide. This factor does not apply if ‘Normalized’ setting is configured as ‘Normalized’ value
indicating that analog points are treated as normalized.
❑ Limit scale: Analog point full scale or valid range, depending on ‘Normalized’ setting value.
 In case of ‘Normalized’ setting to ‘Normalized’ value: This field is the analog point full scale. It is the value that
causes 32767 to be sent to the master DNP.
 In case of ‘Normalized’ setting to other values: This field is the analog point range. Any value over this range is
marked with ‘Over-range’ bit in the quality status to be sent to the master station.
26.3.3 Counter Points Configuration Table

Any counter point to be transmitted to the master station, must be configured in this table. One register is required for each
counter point:
For each DNP counter point, following fields must be configured:
❑ DNP Signal: DNP counter point address in master station database.

❑ Internal IED: IED or device with the counter input point.

Range values from 0 to 32. Value 0 indicates the point is in this device.

AddIn tip: In the same way as showed in ‘Digital Point Configuration Table’, it is possible select the input searching
in the 61850-node tree. Once the input is selected, the configuration software fills up ‘Internal ID’, ‘Description’
and ‘61850 Reference’ fields.
❑ Class: DNP class assigned to the counter point:

 Class 0: no events are transmitted if there is a value change. These points are transmitted to the master
stations in response to a Class 0 Request.
 Class 1: any change in value higher than its configured deadband is transmitted as class 1 data to the master
station.
station.
station.

User Manual 536
DNP PROTOCOL 
❑ Deadband: Absolute variation value to cause an event.

Range values from 0 to 10000. It is applied over the value to be transmitted. If deadband is 0, no event is
generated.
26.3.4 Commands Configuration Table

Any command to be sent from the master station, must be configured in this table. One register is required for each command:
Only one command is accepted in each message and ‘On Time’ and ‘Off Time’ fields of the DNP message are not used.
For each DNP command, following fields must be configured:
❑ DNP command: DNP command address in master station database.

Range values from 0 to 255. This address is the one expected in the control message from DNP master.
❑ Op type: Operation type.

This operation type is the one expected in the control message from DNP master.
Possible values are:
 TRIP
 CLOSE
 Latch ON
 Latch OFF
 Pulse ON
 Pulse OFF (deprecated)
❑ Internal IED: IED or device destination of the command.

Range values from 0 to 32. Value 0 indicates the command is for this device.
❑ Internal ID: Internal output in the device.

AddIn tip: In the same way as showed in ‘Digital Point Configuration Table’, it is possible select the output
searching in the 61850-node tree. Once the output is selected, the configuration software fills up ‘Internal ID’,
‘Description’ and ‘61850 Reference’ fields.
❑ ON_OFF: Internal command value. Use to select Internal ID.

 ON
 OFF
❑ Comand type: Command execution mode.

User Manual 537
DNP PROTOCOL 
 All: Both, direct operation, and selection before operation, are allowed for this command.
 SBO: Only Select Before Operate control is supported for this command.
 DO: Only Direct operate control is supported for this command.
❑ Origin: Command source to proceed to control blocks.

 Bay Control
 Station Control
 Remote Control
 Automatic Bay
 Automatic Station
 Automatic Remote
 Maintenance
 Process

User Manual 538
DNP PROTOCOL 
26.4 DEVICE PROFILE
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

Vendor Name: INGETEAM S.A.
Device Name: INGEPAC EF
Highest DNP Level Supported:
Device Function:
For Requests Level 3
 Master  Slave
For Responses Level 3
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the
attached table):
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted 292 Transmitted 1024< >3072(configurable)
Received 292 Received 1024
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
 None
 None
 Fixed at 1
 Configurable, range ____ to ____
 Configurable, range __ to __
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
 Never
 Always
 Sometimes
 Configurable
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
 When reporting Event Data
 When sending multi-fragment responses
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Application Confirm  None  Fixed at __10 sg____  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Response  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Others
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Count > 1  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Pulse On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Pulse Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Clear Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific
requested: variation requested:
 Never  Never
 Only time-tagged  Binary Input Change With Time
 Only non-time-tagged  Binary Input Change With Relative Time
 Configurable to send both, one or the other (attach explanation)  Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
 Never Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
 Configurable (attach explanation)  Never
 Only certain objects  When Device Restarts
 Sometimes (attach explanation)  When Status Flags Change
 ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
Supports Collision Avoidance: Configurable Collision Avoidance Detection Method: DCD
Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:
 No Counters Reported  No Counters Reported
 Configurable (attach explanation)  Configurable (attach explanation)
 Default Object _________  16 Bits
Default Variation ______  32 Bits
 Point-by-point list attached  Other Value _____________

User Manual 539
DNP PROTOCOL 
 Point-by-point list attached

Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:  Yes  No
26.4.1 Object List

REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Func Codes Qual Codes Func Codes
Obj Var Description Qual Codes (hex)
(dec) (hex) (dec)
1 0 Binary Input – All Variations 1,22 00,01,06
1 1 Binary Input 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
1 2 Binary Input with Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
2 0 Binary Input Change - All Variations 1 06,07,08
2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
2 3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
3 0 Double-bit binary Input – All Variations 1 00,01,06
3 1 Double-bit binary Input 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
3 2 Double-bit binary Input with Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
4 0 Double-bit binary Input Change - All Variations 1 06,07,08
4 1 Double-bit binary Input Change without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
4 2 Double-bit binary Input Change with Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
Double-bit binary Input Change with Relative
4 3 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
Time
10 0 Binary Output - All Variations 1 00,01,06
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3, 4, 5, 6 17, 28 129 Echo of request
1, 7, 8, 9,
20 0 Binary Counter - All Variations 00,01,06
10,22
1, 7, 8, 9,
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 00,01,06 129 00,01
10
1, 7, 8, 9,
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 00,01,06 129 00,01
10
20 3 32-Bit Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
20 4 16-Bit Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
20 7 32-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
20 8 16-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 0 Frozen Counters - All Variations 1, 22 00,01,06
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
21 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
21 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 11 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 12 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
22 0 Counter Change Event – All Variations 1 06,07,08
22 1 32-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
22 2 16-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28

32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without
22 3 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
Time
22 4 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without 1 06, 07, 08 129 28

User Manual 540
DNP PROTOCOL 
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Func Codes Qual Codes Func Codes
Obj Var Description Qual Codes (hex)
(dec) (hex) (dec)
Time
23 0 Frozen Counter Events – All Variations 1 06, 07, 08 129
23 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
30 0 Analog Input - All Variations 1, 22 00,01,06
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
30 3 32-Bit Analog Input without flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
30 5 Analog Input — Single-prec flt-pt with flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
32 0 Analog Change Event - All Variations 1 06,07,08
32 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
32 2 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
Analog Input Event — Single-prec flt-pt without
32 5 1 06,07,08 129,130 28
time
2 07, quantity=1
50 1 Time and Date
1 07, quantity=1 129 07, quantity=1
51 1 Time and Date CTO 129 07, quantity=1
51 2 Unsynchronized Time and Date CTO 129 07, quantity=1
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 07, quantity=1
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 06
1 06,07,08
60 2 Class 1 Data
20, 21,22 06
1 06,07,08
60 3 Class 2 Data
20, 21, 22 06
1 06,07,08
60 4 Class 3 Data
20, 21, 22 06
1 00, 01 129 00
80 1 Internal Indications
2 00, index=7
No Object 13, 14
No Object 23

User Manual 541
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL 
27. IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
27.1 INTRODUCTION
IEC60870-5-103 protocol is available to communicate with a IEC60870-5-103 master station in a physical media.
❑ IEC870-5-103 communication configuration settings

❑ Digital signals, measurements, and commands database configuration, using an Ingeteam software tool
Depending on the model, the device offers the following settings:
 Yes
 No
❑ Slave address: Slave address of the device in IEC870-5-103 communication. Value between 1 and 254.
available for serial transmission.
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud
❑ Parity: Selection of the communication parity bits used in asynchronous transmission.
 None
 Even
 Odd
❑ Number of Stop bits: Selection of the number of stop bits used in asynchronous transmission.
 1 Bit
 2 Bit
❑ Communication control: It enables selection of the communication control type using serial control signals.
 Normal: No control over uart signals is carried out in frames transmission or reception

User Manual 542
 Fixed + DCD: RTS signal is required to be constantly activated during transmission and DCD signal is tested to
transmit.
 RTS: RTS signal handling: it is activated during transmission. In case of RS485 uart use, this setting value is
recommended.
 RTS+CTS: RTS and CTS signals handling: RTS signal is activated to transmit, and CTS signal activation is expected
to start transmission. Once transmission is over, RTS signal will be deactived.
 RTS+CTS+DCD: RTS, CTS and DCD signals handling: RTS signal is activated to transmit, and CTS activation and
DCD deactivation are expected to start transmission.
❑ Min. respond delay (ms): After the reception of a message is completed, RTS flag activation to start a new transmission
❑ CTS max delay (ms): Time for CTS signal activation once RTS signal is activated in transmission process. Range values from
0 to 1000 ms.
This setting treatment applies in those cases of ‘Communication control’ with CTS signal control enabled.
This setting treatment applies for any value of ‘Communication control’ setting.
❑ RTS drop-off time (ms): Time for the RTS deactivation after the message last byte transmission. Range values from 0 to
1000 ms.
❑ Permission to synchronize: Synchronization from a 103 master can be chosen as a source among the available ones.
 Yes
 No
❑ Communication fail T.(min): Time to activate 103 communication failure signal after no valid message reception. Range
values from 0 to 10000 min.
❑ VDEW Compatible: Use of private data range.
 No: Private mode.
All programmed control signals are sent.
Measurements Function Type and Information Number are the ones configured in ‘TYP in measurands ASDU’
and ‘INF in measuransds ASDU’ settings.
Supported commands are the ones programmed in the Commands table.
 Yes: Compatible mode.
Only those digital control signals with a compatible Funtion Type are sent to master. The zero value in the table
indicates Funtion Type = Compatible. The other signals do not appear. The user is responsible for selecting the
digital signals of the device in accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
Analog measurements are at most the first nine measures configured in the table. The Function Type and
Information Number to use (144, 145, 146 o 148) depends on the number of configured measures. 1, 2, 4 or 9
measures in the measurements table respectively. In the last case the ASDU 9 is used instead of ASDU 3. The
user is responsible for selecting the device measures in accordance with IEC 60870-5-103.
Only the compatible commands, the ondes with Function type to 0 in the table, are processed. The user is
responsible for selecting them according to IEC 60870-5-103.
❑ Function type: Type of protection equipment used.

 distance protection ( 128 )
 overcurrent protection ( 160 )
 transformer differential protection ( 176 )
 line differential protection ( 192 )

User Manual 543
❑ TYP in measurands ASDU: Function Type used in measurands ASDU. It only applies when the setting ‘VDEW Compatible’ is
set to No.
❑ INF in measurands ASDU: Information Number used in measurands ASDU. It only applies when the setting ‘VDEW
Compatible’is set to not.
❑ Transformation ratio: It enables primary or secondary mode for measurement values to be sent to the master. Analog
values in primary are sent to 103 master multiplied by its transformation ratio.
 Secondary
 Primary
The configuration settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 are in the GEN\103ITCP1 node IEC 61850 data model, as detailed in the following
table:

User Manual 544
Table 285 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol settings

ProtEna Enable protocol NO/YES Boolean
Slave Slave address 1 254 1 Int32
COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port Number Enum
COM4
COM5
COM6
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
Speed Comm speed (bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
None
Parity Parity Even Enum
Odd
1Bit
Stopbit Number of Stop bits Enum
2 Bit
Normal
Fixed + DCD
RtsType Communication control RTS Enum
RTS+CTS
RTS+CTS+DCD
RtsTmms Min. respond delay(ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
CtsTmms CTS max delay (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
CarTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
RtsOffTmms RTS drop-off time (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
CambTms Change wait time (s) 0 20 1 Int32
VDEW VDEW Compatible NO/YES Boolean
distance protection
overcurrent -
protection
FunTyp Function type transformer - Enum
differential protection-
line differential
protection
FunTypMed TYP in measurands ASDU 0 255 1 Int32
InfMed INF in measurands ASDU 0 255 1 Int32
RT Transformation ratio Secondary/Primary Boolean
27.3.1 Digital signals table

IEC870-5-103 simple or binary points and double-bit binary points can be configured in the device to be sent to the master station.
Simple points use one register and double points can use up to 4 registers for each point. Every digital point in 103 communication
is identified as a pair of ‘Function type’ and ‘Information Number’ values.
❑ Type: Tipe of signal. Simple or double.

 Simple. (Default)
 DP
❑ CIN: Signal incidence code:
 SP→Value change in simple signaling. (Default)
 DP Open→ If the field Type = DP: Change in the calculated signal giving the 01 or open state of a double signal.
 DP Closed→ Change in the calculated signal giving the 10 or closed state of a double signal.

User Manual 545
 DP Intermediate→ Change in the calculated signal giving the state 00 or intermediate of a double signal.
 DP Indeterminate→ Change in the calculated signal that gives the 11 or indeterminate of a double signal.
❑ Function type: Function type field of the signal. In the case that the signal belongs to the compatible range, (128,
160, 176 o 192), it should be configured a value of 0. The following values are not allowed: 129, 144, 145, 161, 177,
193, 208, 209, 224, 225, 240, 241, 254, 255.
❑ Information number: Information Number for the signal.
from 0 to 32.
In the case that the signal belongs to the compatible range, the user is responsible for selecting the digital signals
of the device in accordance to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
❑ General interrogation: When selected it indicates that the information is included in the general interrogation (GI).
For these Information Numbers both status changes (OFF to ON and ON to OFF) are transmitted spontaneously.
For the others Information Numbers only the status OFF to ON are transmitted.
In the case of using a double-type signal, the four signals forming the double signal must be configured (Open, Close, Intermediate,
and Indeterminate). Using this type of signal expands the meaning of the DPI field sent in the ASDUs:
When simple type signals are used, the field is sent as is the norm in section 7.2.6.5. Double-point information:
DPI := UI2[1..2] <0..3>
With <0> := not used
<1> := OFF
<2> := ON
<3> := not used
When using DP type signals, the meaning of the values 0 and 3 changes, becoming:
DPI := UI2[1..2] <0..3>
With <0> := Intermediate, (transitioning between end conditions)
<1> := OFF
<2> := ON
<3> := Indeterminate, (abnormal or custom condition)
27.3.2 Measurements table

point:
❑ Measure number: Measure position inside the ASDU. The first position is zero.
❑ Internal IED: IED or device with the analog input point. Value 0 indicates the point is in this device. Range values
from 0 to 32.

User Manual 546
❑ AddIn tip: In the same way as showed in ‘Digital Point Configuration Table’, it is possible select the analog input
searching in the 61850-node tree. Once the analog input is selected, the configuration software fills up ‘Internal ID’,
In the case that the measurement belongs to the compatible range, the user is responsible for selecting the
measure of the device in accordance to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
❑ Límit scale: Specific limit scales can be configured for 103 analog points to be sent to the 103 master station. These
limit scales replace the ones configured in the protection for the rest of functions and protocols. Limit scale is the
real positive measurement value corresponding to 4095 internal units. If this value is zero, the valid limit scale is
the general one.
If analog values are sent in primary, the value is multiplied by its transformation ratio no matter which limit scale is
in use.
27.3.3 Commands table

❑ Function type: Function Type field for the signal. In the case that the signal belongs to the compatible range, (128,
160, 176 o 192), it should be configured a value of 0.
❑ Information number: Information Number for the signal.
❑ DCO: ON/OFF value of the command.
❑ Internal IED: IED or device destination of the command. Range values from 0 to 32. Value 0 indicates the command
is for this device.
In the case that the command belongs to the compatible range, the user is responsible for selecting the command
of the device in accordance to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard
❑ Origin: Command source to proceed to control blocks.
 Bay Control
 Station Control
 Remote Control
 Automatic Bay
 Maintenance
 Process

User Manual 547
IEC60870-5-104 PROTOCOL 
28. IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
28.1 INTRODUCTION
Ingeteam provides a communication with a telecontrol station using an IEC60870-5-104 server, edition 2, which offers a
combination of the application layer of IEC60870-5-101 and the transport functions provided by a TCP/IP (Transmission
Control Protocol / Internet Protocol).
IEC60870-5-104 telecontrol protocol is based in a client/server model referring the controlling station as the client and the
controlled station as the server. Is the controlling station which establishes each transport connection with all IEC60870-5-
104 servers in the network.
Transport interface (user to TCP interface) is a stream-oriented interface which adds an APCI (Application Protocol Control
Information) header to the IEC60870-5-101 ASDU (Application Service Data Unit). This header includes the following
delimiting elements: a start character, the specification of the length of the ASDU plus the control field.
ASDU format is the specified in IEC870-5-3 normative, in 5.1 Application Service Data Unit clause.
Telecontrol station can establish up to 8 simultaneous TCP/IP connections with our IEC60870-5-104 server but only one at a
time will be able to transfer application information. This connection will be in STARTDT mode until telecontrol station
decides starting the IEC60870-5-104 communication in any of the other established connections.
Besides the management of the telecontrol station communication, IEC870-5-104 server attends all the protocol application
functionalities, such as maintain a database updated and receive and process any message from the telecontrol station, with
special attention to the control commands.
28.2 IEC60870-5-104 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
Following IEC60870-5-104 settings can be configured using a Ingeteam interface as PacFactory:
❑ Enable Protocol:
 No
 Yes
❑ ASDU Direction: Server station address used in the application layer. This address is tested in every ‘Common Address of
Asdu’ field received as well as included in any application message transmitted by the server station. Range values from 1
to 65534. Default value: 1.
❑ Client 1 IP Direction: Any connection establishment attempt received from this IP address will be accepted by the server.
Any other will be refused. Value of 255.255.255.255 allows connection of any IP address.

User Manual 548
❑ K-max tx unack frames: Number of transmitted frames no acknowledged by the controlling station. Range values from 1 to
20. Default value: 12.
❑ w-max rx unack frames: Number of received frames no acknowledged by the controlled station with a Supervisory frame.
Range values from 1 to 20. Default value: 8.
❑ T0-connection establish. (s): Connection establishment timeout, in seconds. Range values from 1 to 255. Default value: 30.
❑ T1-Tx supervisory ack (sec): Transmitted frames confirmation timeout, in seconds. Starting with the first transmitted frame
not confirmed, controlled station will close the connection established once this time is over. Range values from 1 to 255.
Default value: 15.
❑ T2-Rx supervisory ack (sec): Received I-frames confirmation timeout, in seconds. Starting with the first received frame no
acknowledged, server will send a Supervisory frame acknowledging all the received frames once this time is over. It is
required to be lower than the T1 setting configured in the controlling station. Range values from 1 to 255. Default value:
10.
❑ T3- Test Frame tx tout (sec): A test message will be sent by controlled station after this time in which no data transfer has
occurred. Range values from 0 to 9999. Default value: 20.
❑ Max. TCP/IP connections: Maximum number of connections used. Range values from 1 to 8. Default value: 1.
❑ Queue delay time: Time required to assure the transmission, chronologically ordered, of all time-tagged events collected
by the device, in seconds. Range values from 0 to 60. Default value: 0.
❑ Measurement period (sec): Measured values changes testing period time, in seconds.
The procedure of these changes’ transmission is different for those measured point with a deadband configured and those with a
deadband of zero. In the first case, controlled station is testing, periodically, any change in the measured value beyond its configured
deadband and preparing its transmission to the controlling station. For those with a deadband value of zero, however, its value will be
transmitted cyclically using this setting as period of transmission. Range values from 0 to 60. Default value: 2.
❑ C2 delete with reset link: Controlled station erase any event of class 2 pending of transmission after receiving a Startdt
Activation message. This setting does not affect to any remote command in execution at that moment. Default value: Yes.
 No
 Yes
❑ Class 1 queue length: Number of ASDUs with events assigned with high priority class, class 1, buffered in the controlled
station until its transmission to controlling station. Range values from 10 to 200. Default value: 50.
❑ Class 2 queue length: Number of ASDUs with events assigned with low priority class, class 2, buffered in the controlled
station until its transmission to controlling station. Range values from 4 to 512. Default value: 25.
❑ Conf. C2 queue length: Number of responses ‘Activation Confirmation’ buffered in the controlled station until its
transmission to controlling station. Range values from 0 to 300. Default value: 5.
❑ Command queue length: Number of remote commands that controlled station can receive simultaneously. Every
command will be buffered and executed in order of reception as soon as possible. Range values from 0 to 10. Default
value: 3.
❑ Rx command queue length: Number of requests received from the controlling station and buffered to be processed in case
of controlled station is too busy to attend. Range values from 0 to 20. Default value: 10.
❑ Periodic change T (min): An application test procedure is offered by the controlled station by enabling an oscillating-state
point to be transmitted with this period, in minutes. This signal state changes every period, and it is sent to the controlling
station. Value 0 to deactivate this procedure. Range values from 0 to 1440. Default value: 0.
❑ Periodic measurement COT 1: ‘Cause of Transmission’ of ‘Periodic (COT=1)’ can be configured for those periodic measured
point sent to controlling station every ‘Measurement period (sec)’ period. Otherwise, these changes will be sent as
‘Spontaneous (COT=3)’. Default value: No (spontaneous).
 No
 Yes
❑ Timestamp COT3 measurement: Changes in measured values will be sent to controlling station including a time-tag of the
moment they occur. Default value: No.
 No
 Yes

User Manual 549
❑ Prof.0 overflow behaviour: An indication is sent to the controlling station when event buffer overflow has occurred.
Default value: No.
 No
 Yes
❑ Profile 0 IOAs: Controlled station uses a defined IOA ranges and enables certain alarms for this profile 0. Default value: No.
 No
 Yes
❑ Command execution type: Commands received from controlling station can be executed with (select before operate) or
without previous selection (direct operation). Default value: DO.
 DO
 SBO
❑ Command execute ACTTERM: A command response with ‘Activation Termination’ in its cause of transmission is sent to the
controlling station once the command is over. Default value: No.
 No
 Yes
❑ Command selection time (ms): Selection timeout for a command, in milliseconds. Range values from 0 to 15000. Default
value: 1500.
❑ (Prof.2) Only 1 connection: Only one connection established it is possible with the client at a time. Any new connection
establishment attempt will be accepted by the controlled station after closing the previous one. Default value: No.
 No
 Yes
❑ Negative ACTCON unknow CAA: A negative ‘Activation Confirmation’ is sent to the controlling station in response to a
command received with an unknown ‘Common Address of Asdu’. Default value: No.
 No
 Yes
❑ Background scan overflow: Once event buffer overflow occurred in the controlled station, connection will be closed, and
all the events will be eliminated. No more events will be registered until a ‘Startdt Activation’ is received from the
controlling station.
 No
 Yes
❑ Return informat: Events caused by a command can be transmitted with cause of transmission 3 or ‘Spontaneous’ instead
of 11 or ‘Return information caused by a remote command’. Default value: No.
 No (cot 11)
 Yes (cot 3)
❑ (Init end) No M_EI: No message is sent to the controlling station once initialization is over in controlled station. Default
value: No.
 No
 Yes
❑ ACTCON return information: If ‘Command execute ACTTERM’ setting is activated, this message can be sent with cause of
transmission positive or negative according to the successful reception of the command associated event.
 No
 Yes
❑ Permission to synchronize: It allows to controlling station to synchronize the controlled station via 104 communication.
 No
 Yes
❑ TCP Listen Port: Port number used for establishing the TCP connection. Range values from 0 to 65535. Default value: 2404.

User Manual 550

User Manual 551
These IEC60870-5-104 configuration settings are in GEN/P104ITCI1 node in 61850 data model, detailed as following:
IEC 60870-5-104 Communication Settings
Dato Ajuste Mín. Máx. Paso Observaciones Tipo

ProtEna Enable protocol 0 1 1 No/Yes Boolean
DIRASDU ASDU Direction 1 65534 1 Int32
IPTCS1 Client 1 IP direction 0 65535 1 IP
ParamK K-max tx unack frames 1 20 1 Int32
ParamW W-max rx unack frames 1 20 1 Int32
T0Tms T0-connection establish. (s) 1 255 1 Int32
T1Tms T1-Tx supervisory ack(sec) 1 255 1 Int32
T2Tms T2-Rx supervisory ack(sec) 1 255 1 Int32
T3Tms T3-Test Frame tx tout(sec) 0 9999 1 Int32
NTcpIp Max.TCP/IP connections 1 8 1 Int32
EspColTms Queue delay time 0 60 1 Int32
ExpMedTms Measurement period(sec) 0 60 1 Int32
ResClas2 C2 delete with reset link 0 1 1 No/Yes Boolean
LongC1 Class 1 queue lenght 10 200 1 Int32
LongDatC2 Class 2 queue lenght 4 512 1 Int32
LConfCmdo Conf. C2 queue lenght 0 300 1 Int32
BuffOrden Command queue length 1 10 1 Int32
BuffCmdo Rx command queue length 0 20 1 Int32
CePerioTm Periodic change T (min) 0 1440 1 Int32
Cot1Med Periodic measurement COT 1 0 1 1 No/Yes Boolean
MedCron Timestamp COT3 measurement 0 1 1 No/Yes Boolean
FullQClos Prof.0 overflow behaviour 0 1 1 No/Yes Boolean
IOAsP0 Profile 0 IOAs 0 1 1 No/Yes Boolean
TipoMan Command execution type 0 1 1 DO/SBO Enum
ActTermCom Command execute ACTTERM 0 2 1 No/Yes Boolean
TselecTmms Command selection time (mseg) 0 15000 10 Int32
OneConn (Prof.2) Only 1 connection 0 1 1 No/Yes Boolean
CaaDesc Negative ACTCON unknow CAA 0 1 1 No/Yes Boolean
OverfOn Background scan overflow 0 1 1 No/Yes Boolean
Cot3EstEsp Return informat 0 1 1 No/Yes Boolean
MEiOff (Init end) No M_EI 0 1 1 Int32
ActTermEsp ACTCON return information 0 1 1 No/Yes Boolean
SynEna Permission to synchronize 0 1 1 No/Yes Boolean
TcpPort TCP Listen Port 0 65535 1 Int32
28.3 IEC60870-5-104 SERVER CONFIGURATOR
Ingeteam provides a user-interface to configure the expected IEC60870-5-104 database in the controlled station as well as
those specifications which are particular for each element.
28.3.1 Digital Signals

This IEC60870-5-104 signal database must include all the digital signals to be sent to the controlling station, either single
points or double points. Single points are one-bit information signals and double points are the result of a logic of 2 single
signals.
In this digital database configuration, one register is one digital point, single or double.

User Manual 552
Field Description Comments

Number of internal points used
- 1: Single point SP. One internal ID is assigned to one 104 SP
to define this IEC60870-5-104
Type - 6: Double point DP. Up to 6 internal ID can be included in this double point
element
state logic
IOA IEC60870-5-104 Information Object Address
- 0: SP value change
- 1: DP Open state value change
- 2: DP Close state value change
CIN Internal point information code - 3: DP Intermediated state value change
- 4: DP Indeterminate state value change
- 5: DP Open point value change
- 6: DP Close point value change
Internal IED IED or station where the digital point is
Internal ID Point identification in the IED: number and description
Inverted Inverted state to the controlling station
28.3.2 Measurements
IEC60870-5-104 measurement database must include all the measured values to be sent to the controlling station.
Different value transmission formats are available:
❑ Normalized value.
❑ Short floating point value.
Any other formats are not implemented in the controlled station.
In this measured values database configuration, one register is one analog point:

0 – Normalized value
1 – Reserved for scaled value
Type IEC60870-5-104 format
2 – Reserved for step position value
3 – Short floating-point value
Internal IED IED or station where the analog point is
Internal ID Point identification in the IED: number and description
Threshold value: minimum
Deadband quantity of change for the Percentage value. Short floating values are allowed.
measured value to be sent
0 – Unipolar measured:
- Normalized: Range transmitted values from 0 to 1. Value 0 is
corresponding to low range value and value 1 to high range value
Range for measured value - Short-floating point: Range transmitted values from 0 to ‘Low’-‘High’
Unipolar / Bipolar
transmission 1 – Bipolar measured:
- Normalized: Range values from -1 to 1. Value -1 is corresponding to
low range value and value 1 to high range value
- Range transmitted values from ‘Low’ to ‘High’
Low Low range value Short-floating point value
High High range value Short-floating point value
28.3.3 Commands
IEC60870-5-104 commands database must include all the commands to be received for the controlled station. Different
command types are available:
❑ Single commands without return information – C type commands

❑ Double commands without return information – CC type commands
❑ Single commands with a single point as return information – C0 type commands
❑ Double commands with a single point as return information – C1 type commands
❑ Double commands with a double point as return information – C2 type commands
In this command database configuration, one register is one command, single or double.

User Manual 553

0 – C single command
1 – C0 single command
Type Command type 2 – CC double command
3 – C1 double command
4 – C2 double command
1- Bay Control
2- Station Control
3- Remote Control
4- Automatic Bay
Origin Command procedence
5- Automatic Station
6- Automatic Remote
7- Maintenance
8- Process
Internal IED IED or station command destination
IED command identification
In case of a single command, only one command in IED is necessary. This
Internal ID (ON) corresponding to command
information must be filled in this field
ON: number and description
IED command identification
Internal ID (OFF) corresponding to command In case of a single command, this field is not necessary
OFF: number and description
IOA ret IEC60870-5-104 Information Object Address of the return information point associated to the command
Expected state of the return
- Single command, expected state
Inverted information point associated to
- Double command, indicates if expected state is inverted
the command
Ret Timeout Timeout, in seconds, for receiving the return information associate to the command
28.4 DEVICE PROFILE
IEC 870 – 5 – 104 protocol profile implemented is defined below by ticking (“✓”) the parameters selected among the
parameters and alternatives indicated in the standard.
28.4.1 System or device, (system-specific parameter)

 System definition
 Controlling station definition (Master)
 Controlled station definition (Slave)
28.4.2 Network configuration, (network-specific parameter)

◼ Point-to-point ◼ Multipoint-party line
◼ Multiple point-to-point ◼ Multpoint-star
28.4.3 Physical layer, (network-specific parameter)

Transmission speed (control direction)
Unbalanced
interchange circuit
Unbalanced V.24/V.28
interchange circuit Recommended if >
V.24/V.28 Standard 1200 bit/s Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27
100 bit/s 2 400 bit/s 2 400 bit/s 56 000 bit/s

◼ ◼ ◼ ◼
◼ ◼ ◼ ◼

User Manual 554
300 bit/s 9 600 bit/s 9 600 bit/s

◼ ◼ ◼
600 bit/s 19 200 bit/s 19 200 bit/s
◼ ◼ ◼
1 200 bit/s 38 400 bit/s 38 400 bit/s
◼ ◼ ◼
Transmission speed (monitor direction)
Unbalanced
Interchange Circuit
Unbalanced V.24/V.28
Interchange Circuit Recommended if >
V.24/V.28 Standard 1200 bit/s Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27

◼ ◼ ◼ ◼
◼ ◼ ◼ ◼
300 bit/s 9 600 bit/s 9 600 bit/s
◼ ◼ ◼ ◼
600 bit/s 19 200 bit/s 19 200 bit/s
◼ ◼ ◼ ◼
1 200 bit/s 38 400 bit/s 38 400 bit/s
◼ ◼ ◼ ◼
28.4.4 Link layer (network-specific parameter)

Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1 and the fixed time out interval are used exclusively in this companion standard.
Link transmission Address field of the link

◼ Balanced transmission ◼ Not present (balanced transmission only)
◼ Unbalanced transmission ◼ One octet
◼ Two octets
Frame length ◼ Structured
◼ Maximum length L (control direction) ◼ Unstructured
◼ Maximum length L (monitor direction)
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ASDU types are returned in class 2 messages (low priority) with the
indicated causes of transmission:
◼ The standard assignment of ASDUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:

Type identification Cause of transmission
9, 11, 13 <1>
◼ A special assignment of ASDUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:

28.4.5 Application layer

Transmission mode for application data
Mode 1 (Least significant octet first), as defined in 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion standard.
Common address of ASDU, (system-specific parameter)

User Manual 555
◼ One octet  Two octets
Information object address, (system-specific parameter)
◼ One octet  Structured

◼ Two octets  Unstructured
 Three octets
Cause of transmission, (system-specific parameter)
◼ One octet  Two octets (with originator address)
Selection of standard ASDUs
Process information in monitor direction, (station-specific parameter)
 <1> := Single-point information M_SP_NA_1

◼ <2> := Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
 <3> := Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
◼ <4> := Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1
 <5> := Step position information M_ST_NA_1
◼ <6> := Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
 <7> := Bitstring of 32 bits M_BO_NA_1
◼ <8> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag M_BO_TA_1
 <9> := Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
◼ <10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_ME_TA_1
 <11> := Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1
◼ <12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_ME_TB_1
 <13> := Measured value, short floating-point value M_ME_NC_1
◼ <14> := Measured value, short floating-point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1
 <15> := Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
◼ <16> := Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
◼ <17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
◼ <18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TB_1
◼ <19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1
 <20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection M_PS_NA_1
 <21> := Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor M_ME_ND_1
 <30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_SP_TB_1
 <31> := Double-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_DP_TB_1
 <32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a M_ST_TB_1
 <33> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a M_BO_TB_1
 <34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TD_1
 <35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TE_1

User Manual 556
 <36> := Measured value, short floating-point value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TF_1
 <37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a M_IT_TB_1
 <38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TD_1
 <39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1
 <40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TF_1
CP56Time2a
 <45> := Single command C_SC_NA_1
 <46> := Double command C_DC_NA_1
 <47> := Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1
 <48> := Set point command, normalized values C_CE_NA_1
 <49> := Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1
 <50> := Set point command, short floating-point value C_SE_NC_1
 <51> := Bitstring of 32 bits C_BO_NA_1
 <58> := Single command with time tag CP56Time2a C_SC_TA_1

 <59> := Double command with time tag CP56Time2a C_DC_TA_1
 <60> := Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a C_RC_TA_1
 <61> := Set point command, normalized values with time tag CP56Time2a C_CE_TA_1
 <62> := Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TB_1
 <63> := Set point command, short floating-point value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TC_1
 <64> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a C_BO_TA_1
System information in monitor direction, (station-specific parameter)
 <70> := End of initialization M_EI_NA_1
System information in control direction, (station-specific parameter)
 <100> := Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1

 <101> := Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
 <102> := Read command C_RD_NA_1
 <103> := Clock synchronization command C_CS_NA_1
◼ <104> := Test command C_TS_NB_1
 <105> := Reset process command C_RP_NC_1
◼ <106> := Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1
 <107> := Test command with time tag CP56Time2a C_TS_TA_1
Parameter in control direction, (station-specific parameter)
 <110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value (threshold only) P_ME_NA_1

 <111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value P_ME_NB_1
 <112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating-point value P_ME_NC_1
 <113> := Parameter activation P_AC_NA_1

User Manual 557
File transfer, (station-specific parameter)
 <120> := File ready F_FR_NA_1

 <121> := Section ready F_SR_NA_1
 <122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
 <123> := Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
 <124> := Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
 <125> := Segment F_SG_NA_1
 <126> := Directory F_DR_TA_1
Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments, (station-specific parameters)
20 37
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 a a 44 45 46 47
36 41
<1> M_SP_NA_1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
<3> M_DP_NA_1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
<5> M_ST_NA_1
<7> M_BO_NA_1
<9> M_ME_NA_1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
<11> M_ME_NB_1
<13> M_ME_NC_1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
<15> M_IT_NA_1
<20> M_PS_NA_1
<21> M_ME_ND_1
<30> M_SP_TB_1 ✓ ✓
<31> M_DP_TB_1 ✓ ✓
<32> M_ST_TB_1
<33> M_BO_TB_1
<34> M_ME_TD_1 ✓
<35> M_ME_TE_1
<36> M_ME_TF_1 ✓
<37> M_IT_TB_1
<38> M_EP_TD_1
<39> M_EP_TE_1
<40> M_EP_TF_1
<45> C_SC_NA_1 ✓ ✓ ✓
<46> C_DC_NA_1 ✓ ✓ ✓
<47> C_RC_NA_1
<48> C_CE_NA_1
<49> C_SE_NB_1
<50> C_SE_NC_1
<51> C_BO_NA_1

User Manual 558
<58> C_SC_NA_1
<59> C_DC_NA_1
<60> C_RC_NA_1
<61> C_CE_NA_1
<62> C_SE_NB_1
<63> C_SE_NC_1
<64> C_BO_NA_1
<70> M_EI_NA_1 ✓
<100> C_IC_NA_1 ✓ ✓ ✓
<101> C_CI_NA_1
<102> C_RD_NA_1 ✓
<103> C_CS_NA_1 ✓ ✓
<105> C_RP_NC_1 ✓ ✓
<107> C_TS_TB_1
<110> P_ME_NA_1
<111> P_ME_NB_1
<112> P_ME_NC_1
<113> P_AC_NA_1
<120> F_FR_NA_1
<121> F_SR_NA_1
<122> F_SC_NA_1
<123> F_LS_NA_1
<124> F_AF_NA_1
<125> F_SG_NA_1
<126> F_DR_TA_1
28.4.6 Basic application functions

Station initialization, (station-specific parameter)
 Remote initialization
Cyclic data transmission, (station-specific parameter)
 Cyclic data transmission
Read procedure, (station-specific parameter)
 Read procedure
Spontaneous transmission, (station-specific parameter)
 Spontaneous transmission
Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous, (station-specific parameter)

User Manual 559
The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an information
object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are defined in a project-specific
list.
 Single point information M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1 y M_PS_NA_1

 Double point information M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1 y M_DP_TB_1
 Step position information M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1y M_ST_TB_1
 Bitstring of 32-bit M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, M_BO_TB_1
 Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1 y M_ME_TD_1
 Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1 y M_ME_TE_1
 Measured value, short floating point number M_ME_NC_1 y M_ME_TC_1
Station interrogation, (station-specific parameter)
Information object addresses assigned to each group must be shown in a separate table.
 Global
 Grupo 1  Grupo 7  Grupo 13
 Grupo 5  Grupo 11
 Grupo 6  Grupo 12
Clock synchronization, (station-specific parameter)
 Clock synchronization
Command transmission, (object-specific parameter)
 Direct command transmission  Select and execute command

 Direct set point command transmission  Select and execute set point command
 C-SE ACTTERM Used
 No additional definition
 Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the controlled station)
 Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the controlled station)
 Persistent output
 Supervision of maximunm delay in command direction of commands and setpoint commands
Maximum allowable delay of commands and setpoint commands
Transmission of integrated totals, (station- or object-specific parameter)
 Mode A: local freeze with spontaneous transmission

 Mode B: local freeze with counter interrogation
 Mode C: freeze and transmit by counter interrogation commands

User Manual 560
 Mode D: freeze by counter interrogation command, frozen values reported

spontaneously
 Counter read  General request counter
 Counter freeze without reset  Request counter group 1
 Counter freeze with reset  Request counter group 2
 Counter reset  Request counter group 3
 Request counter group 4
Addresses per group have to be defined
Parameter loading, (object-specific parameter)
 Threshold value
 Smoothing factor
 Low limit for transmission of measured value
 High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter activation, (object-specific parameter)
 Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
Test procedure, (station-specific parameter)
 Test
File transfer, (station-specific parameter)
File transfer in monitor direction
 Transparent file
 Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
 Transmission of sequence of events
 Transmission of sequence of recorded analogue values
File transfer in control direction
 Transparent file
Background scan, (station-specific parameter)
 Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay
◼ Acquisition of transmission delay

User Manual 561
Definition of time outs
Parameter Default value Remarks Selected value

t0 30 s Time-out of connection establishment 30 s
t1 15 s Time-out of send or test APDUs 15 s
t2 10 s Time-out for acknowledges in case of no data 10 s
messages t2<t1
t3 20 s Time-out for sending test frames in case of a long 20 s
idle state t3>t1
Maximum range of values for time-outs t0 – t2: 1 to 255 s, accuracy 1 s.

Maximum range of values for time-out t3: 0 s to 48 hours, accuracy 1 s.
Maximum number of outstanding I format APDUs kand latest acknowledge APDUs (w)
Parameter Default value Remarks Selected value

k 12 APDUs Maximum difference received sequence number to 12 APDUs
send state variable
w 8 APDUs Latest acknowledge after receiving I format 8 APDUs
APDUs I
Maximum range of values k: 1 to 32767 (215-1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU

Maximum range of values w: 1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU (Recommendation: w
should not exceed two-thirds of k).
Portnumber
Parameter Value Remarks

Portnumber 2404

User Manual 562
SLAVE PROCOME PROTOCOL 
29. SLAVE PROCOME PROTOCOL
29.1 INTRODUCTION
Procome protocol is available to communicate with a Procome master station. This protocol interface is suitable for both physical
media and network connection management layer as IP protocol.
❑ Procome protocol configuration settings

❑ Digital signals, measurements, counters, and commands database configuration, using an Ingeteam software tool
Following Procome settings can be configured using the software proveed by Ingeteam:
available for serial transmission. Ethernet1 and Ethernet 2 indicates the two available network ports.
 Disable
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
 Ethernet 1
 Ethernet 2
❑ Procome address: Procome slave address of the device. Range values from 1 to 254.
 300 baud
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud
 115200 baud
❑ Parity: Selection of the communication parity bits used in asynchronous transmission. Only for serial communication.
 None
 Even
 Odd
❑ Number of Stop bits: Selection of the number of stop bits used in asynchronous transmission. Only for serial
communication.

User Manual 563
 1 bit
 2 bits
❑ CTS wait time (ms): Time for CTS signal activation once RTS signal is activated in transmission process. Range values from
0 to 10000 ms.
❑ RTS activation time (ms): After the reception of a message is completed, RTS flag activation to start a new transmission
❑ RTS drop out time (ms): Time for the RTS deactivation after the message last byte transmission. Range values from 0 to
5000 ms.
❑ Channel Type: It enables selection of the communication control type using serial control signals. Only for serial
communication.
 Standard
 RTS Control
 By Phone
❑ Permission to synchronize: Synchronization from a Procome master can be chosen as a source among the available ones.
 Yes
 No
❑ TCP Listen Port: Port number used for establishing the TCP connection. Range values from 0 to 65535. Default value:
49300.
❑ Activate ACD with reset FCB: It enables different responds upon a FCB Reset message reception.
 Yes: As a respond of a FCB Reset, two type 5 messages are sent to the master. The first one with Cause of
Transmission to value 3, and the second one with Cause of Transmission 5 or 6, depending if the station has
been powered on.
 No: As a respond of a FCB Reset, only when the station has been powered on, two initialization messages are
sent to the master. The first one with Cause of Transmission to value 3, and the second one with Cause of
Transmission 5. Once the communication has started, only one initialization message is sent with Cause of
Transmission 3.

User Manual 564
The configuration settings for the first PROCOME are in the GEN\ITCP1 node IEC 61850 data model, detailed as following:
Table 286 Slave Procome protocol settings
Data Setting Mín. Max. Step Remarks Type

Disable
COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port Number COM4 Enum
COM5
COM6
Ethernet 1
Ethernet 2
DirEnl Procome Address 0 254 1 Uint32
300 baud
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
VelTrans Speed (Bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
115200 baud
Parity Parity None / Even / Odd Enum
Stopbit Number of Stop Bits 1 2 1 Uint32
PorTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 1000 10 Uint32
ActCtsTmms CTS wait time (ms) 0 10000 5 Uint32
ActRtsTmms RTS activation time (ms) 0 5000 10 Uint32
DesRtsTmms RTS drop out time (ms) 0 5000 1 Uint32
Standard
TipoCan Channel type RTS Control Enum
By Phone
CambTms Change wait time (s) 0 20 1 Uint32
SynEna Permission to synchronize NO/YES Enum
TcpPort TCP Listen Port 0 65535 1 Uint32
ActACDFCB Activate ACD with reset FCB NO/YES Enum
There are 4 tables to configure the list of digital status (binary inputs), analogs, counters, and commands.
29.3.1 Digital status configuration table

Procome points can be configured in the device to be sent to the master station. One register is required for each digital point.

User Manual 565
For each Procome digital point, following fields must be configured:
❑ Procome ID: Procome digital point address in master station database. Range values from 0 to 1023.
from 0 to 32.


 Not inverted
 Inverted
29.3.2 Analog values configuration table

point.
For each Procome analog point, following fields must be configured:
❑ Procome ID: Procome analog point address in master station database.

❑ Internal IED: IED or device with the analog input point.

Value 0 indicates the point is in this device. Range values from 0 to 32.

AddIn tip: In the same way as showed in ‘Digital Point Configuration Table’, it is possible select the analog input
searching in the 61850-node tree. Once the analog input is selected, the configuration software fills up ‘Internal
ID’, ‘Description’ and ‘61850 Reference’ fields.
29.3.2.1 Analog limit scale configuration

From 6.2.19.0 on, specific limit scales can be configured for Procome analog points to be sent to the Procome master station.
These limit scales replace the ones configured in the protection for the rest of functions and protocols.

User Manual 566
To configure Procome limit scales, it must be activated ‘Include limit scale in measurements’ option in View tab of the menu
bar.
Thus, one field is added to configure a limit scale for Procome value of each measurement.
29.3.3 Counters configuration table

Any counter point to be transmitted to the master station, must be configured in this table. One register is required for each
counter point.
For each Procome counter point, following fields must be configured:
❑ Procome ID: Procome counter point address in master station database.

❑ Internal IED: IED or device with the counter input point.

Range values from 0 to 32. Value 0 indicates the point is in this device.

AddIn tip: In the same way as showed in ‘Digital Point Configuration Table’, it is possible select the input searching
in the 61850-node tree. Once the input is selected, the configuration software fills up ‘Internal ID’, ‘Description’
and ‘61850 Reference’ fields.
29.3.4 Commands configuration table


User Manual 567
For each Procome command, following fields must be configured:
❑ Command: Procome command address in master station database.

Range values from 0 to 1023. This address is the one expected in the control message from Procome master.
❑ Internal IED: IED or device destination of the command.

Range values from 0 to 32. Value 0 indicates the command is for this device.

❑ ON_OFF: Internal command value. Use to select Internal ID.

 ON
 OFF
❑ Origin: Command source to proceed to control blocks. If the 'source' field does not exist in the file, it takes as
default Control Station.
 Bay Control
 Station Control
 Remote Control
 Automatic Bay
 Maintenance
 Process

User Manual 568
MODBUS MASTER PROTOCOL
30. MODBUS MASTER PROTOCOL
30.1 INTRODUCTION
The Modbus master protocol allows communication with control and/or protection and measuring devices.
Currently, the device has only asynchronous serial communication, with a start bit, 8 bits of data and configurable parity and stop bits.
The protocol allows the database to update with digital signals, measurements and counters. It also allows to send commands. For
some type of devices it allows to send synchronization messages and request for signal changes or events.
A configuration table, generated with a software tool dedicated to this effect, will indicate the number of information elements of each
type that each equipment has, as well as its address according to the Modbus RTU protocol.
The following are detailed:
❑ Protocol configuration settings

❑ Data types that can be requested/written from/to slave devices
❑ Modbus functions that are implemented in the protocol
❑ Types of RTU to communicate with
❑ Configuration software tool
❑ Modbus messages supported
The protocol has the following configuration settings:
 No
 Yes
❑ Port Number: It allows to set the communication channel between the available serial COMs.
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
❑ Comm speed (bauds): It allows to select the serial transmission speed.
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud
❑ Parity: It allows to select the type of parity to be used in the transmission.

User Manual 569
 None
 Even
 Odd
❑ Number of stop bits:
 1 Bit
 2 Bit
❑ Communication control: It allows to select the type of communication channel.
 RS232_FO
 RS485
❑ RTS activation delay Time (ms): Minimum waiting time to activate the RTS and start the transmission. Value between 0 and 5000.
❑ CTS max delay (ms): How much time the device will wait to activate the CTS after the activation of the RTS. Value between 0 and
10000.
❑ Carrier stabilization (ms): Waiting time to start the transmission, once CTS has been detected, in order to stabilize the carrier. Value
between 0 and 5000
❑ RTS dropoff time (ms): This is the time that the RTS signal keeps activated after the transmission of the last byte. Value between 0
and 5000.
❑ Respond delay time (ms): Maximum time that the master waits to receive the slave response. Value between 10 and 30000.
❑ Inter request time (ms): The time between two request cycles of the master device. Value between 10 and 30000.
❑ Transmission retries number: Indicates the number of data request retries the master device does, if it does not receive any
response from the slave device at a given time (Respond delay time). Value between 0 and 10.
Table 287 Modbus Master protocol settings

COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port Number Enum
COM4
COM5
COM6
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
BaudRate Comm speed (bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
Stopbit Number of stop bits 1 Bit / 2 Bit Enum
RS232_FO
ChType Communication control Enum
RS485
ActRtsTmms RTS activation delay Time (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
ActCtsTmms CTS max delay (ms) 0 10000 10 int32
CarTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
DesRtsTmms RTS dropoff time (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
RespTmms Respond delay time (ms) 10 30000 10 int32
IntgcTmms Inter request time (min) 10 30000 10 int32
RetryNumb Transmission retries number 0 10 1 Int32

User Manual 570
30.3 DATA TYPES
The protocol allows the master device to read signals, measurements and counters from the slave devices. It also allows sending
commands to the devices. In addition it allows to request signal changes and synchronization for the next devices: PL300 and TCP-IH.
Different types and formats of signals, measurements and counters are supported. The device configuration will indicate the data and
formats to be requested for each slave.
30.3.1 Digital signals

The Modbus master has the following signal types:
Table 288 Digital signal types
Type Description Remarks

1 Relay status Status of relays bit by bit
4 Digital signal (16 signals/WORD) Digital inputs as 16-bit registers, 16 signals in each word
Similar to type 1 and 14 but to read the information of one
5 Device status
single byte: Fast read of a byte.
12 Digital signal (1 signal/WORD) Digital inputs as 16-bit registers. One digital input per word
14 Input status Digital inputs bit by bit
Type 14 can only be used for RTU type 5.
30.3.2 Measurements
The Modbus master has the following measurement types:
Table 289 Measurement types

2 Measurement For reading measurements with F03/F04 functions
7 Additional measurement For reading measurements with F03 function
Type 7 can only be used for RTU type 5.
The Modbus master has the following measurement formats:
Table 290 Measurement format types
Format Description Remarks
0 8 bits, unsigned Measurements in 8-bit unsigned format
1 8 bits, signed Measurements in 8-bit signed format
6 Float point Measurements in floating format
10 Procome Measurements in Procome format in accounts
11 15 bits plus sign Measurements in 16-bit signed format with sign in the higher bit

User Manual 571
30.3.3 Counters
Table 291 Counter types
3 Counter Counter reading
The following counter formats are supported
Table 292 Counter format types
Format Description Remarks
0 8 bits, unsigned Counters in 8-bit unsigned format
1 8 bits, signed Counters in 8-bit signed format
6 Float point Counters in floating format
Counters in 32-bit floating format:

7 Float point / 1000
The value is sent divided by 1000
30.3.4 Commands
The Modbus functions implemented in the device for the execution of commands are F05 and F16. Only one type of function can
be used for each device.
The information related to the Modbus functions is in the sections of Implemented functions and RTU types of this manual.
30.3.5 Request of events to Ingeteam Power Technology devices

Currently, the request of events or signal changes it is only implemented for PL300 and TCP-IH. This request may be enabled from
the “Modbus master configurator”.
30.3.6 Synchronization
Currently, the synchronization it is only implemented for PL300 and TCP-IH.

User Manual 572
30.4 IMPLEMENTED FUNCTIONS
The Modbus master functions that may be used for requesting and writing data in the slave devices are the following:
Table 293 Implemented Modbus functions
Function Code Description

01 Read Coils
02 Read Discrete Inputs
03 Read Holding Registers
04 Read Input Registers
05 Write single coil
07 Read exception status
16 Write multiple registers
The Modbus master will use these functions taking into account the type and database of the device configured in the “Modbus master
configurator”
30.5 RTU TYPES
The following table shows the type of devices currently considered in the Modbus master and the Modbus functions used for each
type:
Table 294 Characteristics of RTU types
RTU types Signal changes/Events Data request Command execution Synchronization

F01
1 NO F05 NO
F04
F01
3 NO F16 NO
F03
F02
F03
4 NO F05 NO
F04
F07
F01
F02
5 NO F16 NO
F03
F04
F01
10 YES F16 YES
F03
14 NO F04 NOT IMPLEMENTED NO
❑ RTU type 1: It supports reading digital outputs bit by bit, reading registers and writing digital outputs bit by bit
 F01: Function for reading digital outputs bit by bit
 F04: Function for reading registers
 F05: Function for writing digital outputs bit by bit
❑ RTU type 3: It supports reading digital outputs bit by bit, reading registers and writing multiple registers
 F16: Function for writing multiple registers
❑ RTU type 4: It supports reading digital inputs bit by bit, reading registers and exception states and writing digital outputs bit by bit
 F02: Function for reading digital inputs bit by bit

User Manual 573
 F07: Function for reading exception states

 F05: Function for writing digital outputs bit by bit
❑ RTU type 5: It supports reading outputs and digital inputs bit by bit, reading registers and writing multiple registers
 F02: Function for reading digital inputs bit by bit
 F16: Function for reading multiple registers
❑ RTU type 10: It supports reading digital outputs bit by bit, reading registers and writing multiple registers
 F16: Function for reading multiple registers
The request of events and synchronization is currently only implemented for PL300 and TCP-IH.
 F03: Function for event requests
 F16: Function for synchronizing
❑ RTU type 14: It supports reading registers
30.6 SW CONFIGURATION TOOL
The Modbus master protocol is configured using the “Modbus master configurator” available in the PacFactory configuration SW and
EFS tools. This tool generates a configuration file that is sent to the device.
30.6.1 Fields to be configured

The tool has different tabs that are filled based on what is going to be integrated. Each tab has several fields.
❑ IED
 Modbus address
Address of the slave device (1 - 128). It is the value of the Modbus address of the device to communicate with.
 Internal address
Address of the slave device in the internal database. Its value is between 1 and 32. All the elements that are requested from
the device will be mapped on this address of the master database.
 RTU type
This field can take the following values: 1, 3, 4, 5, 10 and 14. The characteristics of each of these values are given in the RTU
Types section of this manual. It shows the functions used for each type of device.
 Sync RTU
Enables sending synchronization to the slave device. It is only implemented for RTU type 10 (TCP-IH or PL300).

User Manual 574
To enable synchronization, the Sync RTU flag is activated. Once enabled, the following screen appears:
The synchronization address of the device is indicated in the Sync address field.
PL300 = 240 and TCP-IH = 240.
Sync adjust (ftrans) is the time in ms that will be added to the synchronization time to correct possible drifts.
 Events request
It enables the request of signal changes of the slave device. It is only supported for RTU type 10 (PL300 or TCP-IH).
Once enabled, the following screen appears:
In the Event address field, the signal change start address for the given device is indicated. PL300 = 20480 and TCP-IH =
1664.
 Endianness

User Manual 575
It can take two values: Big Endian and Little Endian. Default value: Big endian.
It indicates the way in which the slave equipment sends the data.
Examples:
 Big endian
Description Floating data
Decimal value 212.5
Hexadecimal value 43 54 80 00
Data sent by communications 43 54 80 00
 Little endian
Description Floating data
212.5
Decimal value
❑ Digital signals
 Modbus address
Modbus address of the slave device. It can take values between 1 and 128.
 Modbus signal
Initial memory address of the signal to be read in the slave device database.
 Type
Type of signal to be read. See the “Digital signals” section of this manual.
 No. of registers
It is the number of signals or the number of registers to be read, depending on the type of signal.
Relay status, Device status or Input status: number of signals.
Digital signal (16 signals / WORD) or Digital signal (1 signal / WORD): number of registers.

User Manual 576
 Internal ID
It indicates the first position in the master internal communication database on which these signals will be mapped. The
automatic assignment must be used by clicking on the button highlighted in red in the image, Set internal IDs
❑ Measurements
 Modbus address
 Modbus measurement
First memory address of the measurement to be read in the slave device database.
 Type
Type of measurement to be read. See the “Measurements” section of this manual.
 Format
Format of the measurement to be read. See the “Measurements” section of this manual.
 Swapping
Possible values: No swap, Byte Word swap, Byte swap and Word swap. Default value: No swap.
It indicates the order in which the slave device sends data greater than one byte. Usually used for measurements and / or
32bit counters.
Examples:
 No swap
Description Integer data
Decimal value 70000
This is the most usual option.

User Manual 577
 Byte Word swap
Decimal value 70000
 Byte swap
Decimal value 70000
 Word swap
Decimal value 70000
 No. of elements
It is the number of measurements to be read from the “Modbus measurement” field.
 Scale factor
The measurement value in the internal database is the value read multiplied by the scale factor.
By double-clicking on this field, it appears a screen for the scale factor configuration for this measurement.

User Manual 578
 Internal ID
It indicates the first position in the master internal communication database, where these measurements will be mapped.
The automatic assignment must be used by clicking on the button highlighted in red in the image, Set internal IDs.
❑ Counters
 Modbus address
 Modbus counter
Initial memory address of the counters to be read in the slave device database.
 Format
Format of the counters to be read. See the “Counters” section of this manual.
 Swapping
Possible values: No swap, Byte Word swap, Byte swap and Word swap. Default value: No swap.
It indicates the order in which the slave device sends data greater than one byte. Usually used for measurements and / or
32 bit counters.
Examples:
 No swap

User Manual 579
Decimal value 120000
Hexadecimal value 00 01 D4 C0
Data sent by communications 00 01 D4 C0
This is the most usual option.
 Byte Word swap
Data sent by communications C0 D4 01 00
 Byte swap
Data sent by communications 01 00 C0 D4

User Manual 580
 Word swap
Data sent by communications D4 C0 00 01
 No. of elements
It is the number of counters to be read from the “Modbus counter” field.
 Scale factor
The counter value in the internal database is the value read, multiplied by the scale factor.
By double-clicking on this field, it appears a screen for the scale factor configuration for that counter.
 Internal ID
It indicates the first position in the master internal communication database where these counters will be mapped. The
automatic assignment must be used by clicking on the button highlighted in red in the image, Set internal IDs.

User Manual 581
❑ Commands
 Modbus address
 Command No.
Number of command in the master internal database (0-3071).
 Modbus command
Modbus address for the command to be executed.
 Value
Value to be written on the Modbus command field.
30.6.2 Configuration example

Database of the device to be integrated:
❑ Big endian
❑ Events request: No
❑ Synchronization: No
❑ Signals to be read
 From address 0
 Number of signals: 2
 Type: Digital outputs
❑ Measurements to read
 From address 0
 Number of measurements: 2
 Format: 16-bit unsigned
 Swapping: No swap
 Scale factors
▪ Measurement 0: 0.1
 From address 40
 Format: 16-bit signed
 Scale factors
 From address 66

User Manual 582
 Scale factors
▪ Measurement 0: 1
 From address 500
 Format: 32-bit signed
 Scale factors
 From address 530
 Format: float
 Scale factors
❑ Counters to read
 From address 60
 Number of counters: 4
 Scale factors
▪ Counter 0: 0.001
▪ Counter 1: 0.001
▪ Counter 2: 0.001
▪ Counter 3: 0.001
❑ Commands to execute
 Number of command 0
 Address: 0
 Value: 255
With this configuration, digital output 1 is activated.
 Address: 1
 Value: 255
With this configuration, digital output 2 is activated.
 Address: 0
 Value: 0
With this configuration, digital output 1 is deactivated.
 Address: 1
 Value: 0
With this configuration, digital output 2 is deactivated.
Database configuration:

User Manual 583
❑ IED
❑ Digital signals
❑ Measurements
❑ Counters
❑ Commands

User Manual 584
30.7 SERIAL MESSAGES
The format of the serial communication messages used by the Modbus Master protocol is shown below, with the functions used by the
device as an example.
30.7.1 Format
❑ Master request:
 Remote address - 1 byte
 Function code - 1 byte
 Data - variable number of bytes
 CRC - 2 byte
❑ Slave response:
 Data – variable number of bytes
 CRC - 2 byte
Remote address: Modbus address (Value between 1 and 128). Broadcast messages (address 0) are not allowed.
Function code: If it is > 127 (bit MSB to 1) it means that the remote has not performed the required function and will answer with
an error code.
CRC: LSB is sent first, followed by the MSB.
CRC generator (polynomial): x16 + x15 + x2 +1
30.7.2 Examples
❑ Function code 01 – Read n output bits
❑ Example:
 Remote address: 1
 Request of 12 output bits, from output 3 to 14 (All of these bits are activated)
Table 295 Request
Description Bytes Example (Hex)
Remote address 1 0x01
Function code 1 0x01

0x00
Starting address 2
0x03 Start reading on digital output 3
0x00
Number of digital outputs 2
0x0C Reading of 12 digital outputs
CRC 2 xx xx

User Manual 585
Table 296 Response

0x02
Byte count 1
2 bytes
0x0F
Outputs status 2
0xFF
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ In the request response, the LSB of the Outputs status byte contains the value of the first output (output 3). The rest of the
bytes are sent in lowest to highest order. If the number of bits requested is not a multiple of 8, the byte will be filled with
zeros.
❑ Function code 02 – Read n input bits
❑ Request and response frames are identical to the function 01.
❑ Function code 03 – Read n output words
❑ To read digital signals, measurements and counters.
❑ Example:
 Address: 0400h - Data: 00AAh
 Address: 0401h - Data: 00FFh
Table 297 Request

0x04
Starting address 2
0x00
0x00
Number of registers (words) 2
0x02
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 298 Response

0x04
Byte count 1
2 registers = 4 bytes
0x00
Register value 1 2
0xAA Value in address 0x400
0x00
Register value 2 2
0xFF Value in address 0x401
CRC 2 xx xx

User Manual 586
❑ Function code 04 – Read n input words

❑ For reading digital signals, measurements and counters.
❑ Function code 05 – One-bit writing
❑ For writing a bit to ON or OFF.
❑ Example:
 Writing command number 24 to 1
Table 299 Request

0x00
Command number 2
0x18
0xFF
Output value 2
0x00 Writing to 1
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 300 Response

0x00
Command number 2
0x18
0xFF
Output value 2
0x00 Writing to 1
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ Function code 07 – Read exception status

❑ Quick reading of a byte.
❑ Example:
Table 301 Request
CRC 2 xx xx

User Manual 587
Table 302 Response
Output data 1 0x6D
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ Function code 16 – Write multiple registers

Writing of values on the device.
Example:
Table 303 Request

0x00
Starting address 2
0x80
0x00
0x01
0x02
Byte count 1
1 register = 2 bytes
0x00
Register value 2
0x18 Number of command to execute
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 304 Response

0x00
Starting address 2
0x80
0x00
0x01
CRC 2 xx xx

User Manual 588
MODBUS SLAVE PROTOCOL
31. MODBUS SLAVE PROTOCOL

Available since 6.2.19.0 version of firmware and 8.3.0.5 of CID.
31.1 INTRODUCTION
The device has a Modbus slave protocol which can communicate with a telecontrol station or with any system that works as a master.
The device has two types of communication:
❑ RTU (Remote terminal unit): Asynchronous serial communication, with a start bit, 8 bits of data and configurable parity and stop
bits.
❑ TCP/IP: Uses a TCP/IP network connecting through the registered port 502.
The protocol allows sending digital signals, measurements and counters to the master. It also allows the synchronization of the device
and the execution of commands.
A configuration table, generated with a software tool dedicated to this effect, will indicate the number of information elements that
the equipment has.
The following are detailed:
❑ Protocol configuration settings

❑ Protocol profile
❑ Control processes
❑ Equipment address map
❑ Data format
❑ Configuration software tool
❑ Modbus messages supported (serial and TCP/IP)
The protocol has the following configuration settings:
 No
 Yes
❑ Modbus address: Modbus address of the slave device. Value between 1 and 128.
❑ Port number: It allows to set the communication channel
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
 Ethernet
❑ TCP listen port: It allows to set a number of network port to communicate via TCP/IP. Value between 0 and 65535. Default value
502.
❑ Comm speed(bauds): It allows to set the speed of the serial transmission

User Manual 589
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud
❑ Parity: It allows to select the type of parity to use in the transmission
 None
 Even
 Odd
❑ Number of stop bits:
 1Bit
 2Bit
❑ Communication control: It allows to select the type of communication channel
 RS232_FO
 RS485
❑ RTS activation delay time (ms): Minimum waiting time to activate the RTS and start the transmission. Value between 0 and 5000.
❑ CTS max delay (ms): How much time the device will wait to activate the CTS after the activation of the RTS. Value between 0 and
10000.
❑ Carrier stabilization (ms): Waiting time to start the transmission, once CTS has been detected, in order to stabilize the carrier. Value
between 0 and 5000.
❑ RTS dropoff time (ms): This is the time that the RTS signal keeps activated after the transmission of the last byte. Value between 0
and 5000.
❑ Change wait time (s): Waiting time in queue of the changes configured in the protocol tables before starting their treatment. It only
makes sense if signals from different IEDs are configured for their previous chronological ordering.
❑ Request for changes: It allows to set if the master device makes the request for changes to the slave equipment
 No
 Yes
❑ Data transmission type: It allows to set the order of the data to be transmitted
 Big endian
 Little endian
❑ Permission to synchronize: It allows to set if the master device makes the synchronization of the slave equipment
 No
 Yes
❑ Server IP address: It filters the possible connections available in the slave device configuring an IP. Possible values in the IP address
range. The value 255.255.255.255 allows connecting to any available connection

User Manual 590
Table 305. Modbus slave protocol settings
Data Setting Min. Max. Step Possible values Type

DirEnl Modbus address 1 128 1 int32
COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port number COM4 Enum
COM5
COM6
Ethernet
TcpPort TCP listen port 0 65535 1 int32
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
BaudRate Comm speed (bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
Stopbit Number of stop bits 1Bit / 2 Bit Enum
RS232_FO
ChType Communication control Enum
RS485
ActRtsTmms RTS activation delay time (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
ActCtsTmms CTS max delay (ms) 0 10000 10 int32
CarTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
DesRtsTmms RTS dropoff time (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
EspColTms Change wait time (s) 0 20 1 int32
SolicChgs Request for changes NO/YES Boolean
Big endian
Endianness Data transmission type Enum
Little endian
SynEna Permission to synchronize NO/YES Boolean
IPRTU Server IP address 0 65535 1 IP

User Manual 591
31.3 PROTOCOL PROFILE
31.3.1 Implemented functions in Modbus RTU

The implemented functions for serial communication are shown below:
Function
Description Use
Code
This function code is used to read contiguous status of

01 Read Coils
signals in a remote device
This function code is used to read the contents of a
contiguous block of registers in a remote device

This function code is used to write a single output to either

05 Write Single Coil
ON or OFF in a remote device
Writes a single register in a remote device (it is used to
06 Write Single Register
execute commands)
15 Write Multiple Coils
16 Write Multiple Registers
execute commands)
31.3.2 Implemented functions in Modbus TCP/IP

The implemented functions for TCP/IP communication are shown below:
Function
Description Use
Code

01 Read Coils


05 Write Single Coil
06 Write Single Register
execute commands)
15 Write Multiple Coils
16 Write Multiple Registers
execute commands)

User Manual 592
31.3.3 Exception codes

The protocol has the following exception codes:
Function Description Meaning

Code
The function code received in the query is
01 Illegal function
unknown by the server
The data address received in the query is not an
02 Illegal data address
allowable address for the server
A value contained in the query data field is not

03 Illegal data value
an allowable value for server
The server is processing other task. The client
06 Server device busy should retransmit the message later when the
server is free
31.4 CONTROL PROCESSES
31.4.1 Request for equipment status

Two functions can be used:
❑ Function 03
❑ Reading a register on 0000h address (see "Equipment address map" section of this manual). The device respond is a byte
with the LOCAL/REMOTE STATE of the device.
❑ Function 04
❑ It works the same way as Function F03.
31.4.2 Request for digital signals

The following functions can be used:
❑ Function 01
❑ Reading boolean data.
❑ Function 02
❑ Reading boolean data.
❑ Function 03
❑ Reading registers.
❑ Function 04
❑
Address range:
 Digital signals: 0400h - 0480h
31.4.3 Request for measurements and counters

❑ Function 03

User Manual 593
❑ Function 04
❑
Address range:
 Integer measurements: Address range 0480h - 0580h

 Counters: Address range 0580h - 0680h
 Floating type measurements: Address range 0700h - 0900h
31.4.4 Request for digital signal changes

The master device can get the information of all digital signal changes of the slave device, with the instant of time in which they
have happened. The process to do it is the following:
❑ Reading the address 0680h gets the number of changes to send by the slave device
❑ To obtain the information of the changes, reading the quantity of "number of changes x 5" on address 0682h is needed.
Reading range 0682h - 06FFh.
❑ The maximum quantity of registers that can be read is 125. This is the same as reading 25 changes since the information of
a digital signal change is stored in 5 registers. The number of registers to be read must be multiple of 5.
❑ Signal change structure format:
Number
MSB LSB
of Address
(Most Signifant Byte) (Least Significant Byte)
change (n)
0682h e v E V Bits and Signal number Signal number
0683h Milliseconds Milliseconds
n=1 0684h Hours Minutes
0685h Month Day of the week and day of the month
0686h --- Year
1 < n < 25 … … …
06FBh e v E V Bits and Signal number Signal number
06FCh Milliseconds Milliseconds
n = 25 06FDh Hours Minutes
06FEh Month Day of the week and day of the month
06FFh --- Year
 Signal number: It is stored in the first byte of the information of a digital signal change and in the first four bits of the
next byte.
 V Bit: Validity of the signal after its change (0: valid / 1: invalid)
 E Bit: State of the signal after its change (0 / 1)
 v Bit: It indicates if the signal change is due to a change in the validity V (0 / 1)
 e Bit: It indicates if the signal change is due to a change in the state E (0 / 1)
 Milliseconds: It is stored in the second register of the information of a signal change. Range of values 0 - 59999.
 Minutes: It is stored in the first byte of the third register of the information of a signal change. Range of values 0 - 59.
 Hours: It is stored in the second byte of the third register of the information of a signal change. Range of values 0 - 23.
 Day of the month: It is stored in the first byte of the fourth register of the information of a signal change. Its value is
registered in the first five bits of that byte. Range of values 1 - 31.
 Day of the week: It is stored in the first byte of the fourth register of the information of a signal change. Its value is
registered in the last three bits of that byte. Range of values 1 - 7.
 Month: It is stored in the second byte of the fourth register of the information of a signal change. Range of values 1 -
12.
 Year: It is stored in the fifth register of the information of a signal change. Range of values 0 - 99.

User Manual 594
❑ Writing the value 0 in address 0681h the last signal changes sent are validated. This means that the signal changes of the
device are considered as sent.
❑ If the signal changes are not validated, the device will consider that they have not been sent.
❑ If the device had more signal changes it will indicate it in the address 0680h and the master station could request them
repeating the process
❑ To read all the signal changes of the device, the process must continue until the reading of the address 0680h indicates
value 0
The requests are made with functions F03 and F04 and the writings with function F16.
31.4.5 Requesting data via memory map

The data of the configured addresses can be read in a single request. The addresses can be non-consecutive.
Functioning:
❑ The configured addresses must be written using function F16. Range of the writing area 0180h - 01FCh
❑ The data of the configured addresses must be read using function F03 or F04. Range of the reading area 0100h - 017Ch
❑ Up to 124 registers can be read and written
❑ The configured addresses must be in the range 0400h - 0680h and 0700h - 0900h
❑ To read the data of the configured addresses, the following must be taken into account:
 The position in the reading area from which to request the data, must be the same as the position in the writing area
where the configured addresses have been written
 Example:
 For a writing in address 0185h the reading has to be in address 0105h.
 Writing
 Writing address: 0185h
 Position in the writing area: 0185h - 0180h(initial address) = 0005h
 Reading
 The reading address must be: 0105h
 Position in the reading area: 0105h - 0100h(initial address) = 0005h
 The number of registers to be requested must be equal to the number of registers that add up the data of the
configured addresses
 Example:
 For a writing in address 0185h of the address 0400h, 0486h and 0581h the number of registers to be requested must
be 4.
 It must be ask for a register for the signals, another for the measurements of integer type and two registers for the
counters.
 Writing
 Writing address: 0185h
 Addresses configured:
▪ 0400h: First word of digital signals
▪ 0486h: Seventh measurement of integer type
▪ 0581h: Second counter
 Reading
 Reading address: 0105h
 The number of registers to request must be 4:
▪ 0400h: Occupies a register (G9)
▪ 0486h: Occupies a register (G10)
▪ 0581h: Occupies two registers (G11)
 See section "Equipment address map" and "Data format" for G9, G10 and G11.

User Manual 595
31.4.6 Synchronization
To synchronize the device it must be written with the function F16 the following information in the address 00F0h:
MSB LSB
Address
(Most Signifant Byte) (Least Significant Byte)
00F0h Milliseconds Milliseconds
00F1h Hours Minutes
00F2h Month Day
00F3h - Year
 To synchronize the device the four words must always be written. The partial writing of some data is not allowed, it is
always necessary to write the whole structure
 It is possible to read the address 00F0h to get the current time of the equipment. Any register can be read as long as
the range does not exceed the address 00F3h. For reading, functions F03 or F04 must be used
31.4.7 Command execution

❑ Function F05
❑ It allows the execution of commands to OFF and ON in the slave device database.
 For an OFF command it must be sent the number of command to execute and the operation value field to 0x0000.
 For an ON command it must be sent the number of command to execute and the operation value field to 0xFF00.
❑ Function F06
❑ It allows the execution of commands to ON in the slave device database.
 It must be written the number of command to execute in the address 0080h.
❑ Function F15
❑ It allows the execution of commands to OFF and ON in the slave device database.
 For an OFF command it must be sent the number of command to execute, the number of coils to be forced to one and
the operation value field to 0.
 For an ON command it must be sent the number of command to execute, the number of coils to be forced to one and
the operation value field to 1.
 It is only allowed the writing of one coil.
❑ Function F16
❑ It allows the execution of commands to ON in the slave device database.
 It must be written the number of command to execute in the address 0080h.
 It is only allowed the writing of one register.
Range of number of command to execute: 0 - 511

User Manual 596
31.5 EQUIPMENT ADDRESS MAP
Distribution of the equipment address map:
Register Memory
Description Length (words)
address(hex) zone
Identification of the equipment
0000 Device status 1 G1
Command address (*)
0080 Number of command to be executed 1 G2
System date
00F0 Milliseconds 1 G3
00F1 Hours and minutes 1 G4
00F2 Month and day 1 G5
00F3 Year 1 G6
User map
0100 User map values 124 G7
0180 User map addresses 124 G8
Reading zone
0400 Digital signal states 128 G9
0480 Measurements 256 G10
0580 Counters 256 G11
Digital signal changes zone
0680 Number of changes to be sent 1 G12
0681 Validation of sent changes (*) 1 G13
0682 Digital signal changes reading zone 125 G14
Reading zone
0700 Measurement 512 G15
Free memory zone
0900 Free
0HF Free
(*) Only for writing
The values of the Memory zone column are explained in the "Data format" section.

User Manual 597
31.6 DATA FORMAT
Data format depending on the memory zone (see section "Equipment address map"):
Memory
Format Description
zone
READING AREA OF THE DEVICE MODE
In the bit 0 LOCAL/REMOTE STATE of the device is indicated
G1 16 bits Value 0: REMOTE STATE
Value 1: LOCAL
Size of the area: A register (word)
WRITING AREA OF THE NUMBER OF COMMAND TO BE EXECUTED IN THE SLAVE DEVICE
DATABASE
G2 16 bits
Range of values: 0 - 511
MILLISECONDS READING AREA
G3 Unsigned 16 bits Range of values: 0 - 59999
READING AREA OF MINUTES AND HOURS
- Minutes: 0 to 7 bits
G4 16 bits
- Hours: 8 to 15 bits
READING AREA OF THE DAY OF THE WEEK AND MONTH
- Day: 0 to 7 bits
G5
16 bits - Month: 8 to 15 bits
READING AREA OF THE YEAR
- Year: 0 to 7 bits
G6 16 bits Range of values: 0 - 99
- It is not used: 8 to 15 bits
READING AREA OF THE VALUES OF THE CONFIGURED DATA ADDRESSES
- The unsigned 16 bits format is used for reading signals
16 bits - The signed 16 bits format is used for reading integer measurements
G7
Unsigned 32 bits - The unsigned 32 bits format is used for reading counters
Float - The Float format is used for reading floating type measurements
Size of the area: 124 registers (words)
WRITING AREA OF THE CONFIGURED ADDRESSES
G8 16 bits Range of values: 0400h - 0680h and 0700h - 0900h
READING AREA OF SIGNALS
G9 16 bits Compacted bits. A bit to 0 value means signal deactivated and to value 1 activated
READING AREA OF INTEGER MEASUREMENTS
G10 Signed 16 bits
READING AREA OF COUNTERS
G11 Unsigned 32 bits
READING AREA OF SIGNAL CHANGES TO BE SENT
G12 16 bits
WRITING AREA OF VALUE 0 TO VALIDATE THE SIGNAL CHANGES THAT HAS BEEN SENT
G13 16 bits
SIGNAL CHANGES INFORMATION AREA
G14
Unsigned 16 bits For more information go to the section "Request for digital signal changes"
Size of the area: 125 registers (word)
READING AREA OF FLOATING TYPE MEASUREMENTS
G15 Float

User Manual 598
31.7 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE TOOL
The Modbus slave protocol is configured with the "Modbus Slave Configurator" available in the PacFactory configuration SW and the
EFS tools. This tool generates a configuration file that is sent to the device.
31.7.1 Fields to be configured

❑ Digital signals
 Modbus address
The number of the signal in the Modbus slave database. Range of values 0 - 2047.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device from which read the signals. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the address of the
device itself.
 Internal ID
The number of the signal in the slave device database. It must be selected by clicking on button and choosing the signal
to be read. This signal will be mapped to the position indicated by Modbus address.
 Description
It doesn´t need to be configured. The own tool does it.
 IEC-61850 ref
 Inverted
 It allows to invert the value of the signal.
❑ Measurements
 Modbus address
The number of the measurement in the Modbus slave database. Range of values 0 - 255.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device from which read the measurements. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the address of
the device itself.
 Internal ID
The number of the measurement in the slave device database. It must be selected by clicking on button and choosing
the measurement to be read. This measurement will be mapped to the position indicated by Modbus address.

User Manual 599
 Description
 It doesn´t need to be configured. The own tool does it.
 IEC-61850 ref
 It doesn´t need to be configured. The own tool does it.
❑ Counters
 Modbus address
The number of the counter in the Modbus slave database. Range of values 0 - 127.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device from which read the counters. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the address of the
device itself.
 Internal ID
The number of the counter in the slave device database. It must be selected by clicking on button and choosing the
counter to be read. This counter will be mapped to the position indicated by Modbus address.
 Description
 IEC-61850 ref
❑ Commands
❑ There are two options for the execution of commands depending on the function that is used (go to the section
"Command execution" for more detail): Commands to ON and to OFF/ON.
❑ The default configuration allows executing ON commands only.
❑ COMMANDS TO ON:
 Command
Number of the command in the Modbus slave database. Range of values: 0 - 511.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device in which execute the commands. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the address of the
device itself.
 Internal ID

User Manual 600
The number of the command in the slave device database. It must be selected by clicking on button and choosing the
command to execute. The execution of this command is a consequence of the activation of the command number that
appears in the field Command.
 Description
 IEC-61850 ref
 ON/OFF
 Origin
It is the origin from where the commands are executed.
 COMMANDS TO ON AND OFF:

To execute commands to OFF the option in the "Modbus Slave Configurator" must to be enabled.
To do this, go to the "View" menu, click on "Options…" and the following image appears:
Enabling "Show OFF command" option in Modbus Slave and clicking on OK the following image where commands to ON
and OFF are configured is shown:

User Manual 601
 Command
Number of the command in the Modbus slave database. Range of values: 0 - 511.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device in which execute the commands. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the address of the
device itself.
 Internal ID(ON)
command to execute. The execution of this command is a consequence of the activation of the command number that
appears in field Command.
 Description (ON)
 IEC-61850 ref (ON)

 ON/OFF (ON)
 Internal ID(OFF)
command to execute. The execution of this command is a consequence of the deactivation of the command number that
appears in field Command.
 Description (OFF)
 IEC-61850 ref (OFF)

 ON/OFF (OFF)
 Origin
It is the origin from where the commands are executed.
31.7.2 Configuration example

Below is an example of a Modbus slave database. This database contains elements which the master device can read or in which
can write.
Elements of the Modbus slave database:
❑ 10 digital signals
❑ 5 measurements
❑ 5 counters
❑ 4 commands

User Manual 602
Database configuration:
❑ Digital signals
 This configuration allows the access to:

 The state of eight digital inputs of the input/output board 1 of the device, which value is stored in the first eight
positions of the Modbus slave signal database.
 The state of two digital inputs of the input/output board 2 of the device, storing the state of the first input in the
position 15 of the Modbus slave signal database and the state of the second input in the position 31.
❑ Measurements
❑ This configuration allows the access to:

 Five logical measurements of the device, whose value is stored in the positions 0,3,7,8 and 9 of the Modbus slave
measurements database.
❑ Counters
❑ This configuration allows the access to:

User Manual 603
 Five logical counters of the device, whose value is stored in the positions 0, 5, 10, 15 and 20 of the Modbus slave
counters database.
❑ Commands
❑ This configuration allows:

 Activate the digital output 1 of the input/output board 1 of the device, activating the command number 0 of the
Modbus slave database.
 Activate the digital output 2 of the input/output board 2 of the device, deactivating the command 10 of the Modbus
slave database.
31.8 SERIAL MESSAGES
The format of the serial communication messages used by the Modbus slave protocol is shown below, with the functions used by the
device as an example.
31.8.1 Format
❑ Master request:
 CRC - 2 byte
❑ Slave response:
 CRC - 2 byte

Remote address: Modbus address (Value between 1 and 128). Broadcast messages (address 0) are not allowed.
Function code: If it is > 127 (bit MSB to 1) it means that the remote device has not performed the required function and will answer
with an error code.
CRC: LSB is sent first, followed by the MSB.

User Manual 604
31.8.2 Examples
❑ Function code 01 – Read coils
❑ For reading boolean data.
❑ Example:
 Request of 12 output bits, from output 3 to 14 (All of these bits are activated)
Table 306. Request

Address of the first digital 0x00
2
output 0x03
0x00
Number of digital outputs 2
0x0C
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 3. Response

Number of bytes to store
the state of the digital 1 0x02
outputs
0xFF (LSB)
Digital outputs value 2
0x0F (MSB)
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ In the request response, the LSB of the Digital outputs value contains the value of the first output (output 3). The rest of
the bytes are sent in lowest to highest order. If the number of bits requested is not a multiple of 8, the byte will be filled
with zeros.
❑ Function code 02 – Read discrete inputs
❑ For reading boolean data.
❑ Function code 03 – Read holding registers
❑ Example:
 Address: 0400h - Data: 00AAh
 Address: 0401h - Data: 00FFh

User Manual 605
Table 4. Request

0x04
Starting address 2
0x00
0x00
0x02
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 5. Response
Byte count 1 0x04
0x00
Register value 1 2
0xAA
0x00
Register value 2 2
0xFF
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ Function code 04 – Read input registers

❑ Function code 05 – Write single coil
❑ For writing a bit to ON or OFF.
❑ Example:

User Manual 606
Table 6. Request

0x00
Command number 2
0x18
0xFF
Writing to 1 2
0x00
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 7. Response

0x00
Command number 2
0x18
0xFF
Writing to 1 2
0x00
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ Function code 06 – Write single register

For writing a single register.
Example:
Table 8. Request

0x00
Register address 2
0x80
0x00
Number of command to execute 2
0x18
CRC 2 xx xx

User Manual 607
Table 9. Response

0x00
Register address 2
0x80
0x00
0x18
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ Function code 15 – Write multiple coils

For writing a bit to ON or OFF.
Example:
Table 10. Response
Function code 1 0x0F

0x00
Number of command 2
0x18
Number of bits to 0x00
2
be forced 0x01
Byte count 1 0x01
Command value 1 0x01
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 11. Request
Function code 1 0x0F

0x00
Number of command 2
0x18
0x00
Number of forced bits 2
0x01
CRC 2 xx xx
❑ Function code 16 – Write multiple registers

For writing a single register.
Example:

User Manual 608
Table 12. Request

0x00
Register address 2
0x80
Number of registers to be 0x00
2
written (words) 0x01
Byte count 1 0x02
0x00
0x18
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 13. Response

0x00
Starting address 2
0x80
Number of written registers 0x00
2
(words) 0x01
CRC 2 xx xx
31.9 TCP/IP MESSAGES
31.9.1 Format
The message contains the following elements:
❑ Header
❑ It contains the following fields:
Length
Fields Description Client Server
(bytes)
Identification of a Modbus Recopied by the
Transaction Initialized by the
2 request/response server from the
identifier client
transaction received request
Recopied by the
Protocol It takes value 0 for Initialized by the
2 server from the
identifier Modbus protocol client
received request
Number of following Initialized by the Initialized by the

Length 2
bytes client (request) server (response)
Recopied by the
Identification of the Initialized by the
Unit identifier 1 server from the
connected slave device client
received request

User Manual 609
❑ This fields are transmitted by communications as Big Endian.

❑ Function code
❑ Function code of the request/response. Size: 1 byte. If it is > 127 (bit MSB to 1) it means that the remote has not
performed the required function and will answer with an error code.
❑ Data
TCP/IP complete message:
Transaction Protocol
Length Unit identifier Function code Data
identifier identifier
(2 bytes) (1 byte) (1 byte) (n bytes)
(2 bytes) (2 bytes)
All the messages are sent via TCP to registered port 502.
❑ Master request:
 Transaction Id. - Unique per transaction or 0x00
 Protocol Id. - Always 0
 Length - Number of bytes of Unity Id. + Function code + Data
 Unity Id. - Possible values: 0x00,0xFF or remote device number
 Function code
 Data - Number of variable bytes
❑ Slave response:
 Transaction Id. - Copy of the value received from the master device
 Protocol Id. - Copy of the value received from the master device
 Length - Number of bytes of Unity Id. + Function code + Data
 Unity Id. - Copy of the value received from the master device
 Function code
 Data - Number of variable bytes
31.9.2 Examples
The types of message are the same as the serial ones. The address map of the device and the way to treat it is the same as explained
before, only changes the structure of the message to send/receive.

User Manual 610
CYBERSECURITY FUNCTIONS 
32. CYBERSECURITY FUNCTIONS

The evolution of power grid control systems is growing sustained on open standards and technologies. This enables big benefits from
an operational perspective but increases issues related to security. Providing cyber security mechanisms to devices is therefore
fundamental.
Intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) must provide functions and features to accommodate critical infrastructure protection programs.
Security regarding the access, operation, configuration, firmware revision and data retrieval from an IED must be addressed.
Ingeteam handle these cyber security challenges adapting their IEDs with latest standard related features.
Cyber security features have been implemented taken into account the main international standards, specifically:
❑ IEC 62351 (Data and Communications Security) (*)

❑ IEEE 1686-2013 (IEEE Standard for Intelligent Electronic Devices Cyber Security Capabilities)
❑ IEC 62443 (Security for industrial automation and control systems)
(*) Standard still in development
32.1 ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL
All electronic access to the IED are protected by unique user identification (ID) and password combinations.
Authentication-bypass methods, often referred to as backdoors, are not permitted and there is no means whereby the user-created
ID/password control can be defeated or circumvented. Anonymous logins are not permitted.
32.1.1 ACCOUNTS MANAGEMENT

The following methods are used to protect authenticators:
❑ Authenticators are stored using recognized techniques of hashing and encryption.

❑ By default secure protocols exchange and transmit authenticators:
❑ SFTP (instead FTP).
❑ HTTPS (instead HTTP).
❑ LDAPS (instead LDAP).
❑ Passwords are not stored in clear text and not hardcoded.
❑ Passwords are not included in log files.
The device provides a configurable account password management system for local accounts with the following security settings:
❑ PASSWD_MIN_LEN: Minimum password length: Between 8 and 16 characters.

❑ PASSWD_MIN_CLASS: Minimum password complexity: Between 3 and 4 different types of characters.
❑ Uppercase.
❑ Lowercase.
❑ Numbers.
❑ Non-alphanumeric characters (e.g., @, %, &, *).
❑ PASSWD_FORBIDEN_STRINGS: Validate the password against a dictionary of forbiden words.

User Manual 611
The device also provides some not configurable measures:
❑ No spaces allowed.
❑ Derivative use of the user name: It is not allowed to set a password derived from the user name.
❑ Denial of repeated of the actual password (or derived): Only when a user is updating its own password (security
administrator can set the same password for any user).
Only user IDs are displayed in screens, audit trails, or any other files. Passwords are never displayed through any means, including
local display panel, configuration software or web browser.
Other important features related with accounts management are:
❑ The device supports the management of user identifiers (UID) directly. It shall be configured while creating new
users as an optional field.
❑ All the accounts related with services are not allowed to log-in. There are no access credentials for system
accounts.
❑ All well-known and manufacturer accounts can be disabled.
❑ It is possible to configure multiple administrative (privileged access) accounts.
❑ The devices does not retain login information between sessions or provision of any auto-fill functionality during
login.
The website allows to manage the local user accounts in the tab “Cybersecurity → RBAC”.
NOTE: For security reasons these actions are limited only to users that are assigned to a role with ‘RBAC management’ function.
32.1.2 DEFAULT LOCAL USERS AND PASSWORDS

The following table shows the default local user of the device.
Table 307 Default local users
Local user Default password Assigned role
sftpuser sftpuser ENGINEER

sftppac sftppac INSTALLER
sftpUpdat sftpUpdat UPDATER
secAdmin C.Sec_Adm1 SECADM
Passwords are settable for all predefined users.
ATTENTION: When the device is installed it is strongly recommended to change all the default passwords and to use unique
passwords for each user.
The IED have some master embedded users/passwords for exclusive use of Ingeteam staff that might be necessary in the case of
technical support. In the factory configuration these users are disabled and the user can enable/disable them with the security
administrator role. Once the technical support has been carried out, these users must be disabled again. Once these users are
disabled, the only way to access the device will be through the IDs and passwords created or modified by the user.
Some FTP legacy users also exist in the system, blocked by default. It is strongly recommended to keep them disabled, but if
necessary for compatibility reasons, they can be activated to allow the access.

User Manual 612
Table 308 Default legacy FTP users
Legacy user Default password Assigned role
ftpuser Ftpuser ENGINEER

ftppac Ftppac INSTALLER
ftpUpdat ftpUpdat UPDATER
Only these legacy users can access the system using insecure protocol FTP (FTP is also disabled by default). All other existing or new
local users are forzed to use SFTP protocol.
32.1.3 ROLE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL (RBAC)

Access control mechanism is performed applying a RBAC model. The RBAC supports the ability to assign authorization to utilize one
or more IED functions and features based on individual user-created ID/password combinations. Each role is defined to allow the
user the access to a specific combination of functions.
Each user must be assigned a role, which defines the functions that user has access to upon log in.
These are the default RBAC roles configuration of the device:
Table 309 Role identifier per predefined role
Role name Role id (IEC 62351 compliant)
VIEWER 0
OPERATOR 1
ENGINEER 2
INSTALLER 3
SECADM 4
SECAUD 5
RBACMGMT 6
UPDATER -17
ADMIN -16
The IED have a predefined set of profiles. Individual users can be assigned to one predefined role and the application assigns the
combination of permissions to the user.
The next table shows the predefined roles and the different rights of each role.

User Manual 613
Table 310 Rights per predefined role
RBACMGMT
OPERATOR
INSTALLER
ENGINEER
Right Right description
UPDATER
SECADM
SECAUD
VIEWER
ADMIN
Discover data model Viewing of the IED data model      
View data Viewing data on the IED       
Control Sending commands to the IED     
Protection settings Changing protection functions related settings    
View configuration Downloading configuration of the IED      
Change configuration Uploading configuration of the IED    
Change firmware Uploading a new firmware to the IED    
RBAC management Changing role-to-permission assignment   
Security management Configuring security functions  
Security audit rights Configuring audit trail  
Audit trail Viewing audit trail data     
The device defines and implements the following security functions:
❑ View data:
❑ Access to operational data reports.
❑ Access to faults and oscillography.
❑ Access to client LOGs not related with security.
❑ View configuration settings:

❑ Access to CID configuration file. This file includes all other configurations (display, logics, protocols) not
related with security.
❑ Access to the ICT report with versions of the device.
❑ Force values:
❑ Generate control operations.
❑ Configuration change:
❑ Upload configuration files not related with security. Includes display, logics, protocols, settings, …
❑ Firmware change:
❑ Upload new firmware to the device.
❑ RBAC management:
❑ Create, delete or modify users and roles configuration.
❑ Security management:
❑ Modify/change settings referred to the security of the device:
❑ LDAP configuration.
❑ Access configuration.
❑ Password configuration.
❑ Session configuration.
❑ Display configuration
❑ Whitelist configuration.
❑ Firmware update configuration.

User Manual 614
❑ HTTPs configuration.
❑ USB configuration.
❑ Login message configuration.
❑ Upload 3rd party public certificates.
❑ Upload SNTP symmetric keys file.
❑ Audit trail:
❑ Access to the audit security log.
❑ Security audit rights:

❑ Modify/change settings referred to the audit security log.
32.1.4 INVALID ACCESS ATTEMPS

The IED allows a configurable number of consecutive invalid access attempts by any user (human, software process or device).
After that number of invalid access attempts the IED denies access for a specified period of time or until unlocked by an
administrator or privileged user, prior to the expiration of the timeout period.
The limit of consecutive invalid access attempts, the access timeout period and delay time after wrong access is configured by the
following security settings:
❑ ACCESS_N_FAIL_DENY: Between 3 and 20. The number of consecutive failed attempts before blocking the user.
❑ ACCESS_T_FAIL_UNLOCK: Between 1 and 86400 seconds. The time the user is blocked to wait until the device
accepts a new access attempt.
❑ ACCESS_T_FAIL_DELAY: Between 0 and 60000 ms. Fixed delay time introduced during access when login is
unsuccessful.
If a new attempt is made before the timeout expires, the timeout starts again at that moment. This access restriction applies in an
overall way to all the device access interfaces.
The unlock of an account by a security administrator can be manually done with the ‘activate user’ security action.
32.1.5 SESSION MANAGEMENT

The device has a session management functionality.
On one side, any session is automatically closed after a period of inactivity. Inactivity is defined as the absence of keystrokes on the
local display of the equipment or the absence of data requests in communications. There are different settings for local sessions
and for LDAP sessions.
On the other side a session access control to limit the access concurrency. To allow a complete degree of security configuration, the
device defines the concurrency of basic and advanced features access settings separately. Basic access is associated with the ‘View
data’, ‘View configuration settings’ and ‘Force values’ security functions, while advanced access includes the rest of the security
functions.
These session restrictions applied by the IED are configured by the following security settings:
❑ SESSION_T_ACTAUTH: Between 1 and 60 minutes. The session timeout inactivity period for local access.
❑ LDAP_T_ACTAUTH: Between 1 and 60 minutes. The session timeout inactivity period for LDAP access.
❑ SESSION_CONTROL: ON / OFF. Enables the session access control.
❑ SESSION_N_CONCURRENT: Between 0 and 5. The number of concurrent basic user sessions allowed per device
access interface. The 0 value indicates that there is no restriction.

User Manual 615
❑ SESSION_N_AV_CONCURRENT: Between 0 and 5. The number of concurrent advanced user sessions allowed per
device access interface. The 0 value indicates that there is no restriction.
❑ SESSION_SAMEUSER_CHECK: ON / OFF. A user account cannot be used to access the device if the user is already
logged in. It is checked per device access interface.
Sessions can be terminated manually by a security administrator with the ‘block user’ security action. After this, local users become
blocked and it may be necessary to send an ‘activate user’ command to allow the user access again. In the case of LDAP users, the
session will be closed with no other consequences.
Local sessions are also terminated if the user account password is changed or it is deleted from the system. LDAP sessions are also
terminated when the LDAP access is disabled.
The máximum number of sessions is configurable on the device and filtered by interface. The upper global limit is:
❑ 10 sessions for SFTP access.

❑ 10 sessions for web access.
❑ 1 session for display access.
32.1.6 ACCESS NOTIFICATION MESSAGE

With the following security settings the device can be configured to display a notification message or banner when it provides
human user access before granting access.
This message can be configured by the user, for example to show the owner of the system or to warn that unauthorized use of the
system is prohibited.
❑ BANNER_ENA: ON / OFF. To enable or disable the banner.

❑ BANNER_MSG: The text to be shown in the banner. Up to 250 characters.
32.1.7 LDAP
The IED can manage all user accounts directly or can be integrated into a system that manages accounts according to a directory
server with LDAP protocol (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol).
The following security settings configure the LDAP behaviour:
❑ LDAP_ACT: The device can be configured to support:

❑ Only local authentication
❑ Mixed: Directory server (LDAP) authentication is used and in case of directory server (LDAP) unavailability
local authentication is used
❑ LDAP_HOST1: The LDAP server IP address.
❑ LDAP_PORT: The LDAP server IP port. LDAPs default port is 636.
❑ LDAP_N_RETRYAUTH: Between 0 and 9. The number of connection retries to the LDAP server.
❑ LDAP_T_RETRYAUTH: Between 1 and 600. The time in seconds between consecutive retries.
❑ LDAP_FILTER_OBJECTCLASS: The object class the user belongs to in LDAP database. Up to 64 characters.
❑ LDAP_FILTER_RBACATT: The field name that defines the roles within LDAP server. Up to 64 characters.
❑ LDAP_SSL_MODE: ON / OFF / START_TLS. To enable TLS communications in LDAP access.
❑ LDAP_RBAC_ROLE_FORMAT: TEXT / NUMBER. The format in which the associated role is specified in the LDAP
database.
❑ LDAP_SEARCHBASE: The search start point definition in LDAP database. Up to 64 characters.

User Manual 616
❑ LDAP_TLS_CACERT: Certificate for LDAP connections over TLS.
LDAPs (Secure LDAP) is available and used by default. In this case the LDAP server certificate is required to use the LDAPs secure
protocol.
32.2 AUDIT TRAIL AND LOGGING
The device registers events in two locally stored log files, these files are:
❑ Security.log: Security audit logs for user accesses (log in, log out, …), changes of firmware, configuration, settings and
credentials, security related events. Additionally, a factory configuration is available with the SW and HW error signals.
This file has log audit facility and it is only accessible with security audit role.
❑ SOE.log: Sequence of events (SoE) related to the system and functional logs of the IED.
Log files format has been implemented according to IEC 62351-14 standard with facility and severity level information.
Log files cannot be disabled even by security administrators and there is no mechanism for the user to erase or modify the audit trail as
it shall keep full integrity for audit purposes.
To protect the unauthorized access to the audit information the following methods are implemented:
❑ RBAC security model: There is an exclusive permission to grant access the audit information.
❑ There is no option implemeted on the device to modify or delete the audit information. The audit log is defined as read
only file.
❑ Attemps of unauthorized access to the system are logged.
The audit log and sequence of events (SoE) can only store the last 1024 events. The maximum size of both files is 512 kb.
IED periodically monitors these files. When they reach their maximum size a compressed file is generated, and the last 1024 events are
kept. This compressed files mechanism allows a large number of events to be stored.
The device allows security events to be automatically sent to a remote server using the Rsyslog log collection protocol for a centralized
audit management system.
Users with security audit permission can configure certain log options from the web. They can add, edit and delete remote servers.

User Manual 617
❑ Logs configuration options:

❑ SOE Enable: enable or disable SOE log generation
❑ TypeEvSOE: type of events SOE, change only status or change both status and quality.
❑ Time Format: audit logs and SOE time format, UTC or local.
❑ Quality Format: audit logs quality format. Options:
 Basic: Only Good, Invalid or Questionable. Ex.: "Link Ethernet 1|ON|Good
 E3: E3_IEC61850_Specification_Document_20100609.pdf document format. Ex.: "Link Ethernet 1|ON|Good ()"
 Avanced: same as option E3 but with texts instead of letters. Ex.: "Link Ethernet 1 | ON | Good ()"
❑ Source: audit logs source field
If value is '%IP_ETH1%', the SOURCE field is assigned the first IP address of the ETH1 (and the same for the rest of
the ETH0 and ETH2 interfaces). NOTE: if the configured interface of the 3 possible does not exist, the value '0.0.0.0'
would be assigned in the log.
NOTE: Quality Format and source settings are available since firmware version 9.1.26.0.
❑ Remote server configuration:
❑ Name: name of the remote server

❑ IP address: ip address of the remote server
❑ Port: port used for connection
❑ Input mode: options:
 UDP
 TCP
❑ Configurated TLS: Message encryption can be enabled or disabled using the TLS protocol. TLS configuration:
❑ Auth Mode: options:
 Anon
 X509/name
 X509/certvalid
❑ CA File: certified file of the Certifying Authority used.
❑ Log file: local files that can be sent to the remote server. Options:
 Security
 SOE

User Manual 618
 Both security and SOE

❑ Keep alive enabled: values possible OFF and ON. Default value: OFF.
❑ Keep alive retries number: Between 1 and 15. Default value: 3.
❑ Keep alive interval between retransmissions (seconds): Between 1 and 3600. Default value: 2
❑ Keep alive period (seconds): Between 1 and 3600. Default value: 30.
NOTE: Keep alive settings, Number of Keepalive retries, Keep alive interval between retries and Keep alive period are
available from firmware version 9.1.26.0.

User Manual 619
List of events that are registered in the security log:
Table 311 IEC 62351-14 GENERIC Events
ID Description Facility Severity Level
IEC-62351-14:1 Log-in successful Log audit notice

IEC-62351-14:3 Log-in failed – Wrong credentials Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:8 Log-out (user logged out) Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:9 Log-out by user inactivity (timeout) Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:10 Viewed Security Event logs successfully Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:14 Software update was successful Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:15 Software update failed Log audit alarm
IEC-62351-14:17 Reset to factory default Log audit alarm
IEC-62351-14:18 User account created successfully Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:19 User account enabled successfully Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:20 User account disabled successfully Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:21 User account deleted successfully Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:22 User account creation failed Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:23 User account enabling failed Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:24 User account disabling failed Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:25 User account deletion failed Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:29 User role assignment removed successfully Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:31 New role created successfully Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:32 Role deleted successfully Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:33 User password changed successfully Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:34 Change of user password failed Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:35 New user role assignment failed Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:38 User Password change failed – too short Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:39 User Password change failed – policy check failed Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:44 New role creation failed Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:45 Role deletion failed Log audit notice
IEC-62351-14:61 Malicious or corrupted code detecte Log audit alarm
Table 312 IEC 60870-5 specific Events
ID Descripción Prioridad Nivel de Severidad
IEC-60870-5:1 Connection established Log audit notice
Table 313 IEC 60870-6 Events
IEC-62351-6:6 Received GOOSE message replay detected Log audit alarm
Table 314 IEC 60870-8 Events
IEC-62351-8:3 LDAP repository not accessible Log audit warning

User Manual 620
Table 315 Ingeteam manufacturer specific Events
Nivel de
ID Descripción Prioridad
Severidad
24262:40003 Value forced Log audit notice
24262:40004 Control operation performed successfully Log audit notice
24262:40005 Control operation perform failed Log audit notice
24262:40006 Parameter changed successfully Log audit notice
24262:40007 Parameter change failed – no rights Log audit alarm
24262:40008 Parameter change failed – out of range Log audit notice
24262:40009 Configuration downloaded successfully Log audit notice
24262:40010 Configuration uploaded successfully Log audit notice
24262:40011 Configuration upload failed – no rights Log audit alarm
24262:40012 Configuration upload failed – invalid configuration Log audit alarm
24262:40013 Firmware downloaded successfully Log audit notice
24262:40014 Firmware upload failed – no rights Log audit alarm
24262:40015 Manual reset Log audit alarm
24262:40016 IED startup Log audit alarm
24262:40017 Hardware change detected Log audit alarm
24262:40018 Hardware change detected – invalid hardware Log audit alarm
24262:40019 Date and time set successfully Log audit notice
24262:40020 Time signal out of tolerance Log audit alarm
24262:40021 User account modified successfully Log audit notice
24262:40022 User account modification failed Log audit notice
24262:40023 Flooding detected Log audit alarm
24262:40024 Unauthorized configuration software access detected Log audit alarm
24262:40025 File Integrity Check Log audit alarm
24262:40026 RAM% usage limit has been exceeded Log audit alarm
24262:40027 CPU% usage limit has been exceeded Log audit alarm
24262:40028 FILE SYSTEM% usage limit has been exceeded Log audit alarm
24262:40029 CONFIG FLASH% usage limit has been exceeded Log audit alarm
24262:40030 DATA FLASH% usage limit has been exceeded Log audit alarm
24262:40031 RAM% usage limit has been rolled back Log audit notice
24262:40032 CPU% usage limit has been rolled back Log audit notice
24262:40033 FILE SYSTEM% usage limit has been rolled back Log audit notice
24262:40034 CONFIG FLASH% usage limit has been rolled back Log audit notice
24262:40035 DATA FLASH% usage limit has been rolled back Log audit notice
24262:40036 Automatic reset Log audit notice
24262:40037 Log-in failed N times Log audit notice
24262:40038 Unauthorized access – no rights Log audit notice
24262:40039 File received successfully Log audit notice
24262:40040 File downloaded successfully Log audit notice
24262:40041 Upgrade firmware Log audit notice
24262:40042 Downgrade firmware Log audit notice
24262:40043 Update version FW < current version FW and downgrade is disabled in general cibersecurity settings Log audit alarm
24262:40044 Log-out forced Log audit notice
24262:40045 Generic firmware signing error Log audit alarm
24262:40046 Invalid cms/pkcs#7 format of upgrade package Log audit alarm
24262:40047 Missing mandatory attribute in cms/pkcs#7 upgrade package Log audit alarm
24262:40048 Unknown attribute in cms/pkcs#7 upgrade package Log audit alarm
24262:40049 Repeated attribute in cms/pkcs#7 upgrade package Log audit alarm
24262:40050 Cms/pkcs#7 upgrade package verify error Log audit alarm
24262:40051 Upgrade package not signed cms/pkcs#7 Log audit alarm
24262:40052 An unknown manifest version in cms/pkcs#7 upgrade package Log audit alarm
24262:40053 An unknown manifest type in cms/pkcs#7 upgrade package Log audit alarm
24262:40054 Manufacturer verification error Log audit alarm
24262:40055 Owner verification error Log audit alarm
24262:40056 Basic Firmware Information; void version string Log audit alarm
Basic Firmware Information; the HW model of the device is not included in the list of supported HW
24262:40057 Log audit alarm
models
24262:40058 Basic Operational Information; dates (validFrom or validUntil) error Log audit alarm
24262:40059 Op. manifest; upgrade package has an older FW version but rollback is not authorized Log audit alarm

User Manual 621
24262:40060 Op. manifest; current firmware version is not contained in authorized list Log audit alarm
24262:40061 Op. manifest; the HW model of the device is not included in the list of authorized HW models Log audit alarm
Commit logic; device operation in wrong mode (owned or not-owned) with internal tags set on this
24262:40062 Log audit alarm
upgrade package
24262:40063 There is an unknown propietary attribute that will not be taken into account Log audit warning
24262:40064 Manifest information has void owner Log audit warning
24262:40065 Invalid file - it is removed Log audit error
24262:40066 There is an unknown attribute that will not be taken into account Log audit warning
24262:40067 wrong type of internal FW inside signed file Log audit warning
24262:40068 energy cut during FW update process Log audit warning
24262:40069 Parameter change failed - invalid value Log audit notice
There is a cybersecurity signals file that includes the signals whose change in their status or quality generates a log in the security audit log.
Users with security audit permission can send a new signals file to the device via SFTP. Once validated, it is necessary to reset the device,
which causes the ResetDev signal to be activated.
The cybersecurity signals list by default is as follows:

Table 316 SW/HW Events
Severity
ID Description Facility
Level
24262:24580 Irig-B Failure Log audit alarm
24262:24581 Weak Infeed DFFA Log audit alarm
24262:24582 HH Infeed Log audit alarm
24262:24583 LL Infeed Log audit alarm
24262:24584 HH Temperature Log audit alarm
24262:24585 LL Temperature Log audit alarm
24262:24589 Internal Coms Alarm Log audit alarm
24262:24608 HW Error Log audit error
24262:24609 CPU Error Log audit error
24262:24610 DSP Error Log audit error
24262:24611 IO processor Error Log audit error
24262:24612 DSP connection Error Log audit error
24262:24613 IO connection Error Log audit error
24262:24614 Front connection error Log audit error
24262:24615 Shared DSP memory error Log audit error
24262:24616 Shared I/O memory error Log audit error
24262:24617 RTC Clock Error Log audit error
24262:24618 Alarm DC component Log audit alarm
24262:24619 Settings Alarm Log audit alarm
24262:24620 FW Alarm Log audit alarm
24262:24621 Memory Alarm Log audit alarm
24262:24622 ADC Alarm Log audit alarm
24262:24623 ADC Voltage Alarm Log audit alarm
24262:24624 SD Alarm Log audit alarm
24262:24625 IO Config Error Log audit error
24262:24626 GGIO1 Error Log audit error
24262:24635 General Vcc Error Log audit error
24262:24636 Freq.Config Error Log audit error
24262:24637 Internal Battery Failure Log audit warning
24262:24638 Version Comp.Error Log audit error
24262:24639 Alarm clock settings Log audit alarm
24262:24673 Card 1 ConfigAndNo_Detect Log audit warning
24262:24674 Card 1 Diff. Config Log audit warning

User Manual 622
24262:24675 Card 1 No_ConfigAndDetect Log audit warning

24262:24676 Card 1 Internal Error Log audit warning
24262:24730 HMI ConfigAndNo_Detect Log audit warning
24262:24731 HMI Diff. Config Log audit warning
24262:24732 HMI No_ConfigAndDetect Log audit warning
24262:24733 HMI Internal Error Log audit error
24262:24734 Ethernet redundancy Alarm Log audit alarm
24262:24758 Analog version error Log audit error
24262:24759 Synchrophasor Config.alarm Log audit alarm
24262:24760 Synchrophasor synchro alarm Log audit alarm
24262:24761 Synchrophasor alarm Log audit error
24262:24762 Synchrophasor capture Alarm Log audit error
24262:24763 Synchrophasor comm.alarm Log audit alarm
24262:24802 HH Infeed 2 Log audit notice
24262:24803 LL Infeed 2 Log audit notice
24262:24804 Weak Infeed DFFA1 Log audit notice
24262:24805 Weak Infeed DFFA2 Log audit notice
24262:24828 Access alarm Log audit notice
24262:24830 SV Board Error Log audit error
24262:24933 Output comms buffer overflow 1 Log audit notice
24262:24934 Input comms buffer overflow 1 Log audit notice
24262:24937 Output comms buffer overflow 2 Log audit notice
24262:24938 Input comms buffer overflow 2 Log audit notice

User Manual 623
24262:24944 Auth config error Log audit error

24262:24945 Reset Device Log audit notice
24262:24753 Link Ethernet 0 Log audit notice
24262:24755 Link Ethernet 1 Redundant Log audit notice
24262:24757 Link Ethernet 2 Redundant Log audit notice
24262:24825 Redundancy Link Ethernet 3 Log audit notice
24262:24827 Redundancy Link Ethernet 4 Log audit notice
24262:24702 Channel A active Ethernet 1 Log audit notice
24262:24703 Channel B active Ethernet 1 Log audit notice
24262:24577 Hw Status OK Log audit error
24262:24736 IRIG-B Synchro Log audit notice
24262:24737 SNTP Synchro Log audit notice
24262:24738 Protocol Synchro Log audit notice
24262:24739 Display Synchro Log audit notice
24262:24740 Console Synchro Log audit notice
24262:24939 PTP 1588 synchro Log audit notice
24262:24800 Device not synchronized Log audit notice

User Manual 624
32.3 PORT ACCESS CONTROL
All communications ports, whether physical or logical, have the capability to be enabled or disabled through configuration of the IED.
When disabled through configuration, no communications shall be possible through the disabled port.
The IED generates and audits an event in the case of an external communication connections, i.e. connect a new cable in an Ethernet
port. The IED does not require any internet connection for its operation.
Physical ports can be disabled by software:
❑ Serial ports are only enabled if a specific protocol is configured, in any other case the serial port is disabled.
❑ Ethernet ports can be disabled to not allow any type of communication
If an ethernet port is enabled, the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) ports that are not needed
can be disabled through firewall functionality.
Firewall functionality can be configured independently for each ethernet port. With this functionality only communication protocols
that are needed to meet the functional requirements will be allowed in each ethernet port.
The firewall works according to a deny-by-default configuration, that is, once the firewall is enabled on an ethernet port, access will
only be available to the TCP/UDP ports that are specifically enabled.
IP ports of the main protocols available in the IED:
Table 317 Main protocol's numbers
Port number Type Description Type
20,21 TCP File transfer protocol (FTP)

22 TCP Secure File Transfer Protocol (sFTP), Secure shell (SSH)
80 TCP WEB SERVER (HTTP)
443 TCP WEB SERVER (HTTPS)
102 TCP IEC 61850
2404 TCP IEC 60870-5-104
20000 TCP DNP 3.0 TCP
20000 UDP DNP 3.0 UDP
502 TCP MODBUS
123 UDP SNTP (Simple Network Protocol)
49300 TCP PROCOME
1925 UDP pacFactory devices autodetection
389 TCP LDAP
636 TCP LDAPs
29127 TCP Programmable logics monitorization
6514 TCP SYSLOG TLS
PING ICMP Ping
In addition to the predefined ports in the firewall configuration screens, new firewall rules can be created for any TCP / UDP port.
The logical ports can be enabled for any source IP address or they can be configured to be accessible only from the configured IP
addresses.
The firewall also allows to configure if a port is accepted in server mode or in client mode, depending on whether it is the IED itself that
listens or opens the connection.

User Manual 625
32.4 HARDENING
The IED is an embedded device whose firmware only includes those software components that are necessary for the possible operating
scenarios for which it has been designed. Besides this, the IED does not allow to the users to install additional software.
In addition, the system contains services designed to check that the applications running are authorised (whitelisting techniques) and
that they maintain their integrity (integrity checks). This allows to identify possible illegitimate applications as well as to prevent
undesired modifications in files that should not change.
Unused networking and communications protocols can be disabled either by configuration or by firewall configuration.
The IED verifies the integrity of any uploaded firmware before it is applied.
The IED only accepts encrypted firmware packages generated specifically for this purpose, rejecting any other type of files.
The IED can be configured to accept only digitally signed firmware, so that any firmware updates without a valid digital signature shall
be dropped even if they are valid firmware files for that IED but without a digital signature.
Double signature process is supported. Ingeteam provides a digitally signed firmware on which the user can add a second signature.
Note: I case of interest on the double signature mechanism, consult Ingeteam about the details of the process.
All firmware update operations, whether successful or not, are recorded in the security log.
The IED can be configured not to allow firmware downgrades (update to an older firmware version). Only a user with the security
administrator role can change this setting.
Firmware updates to newer versions are always allowed for users with the appropriate roles.
Firmware updates are protected so that if the power supply to the equipment is interrupted during the update process, it does not
suffer any damage.
If there is a loss of power during the firmware update process, two situations can occur. If the power loss occurs in an initial phase of
the update, when the equipment is turned on again it will boot with the firmware version that they had previously and the user will
have to send the new firmware again to finish the update. If the equipment shutdown occurs in the final phase of the update, when the
equipment is turned on again, the firmware update that was in progress will be automatically completed and the equipment will start
up with the new firmware.
Ingeteam has a policy for the management and maintenance of patches and updates applicable to its products.
Ingeteam is continuously monitoring whether new vulnerabilities are discovered in the software modules used in each of its products
and carries out periodic security assessments.
Ingeteam will periodically inform all its customers of the new vulnerabilities detected, identifying which products they affects, and will
provide patches to mitigate them.
The patch and update management and maintenance policy includes possible updates and patches in third-party hardware, software
or firmware if used in the devices.
If a vulnerability exists and the mitigation solution is not available yet, or it is not applied, the customer will be informed.
Ingetam will provide firmware and software updates and patches during the time specified in the purchase process.
32.5 CRYTOGRAPHIC FEATURES
Different algorithms and various encryption standards are used for passwords and protocols, such as:
❑ Web server by HTTPS, using self-signed certificates.

User Manual 626
❑ File access by sFTP.

❑ Firmware update packages digitally signed (up to 2 signatures) and encrypted. Based on CMS/PKCS#7.
The encryption suites and methods used have been evaluated to allow only those with high cryptographic strength. In this regard, the
following criteria, among others, have been considered:
❑ HTTPs: Vulnerable SSLv2 and SSLv3 protocols have been disabled. For TLS, only TLS1.2 is available.
❑ HTTPs: Establishes access through the TLS protocol only using the most secure cypher encryption methods. Any method
(such as RC4, DES, …) considered vulnerable is not available.
❑ HTTPs: The encryption algorithms are organized in such a way that the use of the most secure ones is prioritized.
❑ Ciphers supported (they all belong to security group A).:
❑ TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 (secp256r1)
❑ TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 (secp256r1)
❑ TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 (dh 2048)
❑ TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 (dh 2048)
❑ SSH / sFTP: only negotiate and establish the connection using encryption algorithms considered strong.
❑ Encryption algorithms supported:
❑ aes128-ctr
❑ aes192-ctr
❑ aes256-ctr
❑ SSH / sFTP: The use of vulnerable MAC algorithms is rejected.
❑ MAC algorithms supported:
❑ hmac-sha2-256
❑ hmac-sha2-512
❑ CMS/PKCS#7: In signed firmwares at least one signature (manufacturer's signature) is sent together with the firmware. The
digital signature is the result of encrypting the hash value of the message using a private key. When the signed firmware is
received, digital signature is decrypted using the public key (it has the type RSA) of the signer. If this hash is identical to the
one calculated by the receiver, digital signature is verified.
32.5.1 WEB SECURITY

Access from the web page is one of the entry points most commonly used to carry out attacks on different devices. This makes
it one of the most important elements to secure in IEDs.
To avoid attacks such as “man-in-the middle”, the criteria described in the previous section on cipher suites are followed. In
addition to these measures, other protections have been implemented, such as the following:
❑ Protection against 'ClickJacking' so that the web cannot be framed on a third party web page.
❑ Blocked access to sensitive information or versions through the web server through 'crawling' functions.
❑ Protection to avoid cookie session hijacking.
❑ File upload size and extensions limited. To avoid DoS unrestricted file uploads attacks.

User Manual 627
32.6 MALWARE PROTECTION
The IED verifies the integrity of any uploaded firmware before it is applied. The IED only accepts encrypted firmware packages
generated specifically for this purpose, rejecting any other type of files.
The IED is an embedded device that does not allow to install additional software.
The IED supports application white-listing technology that allows to run software only if it is included on a white-list and prevent
execution of all other unauthorised software and notify it. With this feature only manufacturer software included in firmware can be
executed.
In addition, the IED checks the integrity of the system packages each time it boots up, to verify that the binaries included are exactly
those that have been installed through a legitimate firmware update process.
32.7 SIGNED FIRMWARE
Firmware will be packed in a CMS/PKCS#7 container with up to two signatures: manufacturer signature and owner signature. Each
signature will be accompanied by a series of metadata or attributes (they provide information about the firmware).
❑ Firmware manifest: Manufacturer's signature (Ingeteam) + the following attributes:

❑ .manifestInformation (MANDATORY):
❑ Type = 0.
❑ Version = 1.
❑ Manufacturer identity.
❑ Copyright (OPTIONAL).
❑ .firmwareManifest.basicFirmwareInformation (MANDATORY):
❑ Description (OPTIONAL).
❑ Firmware version.
❑ Supported hardware models.
❑ Operational manifest: Generally, but not necessarily, formed by owner's signature + the following attributes:
❑ .manifestInformation (MANDATORY):
❑ Type = 1.
❑ Version = 1.
❑ Owner identity.
❑ Copyright.
❑ .operationalManifest.basicOperationalInformation (MANDATORY):
❑ Valid from.
❑ Valid until (OPTIONAL).
❑ .operationalManifest.authorizedFromVersions (OPTIONAL): firmware versions from which the upgrade is
authorized.
❑ .operationalManifest.rollbackAuthorized (OPTIONAL): rollback enabled or disabled.
❑ .operationalManifest.authorizedModels (OPTIONAL): hardware models from which the upgrade is authorized.

User Manual 628
Equipment can be classified into two groups: owned devices and non-owned devices.
In owned devices, only CMS files with two signatures will be accepted. It must include a firmware manifest with manufacturer's sign
and an operational manifest with owner's sign. To configure the device as owned device we need to:
❑ Include manufacturer's CA file and owner's CA file in /configFlash/ingeteam/security/users/certs.

❑ Specify manufacturer's CA file, owner's CA file and owner's PEN in device's cibersecurity settings. Example:
In non-owned devices, only CMS files with manufacturer's signature will be accepted (owner's signature is not included). These files
must include a firmware manifest with manufacturer's signature. Optionally, they can include an operational manifest with
manufacturer's signature. To configure the device as non-owned device we need to:
❑ Include manufacturer's CA file in /configFlash/ingeteam/security/users/certs.

❑ Specify manufacturer's CA file in device's cibersecurity settings. Example:
32.8 WEB CYBERSECURITY TAB
The WEB page menu is split in different tabs. One of them is designed to deal cybersecurity issues.
The cybersecurity tab is in turn divided in the following subtabs:
 NTP Symmetric Keys

 Firewall Configuration
 Certificates
 Logs
 Settings
 RBAC
 Passwords Dictionary
32.8.1 NTP SYMMETRIC KEYS TAB

Through this page can be loaded, downloaded, and deleted the NTP symmetric keys file. Furthermore, it is also possible to reading
it to show its content in a text box in this page.
Note that to complete the NTP symmetric keys file load, it must have '.keys' extension, otherwise it will be rejected.

User Manual 629
32.8.2 FIREWALL CONFIGURATION TAB

Firewall functionality can be configured independently for each ethernet port through this WEB page.
With this functionality only communication protocols that are needed to meet the functional requirements will be allowed in each
ethernet port. The main available communication protocols in the IED are mentioned in Table 317.
The firewall works according to a deny-by-default configuration, that is, once the firewall is enabled on an ethernet port, access will
only be available to the TCP/UDP ports that are specifically enabled.
In addition to the predefined ports in the firewall configuration, more TCP/UDP ports can be added and configured.
Finally, different IP adresses can be specified for each ethernet port from which ping utility is allowed.
For more information about firewall functionality see section 32.3.
32.8.3 CERTIFICATES TAB

Currently, through this page can be updated, downloaded and deleted certificates such as:
❑ LDAP certificate
❑ Client signed firmware CA
❑ Manufacturer signed firmware CA
❑ …
Only files with a .pem, .crt or .cer extension and a maximum size of 50KB are allowed.
32.8.4 LOGS TAB

The IED has rsyslog functionality for forwarding log messages in an IP network.
Users with 'security audit' permission can configure the following log options from this WEB page. They also can decide how to add,
edit and delete remote servers for a centralized audit management system.
❑ Logs configuration options:

❑ SOE Enable: allows enable or disabled SOE log generation
❑ TypeEvSOE: type of events SOE, only status or both status and quality.
❑ Time Format: audit logs and SOE time format, UTC or Local.
❑ Quality Format: audit logs quality format. Options:
❑ Source: audit logs source field
❑ Remote server configuration:
❑ Name: name of the remote server
❑ IP: IP address of the remote server
❑ Port: port of the remote server
❑ Input mode: options:
 UDP
 TCP
❑ TLS: Message encryption can be enabled or disabled using the TLS protocol. TLS configuration:
 Auth Mode: options:
 Anon
 X509/name
 X509/certvalid

User Manual 630
❑ CA File: certified file of the Certifying Authority used

❑ Log file: local files that can be sent to the remote server. Options:
 Security
 SOE
 Both security and SOE
❑ Keep alive enabled: values possible OFF and ON. Default value: OFF.
❑ Keep alive retries number: Between 1 and 15. Default value: 3.
❑ Keep alive interval between retransmissions (seconds): Between 1 and 3600. Default value: 2
❑ Keep alive period (seconds): Between 1 and 3600. Default value: 30.
For more information about the device registers events, see section 32.2.
32.8.5 SETTINGS TAB

The settings currently considered, with their input validation criteria, are:
Table 318: All settings referred to the security of the device with their input validation criteria and availability.
Parameter name
Valid range or possible values Availability
LDAP Configuration
LDAP Enabled LDAP_ACT ON/OFF YES
Host 1 LDAP_HOST1 A valid IP (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) If LDAP is enabled
Port LDAP_PORT 0 < port < 65535 If LDAP is enabled
Idle timeout for LDAP access (min) LDAP_T_ACTAUTH 1 min ≤ timeout ≤ 60 min If LDAP is enabled
Retries number LDAP_N_RETRYAUTH 0 ≤ retries number ≤ 9 If LDAP is enabled
Time between retries (sg) LDAP_T_RETRYAUTH 1 sg ≤ time ≤ 600 sg If LDAP is enabled
ObjectClass LDAP_FILTER_OBJECTCLASS 1 ≤ string length ≤ 64; A-Z, a-z, 0-9 and - characters If LDAP is enabled
RBAC attribute LDAP_FILTER_RBACATT 1 ≤ string length ≤ 64; A-Z, a-z, 0-9 and - characters If LDAP is enabled
SSL mode LDAP_SSL_MODE OFF/ON/START_TLS If LDAP is enabled
RBAC attribute format LDAP_RBAC_ROLE_FORMAT TEXT/NUMBER If LDAP is enabled
Search Base LDAP_SEARCHBASE 1 ≤ string length ≤ 64 If LDAP is enabled
TLS connections certificate LDAP_TLS_CACERT If LDAP is enabled
Access Configuration
Failed login delay (ms) ACCESS_T_FAIL_DELAY 0 ms ≤ delay ≤ 60000 ms YES
Failed retries number ACCESS_N_FAIL_DENY 3 ≤ retries number ≤ 20 YES
Fail unlock time (sg) ACCESS_T_FAIL_UNLOCK 1 sg ≤ time ≤ 86400 sg YES
Password Configuration
Minimum length PASSWD_MIN_LEN 8 ≤ string length ≤ 16 YES
Different types of characters PASSWD_MIN_CLASS 3 ≤ number of types ≤ 4 YES
Forbiden passwords dictionary PASSWD_FORBIDEN_STRINGS ON/OFF YES
Session Configuration
Session Control SESSION_CONTROL ON/OFF YES
Basic access concurrent sessions SESSION_N_CONCURRENT 0 ≤ basic session's number ≤ 5 If session control is enabled
Advanced access concurrent sessions SESSION_N_AV_CONCURRENT 0 ≤ advanced session's number ≤ 5 If session control is enabled
Same user check SESSION_SAMEUSER_CHECK ON/OFF If session control is enabled
Idle timeout (min) SESSION_T_ACTAUTH 1 min ≤ timeout ≤ 60 min YES
Display Configuration
Display access mode DISPLAY_MODE NUMERIC PASSWORD/(USER/PASSWORD) YES
Initial screen return time (min) DISPLAY_T1 1 min ≤ timeout ≤ 120 min YES
Whitelist Configuration
Enable kill processes NINJA_KILL_PROCES_ENA NO/YES YES
FW Configuration
Firmware downgrade allowed FW_DOWNGRADE_ENA ON/OFF YES
Signed FW required FW_SIGN_ENA ON/OFF YES
Manufacturer file CA FW_SIGN_INGETEAM_CAFILE YES
Owner file CA FW_SIGN_OWNER_CAFILE YES

User Manual 631
Owner PEN FW_SIGN_OWNER_PEN 0 ≤ PEN ≤ 4294967295 YES

Login Message Configuration
Enabled BANNER_ENA ON/OFF YES
Message BANNER_MSG 1 ≤ string length ≤ 250 If login message is enabled
HTTPS Configuration
HTTPS access cipher suite HTTPS_CIPHER_SUITE Secure/Compatibility YES
USB Configuration
Disabled/Password required/No password
USB USB_MODE YES
required
Autodetection Configuration
Disabled/ Autodetection only / Autodetection +
Mode AUTODETECTION_MODE YES
Commands
Logs Configuration
CID private configuration LOGS_CFG_MODE Disabled/Enabled YES
Each configuration parameter is described below.
❑ LDAP Configuration
❑ LDAP Enabled: Activation of authentication using LDAP.
❑ Host 1: The IP of main LDAP server.
❑ Port: The communication port number of LDAP protocol.
❑ Idle timeout for LDAP access (min): The session timeout inactivity period for LDAP access.
❑ Retries number: The connection retries number with LDAP server.
❑ Time between retries (sg): The time between consecutive retries.
❑ ObjectClass: The object class of user in LDAP database.
❑ RBAC attribute: The field name that defines the roles within LDAP.
❑ SSL mode: Enabling of TLS communications in LDAP access (certificate is required).
❑ RBAC attribute format: The format in which the associated role is specified in the LDAP database
❑ Search Base: The search start point definition in LDAP database.
❑ TLS connections certificate: Select the certificate for LDAP connections over TLS.
❑ Access Configuration
❑ Failed login delay (ms): The fixed delay introduced durig local access when log-in is incorrect.
❑ Failed retries number: The number of consecutive failed attempts before blocking the user.
❑ Fail unlock time (sg): The time the user is blocked to wait until the device accepts a new access attempt.
❑ Password Configuration
❑ Minimum length: The minimum required length for new local passwords.
❑ Different types of characters: The number of required different classes for new local passwords (uppercase,
lowercase, numbers, and special characters).
❑ Forbiden passwords dictionary: Activation of checking forbidden chains as local passwords.
❑ Session Configuration
❑ Session Control: Enables the session access control.
❑ Basic access concurrent sessions: The number of concurrent basic user sessions allowed per device access
interface. The 0 value indicates that there is no restriction. The basic access is the one corresponding to the
roles "viewer" and "operator".

User Manual 632
❑ Advanced access concurrent sessions: The number of concurrent advanced user sessions allowed per
device access interface. The 0 value indicates that there is no restriction. The advanced access is the one
corresponding to the roles other than "viewer" and "operator".
❑ Same user check: A user account cannot be used to access the device if the user is already logged in. It is
checked per device access interface.
❑ Idle timeout (min): The session timeout inactivity period for local access.
❑ Display Configuration
❑ Display access mode: Access mode to display's settings menu.
❑ Initial screen return time (min): The timeout of inactivity to return to the display's main screen in minutes.
The lack of keystrokes on the front panel is considered inactivity.
❑ Whitelist Configuration
❑ Enable kill processes: Enabling killing processes that are not on the whitelist.
❑ FW Configuration
❑ Firmware downgrade allowed: Firmware update to previous versions enabled.
❑ Signed FW required: Enabling checking of signed firmware. This setting indicates that the IED will not
accept another update package that is not signed under the CMS/PKCS#7 standard (it can be signed with
one or double signature).
❑ Manufacturer file CA: A trusted root Certification Authority of public certificates issued by manufacturer.
❑ Owner file CA: A trusted root Certification Authority of public certificates issued by owner/client/utility.
❑ Owner PEN: The Personal Education Number issued by the IANA organization, as a unique identifier for the
owner company on the Internet.
The last two settings must be set together to be "owned-device", necessary to validate signed firmware.
❑ Login Message Configuration

❑ Enabled: To enable or disable the banner (notification message on connection).
❑ Message: The text to be showed in the banner.
❑ HTTPS Configuration
❑ HTTPs access cipher suite: Cipher suite for HTTPS access. It can be:
❑ Secure: Highly secure and compatible with nearly every client released after 2014. Only TLSv1.2
ciphers.
❑ Compatibility: Recommended cipher suite for backwards compatibility. Includes TLSv1.2, TLSv1.1
and TLSv1.0 least strength A ciphers.
NOTE: For the change to be effective, the device must be restarted.
❑ USB Configuration
❑ USB: USB operating mode.
❑ Autodetection Configuration:
❑ Mode: Layer 2 Commands and Auto Detection Operating Mode.

User Manual 633
❑ Logs Configuration (available since firmware version 9.5.28.1)

❑ CID private configuration: Enables or disables log configuration treatment of cid private part. (NOTE: The
'Mode' setting is renamed to 'CID Private configuration' from FW version 9.5.29.2 onwards.)
32.8.6 RBAC TAB

Access control mechanism is performed applying a RBAC model (see section 32.1.3).
Each user must be assigned a role, which implies certain permissions, and consequently, defines the functions that user has access
to upon log in.
In this page, users with 'RBAC management' permission can:
❑ Create a new user.

❑ Change password of an existing user.
❑ Change role of an existing user.
❑ Create a new rol or delete previously created one (available since FW version 9.4.28.0)
❑ Activate an existing user.
❑ Block an existing user.
❑ Delete an existing user.
❑ Reset RBAC configuration. All users created by client will be deleted.
❑ Restore numeric key for display access to the default one (available from firmware version 9.4.28.0).
❑ See the list of all configurable users and enable/disable:
▪ System users
▪ Legacy users (available since FW version 9.5.29.2)
▪ Default security manager
Note that only users with SECADMIN, RBACMGMT or ADMIN predefined roles have 'RBAC management' permission as shown in
Table 310.
32.8.7 PASSWORDS DICTIONARY TAB

A password dictionary is a file that contains a list of potential passwords. People often use plain English words or some small
variation like a 1 for an i or a 5 for an s when they create passwords. Password lists attempt to collect as many of these words as
possible, to prevent their use and consequently, reduce the vulnerability of passwords in face of attacks.
Through this page can be updated, downloaded, and deleted a password dictionary.
Note that to configure the dictionary, the forbidden password list must be compressed in .gz format and not exceed 50KB before
loading it.

User Manual 634
CYBERSECURITY SIGNALS 
33. CYBERSECURITY SIGNALS

There is a file of cybersecurity signals that includes the signals whose change in their status or quality generates a log in the audit
security records.
Users with security auditing permission can send a new signal file to the device via SFTP. Once validated, it is necessary to reset the
device, which causes the activation of the ResetDev signal.
The list of cybersecurity signals that includes Inputs, Outputs and LEDs is:
Table 319 Eventos SW/HW
ID Description Priority Security level
24262:0 GGIO1.Digital Input 1 Log audit info


User Manual 635


User Manual 636


User Manual 637


User Manual 638

24262:8832 GGIO1.Digital Output 1 Log audit info

User Manual 639


User Manual 640


User Manual 641

24262:24580 Irig-B Failure Log audit info
24262:24581 Weak Infeed DFFA Log audit info
24262:24582 HH Infeed Log audit info
24262:24583 LL Infeed Log audit info
24262:24584 HH Temperature Log audit info
24262:24585 LL Temperature Log audit info
24262:24589 Internal Coms Alarm Log audit info
24262:24608 HW Error Log audit info
24262:24609 CPU Error Log audit info
24262:24610 DSP Error Log audit info
24262:24611 IO processor Error Log audit info
24262:24612 DSP connection Error Log audit info
24262:24613 IO connection Error Log audit info
24262:24614 Front connection error Log audit info
24262:24615 Shared DSP memory error Log audit info
24262:24616 Shared I/O memory error Log audit info
24262:24617 RTC Clock Error Log audit info
24262:24618 Alarm DC component Log audit info
24262:24619 Settings Alarm Log audit info
24262:24620 FW Alarm Log audit info
24262:24621 Memory Alarm Log audit info
24262:24622 ADC Alarm Log audit info
24262:24623 ADC Voltage Alarm Log audit info
24262:24624 SD Alarm Log audit info
24262:24625 IO Config Error Log audit info
24262:24626 GGIO1 Error Log audit info
24262:24635 General Vcc Error Log audit info
24262:24636 Ext.Power supply alarm Log audit info
24262:24637 Freq.Config Error Log audit info
24262:24638 Internal Battery Failure Log audit info
24262:24639 Version Comp.Error Log audit info
24262:24673 Card 1 ConfigAndNo_Detect Log audit info
24262:24674 Card 1 Diff. Config Log audit info
24262:24675 Card 1 No_ConfigAndDetect Log audit info
24262:24676 Card 1 Internal Error Log audit info

User Manual 642

24262:24730 HMI ConfigAndNo_Detect Log audit info
24262:24731 HMI Diff. Config Log audit info
24262:24732 HMI No_ConfigAndDetect Log audit info
24262:24733 HMI Internal Error Log audit info
24262:24734 Ethernet redundancy Alarm Log audit info
24262:24751 Device reboot required Log audit info
24262:24758 Analog version error Log audit info
24262:24759 Synchrophasor Config.alarm Log audit info
24262:24760 Synchrophasor synchro alarm Log audit info
24262:24761 Synchrophasor alarm Log audit info
24262:24762 Synchrophasor capture Alarm Log audit info
24262:24763 Synchrophasor comm.alarm Log audit info
24262:24802 HH Infeed 2 Log audit info
24262:24803 LL Infeed 2 Log audit info
24262:24804 Weak Infeed DFFA1 Log audit info
24262:24805 Weak Infeed DFFA2 Log audit info
24262:24828 Access alarm Log audit info
24262:24830 SV Board Error Log audit info
24262:24933 Output comms buffer overflow 1 (GEN/LCCH1.OutOv) Log audit info
24262:24934 Input comms buffer overflow 1 (GEN/LCCH1.InOv) Log audit info
24262:24937 utput comms buffer overflow 2 (GEN/LCCH2.OutOv) Log audit info
24262:24938 Input comms buffer overflow 2 (GEN/LCCH2.InOv) Log audit info
24262:24944 Auth config error(GEN/LTMS1.AuthCfgErr) Log audit info
24262:24945 Reset Device Log audit info
24262:24753 Link Ethernet 0 Log audit info
24262:24755 Link Ethernet 1 Redundant Log audit info
24262:24702 Channel A active Ethernet 1 Log audit info
24262:24703 Channel B active Ethernet 1 Log audit info

User Manual 643
24262:24577 Hw Status OK Log audit info

24262:24736 IRIG-B Synchro Log audit info
24262:24737 SNTP Synchro Log audit info
24262:24738 Protocol Synchro Log audit info
24262:24739 Display Synchro Log audit info
24262:24740 Console Synchro Log audit info
24262:24939 PTP 1588 synchro Log audit info
24262:24800 Device not synchronized Log audit info
24262:28000 Status Led 1 Log audit info

User Manual 644
ACCURACY AND TRIP TIMES 
34. ACCURACY AND TRIP TIMES

This chapter shows shows the accuracy of the measurements and the trip time according to the operating conditions.
34.1 MEASUREMENT ACCURACY
The following table shows the accuracy of the measurements according to the operating conditions:
Accuracy Rated frequency

Rated F ± 5Hz With adaptative sampling Rated F ± 5Hz Without adaptative sampling
Measured currents phases Class 0,2: ± 0,2% of FS (0-1.2·Ir) Class 0,5: ± 0,5% of FS (0-1.2·Ir)
and neutral ± 0.5 % of measurement or 1 mA (0-200A) ± 1 % of measurement or 1 mA (0-200A)
Calculated currents Class 0,2: ± 0,2% of FS (0-1.2·Ir) Class 0,5: ± 0,5% of FS (0-1.2·Ir)
± 0.5 % of measurement or 1 mA (0-200A) ± 1 % of measurement or 2 mA (0-200A)
Measured voltages Class 0,2: ± 0,2% of FS (0-1.2·Vr) Class 0,5: ± 0,5% of FS (0-1.2·Vr)
± 0.5 % of measurement or 50 mV (0-200V) ± 1 % of measurement or 50 mV (0-200V)
Calculated voltages Class 0,2: ± 0,2% of FS (0-1.2·Vr) Class 0,5: ± 0,5% of FS (0-1.2·Vr)
± 0.5 % of measurement or 50 mV (0-200V) ± 1 % of measurement or 100 mV (0-200V)
Power Class 0,5: ± 0,5% of FS (0-1.2·In·Vr) Class 1: ± 1% of FS (0-1.2·In·Vr)
± 0.5 % of measurement or 150mW ± 1,5 % of measurement or 150mW
Angle ± 0,5 º ±2º

Power Factor Class 0.5 Class 1
± 0,005 +/-0.0012
Frequency ± 0,01 Hz ± 0,01 Hz
Locator 3%

User Manual 645
PRECISIÓN Y TIEMPOS DE ACTUACION 
34.2 PROTECTION UNITS
The following chapters show the protection units characteristics.
34.2.1 Phase and neutral overcurrent

The following table shows the unit´s characteristics:
Characteristic Guaranteed value Notes

Start accuracy: Rated Frequency:
Phase and neutral 1% or 0,5mA (greater)
0,5º Directional
Rated Frequency ± 2,5Hz:
3% average
Sensitive neutral 1% or 1mA (greater)
0,5º Directional
Rated Frequency ± 2,5 Hz:
3% average
Drop-off value 95% start setting It is indicated as percentage of the start threshold
Drop-off time 40ms + Relay time It indicates the approximate function´s drop-off time. For
external signaling, the relay deactivation time must be added.
(10 ms).
Overreach 2 Gs 200ms = 17-23 ms
5 Gs 0ms = 12-15 ms
Transient overreach < 5% a X/R = 120
< 3% a X/R = 40
Time accuracy Time delay: 30ms or 1% TAjt (greater) It differentiates between times with curves and time delay. The
Curves: 30ms o 3% TAjt (greater) time delay must be greater than 50ms
Trip Time (50Hz) Directional configuration Note 1
> 5xIaj Ttrip < 25ms. The indicated times are average.
> 3xIaj Ttrip < 27ms. The time delay must be zero.
> 2xIaj Ttrip < 30ms. It is measured taking into account the relationship between the
No Directional configuration setting and the value of the magnitude.
> 3xIaj Ttrip < 22ms. The trip time is measured with fast outputs. With other types
> 2xIaj Ttrip < 25ms. of output, the relay activation time must be added (5ms with
> 1.5xIaj Ttrip < 30ms hbco and between 5-8ms with standard outputs).
The directional polarization is “Quadrature”
The current must be greater of 100mA for phase and neutral
and 1mA for sensitive neutral
Trip Time (60Hz) Directional configuration See Note 1
> 3xIaj Ttrip < 25ms.
> 1.5xIaj Ttrip < 30ms.
No Directional configuration
> 1.5xIaj Ttrip < 27ms

34.2.2 Overvoltage
Phase overvoltage

1% or 100mV (greater)
0,5% (average)
3% average
Drop-off value Configurable It is indicated as percentage of the start threshold
95% 99% start setting
Drop-off time 35ms + Relay time It indicates the approximate function´s drop-off time. For external
signaling, the relay deactivation time must be added. (10 ms).
Overreach 10-15 ms
Time accuracy Time delay: 30ms or 1% TAjt (greater) It differentiates between times with curves and time delay. The time delay
Curve: 30ms o 3% TAjt (greater) must be greater than 50ms
Trip Time (50Hz) > 3xIaj Ttrip < 20ms. Note 2
> 1.5xIaj Ttrip < 30ms. The time delay must be zero.
It is measured taking into account the relationship between the setting
and the value of the magnitude.
The trip time is measured with fast outputs. With other types of output,
the relay activation time must be added (5ms with hbco and between 5-
8ms with standard outputs).
Trip Time (60Hz) > 3xIaj Ttrip < 17ms. See Note 2
Zero sequence overvoltage:

0,5% (average)
3% average
Drop-off time Aproximado 35ms + Relay time It indicates the approximate function´s drop-off time. For external
Curve: 30ms o 3% TAjt (greater) must be greater than 50ms
Trip Time (50Hz) > 3xIaj Ttrip < 20ms. Note 3
> 1.5xIaj Ttrip < 30ms. The time delay must be zero.

34.2.3 Undervoltage

0,5% (average)
3% average
101-105% start setting
Overreach 11-18ms
Curve: 30ms o 3% TAjt (greater must be greater than 50ms
Trip Time (50Hz) < Iaj/3 Ttrip < 20ms. Note 4
< Iaj/2 Ttrip < 25ms. The indicated times are average.
< Iaj/1,5 Ttrip < 30ms. The time delay must be zero.
Trip Time (60Hz) < Iaj/3 Ttrip < 17ms. See Note 4
< Iaj/2 Ttrip < 22ms.
< Iaj/1,5 Ttrip < 27ms.
34.2.4 Frequency: Maximun/Minimun


Start accuracy: 10 mHz
Drop-off value F maximun: It is indicated as percentage of the start threshold

99.95% start setting
F minimun:
100.05% start setting
Drop-off time Setting " Number of cycles (Reset)" + It indicates the approximate function´s drop-off time. For external
Relay time signaling, the relay deactivation time must be added. (10 ms).
Time accuracy 80ms or 5% TAjt (greater) The time delay must be greater than 100ms and start cycles = 3.
Trip Time (50Hz) Sudden change: Ttrip < 80ms Note 5
Slope: Ttrip < 85ms The indicated times are average.
The time delay must be zero and start cycles 3.
Trip Time (60Hz) Sudden change: Ttrip < 70ms See Note 5
Slope: Ttrip < 75ms

34.2.5 Power
Rated Frequency:
Start accuracy 1% or 0,5w (greater)
0,5% (average)
Pmax, Pinv, Qinv, Smax
Configurable It is indicated as percentage of the start threshold
Drop-off value
Time accuracy 30ms or 1% TAjt (greater) The time delay must be greater than 50ms
Note 6
The indicated times are average.
The time delay must be zero.
Trip Time (50Hz) and the value of the magnitude.
> 2xIaj Ttrip < 23ms. See Note 6

Trip Time (60Hz)
Pmin, Smin
Configurable It is indicated as percentage of the start threshold
Drop-off value
101-105% start setting
> Iaj/2 Ttrip < 20ms. See Note 6
Trip Time (50Hz)
> Iaj/1,5 Ttrip < 25ms.

Trip Time (60Hz)
34.2.6 Broken conductor

Rated Frequency:
Start accuracy
1% or 3mA (greater)
It indicates the approximate function´s drop-off time. For external
Drop-off time 37ms + Relay time
Note 7
> 3xIaj Ttrip < 20ms. and the value of the magnitude.
Trip Time (50Hz)
> 2xIaj Ttrip < 30ms. The trip time is measured with fast outputs. With other types of output,
The directional polarization is “Quadrature”
The current must be greater of 100mA
Trip Time (60Hz)

34.2.7 50BF Breaker Failure


Rated Frequency: The unit drops-off below the set threshold and starts at the indicated pick-
Drop-off accuracy
1% or 0,5mA (greater) up value.
Start value 102% start setting It´s indicated as percentage of the set threshold
1 cycle + Relay time It indicates the approximate function´s drop-off time. For external
Drop-off time
34.2.8 Thermal Image


Start accuracy Rated Frequency: 1%
Time accuracy 35ms or 1% TAjt (greater)

34.2.9 Line Differential

Phase differential 87L

Start accuracy: Rated Frequency: The accuracy is not guaranteed in current values of the differential
3% or 10mA (greater) current step setting ± 3%
Instantaneous
Trip Time (50Hz) > 5xIaj Ttrip < 20ms Note 8
> 1.2xIaj Ttrip < 35ms. It is measured taking into account the relationship between the setting
Trip Time (60Hz) > 5xIaj Ttrip < 15ms See Note 8
> 3xIaj Ttrip < 20 ms
Percent without Harmonic Restraint
Time accuracy 30ms or 1% TAjt (greater) El tiempo ajustado debe ser mayor de 50ms.
Percent with Harmonic block
Percent with Harmonic Restraint

User Manual 651
Ground differential 87LG

Start accuracy: 3% or 10mA (greater) The accuracy is not guaranteed in current values of the differential
current step setting ± 3%
No directional
Trip Time (50Hz) Note 9
Trip Time (60Hz) > 3xIaj Ttrip < 65 ms See Note 9
> 1.5xIaj Ttrip < 70 ms.
Directional
Trip Time (60Hz) > 3xIaj Ttrip < 60 ms Ver Note 9
> 1.5xIaj Ttrip < 65 ms.
34.2.10 Restricted ground


Start accuracy Rated Frequency: The accuracy is not guaranteed in current values of the differential
1% or 10mA (greater) current step setiing ± 3%

User Manual 652
34.2.11 Restricted ground


Start accuracy Rated Frequency: The accuracy is not guaranteed in current values of the differential
1% or 10mA (greater) current step setting ± 3%

34.2.12 Distance

Start accuracy: (mho/quad) Rated Frequency: In the the maximum torque line
5%
3% average
Overreach 1%
Quadrilateral Characteristic
Trip Time (50Hz) Zone 1 Reach SIR<5: See Note 12 and figures
< 60% Z1ajt Ttrip < 20ms
< Z1ajt Ttrip < 30ms
Zone 1 Reach SIR<50:
Mho Characteristic
Note 12. Trip times in protection units
❑ The current must be greater of 100mA.

❑ The indicated times are average.
❑ The time delay must be zero.
❑ It is measured taking into account the relationship between the setting and the value of the magnitude.
❑ The trip time is measured with fast outputs. With other types of output, the relay activation time must be added (5ms with
hbco and between 5-8ms with standard outputs).
❑ In the distance units, the trip time is tested on the maximum torque line. The High Speed zone must be enabled. The
indications of the standard IEC60255-121 have been taken into account: SIR 0.2, 0.5, 5 and 10 for long lines and SIR 5, 10,
30 and 50 for short lines.

The following figures shown the mho characteristic´s average trip times according to the standard IEC 60255-121 (short line).
Faults L1N (50 Hz) Faults L1N (60 Hz)
Faults L2L3 (50 Hz) Faults L2L3 (60 Hz)
Faults L2L3N (50 Hz) Faults L2L3N (60 Hz)
Faults L1L2L3 (50 Hz) Faults L1L2L3 (60 Hz)
The following figures shown the mho characteristic´s average trip times according to the standard IEC 60255-121 (long line).

The following figures shown the quadrilateral characteristic´s average trip times according to the standard IEC 60255-121 (short line).

The following figures shown the quadrilateral characteristic´s average trip times according to the standard IEC 60255-121 (long line).


CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS 
35. CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
35.1 CEI 255-4 / BS142 CURVES
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to BS142, which correspond to the following types:
❑ Inverse or Normal Inverse

❑ Very Inverse
❑ Extremely Inverse
❑ Short-Time Inverse
❑ Long-Time Inverse
❑ Very Inverse Special Time
❑ User Curve.
These curves comply with the general formula
k tr
T = M  TRECAIDA = M 
 2
 I  −1  I  −1
I  I 
 0  0
In which:
❑ T : trip time (sec)

❑ TDROP : drop time (sec)
❑ M: multiplier (“time dial”). Valid range 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0.005
❑ I: Measured current
❑ Io: Pickup current setting
❑ K, , tr: constants which depend on the type of curve:
Inverse / Short-Time Long-Time Extremely Very Inverse

Constants Very inverse
Normal inverse inverse inverse inverse Especial
K 0.14 0.05 120 13.50 80.00 2.60
 0.02 0.04 1 1.00 2.00 1.00
tr 9.7 0.5 120 43.2 58.2 21.2
The following represent the curves which correspond to indexes 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 and 1.0 for each type of
characteristic. Bear in mind that there are another 9 curves between each of the two curves illustrated, except between 0.05 and 0.1,
between which there are another 4.
For the values of I/Io greater than 40, the trip time is the correspond time of I/Io=40.

Inverse or normal inverse curve
k tr
 2
 I  −1  I  −1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 0,14,  = 0,02 tr = 9.7
Theoretical values given by the formula:
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 0.485 0.517 0.647 1.109 7.170 3.669 1.916 1.331 0.860 0.501 0.378 0.315 0.214 0.149 0.113 0.091
0.06 0.582 0.621 0.776 1.330 8.604 4.402 2.299 1.597 1.032 0.602 0.454 0.378 0.257 0.178 0.136 0.110
0.07 0.679 0.724 0.905 1.552 10.038 5.136 2.683 1.863 1.204 0.702 0.530 0.441 0.300 0.208 0.159 0.128
0.08 0.776 0.828 1.035 1.774 11.472 5.870 3.066 2.129 1.376 0.802 0.606 0.504 0.342 0.238 0.181 0.146
0.09 0.873 0.931 1.164 1.995 12.906 6.604 3.449 2.395 1.547 0.903 0.681 0.567 0.385 0.267 0.204 0.165
0.10 0.970 1.035 1.293 2.217 14.340 7.337 3.832 2.661 1.719 1.003 0.757 0.630 0.428 0.297 0.227 0.183
0.11 1.067 1.138 1.423 2.439 15.774 8.071 4.216 2.927 1.891 1.103 0.833 0.693 0.471 0.327 0.249 0.201
0.12 1.164 1.242 1.552 2.661 17.208 8.805 4.599 3.193 2.063 1.203 0.908 0.756 0.514 0.356 0.272 0.219
0.13 1.261 1.345 1.681 2.882 18.642 9.539 4.982 3.459 2.235 1.304 0.984 0.819 0.556 0.386 0.295 0.238
0.14 1.358 1.449 1.811 3.104 20.076 10.272 5.365 3.725 2.407 1.404 1.060 0.882 0.599 0.416 0.317 0.256
0.15 1.455 1.552 1.940 3.326 21.510 11.006 5.749 3.992 2.579 1.504 1.135 0.945 0.642 0.446 0.340 0.274
0.16 1.552 1.655 2.069 3.547 22.944 11.740 6.132 4.258 2.751 1.605 1.211 1.008 0.685 0.475 0.363 0.293
0.17 1.649 1.759 2.199 3.769 24.378 12.474 6.515 4.524 2.923 1.705 1.287 1.071 0.728 0.505 0.385 0.311
0.18 1.746 1.862 2.328 3.991 25.812 13.207 6.898 4.790 3.095 1.805 1.363 1.134 0.770 0.535 0.408 0.329
0.19 1.843 1.966 2.457 4.213 27.246 13.941 7.282 5.056 3.267 1.906 1.438 1.197 0.813 0.564 0.431 0.347
0.20 1.940 2.069 2.587 4.434 28.680 14.675 7.665 5.322 3.439 2.006 1.514 1.260 0.856 0.594 0.453 0.366
0.25 2.425 2.587 3.233 5.543 35.850 18.344 9.581 6.653 4.299 2.507 1.892 1.575 1.070 0.743 0.567 0.457
0.30 2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 43.021 22.012 11.497 7.983 5.158 3.009 2.271 1.891 1.284 0.891 0.680 0.549
0.35 3.395 3.621 4.527 7.760 50.191 25.681 13.413 9.314 6.018 3.510 2.649 2.206 1.498 1.040 0.794 0.640
0.40 3.880 4.139 5.173 8.869 57.361 29.350 15.329 10.644 6.878 4.012 3.028 2.521 1.712 1.188 0.907 0.731
0.45 4.365 4.656 5.820 9.977 64.531 33.018 17.246 11.975 7.737 4.513 3.406 2.836 1.926 1.337 1.020 0.823
0.50 4.850 5.173 6.467 11.086 71.701 36.687 19.162 13.305 8.597 5.015 3.785 3.151 2.140 1.485 1.134 0.914
0.55 5.335 5.691 7.113 12.194 78.871 40.356 21.078 14.636 9.457 5.516 4.163 3.466 2.354 1.634 1.247 1.006
0.60 5.820 6.208 7.760 13.303 86.041 44.025 22.994 15.966 10.317 6.017 4.542 3.781 2.568 1.782 1.360 1.097
0.65 6.305 6.725 8.407 14.411 93.211 47.693 24.910 17.297 11.176 6.519 4.920 4.096 2.782 1.931 1.474 1.188
0.70 6.790 7.243 9.053 15.520 100.381 51.362 26.827 18.627 12.036 7.020 5.299 4.411 2.996 2.079 1.587 1.280
0.75 7.275 7.760 9.700 16.629 107.551 55.031 28.743 19.958 12.896 7.522 5.677 4.726 3.210 2.228 1.701 1.371
0.80 7.760 8.277 10.347 17.737 114.721 58.700 30.659 21.288 13.755 8.023 6.056 5.042 3.424 2.376 1.814 1.463
0.85 8.245 8.795 10.993 18.846 121.891 62.368 32.575 22.619 14.615 8.525 6.434 5.357 3.638 2.525 1.927 1.554
0.90 8.730 9.312 11.640 19.954 129.062 66.037 34.491 23.949 15.475 9.026 6.813 5.672 3.852 2.674 2.041 1.646
0.95 9.215 9.829 12.287 21.063 136.232 69.706 36.408 25.280 16.335 9.528 7.191 5.987 4.066 2.822 2.154 1.737
1.00 9.700 10.347 12.933 22.171 143.402 73.374 38.324 26.611 17.194 10.029 7.570 6.302 4.280 2.971 2.267 1.828
1.05 10.185 10.864 13.580 23.280 150.572 77.043 40.240 27.941 18.054 10.530 7.948 6.617 4.494 3.119 2.381 1.920


Long duration curve (IEC)
k tr
 2
 I  −1  I  −1
I  I 
 0
@Fig.160.png-H:61,65-W:103,7@ @Fig.161.png-H:62,2-W:145,75@
 0
K = 120,  = 1 tr = 120
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 6.000 6.400 8.000 13.714 120.000 60.000 30.000 20.000 12.000 6.000 4.000 3.000 1.500 0.667 0.316 0.154
0.06 7.200 7.680 9.600 16.457 144.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 14.400 7.200 4.800 3.600 1.800 0.800 0.379 0.185
0.07 8.400 8.960 11.200 19.200 168.000 84.000 42.000 28.000 16.800 8.400 5.600 4.200 2.100 0.933 0.442 0.215
0.08 9.600 10.240 12.800 21.943 192.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 19.200 9.600 6.400 4.800 2.400 1.067 0.505 0.246
0.09 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 216.000 108.000 54.000 36.000 21.600 10.800 7.200 5.400 2.700 1.200 0.568 0.277
0.10 12.000 12.800 16.000 27.429 240.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 24.000 12.000 8.000 6.000 3.000 1.333 0.632 0.308
0.11 13.200 14.080 17.600 30.171 264.000 132.000 66.000 44.000 26.400 13.200 8.800 6.600 3.300 1.467 0.695 0.338
0.12 14.400 15.360 19.200 32.914 288.000 144.000 72.000 48.000 28.800 14.400 9.600 7.200 3.600 1.600 0.758 0.369
0.13 15.600 16.640 20.800 35.657 312.000 156.000 78.000 52.000 31.200 15.600 10.400 7.800 3.900 1.733 0.821 0.400
0.14 16.800 17.920 22.400 38.400 336.000 168.000 84.000 56.000 33.600 16.800 11.200 8.400 4.200 1.867 0.884 0.431
0.15 18.000 19.200 24.000 41.143 360.000 180.000 90.000 60.000 36.000 18.000 12.000 9.000 4.500 2.000 0.947 0.462
0.16 19.200 20.480 25.600 43.886 384.000 192.000 96.000 64.000 38.400 19.200 12.800 9.600 4.800 2.133 1.011 0.492
0.17 20.400 21.760 27.200 46.629 408.000 204.000 102.000 68.000 40.800 20.400 13.600 10.200 5.100 2.267 1.074 0.523
0.18 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 432.000 216.000 108.000 72.000 43.200 21.600 14.400 10.800 5.400 2.400 1.137 0.554
0.19 22.800 24.320 30.400 52.114 456.000 228.000 114.000 76.000 45.600 22.800 15.200 11.400 5.700 2.533 1.200 0.585
0.20 24.000 25.600 32.000 54.857 480.001 240.000 120.000 80.000 48.000 24.000 16.000 12.000 6.000 2.667 1.263 0.615
0.25 30.000 32.000 40.000 68.571 600.001 300.000 150.000 100.000 60.000 30.000 20.000 15.000 7.500 3.333 1.579 0.769
0.30 36.000 38.400 48.000 82.286 720.001 360.000 180.000 120.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 18.000 9.000 4.000 1.895 0.923
0.35 42.000 44.800 56.000 96.000 840.001 420.000 210.000 140.000 84.000 42.000 28.000 21.000 10.500 4.667 2.211 1.077
0.40 48.000 51.200 64.000 109.714 960.001 480.000 240.000 160.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 24.000 12.000 5.333 2.526 1.231
0.45 54.000 57.600 72.000 123.429 1080.001 540.000 270.000 180.000 108.000 54.000 36.000 27.000 13.500 6.000 2.842 1.385
0.50 60.000 64.000 80.000 137.143 1200.001 600.000 300.000 200.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 30.000 15.000 6.667 3.158 1.538
0.55 66.000 70.400 88.000 150.857 1320.001 660.000 330.000 220.000 132.000 66.000 44.000 33.000 16.500 7.333 3.474 1.692
0.60 72.000 76.800 96.000 164.571 1440.002 720.000 360.000 240.000 144.000 72.000 48.000 36.000 18.000 8.000 3.789 1.846
0.65 78.000 83.200 104.000 178.286 1560.002 780.000 390.000 260.000 156.000 78.000 52.000 39.000 19.500 8.667 4.105 2.000
0.70 84.000 89.600 112.000 192.000 1680.002 840.000 420.000 280.000 168.000 84.000 56.000 42.000 21.000 9.333 4.421 2.154
0.75 90.000 96.000 120.000 205.714 1800.002 900.000 450.000 300.000 180.000 90.000 60.000 45.000 22.500 10.000 4.737 2.308
0.80 96.000 102.400 128.000 219.429 1920.002 960.000 480.000 320.000 192.000 96.000 64.000 48.000 24.000 10.667 5.053 2.462
0.85 102.000 108.800 136.000 233.143 2040.002 1020.000 510.000 340.000 204.000 102.000 68.000 51.000 25.500 11.333 5.368 2.615
0.90 108.000 115.200 144.000 246.857 2160.002 1080.000 540.000 360.000 216.000 108.000 72.000 54.000 27.000 12.000 5.684 2.769
0.95 114.000 121.600 152.000 260.571 2280.003 1140.000 570.000 380.000 228.000 114.000 76.000 57.000 28.500 12.667 6.000 2.923
1.00 120.000 128.000 160.000 274.286 2400.003 1200.000 600.000 400.000 240.000 120.000 80.000 60.000 30.000 13.333 6.316 3.077
1.05 126.000 134.400 168.000 288.000 2520.003 1260.000 630.000 420.000 252.000 126.000 84.000 63.000 31.500 14.000 6.632 3.231


Short duration curve IEC
k tr
 2
 I  −1  I  −1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 0.05,  = 0.04 tr = 0.5
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 0.025 0.027 0.033 0.057 1.280 0.655 0.342 0.237 0.153 0.089 0.067 0.056 0.038 0.026 0.020 0.016
0.06 0.030 0.032 0.040 0.069 1.536 0.785 0.410 0.284 0.183 0.107 0.080 0.067 0.045 0.031 0.024 0.019
0.07 0.035 0.037 0.047 0.080 1.792 0.916 0.478 0.332 0.214 0.124 0.094 0.078 0.053 0.036 0.027 0.022
0.08 0.040 0.043 0.053 0.091 2.048 1.047 0.546 0.379 0.245 0.142 0.107 0.089 0.060 0.041 0.031 0.025
0.09 0.045 0.048 0.060 0.103 2.304 1.178 0.615 0.427 0.275 0.160 0.121 0.100 0.068 0.047 0.035 0.028
0.10 0.050 0.053 0.067 0.114 2.559 1.309 0.683 0.474 0.306 0.178 0.134 0.111 0.075 0.052 0.039 0.031
0.11 0.055 0.059 0.073 0.126 2.815 1.440 0.751 0.521 0.336 0.196 0.147 0.122 0.083 0.057 0.043 0.035
0.12 0.060 0.064 0.080 0.137 3.071 1.571 0.820 0.569 0.367 0.213 0.161 0.134 0.090 0.062 0.047 0.038
0.13 0.065 0.069 0.087 0.149 3.327 1.702 0.888 0.616 0.398 0.231 0.174 0.145 0.098 0.067 0.051 0.041
0.14 0.070 0.075 0.093 0.160 3.583 1.833 0.956 0.664 0.428 0.249 0.188 0.156 0.105 0.073 0.055 0.044
0.15 0.075 0.080 0.100 0.171 3.839 1.964 1.025 0.711 0.459 0.267 0.201 0.167 0.113 0.078 0.059 0.047
0.16 0.080 0.085 0.107 0.183 4.095 2.094 1.093 0.758 0.489 0.285 0.214 0.178 0.120 0.083 0.063 0.050
0.17 0.085 0.091 0.113 0.194 4.351 2.225 1.161 0.806 0.520 0.302 0.228 0.189 0.128 0.088 0.067 0.053
0.18 0.090 0.096 0.120 0.206 4.607 2.356 1.230 0.853 0.550 0.320 0.241 0.200 0.135 0.093 0.071 0.057
0.19 0.095 0.101 0.127 0.217 4.863 2.487 1.298 0.900 0.581 0.338 0.254 0.211 0.143 0.098 0.075 0.060
0.20 0.100 0.107 0.133 0.229 5.119 2.618 1.366 0.948 0.612 0.356 0.268 0.223 0.150 0.104 0.079 0.063
0.25 0.125 0.133 0.167 0.286 6.399 3.273 1.708 1.185 0.764 0.445 0.335 0.278 0.188 0.130 0.098 0.079
0.30 0.150 0.160 0.200 0.343 7.678 3.927 2.049 1.422 0.917 0.534 0.402 0.334 0.226 0.155 0.118 0.094
0.35 0.175 0.187 0.233 0.400 8.958 4.582 2.391 1.659 1.070 0.622 0.469 0.390 0.263 0.181 0.137 0.110
0.40 0.200 0.213 0.267 0.457 10.238 5.236 2.732 1.896 1.223 0.711 0.536 0.445 0.301 0.207 0.157 0.126
0.45 0.225 0.240 0.300 0.514 11.518 5.891 3.074 2.133 1.376 0.800 0.603 0.501 0.338 0.233 0.177 0.142
0.50 0.250 0.267 0.333 0.571 12.797 6.545 3.416 2.370 1.529 0.889 0.670 0.556 0.376 0.259 0.196 0.157
0.55 0.275 0.293 0.367 0.629 14.077 7.200 3.757 2.607 1.682 0.978 0.737 0.612 0.414 0.285 0.216 0.173
0.60 0.300 0.320 0.400 0.686 15.357 7.854 4.099 2.844 1.835 1.067 0.804 0.668 0.451 0.311 0.236 0.189
0.65 0.325 0.347 0.433 0.743 16.637 8.509 4.440 3.081 1.988 1.156 0.871 0.723 0.489 0.337 0.255 0.204
0.70 0.350 0.373 0.467 0.800 17.916 9.163 4.782 3.318 2.141 1.245 0.938 0.779 0.526 0.363 0.275 0.220
0.75 0.375 0.400 0.500 0.857 19.196 9.818 5.123 3.555 2.293 1.334 1.005 0.835 0.564 0.389 0.295 0.236
0.80 0.400 0.427 0.533 0.914 20.476 10.472 5.465 3.792 2.446 1.423 1.071 0.890 0.602 0.415 0.314 0.252
0.85 0.425 0.453 0.567 0.971 21.756 11.127 5.806 4.029 2.599 1.512 1.138 0.946 0.639 0.441 0.334 0.267
0.90 0.450 0.480 0.600 1.029 23.035 11.781 6.148 4.265 2.752 1.601 1.205 1.002 0.677 0.466 0.353 0.283
0.95 0.475 0.507 0.633 1.086 24.315 12.436 6.489 4.502 2.905 1.690 1.272 1.057 0.714 0.492 0.373 0.299
1.00 0.500 0.533 0.667 1.143 25.595 13.090 6.831 4.739 3.058 1.778 1.339 1.113 0.752 0.518 0.393 0.314
1.05 0.525 0.560 0.700 1.200 26.875 13.745 7.173 4.976 3.211 1.867 1.406 1.169 0.790 0.544 0.412 0.330


Very inverse curve
k tr
 2
 I  −1  I  −1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 13,5,  = 1 tr = 43.2
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 2.160 2.304 2.880 4.937 13.500 6.750 3.375 2.250 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.169 0.075 0.036 0.017
0.06 2.592 2.765 3.456 5.925 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 1.620 0.810 0.540 0.405 0.203 0.090 0.043 0.021
0.07 3.024 3.226 4.032 6.912 18.900 9.450 4.725 3.150 1.890 0.945 0.630 0.472 0.236 0.105 0.050 0.024
0.08 3.456 3.686 4.608 7.899 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.160 1.080 0.720 0.540 0.270 0.120 0.057 0.028
0.09 3.888 4.147 5.184 8.887 24.300 12.150 6.075 4.050 2.430 1.215 0.810 0.607 0.304 0.135 0.064 0.031
0.10 4.320 4.608 5.760 9.874 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.337 0.150 0.071 0.035
0.11 4.752 5.069 6.336 10.862 29.700 14.850 7.425 4.950 2.970 1.485 0.990 0.742 0.371 0.165 0.078 0.038
0.12 5.184 5.530 6.912 11.849 32.400 16.200 8.100 5.400 3.240 1.620 1.080 0.810 0.405 0.180 0.085 0.042
0.13 5.616 5.990 7.488 12.837 35.100 17.550 8.775 5.850 3.510 1.755 1.170 0.877 0.439 0.195 0.092 0.045
0.14 6.048 6.451 8.064 13.824 37.800 18.900 9.450 6.300 3.780 1.890 1.260 0.945 0.472 0.210 0.099 0.048
0.15 6.480 6.912 8.640 14.811 40.500 20.250 10.125 6.750 4.050 2.025 1.350 1.013 0.506 0.225 0.107 0.052
0.16 6.912 7.373 9.216 15.799 43.200 21.600 10.800 7.200 4.320 2.160 1.440 1.080 0.540 0.240 0.114 0.055
0.17 7.344 7.834 9.792 16.786 45.900 22.950 11.475 7.650 4.590 2.295 1.530 1.148 0.574 0.255 0.121 0.059
0.18 7.776 8.294 10.368 17.774 48.600 24.300 12.150 8.100 4.860 2.430 1.620 1.215 0.608 0.270 0.128 0.062
0.19 8.208 8.755 10.944 18.761 51.300 25.650 12.825 8.550 5.130 2.565 1.710 1.283 0.641 0.285 0.135 0.066
0.20 8.640 9.216 11.520 19.749 54.000 27.000 13.500 9.000 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 0.675 0.300 0.142 0.069
0.25 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 67.500 33.750 16.875 11.250 6.750 3.375 2.250 1.688 0.844 0.375 0.178 0.087
0.30 12.960 13.824 17.280 29.623 81.000 40.500 20.250 13.500 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.013 0.450 0.213 0.104
0.35 15.120 16.128 20.160 34.560 94.500 47.250 23.625 15.750 9.450 4.725 3.150 2.363 1.181 0.525 0.249 0.121
0.40 17.280 18.432 23.040 39.497 108.000 54.000 27.000 18.000 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 1.350 0.600 0.284 0.138
0.45 19.440 20.736 25.920 44.434 121.500 60.750 30.375 20.250 12.150 6.075 4.050 3.038 1.519 0.675 0.320 0.156
0.50 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 135.000 67.500 33.750 22.500 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 1.688 0.750 0.355 0.173
0.55 23.760 25.344 31.680 54.309 148.500 74.250 37.125 24.750 14.850 7.425 4.950 3.713 1.856 0.825 0.391 0.190
0.60 25.920 27.648 34.560 59.246 162.000 81.000 40.500 27.000 16.200 8.100 5.400 4.050 2.025 0.900 0.426 0.208
0.65 28.080 29.952 37.440 64.183 175.500 87.750 43.875 29.250 17.550 8.775 5.850 4.388 2.194 0.975 0.462 0.225
0.70 30.240 32.256 40.320 69.120 189.000 94.500 47.250 31.500 18.900 9.450 6.300 4.725 2.363 1.050 0.497 0.242
0.75 32.400 34.560 43.200 74.057 202.500 101.25 50.625 33.750 20.250 10.125 6.750 5.063 2.531 1.125 0.533 0.260
0.80 34.560 36.864 46.080 78.994 216.000 108.00 54.000 36.000 21.600 10.800 7.200 5.400 2.700 1.200 0.568 0.277
0.85 36.720 39.168 48.960 83.931 229.500 114.75 57.375 38.250 22.950 11.475 7.650 5.738 2.869 1.275 0.604 0.294
0.90 38.880 41.472 51.840 88.869 243.000 121.50 60.750 40.500 24.300 12.150 8.100 6.075 3.038 1.350 0.639 0.312
0.95 41.040 43.776 54.720 93.806 256.500 128.25 64.125 42.750 25.650 12.825 8.550 6.413 3.206 1.425 0.675 0.329
1.00 43.200 46.080 57.600 98.743 270.000 135.00 67.500 45.000 27.000 13.500 9.000 6.750 3.375 1.500 0.711 0.346
1.05 45.360 48.384 60.480 103.68 283.500 141.75 70.875 47.250 28.350 14.175 9.450 7.088 3.544 1.575 0.746 0.363


Extremely inverse curve
k tr
 2
 I  −1  I  −1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 80,  = 2 tr =58.2
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 39.024 19.048 9.091 5.797 3.200 1.333 0.762 0.500 0.167 0.040 0.010 0.003
0.06 3.492 3.725 4.656 7.982 46.829 22.857 10.909 6.957 3.840 1.600 0.914 0.600 0.200 0.048 0.012 0.003
0.07 4.074 4.346 5.432 9.312 54.634 26.667 12.727 8.116 4.480 1.867 1.067 0.700 0.233 0.057 0.014 0.004
0.08 4.656 4.966 6.208 10.642 62.439 30.476 14.545 9.275 5.120 2.133 1.219 0.800 0.267 0.065 0.016 0.004
0.09 5.238 5.587 6.984 11.973 70.244 34.286 16.364 10.435 5.760 2.400 1.371 0.900 0.300 0.073 0.018 0.005
0.10 5.820 6.208 7.760 13.303 78.049 38.095 18.182 11.594 6.400 2.667 1.524 1.000 0.333 0.081 0.020 0.005
0.11 6.402 6.829 8.536 14.633 85.854 41.905 20.000 12.754 7.040 2.933 1.676 1.100 0.367 0.089 0.022 0.006
0.12 6.984 7.450 9.312 15.963 93.659 45.714 21.818 13.913 7.680 3.200 1.829 1.200 0.400 0.097 0.024 0.006
0.13 7.566 8.070 10.088 17.294 101.464 49.524 23.636 15.072 8.320 3.467 1.981 1.300 0.433 0.105 0.026 0.007
0.14 8.148 8.691 10.864 18.624 109.268 53.333 25.455 16.232 8.960 3.733 2.133 1.400 0.467 0.113 0.028 0.007
0.15 8.730 9.312 11.640 19.954 117.073 57.143 27.273 17.391 9.600 4.000 2.286 1.500 0.500 0.121 0.030 0.008
0.16 9.312 9.933 12.416 21.285 124.878 60.952 29.091 18.551 10.240 4.267 2.438 1.600 0.533 0.129 0.032 0.008
0.17 9.894 10.554 13.192 22.615 132.683 64.762 30.909 19.710 10.880 4.533 2.590 1.700 0.567 0.137 0.034 0.009
0.18 10.476 11.174 13.968 23.945 140.488 68.571 32.727 20.870 11.520 4.800 2.743 1.800 0.600 0.145 0.036 0.009
0.19 11.058 11.795 14.744 25.275 148.293 72.381 34.545 22.029 12.160 5.067 2.895 1.900 0.633 0.154 0.038 0.010
0.20 11.640 12.416 15.520 26.606 156.098 76.190 36.364 23.188 12.800 5.333 3.048 2.000 0.667 0.162 0.040 0.010
0.25 14.550 15.520 19.400 33.257 195.122 95.238 45.455 28.986 16.000 6.667 3.810 2.500 0.833 0.202 0.050 0.013
0.30 17.460 18.624 23.280 39.909 234.147 114.286 54.545 34.783 19.200 8.000 4.571 3.000 1.000 0.242 0.060 0.015
0.35 20.370 21.728 27.160 46.560 273.171 133.333 63.636 40.580 22.400 9.333 5.333 3.500 1.167 0.283 0.070 0.018
0.40 23.280 24.832 31.040 53.211 312.195 152.381 72.727 46.377 25.600 10.667 6.095 4.000 1.333 0.323 0.080 0.020
0.45 26.190 27.936 34.920 59.863 351.220 171.429 81.818 52.174 28.800 12.000 6.857 4.500 1.500 0.364 0.090 0.023
0.50 29.100 31.040 38.800 66.514 390.244 190.476 90.909 57.971 32.000 13.333 7.619 5.000 1.667 0.404 0.100 0.025
0.55 32.010 34.144 42.680 73.166 429.269 209.524 100.000 63.768 35.200 14.667 8.381 5.500 1.833 0.444 0.110 0.028
0.60 34.920 37.248 46.560 79.817 468.293 228.571 109.091 69.565 38.400 16.000 9.143 6.000 2.000 0.485 0.120 0.030
0.65 37.830 40.352 50.440 86.469 507.318 247.619 118.182 75.362 41.600 17.333 9.905 6.500 2.167 0.525 0.130 0.033
0.70 40.740 43.456 54.320 93.120 546.342 266.667 127.273 81.159 44.800 18.667 10.667 7.000 2.333 0.566 0.140 0.035
0.75 43.650 46.560 58.200 99.771 585.367 285.714 136.364 86.957 48.000 20.000 11.429 7.500 2.500 0.606 0.150 0.038
0.80 46.560 49.664 62.080 106.423 624.391 304.762 145.455 92.754 51.200 21.333 12.190 8.000 2.667 0.646 0.160 0.040
0.85 49.470 52.768 65.960 113.074 663.415 323.810 154.545 98.551 54.400 22.667 12.952 8.500 2.833 0.687 0.170 0.043
0.90 52.380 55.872 69.840 119.726 702.440 342.857 163.636 104.348 57.600 24.000 13.714 9.000 3.000 0.727 0.180 0.045
0.95 55.290 58.976 73.720 126.377 741.464 361.905 172.727 110.145 60.800 25.333 14.476 9.500 3.167 0.768 0.190 0.048
1.00 58.200 62.080 77.600 133.029 780.489 380.952 181.818 115.942 64.000 26.667 15.238 10.000 3.333 0.808 0.201 0.050
1.05 61.110 65.184 81.480 139.680 819.513 400.000 190.909 121.739 67.200 28.000 16.000 10.500 3.500 0.848 0.211 0.053


Very Inverse Special Curve
k tr
 2
 I  −1  I  −1
I  I 
 0
 0
K = 2,6 =1
M \ I/Io 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 7.00 10.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 30.00 40.00
0.05 2.600 1.300 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.260 0.130 0.087 0.065 0.043 0.032 0.022 0.014 0.012 0.009 0.007 0.004 0.003
0.06 3.120 1.560 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.312 0.156 0.104 0.078 0.052 0.039 0.026 0.017 0.014 0.011 0.008 0.005 0.004
0.07 3.640 1.820 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.364 0.182 0.121 0.091 0.061 0.045 0.030 0.020 0.017 0.013 0.010 0.006 0.005
0.08 4.160 2.080 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.416 0.208 0.139 0.104 0.069 0.052 0.035 0.023 0.019 0.015 0.011 0.007 0.005
0.09 4.680 2.340 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.468 0.234 0.156 0.117 0.078 0.058 0.039 0.026 0.021 0.017 0.012 0.008 0.006
0.10 5.200 2.600 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.520 0.260 0.173 0.130 0.087 0.065 0.043 0.029 0.024 0.019 0.014 0.009 0.007
0.11 5.720 2.860 1.430 0.953 0.715 0.572 0.286 0.191 0.143 0.095 0.071 0.048 0.032 0.026 0.020 0.015 0.010 0.007
0.12 6.240 3.120 1.560 1.040 0.780 0.624 0.312 0.208 0.156 0.104 0.078 0.052 0.035 0.028 0.022 0.016 0.011 0.008
0.13 6.760 3.380 1.690 1.127 0.845 0.676 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.113 0.084 0.056 0.038 0.031 0.024 0.018 0.012 0.009
0.14 7.280 3.640 1.820 1.213 0.910 0.728 0.364 0.243 0.182 0.121 0.091 0.061 0.040 0.033 0.026 0.019 0.013 0.009
0.15 7.800 3.900 1.950 1.300 0.975 0.780 0.390 0.260 0.195 0.130 0.098 0.065 0.043 0.035 0.028 0.021 0.013 0.010
0.16 8.320 4.160 2.080 1.387 1.040 0.832 0.416 0.277 0.208 0.139 0.104 0.069 0.046 0.038 0.030 0.022 0.014 0.011
0.17 8.840 4.420 2.210 1.473 1.105 0.884 0.442 0.295 0.221 0.147 0.111 0.074 0.049 0.040 0.032 0.023 0.015 0.011
0.18 9.360 4.680 2.340 1.560 1.170 0.936 0.468 0.312 0.234 0.156 0.117 0.078 0.052 0.043 0.033 0.025 0.016 0.012
0.19 9.880 4.940 2.470 1.647 1.235 0.988 0.494 0.329 0.247 0.165 0.124 0.082 0.055 0.045 0.035 0.026 0.017 0.013
0.20 10.400 5.200 2.600 1.733 1.300 1.040 0.520 0.347 0.260 0.173 0.130 0.087 0.058 0.047 0.037 0.027 0.018 0.013
0.25 13.000 6.500 3.250 2.167 1.625 1.300 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.217 0.163 0.108 0.072 0.059 0.046 0.034 0.022 0.017
0.30 15.600 7.800 3.900 2.600 1.950 1.560 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.260 0.195 0.130 0.087 0.071 0.056 0.041 0.027 0.020
0.35 18.200 9.100 4.550 3.033 2.275 1.820 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.303 0.228 0.152 0.101 0.083 0.065 0.048 0.031 0.023
0.40 20.800 10.400 5.200 3.467 2.600 2.080 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.347 0.260 0.173 0.116 0.095 0.074 0.055 0.036 0.027
0.45 23.400 11.700 5.850 3.900 2.925 2.340 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.390 0.293 0.195 0.130 0.106 0.084 0.062 0.040 0.030
0.50 26.000 13.000 6.500 4.333 3.250 2.600 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.217 0.144 0.118 0.093 0.068 0.045 0.033
0.55 28.600 14.300 7.150 4.767 3.575 2.860 1.430 0.953 0.715 0.477 0.358 0.238 0.159 0.130 0.102 0.075 0.049 0.037
0.60 31.200 15.600 7.800 5.200 3.900 3.120 1.560 1.040 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.260 0.173 0.142 0.111 0.082 0.054 0.040
0.65 33.800 16.900 8.450 5.633 4.225 3.380 1.690 1.127 0.845 0.563 0.423 0.282 0.188 0.154 0.121 0.089 0.058 0.043
0.70 36.400 18.200 9.100 6.067 4.550 3.640 1.820 1.213 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.303 0.202 0.165 0.130 0.096 0.063 0.047
0.75 39.000 19.500 9.750 6.500 4.875 3.900 1.950 1.300 0.975 0.650 0.488 0.325 0.217 0.177 0.139 0.103 0.067 0.050
0.80 41.600 20.800 10.400 6.933 5.200 4.160 2.080 1.387 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.347 0.231 0.189 0.149 0.109 0.072 0.053
0.85 44.200 22.100 11.050 7.367 5.525 4.420 2.210 1.473 1.105 0.737 0.553 0.368 0.246 0.201 0.158 0.116 0.076 0.057
0.90 46.800 23.400 11.700 7.800 5.850 4.680 2.340 1.560 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.390 0.260 0.213 0.167 0.123 0.081 0.060
0.95 49.400 24.700 12.350 8.233 6.175 4.940 2.470 1.647 1.235 0.823 0.618 0.412 0.274 0.225 0.176 0.130 0.085 0.063
1.00 52.000 26.000 13.000 8.667 6.500 5.200 2.600 1.733 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.433 0.289 0.236 0.186 0.137 0.090 0.067
1.05 54.600 27.300 13.650 9.100 6.825 5.460 2.730 1.820 1.365 0.910 0.683 0.455 0.303 0.248 0.195 0.144 0.094 0.070


35.2 ANSI CURVES
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to ANSI, which correspond to the following types:
❑ Normal Inverse.
❑ Very Inverse.
❑ Extremely Inverse.
❑ Moderate Inverse.
T = M   A + 
B D E tr
+ + TRECAIDA = M 
  − CI 2  3
 I   I − C  I − C  2
 I  −1
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
in which:

❑ M : multiplier (“time dial”). Valid range 0.05 to 30.0, in steps of 0.1
❑ A, B, C, D, E, tr: constants which depend on the type of curve:
Constants Inverse. Very inverse Extremely inverse Moderate inverse

A 0.0274 0.0615 0.0399 0.1735
B 2.2614 0.7989 0.2294 0.6791
C 0.3000 0.3400 0.5000 0.8000
D -4.1899 -0.2840 3.0094 -0.0800
E 9.1272 4.0505 0.7222 0.1271
tr 0.99 4.678 6.008 1.2
The following represent the curves which correspond to indexes 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0 and 30.0 for each type
of characteristic. Take into account that between every two curves differentiated in 1.0 there are another 9 curves.
For the values of I/Io greater than 40, the trip time is the correspond time of I/Io=40.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.

User Manual 672
Normal inverse curve
T = M   A + 
B D E tr
  I − C 2 3 
 I   I − C  I − C 
2
 I  −1
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
@Fig.174.png-H:54,7-W:250@ @Fig.175.png-H:61,65-W:143,4@
A = 0.0274, B = 2.2614, C = 0.3000, D = -4.1899, E = 9.1272 tr = 0.99
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.5 0.495 0.528 0.660 1.131 8.614 7.067 4.944 3.613 2.142 0.883 0.523 0.377 0.203 0.113 0.066 0.041
1.0 0.990 1.056 1.320 2.263 17.229 14.134 9.888 7.226 4.284 1.766 1.047 0.754 0.407 0.226 0.133 0.082
2.0 1.980 2.112 2.640 4.526 34.457 28.268 19.775 14.452 8.568 3.531 2.094 1.508 0.814 0.452 0.265 0.164
3.0 2.970 3.168 3.960 6.789 51.686 42.402 29.663 21.678 12.853 5.297 3.140 2.262 1.220 0.678 0.398 0.246
4.0 3.960 4.224 5.280 9.051 68.915 56.536 39.550 28.904 17.137 7.062 4.187 3.016 1.627 0.904 0.530 0.327
5.0 4.950 5.280 6.600 11.314 86.144 70.670 49.438 36.131 21.421 8.828 5.234 3.770 2.034 1.130 0.663 0.409
6.0 5.940 6.336 7.920 13.577 103.372 84.804 59.325 43.357 25.705 10.594 6.281 4.524 2.441 1.356 0.796 0.491
7.0 6.930 7.392 9.240 15.840 120.601 98.938 69.213 50.583 29.989 12.359 7.328 5.277 2.848 1.582 0.928 0.573
8.0 7.920 8.448 10.560 18.103 137.830 113.072 79.100 57.809 34.274 14.125 8.374 6.031 3.254 1.808 1.061 0.655
9.0 8.910 9.504 11.880 20.366 155.059 127.206 88.988 65.035 38.558 15.890 9.421 6.785 3.661 2.034 1.193 0.737
10.0 9.900 10.560 13.200 22.629 172.287 141.340 98.875 72.261 42.842 17.656 10.468 7.539 4.068 2.260 1.326 0.818
11.0 10.890 11.616 14.520 24.891 189.516 155.474 108.763 79.487 47.126 19.422 11.515 8.293 4.475 2.486 1.458 0.900
12.0 11.880 12.672 15.840 27.154 206.745 169.608 118.650 86.713 51.410 21.187 12.562 9.047 4.881 2.712 1.591 0.982
13.0 12.870 13.728 17.160 29.417 223.974 183.742 128.538 93.939 55.694 22.953 13.608 9.801 5.288 2.938 1.724 1.064
14.0 13.860 14.784 18.480 31.680 241.202 197.876 138.425 101.165 59.979 24.719 14.655 10.555 5.695 3.164 1.856 1.146
15.0 14.850 15.840 19.800 33.943 258.431 212.010 148.313 108.392 64.263 26.484 15.702 11.309 6.102 3.390 1.989 1.228
16.0 15.840 16.896 21.120 36.206 275.660 226.144 158.200 115.618 68.547 28.250 16.749 12.063 6.509 3.616 2.121 1.310
17.0 16.830 17.952 22.440 38.469 292.889 240.278 168.088 122.844 72.831 30.015 17.796 12.817 6.915 3.842 2.254 1.391
18.0 17.820 19.008 23.760 40.731 310.117 254.412 177.975 130.070 77.115 31.781 18.842 13.571 7.322 4.068 2.387 1.473
19.0 18.810 20.064 25.080 42.994 327.346 268.546 187.863 137.296 81.400 33.547 19.889 14.324 7.729 4.294 2.519 1.555
20.0 19.800 21.120 26.400 45.257 344.575 282.680 197.750 144.522 85.684 35.312 20.936 15.078 8.136 4.520 2.652 1.637
21.0 20.790 22.176 27.720 47.520 361.803 296.814 207.638 151.748 89.968 37.078 21.983 15.832 8.543 4.746 2.784 1.719
22.0 21.780 23.232 29.040 49.783 379.032 310.948 217.525 158.974 94.252 38.843 23.030 16.586 8.949 4.972 2.917 1.801
23.0 22.770 24.288 30.360 52.046 396.261 325.082 227.413 166.200 98.536 40.609 24.076 17.340 9.356 5.198 3.050 1.883
24.0 23.760 25.344 31.680 54.309 413.490 339.216 237.300 173.426 102.821 42.375 25.123 18.094 9.763 5.424 3.182 1.964
25.0 24.750 26.400 33.000 56.571 430.718 353.350 247.188 180.653 107.105 44.140 26.170 18.848 10.170 5.650 3.315 2.046
26.0 25.740 27.456 34.320 58.834 447.947 367.484 257.075 187.879 111.389 45.906 27.217 19.602 10.576 5.876 3.447 2.128
27.0 26.730 28.512 35.640 61.097 465.176 381.618 266.963 195.105 115.673 47.671 28.264 20.356 10.983 6.102 3.580 2.210
28.0 27.720 29.568 36.960 63.360 482.405 395.752 276.850 202.331 119.957 49.437 29.310 21.110 11.390 6.328 3.713 2.292
29.0 28.710 30.624 38.280 65.623 499.633 409.886 286.738 209.557 124.242 51.203 30.357 21.864 11.797 6.554 3.845 2.374
30.0 29.700 31.680 39.600 67.886 516.862 424.020 296.625 216.783 128.526 52.968 31.404 22.618 12.204 6.780 3.978 2.455

User Manual 673

User Manual 674
Very inverse curve
T = M   A + 
B D E tr
  − C
I 2 3 
 I   I − C  I − C 
2
 I  −1
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
@Fig.176.png-H:54,7-W:250@ @Fig.177.png-H:61,65-W:143,4@
A = 0.0615, B = 0.7989, C = 0.3400, D = -0.2840, E = 4.0505 tr = 4.678
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.5 2.339 2.495 3.119 5.346 5.970 4.924 3.487 2.582 1.567 0.663 0.386 0.268 0.130 0.073 0.051 0.041
1.0 4.678 4.990 6.237 10.693 11.940 9.848 6.975 5.164 3.134 1.325 0.772 0.537 0.260 0.146 0.102 0.082
2.0 9.356 9.980 12.475 21.385 23.881 19.696 13.949 10.327 6.268 2.650 1.545 1.074 0.520 0.291 0.204 0.163
3.0 14.034 14.970 18.712 32.078 35.821 29.544 20.924 15.491 9.402 3.976 2.317 1.611 0.780 0.437 0.306 0.245
4.0 18.712 19.959 24.949 42.770 47.762 39.393 27.898 20.655 12.537 5.301 3.090 2.148 1.040 0.583 0.408 0.326
5.0 23.390 24.949 31.187 53.463 59.702 49.241 34.873 25.819 15.671 6.626 3.862 2.685 1.299 0.728 0.510 0.408
6.0 28.068 29.939 37.424 64.155 71.642 59.089 41.848 30.982 18.805 7.951 4.635 3.221 1.559 0.874 0.612 0.489
7.0 32.746 34.929 43.661 74.848 83.583 68.937 48.822 36.146 21.939 9.276 5.407 3.758 1.819 1.020 0.714 0.571
8.0 37.424 39.919 49.899 85.541 95.523 78.785 55.797 41.310 25.073 10.602 6.179 4.295 2.079 1.165 0.815 0.652
9.0 42.102 44.909 56.136 96.233 107.464 88.633 62.771 46.474 28.207 11.927 6.952 4.832 2.339 1.311 0.917 0.734
10.0 46.780 49.899 62.373 106.926 119.404 98.481 69.746 51.637 31.341 13.252 7.724 5.369 2.599 1.457 1.019 0.815
11.0 51.458 54.889 68.611 117.618 131.344 108.330 76.721 56.801 34.475 14.577 8.497 5.906 2.859 1.602 1.121 0.897
12.0 56.136 59.878 74.848 128.311 143.285 118.178 83.695 61.965 37.610 15.902 9.269 6.443 3.119 1.748 1.223 0.978
13.0 60.814 64.868 81.085 139.003 155.225 128.026 90.670 67.128 40.744 17.228 10.041 6.980 3.379 1.893 1.325 1.060
14.0 65.492 69.858 87.323 149.696 167.165 137.874 97.645 72.292 43.878 18.553 10.814 7.517 3.638 2.039 1.427 1.141
15.0 70.170 74.848 93.560 160.389 179.106 147.722 104.619 77.456 47.012 19.878 11.586 8.054 3.898 2.185 1.529 1.223
16.0 74.848 79.838 99.797 171.081 191.046 157.570 111.594 82.620 50.146 21.203 12.359 8.591 4.158 2.330 1.631 1.304
17.0 79.526 84.828 106.035 181.774 202.987 167.419 118.568 87.783 53.280 22.528 13.131 9.127 4.418 2.476 1.733 1.386
18.0 84.204 89.818 112.272 192.466 214.927 177.267 125.543 92.947 56.414 23.853 13.904 9.664 4.678 2.622 1.835 1.468
19.0 88.882 94.807 118.509 203.159 226.867 187.115 132.518 98.111 59.549 25.179 14.676 10.201 4.938 2.767 1.937 1.549
20.0 93.560 99.797 124.747 213.851 238.808 196.963 139.492 103.275 62.683 26.504 15.448 10.738 5.198 2.913 2.039 1.631
21.0 98.238 104.787 130.984 224.544 250.748 206.811 146.467 108.438 65.817 27.829 16.221 11.275 5.458 3.059 2.141 1.712
22.0 102.916 109.777 137.221 235.237 262.689 216.659 153.441 113.602 68.951 29.154 16.993 11.812 5.718 3.204 2.243 1.794
23.0 107.594 114.767 143.459 245.929 274.629 226.507 160.416 118.766 72.085 30.479 17.766 12.349 5.977 3.350 2.344 1.875
24.0 112.272 119.757 149.696 256.622 286.569 236.356 167.391 123.930 75.219 31.805 18.538 12.886 6.237 3.496 2.446 1.957
25.0 116.950 124.747 155.933 267.314 298.510 246.204 174.365 129.093 78.353 33.130 19.310 13.423 6.497 3.641 2.548 2.038
26.0 121.628 129.737 162.171 278.007 310.450 256.052 181.340 134.257 81.487 34.455 20.083 13.960 6.757 3.787 2.650 2.120
27.0 126.306 134.726 168.408 288.699 322.391 265.900 188.314 139.421 84.622 35.780 20.855 14.497 7.017 3.933 2.752 2.201
28.0 130.984 139.716 174.645 299.392 334.331 275.748 195.289 144.584 87.756 37.105 21.628 15.034 7.277 4.078 2.854 2.283
29.0 135.662 144.706 180.883 310.085 346.271 285.596 202.264 149.748 90.890 38.431 22.400 15.570 7.537 4.224 2.956 2.364
30.0 140.340 149.696 187.120 320.777 358.212 295.444 209.238 154.912 94.024 39.756 23.173 16.107 7.797 4.370 3.058 2.446

User Manual 675

User Manual 676
Extremely inverse curve
T = M   A + 
B D E tr
  − C
I 2 3 
 I   I − C  I − C   I  −1
2
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
A = 0.0399, B = 0.2294, C = 0.5000, D = 3.0094, E = 0.7222 tr = 6.008
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.5 3.004 3.204 4.005 6.866 7.373 6.063 4.307 3.220 2.000 0.872 0.499 0.330 0.124 0.049 0.030 0.024
1.0 6.008 6.409 8.011 13.733 14.746 12.125 8.615 6.439 4.001 1.744 0.997 0.659 0.247 0.098 0.060 0.048
2.0 12.016 12.817 16.021 27.465 29.492 24.250 17.230 12.879 8.002 3.489 1.994 1.319 0.495 0.196 0.119 0.095
3.0 18.024 19.226 24.032 41.198 44.239 36.376 25.844 19.318 12.003 5.233 2.992 1.978 0.742 0.295 0.179 0.143
4.0 24.032 25.634 32.043 54.930 58.985 48.501 34.459 25.758 16.004 6.977 3.989 2.638 0.990 0.393 0.239 0.191
5.0 30.040 32.043 40.053 68.663 73.731 60.626 43.074 32.197 20.004 8.722 4.986 3.297 1.237 0.491 0.298 0.238
6.0 36.048 38.451 48.064 82.395 88.477 72.751 51.689 38.636 24.005 10.466 5.983 3.956 1.484 0.589 0.358 0.286
7.0 42.056 44.860 56.075 96.128 103.224 84.876 60.303 45.076 28.006 12.210 6.981 4.616 1.732 0.688 0.418 0.334
8.0 48.064 51.268 64.085 109.861 117.970 97.002 68.918 51.515 32.007 13.955 7.978 5.275 1.979 0.786 0.477 0.381
9.0 54.072 57.677 72.096 123.593 132.716 109.127 77.533 57.954 36.008 15.699 8.975 5.934 2.227 0.884 0.537 0.429
10.0 60.080 64.085 80.107 137.326 147.462 121.252 86.148 64.394 40.009 17.443 9.972 6.594 2.474 0.982 0.597 0.476
11.0 66.088 70.494 88.117 151.058 162.208 133.377 94.763 70.833 44.010 19.188 10.969 7.253 2.722 1.081 0.656 0.524
12.0 72.096 76.902 96.128 164.791 176.955 145.502 103.377 77.273 48.011 20.932 11.967 7.913 2.969 1.179 0.716 0.572
13.0 78.104 83.311 104.139 178.523 191.701 157.628 111.992 83.712 52.012 22.676 12.964 8.572 3.216 1.277 0.776 0.619
14.0 84.112 89.719 112.149 192.256 206.447 169.753 120.607 90.151 56.013 24.421 13.961 9.231 3.464 1.375 0.835 0.667
15.0 90.120 96.128 120.160 205.989 221.193 181.878 129.222 96.591 60.013 26.165 14.958 9.891 3.711 1.474 0.895 0.715
16.0 96.128 102.537 128.171 219.721 235.940 194.003 137.837 103.030 64.014 27.909 15.956 10.550 3.959 1.572 0.955 0.762
17.0 102.136 108.945 136.181 233.454 250.686 206.128 146.451 109.470 68.015 29.654 16.953 11.210 4.206 1.670 1.014 0.810
18.0 108.144 115.354 144.192 247.186 265.432 218.254 155.066 115.909 72.016 31.398 17.950 11.869 4.453 1.768 1.074 0.858
19.0 114.152 121.762 152.203 260.919 280.178 230.379 163.681 122.348 76.017 33.142 18.947 12.528 4.701 1.866 1.134 0.905
20.0 120.160 128.171 160.213 274.651 294.924 242.504 172.296 128.788 80.018 34.887 19.944 13.188 4.948 1.965 1.194 0.953
21.0 126.168 134.579 168.224 288.384 309.671 254.629 180.910 135.227 84.019 36.631 20.942 13.847 5.196 2.063 1.253 1.001
22.0 132.176 140.988 176.235 302.117 324.417 266.754 189.525 141.666 88.020 38.375 21.939 14.506 5.443 2.161 1.313 1.048
23.0 138.184 147.396 184.245 315.849 339.163 278.879 198.140 148.106 92.021 40.120 22.936 15.166 5.691 2.259 1.373 1.096
24.0 144.192 153.805 192.256 329.582 353.909 291.005 206.755 154.545 96.022 41.864 23.933 15.825 5.938 2.358 1.432 1.144
25.0 150.200 160.213 200.267 343.314 368.655 303.130 215.370 160.985 100.022 43.608 24.931 16.485 6.185 2.456 1.492 1.191
26.0 156.208 166.622 208.277 357.047 383.402 315.255 223.984 167.424 104.023 45.353 25.928 17.144 6.433 2.554 1.552 1.239
27.0 162.216 173.030 216.288 370.779 398.148 327.380 232.599 173.863 108.024 47.097 26.925 17.803 6.680 2.652 1.611 1.286
28.0 168.224 179.439 224.299 384.512 412.894 339.505 241.214 180.303 112.025 48.841 27.922 18.463 6.928 2.751 1.671 1.334
29.0 174.232 185.847 232.309 398.245 427.640 351.631 249.829 186.742 116.026 50.586 28.920 19.122 7.175 2.849 1.731 1.382
30.0 180.240 192.256 240.320 411.977 442.387 363.756 258.444 193.182 120.027 52.330 29.917 19.782 7.422 2.947 1.790 1.429

User Manual 677

User Manual 678
Moderate inverse curve
T = M   A + 
B D E tr
  − C
I 2  3
 I   I − C  I − C  2
 I  −1
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0  
 0
A = 0.1735, B = 0.6791, C = 0.8000, D = -0.0800, E = 0.1271 tr = 1.2
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.5 0.600 0.640 0.800 1.371 4.872 3.128 1.679 1.114 0.675 0.379 0.286 0.239 0.166 0.123 0.104 0.095
1.0 1.200 1.280 1.600 2.743 9.744 6.256 3.357 2.229 1.351 0.757 0.571 0.478 0.332 0.247 0.209 0.191
2.0 2.400 2.560 3.200 5.486 19.489 12.511 6.714 4.457 2.702 1.515 1.142 0.955 0.665 0.493 0.417 0.382
3.0 3.600 3.840 4.800 8.229 29.233 18.767 10.072 6.686 4.053 2.272 1.713 1.433 0.997 0.740 0.626 0.572
4.0 4.800 5.120 6.400 10.971 38.977 25.023 13.429 8.914 5.404 3.030 2.285 1.910 1.329 0.986 0.835 0.763
5.0 6.000 6.400 8.000 13.714 48.722 31.278 16.786 11.143 6.755 3.787 2.856 2.388 1.662 1.233 1.043 0.954
6.0 7.200 7.680 9.600 16.457 58.466 37.534 20.143 13.371 8.106 4.544 3.427 2.866 1.994 1.479 1.252 1.145
7.0 8.400 8.960 11.200 19.200 68.210 43.790 23.500 15.600 9.457 5.302 3.998 3.343 2.327 1.726 1.461 1.335
8.0 9.600 10.240 12.800 21.943 77.954 50.045 26.857 17.828 10.807 6.059 4.569 3.821 2.659 1.972 1.669 1.526
9.0 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 87.699 56.301 30.215 20.057 12.158 6.817 5.140 4.298 2.991 2.219 1.878 1.717
10.0 12.000 12.800 16.000 27.429 97.443 62.557 33.572 22.285 13.509 7.574 5.712 4.776 3.324 2.465 2.087 1.908
11.0 13.200 14.080 17.600 30.171 107.187 68.813 36.929 24.514 14.860 8.332 6.283 5.253 3.656 2.712 2.295 2.099
12.0 14.400 15.360 19.200 32.914 116.932 75.068 40.286 26.742 16.211 9.089 6.854 5.731 3.988 2.958 2.504 2.289
13.0 15.600 16.640 20.800 35.657 126.676 81.324 43.643 28.971 17.562 9.846 7.425 6.209 4.321 3.205 2.713 2.480
14.0 16.800 17.920 22.400 38.400 136.420 87.580 47.001 31.199 18.913 10.604 7.996 6.686 4.653 3.451 2.921 2.671
15.0 18.000 19.200 24.000 41.143 146.165 93.835 50.358 33.428 20.264 11.361 8.567 7.164 4.986 3.698 3.130 2.862
16.0 19.200 20.480 25.600 43.886 155.909 100.091 53.715 35.656 21.615 12.119 9.139 7.641 5.318 3.945 3.339 3.052
17.0 20.400 21.760 27.200 46.629 165.653 106.347 57.072 37.885 22.966 12.876 9.710 8.119 5.650 4.191 3.547 3.243
18.0 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 175.398 112.602 60.429 40.113 24.317 13.633 10.281 8.597 5.983 4.438 3.756 3.434
19.0 22.800 24.320 30.400 52.114 185.142 118.858 63.787 42.342 25.668 14.391 10.852 9.074 6.315 4.684 3.965 3.625
20.0 24.000 25.600 32.000 54.857 194.886 125.114 67.144 44.570 27.019 15.148 11.423 9.552 6.647 4.931 4.173 3.815
21.0 25.200 26.880 33.600 57.600 204.630 131.369 70.501 46.799 28.370 15.906 11.994 10.029 6.980 5.177 4.382 4.006
22.0 26.400 28.160 35.200 60.343 214.375 137.625 73.858 49.027 29.720 16.663 12.565 10.507 7.312 5.424 4.591 4.197
23.0 27.600 29.440 36.800 63.086 224.119 143.881 77.215 51.256 31.071 17.421 13.137 10.985 7.645 5.670 4.799 4.388
24.0 28.800 30.720 38.400 65.829 233.863 150.136 80.572 53.484 32.422 18.178 13.708 11.462 7.977 5.917 5.008 4.579
25.0 30.000 32.000 40.000 68.571 243.608 156.392 83.930 55.713 33.773 18.935 14.279 11.940 8.309 6.163 5.217 4.769
26.0 31.200 33.280 41.600 71.314 253.352 162.648 87.287 57.941 35.124 19.693 14.850 12.417 8.642 6.410 5.425 4.960
27.0 32.400 34.560 43.200 74.057 263.096 168.903 90.644 60.170 36.475 20.450 15.421 12.895 8.974 6.656 5.634 5.151
28.0 33.600 35.840 44.800 76.800 272.841 175.159 94.001 62.398 37.826 21.208 15.992 13.373 9.306 6.903 5.843 5.342
29.0 34.800 37.120 46.400 79.543 282.585 181.415 97.358 64.627 39.177 21.965 16.564 13.850 9.639 7.149 6.051 5.532
30.0 36.000 38.400 48.000 82.286 292.329 187.671 100.716 66.855 40.528 22.722 17.135 14.328 9.971 7.396 6.260 5.723

User Manual 679

User Manual 680
35.2.1 Battery voltage curves

Only available in CB models

User Manual 681
35.3 IEC 60255-151 CURVES89
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to IEC 60255-151, which correspond to the following types:
❑ IEEE Moderate Inverse

❑ IEEE Very Inverse
❑ IEEE Extremely Inverse
𝑘 𝑡𝑟
𝑇 = 𝑀[ 𝐼 𝛼
+ 𝑐] 𝑇𝐷𝑅𝑂𝑃 = 𝑀 [ 𝐼 2
]
( ) −1 1−( )
𝐼0 𝐼0
in which:

❑ M : multiplier (“time dial”). Valid range 0.025 to 15.0, in steps of 0.005
❑ K, , tr, c: constants which depend on the type of curve:
Constants IEEE Moderte Inverse IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Extremely Inverse
K 0.0515 19.61 28.2
 0.02 2 2
c 0.114 0.491 0.1217
tr 4.85 21.6 29.1
The following represent the curves which correspond to indexes 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 and 1.0 for
each type of characteristic. Bear in mind that there are another 9 curves between each of the two curves illustrated, except
between 0.05 and 0.1, between which there are another 4.
89
Avaliable from firmware version 6.0.8.2 and ICD version 8.2.0.0.

User Manual 682
IEEE Moderate Inverse curve
𝑘 𝑡𝑟
+ 𝑐] 𝑇𝑅𝐸𝐶𝐴𝐼𝐷𝐴 = 𝑀 [ 𝐼 2
]
( ) −1 1−( )
𝐼0 𝐼0
K = 0,0515,  = 0,02, c = 0,114, tr = 4,85
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 0.243 0.259 0.323 0.554 2.643 1.355 0.711 0.495 0.322 0.190 0.145 0.122 0.084 0.060 0.047 0.039
0.06 0.291 0.310 0.388 0.665 3.172 1.626 0.853 0.594 0.386 0.228 0.174 0.146 0.101 0.072 0.057 0.047
0.340 0.362 0.453 0.776 3.701 1.897 0.995 0.693 0.451 0.266 0.203 0.170 0.118 0.084 0.066 0.055
0.07
0.08 0.388 0.414 0.517 0.887 4.229 2.168 1.137 0.792 0.515 0.304 0.232 0.195 0.135 0.097 0.076 0.063
0.09 0.437 0.466 0.582 0.998 4.758 2.439 1.279 0.891 0.580 0.342 0.261 0.219 0.152 0.109 0.085 0.071
0.485 0.517 0.647 1.109 5.287 2.711 1.421 0.990 0.644 0.380 0.290 0.243 0.169 0.121 0.095 0.079
0.10
0.11 0.534 0.569 0.711 1.219 5.815 2.982 1.563 1.089 0.708 0.418 0.319 0.268 0.186 0.133 0.104 0.087
0.12 0.582 0.621 0.776 1.330 6.344 3.253 1.705 1.188 0.773 0.456 0.348 0.292 0.203 0.145 0.114 0.094
0.631 0.673 0.841 1.441 6.872 3.524 1.848 1.287 0.837 0.494 0.377 0.316 0.219 0.157 0.123 0.102
0.13
0.14 0.679 0.724 0.905 1.552 7.401 3.795 1.990 1.386 0.901 0.532 0.406 0.341 0.236 0.169 0.133 0.110
0.15 0.728 0.776 0.970 1.663 7.930 4.066 2.132 1.485 0.966 0.570 0.435 0.365 0.253 0.181 0.142 0.118
0.776 0.828 1.035 1.774 8.458 4.337 2.274 1.584 1.030 0.609 0.464 0.389 0.270 0.193 0.152 0.126
0.16
0.17 0.825 0.879 1.099 1.885 8.987 4.608 2.416 1.683 1.095 0.647 0.493 0.413 0.287 0.205 0.161 0.134
0.18 0.873 0.931 1.164 1.995 9.516 4.879 2.558 1.783 1.159 0.685 0.522 0.438 0.304 0.217 0.171 0.142
0.922 0.983 1.229 2.106 10.044 5.150 2.700 1.882 1.223 0.723 0.551 0.462 0.321 0.229 0.180 0.149
0.19
0.20 0.970 1.035 1.293 2.217 10.573 5.421 2.842 1.981 1.288 0.761 0.580 0.486 0.338 0.241 0.190 0.157
0.25 1.213 1.293 1.617 2.771 13.216 6.776 3.553 2.476 1.610 0.951 0.725 0.608 0.422 0.302 0.237 0.197
1.455 1.552 1.940 3.326 15.860 8.132 4.263 2.971 1.932 1.141 0.870 0.730 0.506 0.362 0.284 0.236
0.30
0.35 1.698 1.811 2.263 3.880 18.503 9.487 4.974 3.466 2.254 1.331 1.015 0.851 0.591 0.422 0.332 0.275
0.40 1.940 2.069 2.587 4.434 21.146 10.842 5.685 3.961 2.576 1.521 1.159 0.973 0.675 0.483 0.379 0.315
2.183 2.328 2.910 4.989 23.789 12.197 6.395 4.456 2.898 1.711 1.304 1.094 0.760 0.543 0.427 0.354
0.45
0.50 2.425 2.587 3.233 5.543 26.433 13.553 7.106 4.951 3.220 1.902 1.449 1.216 0.844 0.603 0.474 0.393
0.55 2.668 2.845 3.557 6.097 29.076 14.908 7.816 5.447 3.541 2.092 1.594 1.338 0.929 0.664 0.521 0.433
2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 31.719 16.263 8.527 5.942 3.863 2.282 1.739 1.459 1.013 0.724 0.569 0.472
0.60
0.65 3.153 3.363 4.203 7.206 34.362 17.618 9.238 6.437 4.185 2.472 1.884 1.581 1.097 0.784 0.616 0.511
0.70 3.395 3.621 4.527 7.760 37.006 18.974 9.948 6.932 4.507 2.662 2.029 1.703 1.182 0.845 0.664 0.551
3.638 3.880 4.850 8.314 39.649 20.329 10.659 7.427 4.829 2.852 2.174 1.824 1.266 0.905 0.711 0.590
0.75
0.80 3.880 4.139 5.173 8.869 42.292 21.684 11.369 7.922 5.151 3.043 2.319 1.946 1.351 0.965 0.758 0.629
0.85 4.123 4.397 5.497 9.423 44.935 23.040 12.080 8.417 5.473 3.233 2.464 2.067 1.435 1.026 0.806 0.669
4.365 4.656 5.820 9.977 47.579 24.395 12.790 8.913 5.795 3.423 2.609 2.189 1.519 1.086 0.853 0.708
0.90
0.95 4.608 4.915 6.143 10.531 50.222 25.750 13.501 9.408 6.117 3.613 2.754 2.311 1.604 1.146 0.901 0.747
1.00 4.850 5.173 6.467 11.086 52.865 27.105 14.212 9.903 6.439 3.803 2.899 2.432 1.688 1.207 0.948 0.787
1.05 5.093 5.432 6.790 11.640 55.509 28.461 14.922 10.398 6.761 3.993 3.044 2.554 1.773 1.267 0.995 0.826
1.5 7.275 7.760 9.700 16.629 79.298 40.658 21.317 14.854 9.659 5.705 4.348 3.648 2.532 1.810 1.422 1.180
2.5 12.125 12.933 16.167 27.714 132.163 67.763 35.529 24.757 16.098 9.508 7.246 6.081 4.221 3.017 2.370 1.967
4.0 19.400 20.693 25.867 44.343 211.461 108.421 56.847 39.611 25.756 15.213 11.594 9.729 6.753 4.827 3.792 3.146
6.0 29.100 31.040 38.800 66.514 317.192 162.632 85.270 59.417 38.634 22.819 17.391 14.593 10.130 7.241 5.688 4.720
10.0 48.500 51.733 64.667 110.857 528.653 271.053 142.117 99.029 64.390 38.032 28.986 24.322 16.883 12.068 9.481 7.866
15.0 72.750 77.600 97.000 166.286 792.979 406.580 213.175 148.543 96.585 57.049 43.479 36.483 25.325 18.101 14.221 11.799

User Manual 683

User Manual 684
IEEE Very Inverse curve
𝑘 𝑡𝑟
]
( ) −1 1−( )
𝐼0 𝐼0
K = 19,61,  = 2, c = 0,491, tr = 21,6
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 1.080 1.152 1.440 2.469 9.590 4.694 2.253 1.446 0.809 0.351 0.211 0.147 0.065 0.034 0.027 0.025
0.06 1.296 1.382 1.728 2.962 11.508 5.632 2.704 1.735 0.971 0.422 0.254 0.177 0.078 0.041 0.032 0.030
1.512 1.613 2.016 3.456 13.427 6.571 3.154 2.024 1.133 0.492 0.296 0.206 0.092 0.048 0.038 0.035
0.07
0.08 1.728 1.843 2.304 3.950 15.345 7.510 3.605 2.313 1.294 0.562 0.338 0.235 0.105 0.055 0.043 0.040
0.09 1.944 2.074 2.592 4.443 17.263 8.448 4.055 2.602 1.456 0.632 0.380 0.265 0.118 0.062 0.049 0.045
2.160 2.304 2.880 4.937 19.181 9.387 4.506 2.891 1.618 0.703 0.423 0.294 0.131 0.069 0.054 0.050
0.10
0.11 2.376 2.534 3.168 5.431 21.099 10.326 4.957 3.180 1.780 0.773 0.465 0.324 0.144 0.076 0.059 0.055
0.12 2.592 2.765 3.456 5.925 23.017 11.265 5.407 3.469 1.941 0.843 0.507 0.353 0.157 0.083 0.065 0.060
2.808 2.995 3.744 6.418 24.935 12.203 5.858 3.758 2.103 0.914 0.549 0.382 0.170 0.090 0.070 0.065
0.13
0.14 3.024 3.226 4.032 6.912 26.853 13.142 6.308 4.048 2.265 0.984 0.592 0.412 0.183 0.096 0.076 0.070
0.15 3.240 3.456 4.320 7.406 28.771 14.081 6.759 4.337 2.427 1.054 0.634 0.441 0.196 0.103 0.081 0.075
3.456 3.686 4.608 7.899 30.689 15.020 7.209 4.626 2.589 1.124 0.676 0.471 0.209 0.110 0.086 0.081
0.16
0.17 3.672 3.917 4.896 8.393 32.607 15.958 7.660 4.915 2.750 1.195 0.718 0.500 0.222 0.117 0.092 0.086
0.18 3.888 4.147 5.184 8.887 34.525 16.897 8.111 5.204 2.912 1.265 0.761 0.530 0.235 0.124 0.097 0.091
4.104 4.378 5.472 9.381 36.444 17.836 8.561 5.493 3.074 1.335 0.803 0.559 0.249 0.131 0.103 0.096
0.19
0.20 4.320 4.608 5.760 9.874 38.362 18.774 9.012 5.782 3.236 1.406 0.845 0.588 0.262 0.138 0.108 0.101
0.25 5.400 5.760 7.200 12.343 47.952 23.468 11.265 7.228 4.045 1.757 1.057 0.736 0.327 0.172 0.135 0.126
6.480 6.912 8.640 14.811 57.542 28.162 13.518 8.673 4.854 2.108 1.268 0.883 0.392 0.207 0.162 0.151
0.30
0.35 7.560 8.064 10.080 17.280 67.133 32.855 15.771 10.119 5.663 2.460 1.479 1.030 0.458 0.241 0.189 0.176
0.40 8.640 9.216 11.520 19.749 76.723 37.549 18.024 11.565 6.472 2.811 1.690 1.177 0.523 0.276 0.216 0.201
9.720 10.368 12.960 22.217 86.314 42.242 20.277 13.010 7.281 3.162 1.902 1.324 0.589 0.310 0.243 0.226
0.45
0.50 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 95.904 46.936 22.530 14.456 8.090 3.514 2.113 1.471 0.654 0.345 0.270 0.252
0.55 11.880 12.672 15.840 27.154 105.494 51.630 24.783 15.901 8.898 3.865 2.324 1.618 0.719 0.379 0.297 0.277
12.960 13.824 17.280 29.623 115.085 56.323 27.036 17.347 9.707 4.217 2.536 1.765 0.785 0.413 0.324 0.302
0.60
0.65 14.040 14.976 18.720 32.091 124.675 61.017 29.288 18.792 10.516 4.568 2.747 1.912 0.850 0.448 0.351 0.327
0.70 15.120 16.128 20.160 34.560 134.266 65.710 31.541 20.238 11.325 4.919 2.958 2.060 0.916 0.482 0.378 0.352
16.200 17.280 21.600 37.029 143.856 70.404 33.794 21.683 12.134 5.271 3.170 2.207 0.981 0.517 0.405 0.377
0.75
0.80 17.280 18.432 23.040 39.497 153.446 75.098 36.047 23.129 12.943 5.622 3.381 2.354 1.046 0.551 0.432 0.403
0.85 18.360 19.584 24.480 41.966 163.037 79.791 38.300 24.575 13.752 5.974 3.592 2.501 1.112 0.586 0.459 0.428
19.440 20.736 25.920 44.434 172.627 84.485 40.553 26.020 14.561 6.325 3.804 2.648 1.177 0.620 0.486 0.453
0.90
0.95 20.520 21.888 27.360 46.903 182.218 89.178 42.806 27.466 15.370 6.676 4.015 2.795 1.243 0.655 0.513 0.478
1.00 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 191.808 93.872 45.059 28.911 16.179 7.028 4.226 2.942 1.308 0.689 0.540 0.503
1.05 22.680 24.192 30.240 51.840 201.398 98.566 47.312 30.357 16.988 7.379 4.438 3.089 1.373 0.724 0.567 0.528
1.5 32.400 34.560 43.200 74.057 287.712 140.808 67.589 43.367 24.269 10.542 6.339 4.413 1.962 1.034 0.810 0.755
2.5 54.000 57.600 72.000 123.429 479.520 234.680 112.648 72.278 40.448 17.569 10.566 7.356 3.270 1.723 1.350 1.258
4.0 86.400 92.160 115.200 197.486 767.232 375.488 180.237 115.645 64.716 28.111 16.905 11.769 5.232 2.756 2.161 2.013
6.0 129.600 138.240 172.800 296.229 1150.848 563.232 270.355 173.468 97.074 42.166 25.357 17.654 7.849 4.134 3.241 3.020
10.0 216.000 230.400 288.000 493.714 1918.081 938.720 450.592 289.113 161.790 70.277 42.262 29.423 13.081 6.891 5.401 5.033
15.0 324.000 345.600 432.000 740.571 2877.121 1408.079 675.888 433.669 242.685 105.415 63.394 44.134 19.621 10.336 8.102 7.549

User Manual 685

User Manual 686
IEEE Extremely Inverse curve
𝑘 𝑡𝑟
]
( ) −1 1−( )
𝐼0 𝐼0
K = 28,2,  = 2, c = 0,1217, tr = 29,1
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 1.455 1.552 1.940 3.326 13.762 6.720 3.211 2.050 1.134 0.476 0.275 0.182 0.065 0.020 0.010 0.007
0.06 1.746 1.862 2.328 3.991 16.515 8.064 3.853 2.459 1.361 0.571 0.330 0.219 0.078 0.024 0.012 0.008
2.037 2.173 2.716 4.656 19.267 9.409 4.495 2.869 1.588 0.667 0.385 0.255 0.091 0.028 0.013 0.010
0.07
0.08 2.328 2.483 3.104 5.321 22.019 10.753 5.137 3.279 1.815 0.762 0.439 0.292 0.104 0.033 0.015 0.011
0.09 2.619 2.794 3.492 5.986 24.772 12.097 5.779 3.689 2.041 0.857 0.494 0.328 0.117 0.037 0.017 0.013
2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 27.524 13.441 6.421 4.099 2.268 0.952 0.549 0.365 0.130 0.041 0.019 0.014
0.10
0.11 3.201 3.414 4.268 7.317 30.277 14.785 7.063 4.509 2.495 1.047 0.604 0.401 0.143 0.045 0.021 0.015
0.12 3.492 3.725 4.656 7.982 33.029 16.129 7.706 4.919 2.722 1.143 0.659 0.438 0.156 0.049 0.023 0.017
3.783 4.035 5.044 8.647 35.782 17.473 8.348 5.329 2.949 1.238 0.714 0.474 0.169 0.053 0.025 0.018
0.13
0.14 4.074 4.346 5.432 9.312 38.534 18.817 8.990 5.739 3.175 1.333 0.769 0.511 0.182 0.057 0.027 0.020
0.15 4.365 4.656 5.820 9.977 41.287 20.161 9.632 6.149 3.402 1.428 0.824 0.547 0.195 0.061 0.029 0.021
4.656 4.966 6.208 10.642 44.039 21.505 10.274 6.559 3.629 1.523 0.879 0.583 0.207 0.065 0.031 0.022
0.16
0.17 4.947 5.277 6.596 11.307 46.791 22.849 10.916 6.969 3.856 1.619 0.934 0.620 0.220 0.069 0.033 0.024
0.18 5.238 5.587 6.984 11.973 49.544 24.193 11.558 7.378 4.083 1.714 0.989 0.656 0.233 0.073 0.035 0.025
5.529 5.898 7.372 12.638 52.296 25.537 12.200 7.788 4.310 1.809 1.044 0.693 0.246 0.077 0.037 0.026
0.19
0.20 5.820 6.208 7.760 13.303 55.049 26.881 12.843 8.198 4.536 1.904 1.099 0.729 0.259 0.081 0.038 0.028
0.25 7.275 7.760 9.700 16.629 68.811 33.602 16.053 10.248 5.670 2.380 1.373 0.912 0.324 0.102 0.048 0.035
8.730 9.312 11.640 19.954 82.573 40.322 19.264 12.297 6.805 2.857 1.648 1.094 0.389 0.122 0.058 0.042
0.30
0.35 10.185 10.864 13.580 23.280 96.335 47.043 22.474 14.347 7.939 3.333 1.923 1.276 0.454 0.142 0.067 0.049
0.40 11.640 12.416 15.520 26.606 110.097 53.763 25.685 16.397 9.073 3.809 2.197 1.459 0.519 0.163 0.077 0.056
13.095 13.968 17.460 29.931 123.860 60.483 28.896 18.446 10.207 4.285 2.472 1.641 0.584 0.183 0.087 0.063
0.45
0.50 14.550 15.520 19.400 33.257 137.622 67.204 32.106 20.496 11.341 4.761 2.747 1.823 0.648 0.203 0.096 0.070
0.55 16.005 17.072 21.340 36.583 151.384 73.924 35.317 22.545 12.475 5.237 3.021 2.006 0.713 0.224 0.106 0.077
17.460 18.624 23.280 39.909 165.146 80.644 38.528 24.595 13.609 5.713 3.296 2.188 0.778 0.244 0.115 0.084
0.60
0.65 18.915 20.176 25.220 43.234 178.908 87.365 41.738 26.644 14.743 6.189 3.571 2.370 0.843 0.264 0.125 0.091
0.70 20.370 21.728 27.160 46.560 192.671 94.085 44.949 28.694 15.877 6.665 3.845 2.553 0.908 0.285 0.135 0.098
21.825 23.280 29.100 49.886 206.433 100.806 48.159 30.743 17.011 7.141 4.120 2.735 0.973 0.305 0.144 0.105
0.75
0.80 23.280 24.832 31.040 53.211 220.195 107.526 51.370 32.793 18.145 7.617 4.395 2.917 1.037 0.325 0.154 0.111
0.85 24.735 26.384 32.980 56.537 233.957 114.246 54.581 34.843 19.279 8.093 4.669 3.100 1.102 0.346 0.164 0.118
26.190 27.936 34.920 59.863 247.719 120.967 57.791 36.892 20.414 8.570 4.944 3.282 1.167 0.366 0.173 0.125
0.90
0.95 27.645 29.488 36.860 63.189 261.481 127.687 61.002 38.942 21.548 9.046 5.218 3.464 1.232 0.386 0.183 0.132
1.00 29.100 31.040 38.800 66.514 275.244 134.407 64.213 40.991 22.682 9.522 5.493 3.647 1.297 0.407 0.192 0.139
30.555 32.592 40.740 69.840 289.006 141.128 67.423 43.041 23.816 9.998 5.768 3.829 1.362 0.427 0.202 0.146
1.05
1.5 43.650 46.560 58.200 99.771 412.865 201.611 96.319 61.487 34.023 14.283 8.240 5.470 1.945 0.610 0.289 0.209
2.5 72.750 77.600 97.000 166.286 688.109 336.019 160.532 102.478 56.704 23.804 13.733 9.117 3.242 1.016 0.481 0.348
4.0 116.400 124.160 155.200 266.057 1100.975 537.630 256.850 163.965 90.727 38.087 21.973 14.587 5.187 1.626 0.770 0.557
6.0 174.600 186.240 232.800 399.086 1651.462 806.444 385.276 245.948 136.090 57.130 32.959 21.880 7.780 2.439 1.154 0.836
10.0 291.000 310.400 388.000 665.143 2752.437 1344.074 642.126 409.913 226.817 95.217 54.931 36.467 12.967 4.065 1.924 1.393
15.0 436.500 465.600 582.000 997.714 4128.655 2016.111 963.189 614.869 340.226 142.826 82.397 54.701 19.451 6.098 2.886 2.090

User Manual 687

User Manual 688
35.4 USER CURVES
The user can programme FOUR curves by entering the desired points into the “User curve 1” to “User curve 4” user curve nodes.
The time corresponding to each I/Ia is programmed in seconds, with a minimum value of 0.020 seconds. These times correspond to the
curve of index 1, but as in curves IEC, the user can programme a time index between 0.05 and 1.09 in the overcurrent protection
settings.
It is not necessary to programme all the points on the curve, the unit will assign the time of the first programmed point to all those I/Ia
of a lower value and the last programmed time to all those of a higher I/Ia, that is to say, the graph will generally start and finish with
straight, horizontal lines. The points between the two programmed points will be calculated by the console as a lineal interpolation.
I/Ia values for times which are superior to that which corresponds to an inferior I/Ia are not admitted, that is to say, ascendant straight
lines are not allowed.
The nodes for the configuration of the curves are:
❑ PROT/RUSC1 user curve 1

Each node uses 3 settings frames, into which the milliseconds of activation for each I/IAJ are entered, with a range of 20 to 600,000
milliseconds.
❑ Crv0 (Low Frame Curve). For setting (milliseconds) the activation times for 1.03 and 1.05 I/IAJ ratios.
❑ Crv1 (Medium Frame Curve). For setting (milliseconds) the activation times for 1.1 and 4 I/IAJ ratios, with steps of 0.1.
❑ Crv1 (High Frame Curve). For setting (milliseconds) the activation times for 4 and 20 I/IAJ ratios, with steps of 0.5.
The programming carried out via PacFactory is done using the programming screen shown in Figure 257, in which:
❑ The times of the curves different points are entered (left table) and the curve’s graph is displayed (right table).
❑ Interpolate points of the curve and enter the known points. By clicking on “Calculate Curve Values”, the missing values are
calculated for the curve.
❑ Reset the curve values “Reset PC column”.
❑ “Save values”. Saves the values entered in order to send them to unit.
❑ “Close”. Returns to the general settings screen, from where they can be sent to the unit.

User Manual 689
Figure 257. User curve configuration screen
An example is shown below
I/Ia 2 4 8 12 15
T (s) 200 100 70 50 5

User Manual 690
MEASUREMENT LIST 
36. MEASUREMENT LIST

The following tables show the list of available measurements. If the model doesn´t have a function, the measurements of that unit are no
available.
Table 320. General measurements
Measurement Node Instance Data Attribute Refresh (ms)

VA MMXU 1 PNV phsA 100
VB MMXU 1 PNV phsB 100
VC MMXU 1 PNV phsC 100
VA MMXU 1 PhV phsA 100
VB MMXU 1 PhV phsB 100
VC MMXU 1 PhV phsC 100
VN MMXU 1 PhV neut 100
AVERAGE V MMXU 1 PhV net 100
VAB MMXU 1 PPV phsAB 100
VBC MMXU 1 PPV phsBC 100
VCA MMXU 1 PPV phsCA 100
AVERAGE U MMXU 1 PPV (PPVm in Ed2) net 100
IN MMXU 1 A neut 100
IA MMXU 1 A phsA 100
IB MMXU 1 A phsB 100
IC MMXU 1 A phsC 100
AVERAGE I MMXU 1 AvAPhs Mag 100
AVERAGE I MMXU 1 A net 100
ACTIVE POWER P MMXU 1 TotW mag 100
REACTIVE POWER Q MMXU 1 TotVAr mag 100
POWER S MMXU 1 TotVA mag 100
Frequency MMXU 1 Hz net 2
Phase A Active Power MMXU 1 W phsA 100
Phase B Active Power MMXU 1 W phsB 100
Phase C Active Power MMXU 1 W phsC 100
Phase A Reactive Power MMXU 1 VAr phsA 100
Phase B Reactive Power MMXU 1 VAr phsB 100
Phase C Reactive Power MMXU 1 VAr phsC 100
Phase A S Power MMXU 1 VA phsA 100
Phase B S Power MMXU 1 VA phsB 100
Phase C S Power MMXU 1 VA phsC 100
Fault phase A Current MMXU 1 FltA phsA 1000
Fault phase B Current MMXU 1 FltA phsB 1000
Fault phase C Current MMXU 1 FltA phsC 1000
Fault Neutral Current MMXU 1 FltA neut 1000
Max. fault phase A Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA phsA 1000
Max. fault phase B Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA phsB 1000
Max. fault phase C Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA phsC 1000
Max. fault Neutral Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA neut 1000
Cosine phi rms phase A MMXU 1 PF phsA 100
Cosine phi rms phase B MMXU 1 PF phsB 100
Cosine phi rms phase C MMXU 1 PF phsC 100

Cosine phi rms average MMXU 1 PF net 100

Average Power Factor MMXU 1 TotPF mag 100

Table 321. Fundamental measurements

IA fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA phsA 100
IB fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA phsB 100
IC fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA phsC 100
IN fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA neut 100
VA fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV phsA 100
VB fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV phsB 100
VC fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV phsC 100
VN fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV neut 100
Cosine phi phase A (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF phsA 100
Cosine phi phase B (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF phsB 100
Cosine phi phase C (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF phsC 100
Cosine phi average (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF net 100
ACTIVE POWER P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunTotW mag 100
REACTIVE POWER Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunTotVAr mag 100
POWER S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunTotVA mag 100
Phase A Active P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunW phsA 100
Phase B Active P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunW phsB 100
Phase C Active P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunW phsC 100
Phase A Reactive Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVAr phsA 100
Phase B Reactive Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVAr phsB 100
Phase C Reactive Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVAr phsC 100
Phase A S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVA phsA 100
Phase B S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVA phsB 100
Phase C S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVA phsC 100
Table 322. Instantaneous Fundamental measurements

Analog 1 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor1 phsA 100
Analog 2 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor2 phsB 100
Analog 3 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor3 phsC 100
Analog 4 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor4 neut 100
Analog 8 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor8 neut 100
Analog 12 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor12 net 100
Table 323. Energy counter

Active Energy Out MMTR 1 SupWh actVal 100
Active Energy In MMTR 1 DmdWh actVal 100
Reactive Energy Out MMTR 1 SupVArh actVal 100
Reactive Energy In MMTR 1 DmdVArh actVal 100

Table 324. Fault locator

Fault Distance (km) RFLO 1 FltDiskm mag 100
Fault Distance (%) RFLO 1 FltDisPerc net 100
Fault Distance (ohm) RFLO 1 FltZ cVal 100
Table 325. Sequences

I0 MSQI 1 SeqA c1 2
V0 MSQI 1 SeqV c1 2
I1 MSQI 1 SeqA c2 2
V1 MSQI 1 SeqV c2 2
I2 MSQI 1 SeqA c3 2
V2 MSQI 1 SeqV c3 2
Table 326. THD

THD phase A Current MHAI 1 ThdA phsA 100
THD phase B Current MHAI 1 ThdA phsB 100
THD phase C Current MHAI 1 ThdA phsC 100
THD Neutral Current MHAI 1 ThdA neut 100
THD Average Current MHAI 1 ThdA net 100
THD phase A Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV phsA 100
THD phase B Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV phsB 100
THD phase C Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV phsC 100
THD Neutral Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV neut 100
THD Averagel Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV net 100

Table 327. Historic Edition 1

Imax Historic phase A MSTA 1 MaxAmps phsA 1000
Imin Historic phase A MSTA 1 MinAmps phsA 1000
Imax Historic phase B MSTA 1 MaxAmps phsB 1000
Imin Historic phase B MSTA 1 MinAmps phsB 1000
Imax Historic phase C MSTA 1 MaxAmps phsC 1000
Imin Historic phase C MSTA 1 MinAmps phsC 1000
Vmax Historic phase A MSTA 1 MaxVolts phsA 1000
Vmin Historic phase A MSTA 1 MinVolts phsA 1000
Vmax Historic phase B MSTA 1 MaxVolts phsB 1000
Vmin Historic phase B MSTA 1 MinVolts phsB 1000
Vmax Historic phase C MSTA 1 MaxVolts phsC 1000
Vmin Historic phase C MSTA 1 MinVolts phsC 1000
VAmax Historic MSTA 1 MaxVA net 1000
VAmin Historic MSTA 1 MinVA net 1000
Wmax Historic MSTA 1 MaxW net 1000
Wmin Historic MSTA 1 MinW net 1000
VAr max Historic MSTA 1 MaxVAr net 1000
VAr min Historic MSTA 1 MinVAr net 1000
Table 328. Historic Edition 2

Imax Historic phase A maxMMXU 1 A phsA.cVal 1000
Imin Historic phase A minMMXU 1 A phsA.cVal 1000
Imax Historic phase B maxMMXU 1 A phsB.cVal 1000
Imin Historic phase B minMMXU 1 A phsB.cVal 1000
Imax Historic phase C maxMMXU 1 A phsC.cVal 1000
Imin Historic phase C minMMXU 1 A phsC.cVal 1000
Vmax Historic phase A maxMMXU 1 PhV phsA.cVal 1000
Vmin Historic phase A minMMXU 1 PhV phsA.cVal 1000
Vmax Historic phase B maxMMXU 1 PhV phsB.cVal 1000
Vmin Historic phase B minMMXU 1 PhV phsB.cVal 1000
Vmax Historic phase C maxMMXU 1 PhV phsC.cVal 1000
Vmin Historic phase C minMMXU 1 PhV phsC.cVal 1000
VAmax Historic maxMMXU 1 TotVA mag.f 1000
VAmin Historic minMMXU 1 TotVA mag.f 1000
Wmax Historic maxMMXU 1 TotW mag.f 1000
Wmin Historic minMMXU 1 TotW mag.f 1000
VAr max Historic maxMMXU 1 TotVAr mag.f 1000
VAr min Historic minMMXU 1 TotVAr mag.f 1000

Table 329. Differential measurements

Diff. Current phase A LINPDIF 1 DifAClc phsA 2
Diff. Current phase B LINPDIF 1 DifAClc phsB 2
Diff. Current phase C LINPDIF 1 DifAClc phsC 2
Restr. Current phase A LINPDIF 1 RstA phsA 2
Restr. Current phase B LINPDIF 1 RstA phsB 2
Restr. Current phase C LINPDIF 1 RstA phsC 2
2nd Harm. Diff. Current A LINPDIF 1 RstA2 phsA 2
2nd Harm. Diff. Current B LINPDIF 1 RstA2 phsB 2
2nd Harm. Diff. Current C LINPDIF 1 RstA2 phsC 2
Terminal 1 Current phase A LINPDIF 1 DifAClcT1 phsA 2
Terminal 1 Current phase B LINPDIF 1 DifAClcT1 phsB 2
Terminal 1 Current phase C LINPDIF 1 DifAClcT1 phsC 2
Diff. Current Fault A LINPDIF 1 FltDifAClc phsA 2
Diff. Current Fault B LINPDIF 1 FltDifAClc phsB 2
Diff. Current Fault C LINPDIF 1 FltDifAClc phsC 2
Restr. Current Fault A LINPDIF 1 FltRstA phsA 2
Restr. Current Fault B LINPDIF 1 FltRstA phsB 2
Restr. Current Fault C LINPDIF 1 FltRstA phsC 2
Table 330. Differential communications

Comms. fals Port1(%) RTPC 1 ComFaRateP1 mag 1000
Comms. fals Port2(%) RTPC 1 ComFaRateP2 mag 1000
Comms. failures Port1 RTPC 1 ComFP1Cnt stVal 100
Comms. failures Port2 RTPC 1 ComFP2Cnt stVal 100

Table 331. Breaker Edition 1

Openings Counter B1 XCBR 1 OpCnt stVal 100
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.A B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsA 1000
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.B B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsB 1000
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.C B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsC 1000
Last Amp.Switch.ph.A B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsA 1000
Last .Amp.Switch.ph.B B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsB 1000
Last .Amp.Switch.ph.C B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsC 1000
Open Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 OpenCnt phsA 100
Open Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 OpenCnt phsB 100
Open Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 OpenCnt phsC 100
Trip Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 TripCnt phsA 100
Trip Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 TripCnt phsB 100
Trip Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 TripCnt phsC 100
Close Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 ClCnt phsA 100
Close Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 ClCnt phsB 100
Close Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 ClCnt phsC 100
Table 332. Breaker Edition 2

Open Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 OpenCntA stVal 100
Open Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 OpenCntB stVal 100
Open Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 OpenCntC stVal 100
Trip Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 TripCntA stVal 100
Trip Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 TripCntB stVal 100
Trip Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 TripCntC stVal 100
Close Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 ClCntA stVal 100
Close Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 ClCntB stVal 100
Close Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 ClCntC stVal 100

Table 333. Breaker 1 - Operation supervision

Ki2 accumulated ph.A B1 CBOU 1 KI2A phsA 1000
Ki2 accumulated ph.B B1 CBOU 1 KI2A phsB 1000
Ki2 accumulated ph.C B1 CBOU 1 KI2A phsC 1000
Max.Ki2 accumulated B1 CBOU 1 MaxKI2A general 1000
T.electric opening Br.1 A CBOU 1 ElOpnTmsA mag 1000
T.electric opening Br.1 B CBOU 1 ElOpnTmsB mag 1000
T.electric opening Br.1 C CBOU 1 ElOpnTmsC mag 1000
T.mechanic opening Br.1 A CBOU 1 MeOpnTmsA mag 1000
T.mechanic opening Br.1 B CBOU 1 MeOpnTmsB mag 1000
T.mechanic opening Br.1 C CBOU 1 MeOpnTmsC mag 1000
T.opening dispersion Br.1 AB CBOU 1 DiOpnTmsAB mag 1000
T.opening dispersion Br.1 BC CBOU 1 DiOpnTmsBC mag 1000
T.opening dispersion Br.1 CA CBOU 1 DiOpnTmsCA mag 1000
T.electric closing Br.1 A CBOU 1 ElClsTmsA mag 1000
T.electric closing Br.1 B CBOU 1 ElClsTmsB mag 1000
T.electric closing Br.1 C CBOU 1 ElClsTmsC mag 1000
T.mechanic closing Br.1 A CBOU 1 MeClsTmsA mag 1000
T.mechanic closing Br.1 B CBOU 1 MeClsTmsB mag 1000
T.mechanic closing Br.1 C CBOU 1 MeClsTmsC mag 1000
T.closing dispersion Br.1 AB CBOU 1 DiClsTmsAB mag 1000
T.closing dispersion Br.1 BC CBOU 1 DiClsTmsBC mag 1000
T.closing dispersion Br.1 CA CBOU 1 DiClsTmsCA mag 1000
Inactive days Br.1 A CBOU 1 NoOpDayA mag 1000
Inactive days Br.1 B CBOU 1 NoOpDayB mag 1000
Inactive days Br.1 C CBOU 1 NoOpDayC mag 1000
Max.dispersion opening 1 AB CBOU 1 MaxDiOpAB mag 1000
Max.dispersion opening 1 BC CBOU 1 MaxDiOpBC mag 1000
Max.dispersion opening 1 CA CBOU 1 MaxDiOpCA mag 1000
Max.dispersion closing 1 AB CBOU 1 MaxDiClAB mag 1000
Max.dispersion closing 1 BC CBOU 1 MaxDiClBC mag 1000
Max.dispersion closing 1 CA CBOU 1 MaxDiClCA mag 1000
Avg.dispersion opening 1 AB CBOU 1 MedDiOpAB mag 1000
Avg.dispersion opening 1 BC CBOU 1 MedDiOpBC mag 1000
Avg.dispersion opening 1 CA CBOU 1 MedDiOpCA mag 1000
Avg.dispersion closing 1 AB CBOU 1 MedDiClAB mag 1000
Avg.dispersion closing 1 BC CBOU 1 MedDiClBC mag 1000
Avg.dispersion closing 1 CA CBOU 1 MedDiClCA mag 1000
Avg.electric opening 1 A CBOU 1 MedElOpAB mag 1000
Avg.electric opening 1 B CBOU 1 MedElOpBC mag 1000
Avg.electric opening 1 C CBOU 1 MedElOpCA mag 1000
Avg.electric closing 1 A CBOU 1 MedElClAB mag 1000
Avg.electric closing 1 B CBOU 1 MedElClBC mag 1000
Avg.electric closing 1 C CBOU 1 MedElClCA mag 1000
Avg.mechanical opening 1 A CBOU 1 MedMeOpAB mag 1000
Avg.mechanical opening 1 B CBOU 1 MedMeOpBC mag 1000
Avg.mechanical opening 1 C CBOU 1 MedMeOpCA mag 1000
Avg.mechanical closing 1 A CBOU 1 MedMeClAB mag 1000
Avg.mechanical closing 1 B CBOU 1 MedMeClBC mag 1000
Avg.mechanical closing 1 C CBOU 1 MedMeClCA mag 1000
Max.electric opening 1 A CBOU 1 MaxElOpAB mag 1000
Max.electric opening 1 B CBOU 1 MaxElOpBC mag 1000
Max.electric opening 1 C CBOU 1 MaxElOpCA mag 1000
Max.electric closing 1 A CBOU 1 MaxElClAB mag 1000
Max.electric closing 1 B CBOU 1 MaxElClBC mag 1000
Max.electric closing 1 C CBOU 1 MaxElClCA mag 1000
Max.mechanical opening 1 A CBOU 1 MaxMeOpAB mag 1000
Max.mechanical opening 1 B CBOU 1 MaxMeOpBC mag 1000
Max.mechanical opening 1 C CBOU 1 MaxMeOpCA mag 1000
Max.mechanical closing 1 A CBOU 1 MaxMeClAB mag 1000
Max.mechanical closing 1 B CBOU 1 MaxMeClBC mag 1000

Max.mechanical closing 1 C CBOU 1 MaxMeClCA mag 1000

Br1 Pole wear A CBOU 1 BrWear phsA 1000
Br1 Pole wear B CBOU 1 BrWear phsB 1000
Br1 Pole wear C CBOU 1 BrWear phsC 1000
Tabla 334. Breaker 2 measurements (only models with two breakers)

IA2 MDIF 2 OpARem phsA 2
IB2 MDIF 2 OpARem phsB 2
IC2 MDIF 2 OpARem phsC 2
IA2 fundamental MDIF 2 FunARem phsA 2
IB2 fundamental MDIF 2 FunARem phsB 2
IC2 fundamental MDIF 2 FunARem phsC 2
Fault phase A2 Current MDIF 2 FltARem phsA 2
Fault phase B2 Current MDIF 2 FltARem phsB 2
Fault phase C2 Current MDIF 2 FltARem phsC 2
THD phase A2 Current MDIF 2 ThdARem phsA 2
THD phase B2 Current MDIF 2 ThdARem phsB 2
THD phase C2 Current MDIF 2 ThdARem phsC 2
Max. fault phase A2 Current MDIF 2 MaxFltARem phsA 1000
Max. fault phase B2 Current MDIF 2 MaxFltARem phsB 1000
Max. fault phase C2 Current MDIF 2 MaxFltARem phsC 1000
Table 335. Sequences 52 ½ (Only models with two breakers)90

3I0 breaker 1 BH/PTRC 1 SeqA c1 2
3I0 breaker 2 BH/PTRC 1 SeqA c2 2
Table 336. Breaker 2 Edition 1

Open Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 2 OpenCnt phsA 100
Open Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 2 OpenCnt phsB 100
Open Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 2 OpenCnt phsC 100
Trip Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 2 TripCnt phsA 100
Trip Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 2 TripCnt phsB 100
Trip Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 2 TripCnt phsC 100
Close Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 2 ClCnt phsA 100
Close Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 2 ClCnt phsB 100
Close Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 2 ClCnt phsC 100
90
From firmware version 6.0.18.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.20

Table 337. Breaker 2 Edition 2

Open Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 2 OpenCntA stVal 100
Open Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 2 OpenCntB stVal 100
Open Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 2 OpenCntC stVal 100
Trip Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 2 TripCntA stVal 100
Trip Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 2 TripCntB stVal 100
Trip Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 2 TripCntC stVal 100
Close Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 2 ClCntA stVal 100
Close Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 2 ClCntB stVal 100
Close Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 2 ClCntC stVal 100

Table 338. Breaker 2 - Operation supervision (only models with two breakers)

Ki2 accumulated ph.A B2 CBOU 2 KI2A phsA 1000
Ki2 accumulated ph.B B2 CBOU 2 KI2A phsB 1000
Ki2 accumulated ph.C B2 CBOU 2 KI2A phsC 1000
Max.Ki2 accumulated B2 CBOU 2 MaxKI2A general 1000
T.electric opening Br.2 A CBOU 2 ElOpnTmsA mag 1000
T.electric opening Br.2 B CBOU 2 ElOpnTmsB mag 1000
T.electric opening Br.2 C CBOU 2 ElOpnTmsC mag 1000
T.mechanic opening Br.2 A CBOU 2 MeOpnTmsA mag 1000
T.mechanic opening Br.2 B CBOU 2 MeOpnTmsB mag 1000
T.mechanic opening Br.2 C CBOU 2 MeOpnTmsC mag 1000
T.opening dispersion Br.2 AB CBOU 2 DiOpnTmsAB mag 1000
T.opening dispersion Br.2 BC CBOU 2 DiOpnTmsBC mag 1000
T.opening dispersion Br.2 CA CBOU 2 DiOpnTmsCA mag 1000
T.electric closing Br.2 A CBOU 2 ElClsTmsA mag 1000
T.electric closing Br.2 B CBOU 2 ElClsTmsB mag 1000
T.electric closing Br.2 C CBOU 2 ElClsTmsC mag 1000
T.mechanic closing Br.2 A CBOU 2 MeClsTmsA mag 1000
T.mechanic closing Br.2 B CBOU 2 MeClsTmsB mag 1000
T.mechanic closing Br.2 C CBOU 2 MeClsTmsC mag 1000
T.closing dispersion Br.2 AB CBOU 2 DiClsTmsAB mag 1000
T.closing dispersion Br.2 BC CBOU 2 DiClsTmsBC mag 1000
T.closing dispersion Br.2 CA CBOU 2 DiClsTmsCA mag 1000
Inactive days Br.2 A CBOU 2 NoOpDayA mag 1000
Inactive days Br.2 B CBOU 2 NoOpDayB mag 1000
Inactive days Br.2 C CBOU 2 NoOpDayC mag 1000
Max.dispersion opening 2 AB CBOU 2 MaxDiOpAB mag 1000
Max.dispersion opening 2 BC CBOU 2 MaxDiOpBC mag 1000
Max.dispersion opening 2 CA CBOU 2 MaxDiOpCA mag 1000
Max.dispersion closing 2 AB CBOU 2 MaxDiClAB mag 1000
Max.dispersion closing 2 BC CBOU 2 MaxDiClBC mag 1000
Max.dispersion closing 2 CA CBOU 2 MaxDiClCA mag 1000
Avg.dispersion opening 2 AB CBOU 2 MedDiOpAB mag 1000
Avg.dispersion opening 2 BC CBOU 2 MedDiOpBC mag 1000
Avg.dispersion opening 2 CA CBOU 2 MedDiOpCA mag 1000
Avg.dispersion closing 2 AB CBOU 2 MedDiClAB mag 1000
Avg.dispersion closing 2 BC CBOU 2 MedDiClBC mag 1000
Avg.dispersion closing 2 CA CBOU 2 MedDiClCA mag 1000
Avg.electric opening 2 A CBOU 2 MedElOpAB mag 1000
Avg.electric opening 2 B CBOU 2 MedElOpBC mag 1000
Avg.electric opening 2 C CBOU 2 MedElOpCA mag 1000
Avg.electric closing 2 A CBOU 2 MedElClAB mag 1000
Avg.electric closing 2 B CBOU 2 MedElClBC mag 1000
Avg.electric closing 2 C CBOU 2 MedElClCA mag 1000
Avg.mechanical opening 2 A CBOU 2 MedMeOpAB mag 1000
Avg.mechanical opening 2 B CBOU 2 MedMeOpBC mag 1000
Avg.mechanical opening 2 C CBOU 2 MedMeOpCA mag 1000
Avg.mechanical closing 2 A CBOU 2 MedMeClAB mag 1000
Avg.mechanical closing 2 B CBOU 2 MedMeClBC mag 1000
Avg.mechanical closing 2 C CBOU 2 MedMeClCA mag 1000
Max.electric opening 2 A CBOU 2 MaxElOpAB mag 1000
Max.electric opening 2 B CBOU 2 MaxElOpBC mag 1000
Max.electric opening 2 C CBOU 2 MaxElOpCA mag 1000
Max.electric closing 2 A CBOU 2 MaxElClAB mag 1000
Max.electric closing 2 B CBOU 2 MaxElClBC mag 1000
Max.electric closing 2 C CBOU 2 MaxElClCA mag 1000
Max.mechanical opening 2 A CBOU 2 MaxMeOpAB mag 1000
Max.mechanical opening 2 B CBOU 2 MaxMeOpBC mag 1000
Max.mechanical opening 2 C CBOU 2 MaxMeOpCA mag 1000
Max.mechanical closing 2 A CBOU 2 MaxMeClAB mag 1000
Max.mechanical closing 2 B CBOU 2 MaxMeClBC mag 1000

Max.mechanical closing 2 C CBOU 2 MaxMeClCA mag 1000

Br2 Pole wear A CBOU 2 BrWear phsA 1000
Br2 Pole wear B CBOU 2 BrWear phsB 1000
Br2 Pole wear C CBOU 2 BrWear phsC 1000
Table 339. Recloser

Total Reclose Counter ZRREC 1 RecCnt actVal 100
1st 1phase Reclose Counter ZRREC 1 Rec1P1Cnt actVal 100
1st 3phase Reclose Counter ZRREC 1 Rec1P3Cnt actVal 100
Second Reclose Counter ZRREC 1 Rec2Cnt actVal 100
Third Reclose Counter ZRREC 1 Rec3Cnt actVal 100
Fourth Reclose Counter ZRREC 1 Rec4Cnt actVal 100
Table 340. Synchronism

V synchro RSYN 1 PhV net 100
Sychro Frequency RSYN 1 Hz mag 2
V synchro Diff RSYN 1 DifVClc mag 2
Ang synchro Diff RSYN 1 DifAngClc mag 2
Hz synchro Diff RSYN 1 DifHzClc mag 2
Table 341. Synchronism 2 (models with 2 synchronism units)

V synchro SECRSYN 1 PhV net 100
Sychro Frequency SECRSYN 1 Hz mag 2
V synchro Diff SECRSYN 1 DifVClc mag 2
Ang synchro Diff SECRSYN 1 DifAngClc mag 2
Hz synchro Diff SECRSYN 1 DifHzClc mag 2
Table 342. Locator

Fault Distance RFLO 1 FltDiskm net 100
Tabla 343. Thermal Image

Thermal Img. Phases PTTR 1 TmpRl mag 100
Thermal Img. Gr. GPTTR 1 TmpRl mag 100

Table 344. Board 1 of RTD and analogue outputs

Temperature 1 RTDGGIO 1 Tmp1 mag 1000
Analog. output 1 RTDGGIO 1 OutAn1 mag 1000
Table 345. Board 2 of RTD and analogue outputs

Table 346. Temperature

Temperature CTSU 1 Temp net 1000
Table 347. Power supply

Power Supply GENLLN0 1 PSup net 1000
Power Supply 2 GENLLN0 1 PSup2 net 1000
Table 348. Internal battery

Internal battery LPHD 1 IntBat net 1000

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 
37. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

The unit continually checks the various incorporated elements and cards. If an error is detected in any of the elements or cards, an
alarm is generated.
The available signals indicate faults in the card check, in the communications between the cards, in the unit’s configuration, etc.
The detected errors are shown in:
❑ Status report
❑ Incident report
❑ Sequence of events (SOE)
❑ Digital outputs and CPU hardware alarm output.
❑ IHMI leds and status leds
The errors can be critical and non critical, depending on the effect they have in the device.
Critical errors
Critical hardware error. Indicates that a critical error has been produced. In addition to this signal, the cause that produced the signal
will be indicated.
If the error affects the unit’s operation, a critical error is generated, which in addition to the signal acts on:
❑ Colour front LED. Non-configurable status LED, which indicates the unit’s general status. If the LED is green, it indicates
that everything is correct, while if it is red it indicates a critical error in the unit.
❑ CPU Relay. Non-configurable 3-contact relay, which indicates the unit’s general status. If the LED is active (common
terminal – NO), it indicates that everything is correct, while if it is deactivated (common terminal– NC) it indicates a critical
error in the unit. If the unit is switched off, the relay is deactivated.
The causes that produce errors are:
❑ CPU error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the CPU
❑ Analogue error. Indicates an error in transformers card.
❑ I/O micro error. Indicates an error in the I/O cards’ micro.
❑ Analogue connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communications between the CPU and the
transformers card.
❑ I/O connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communication between the CPU and an I/O card.
Additionally, it will indicate the card which has suffered the failure:
 Error card address x. Indicates that there is a communication error with the card with the address x.
❑ Front connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communications between the CPU and the unit’s
front card.
❑ Shared analogue memory error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data exchange memory between the CPU
and the transformers card.
❑ Error shared I/O memory. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data exchange memory between the CPU and
the I/O cards.
❑ Alarm settings. Indicates that errors have been detected in the storage of the unit’s settings.
❑ FW Alarm. Indicates that the relay firmware versions are incompatible.
❑ Memory check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the checking of the unit’s memory.
❑ Converter check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the transformers card AD converter.
❑ Converter voltage level alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the transformers card reference voltages..
❑ Relay activation alarm. Indicates that an error has been detected in the activation of at least one of the I/O cards’ relays.
❑ I/O configuration error. Indicates that the configuration of the I/O cards does not coincide with the unit’s correct
configuration.

❑ General Vdc error. Indicates a failure in the internal power supply levels.
❑ For each I/O card there is are 5 signals, indicating:
 Status OK. Indicates that the card is configured correctly and without errors
 Configured & No_detected. Indicates that the card is configured by the user, but not detected in the unit. This may be
because it is not assembled or because it has an error. Equivalent to the current communication error.
 Different configuration. The type indicated by the user and the type detected by the unit do not coincide.
 No_configured & detected. Indicates that card that has not been configured by the user has been detected in an
address.
 Internal card error. A card check error has been received (includes relay check).
Non critical errors
These errors have a limited effect on the device.
❑ RTC clock error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the real time clock.
❑ Continuous component monitoring alarm. Indicates that an error in the continuous measurement monitoring has been
detected in the transformers card.
❑ Frequency configuration error. This is not a unit failure, but rather a configuration failure. Indicates that the frequency
measurement of the signals being injected into the unit do not match the set measurement, that is, the unit is configured
as 50Hz and the signals which are being injected are greater than 55Hz; or that the unit is configured as 60 Hz and the
signals being injected are less than 55 Hz.
❑ Internal battery failure. Indicates that the data storage battery is below the security levels and that the data may be lost at
shutdown.
❑ Version compatibility error. Indicates that the versions of the unit's firmware are not correct.
❑ Time setting configuration alarm. Indicates that there is an error in the configuration of the unit’s time setting.
37.1 ERROR DETECTION
The error detection can be made by any of the indicated ways.
Status report:
Figure 258 shows the screen of the PacFactory that show the available check signals.
The example screen shows activation of critical error (HW error), generated by I/O configuration error (card 2 is not detected). It
also indicates Internal battery failure. On the other hand, it shows I/O card 1 is correct.
Incident reports and sequence of events:

The available check signals are shown in both messages.
Led and digital outputs:

The leds and digital output can be configured with any of the error signals
Status Led and critical error output:

Colour front LED and CPU relay are activated when a critical error is detected. They are not configurable.
Figure 258 Device checks screen

37.2 ERROR HANDLING PROCEDURE
The procedure will depend on the detected error and the device status.
❑ If the device is off, check that the power supply is correct. If the device is well supplied, contact the technical service
❑ If the device is on but it shows failure, return to the events screen and check which type of error it is
 If critical error, with no specific indication, is shown and the error persists after turning the unit off and on,
contact the technical service.
 If converter or reference voltage error is shown. Check the Measurements, and if they are correct, turn off and
on the unit; if the error does not disappear, contact the technical service.
 If Clock error is shown, synchronize manually. If the error persists, contact the technical service.
 If error in the setting is shown, send the settings again. If error persists contact the technical service

PROTECTION DEVICES WITH SAMPLED VALUES 
38. PROTECTION DEVICES WITH SAMPLED VALUES

These protection units receive samples of analog measurements using Sampled Values (SV) protocol, through an Ethernet network.
They can be connected to merging units or electronic transformers that follow IEC61850-9-2 or IEC61869-9 standards.
The device can communicate through two physical Ethernet interfaces RJ45 or optic fibre. PRP/HSR redundancy and Link failover
redundancy are available.
Available measures and their accuracy are determined by the accuracy of the external SV publishers. These publishers will be responsible
for capturing and sending analog measurements of the lines, generating SV frames through an Ethernet communications network. The
device will only subscribe, among all the available measures, to those that are necessary for their correct operation.
Local measures captured directly through current and / or voltage input channels are allowed. Therefore, some of the measures can be
local and some others sampled values. In order to operate correctly, the measures must be synchronized by GPS.
The following figures show, according to model encoding, the board position.
Figure 259 19” chassis and redundant communications
Figure 260 19” chassis and redundant power supply and communications

User Manual 707
38.1 DEVICE MODELS
There are multifunction protection (MD), distance (ZT), differential transformer (TD), line differential (LD) and control with measure
(CD). The detailed functions included in every family are explained in the user manual of the family.
The device model code includes three additional characters at the end of the model encoding to select the sampled values ports and
the type of measures (see chapter 1).
In these devices, the housing must be Chassis 19" 4U and I/O board 6, 7 and 8 are not available.
Figure 261 Sampled values options
CONTROL
HOUSING
ANALOG
MODEL
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
COM5
COM6
ETH1
ETH2
ETH1
ETH2
I/O 1
I/O 2
I/O 3
I/O 4
I/O 5
I/O 6
I/O 7
I/O 8
INGEPAC EF XX MODEL INGEPAC EF- - A - A - A
MSV COMMUNICATION PORT (Sample values)

E GFO ETH-1
F RJ45 ETH-2
L LC
O GFO (ETH with PRP/HSR/Switch)
P RJ45 (ETH with PRP/HSR/Switch)
- Nada
LOCAL ANALOG MEASURES

No local measures -
Configurable (All/None local) D
38.2 PUBLISHERS DECLARATION
It is necessary to have configuration files (CID) or configuration data of the SV publishers. If the subscription is made using PacFactory
configuration tool, it is mandatory to import the CID files of the publishers and receivers into the same installation.
For detailed information see the "Add-in of subscription" chapter.
38.3 SAMPLED VALUES SUBSCRIPTION
The sampled values subscription is performed according to the IEC61850 standard (edition 2).
The details of this functionality are:
❑ It is only allowed sampled values that comply with the recommended for protection and measurement, indicated in IEC61850-9-
2LE ("Implementation guideline for digital interface to instrument transformers using IEC 61850-9-2" of UCA International Users
Group) and IEC61869-9 ("Instrument transformers - Part 9: Digital interface for instrument transformers") standards, allowing the
subscription up to 8 publishers. All subscribed publishers must use the same standard. If it is subscribed to publishers with different
standards, the CID will be erased because of a non-valid configuration.
❑ After sending a configuration file, the subscription and reception remain operative until the CID has been parsed and fully
validated. Then, the new subscription settings are loaded.
❑ The subscription is made with EC61850 edition 2 and can be used with edition 1.
38.3.1 Configuration
According to IEC 61850 edition 2, the sampled values subscription uses the Inputs-ExtRef in the CID.
The Inputs section defines all external values that will be received from other computers. In this section each ExtRef element refers
to an external data and the element intAddr performs the mapping or association to a data of the device.
In the case of sampled values, the Inputs section is included in the logical node "PHSMMXU". This node has an "OpPhasor" element
associated with each analog measurement of the device. In this way, an external measurement, received through sampled values,
can be assigned to an internal measurement of the subscriber device.

User Manual 708
The CID file of an IED with subscriptions to configured SMV messages contains several sections of IEDs. The section of the IED itself
and sections of each merging unit IEDs that publishes the sampled values to which it is subscribed.
These sections of the external IEDs only contain the data model necessary to perform the subscription in order to reduce the size of
the CID file.
For more information about the sampled values subscription configuration process, refer to the configuration software tool's user
manual (energyFactorySuite/pacFactory).
38.3.2 ADD-IN of subscription

The configuration tool has an add-in that allows the relay to subscribe to the publishers of sampled values in an easy way. To access it,
it is necessary to access the 61850 configuration menu, as shown in Figure 262.
Once the 61850 configuration menu is selected, through the icon , the subscriptions configurator is accessed, valid both for
subscriptions to Gooses and to sampled values. In this case, "Sampled Values" option will be selected, as shown in Figure 263.
Configuration tool shows all the sampled values control blocks available in the installation, allowing a maximum of 8 subscriptions
(Figure 262).
It is also possible to monitor the subscriptions by using LSVS logical nodes.
"Data Binding" tab (Figure 265) shows the measurement channels used by the protection (depending on the model), and the current
and voltage measurements (TCTR and TVTR) available in the added control blocks. Each data channel of the protection can be assigned
a data, respecting the type of measurement of each channel, TCTR for intensities and TVTR for voltages.
Figure 262 Subscription menu selection

User Manual 709
Figure 263 Subscription configuration
Figure 264 Sampled values control blocks selection

User Manual 710
Figure 265 LSVS nodes assignment
Figure 2662 Channel assignment
38.3.3 Monitoring
The LSVS logical node of the data model is used to monitor subscriptions to SV messages. There are 8 instances of LSVS logical
nodes that allow to monitor up to 8 subscriptions to sampled values.
The configuration value in the LSVS logical node is the SvCBRef data (reference to the Sampled Values control block subscribed).
This reference must be filled out when doing the configuration of the subscription, additionally allows to be modified in execution
through an IEC 61850 client.
The values monitored in this logical node are:
❑ NdsCom: Subscription needs commissioning. When true, the received SV message does not correspond to the current
subscription settings. Verify that the configuration revision is correct.
❑ St: When true, the subscription is active. Otherwise it is inactive.
❑ SimSt: If true, subscribed SV messages with the simulation bit set are being received and accepted
❑ ConfRevNum: The expected configuration revision number in SV messages.
❑ RxConfRevNum: The configuration revision number received in SV messages.
All this data are mapped in the internal database of the device and can be used in logics of the device and in the local display.
The assigned Boolean signals are listed in the following table:
Table 349. LSVS internal signals

User Manual 711
LOGICAL NODE ELEMENT ASOCIATED INTERNAL SIGNAL

St (Subscription status) 24960
LSVS1 NdsCom (Needs commissioning) 24961
SimSt (Simulation status) 24962
The following table, shows the integer signals. Internally they are mapped to counters
Table 350. LSVS counters
LOGICAL NODE ELEMENT ASOCIATED INTERNAL COUNTER

ConfRevNum (ConfRev configured) 177
LSVS1
RxConfRevNum (ConfRev received) 178
LSVS2
LSVS3
LSVS4
LSVS5
LSVS6
LSVS7
LSVS8

User Manual 712
38.4 CONFIGURABLE LOCAL MEASURES
The device code selection has different options for the local measures.
In the "-" option, all measures are received through communications, using sampled values messages.
In the "D" option, depending on the binary file loaded on the analog card, or all the measurements are wired directly to the analog
card's measurement transformers (conventional wiring), or all of them are received by communications in the form of sampled
values. The options are:
❑ All measures received from local transformer.

 The signal "SV receiver device" is deactivated.
 The device´s version doesn´t include the SV board versions.
❑ All measures received from sampled values.

 The signal "SV receiver device" is activated.
 The device´s version includes the SV board versions.
38.5 SAMPLED VALUES SIMULATION
The device implements the simulation mode defined in the IEC 61850 Edition 2.
This mode allows the simulation of any SV that is present in the communication network so that two SV with the same information
data will be present at the same moment, the real one without the simulation bit active and the simulated one with the simulation bit
active. If the subscriber is in simulation mode, once it has received the first simulation SV its values will be used instead of the values of
the original SV. Therefore, if the device is in simulation mode, it still accepts 'original' SV messages, and only discards the 'original' SV
messages for those SVs which are simulated.
Simulation mode is enabled with the controllable data "Sim" included in the LPHD logical node in the GEN logical device.
In each LSVS logical node, used to monitor SV subscription, the SimSt status shows with TRUE value that subscribed SV messages with
the simulation bit set are being received and accepted.
When the subscriber is not in simulation mode (GEN/LPHD.Sim.stVal=false) the simulated SVs are ignored. The device keep on using
the "real" SV messages.
When the subscriber is in simulation mode (GEN/LPHD.Sim.stVal=true) the simulated SVs are used for operational purposes. The device
ignores the "real" SV messages after a first simulated one has been received. The corresponding LSVS.SimSt is set when the first
simulated message is received and only cleared when LPHD.Sim.stVal is set to false.
Once the device has received a simulated message for one of the subscribed SV messages, it will not process the real one until the
simulation mode of the device (LPHD.Sim.stVal) is set to false.

User Manual 713
38.6 TEST MODE FOR SAMPLED VALUES
The device implements the test mode for the SV reception.
If the device is in test mode for the SV, only the measurements received in the message of sampled values with the Quality bit of the
test mode active will be considered valid.
The device can be set to test mode for SV using the "SV test mode On" Setting, included in GEN/LPHD logical node.
Table 351. Test mode for sampled values setting

SVTestEna SV Test mode On NO/Yes enum
The signal "SV mode test Status" is activated when the device is in test mode for SV.
Table 352. Test mode for sampled values signal

SV mode test Status SVTestSt stVal
38.7 BEHAVIOUR WITH LOSS OF SYNCHRONIZATION
When a loss of synchronization is detected in the sampled value messages, the device can keep on protection or not depending on the
settings.
There is a setting that indicates how the device should operate when sampled values are not synchronized or when local
synchronization is used. It is included in the logical node GEN/LPHD.
❑ Lost SV synchronization. Indicates the behaviour of the device depending on the synchronization type received in the
sampled values messages. The available options are:
 Allow local. The device has to see the measures synchronized (Locally or globally) to consider them valid.
 Allow only global. The device has to see the measures with global synchronization to consider them valid.
Table 353. Behavior with loss of synchronization setting

Allow local (1)
SyncLostMod Lost SV synchronization enum
Allow only global (2)
A device subscribed to a single MU, even if the measures it receives are not synchronized, it treats them as measures with local
synchronization.

User Manual 714
User Manual 715
User Manual 716
Parque Tecnológico de Bizkaia • Edificio 110
48170 Zamudio, Bizkaia, Spain
Tel + 34 944 039 600
Fax +34 944 039 345
[email protected]

User Manual Ingeteam Power Technology, S.A. 717
www.ingeteam.com

Ume Ingepac Ef LD Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ume Ingepac Ef LD Eng

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ume Ingepac Ef LD Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION

© All rights reserved. No part of this publication

Ingeteam Power Technology reserves the right to

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................... 13

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

3.1.7 Saturation detector ............................................................................................................................................. 68

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

3.7.6 Minimum apparent power ................................................................................................................................ 192

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

7. BREAKER AND A HALF CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................... 341

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

12.1 GENERAL SETTINGS ............................................................................................................................................ 379

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

18.2.1 Command blocks by inconsistent parameters ................................................................................................ 432

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

24.1.1 Display structure ............................................................................................................................................. 469

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

27.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................................... 542

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

31.3.2 Implemented functions in Modbus TCP/IP ..................................................................................................... 592

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

34.2.4 Frequency: Maximun/Minimun ...................................................................................................................... 648

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Table 1 shows the features available in each of the different models.

Table 1 Functions depending on model

LD0 LD1 LD2 LD3

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

(2) In LD3 model, these units are not directional.

Available analog inputs in models

The LD0 and LD3 models only operate on a breaker.

The LD1 and LD2 models operate on two breakers.

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.2 MODEL ENCODING

EXTENDED CONTROL FUNCTIONS

POWER SUPPLY MODULE

REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATION PORTS

REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PORTS

I/O BOARD CONFIGURATION

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

Figure 1 Board position according to model encoding 19” chassis

Figure 2 Board position according to model encoding ½ 19” chassis”

Figure 5 PRP Redundancy (2LC) Figure 6 PRP Redundancy (2RJ45 + 2LC)

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.3 USER INTERFACE

The front board is equipped with:

❑ 10-digit numerical keyboard with decimal point, plus R key

Figure 7 3-contact relay and IRIG-B Figure 8 With BNC accessory

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.4.2 Power supply

Figure 9 Simple power supply

Figure 10 Double power supply

1.4.3 Input/output cards

Figure 11 Module 11 digital inputs and 9 digital outputs

Figure 12 Module 16 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

❑ Module 4 (Figure 14): Equipped with 32 digital inputs grouped as follows:

Figure 14 Module 32 inputs